AI Tipiṭaka Translations
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Vinayapiṭake
Vinayapiṭake
Pācittiya-aṭṭhakathā
Pācittiya-aṭṭhakathā
5. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ
5. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ
1. Musāvādavaggo
1. Musāvādavaggo
1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Yesaṃ navahi vaggehi, saṅgaho suppatiṭṭhito;
Of those, the collection is well-established with nine sections;
Now, this is the commentary on those Khuddakas.
1.Tattha musāvādavaggassa tāva paṭhamasikkhāpadehatthakoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Sakyānaṃ puttotisakyaputto. Buddhakāle kira sakyakulato asīti purisasahassāni pabbajiṃsu, tesaṃ so aññataroti.Vādakkhittoti ‘‘vādaṃ karissāmī’’ti evaṃ parivitakkitena vādena paravādisantikaṃ khitto pakkhitto pahito pesitoti attho. Vādamhi vā sakena cittena khitto. Yatra yatra vādo tatra tatreva sandissatītipi vādakkhitto.Avajānitvā avajānātīti attano vāde kañci dosaṃ sallakkhento ‘‘nāyaṃ mama vādo’’ti avajānitvā puna kathento kathento niddosataṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘mameva ayaṃ vādo’’ti paṭijānāti.Paṭijānitvā avajānātīti kismiñcideva vacane ānisaṃsaṃ sallakkhento ‘‘ayaṃ mama vādo’’ti paṭijānitvā puna kathento kathento tattha dosaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘nāyaṃ mama vādo’’ti avajānāti.Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicarati paṭicchādeti ajjhottharati, ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccaṃ jānitabbato’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘jātidhammato’’tiādīni vadati. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘etassa paṭicchādanahetuṃ aññaṃ bahuṃ kathetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – yaṃ taṃ paṭijānanañca avajānanañca, tassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ ‘‘ko āha, kiṃ āha, kismiṃ āhā’’ti evamādi bahuṃ bhāsatīti. Puna mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘avajānitvā paṭijānanto paṭijānitvā avajānanto eva ca aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratī’’ti vuttaṃ.Sampajānamusā bhāsatīti jānanto musā bhāsati.Saṅketaṃ katvā visaṃvādetīti purebhattādīsu ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma kāle asukasmiṃ nāma padese vādo hotū’’ti saṅketaṃ katvā saṅketato pure vā pacchā vā gantvā ‘‘passatha bho, titthiyā na āgatā parājitā’’ti pakkamati.
1. In that, regarding the first sikkhāpada of the Musāvāda section, Hatthaka is the name of that thera. Sakyaputto means "son of the Sakyans." It is said that in the Buddha's time, eighty thousand men from the Sakyan clan went forth; he was one of them. Vādakkhitto means "thrown by the vāda," that is, sent, dispatched, directed to the opponent in debate by a vāda contemplated with the thought, "I will engage in debate." Or, thrown by one's own mind in debate. Or, "he is evident wherever there is debate"; hence, vādakkhitto. Avajānitvā avajānātī means "not knowing, he knows"; perceiving some fault in his own vāda, thinking, "this is not my vāda," not knowing, he then speaks, and repeatedly speaking, perceiving its faultlessness, he acknowledges, "this is indeed my vāda." Paṭijānitvā avajānātī means "acknowledging, he does not know"; perceiving some benefit in a certain statement, thinking, "this is my vāda," acknowledging, he then speaks, and repeatedly speaking, perceiving a fault in it, he does not know, thinking, "this is not my vāda." Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratī means "with one thing, he covers another"; he covers, conceals, overspreads one cause with another, saying, "form is impermanent because it is to be known," and then saying "because it is subject to arising," and so on. But in the Kurundi, it is said, "because of the covering of that, he speaks much else." Here, the meaning is this: to cover up that acknowledging and not-knowing, he speaks much, such as "who said it, what did he say, in what context did he say it?" Furthermore, in the Mahā-aṭṭhakathā, it is said, "not knowing, he acknowledges; acknowledging, he does not know; thus, he covers one thing with another." Sampajānamusā bhāsatī means "knowing, he speaks falsehood." Saṅketaṃ katvā visaṃvādetī means "having made an agreement, he breaks it"; having made an agreement, such as "let there be a debate at such and such a time, in such and such a place" regarding before the meal, etc., going before or after the agreed time, he departs, saying, "behold, the Titthiyas have not come; they are defeated."
2.Sampajānamusāvādeti jānitvā jānantassa ca musā bhaṇane.
2. Sampajānamusāvāde means "in speaking falsehood knowingly, and to one who knows."
3.Visaṃvādanapurekkhārassāti visaṃvādanacittaṃ purato katvā vadantassa.Vācāti micchāvācāpariyāpannavacanasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā.Girāti tāya cetanāya samuṭṭhāpitasaddaṃ dasseti.Byappathoti vacanapatho; vācāyeva hi aññesampi diṭṭhānugatimāpajjantānaṃ pathabhūtato byappathoti vuccati.Vacībhedoti vacīsaññitāya vācāya bhedo; pabhedagatā vācā eva evaṃ vuccati. Vācasikā viññattītivacīviññatti. Evaṃ paṭhamapadena suddhacetanā, majjhe tīhi taṃsamuṭṭhāpitasaddasahitā cetanā, ante ekena viññattisahitā cetanā ‘‘kathitā’’ti veditabbā.Anariyavohārāti anariyānaṃ bālaputhujjanānaṃ vohārā.
3. Visaṃvādanapurekkhārassā means "to one who speaks having placed the intention of deception in front." Vācā means "the volition that gives rise to speech comprised of false speech." Girā indicates the sound produced by that volition. Byappatho means "the path of speech"; for indeed, speech is called byappatho because it is the path for others who attain conformity to what is seen. Vacībhedo means "division of speech" consisting of verbal designation; speech that has gone to the state of division is called thus. Vacīviññatti means "verbal intimation." Thus, it should be understood that with the first word, pure volition; in the middle, with three, volition together with the sound produced by it; at the end, with one, volition together with intimation, are "spoken." Anariyavohārā means "the expressions of the ignoble," of childish worldlings.
‘‘adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me’’tiādimāha. Tattha adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ meti evaṃ vadato vacanaṃ taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā vā cetanā eko anariyavohāroti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Apicettha cakkhuvasena aggahitārammaṇaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ, sotavasena aggahitaṃ asutaṃ, ghānādivasena munitvā tīhi indriyehi ekābaddhaṃ viya katvā patvā aggahitaṃ amutaṃ, aññatra pañcahi indriyehi suddhena viññāṇeneva aggahitaṃ aviññātanti veditabbaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana‘‘adiṭṭhaṃ nāma na cakkhunā diṭṭha’’nti evaṃ oḷārikeneva nayena desanā katāti. Diṭṭhādīsu ca attanāpi parenapi diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhameva. Evaṃ sutamutaviññātānīti ayameko pariyāyo. Aparo nayo yaṃ attanā diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhameva taṃ. Esa nayo sutādīsu. Yaṃ pana parena diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ attanā sutaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ mutādīnipi.
He says, "‘adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me’" and so on. Therein, the statement of one saying "adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me" and the volition that gives rise to it is one ignoble expression; the meaning should be understood in this way. Moreover, here, adiṭṭhaṃ is an object not grasped by way of the eye; asutaṃ is not grasped by way of the ear; amutaṃ is not perceived by way of the nose, etc.; not grasped, having made it as if bound together by three senses, having attained it; aviññātaṃ is not known, not grasped elsewhere by the pure consciousness alone with the five senses. But in the Pāli, the teaching is given in a rather gross way, "‘adiṭṭhaṃ nāma na cakkhunā diṭṭha’" means "‘unseen’ means not seen by the eye." And among the seen, etc., what is seen by oneself or by another is indeed seen. Thus, sutamutaññātāni; this is one way. Another way: what is seen by oneself is indeed seen. This way applies to the heard, etc. But what is seen by another stands in the place of what is heard by oneself. Thus, with the smelled, etc.
4.Idāni tesaṃ anariyavohārānaṃ vasena āpattiṃ āropetvā dassento‘‘tīhākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tassattho ‘‘tīhi ākārehi paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjinti sampajānamusā bhaṇantassa āpatti pārājikassā’’ti evamādicatutthapārājikapāḷivaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’nti idha ‘‘adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me’’ti, tattha ca ‘‘āpatti pārājikassā’’ti ‘‘idha āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti evaṃ vatthumatte āpattimatte ca viseso, sesaṃ ekalakkhaṇamevāti.
4. Now, showing the offense by imposing it according to those ignoble expressions, he says, "‘tīhākārehi’" and so on. Its meaning should be understood in the same way as said in the explanation of the fourth pārājika Pāli, such as "‘for one who knowingly speaks falsehood, thinking ‘I have attained the first jhāna,’ the offense is a pārājika.’" Only, there, "‘I have attained the first jhāna,’" here "‘adiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhaṃ me,’" and there "‘the offense is a pārājika,’" here "‘the offense is a pācittiya,’" thus, there is a difference only in the object and in the offense; the rest is of the same characteristic.
9.Tīhākārehi diṭṭhe vematikotiādīnampi attho ‘‘diṭṭhassa hoti pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpajjanto diṭṭhe vematiko’’ti evamādiduṭṭhadosapāḷivaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Pāḷimattameva hi ettha viseso, atthe pana satheravāde kiñci nānākaraṇaṃ natthi.
9. The meaning of Tīhākārehi diṭṭhe vematiko and so on, should also be understood in the same way as said in the explanation of the Duṭṭhadosa Pāli, such as "‘for one who is doubtful about what is seen, while engaging in a pārājika thing, there is a pārājika.’" Only the Pāli is different here; but in meaning, there is no difference at all in the Satheravāda.
11.Sahasā bhaṇatīti avīmaṃsitvā anupadhāretvā vā vegena diṭṭhampi ‘‘adiṭṭhaṃ me’’ti bhaṇati.Aññaṃ bhaṇissāmīti aññaṃ bhaṇatīti mandattā jaḷattā pakkhalanto ‘‘cīvara’’nti vattabbe ‘‘cīra’’nti ādiṃ bhaṇati. Yo pana sāmaṇerena ‘‘api bhante mayhaṃ upajjhāyaṃ passitthā’’ti vutto keḷiṃ kurumāno ‘‘tava upajjhāyo dārusakaṭaṃ yojetvā gato bhavissatī’’ti vā siṅgālasaddaṃ sutvā ‘‘kassāyaṃ bhante saddo’’ti vutto ‘‘mātuyā te yānena gacchantiyā kaddame laggacakkaṃ uddharantānaṃ ayaṃ saddo’’ti vā evaṃ neva davā na ravā aññaṃ bhaṇati, so āpattiṃ āpajjatiyeva. Aññā pūraṇakathā nāma hoti, eko gāme thokaṃ telaṃ labhitvā vihāraṃ āgato sāmaṇeraṃ bhaṇati – ‘‘tvaṃ ajja kuhiṃ gato, gāmo ekatelo ahosī’’ti vā pacchikāya ṭhapitaṃ pūvakhaṇḍaṃ labhitvā ‘‘ajja gāme pacchikāhi pūve cāresu’’nti vā, ayaṃ musāvādova hoti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
11. Sahasā bhaṇatī means "without considering, without examining, he speaks hastily, saying even what is seen, ‘I have not seen it.’" Aññaṃ bhaṇissāmīti aññaṃ bhaṇatī means "intending to say one thing, he says another," slipping up due to dullness, foolishness, he says "cīra" instead of "cīvara," and so on. But if, when a sāmaṇera, having been asked, "Venerable sir, did you see my preceptor?" and making a joke, says, "your preceptor must have gone harnessing a wooden cart," or hearing the sound of a jackal, having been asked, "Venerable sir, what is that sound?" says, "that is the sound of your mother going in a vehicle, pulling out a wheel stuck in the mud," thus he speaks something else, neither to harm nor to sound off, he incurs an offense. The rest is called a pūraṇakathā. For example, one gains a little oil in a village and comes to the monastery and says to a sāmaṇera— "Today where did you go, the village was all oil" or having obtained a piece of cake placed in a basket— "Today cakes were moving around the village from baskets", this is falsehood. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
It arises from three sources: from body and mind, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; it is kiriya, saññāvimokkha, sacittaka, lokavajja, kāyakamma, vacīkamma, akusalacitta, and has three kinds of feeling.
Musāvādasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The Musāvāda Sikkhāpada, the first.
2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Omasavādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12.Dutiyasikkhāpadeomasantīti ovijjhanti.Khuṃsentīti akkosanti.Vambhentīti padhaṃsenti.
12. In the second sikkhāpada, omasantī means "they despise." Khuṃsentī means "they revile." Vambhentī means "they disparage."
13.Bhūtapubbanti idaṃ vatthuṃ bhagavā omasavādagarahaṇatthaṃ āhari.Nandivisālo nāmāti nandīti tassa balībaddassa nāmaṃ, visāṇāni panassa visālāni, tasmā‘‘nandivisālo’’ti vuccati. Bodhisatto tena samayena nandivisālo nāma hoti. Brāhmaṇo taṃ yāgubhattādīhi ativiya posesi. Atha so brāhmaṇaṃ anukampamāno‘‘gaccha tva’’ntiādimāha.Tattheva aṭṭhāsīti ahetukapaṭisandhikālepi parakhuṃsanaṃ amanāpatoyeva paccesi, tasmā brāhmaṇassa dosaṃ dassetukāmo aṭṭhāsi.Sakaṭasataṃ atibaddhaṃ pavaṭṭesīti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetvā heṭṭhārukkhe datvā ekābaddhaṃ katvā muggamāsavālukādīhi puṇṇaṃ sakaṭasataṃ pavaṭṭento, kiñcāpi pubbe patiṭṭhitārappadesaṃ puna are patte pavaṭṭitaṃ hoti, bodhisatto pana purimasakaṭena patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne pacchimasakaṭaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ sakaṭasatappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ pavaṭṭesi. Bodhisattānañhi sithilakaraṇaṃ nāma natthi.Tena cattamano ahūti tena brāhmaṇassa dhanalābhena attano kammena ca so nandivisālo attamano ahosi.
13. Bhūtapubba means "formerly"; the Blessed One brought forth this object for the purpose of censuring abusive speech. Nandivisālo nāmā means "named Nandivisāla"; Nandī is the name of that bull, but his horns were large, therefore he is called "Nandivisālo." The Bodhisatta at that time was named Nandivisāla. The Brahmin nourished him excessively with rice gruel and so on. Then, he, feeling compassion for the Brahmin, said, "‘gaccha tva’" and so on. Tattheva aṭṭhāsī means "he stood right there"; even at the time of causeless rebirth, he rejected being reviled by another as unpleasant, therefore, wishing to show the fault of the Brahmin, he stood there. Sakaṭasataṃ atibaddhaṃ pavaṭṭesī means "he caused a hundred carts bound together to proceed"; having placed them in a row, giving them to the lower trees, having made them bound together, causing a hundred carts full of muggamāsa, sand, and so on to proceed, although he formerly caused the area of established support to proceed again when the spokes reached, the Bodhisatta, however, caused an area the size of a hundred carts to proceed, in order to establish the later cart in the place established by the former cart. For there is no loosening for Bodhisattas. Tena cattamano ahū means "he was delighted by that"; by that gain of wealth for the Brahmin and by his own action, that Nandivisāla was delighted in his mind.
15.Akkosenapīti ettha pana yasmā parato ‘‘dve akkosā – hīno ca akkoso ukkaṭṭho ca akkoso’’ti vibhajitukāmo, tasmā yathā pubbe ‘‘hīnenapi akkosena khuṃsentī’’ti vuttaṃ; evaṃ avatvā ‘‘akkosena’’ iccevamāha.Venajātīti tacchakajāti; veṇukārajātītipi vadanti.Nesādajātīti migaluddakādijāti.
15. Akkosenapī means "even by reviling"; here, however, since he wishes to distinguish later "there are two kinds of reviling—base reviling and severe reviling," therefore, as it was said earlier "they revile even with base reviling," he says thus, without saying "akkosena." Venajātī means "a bamboo worker's caste"; they also say veṇukārajātī. Nesādajātī means "a hunter's caste," such as trappers of deer, etc.
Rathakārajātīti cammakārajāti.Pukkusajātīti pupphachaḍḍakajāti.Avakaṇṇakādidāsānaṃ nāmaṃ hoti; tasmā hīnaṃ.Oññātanti avaññātaṃ; ‘‘uññāta’’ntipi paṭhanti.Avaññātanti vambhetvā ñātaṃ.Hīḷitanti jigucchitaṃ.Paribhūtanti kimetenātiti paribhavakataṃ.Acittīkatanti na garukataṃ.
Rathakārajātī means "a chariot maker's caste," a leather worker's caste. Pukkusajātī means "a refuse sweeper's caste." Avakaṇṇakādi is the name of slaves; therefore, it is base. Oññāta means "despised"; some read "uññāta." Avaññāta means "known by disparaging." Hīḷita means "disgusted." Paribhūta means "treated with contempt, thinking, 'what is this good for?'" Acittīkata means "not respected."
Koṭṭhakakammanti tacchakakammaṃ.Muddāti hatthamuddāgaṇanā.Gaṇanāti acchiddakādiavasesagaṇanā.Lekhāti akkharalekhā. Madhumehābādho vedanāya abhāvato ‘‘ukkaṭṭho’’ti vutto.Pāṭikaṅkhāti icchitabbā.Yakārena vā bhakārena vāti yakārabhakāre yojetvā yo akkoso.Kāṭakoṭacikāya vāti‘‘kāṭa’’nti purisanimittaṃ,‘‘koṭacikā’’ti itthinimittaṃ; etehi vā yo akkoso, eso hīno nāma akkosoti.
Koṭṭhakakamma means "carpentry work." Muddā means "counting with hand gestures." Gaṇanā means "counting what remains after flaws," etc. Lekhā means "written letters." Madhumehābādho is called "severe" because of the absence of feeling. Pāṭikaṅkhā means "to be desired." Yakārena vā bhakārena vā means "reviling with the letters ya or bha joined together." Kāṭakoṭacikāya vā—"kāṭa" means "male genitals," "koṭacikā" means "female genitals"; or reviling with these, this is called base reviling.
16.Idāni tesaṃ jātiādīnaṃ pabhedavasena āpattiṃ āropetvā dassento‘‘upasampanno upasampanna’’ntiādimāha. Tatthakhuṃsetukāmo vambhetukāmo maṅkukattukāmoti akkositukāmo padhaṃsitukāmo garahitukāmo nittejaṃ kattukāmoti attho.Hīnena hīnanti hīnena jātivacanena hīnajātikaṃ. Etena upāyena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
16. Now, showing the offense by imposing it according to the divisions of caste, etc., he says, "‘upasampanno upasampanna’" and so on. Therein, khuṃsetukāmo vambhetukāmo maṅkukattukāmo means "wishing to revile, wishing to disparage, wishing to despise, wishing to make spiritless." Hīnena hīna means "a person of low caste with a word of low caste." In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances.
Ettha ca hīnena hīnaṃ vadanto kiñcāpi saccaṃ vadati, omasitukāmatāya panassa vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhena hīnaṃ vadanto ca kiñcāpi alikaṃ bhaṇati, omasitukāmatāya pana imināva sikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ āpajjati, na purimena. Yopi ‘‘aticaṇḍālosi, atibrāhmaṇosi, duṭṭhacaṇḍālosi, duṭṭhabrāhmaṇosī’’tiādīni vadati, sopi āpattiyā kāretabbo.
And here, although one speaks the truth while speaking of a low person with a low thing, for him, due to the intention to despise, for each utterance, there is a pācittiya. And for one who speaks a low person with a severe thing, although he speaks falsely, he incurs a pācittiya with this very sikkhāpada, not with the former, due to the intention to despise. And he who says, "you are extremely caṇḍāla, you are extremely brahmin, you are a wicked caṇḍāla, you are a wicked brahmin," and so on, he too should be dealt with according to the offense.
26.Santiidhekacceti vāre pana pariharitvā vuttabhāvena dukkaṭaṃ. Eseva nayoye nūna…pe… na mayanti vāresupi. Anupasampanne pana catūsupi vāresu dukkaṭameva. Corosi gaṇṭhibhedakosītiādivacanehi pana upasampannepi anupampannepi sabbavāresu dukkaṭameva. Davakamyatāya pana upasampannepi anupasampannepi sabbavāresu dubbhāsitaṃ. Davakamyatā nāma keḷihasādhippāyatā. Imasmiñca sikkhāpade ṭhapetvā bhikkhuṃ bhikkhunīādayo sabbasattā anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitāti veditabbā.
26. Santiidhekacce means "there are some here"; in the case of warding off, there is a dukkata due to having been said. The same method applies in the cases of ye nūna…pe… na maya. But in the case of one not fully ordained, in all four cases, it is only a dukkata. But by statements such as "you are a thief, a purse-cutter," even for one fully ordained and not fully ordained, in all cases, it is only a dukkata. But due to the intention to joke, even for one fully ordained and not fully ordained, in all cases, there is a dubbhāsita. Davakamyatā is the intention of jesting or joking. And in this sikkhāpada, having excluded a bhikkhu, all beings beginning with a bhikkhunī should be understood as standing in the place of one not fully ordained.
35.Atthapurekkhārassātiādīsu pāḷiyā atthaṃ vaṇṇayantoatthapurekkhāro;pāḷiṃ vācentodhammapurekkhāro;anusiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvā ‘‘idānipi caṇḍālosi, pāpaṃ mā akāsi, mā tamo tamaparāyaṇo ahosī’’tiādinā nayena kathentoanusāsanīpurekkhāronāmāti veditabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
35. Explaining the meaning of the Pāli in Atthapurekkhārassā and so on, atthapurekkhāro means "having the aim of the meaning"; dhammapurekkhāro means "having the aim of the Dhamma" while reciting the Pāli; anusāsanīpurekkhāro should be understood as "having the aim of instruction" while standing in instruction and speaking in a way such as "even now you are a caṇḍāla, do not do evil, do not be one whose darkness is devoted to darkness," and so on. The rest is straightforward.
Dubbhāsitāpattipanettha vācācittato samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedanaṃ sukhā ca majjhattā cāti.
Here, the Dubbhāsita offense arises from verbal consciousness; it is kiriya, saññāvimokkha, sacittaka, akusalacitta, and has two kinds of feeling: pleasure and equanimity.
Omasavādasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Omasavāda Sikkhāpada, the second.
3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Pesuññasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
36.Tatiyasikkhāpade –bhaṇḍanajātānanti sañjātabhaṇḍanānaṃ.Bhaṇḍananti kalahassa pubbabhāgo, ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca idaṃ kataṃ; evaṃ vutte evaṃ vakkhāmā’’tiādikaṃ sakasakapakkhe sammantanaṃ.Kalahoti āpattigāmiko kāyavācāvītikkamo.Vivādoti viggāhikakathā. Taṃ vivādaṃ āpannānaṃvivādāpannānaṃ.Pesuññanti pisuṇavācaṃ, piyabhāvassa suññakaraṇavācanti vuttaṃ hoti.
36. In the third sikkhāpada—bhaṇḍanajātāna means "of those in whom quarreling has arisen." Bhaṇḍana means "the preliminary part of a quarrel," the agreement in one's own party, such as "this and this was done by this and this; when thus spoken, we will say thus." Kalaho means "the transgression of body and speech that leads to an offense." Vivādo means "contentious talk." Vivādāpannānaṃ means "of those who have entered into that dispute." Pesuñña means "divisive speech," it is said to be "speech that makes the state of affection empty."
37.Bhikkhupesuññeti bhikkhūnaṃ pesuññe; bhikkhuto sutvā bhikkhunā bhikkhussa upasaṃhaṭapesuññeti attho.
37. Bhikkhupesuññe means "in divisiveness among bhikkhus"; having heard from a bhikkhu, divisiveness brought together by a bhikkhunī to a bhikkhu is the meaning.
38.Dvīhākārehīti dvīhi kāraṇehi.Piyakamyassa vāti ‘‘evaṃ ahaṃ etassa piyo bhavissāmī’’ti attano piyabhāvaṃ patthayamānassa vā.Bhedādhippāyassa vāti ‘‘evamayaṃ etena saddhiṃ bhijjissatī’’ti parassa parena bhedaṃ icchantassa vā.Jātitopītiādi sabbaṃ purimasikkhāpade vuttanayameva. Idhāpi bhikkhuniṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbe anupasampannā nāma.
38. Dvīhākārehīti means by two reasons. Piyakamyassa vā means, desiring one's own state of being liked, thinking, "Thus, I will be liked by him." Bhedādhippāyassa vā means, desiring the split of another with another, thinking, "Thus, this one will split with him." Jātitopītiādi, and all the rest, is in the same manner as stated in the previous training rule. Here also, beginning with a bhikkhuni, all are called unordained.
Na piyakamyassa na bhedādhippāyassāti ekaṃ akkosantaṃ ekañca khamantaṃ disvā ‘‘aho nillajjo, īdisampi nāma bhavantaṃ puna vattabbaṃ maññissatī’’ti evaṃ kevalaṃ pāpagarahitāya bhaṇantassa anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Na piyakamyassa na bhedādhippāyassāti if, seeing one person scolding and another tolerating, one speaks merely out of disgust for evil, saying, "Alas, shameless one, would he consider speaking to you again like this?", there is no offense. The rest is easy to understand. It arises from three sources (tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): from body and mind, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; it is an action (kiriyaṃ), it involves no release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), it is intentional (sacittakaṃ), it is a fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), it is a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), it is a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), it is an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and it is felt in three ways (tivedananti).
Pesuññasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
Pesuññasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Padasodhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
44.Catutthasikkhāpade –appatissāti appatissavā. Upāsakāti vutte vacanampi na sotukāmā; anādarāti attho. Appatissayā vā anīcavuttinoti attho.Asabhāgavuttikāti visabhāgajīvikā, yathā bhikkhūsu vattitabbaṃ; evaṃ appavattavuttinoti attho.
44. In the fourth training rule – appatissāti means not listening. It means unwilling to even hear a word when an upāsaka speaks; it means disrespectful. Or, appatissayā means behaving without reverence. Asabhāgavuttikāti means having a dissimilar livelihood, meaning behaving in a way that one should not behave among bhikkhus.
45.Padaso dhammaṃ vāceyyāti ekato padaṃ padaṃ dhammaṃ vāceyya; koṭṭhāsaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ vāceyyāti attho. Yasmā pana taṃ koṭṭhāsanāmakaṃ padaṃ catubbidhaṃ hoti, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘padaṃ anupadaṃ anvakkharaṃ anubyañjana’’nti padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatthapadanti eko gāthāpādo adhippeto.Anupadanti dutiyapādo.Anvakkharanti ekekamakkharaṃ.Anubyañjananti purimabyañjanena sadisaṃ pacchābyañjanaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci vā ekamakkharaṃ anvakkharaṃ, akkharasamūho anubyañjanaṃ, akkharānubyañjanasamūho padaṃ. Paṭhamapadaṃ padameva, dutiyaṃ anupadanti evamettha nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
45. Padaso dhammaṃ vāceyyāti means he should recite the Dhamma word by word; it means he should recite section by section. However, since that word called "section" is of four kinds, therefore, to show that, the division of words is stated as "padaṃ anupadaṃ anvakkharaṃ anubyañjanaṃ". There, padaṃ intends one line of a verse. Anupadaṃ is the second line. Anvakkharaṃ is letter by letter. Anubyañjanaṃ is a subsequent letter similar to the previous letter. Or, whatever single letter is anvakkharaṃ, a group of letters is anubyañjanaṃ, and a group of letters and anubyañjanaṃ is padaṃ. The first padaṃ is just padaṃ, the second is anupadaṃ; thus, the distinction should be understood here.
padaṃ nāma ekato paṭṭhapetvā ekato osāpentīti gāthābandhaṃ dhammaṃ vācento ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti ekamekaṃ padaṃ sāmaṇerena saddhiṃ ekato ārabhitvā ekatoyeva niṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ vācentassa padagaṇanāya pācittiyā veditabbā.Anupadaṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ekato osāpentīti therena ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti vutte sāmaṇero taṃ padaṃ apāpuṇitvā ‘‘manoseṭṭhā manomayā’’ti dutiyapadaṃ ekato bhaṇati, ime pāṭekkaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ekato osāpenti nāma. Evaṃ vācentassāpi anupadagaṇanāya pācittiyā.Anvakkharaṃ nāma rūpaṃ aniccantivuccamāno ‘‘rū’’ti opātetīti ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccanti bhaṇa sāmaṇerā’’ti vuccamāno rūkāramattameva ekato vatvā tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ vācentassāpi anvakkharagaṇanāya pācittiyā. Gāthābandhepi ca esa nayo labbhatiyeva.Anubyañjanaṃ nāma rūpaṃ aniccanti vuccamāno vedanā aniccāti saddaṃ nicchāretīti ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, vedanā aniccā’’ti imaṃ suttaṃ vācayamāno therena ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’nti vuccamāno sāmaṇero sīghapaññatāya ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti imaṃ aniccapadaṃ therassa ‘‘rūpaṃ anicca’’nti etena aniccapadena saddhiṃ ekato bhaṇanto vācaṃ nicchāreti. Evaṃ vācentassāpi anubyañjanagaṇanāya pācittiyā. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – imesu padādīsu yaṃ yaṃ ekato bhaṇati tena tena āpattiṃ āpajjatīti.
padaṃ nāma ekato paṭṭhapetvā ekato osāpentīti while reciting the Dhamma in verse form, he begins and ends each word together with the novice, such as "manopubbaṅgamā dhammā". A Pācittiya offense should be understood for reciting in this way, counting by pada. Anupadaṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ekato osāpentīti when the elder says "manopubbaṅgamā dhammā", the novice, not reaching that pada, recites the second pada "manoseṭṭhā manomayā" together; these are called beginning separately and ending together. A Pācittiya offense also occurs for reciting in this way, counting by anupada. Anvakkharaṃ nāma rūpaṃ aniccanti vuccamāno ‘‘rū’’ti opātetīti when being told, "Say 'rūpaṃ aniccanti', novice," he utters only the syllable "rū" together and stops. A Pācittiya offense also occurs for reciting in this way, counting by anvakkhara. This method can certainly be found even in verse compositions. Anubyañjanaṃ nāma rūpaṃ aniccanti vuccamāno vedanā aniccāti saddaṃ nicchāretīti while reciting this sutta, "rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, vedanā aniccā", when the elder says "rūpaṃ aniccaṃ", the novice, due to quick wisdom, utters the word "vedanā anicca" together with the elder's word "rūpaṃ anicca", thus emitting speech. A Pācittiya offense also occurs for reciting in this way, counting by anubyañjana. Here is a summary of it: in these pada, etc., he incurs an offense by whatever he recites together.
Buddhabhāsitoti sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ dhammapadaṃ cariyāpiṭakaṃ udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ jātakaṃ suttanipāto vimānavatthu petavatthu brahmajālādīni ca suttāni.Sāvakabhāsitoti catuparisapariyāpannehi sāvakehi bhāsito anaṅgaṇasammādiṭṭhianumānasuttacuḷavedallamahāvedallādiko.Isibhāsitoti bāhiraparibbājakehi bhāsito sakalo paribbājakavaggo, bāvariyassa antevāsikānaṃ soḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ pucchāti evamādi.Devatābhāsitoti devatāhi bhāsito; so devatāsaṃyuttadevaputtasaṃyuttamārasaṃyuttabrahmasaṃyuttasakkasaṃyuttādivasena veditabbo.
Buddhabhāsitoti the entire Vinaya Piṭaka, Abhidhamma Piṭaka, Dhammapada, Cariyāpiṭaka, Udāna, Itivuttaka, Jātaka, Suttanipāta, Vimānavatthu, Petavatthu, and suttas such as Brahmajāla. Sāvakabhāsitoti that spoken by disciples who have attained the four assemblies, such as Anaṅgaṇasutta, Sammādiṭṭhīsutta, Anumānasutta, Cūḷavedallasutta, Mahāvedallasutta. Isibhāsitoti that spoken by outside wanderers, the entire Paribbājaka Vagga, the questions of the sixteen Brahmins who were disciples of Bāvari, and so on. Devatābhāsitoti that spoken by deities; it should be understood as Devatāsaṃyutta, Devaputtasaṃyutta, Mārasaṃyutta, Brahmasaṃyutta, Sakkasaṃyutta, and so on.
Atthūpasañhitoti aṭṭhakathānissito.Dhammūpasañhitoti pāḷinissito; ubhayenāpi vivaṭṭūpanissitameva vadati. Kiñcāpi vivaṭṭūpanissitaṃ vadati, tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhadhammaṃyeva pana padaso vācentassa āpatti. Vivaṭṭūpanissitepi nānābhāsāvasena gāthāsilokabandhādīhi abhisaṅkhate anāpatti. Tisso saṅgītiyo anāruḷhepi kulumbasuttaṃ rājovādasuttaṃ tikkhindriyaṃ catuparivaṭṭaṃ nandopanandanti īdise āpattiyeva. Apalāladamanampi vuttaṃ, mahāpaccariyampana paṭisiddhaṃ. Meṇḍakamilindapañhesu therassa sakapaṭibhāne anāpatti, yaṃ rañño saññāpanatthaṃ āharitvā vuttaṃ, tattha āpatti. Vaṇṇapiṭakaaṅgulimālapiṭakaraṭṭhapālagaajataāḷavakagajjitaguḷhamaggaguḷhavessantaraguḷhavinayavedallapiṭakāni pana abuddhavacanāniyevāti vuttaṃ. Sīlūpadeso nāma dhammasenāpatinā vuttoti vadanti, tasmiṃ āpattiyeva. Aññānipi maggakathāārammaṇakathābuddhikadaṇḍaka ñāṇavatthuasubhakathādīni atthi, tesu sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā vibhattā, dhutaṅgapañhe paṭipadā vibhattā; tasmā tesu āpattīti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana saṅgītiṃ anāruḷhesu rājovādatikkhindriyacatuparivaṭṭanandopanandakulumbasuttesuyeva āpattīti vatvā avasesesu yaṃ buddhavacanato āharitvā vuttaṃ, tadeva āpattivatthu hoti, na itaranti ayamattho pariggahito.
Atthūpasañhitoti associated with the commentary (aṭṭhakathā). Dhammūpasañhitoti associated with the Pali; he speaks relying on both the explicit and the implicit meanings. Although he speaks relying on the explicit and implicit meanings, an offense occurs for reciting aloud the Dhamma established by the three councils word by word. Even in what relies on explicit meaning, there is no offense in what is composed in various languages, such as verses and poetic compositions. Even in what is not established by the three councils, an offense occurs in such texts as Kulumbasutta, Rājovādasutta, Tikkhindriya, Catuparivaṭṭa, and Nandopananda. Apalāladamana is also mentioned, but Mahāpaccariya is prohibited. In the questions of Meṇḍaka and Milinda, there is no offense for the elder's own wit, but there is an offense for what is brought up and said to convince the king. It is said that the Vaṇṇapiṭaka, Aṅgulimālapiṭaka, Raṭṭhapālagaajataāḷavakagajjita, Guḷhamagga, Guḷhavessantara, and Guḷhavinayavedallapiṭakas are definitely not the words of the Buddha. They say that the Sīlūpadesa was spoken by Dhammasenāpati; there is definitely an offense in that. There are also other things such as Maggakathā, Ārammaṇakathā, Buddhikadaṇḍaka, Ñāṇavatthu, Asubhakathā, etc., in which the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment are distinguished, and the practice is distinguished in the Dhutaṅga question; therefore, it is said that there is an offense in those. However, in Mahāpaccariya and others that are not established by the council, it is said that an offense occurs only in Rājovāda, Tikkhindriya, Catuparivaṭṭa, Nandopananda, and Kulumbasutta, and in the remaining ones, only what is brought and said from the Buddha's words is the basis for an offense, not the rest; this is the meaning that is accepted.
48.Ekato uddisāpentoti anupasampannena saddhiṃ ekato uddesaṃ gaṇhantopi ekato vadati anāpattīti attho.
48. Ekato uddisāpentoti means even if he recites the lesson together with an unordained person, he speaks together, meaning there is no offense.
Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – upasampanno ca anupasampanno ca nisīditvā uddisāpenti. Ācariyo nisinnānaṃ bhaṇāmīti tehi saddhiṃ ekato vadati, ācariyassa āpatti. Anupasampannena saddhiṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti. Dvepi ṭhitā gaṇhanti, eseva nayo. Daharabhikkhu nisinno, sāmaṇero ṭhito, nisinnassa bhaṇāmīti bhaṇato anāpatti. Sace daharo tiṭṭhati, itaro nisīdati, ṭhitassa bhaṇāmīti bhaṇatopi anāpatti. Sace bahūnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ antare eko sāmaṇero nisinno hoti, tasmiṃ nisinne padaso dhammaṃ vācentassa ācariyassa acittakāpatti. Sace sāmaṇero upacāraṃ muñcitvā ṭhito vā nisinno vā hoti, yesaṃ vāceti, tesu apariyāpannattā ekena disābhāgena palāyanakaganthaṃ nāma gaṇhātīti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tasmā anāpatti. Ekato sajjhāyaṃ karontopi anupasampannena saddhiṃ upasampanno ekato sajjhāyaṃ karonto tena saddhiṃyeva bhaṇati, anāpatti. Anupasampannassa santike uddesaṃ gaṇhantassapi tena saddhiṃ ekato bhaṇantassa anāpatti. Ayampi hi ekato sajjhāyaṃ karoticceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
Here is the judgment in this matter: an ordained person and an unordained person sit and recite the lesson. The teacher thinks, "I will recite to those who are sitting," and speaks together with them; an offense occurs for the teacher. There is no offense for taking it together with an unordained person. Both stand and take it together; this is the same method. A young bhikkhu is sitting, and a novice is standing; there is no offense for reciting thinking, "I will recite to the one who is sitting." If the young one stands and the other sits, there is also no offense for reciting thinking, "I will recite to the one who is standing." If a novice is sitting among many bhikkhus, a non-intentional offense occurs for the teacher who recites the Dhamma word by word to the one who is sitting. If the novice, abandoning respectful behavior, is standing or sitting, because he is not included among those to whom he recites, it is counted as if he is taking a "running-away lesson" in one direction, therefore there is no offense. Even when doing recitation together, an ordained person doing recitation together with an unordained person speaks together with him; there is no offense. There is also no offense for taking a lesson in the presence of an unordained person, speaking together with him. This is also counted as doing recitation together.
Yebhuyyena paguṇaṃ ganthaṃ bhaṇantaṃ opātetīti sace ekagāthāya eko pādo na āgacchati, sesaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ yebhuyyena paguṇagantho nāma. Etena nayena suttepi veditabbo. Taṃ opātentassa evaṃ bhaṇāhīti ekatopi bhaṇantassa anāpatti.Osārentaṃ opātetīti suttaṃ uccārentaṃ parisamajjhe parisaṅkamānaṃ evaṃ vadehīti tena saddhiṃ ekatopi vadantassa anāpatti. Yaṃ pana mahāpaccariyādīsu ‘‘mayā saddhiṃ mā vadā’’ti vutto yadi vadati, ‘‘anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ natthi, natthibhāvoyeva cassa yutto. Kasmā? Kiriyasamuṭṭhānattā. Itarathā hi kiriyākiriyaṃ bhaveyya. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
Yebhuyyena paguṇaṃ ganthaṃ bhaṇantaṃ opātetīti if one line of a verse is not coming, but the rest is coming, this is called a mostly-familiar text. This method should be understood in the suttas as well. There is no offense for telling him to recite in that way, even if he recites together. Osārentaṃ opātetīti there is no offense for saying to one who is reciting a sutta, going around in the assembly, "Say it this way," even if he speaks together with him. However, if one who is told "Do not speak with me" in Mahāpaccariya and others speaks, it is said "there is no offense," but that is not in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, and it is fitting that it does not exist. Why? Because it arises from action. Otherwise, it would be an action that is not an action. The rest is easy to understand.
Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ – vācato ca vācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ – it arises from speech and from speech and mind, it is an action (kiriyaṃ), it involves no release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), it is unintentional (acittakaṃ), it is a fault by designation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), it is a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), it is a tri-root mind (ticittaṃ), and it is felt in three ways (tivedananti).
Padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
Padasodhammasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
5. Sahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Sahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
49.Pañcamasikkhāpade –muṭṭhassatī asampajānāti pubbabhāge satisampajaññassa akaraṇavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, bhavaṅgotiṇṇakāle pana kuto satisampajaññanti!Vikūjamānāti vippalapamānā.Kākacchamānāti nāsāya kākasaddaṃ viya niratthakasaddaṃ muñcamānā.Upāsakāti paṭhamataraṃ uṭṭhitaupāsakā.
49. In the fifth training rule – muṭṭhassatī asampajānāti this is said in terms of not doing mindfulness and clear comprehension in the preliminary part, but from where is mindfulness and clear comprehension at the time of falling into bhavanga! Vikūjamānāti means babbling. Kākacchamānāti means emitting a meaningless sound like the sound of a crow from the nose. Upāsakāti means the upāsakas who woke up earlier.
50.Etadavocunti ‘‘bhagavatā āvuso rāhula sikkhāpadaṃ paññatta’’nti bhikkhū sikkhāpadagāraveneva etaṃ avocuṃ. Pakatiyā pana te bhagavati ca gāravena āyasmato ca rāhulassa sikkhākāmatāya tassa āyasmato vasanaṭṭhānaṃ āgatassa cūḷamañcakaṃ vā apassenaṃ vā yaṃ atthi taṃ paññapetvā cīvaraṃ vā uttarāsaṅgaṃ vā ussīsakaraṇatthāya denti. Tatridaṃ tassāyasmato sikkhākāmatāya – bhikkhū kira taṃ dūratova āgacchantaṃ disvā muṭṭhisammuñjaniñca kacavarachaḍḍanakañca bahi khipanti. Athaññehi ‘‘āvuso kenidaṃ pātita’’nti vutte aññe evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘bhante, rāhulo imasmiṃ padese sañcari, tena nu kho pātita’’nti. So panāyasmā ‘‘na mayhaṃ bhante idaṃ kamma’’nti ekadivasampi avatvā taṃ paṭisāmetvā bhikkhū khamāpetvā gacchati.Vaccakuṭiyā seyyaṃ kappesīti taṃyeva sikkhākāmataṃ anubrūhanto dhammasenāpatimahāmoggallānaānandattherādīnaṃ santikaṃ agantvā bhagavato vaḷañjanakavaccakuṭiyaṃ seyyaṃ kappesi. Sā kira kuṭi kavāṭabaddhā gandhaparibhaṇḍakatā samosaritapupphadāmā cetiyaṭṭhānamiva tiṭṭhati, aparibhogā aññesaṃ.
50. Etadavocunti "Friend Rāhula, the training rule has been established by the Blessed One," the bhikkhus said this out of respect for the training rule. But naturally, with respect for the Blessed One and a desire for training for venerable Rāhula, they would prepare a small cot or lean-to or whatever else there was for that venerable one who had come to his dwelling place, and give him a robe or upper robe to use as a pillow. Here is a story about that venerable one's desire for training: it seems that when the bhikkhus saw him coming from afar, they would throw the fistful of sweepings and the garbage outside. Then, when others asked, "Friend, who dropped this?", others would say, "Venerable, Rāhula wandered in this area, so perhaps he dropped it." But that venerable one, without saying even for one day, "Venerable, this is not my doing," would put it back in its place, ask forgiveness from the bhikkhus, and leave. Vaccakuṭiyā seyyaṃ kappesīti following up on that very desire for training, he prepared his bed in the Blessed One's toilet cell, without going to the presence of Dhammasenāpati, Mahāmoggallāna, Ānanda Thera, and others. It seems that the cell stood like a shrine, with its door closed, scented with fragrant substances, and adorned with gathered flower garlands, not used by others.
51.Uttaridirattatirattanti bhagavā sāmaṇerānaṃ saṅgahakaraṇatthāya tirattaṃ parihāraṃ adāsi. Na hi yuttaṃ kuladārake pabbājetvā nānuggahetunti.Sahaseyyanti ekato seyyaṃ.Seyyāti kāyappasāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ sayanampi vuccati, yasmiṃ senāsane sayanti, tampi. Tattha senāsanaṃ tāva dassetuṃ‘‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyappasāraṇaṃ dassetuṃanupasampanne nipanne bhikkhu nipajjatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tasmā ayamettha attho – ‘‘senāsanasaṅkhātaṃ seyyaṃ pavisitvā kāyappasāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ seyyaṃ kappeyya vidaheyya sampādeyyā’’ti.Sabbacchannātiādinā pana tassā senāsanasaṅkhātāya seyyāya lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ senāsanaṃ upari pañcahi chadanehi aññena vā kenaci sabbameva paṭicchannaṃ, ayaṃ sabbacchannā nāma seyyā. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana pākaṭavohāraṃ gahetvā vācuggatavasena ‘‘sabbacchannā nāma pañcahi chadanehi channā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi vuttaṃ? Atha kho dussakuṭiyaṃ vasantassāpi na sakkā anāpatti kātuṃ, tasmā yaṃ kiñci paṭicchādanasamatthaṃ idha chadanañca paricchannañca veditabbaṃ. Pañcavidhacchadaneyeva hi gayhamāne padaracchannepi sahaseyyā na bhaveyya. Yaṃ pana senāsanaṃ bhūmito paṭṭhāya yāva chadanaṃ āhacca pākārena vā aññena vā kenaci antamaso vatthenāpi parikkhittaṃ, ayaṃ sabbaparicchannā nāma seyyā. Chadanaṃ anāhacca sabbantimena pariyāyena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhena pākārādinā parikkhittāpi sabbaparicchannāyevāti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassā pana upari bahutaraṃ ṭhānaṃ channaṃ, appaṃ acchannaṃ, samantato vā bahutaraṃ parikkhittaṃ, appaṃ aparikkhittaṃ, ayaṃyebhuyyena channā yebhuyyena paricchannānāma. Iminā hi lakkhaṇena samannāgato sacepi sattabhūmako pāsādo ekūpacāro hoti, satagabbhaṃ vā catussālaṃ vā, ekaseyyāicceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ‘‘catutthe divase atthaṅgate sūriye anupasampanne nipanne bhikkhu nipajjati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’tiādi.
51. Uttaridirattatirattanti the Blessed One gave a dispensation of three nights in order to favor the novices. For it is not proper to ordain the sons of good families and not to favor them. Sahaseyyanti means sleeping together. Seyyāti is also said of the act of lying down, which is the stretching out of the body, and also of the lodging in which one lies down. There, to show the lodging first, ‘‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā’’tiādi is said. To show the stretching out of the body, anupasampanne nipanne bhikkhu nipajjatī’’tiādi is said. Therefore, this is the meaning here: "having entered the lodging called seyyā, he should make, do, or accomplish the seyyā called the stretching out of the body." However, by Sabbacchannātiādi, the characteristic of that lodging called seyyā is stated. Therefore, whatever lodging is entirely covered from above by five coverings or by anything else, this is called sabbacchannā seyyā. However, in the commentaries, taking the well-known usage, it is said in the manner of recitation, "sabbacchannā nāma means covered by five coverings." Although it is said, is it not possible to avoid an offense even for one living in a cloth tent? Therefore, whatever is capable of covering, both the covering and the enclosed space should be understood here. For if only the five kinds of coverings are taken, there would be no sleeping together even in a padaracchanna. However, whatever lodging is enclosed from the ground up to the covering by a wall or by anything else, even by a cloth at the very least, this is called sabbaparicchannā seyyā. It is said in the Kurunda Commentary that even if it is enclosed by a wall, etc., at a height of two and a half cubits from the very edge, not touching the covering, it is definitely sabbaparicchannā. However, whatever has more space covered above and less uncovered, or is mostly enclosed on all sides and less unenclosed, this is called yebhuyyena channā yebhuyyena paricchannā. Indeed, a building that possesses this characteristic, even if it is a seven-storied mansion with only one attendant, or a hundred-chambered or four-sided building, is counted as one seyyā. With that in mind, it is said ‘‘catutthe divase atthaṅgate sūriye anupasampanne nipanne bhikkhu nipajjati, āpatti pācittiyassā’’tiādi.
Tattha ca nipajjanamatteneva pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana sambahulā sāmaṇerā, eko bhikkhu, sāmaṇeragaṇanāya pācittiyā. Te ce uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya nipajjanti, tesaṃ payoge payoge bhikkhussa āpatti. Bhikkhussa uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya nipajjane pana bhikkhusseva payogena bhikkhussa āpatti. Sace pana sambahulā bhikkhū eko sāmaṇero sabbesaṃ āpattiṃ karoti, tassa uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya nipajjanenapi bhikkhūnaṃ āpattiyeva. Ubhayesaṃ sambahulabhāvepi eseva nayo.
There, merely lying down constitutes a pācittiya. But if there are many sāmaṇeras and one bhikkhu, it is a pācittiya by counting the sāmaṇeras. If they lie down each time they get up, the bhikkhu incurs an offense with each attempt. But when the bhikkhu lies down each time he gets up, the bhikkhu incurs an offense by his own action. If there are many bhikkhus and one sāmaṇera, he causes an offense to all; even his lying down each time he gets up causes an offense to the bhikkhus. The same principle applies when both are numerous.
Apicettha ekāvāsādikampi catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yo hi ekasmiṃ āvāse ekeneva anupasampannena saddhiṃ tirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeti, tassa catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya devasikā āpatti. Yopi ekasmiṃyeva āvāse nānāanupasampannehi saddhiṃ tirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeti, tassapi. Yopi nānāāvāsesu ekeneva anupasampannena saddhiṃ tirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeti, tassapi. Yopi nānāāvāsesu nānāanupasampannehi saddhiṃ yojanasatampi gantvā sahaseyyaṃ kappeti, tassapi catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya devasikā āpatti.
Moreover, here the quartet beginning with "one dwelling" should be understood. Whoever cohabits for three nights with a non-ordained person in one dwelling incurs a daily offense starting from the fourth day. And whoever cohabits for three nights with various non-ordained persons in the same dwelling also incurs an offense. And whoever cohabits for three nights with one non-ordained person in various dwellings also incurs an offense. And whoever goes even a hundred yojanas and cohabits with various non-ordained persons in various dwellings also incurs a daily offense starting from the fourth day.
Ayañca sahaseyyāpatti nāma ‘‘bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampanno nāmā’’ti vacanato tiracchānagatenapi saddhiṃ hoti, tatra tiracchānagatassa paricchedo methunadhammāpattiyā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tasmā sacepi godhābiḷālamaṅgusādīsu koci pavisitvā bhikkhuno vasanasenāsane ekūpacāraṭṭhāne sayati, sahaseyyāva hoti.
This offense of sahaseyyā (cohabitation) occurs even with animals, because it is said that "except for a bhikkhu, the remainder are called non-ordained." There, the distinction regarding animals should be understood in the same way as stated for the offense of methunadhamma (sexual intercourse). Therefore, even if a monitor lizard, cat, mongoose, or something similar enters and lies down in a bhikkhu's dwelling or lodging within the same enclosure, it is sahaseyyā.
Yadi pana thambhānaṃ upari katapāsādassa uparimatalena saddhiṃ asambaddhabhittikassa bhittiyā upari ṭhitasusiratulāsīsassa susirena pavisitvā tulāya abbhantare sayitvā teneva susirena nikkhamitvā gacchati, heṭṭhāpāsāde sayitabhikkhussa anāpatti. Sace chadane chiddaṃ hoti, tena pavisitvā antochadane vasitvā teneva pakkamati, nānūpacāre uparimatale chadanabbhantare sayitassa āpatti, heṭṭhimatale sayitassa anāpatti. Sace antopāsādeneva ārohitvā sabbatalāni paribhuñjanti, ekūpacārāni honti, tesu yattha katthaci sayitassa āpatti.
If, however, the upper story of a building constructed on pillars has no connecting wall, and someone enters through a hole in a hollow beam placed on the wall and lies down inside the beam, and then exits through the same hole, the bhikkhu lying down in the lower building incurs no offense. If there is a hole in the roof, and someone enters through it, stays inside the roof, and then leaves through it, the person lying inside the roof on the upper floor incurs an offense, but the person lying on the lower floor incurs no offense. If they ascend inside the building itself and use all the levels, they are within the same enclosure; an offense is incurred by whoever lies down anywhere in them.
Sabhāsaṅkhepena kate aḍḍhakuṭṭakasenāsane sayitassa vāḷasaṅghāṭādīsu kapotādayo pavisitvā sayanti, āpattiyeva. Parikkhepassa bahigate nibbakosabbhantare sayanti, anāpatti. Parimaṇḍalaṃ vā caturassaṃ vā ekacchadanāya gabbhamālāya satagabbhaṃ cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tatra ce ekena sādhāraṇadvārena pavisitvā visuṃ pākārena aparicchinnagabbhūpacāre sabbagabbhe pavisanti, ekagabbhepi anupasampanne nipanne sabbagabbhesu nipannānaṃ āpatti. Sace sapamukhā gabbhā honti, pamukhassa upari acchannaṃ uccavatthukaṃ cepi hoti, pamukhe sayito gabbhe sayitānaṃ āpattiṃ na karoti. Sace pana gabbhacchadaneneva saddhiṃ sambaddhacchadanaṃ hoti, tatra sayito sabbesaṃ āpattiṃ karoti. Kasmā? Sabbacchannattā sabbaparicchannattā ca, gabbhaparikkhepoyeva hissa parikkhepoti. Eteneva hi nayena aṭṭhakathāsu lohapāsādaparikkhepassa catūsu dvārakoṭṭhakesu āpatti vuttā.
If pigeons or similar creatures enter and lie down in a lodging with a half-wall made in a shed, or in a pile of reeds, etc., an offense is incurred. If they lie down outside the enclosure, in an uncovered space, no offense is incurred. Even if a lodging is a hundred-roomed pavilion, either round or square, with a single roof, and they enter through a single common door and enter all the rooms within the enclosure not separated by walls, if a non-ordained person lies down in one room, those lying down in all the rooms incur an offense. If the rooms have individual porches, even if there is an elevated area uncovered above the porch, someone lying in the porch does not cause an offense to those lying in the rooms. But if the roof of the porch is connected to the roof of the rooms, someone lying there causes an offense to all. Why? Because it is all covered and all enclosed, and its enclosure is the same as the enclosure of the rooms. Indeed, in this way, the offense is stated in the commentaries in the four gatehouses of the Lohapāsāda enclosure.
Yaṃ pana andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘aparikkhitte pamukhe anāpattīti bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā pamukhaṃ sandhāya kathina’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ andhakaraṭṭhe pāṭekkasannivesā ekacchadanā gabbhapāḷiyo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yañca tattha ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ vinā jagatiyā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ neva aṭṭhakathāsu atthi; na pāḷiyā sameti. Dasahatthubbedhāpi hi jagati parikkhepasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Tasmā yampi tattha dutiyasikkhāpade jagatiyā pamāṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘etaṃ ekūpacāraṃ paricchannaṃ nāma hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Yepi ekasāladvisālatisālacatussālasannivesā mahāpāsādā ekasmiṃ okāse pāde dhovitvā paviṭṭhena sakkā honti sabbattha anuparigantuṃ, tesupi sahaseyyāpattiyā na muccati. Sace tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne upacāraṃ paricchinditvā katā honti, ekūpacāraṭṭhāneyeva āpatti.
However, what is stated in the Andhaka Commentary—"no offense in an unenclosed porch," referring to a porch without a platform on the ground—refers to the single-roofed rows of rooms with individual courtyards in the Andhaka country. And what is stated there—"without a platform on the ground"—is not found in the commentaries, nor does it agree with the Pali. Even a platform ten hatthas high does not count as an enclosure. Therefore, what is stated in the Second Training Rule, giving the measurement of a platform and saying, "This is called the same enclosure," should not be accepted. Also, in large buildings with single, double, triple, or quadruple halls, it is possible to go everywhere without leaving the enclosure once one has washed one's feet and entered in one place; one is not freed from the sahaseyyā offense in these either. If, in each of those places, the enclosure is defined and made separate, an offense is incurred only in the same enclosure.
Dvīhi dvārehi yuttassa sudhāchadanamaṇḍapassa majjhe pākāraṃ karonti, ekena dvārena pavisitvā ekasmiṃ paricchede anupasampanno sayati, ekasmiṃ bhikkhu, anāpatti. Pākāre godhādīnaṃ pavisanamattampi chiddaṃ hoti, ekasmiñca paricchede godhā sayanti, anāpattiyeva. Na hi chiddena gehaṃ ekūpacāraṃ nāma hoti. Sace pākāramajjhe chinditvā dvāraṃ yojenti, ekūpacāratāya āpatti. Taṃ dvāraṃ kavāṭena pidahitvā sayanti, āpattiyeva. Na hi dvārapidahanena gehaṃ nānūpacāraṃ nāma hoti, dvāraṃ vā advāraṃ. Kavāṭañhi saṃvaraṇavivaraṇehi yathāsukhaṃ vaḷañjanatthāya kataṃ, na vaḷañjanūpacchedanatthāya. Sace pana taṃ dvāraṃ puna iṭṭhakāhi pidahanti, advāraṃ hoti, purime nānūpacārabhāveyeva tiṭṭhati. Dīghapamukhaṃ cetiyagharaṃ hoti. Ekaṃ kavāṭaṃ anto, ekaṃ bahi, dvinnaṃ kavāṭānaṃ antare anupasampanno antocetiyaghare sayantassa āpattiṃ karoti, ekūpacārattā.
If they build a wall in the middle of a pavilion with a stucco roof and two doors, and a non-ordained person lies down in one enclosure after entering through one door, and a bhikkhu in one, there is no offense. If there is a hole in the wall just large enough for monitor lizards to enter, and monitor lizards lie down in one enclosure, again there is no offense. A house does not become the same enclosure just because of a hole. If they cut through the wall in the middle and join a door, there is an offense because of the same enclosure. If they lie down after closing that door with a gate, there is an offense. A house does not become a different enclosure just by closing the door, whether there is a door or not. A gate is made for convenient opening and closing, not to cut off the enclosure. But if they brick up that door again, it becomes not a door and remains as it was in the previous state of being a different enclosure. A cetiyaghara (shrine room) has a long porch. One gate is inside and one is outside; between the two gates, a non-ordained person lying in the inner cetiyaghara causes an offense to one inside because it is the same enclosure.
Tatra yassa ‘‘siyā ayaṃ ekūpacāranānūpacāratā nāma udositasikkhāpade vuttā, idha pana ‘seyyā nāma sabbacchannā sabbaparicchannā yebhuyyena channā yebhuyyena paricchannā’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, pihitadvāro ca gabbho sabbaparicchannova hoti. Tasmā tattha anto sayiteneva saddhiṃ āpatti, bahi sayitena anāpattī’’ti. So evaṃ vattabbo – ‘‘apihitadvāre pana kasmā bahi sayitena āpattī’’ti? Pamukhassa gabbhena saddhiṃ sabbacchannattā. ‘‘Kiṃ pana gabbhe pihite chadanaṃ viddhastaṃ hotī’’ti? Na viddhastaṃ, gabbhena saddhiṃ pamukhassa sabbaparicchannatā na hoti. ‘‘Kiṃ parikkhepo viddhasto’’ti? Addhā vakkhati ‘‘na viddhasto, kavāṭena upacāro paricchanno’’ti. Evaṃ dūrampi gantvā puna ekūpacāranānūpacārataṃyeva paccāgamissati.
Here, someone might say, "This idea of the same enclosure and different enclosure is stated in the Udosita Training Rule, but here only 'a seyyā (sleeping place) is one that is entirely covered, entirely enclosed, mostly covered, or mostly enclosed' is stated. A room with a closed door is entirely enclosed. Therefore, an offense is incurred with someone lying inside, but no offense is incurred by someone lying outside." He should be told, "But why is an offense incurred by someone lying outside when the door is open?" Because the porch is entirely covered together with the room. "But when the room is closed, is the roof destroyed?" It is not destroyed, but the porch is not entirely enclosed together with the room. "Is the enclosure destroyed?" Indeed, he will say, "It is not destroyed, the enclosure is enclosed by the gate." Even going that far, he will still come back to the idea of the same enclosure and different enclosure.
Apica yadi byañjanamatteyeva attho suviññeyyo siyā, sabbacchannāti vacanato pañcannaṃ aññatarena chadanena channā eva seyyā siyā, na aññena. Evañca sati padaracchannādīsu anāpatti siyā. Tato yadatthaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, sveva attho parihāyeyya. Parihāyatu vā mā vā, kathaṃ avuttaṃ gahetabbanti; ko vā vadati ‘‘avuttaṃ gahetabba’’nti? Vuttañhetaṃ aniyatesu – ‘‘paṭicchannaṃ nāma āsanaṃ kuṭṭena vā kavāṭena vā kilañjena vā sāṇipākārena vā rukkhena vā thambhena vā koṭṭhalikāya vā yena kenaci paṭicchannaṃ hotī’’ti. Tasmā yathā tattha yena kenaci paṭicchannaṃ paṭicchannameva, evamidhāpi gahetabbaṃ. Tasmā senāsanaṃ khuddakaṃ vā hotu mahantaṃ vā aññena saddhiṃ sambaddhaṃ vā asambaddhaṃ vā dīghaṃ vā vaṭṭaṃ vā caturassaṃ vā ekabhūmakaṃ vā, anekabhūmakaṃ vā, yaṃ yaṃ ekūpacāraṃ sabbattha yena kenaci paṭicchādanena sabbacchanne sabbaparicchanne yebhuyyena vā channe yebhuyyena vā paricchanne sahaseyyāpatti hotīti.
Moreover, if the meaning were easily understood from the mere wording, a seyyā would be one covered by one of the five types of roofing because of the wording "entirely covered," and not by anything else. In that case, there would be no offense in a padara roof, etc. Then the very purpose for which the Training Rule was laid down would be lost. Whether it is lost or not, how can one grasp what is unsaid? And who says, "What is unsaid should be grasped"? This is said in the case of indefinite things: "A covered seat is one covered by a wall, a gate, a screen, a cloth covering, a tree, a pillar, a recess, or anything else." Therefore, just as there anything covered is covered, so too it should be grasped here. Therefore, whether a senāsana (lodging) is small or large, connected to something else or not, long or round or square, single-storied or multi-storied, whatever is the same enclosure, in all cases, if it is entirely covered or entirely enclosed or mostly covered or mostly enclosed by any covering, the sahaseyyā offense is incurred.
53.Upaḍḍhacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha sabbacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanneti evamādīsupi mahāpaccariyaṃ dukkaṭamevāti vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sabbacchanne yebhuyyenaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, sabbacchanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenachanne upaḍḍhaparicchanne pācittiyaṃ, sabbaparicchanne yebhuyyenachanne pācittiyaṃ, sabbaparichanne upaḍḍhacchanne pācittiyaṃ, yebhuyyenaparicchanne upaḍḍhacchanne pācittiyaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ vuttapācittiyena saddhiṃ satta pācittiyānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne dukkaṭaṃ, yebhuyyenachanne cūḷakaparicchanne dukkaṭaṃ, sabbaparicchanne cūḷakacchanne dukkaṭaṃ, yebhuyyenaparicchanne cūḷakacchanne dukkaṭaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ dukkaṭena saha pañca dukkaṭānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
53."If it is half-covered and half-enclosed, the offense is a dukkata." Here, it is stated in the Mahāpaccariya that even in cases like "entirely covered and half-enclosed," the offense is only a dukkata. But in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā it is stated: "If it is entirely covered and mostly enclosed, a pācittiya; entirely covered and half-enclosed, a pācittiya; mostly covered and half-enclosed, a pācittiya; entirely enclosed and mostly covered, a pācittiya; entirely enclosed and half-covered, a pācittiya; mostly enclosed and half-covered, a pācittiya; there are seven pācittiyas including the pācittiya stated in the Pāḷi." "If it is entirely covered and slightly enclosed, a dukkata; mostly covered and slightly enclosed, a dukkata; entirely enclosed and slightly covered, a dukkata; mostly enclosed and slightly covered, a dukkata; there are five dukkatas including the dukkata in the Pāḷi," it is stated.
‘‘Upaḍḍhacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne anāpatti, upaḍḍhaparicchanne cūḷakacchanne anāpatti, cūḷakacchanne cūḷakaparicchanne anāpatti, sabbacchanne sabbaaparicchanneti ca ettha senambamaṇḍapavaṇṇaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Imināpetaṃ veditabbaṃ – ‘‘yathā jagati parikkhepasaṅkhaya na gacchatī’’ti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
"If it is half-covered and slightly enclosed, there is no offense; if it is half-enclosed and slightly covered, there is no offense; if it is slightly covered and slightly enclosed, there is no offense; and 'entirely covered and entirely enclosed' means it is like a senamba-maṇḍapa (traveler's rest pavilion)," it is stated. By this, it should be understood that "a jagati (platform) does not count as an enclosure." The rest is clear in meaning.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato ca kāyacittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
The arising of the eḷakaloma: it arises from the body and from thought associated with the body; it is an action, without perception of release, non-intentional, an offense by designation, a bodily action, tri-citta (three- citta), tri-vedana (three- vedana).
Sahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth Sahaseyya Training Rule.
6. Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Second Sahaseyya Training Rule
55.Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpade –āvasathāgāranti āgantukānaṃ vasanāgāraṃ.Paññattaṃ hotīti puññakāmatāya katvā ṭhapitaṃ hoti.Yena sā itthī tenupasaṅkamīti asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne āvasathāgāraṃ paññattaṃ atthīti manussānaṃ sutvā upasaṅkami.Gandhagandhinīti agarukuṅkumādīnaṃ gandhānaṃ gandho gandhagandho, so assā atthīti gandhagandhinī.Sāṭakaṃ nikkhipitvāti appeva nāmassa imampi vippakāraṃ passantassa rāgo uppajjeyyāti cintetvā evamakāsi.Okkhipitvāti adho khipitvā.Accayoti aparādho.Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayameva hi viseso – paṭhamasikkhāpade catutthadivase āpatti idha paṭhamadivasepi. Yakkhīpetīhi dissamānakarūpāhi tiracchānagatitthiyā ca methunadhammavatthubhūtāya eva dukkaṭaṃ. Sesāhi anāpatti. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamasadisānevāti.
55.In the Second Sahaseyya Training Rule: āvasathāgāra means a dwelling place for visitors. Paññattaṃ hoti means it has been established by being made out of a desire for merit. Yena sā itthī tenupasaṅkamī means having heard that there is an āvasathāgāra established in such-and-such a place, people approached it. Gandhagandhinī means having a fragrance of fragrant substances like agaru and saffron; she is gandhagandhinī. Sāṭakaṃ nikkhipitvā means thinking, "Perhaps lust will arise in him even by seeing this kind of change," she did this. Okkhipitvā means having cast down. Accayo means offense. Maṃ accagamā means having overcome and overpowered me, it arose. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the First Training Rule. This alone is the difference: in the First Training Rule, the offense is incurred on the fourth day, but here it is incurred even on the first day. A dukkata is incurred in the case of a female animal, whether a yakkhi, a peta, or one whose form is visible, who is the object of methunadhamma (sexual intercourse). No offense is incurred in other cases. The arising and so on are the same as in the first.
Dutiyasahaseyyasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth Dutiyasahaseyya Training Rule.
7. Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Dhammadesanā Training Rule
60.Sattamasikkhāpade –gharaṇīti gharasāminī.Nivesanadvāreti nivesanassa mahādvāre.Gharasuṇhāti tasmiṃ ghare suṇhā.Āvasathadvāreti ovarakadvāre.Vissaṭṭhenāti suniggatena saddena.Vivaṭenāti suṭṭhu pakāsena asaṃvutena.Dhammo desetabboti ayaṃ saraṇasīlādibhedo dhammo kathetabbo.Aññātunti ājānituṃ.Viññunā purisaviggahenāti viññunā purisena, purisaviggahaṃ gahetvāpi ṭhitena na yakkhena na petena na tiracchānagatena.
60.In the Seventh Training Rule: gharaṇī means the mistress of the house. Nivesanadvāre means at the main door of the residence. Gharasuṇhā means the daughter-in-law in that house. Āvasathadvāre means at the door of the dwelling. Vissaṭṭhenā means with a clearly projected sound. Vivaṭenā means very openly, without concealment. Dhammo desetabbo means this dhamma, which is differentiated as the refuges, the precepts, etc., should be spoken. Aññātu means to understand. Viññunā purisaviggahenā means by a discerning man, also one standing having assumed the form of a man, not a yakkha, not a peta, not an animal.
66.Anāpatti viññunā purisaviggahenāti viññunā purisaviggahena saddhiṃ ṭhitāya bahumpi dhammaṃ desentassa anāpatti.Chappañcavācāhīti chahi pañcahi vācāhi yo deseti, tassapi anāpatti. Tattha eko gāthāpādo ekavācāti evaṃ sabbattha vācāpamāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sace aṭṭhakathaṃ dhammapadaṃ jātakādivatthuṃ vā kathetukāmo hoti, chappañcapadamattameva kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Pāḷiyā saddhiṃ kathentena ekapadaṃ pāḷito pañca aṭṭhakathātoti evaṃ cha padāni anatikkāmetvāva kathetabbo. Padasodhamme vuttappabhedo hi idhāpi sabbo dhammoyeva.Tasmiṃ desetīti tasmiṃ khaṇe deseti. Sampadānatthe vā etaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tassā desetīti attho.Aññissā mātugāmassāti ekissā desetvā puna āgatāgatāya aññissāpi desetīti evaṃ ekāsane nisinno mātugāmasatasahassannampi desetīti attho. Mahāpaccariyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ samaṃ nisinnānaṃ mātugāmānaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ ekekissā ekekaṃ gāthaṃ desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthāti deseti, anāpatti. Paṭhamaṃ ekekissā ekekaṃ gāthaṃ kathessāmīti ābhogaṃ katvā jānāpetvā kathetuṃ vaṭṭati, na pacchāti.Pañhaṃ pucchati pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetīti mātugāmo ‘‘dīghanikāyo nāma bhante kimatthaṃ dīpetī’’ti pucchati. Evaṃ pañhaṃ puṭṭho bhikkhu sabbaṃ cepi dīghanikāyaṃ katheti, anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
66.Anāpatti viññunā purisaviggahenā means there is no offense for one who teaches much dhamma while standing with the form of a discerning man. Chappañcavācāhī means there is no offense for one who teaches with five or six utterances. There, one line of a verse is one utterance; in this way, the measure of an utterance should be understood everywhere. If he wants to speak the commentary, the Dhammapada, a Jataka story, or something similar, it is permissible to speak only about five or six words. If speaking along with the Pali, one word is Pali and five are commentary; in this way, he should speak without exceeding six words. Indeed, all the categories stated in the Padasodhamma are also dhamma here. Tasmiṃ desetī means he teaches at that moment. Or this is a locative case in the sense of giving. The meaning is, "he teaches her." Aññissā mātugāmassā means having taught one, he teaches another who comes again and again; in this way, sitting in one seat, he teaches even hundreds of thousands of women. It is stated in the Mahāpaccariya Commentary: "To women sitting together, he says, 'I will teach each of you a single verse; listen to it,' there is no offense. It is proper to make an announcement and inform them that 'I will first recite a single verse to each of you,' but not afterwards." Pañhaṃ pucchati pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetī means a woman asks, "Bhante, what does the Dīghanikāya illuminate?" Being asked such a question, there is no offense even if the bhikkhu speaks the entire Dīghanikāya. The rest here is clear in meaning.
Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ – vācato ca vācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
The arising of the Padasodhamma: it arises from speech and from thought associated with speech; it is both action and non-action, without perception of release, non-intentional, an offense by designation, a verbal action, tri-citta (three- citta), tri-vedana (three- vedana).
Dhammadesanāsikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The Seventh Dhammadesanā Training Rule.
8. Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Bhūtārocana Training Rule
67.Aṭṭhamasikkhāpade – vatthukathāya tāva yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ catutthapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayameva hi viseso – tattha abhūtaṃ ārocesuṃ, idha bhūtaṃ. Bhūtampi puthujjanā ārocesuṃ, na ariyā. Ariyānañhi payuttavācā nāma natthi, attano guṇe ārocayamāne pana aññe na paṭisedhesuṃ, tathāuppanne ca paccaye sādiyiṃsu, tathāuppannabhāvaṃ ajānantā.
67. Regarding the eighth training rule: Whatever should be said by way of the story is the same as has been stated in the explanation of the fourth pārājika. The only difference here is that in that case, they reported what was untrue; in this case, what is true. And even the truth was reported by ordinary people, not by noble ones. For noble ones, there is no such thing as intentional speech. However, when their own virtues were being proclaimed, they did not object to others, and they approved of such a situation when it arose, not being aware of the situation that arose.
‘‘Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesu’’ntiādimhi pana ye uttarimanussadhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsiṃsu, te ārocesunti veditabbaṃ.‘‘Kacci pana vo bhikkhave bhūta’’nti pucchite pana sabbepi‘‘bhūtaṃ bhagavā’’ti paṭijāniṃsu. Ariyānampi hi abbhantare bhūto uttarimanussadhammoti. Atha bhagavā ariyamissakattā ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti avatvā‘‘kathañhi nāma tumhe bhikkhave’’ti vatvā‘‘udarassa kāraṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā ariyā aññesaṃ sutvā ‘‘ayyo kira, bhante, sotāpanno’’tiādinā nayena pasannehi manussehi pucchiyamānā apaññatte sikkhāpade anādīnavadassino suddhacittatāya attano ca paresañca visesādhigamaṃ paṭijāniṃsu. Evaṃ paṭijānantehi ca tehi yaṃ aññe udarassa kāraṇā uttarimanussadhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvā piṇḍapātaṃ uppādesuṃ, taṃ suddhacittatāya sādiyantehipi udarassa kāraṇā uttarimanussadhammassa vaṇṇo bhāsito viya hoti. Tasmā sabbasaṅgāhikeneva nayena ‘‘kathañhi nāma tumhe, bhikkhave, udarassa kāraṇā gihīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ uttarimanussadhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsissathā’’ti āha. Sesaṃ catutthapārājikavatthusadisameva. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅgepi kevalaṃ tattha pārājikañceva thullaccayañca idha bhūtattā pācittiyañceva dukkaṭañca ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
But in the passage beginning with "Then those monks reported this matter to the Blessed One," it should be understood that those who spoke in praise of superhuman qualities were the ones who reported. However, when asked "Is it true, monks?", all acknowledged, "It is true, Blessed One." For even in the minds of the noble ones, there are superhuman qualities that are true. Then the Blessed One, not saying "foolish men" because there was a mixture of noble ones, but saying "How indeed, monks," and so on, said "for the sake of your bellies." Here, because the noble ones, hearing from others, acknowledged the attainment of distinction for themselves and others with pure minds when asked by people pleased in ways such as "Venerable, they say he is a stream-enterer," in the absence of a declared training rule, and seeing no fault in it. And by those acknowledging in this way, whatever alms-food others produced by speaking in praise of superhuman qualities for the sake of their bellies, even those approving with pure minds, it is as if praise of superhuman qualities was spoken for the sake of the belly. Therefore, with a manner encompassing all, he said, "How indeed, monks, would you speak in praise of superhuman qualities to laypeople for the sake of your bellies?" The rest is similar to the case of the fourth pārājika. In the analysis of the training rule, the only difference is that there was pārājika and thullaccaya there, but here, because it is true, there is pācittiya and dukkaṭa. The rest is as stated.
77.‘‘Upasampannassa bhūtaṃ ārocetī’’ti uttarimanussadhammameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Parinibbānakāle hi antarā vā atikaḍḍhiyamānena upasampannassa bhūtaṃ ārocetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sutapariyattisīlaguṇaṃ pana anupasampannassāpi ārocetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ādikammikassa anāpatti. ‘‘Ummattakassā’’ti idaṃ pana idha na vuttaṃ. Kasmā? Diṭṭhisampannānaṃ ummādassa vā cittakkhepassa vā abhāvāti. Mahāpaccariyampi hi vicāritaṃ ‘‘jhānalābhī pana parihīne jhāne ummattako bhaveyya, tassapi bhūtārocanapaccayā anāpatti na vattabbā, bhūtasseva abhāvato’’ti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
77. "Reports a truth about an ordained monk" refers specifically to superhuman qualities. However, it is permissible to report the truth about an ordained monk who is either dying or being dragged away against their will. But it is permissible to report on the qualities of learning the scriptures and virtue even to one who is not ordained. There is no offense for the first offender. However, "to one who is insane" is not mentioned here. Why? Because those who are accomplished in view do not have insanity or derangement of mind. Even in the Mahāpaccariya, it was considered: "If one who has attained jhāna becomes insane upon losing jhāna, it should not be said that there is no offense for the reason of reporting the truth, because the truth is absent." The rest is straightforward.
Bhūtārocanaṃ nāmetaṃ pubbe avuttehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti – kāyato vācato kāyavācato cāti. Kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, kusalābyākatacittehi dvicittaṃ, sukhamajjhattavedanāhi dvivedananti.
Reporting a truth arises from three sources not previously mentioned: from the body, from speech, and from both body and speech. It is an action, without perception-release, unintentional, an offense by designation, a bodily action, a verbal action, two minds with wholesome and indeterminate consciousness, and two feelings with pleasant and neutral sensation.
Bhūtārocanasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The eighth training rule on reporting a truth.
9. Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Reporting a Serious Offense
78.Navamasikkhāpade –duṭṭhullā nāma āpatti cattāri ca pārājikāni terasa ca saṅghādisesāti imissā pāḷiyā ‘‘pārājikāni duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthaṃ vuttāni, saṅghādisesaṃ pana idha adhippeta’’nti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vicāraṇā – sace pārājikaṃ ārocentassa pācittiyaṃ na bhaveyya, yathā samānepi bhikkhu-bhikkhunīnaṃ upasampannasadde yattha bhikkhunī anadhippetā hoti, tattha bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso anupasampannoti vuccati; evamidha samānepi pārājikasaṅghādisesānaṃ duṭṭhullasadde yadi pārājikaṃ anadhippetaṃ, ‘‘duṭṭhullā nāma āpatti terasa saṅghādisesā’’ti etadeva vattabbaṃ siyā. Tattha bhaveyya ‘‘yo pārājikaṃ āpanno, so bhikkhubhāvato cuto, tasmā tassa āpattiṃ ārocento dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatī’’ti. Evaṃ sati akkosantopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjeyya, pācittiyameva ca āpajjati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘asuddho hoti puggalo aññataraṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpanno, tañce asuddhadiṭṭhi samāno okāsaṃ kārāpetvā akkosādhippāyo vadati, āpatti omasavādassā’’ti (pārā. 389). Evaṃ pāḷiyā vicāriyamānāya pārājikaṃ ārocentassāpi pācittiyameva dissati. Kiñcāpi dissati, atha kho sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttattāaṭṭhakathācariyāvaettha pamāṇaṃ, na aññā vicāraṇā. Pubbepi ca āvocumha – ‘‘buddhena dhammo vinayo ca vutto, yo tassa puttehi tatheva ñāto’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā). Aṭṭhakathācariyā hi buddhassa adhippāyaṃ jānanti.
78. Regarding the ninth training rule: "A serious offense (duṭṭhulla) means an offense consisting of the four pārājikas and the thirteen saṅghādisesas." In this passage, the commentaries say that "the pārājikas are mentioned to illustrate the meaning of the word duṭṭhulla, but here the saṅghādisesa is intended." Herein lies a consideration: if there were no pācittiya for reporting a pārājika, just as in the similar case of the word "ordained" in relation to monks and nuns, where a nun is not intended, and thus all except the monk are called unordained; similarly, if pārājika is not intended in the similar case of pārājika and saṅghādisesa in the word duṭṭhulla, then it should be said "a serious offense means an offense consisting of the thirteen saṅghādisesas." There, it might be argued that "one who has committed a pārājika has fallen from monkhood, therefore, one who reports his offense incurs a dukkaṭa." In that case, even one who insults would incur a dukkaṭa, and would incur only a pācittiya. For it was said: "The person is impure, having committed one of the pārājika offenses, and if, being of impure view, having made an opportunity, he speaks with the intention of insult, there is an offense of abusive language" (pārā. 389). Thus, when examined by the Pāli, only a pācittiya is seen for reporting a pārājika. Although it is seen, nevertheless, because it is stated in all the commentaries, the commentary masters are the authority here, and no other consideration is needed. And we have previously said: "The Dhamma and the Vinaya were spoken by the Buddha, which was known in the same way by his sons" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā). For the commentary masters know the Buddha's intention.
Imināpi cetaṃ pariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Aññatra bhikkhusammutiyāti hi vuttaṃ. Bhikkhusammutiyā ca ārocanaṃ āyatiṃ saṃvaratthāya puna tathārūpaṃ āpattiṃ anāpajjanatthāya bhagavatā anuññātaṃ, na tassa bhikkhuno avaṇṇamattappakāsanatthāya, sāsane cassa patiṭṭhānisedhanatthāya, na ca pārājikaṃ āpannassa puna tathārūpāya āpattiyā anāpajjanena bhikkhubhāvo nāma atthi. Tasmā ‘‘pārājikāni duṭṭhullasaddatthadassanatthaṃ vuttāni, saṅghādisesaṃ pana idhādhippeta’’nti yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ, taṃ suvuttameva.
And this should be understood by this method. For it is said, "Except by the agreement of the monks." And the reporting by the agreement of the monks is permitted by the Blessed One for the sake of restraint in the future, to prevent falling into such an offense again, not merely to reveal the faults of that monk, nor to prevent his establishment in the dispensation. And for one who has committed a pārājika, there is no such thing as monkhood by preventing falling into such an offense again. Therefore, what is said in the commentaries, "the pārājikas are mentioned to illustrate the meaning of the word duṭṭhulla, but here the saṅghādisesa is intended," is well said.
80.Atthibhikkhusammuti āpattipariyantātiādīsu pana yā ayaṃ bhikkhusammuti vuttā, sā na katthaci āgatā, idha vuttattāyeva pana abhiṇhāpattikaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā evamesa paresu hirottappenāpi āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjissatīti tassa bhikkhuno hitesitāya tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā saṅghena kātabbāti veditabbāti.
80. Among the passages beginning with "There is agreement by the monks until the end of the offense," this agreement by the monks that is mentioned is not found anywhere else. But because it is mentioned here, having seen a monk who frequently commits offenses, thinking that "even this one will achieve restraint in the future through shame and fear in others," it should be understood that it should be done by the Saṅgha after announcing it three times for the benefit of that monk.
82.Aduṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ āroceti āpatti dukkaṭassāti pañcapi āpattikkhandhe ārocentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana pārājikaṃ ārocentassāpi dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ.Anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāranti ettha ādito pañca sikkhāpadāni duṭṭhullo nāma ajjhācāro, sesāni aduṭṭhullo. Sukkavissaṭṭhikāyasaṃsaggaduṭṭhullaattakāmā panassa ajjhācāro nāmāti vuttaṃ.
82. "Reports a non-serious offense, there is an offense of dukkaṭa": there is a dukkaṭa for reporting any of the five aggregates of offenses. However, in the Mahāpaccariya, even for reporting a pārājika, only a dukkaṭa is stated. "To one who is not ordained, a serious or non-serious transgression": here, the first five training rules are called serious transgressions, the rest are non-serious. It is said that emission of semen, physical contact, and self-gratification are serious transgressions for him.
83.Vatthuṃ ārocetīti ‘‘ayaṃ sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ āpanno, duṭṭhullaṃ āpanno, attakāmaṃ āpanno’’ kāyasaṃsaggaṃ āpannoti evaṃ vadantassa anāpatti.Āpattiṃ ārocetīti ettha ‘‘ayaṃ pārājikaṃ āpanno, saṅghādisesaṃ thullaccayaṃ pācittiyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ dukkaṭaṃ dubbhāsitaṃ āpanno’’ti vadati anāpatti. ‘‘Ayaṃ asuciṃ mocetvā saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno’’tiādinā pana nayena vatthunā saddhiṃ āpattiṃ ghaṭetvā ārocentasseva āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
83. "Reports the basis": there is no offense for one who says, "he has committed emission of semen, he has committed a serious offense, he has committed self-gratification," or "he has committed physical contact." "Reports the offense": here, there is no offense for one who says, "he has committed a pārājika, a saṅghādisesa, a thullaccaya, a pācittiya, a paṭidesanīya, a dukkaṭa, or a dubbhasita." But there is an offense only for one who, in the manner of "he has discharged semen and committed a saṅghādisesa," reports the offense in conjunction with the basis. The rest here is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
It arises from three sources: from body-mind, from speech-mind, and from body-speech-mind; it is an action, with perception-release, intentional, a mundane offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome mind, and painful feeling.
Duṭṭhullārocanasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The ninth training rule on reporting a serious offense.
10. Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Digging the Earth
86.Dasamasikkhāpade –jātā ca pathavī ajātā ca pathavīti imehi padehi jātapathaviñca ajātapathaviñca dasseti.Appapāsāṇādīsu appā pāsāṇā etthāti appapāsāṇāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha muṭṭhippamāṇato upari pāsāṇāti veditabbā, muṭṭhippamāṇā sakkharā. Kathalāti kapālakhaṇḍāni. Marumbāti kaṭasakkharā. Vālikāti vālukāyeva.Yebhuyyena paṃsukāti tīsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāsā paṃsu, eko pāsāṇādīsu aññataro.Adaḍḍhāpīti uddhanapattapacanakumbhakārāvāpādivasena tathā tathā adaḍḍhā. Sā pana visuṃ natthi, suddhapaṃsuādīsu aññatarāva veditabbā.Yebhuyyenasakkharāti bahutarā sakkharā. Hatthikucchiyaṃ kira ekapacchipūraṃ āharāpetvā doṇiyaṃ dhovitvā pathaviyā yebhuyyena sakkharabhāvaṃ ñatvā sayaṃ bhikkhū pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇiṃsu. Yāni pana majjhe‘‘appapaṃsu appamattikā’’ti dve padāni, tāni yebhuyyenapāsāṇādipañcakameva pavisanti tesaṃyeva hi dvinnaṃ pabhedadassanametaṃ.Sayaṃ khaṇati āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha pahāre pahāre pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ.Sakiṃ āṇatto bahukampi khaṇatīti sacepi sakaladivasaṃ khaṇati, āṇāpakassa ekaṃyeva pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana kusito hoti, punappunaṃ āṇāpetabbo. Taṃ āṇāpetvā khaṇāpentassa vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva pāḷivaṇṇanā.
86. Regarding the tenth training rule: "Earth that is already there and earth that is not yet there" shows both earth that is already there and earth that is not yet there. In "with few stones" and so on, the meaning should be understood as "few are the stones in it," thus "with few stones." Here, stones are to be understood as those above the size of a fist, and gravel is the size of a fist. Kathala means fragments of pots. Marumba means coarse gravel. Vālikā is just sand. "Mostly dust" means that in three parts, two parts are dust, and one is any of the stones, etc. "Not firm" means not firm in various ways, such as by reason of being used for pot-baking kilns or potter's kilns. However, that is not separate; it should be understood as one of the pure dust, etc. "Mostly gravel" means mostly gravel. It is said that in the elephant's belly, after bringing a full load of gravel, washing it in a trough, knowing the state of mostly gravel in the earth, the monks themselves dug a pond. However, the two terms "with little dust, with little clay" in the middle enter into the five categories of mostly stones, etc., for this is a showing of the distinction of those two. "Digs oneself, there is an offense of pācittiya": here, a pācittiya should be understood for each strike. "Once ordered, digs much": even if he digs the entire day, there is only one pācittiya for the one who ordered. But if he is lazy, he should be ordered again and again. For one causing him to dig by ordering him, there is a pācittiya for each utterance. This is the explanation of the Pāli.
Ayaṃ pana pāḷimuttakavinicchayo – ‘‘pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati. Khatāyeva hi pokkharaṇī nāma hoti, tasmā ayaṃ kappiyavohāro. Esa nayo ‘‘vāpiṃ taḷākaṃ āvāṭaṃ khaṇā’’tiādīsupi. ‘‘Imaṃ okāsaṃ khaṇa, imasmiṃ okāse pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇā’’ti vattuṃ pana na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Kandaṃ khaṇa, mūlaṃ khaṇā’’ti aniyāmetvā vattuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Imaṃ valliṃ khaṇa, imasmiṃ okāse kandaṃ vā mūlaṃ vā khaṇā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Pokkharaṇiṃ sodhentehi yo kuṭehi ussiñcituṃ sakkā hoti tanukakaddamo, taṃ apanetuṃ vaṭṭati, bahalaṃ na vaṭṭati. Ātapena sukkhakaddamo phalati, tatra yo heṭṭhā pathaviyā asambaddho, tameva apanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Udakena gataṭṭhāne udakapappaṭako nāma hoti, vātappahārena calati, taṃ apanetuṃ vaṭṭati.
However, this is a judgment outside the Pāli: it is permissible to say, "Dig a pond." For a pond is indeed something that is dug, therefore, this is permissible usage. This method applies to "dig a reservoir, a lake, a pit," and so on. However, it is not permissible to say, "Dig this space, dig a pond in this space." It is permissible to say, without specifying, "Dig a tuber, dig a root." It is not permissible to say, "Dig this creeper, dig a tuber or a root in this space." For those cleaning a pond, it is permissible to remove thin mud that can be bailed out with pots, but not thick mud. Dry mud cracks in the sun; there, it is permissible to remove only that which is not connected to the earth below. In a place wetted by water, there is something called a water crust, which moves with the force of the wind; it is permissible to remove that.
Pokkharaṇīādīnaṃ taṭaṃ bhijjitvā udakasāmantā patati, sace omakacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭhaṃ, chindituṃ vā bhindituṃ vā vaṭṭati, cātumāsato uddhaṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana udakeyeva patati, deve atirekacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭhepi udakeyeva udakassa patitattā vaṭṭati. Pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ soṇḍiṃ khaṇanti, sace tattha paṭhamameva sukhumarajaṃ patati, tañce devena ovaṭṭhaṃ hoti, cātumāsaccayena akappiyapathavīsaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Udake pariyādiṇṇe soṇḍiṃ sodhentehi taṃ vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace paṭhamameva udakena pūrati, pacchā rajaṃ patati, taṃ vikopetuṃ vaṭṭati. Tattha hi deve vassantepi udakeyeva udakaṃ patatīti. Piṭṭhipāsāṇe sukhumarajaṃ hoti, deve phusāyante allīyati, tampi cātumāsaccayena vikopetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana akatapabbhāre vammiko uṭṭhito hoti, yathāsukhaṃ vikopetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace abbhokāse uṭṭhahati, omakacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭhoyeva vaṭṭati. Rukkhādīsu āruḷhaupacikāmattikāyapi eseva nayo. Gaṇḍuppādagūthamūsikukkaragokaṇṭakādīsupi eseva nayo.
If the bank of ponds, etc., breaks and falls along the edge of the water, it is permissible to cut or break it if the rains are within the four months of the rainy season, but not beyond the four months. But if it falls only into water, it is permissible even if the rains are beyond the excess four months, since it is only water falling into water. If one digs a hole in a stone slab, and if fine dust falls there first, and if it has been rained on by the deity, it becomes counted as impermissible earth after the passing of four months. It is not permissible to disturb the hole when cleaning it after it has been filled with water. But if it is filled with water first, and dust falls later, it is permissible to disturb it. For even when the deity rains, it is only water falling into water. Fine dust on a flat stone becomes sticky when touched by the deity; it is also not permissible to disturb it after the passing of four months. If a termite mound has risen in an unbuilt area, it is permissible to disturb it as desired. If it rises in the open air, it is permissible only if the rains are within the four months of the rainy season. This same method applies to the clay clinging to trees, etc. This same method applies to earthworms, excrement, mice, dogs, thorny bushes, etc.
Gokaṇṭako nāma gāvīnaṃ khuracchinnakaddamo vuccati. Sace pana heṭṭhimatalena bhūmisambandho hoti, ekadivasampi na vaṭṭati. Kasitaṭṭhānepi naṅgalacchinnamattikāpiṇḍaṃ gaṇhantassa eseva nayo. Purāṇasenāsanaṃ hoti acchadanaṃ vā vinaṭṭhacchadanaṃ vā, atirekacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭhaṃ jātapathavīsaṅkhyameva gacchati. Tato avasesaṃ chadaniṭṭhakaṃ vā gopānasīādikaṃ upakaraṇaṃ vā ‘‘iṭṭhakaṃ gaṇhāmi gopanasiṃ bhittipādaṃ padarattharaṇaṃ pāsāṇatthambhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti saññāya gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Tena saddhiṃ mattikā patati, anāpatti. Bhittimattikaṃ gaṇhantassa pana āpatti. Sace yā yā atintā taṃ taṃ gaṇhāti, anāpatti.
Gokaṇṭaka is the mud churned up by the hooves of cows. If there is a connection to the ground with the lower surface, it is not permissible even for one day. This same method applies to taking a lump of mud clod that has been plowed in a cultivated area. An old dwelling that has no roof or whose roof has been destroyed, having been rained on for more than four months, becomes counted as earth that has already come into being. Then, it is permissible to take the remaining roofing tiles or equipment such as gutters with the intention, "I am taking a brick, a gutter, a wall base, a floor covering, or a stone pillar." There is no offense if mud falls along with it. But there is an offense for taking wall mud. If one takes whatever falls away easily, there is no offense.
Antogehe mattikāpuñjo hoti, tasmiṃ ekadivasaṃ ovaṭṭhe gehaṃ chādenti, sace sabbo tinto cātumāsaccayena jātapathavīyeva. Athassa uparibhāgoyeva tinto, anto atinto, yattakaṃ tintaṃ taṃ kappiyakārakehi kappiyavohārena apanāmetvā sesaṃ yathāsukhaṃ vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭati. Udakena temetvā ekābaddhāyeva hi jātapathavī hoti, na itarāti.
In the inner chamber, there is a pile of clay; one day, they are roofing the house with it. If it is all wet, it is considered newly-grown earth after four months. But if only the top part is wet and the inside is dry, then as much of the wet part as possible should be removed by those who make things allowable, using an allowable manner, and the rest can be shaped as desired. Because when moistened with water, it becomes newly-grown earth immediately, not otherwise.
Abbhokāse mattikāpākāro hoti, atirekacātumāsaṃ ce ovaṭṭho jātapathavīsaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tattha laggapaṃsuṃ pana allahatthena chupitvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace iṭṭhakapākāro hoti, yebhuyyenakathalaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, yathāsukhaṃ vikopetuṃ vaṭṭati. Abbhokāse ṭhitamaṇḍapatthambhaṃ ito cito ca sañcāletvā pathaviṃ vikopentena gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati, ujukameva uddharituṃ vaṭṭati. Aññampi sukkharukkhaṃ vā sukkhakhāṇukaṃ vā gaṇhantassa eseva nayo. Navakammatthaṃ pāsāṇaṃ vā rukkhaṃ vā daṇḍakehi uccāletvā pavaṭṭentā gacchanti, tattha pathavī bhijjati, sace suddhacittā pavaṭṭenti, anāpatti. Atha pana tena apadesena pathaviṃ bhinditukāmāyeva honti, āpatti. Sākhādīni kaḍḍhantānampi pathaviyaṃ dārūni phālentānampi eseva nayo.
If there is a mud wall in the open air, it is counted as newly-grown earth if it remains wet for more than four months. However, it is permissible to pick off the attached dust by patting it with a damp hand. If it is a brick wall, it stands mostly in a hard place; it is permissible to dismantle it as desired. When dismantling the earth by moving a pavilion pillar standing in the open air from here to there, it is not permissible to take it; it must be lifted straight up. The same method applies to taking any dry tree or dry stump. When going along lifting and rolling stones or trees with levers for construction, the earth is broken; if they roll it with pure intention, there is no offense. But if they intend to break the earth under that pretext, there is an offense. The same method applies to pulling branches and splitting wood on the ground.
Pathaviyaṃ aṭṭhisūcikaṇṭakādīsupi yaṃkiñci ākoṭetuṃ vā pavesetuṃ vā na vaṭṭati. Passāvadhārāya vegena pathaviṃ bhindissāmīti evaṃ passāvampi kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, karontassa bhijjati, āpatti. Visamabhūmiṃ samaṃ karissāmīti sammuñjaniyā ghaṃsitumpi na vaṭṭati, vattasīseneva hi sammajjitabbaṃ. Keci kattarayaṭṭhiyā bhūmiṃ koṭṭenti, pādaṅguṭṭhakena vilikhanti, ‘‘caṅkamitaṭṭhānaṃ dassessāmā’’ti punappunaṃ bhūmiṃ bhindantā caṅkamanti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati. Vīriyasampaggahatthaṃ pana samaṇadhammaṃ karontena suddhacittena caṅkamituṃ vaṭṭati, ‘‘hatthaṃ dhovissāmā’’ti pathaviyaṃ ghaṃsanti, na vaṭṭati. Aghaṃsantena pana allahatthaṃ pathaviyaṃ ṭhapetvā rajaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Keci kaṇḍukacchuādīhi ābādhikā chinnataṭādīsu aṅgapaccaṅgāni ghaṃsanti na vaṭṭati.
It is not permissible to hammer or insert anything into the earth, even if it is bone needles or thorns. It is not permissible to urinate in such a way that the stream breaks the earth with force; if one does so and it breaks, there is an offense. It is not permissible to scrub with a broom to level uneven ground; it should be swept only with the round head. Some strike the ground with a staff, scratch it with their big toe, or walk back and forth, repeatedly breaking the ground, saying, "We will show the place for walking meditation"; all of this is not permissible. However, one who is practicing the ascetic's duty with effort and a pure mind may walk meditation. It is not permissible to scrub one’s hands on the ground, saying, "We will wash our hands." But it is permissible to place a damp hand on the ground and take dust without scrubbing. Some who are afflicted with itching, scabies, etc., rub their limbs on broken banks, etc.; this is not permissible.
87.Khaṇati vā khaṇāpeti vāti antamaso pādaṅguṭṭhakenapi sammajjanīsalākāyapi sayaṃ vā khaṇati, aññena vā khaṇāpeti.Bhindati vā bhedāpeti vāti antamaso udakampi chaḍḍento sayaṃ vā bhindati, aññena vā bhindāpeti.Dahati vā dahāpeti vāti antamaso pattampi pacanto sayaṃ vā dahati, aññena vā dahāpeti. Yattakesu ṭhānesu aggiṃ deti vā dāpeti vā tattakāni pācittiyāni. Pattaṃ pacantenapi hi pubbe pakkaṭṭhāneyeva hi pacitabbo. Adaḍḍhāya pathaviyā aggiṃ ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Pattapacanakapālassa pana upari aggiṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dārūnaṃ upari ṭhapeti, so aggi tāni dahanto gantvā pathaviṃ dahati, na vaṭṭati. Iṭṭhakakapālādīsupi eseva nayo.
87. Khaṇati vā khaṇāpeti vā means that one digs oneself or has another dig, even if with the big toe or with a broom bristle. Bhindati vā bhedāpeti vā means that one breaks oneself or has another break, even when merely throwing water. Dahati vā dahāpeti vā means that one burns oneself or has another burn, even when merely cooking a leaf. There are as many pācittiyas as there are places where one sets fire or has fire set. Even when cooking a leaf, it should be cooked in a place that has been previously burned. It is not permissible to place fire on unburned ground. However, it is permissible to place fire on top of a pot for cooking leaves. One places it on top of wood, and that fire, burning those, goes and burns the earth; this is not permissible. The same method applies to brick pots, etc.
Tatrāpi hi iṭṭhakādīnaṃyeva upari ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Tesaṃ anupādānattā. Na hi tāni aggissa upādānasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Sukkhakhāṇusukkharukkhādīsupi aggiṃ dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana pathaviṃ appattameva nibbāpetvā gamissāmīti deti, vaṭṭati. Pacchā nibbāpetuṃ na sakkoti, avisayattā anāpatti. Tiṇukkaṃ gahetvā gacchanto hatthe ḍayhamāne bhūmiyaṃ pāteti, anāpatti. Patitaṭṭhāneyeva upādānaṃ datvā aggiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Daḍḍhapathaviyā ca yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ usumāya anugataṃ, sabbaṃ vikopetuṃ vaṭṭatīti tattheva vuttaṃ. Yo pana ajānanako bhikkhu araṇīsahitena aggiṃ nibbattetvā hatthena ukkhipitvā ‘‘kiṃ karomī’’ti vadati, ‘‘jālehī’’ti vattabbo, ‘‘hattho ḍayhatī’’ti vadati, ‘‘yathā na ḍayhati tathā karohī’’ti vattabbo. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ pātehī’’ti pana na vattabbo. Sace hatthe ḍayhamāne pāteti ‘‘pathaviṃ dahissāmī’’ti apātitattā anāpatti. Patitaṭṭhāne pana aggiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
Even there, it is permissible to place it only on top of bricks, etc. Why? Because they are not fuel. They are not counted as fuel for the fire. It is not permissible to set fire to dry stumps or dry trees. But if one sets it intending to extinguish it before it reaches the earth, it is permissible. If one is unable to extinguish it later, there is no offense because it is beyond one's control. While walking along holding a burning torch, if it burns in one's hand, one drops it on the ground, there is no offense. In the Mahāpaccari, it is said that it is permissible to make a fire by adding fuel only to the place where it fell. It is also stated there that all the place affected by the heat of the burned earth is permissible to dismantle. But if a bhikkhu who does not know creates fire with fire sticks and, lifting it up with his hand, says, "What should I do?" he should be told, "Burn it." If he says, "My hand is burning," he should be told, "Do it in such a way that it does not burn." But he should not be told, "Drop it on the ground." If he drops it while it is burning in his hand, there is no offense because he did not drop it intending to burn the earth. In the Kurundi, it is said that it is permissible to make a fire in the place where it fell.
88.Anāpatti imaṃ jānātiādīsu ‘‘imassa thambhassa āvāṭaṃ jāna, mahāmattikaṃ jāna, thusamattikaṃ jāna, mahāmattikaṃ dehi, thusamattikaṃ dehi, mattikaṃ āhara, paṃsuṃ āhara, mattikāya attho, paṃsunā attho, imassa thambhassa āvāṭaṃ kappiyaṃ karohi, imaṃ mattikaṃ kappiyaṃ karohi, imaṃ paṃsuṃ kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti evamattho veditabbo.
88.Anāpatti imaṃ jānātiādīsu means that the meaning should be understood as: "Know the hole of this pillar, know the coarse clay, know the fine clay, give the coarse clay, give the fine clay, bring the clay, bring the dust, there is a need for clay, there is a need for dust, make the hole of this pillar allowable, make this clay allowable, make this dust allowable."
Asañciccāti pāsāṇarukkhādīni vā pavaṭṭentassa kattaradaṇḍena vā āhacca āhacca gacchantassa pathavī bhijjati, sā ‘‘tena bhindissāmī’’ti evaṃ sañcicca abhinnattā asañcicca bhinnā nāma hoti. Iti asañcicca bhindantassa anāpatti.Asatiyāti aññavihito kenaci saddhiṃ kiñci kathento pādaṅguṭṭhakena vā kattarayaṭṭhiyā vā pathaviṃ vilikhanto tiṭṭhati, evaṃ asatiyā vilikhantassa vā bhindantassa vā anāpatti.Ajānantassāti antogehe ovaṭṭhaṃ channaṃ pathaviṃ ‘‘akappiyapathavī’’ti na jānāti, ‘‘kappiyapathavī’’ti saññāya vikopeti, ‘‘khaṇāmi bhindāmi dahāmī’’ti vā na jānāti, kevalaṃ saṅgopanatthāya khaṇittādīni vā ṭhapeti, ḍayhamānahattho vā aggiṃ pāteti, evaṃ ajānantassa anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
Asañciccāti means that the earth is broken while rolling stones or trees, or while going along striking with a staff; because it is broken unintentionally without intending to break it in that way, it is called unintentionally broken. Thus, there is no offense for breaking unintentionally. Asatiyāti means that while talking about something with someone else, with a distracted mind, one stands scratching the ground with a big toe or a staff; thus, there is no offense for scratching or breaking with a distracted mind. Ajānantassāti means that one does not know that the earth covered with thatch inside the inner chamber is "unallowable earth," and dismantles it with the perception that it is "allowable earth," or one does not know "I am digging, breaking, burning," but merely places digging tools, etc., for the sake of storage, or one drops fire because one’s hand is burning; thus, there is no offense for one who does not know. The rest is clear in meaning.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Threefold in origin – it arises from body and mind, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind. It is an inactive offense, an offense involving intention, an offense concerning a living thing, a rule by designation, a bodily action, a verbal action, a threefold mental state, and a threefold feeling.
Pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The Tenth Pathavīkhaṇana Sikkhāpada (Rule on Digging the Earth) is Finished.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena musāvādavaggo paṭhamo.
The First Musāvāda Vagga (Section on False Speech) is Completed with the Order of Explanation.
2. Bhūtagāmavaggo
2. Bhūtagāma Vagga (Section on Living Things)
1. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Bhūtagāma Sikkhāpada Vaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Rule on Living Things)
89.Senāsanavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –anādiyantoti tassā vacanaṃ agaṇhanto.Dārakassa bāhuṃ ākoṭesīti ukkhittaṃ pharasuṃ niggahetuṃ asakkonto manussānaṃ cakkhuvisayātīte mahārājasantikā laddhe rukkhaṭṭhakadibbavimāne nipannassa dārakassa bāhuṃ thanamūleyeva chindi.Na kho metaṃ patirūpantiādimhi ayaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – himavante kira pakkhadivasesu devatāsannipāto hoti, tattha rukkhadhammaṃ pucchanti – ‘‘tvaṃ rukkhadhamme ṭhitā na ṭhitā’’ti? Rukkhadhammo nāma rukkhe chijjamāne rukkhadevatāya manopadosassa akaraṇaṃ. Tattha yā devatā rukkhadhamme aṭṭhitā hoti, sā devatāsannipātaṃ pavisituṃ na labhati. Iti sā devatā imañca rukkhadhamme aṭṭhānapaccayaṃ ādīnavaṃ addasa, bhagavato ca sammukhā sutapubbadhammadesanānusārena tathāgatassa chaddantādikāle pubbacaritaṃ anussari. Tenassā etadahosi – ‘‘na kho metaṃ patirūpaṃ…pe… voropeyya’’nti.Yaṃnūnāhaṃ bhagavato etamatthaṃ āroceyyanti idaṃ panassā ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu sapitiko putto, addhā bhagavā imaṃ imassa ajjhācāraṃ sutvā mariyādaṃ bandhissati, sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessatī’’ti paṭisañcikkhantiyā ahosi.Sacajja tvaṃ devateti sace ajja tvaṃ devate.Pasaveyyāsīti janeyyāsi uppādeyyāsi. Evañca pana vatvā bhagavā taṃ devataṃ saññāpento –
89.In the first Sikkhāpada of the Senāsanavagga (Section on Lodgings), anādiyantoti means not accepting that statement. Dārakassa bāhuṃ ākoṭesīti means being unable to stop the raised ax, he cut off the arm of a boy who was lying in a divine palace in a tree trunk, obtained from the great king beyond the sight of humans, right at the base of the breast. In Na kho metaṃ patirūpanti etc., this is the concise explanation: It is said that in the Himalayas, there is a gathering of deities on the fortnightly days, where they ask about the law concerning trees – "Do you abide in the law concerning trees or not?" The law concerning trees means that the tree deity does not have mental displeasure when the tree is being cut. There, the deity who does not abide in the law concerning trees is not allowed to enter the gathering of deities. Thus, that deity saw both this danger of not abiding in the law concerning trees and, according to the Dhamma teaching previously heard in the presence of the Blessed One, recollected the past conduct of the Tathāgata at the time of Chaddanta and so on. Therefore, she had this thought: "This is not proper for me…to remove it." Yaṃnūnāhaṃ bhagavato etamatthaṃ āroceyyanti this occurred to her as she reflected, "This bhikkhu is someone's son; surely the Blessed One, having heard about this transgression of his, will set a limit, will prescribe a rule." Sacajja tvaṃ devateti means, "If you, deity, today." Pasaveyyāsīti means, "May you generate, may you produce." Having said this, the Blessed One, making that deity understand –
‘‘Yo ve uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ, rathaṃ bhantaṃva vāraye;
"Who controls the rising anger,
Like a charioteer controls a rolling chariot;
Him I call a charioteer, the rest are merely holders of the reins." (dha. pa. 222);
Imaṃ gāthamabhāsi. Gāthāpariyosāne sā devatā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Puna bhagavā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desento –
He spoke this verse. At the end of the verse, that deity was established in the fruition of stream-entry. Again, the Blessed One, teaching the Dhamma to the assembled company –
‘‘Yo uppatitaṃ vineti kodhaṃ, visaṭaṃ sappavisaṃva osadhehi;
"He who subdues rising anger, as one neutralizes spreading poison with medicine;
That bhikkhu abandons this shore and the further shore, as a snake sheds its old worn-out skin." (su. ni. 1);
Imaṃ gāthamabhāsi. Tatra paṭhamagāthā dhammapade saṅgahaṃ āruḷhā, dutiyā suttanipāte, vatthu pana vinayeti. Atha bhagavā dhammaṃ desentoyeva tassā devatāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ āvajjanto patirūpaṃ ṭhānaṃ disvā ‘‘gaccha, devate, asukasmiṃ okāse rukkho vivitto, tasmiṃ upagacchā’’ti āha. So kira rukkho na āḷaviraṭṭhe, jetavanassa antoparikkhepe, yassa devaputtassa pariggaho ahosi, so cuto; tasmā ‘‘vivitto’’ti vutto. Tato paṭṭhāya ca pana sā devatā sammāsambuddhato laddhaparihārā buddhupaṭṭhāyikā ahosi. Yadā devatāsamāgamo hoti, tadā mahesakkhadevatāsu āgacchantīsu aññā appesakkhā devatā yāva mahāsamuddacakkavāḷapabbatā tāva paṭikkamanti. Ayaṃ pana attano vasanaṭṭhāne nisīditvāva dhammaṃ suṇāti. Yampi paṭhamayāme bhikkhū pañhaṃ pucchanti, majjhimayāme devatā, taṃ sabbaṃ tattheva nisīditvā suṇāti. Cattāro ca mahārājānopi bhagavato upaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā gacchantā taṃ devataṃ disvāva gacchanti.
He spoke this verse. There, the first verse is included in the Dhammapada, the second in the Suttanipāta, but the story is in the Vinaya. Then, while teaching the Dhamma, the Blessed One, considering the dwelling place of that deity, saw a suitable place and said, "Go, deity, there is a secluded tree in such and such a place; approach it." It is said that this tree was not in the Āḷavi country but within the outer enclosure of Jetavana. The deity of that place, whose retinue belonged to a son of the gods, had passed away; therefore, it was called "secluded." From then on, that deity, having received support from the Fully Enlightened One, became an attendant of the Buddha. When there is a gathering of deities, other deities of lesser power retreat as far as the great ocean, the world-circle mountain, when deities of great power arrive. But this one sits in her own dwelling place and listens to the Dhamma. Also, whatever questions the bhikkhus ask in the first watch of the night, and the deities in the middle watch, she listens to all of that while sitting there. And the four great kings, when coming and going to attend upon the Blessed One, go only after seeing that deity.
90.Bhūtagāmapātabyatāyāti ettha bhavanti ahuvuñcātibhūtā;jāyanti vaḍḍhanti jātā vaḍḍhitā cāti attho.Gāmoti rāsi; bhūtānaṃ gāmotibhūtagāmo;bhūtā eva vā gāmobhūtagāmo;patiṭṭhitaharitatiṇarukkhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pātabyassa bhāvopātabyatā;chedanabhedanādīhi yathāruci paribhuñjitabbatāti attho. Tassābhūtagāmapātabyatāya;nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, bhūtagāmapātabyatāhetu, bhūtagāmassa chedanādipaccayā pācittiyanti attho.
90.Bhūtagāmapātabyatāyāti in this context, bhūtā means those that are, or have come into being; that is, they are born and grow, or have been born and grown. Gāmoti means a group; bhūtagāmo means a group of beings; or bhūtagāmo means beings that are a group. This is a designation for established green grass, trees, etc. Pātabyatā means the state of being liable to destruction; that is, it can be used at will through cutting, splitting, etc. Tassā bhūtagāmapātabyatāyati is a locative case used in the sense of a cause; the meaning is that because of the destruction of living things, there is a pācittiya.
91.Idāni taṃ bhūtagāmaṃ vibhajitvā dassentobhūtagāmo nāma pañca bījajātānītiādimāha. Tatthabhūtagāmo nāmāti bhūtagāmaṃ uddharitvā yasmiṃ sati bhūtagāmo hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañca bījajātānī’’ti āhāti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūle jāyantī’’tiādīni na samenti. Na hi mūlabījādīni mūlādīsu jāyanti, mūlādīsu jāyamānāni pana tāni bījākatāni, tasmā evamettha vaṇṇanā veditabbā –bhūtagāmo nāmāti vibhajitabbapadaṃ.Pañcāti tassa vibhāgaparicchedo.Bījajātānīti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Tassattho – bījehi jātāni bījajātāni; rukkhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aparo nayo – bījāni ca tāni vijātāni ca pasūtāni nibbattapaṇṇamūlānīti bījajātāni. Etena allavālikādīsu ṭhapitānaṃ nibbattapaṇṇamūlānaṃ siṅgiverādīnaṃ saṅgaho kato hoti.
91.Now, showing that living thing by dividing it, he said, beginning with bhūtagāmo nāma pañca bījajātānīti. There, bhūtagāmo nāmāti in order to show that when there is a living thing, it becomes a living thing, he said "pañca bījajātānī" (five kinds of seeds), so it is said in the commentaries. Even so, the phrases "yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūle jāyantī" etc., do not fit. For root-seeds etc., do not grow in roots etc.; but those that grow in roots etc., are made into seeds; therefore, the explanation should be understood in this way – bhūtagāmo nāmāti is a term to be divided. Pañcāti is the limit of that division. Bījajātānīti is an indication of the limited Dhamma. Its meaning is – bījajātāni means born from seeds; this is a designation for trees etc. Another method – bījajātāni means seeds that are of various kinds, produced, originating with shoots and roots. With this, the gathering of ginger etc., which have shoots and roots originating after being placed in wet soil, is done.
‘‘mūlabīja’’ntiādimāha. Tesaṃ uddeso pākaṭo eva. Niddeseyāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūle jāyanti mūle sañjāyantīti ettha bījato nibbattena bījaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi āluvakaserukamaluppalapuṇḍarīkakuvalayakandapāṭalimūlādibhede mūle gacchavallirukkhādīni jāyanti sañjāyanti, tāni yamhi mūle jāyanti ceva sañjāyanti ca tañca, pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ haliddādi ca sabbampi etaṃ mūlabījaṃ nāma. Eseva nayo khandhabījādīsu. Yevāpanakakhandhabījesu panettha ambāṭakaindasālanuhīpāḷibhaddakaṇikārādīni khandhabījāni, amūlavalli caturassavallikaṇavīrādīni phaḷubījāni makacisumanajayasumanādīni aggabījāni, ambajambūpanasaṭṭhiādīni bījabījānīti daṭṭhabbāni.
He said beginning with ‘‘mūlabīja’’nti. Their enumeration is indeed obvious. In the definition, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūle jāyanti mūle sañjāyantīti, by the seed originating, the seed is shown, therefore, the meaning should be seen in this way: Yāni vā panaññānipi atthi means whatever else there is in the various kinds of roots such as āluvaka, kaseru, kamala, uppala, puṇḍarīka, kuvalaya, kanda, pāṭalimūla, in the roots, plants, creepers, and trees grow and originate; that in which they grow and originate is called root-seed, as well as turmeric etc., which is mentioned in the Pāḷi. The same method applies to stem-seeds etc. Among those that are capable of being planted as stem-seeds are ambāṭaka, indasāla, nuhīpāḷi, bhaddakaṇikāra etc., as fruit-seeds are amūlavalli, caturassavalli, kaṇavīra etc., as shoot-seeds are makaci, sumana, najayasumana etc., and as seed-seeds are amba, jambū, panasa, saṭṭhi etc., should be seen.
92.Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhūtagāmapātabyatāya pācittiya’’nti tattha saññāvasena āpattānāpattibhedaṃ pātabyatābhedañca dassentobīje bījasaññītiādimāha. Tattha yathā ‘‘sālīnaṃ cepi odanaṃ bhuñjatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.76) sālitaṇḍulānaṃ odano ‘‘sālīnaṃ odano’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bījato sambhūto bhūtagāmo ‘‘bīja’’nti vuttoti veditabbo. Yaṃ pana ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10) vuttaṃ bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ bījaṃ, taṃ dukkaṭavatthu. Atha vā yadetaṃ ‘‘bhūtagāmo nāmā’’ti sikkhāpadavibhaṅgassa ādipadaṃ, tena saddhiṃ yojetvā yaṃ bījaṃ bhūtagāmo nāma hoti, tasmiṃ bīje bījasaññī satthakādīni gahetvā sayaṃ vā chindati aññena vā chedāpeti, pāsāṇādīni gahetvā sayaṃ vā bhindati aññena vā bhedāpeti, aggiṃ upasaṃharitvā sayaṃ vā pacati aññena vā pacāpeti, āpatti pācittiyassāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Yathārutaṃ pana gahetvā bhūtagāmavinimuttassa bījassa chindanādibhedāya pātabyatāya pācittiyaṃ na vattabbaṃ.
92. Now, regarding what was said, "pācittiya for harming plant life (bhūtagāma)," here, showing the distinction between offense and non-offense and the distinctions in what can be harmed, based on perception, he says, "perceiving seed in seed," etc. Therein, just as in "even if he eats rice made from sāli rice," etc. (ma. ni. 1.76), cooked rice made from sāli rice grains is called "sāli rice," so too, plant life that arises from a seed should be understood as being called "seed." However, the seed that has been set aside after performing the act of freeing plant life, as stated in "abstaining from harming seed-life and plant-life" (dī. ni. 1.10), etc., is a dukkaṭa object. Or, alternatively, connecting it with the initial word of the training rule's explanation, which is "what is called plant-life," that seed which is called plant-life, perceiving seed in that seed, taking knives, etc., either cutting it oneself or having another cut it, taking stones, etc., either breaking it oneself or having another break it, bringing fire near, either cooking it oneself or having another cook it, the offense is pācittiya—thus the meaning should be understood here. However, taking it literally, a pācittiya offense should not be stated for the act of harming seed that has been freed from plant life, by means of cutting, etc.
Ayañhettha vinicchayakathā – bhūtagāmaṃ vikopentassa pācittiyaṃ bhūtagāmaparimocitaṃ pañcavidhampi bījagāmaṃ vikopentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Bījagāmabhūtagāmo nāmesa atthi udakaṭṭho, atthi thalaṭṭho. Tattha udakaṭṭho sāsapamattikā tilabījakādibhedā sapaṇṇikā apaṇṇikā ca sabbā sevālajāti antamaso udakapappaṭakaṃ upādāya ‘‘bhūtagāmo’’ti veditabbo. Udakapappaṭako nāma upari thaddho pharusavaṇṇo, heṭṭhā mudu nīlavaṇṇo hoti. Tattha yassa sevālassa mūlaṃ orūhitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ, tassa pathavī ṭhānaṃ. Yo udake sañcarati, tassa udakaṃ. Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ yattha katthaci vikopentassa uddharitvā vā ṭhānantaraṃ saṅkāmentassa pācittiyaṃ. Udake sañcarantaṃ vikopentasseva pācittiyaṃ. Hatthehi pana ito cito ca viyūhitvā nhāyituṃ vaṭṭati, sakalañhi udakaṃ tassa ṭhānaṃ. Tasmā na so ettāvatā ṭhānantaraṃ saṅkāmito hoti. Udakato pana udakena vinā sañcicca ukkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati, udakena saddhiṃ ukkhipitvā puna udake pakkhipituṃ vaṭṭati. Parissāvanantarena nikkhamati, kappiyaṃ kārāpetvāva udakaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Uppalinīpaduminīādīni jalajavallitiṇāni udakato uddharantassa vā tattheva vikopentassa vā pācittiyaṃ. Parehi uppāṭitāni vikopentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Tāni hi bījagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tilabījakasāsapamattakasevālopi udakato uddhato amilāto aggabījasaṅgahaṃ gacchati. Mahāpaccariyādīsu ‘‘anantakatilabījakaudakapappaṭakādīni dukkaṭavatthukānī’’ti vuttaṃ, tattha kāraṇaṃ na dissati. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sampuṇṇabhūtagāmo na hoti, tasmā dukkaṭa’’nti vuttaṃ, tampi na sameti, bhūtagāme hi pācittiyaṃ, bījagāme dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Asampuṇṇabhūtagāmo nāma tatiyo koṭṭhāso neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāsu āgato. Atha etaṃ bījagāmasaṅgahaṃ gacchissatīti, tampi na yuttaṃ, abhūtagāmamūlattā tādisassa bījagāmassāti. Apica ‘‘garukalahukesu garuke ṭhātabba’’nti etaṃ vinayalakkhaṇaṃ.
Herein is the deciding statement: pācittiya for one who injures plant life; dukkaṭa for one who injures any of the five kinds of seed-life that has been freed from plant life. Seed-life and plant life: there is some that exists in water, and some that exists on land. Therein, that which exists in water—all kinds of algae, with and without leaves, beginning with mustard seeds, mattikā, sesame seeds, etc., up to and including water-fern—should be understood as "plant life." Water-fern is rigid and rough-colored on top, soft and blue-colored underneath. Of that algae, for that which has its root descending and established in the earth, the earth is its place. That which moves in the water, the water is its place. Pācittiya for one who injures that which is established in the earth, by moving it, or transferring it to another place. Pācittiya for one who injures that which moves in the water. However, it is permissible to scatter it here and there with the hands and bathe, for all the water is its place. Therefore, it is not, by that much, transferred to another place. However, it is not permissible to deliberately lift it from the water without water; it is permissible to lift it with water and put it back in the water. If it comes out through a filter, the water should be used only after having it made allowable. For one who lifts water-lilies, lotuses, etc., water-born creepers and grasses from the water, or injures them there, pācittiya. Dukkaṭa for one who injures those that have been uprooted by others. For those go into the category of seed-life. Sesame seed, mustard seed, mattaka algae, even when lifted from the water, if not wilted, go into the category of first seed. In the Mahāpaccariya, it is said, "endless sesame seed, water-fern, etc., are objects of dukkaṭa," the reason is not seen there. In the Andhaka-aṭṭhakathā, it is said, "it is not complete plant life, therefore dukkaṭa," that too does not fit, for pācittiya is stated for plant life, dukkaṭa for seed-life. An incomplete plant life is a third category that has not come up either in the Pāḷi or in the commentaries. If it goes into the category of seed-life, that too is not fitting, because such a seed-life has an origin in non-plant life. Moreover, "in serious and light offenses, the serious should be established" is a characteristic of the Vinaya.
Thalaṭṭhe – chinnarukkhānaṃ avasiṭṭho haritakhāṇu nāma hoti. Tattha kakudhakarañjapiyaṅgupanasādīnaṃ khāṇu uddhaṃ vaḍḍhati, so bhūtagāmena saṅgahito. Tālanāḷikerādīnaṃ khāṇu uddhaṃ na vaḍḍhati, so bījagāmena saṅgahito. Kadaliyā pana aphalitāya khāṇu bhūtagāmena saṅgahito, phalitāya bījagāmena. Kadalī pana phalitā yāva nīlapaṇṇā, tāva bhūtagāmeneva saṅgahitā, tathā phalito veḷu. Yadā pana aggato paṭṭhāya sussati, tadā bījagāmena saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Katarabījagāmena? Phaḷubījagāmena. Kiṃ tato nibbattati? Na kiñci. Yadi hi nibbatteyya, bhūtagāmeneva saṅgahaṃ gaccheyya. Indasālādirukkhe chinditvā rāsiṃ karonti, kiñcāpi rāsikatadaṇḍakehi ratanappamāṇāpi sākhā nikkhamanti, bījagāmeneva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tattha maṇḍapatthāya vā vatiatthāya vā valliāropanatthāya vā bhūmiyaṃ nikhaṇanti, mūlesu ceva paṇṇesu ca niggatesu puna bhūtagāmasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Mūlamattesu pana paṇṇamattesu vā niggatesu bījagāmena saṅgahitā eva.
That which exists on land: what remains of cut trees is called a green stump. Therein, the stump of kakudha, karañja, piyaṅgu, jackfruit, sāla, etc., grows upwards; that is included in plant life. The stump of palmyra palms, coconut palms, etc., does not grow upwards; that is included in seed-life. However, the stump of a banana tree that has not borne fruit is included in plant life; that of one that has borne fruit, in seed-life. However, a banana tree that has borne fruit is included in plant life as long as the leaves are blue, so too a bamboo that has borne fruit. But when it withers, starting from the top, then it goes into the category of seed-life. Which seed-life? Fruit seed-life. What arises from that? Nothing. For if something were to arise, it would go into the category of plant life. After cutting down indasāla, etc., trees, they make a pile; even if branches the size of jewels emerge from the sticks in the pile, they go into the category of seed-life. There, they bury it in the ground for the purpose of a pavilion, or for a hedge, or for planting creepers; when roots and leaves have emerged, they again go into the category of plant life. However, if only roots or only leaves have emerged, they are included in seed-life.
Yāni kānici bījāni pathaviyaṃ vā udakena siñcitvā ṭhapitāni, kapālādīsu vā allapaṃsuṃ pakkhipitvā nikkhittāni honti, sabbāni mūlamatte paṇṇamatte vā niggatepi bījāniyeva. Sacepi mūlāni ca upari aṅkuro ca niggacchati, yāva aṅkuro harito na hoti, tāva bījāniyeva. Muggādīnaṃ pana paṇṇesu uṭṭhitesu vīhiādīnaṃ vā aṅkure harite nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇe jāte bhūtagāmasaṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tālaṭṭhīnaṃ paṭhamaṃ sūkaradāṭhā viya mūlaṃ niggacchati. Niggatepi yāva upari pattavaṭṭi na niggacchati, tāva bījagāmoyeva. Nāḷikerassa tacaṃ bhinditvā dantasūci viya aṅkuro niggacchati, yāva migasiṅgasadisā nīlapattavaṭṭi na hoti, tāva bījagāmoyeva. Mūle aniggatepi tādisāya pattavaṭṭiyā jātāya amūlakabhūtagāme saṅgahaṃ gacchati.
Whatever seeds that have been placed in the earth after being sprinkled with water, or that have been placed in pots, etc., after putting in moist soil, all those are seeds even if only a root or only a leaf has emerged. Even if roots and a sprout above emerge, they are still seeds as long as the sprout is not green. However, when the leaves of mung beans, etc., have sprouted, or when the sprout of rice, etc., is green and of blue-leaf color, they go into the category of plant life. For palmyra palms, first a root emerges like a boar's tusk. Even after emerging, it is still seed-life as long as the leaf-stem does not emerge above. After breaking the husk of a coconut, a sprout emerges like an ivory needle; it is still seed-life as long as there is no blue leaf-stem like a deer's horn. Even if a leaf-stem of that kind has arisen without a root emerging, it goes into the category of rootless plant life.
Ambaṭṭhiādīni vīhiādīhi vinicchinitabbāni. Vandākā vā aññā vā yā kāci rukkhe jāyitvā rukkhaṃ ottharati, rukkhova tassā ṭhānaṃ, taṃ vikopentassa vā tato uddharantassa vā pācittiyaṃ. Ekā amūlikā latā hoti, aṅguliveṭhako viya vanappagumbadaṇḍake veṭheti, tassāpi ayameva vinicchayo. Gehamukhapākāravedikācetiyādīsu nīlavaṇṇo sevālo hoti, yāva dve tīṇi pattāni na sañjāyanti tāva aggabījasaṅgahaṃ gacchati. Pattesu jātesu pācittiyavatthu. Tasmā tādisesu ṭhānesu sudhālepampi dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Anupasampannena littassa uparisnehalepo dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace nidāghasamaye sukkhasevālo tiṭṭhati, taṃ sammuñjanīādīhi ghaṃsitvā apanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Pānīyaghaṭādīnaṃ bahi sevālo dukkaṭavatthu, anto abbohāriko. Dantakaṭṭhapūvādīsu kaṇṇakampi abbohārikameva. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘sace gerukaparikammakatā bhitti kaṇṇakitā hoti, coḷakaṃ temetvā pīḷetvā pamajjitabbā’’ti (mahāva. 66).
Ambaṭṭhi, etc., should be decided in accordance with rice, etc. Any vine or other thing that grows on a tree and covers the tree, the tree is its place; for one who injures that or lifts it from there, pācittiya. There is a rootless creeper that wraps around branches of forest bushes like a finger ring; for that too, this is the decision. On house facades, walls, railings, shrines, etc., there is blue-colored algae; as long as two or three leaves have not arisen, it goes into the category of first seed. When leaves have arisen, it is an object of pācittiya. Therefore, it is not permissible to apply even whitewash in such places. It is permissible for one who is not fully ordained to apply a coating of oil on top of what has been coated. If dry algae remains during the hot season, it is permissible to sweep it away with a broom, etc. Algae on the outside of water pots, etc., is an object of dukkaṭa; inside, it is not for use. Even the kaṇṇaka on tooth sticks, cakes, etc., is not for use. For it was said, "if a wall that has been prepared with red ochre is covered with kaṇṇaka, a cloth should be soaked, squeezed, and rubbed on it" (mahāva. 66).
Pāsāṇajātipāsāṇadaddusevālaseleyyakādīni aharitavaṇṇāni apattakāni ca dukkaṭavatthukāni. Ahicchattakaṃ yāva makuḷaṃ hoti, tāva dukkaṭavatthu. Pupphitakālato paṭṭhāya abbohārikaṃ. Allarukkhato pana ahicchattakaṃ gaṇhanto rukkhattacaṃ vikopeti, tasmā tattha pācittiyaṃ. Rukkhapappaṭikāyapi eseva nayo. Yā pana indasālakakudhādīnaṃ pappaṭikā rukkhato muccitvā tiṭṭhati, taṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti. Niyyāsampi rukkhato muccitvā ṭhitaṃ sukkharukkhe vā laggaṃ gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Allarukkhato na vaṭṭati. Lākhāyapi eseva nayo. Rukkhaṃ cāletvā paṇḍupalāsaṃ vā pariṇatakaṇikārādipupphaṃ vā pātentassa pācittiyameva. Hatthakukkuccena mudukesu indasālanuhīkhandhādīsu vā tatthajātakatālapaṇṇādīsu vā akkharaṃ chindantassāpi eseva nayo.
Stony types: stone daddu, algae, seleyyaka, etc., that are not green-colored and without leaves, are objects of dukkaṭa. A mushroom is an object of dukkaṭa as long as it is a bud. From the time it blooms, it is not for use. However, when taking a mushroom from a living tree, he injures the bark of the tree; therefore, there is pācittiya there. The same method applies to tree fungus. However, if fungus of indasāla, kakudha, etc., falls off the tree and remains, there is no offense for taking it. It is permissible to take sap that has fallen off the tree and remains, or that is attached to a dry tree. It is not permissible from a living tree. The same method applies to lac. It is pācittiya for one who shakes a tree and causes yellowed leaves or ripened kaṇikāra flowers, etc., to fall. The same method applies to one who cuts letters out of soft indasāla, nuhī trunks, etc., or palmyra leaves, etc., that grow there, due to scrupulousness of the hand.
Sāmaṇerānaṃ pupphaṃ ocinantānaṃ sākhaṃ onāmetvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tehi pana pupphehi pānīyaṃ na vāsetabbaṃ. Pānīyavāsatthikena sāmaṇeraṃ ukkhipitvā ocināpetabbāni. Phalasākhāpi attanā khāditukāmena na onāmetabbā. Sāmaṇeraṃ ukkhipitvā phalaṃ gāhāpetabbaṃ. Yaṃkiñci gacchaṃ vā lataṃ vā uppāṭentehi sāmaṇerehi saddhiṃ gahetvā ākaḍḍhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Tesaṃ pana ussāhajananatthaṃ anākaḍḍhantena kaḍḍhanākāraṃ dassentena viya agge gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yesaṃ rukkhānaṃ sākhā ruhati, tesaṃ sākhaṃ makkhikābījanādīnaṃ atthāya kappiyaṃ akārāpetvā gahitaṃ tace vā patte vā antamaso nakhenapi vilikhantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Allasiṅgiverādīsupi eseva nayo. Sace pana kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā sītale padese ṭhapitassa mūlaṃ sañjāyati, uparibhāge chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace aṅkuro jāyati, heṭṭhābhāge chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Mūle ca nīlaṅkure ca jāte na vaṭṭati.
It is permissible for novices to bend a branch down and give it to them when picking flowers. However, they should not scent water with those flowers. A novice should be lifted up by one who wishes to scent water and made to pick them. A branch with fruit should not be bent down by one who wishes to eat it himself. A novice should be lifted up and made to take the fruit. When uprooting any bush or vine, they should not take it together with the novices and pull it. However, for the purpose of arousing their enthusiasm, it is permissible to take hold of the end as if showing them the manner of pulling without pulling. If the branches of trees grow, for those branches, if taken for the sake of bees' honey, etc., without having it made allowable, there is dukkaṭa for one who scratches the bark or leaves, even with a nail. The same method applies to fresh ginger, etc. However, if roots arise in that which has been made allowable and placed in a cool place, it is permissible to cut it in the upper part. If a sprout arises, it is permissible to cut it in the lower part. It is not permissible if both a root and a blue sprout have arisen.
Chindati vā chedāpeti vāti antamaso sammuñjanosalākāyapi tiṇāni chindissāmīti bhūmiṃ sammajjanto sayaṃ vā chindati, aññena vā chedāpeti.Bhindati vā bhedāpeti vāti antamaso caṅkamantopi chijjanakaṃ chijjatu, bhijjanakaṃ bhijjatu, caṅkamitaṭṭhānaṃ dassessāmīti sañcicca pādehi akkamanto tiṇavalliādīni sayaṃ vā bhindati aññena vā bhedāpeti. Sacepi hi tiṇaṃ vā lataṃ vā gaṇṭhiṃ karontassa bhijjati, gaṇṭhipi na kātabbo. Tālarukkhādīsu pana corānaṃ anāruhanatthāya dārumakkaṭakaṃ ākoṭenti, kaṇṭake bandhanti, bhikkhussa evaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace dārumakkaṭako rukkhe allīnamattova hoti, rukkhaṃ na pīḷeti, vaṭṭati. ‘‘Rukkhaṃ chinda, lataṃ chinda, kandaṃ vā mūlaṃ vā uppāṭehī’’ti vattumpi vaṭṭati, aniyāmitattā. Niyāmetvā pana ‘‘imaṃ rukkhaṃ chindā’’tiādi vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Nāmaṃ gahetvāpi ‘‘ambarukkhaṃ caturassavalliṃ āluvakandaṃ muñjatiṇaṃ asukarukkhacchalliṃ chinda bhinda uppāṭehī’’tiādivacanampi aniyāmitameva hoti. ‘‘Imaṃ ambarukkha’’ntiādivacanameva hi niyāmitaṃ nāma, taṃ na vaṭṭati.
Cuts or has cut: even if intending to cut grass with a broom-bristle, while sweeping the ground, he either cuts it himself or has another cut it. Breaks or has broken: even while walking, intending that what should be cut be cut, what should be broken be broken, and that he will show the place for walking, deliberately stepping on it with his feet, he either breaks the grass, vines, etc., himself or has another break them. Even if it breaks while making a knot in grass or a vine, a knot should not be made. However, on palmyra palm trees, etc., they fasten wooden monkeys, tie thorns, in order to prevent thieves from climbing; it is not permissible for a bhikkhu to do so. If the wooden monkey is only attached to the tree, it does not harm the tree, it is permissible. It is permissible to say, "cut the tree, cut the vine, uproot the tuber or root," because it is unrestricted. However, it is not permissible to say, specifying, "cut this tree." Even saying, taking a name, "cut, break, uproot this mango tree, square vine, colocasia tuber, muñja grass, asukarukkha bark," etc., is unrestricted. For saying, "this mango tree," etc., is specified; that is not permissible.
Pacati vā pacāpeti vāti antamaso pattampi pacitukāmo tiṇādīnaṃ upari sañcicca aggiṃ karonto sayaṃ vā pacati, aññena vā pacāpetīti sabbaṃ pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpade vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Aniyāmetvā pana ‘‘mugge paca, māse pacā’’tiādi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Ime mugge paca, ime māse pacā’’ti evaṃ vattuṃ na vaṭṭati.
Cooks or has cooked: even if intending to cook a leaf, deliberately making a fire on top of grass, etc., he either cooks it himself or has another cook it—all of that should be understood in the manner stated in the training rule on digging the earth. However, it is permissible to say, without specifying, "cook mung beans, cook lentils," etc. It is not permissible to say, "cook these mung beans, cook these lentils."
Anāpatti imaṃ jānātiādīsu ‘‘imaṃ mūlabhesajjaṃ jāna, imaṃ mūlaṃ vā paṇṇaṃ vā dehi, imaṃ rukkhaṃ vā lataṃ vā āhara, iminā pupphena vā phalena vā paṇṇena vā attho, imaṃ rukkhaṃ vā lataṃ vā phalaṃ vā kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Ettāvatā bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Paribhuñjantena pana bījagāmaparimocanatthaṃ puna kappiyaṃ kāretabbaṃ.
There is no offense, knowing this, etc.: the meaning should be seen as, "know this root medicine, give this root or leaf, bring this tree or vine, this flower or fruit or leaf is needed, make this tree or vine or fruit allowable." To this extent, freeing from plant life is done. However, when using it, it should again be made allowable for the purpose of freeing from seed-life.
Kappiyakaraṇañcettha iminā suttānusārena veditabbaṃ – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ aggiparijitaṃ satthaparijitaṃ nakhaparijitaṃ abījaṃ nibbaṭṭabījameva pañcama’’nti. Tattha ‘‘aggiparijita’’nti agginā parijitaṃ adhibhūtaṃ daḍḍhaṃ phuṭṭhanti attho. ‘‘Satthaparijita’’nti satthena parijitaṃ adhibhūtaṃ chinnaṃ viddhaṃ vāti attho. Esa nayo nakhaparijite. Abījanibbaṭṭabījāni sayameva kappiyāni. Agginā kappiyaṃ karontena kaṭṭhaggigomayaggiādīsu yena kenaci antamaso lohakhaṇḍenapi ādittena kappiyaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tañca kho ekadese phusantena ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbaṃ. Satthena karontena yassa kassaci lohamayasatthassa antamaso sūcinakhacchedanānampi tuṇḍena vā dhārāya vā chedaṃ vā vedhaṃ vā dassentena ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbaṃ. Nakhena kappiyaṃ karontena pūtinakhena na kātabbaṃ. Manussānaṃ pana sīhabyagghadīpimakkaṭādīnaṃ sakuntānañca nakhā tikhiṇā honti, tehi kātabbaṃ. Assamahiṃsasūkaramigagorūpādīnaṃ khurā atikhiṇā, tehi na kātabbaṃ, katampi akataṃ hoti. Hatthinakhā pana khurā na honti, tehi vaṭṭati. Yehi pana kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tehi tatthajātakehipi uddharitvā gahitakehipi chedaṃ vā vedhaṃ vā dassentena ‘‘kappiya’’nti vatvāva kātabbaṃ.
The permissibility of items should be understood here according to this Sutta: "I allow, monks, the use of fruit made permissible in five ways for a monastic: scorched by fire, cut by a knife, pared by a nail, seedless, or with the seed removed." (pāci. 239) Here, "scorched by fire (aggiparijita)" means scorched, burnt, or touched by fire. "Cut by a knife (satthaparijita)" means cut or pierced by a knife. The same method applies to paring by a nail. Seedless fruits and those with seeds removed are permissible by themselves. When making something permissible with fire, it should be made permissible with any kind of fire, whether from wood or cow dung, or even with a heated piece of metal. And that should be done by touching a part of it and saying "kappiya" (permissible). When making something permissible with a knife, it should be done with any kind of metal knife, even with the tip or blade of a needle or nail-cutter, by showing a cut or piercing and saying "kappiya". When making something permissible with a nail, it should not be done with a decaying nail. However, the nails of humans, or animals like lions, tigers, leopards, monkeys, and birds are sharp, and it can be done with those. The hooves of animals like horses, buffaloes, pigs, deer, or cattle are too sharp and should not be used; if used, it is as if not done. But elephant nails are not hooves, so it is acceptable to use them. Those which are acceptable to use, it must be done by showing a cut or piercing, saying "kappiya", either with those that grew there or with those taken after uprooting.
Tattha sacepi bījānaṃ pabbatamatto rāsi rukkhasahassaṃ vā chinditvā ekābaddhaṃ katvā ucchūnaṃ vā mahābhāro bandhitvā ṭhapito hoti, ekasmiṃ bīje vā rukkhasākhāya vā ucchumhi vā kappiye kate sabbaṃ kataṃ hoti. Ucchū ca dārūni ca ekato baddhāni honti, ucchuṃ kappiyaṃ karissāmīti dāruṃ vijjhati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Sace pana yāya rajjuyā vā valliyā vā baddhāni, taṃ vijjhati, na vaṭṭati. Ucchukhaṇḍānaṃ pacchiṃ pūretvā āharanti, ekasmiṃ khaṇḍe kappiye kate sabbaṃ katameva hoti. Maricapakkādīhi missetvā bhattaṃ āharanti, ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti vutte sacepi bhattasitthe vijjhati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Tilataṇḍulādīsupi eseva nayo. Yāguyā pakkhittāni pana ekābaddhāni hutvā na santiṭṭhanti, tattha ekamekaṃ vijjhitvā kappiyaṃ kātabbameva. Kapitthaphalādīnaṃ anto miñjaṃ kaṭāhaṃ muñcitvā sañcarati, bhindāpetvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ. Ekābaddhaṃ hoti, kaṭāhepi kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
Here, even if there is a mountain-sized heap or a thousand trees of seeds, and they are cut and tied together, or a large bundle of sugarcane is tied up, once one seed or tree branch or sugarcane is made permissible, all is made permissible. If sugarcane and wood are tied together, and one pierces the wood thinking to make the sugarcane permissible, it is acceptable. But if one pierces the rope or vine with which they are tied, it is not acceptable. If they bring a basket filled with pieces of sugarcane, once one piece is made permissible, all is made permissible. If they bring rice mixed with spices like pepper, it is acceptable to pierce even the rice soup when told to "make it permissible". The same method applies to sesame seeds, rice, etc. But things mixed in porridge do not remain together as one; there, each one must be pierced and made permissible. If the pulp inside fruits like wood apples moves around after the shell is removed, it should be broken up and made permissible. If it is one mass, it is acceptable to do it on the shell.
Asañciccāti pāsāṇarukkhādīni vā pavaṭṭentassa sākhaṃ vā kaḍḍhantassa kattaradaṇḍena vā bhūmiṃ paharitvā gacchantassa tiṇāni chijjanti, tāni tena chindissāmīti evaṃ sañcicca acchinnattā asañcicca chinnāni nāma honti. Iti asañcicca chindantassa anāpatti.
Without intention (asañcicca): If one is rolling stones or trees, or pulling a branch, or striking the ground with a staff while walking, and grasses are cut, those are considered unintentionally cut (asañcicca chinnāni nāma honti) because one did not intentionally cut them. Thus, there is no offense for cutting without intention.
Asatiyāti aññavihito kenaci saddhiṃ kiñci kathento pādaṅguṭṭhakena vā hatthena vā tiṇaṃ vā lataṃ vā chindanto tiṭṭhati, evaṃ asatiyā chindantassa anāpatti.
Unmindfully (asatiyā): If one is standing, cutting grass or vines with a toe or hand while talking to someone about something else, there is no offense for cutting unmindfully.
Ajānantassāti etthabbhantare bījagāmoti vā bhūtagāmoti vā na jānāti, chindāmītipi na jānāti, kevalaṃ vatiyā vā palālapuñje vā nikhādanaṃ vā khaṇittiṃ vā kudālaṃ vā saṅgopanatthāya ṭhapeti, ḍayhamānahattho vā aggiṃ pāteti, tatra ce tiṇāni chijjanti vā ḍayhanti vā anāpatti. Manussaviggahapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘sace bhikkhu rukkhena vā ajjhotthaṭo hoti, opāte vā patito sakkā ca hoti rukkhaṃ chinditvā bhūmiṃ vā khaṇitvā nikkhamituṃ, jīvitahetupi attanā na kātabbaṃ. Aññena pana bhikkhunā bhūmiṃ vā khaṇitvā rukkhaṃ vā chinditvā allarukkhato vā daṇḍakaṃ chinditvā taṃ rukkhaṃ pavaṭṭetvā nikkhāmetuṃ vaṭṭati, anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇaṃ na dissati – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, davaḍāhe ḍayhamāne paṭaggiṃ dātuṃ, parittaṃ kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 283) idaṃ pana ekameva suttaṃ dissati. Sace etassa anulomaṃ ‘‘attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ na sakkā laddhuṃ. Attano atthāya karonto attasinehena akusalacitteneva karoti, paro pana kāruññena, tasmā anāpattīti ce. Etampi akāraṇaṃ. Kusalacittenāpi hi imaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati. Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu pana vuttattā na sakkā paṭisedhetuṃ. Gavesitabbā ettha yutti. Aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vā saddhāya gantabbanti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
Without knowing (ajānantassa): Here, one does not know that there is seed-life or plant-life within, nor does one know that one is cutting. One simply places a stick, a heap of straw, a digging tool, or a hoe for storage, or drops a burning hand onto it; if grasses are cut or burned there, there is no offense. However, in the commentaries on the Pārājika regarding human form, it is said in all the commentaries: "If a monk is oppressed by a tree or has fallen into a pit and is able to get out by cutting the tree or digging the ground, it should not be done by oneself even for the sake of one's life. But another monk may dig the ground or cut the tree, or cut a small stick from a fresh tree, or roll away that tree and help him out; there is no offense." The reason is not seen there. "I allow, monks, to make a counter-fire when being burnt by a wildfire, to make a protective barrier" (cūḷava. 283), only this sutta is seen. If one were to follow this, this distinction "it is not acceptable for oneself, but it is acceptable for another" (attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatīti) cannot be obtained. If one does it for oneself, one does it with selfish attachment and an unwholesome mind; but another does it with compassion, therefore there is no offense? This is also without reason. For one incurs this offense even with a wholesome mind. But since it is said in all the commentaries, it cannot be rejected. The justification here should be sought. Or one should go with faith in the commentary masters (Aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vā saddhāya gantabbanti). The rest is self-explanatory.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Triple arising: Arises from body and mind, speech and mind, and body, speech, and mind. It is an inactive offense (kiriyaṃ), not subject to removal by confession (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional, an offense by rule (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action, a verbal action, a three-fold consciousness (ticittaṃ), a three-fold feeling (tivedananti).
Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The First Training Rule on Plant Life
2. Aññavādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Equivocation
94.Dutiyasikkhāpade –anācāraṃ ācaritvāti akātabbaṃ katvā; kāyavacīdvāresu āpattiṃ āpajjitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena vacanena aññaṃ vacanaṃ paṭicarati paṭicchādeti ajjhottharati; idāni taṃ paṭicaraṇavidhiṃ dassento‘‘ko āpanno’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ vacanasambandho – so kira kiñci vītikkamaṃ disvā ‘‘āvuso, āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno ‘‘ko āpanno’’ti vadati. ‘‘Tato tva’’nti vutte ‘‘ahaṃ kiṃ āpanno’’ti vadati. Atha ‘‘pācittiyaṃ vā dukkaṭaṃ vā’’ti vutte vatthuṃ pucchanto ‘‘ahaṃ kismiṃ āpanno’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma vatthusmi’’nti vutte ‘‘ahaṃ kathaṃ āpanno, kiṃ karonto āpannomhī’’ti pucchati. Atha ‘‘idaṃ nāma karonto āpanno’’ti vutte ‘‘kaṃ bhaṇathā’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘taṃ bhaṇāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘kiṃ bhaṇathā’’ti vadati.
94. In the second training rule: Having engaged in improper conduct (anācāraṃ ācaritvā) means having done what should not be done; it means having incurred an offense through the doors of body and speech. Deals with one thing in terms of another (aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati) means dealing with one statement by means of another, covering up or concealing it; now, showing the method of dealing with it, he said, "Who has offended? (ko āpanno)" etc. Here is the connection of statements: It seems that seeing some transgression, when being questioned about the offense in the midst of the Sangha, "Friend, you have incurred an offense (āvuso, āpattiṃ āpannosī)," he says, "Who has offended? (ko āpanno)". When told "You (tato tva)," he says, "What have I offended? (ahaṃ kiṃ āpanno)". Then when told "A pācittiya or a dukkaṭa (pācittiyaṃ vā dukkaṭaṃ vā)," asking about the case, he says, "In what have I offended? (ahaṃ kismiṃ āpanno)". Then when told "In such and such a case (asukasmiṃ nāma vatthusmi)," he asks, "How have I offended, doing what have I offended? (ahaṃ kathaṃ āpanno, kiṃ karonto āpannomhī)". Then when told "Having done such and such, you have offended (idaṃ nāma karonto āpanno)," he says, "What are you saying? (kaṃ bhaṇathā)". Then when told "We are saying that (taṃ bhaṇāmā)," he says, "What are you saying? (kiṃ bhaṇathā)".
Aññavādakaṃ ropetūti aññavādakaṃ āropetu; patiṭṭhāpetūti attho.Vihesakaṃ ropetūti etasmimpi eseva nayo.
To impose (ropetū) an equivocator means to impose an equivocator; it means to establish. To impose (ropetū) a harasser; the same method applies in this case.
98.Aññavādake vihesake pācittiyanti ettha aññaṃ vadatīti aññavādakaṃ; aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vihesetīti vihesakaṃ; tuṇhībhūtassetaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmiṃaññavādake vihesake.Pācittiyanti vatthudvaye pācittiyadvayaṃ vuttaṃ.
98. Pācittiya for equivocating (aññavādake) and harassing (vihesake): Here, one who speaks one thing in terms of another is an equivocator (aññavādakaṃ); this is the name for dealing with one thing in terms of another. One who harasses is a harasser (vihesakaṃ); this is the name for being silent; in that equivocating harasser (aññavādake vihesake). Pācittiya (pācittiya) means a double pācittiya is stated for the two offenses.
100.Aropite aññavādaketi kammavācāya anāropite aññavādake.Aropite vihesaketi etasmimpi eseva nayo.
100. When the equivocator is imposed (āropite aññavādake) means when the equivocator is not imposed by a formal act. When the harasser is imposed (āropite vihesake); the same method applies in this case.
101.Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññītiādīsu yaṃ taṃ aññavādakavihesakaropanakammaṃ kataṃ, tañce dhammakammaṃ hoti, so ca bhikkhu tasmiṃ dhammakammasaññī aññavādakañca vihesakañca karoti, athassa tasmiṃ aññavādake ca vihesake ca āpatti pācittiyassāti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
101. In a lawful act (dhammakamme), aware (saññī) it is a lawful act: In these cases, if that act of imposing an equivocator or a harasser has been done, and if it is a lawful act, and if that monk is aware that it is a lawful act, and he makes (karoti) an equivocator and a harasser, then he incurs a pācittiya offense for that equivocating and harassing; the meaning should be understood in this way.
102.Ajānanto pucchatīti āpattiṃ vā āpannabhāvaṃ ajānantoyeva ‘‘kiṃ tumhe bhaṇatha, ahaṃ na jānāmī’’ti pucchati.Gilāno vā na kathetīti mukhe tādiso byādhi hoti, yena kathetuṃ na sakkoti.Saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṃ vātiādīsu saṅghamajjhe kathite tappaccayā saṅghassa bhaṇḍanaṃ vā kalaho vā vivādo vā bhavissati, so mā ahosīti maññamāno na kathetīti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
102. Not knowing, he asks (Ajānanto pucchatī) means not knowing about the offense or the state of having offended, he asks, "What are you saying? I do not know (kiṃ tumhe bhaṇatha, ahaṃ na jānāmī)". Or a sick person does not speak (Gilāno vā na kathetī) means there is such a disease in his mouth that he cannot speak. Or a quarrel (bhaṇḍanaṃ vā) of the Sangha: In these cases, understanding that a quarrel, dispute, or disagreement of the Sangha will arise in the midst of the Sangha due to that cause, and thinking, "May that not happen," he does not speak; the meaning should be understood in this way. The rest is self-explanatory.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, siyā kiriyaṃ, siyā akiriyaṃ, aññenaññaṃ paṭicarantassa hi kiriyaṃ hoti, tuṇhībhāvena vihesantassa akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Triple arising: Arises from body and mind, speech and mind, and body, speech, and mind. It may be an inactive offense (kiriyaṃ), it may be an non-active offense (akiriyaṃ); for one who deals with one thing in terms of another, it is an inactive offense, for one who harasses by being silent, it is a non-active offense, subject to removal by confession (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional, an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome mind, a painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Aññavādakasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Second Training Rule on Equivocation
3. Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Disparagement
103.Tatiyasikkhāpade –dabbaṃ mallaputtaṃ bhikkhū ujjhāpentīti ‘‘chandāya dabbo mallaputto’’tiādīni vadantā taṃ āyasmantaṃ tehi bhikkhūhi avajānāpenti, avaññāya olokāpenti, lāmakato vā cintāpentī’’ti attho. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Ojjhāpentītipi pāṭho. Ayamevattho.Chandāyāti chandena pakkhapātena; attano attano sandiṭṭhasambhattānaṃ paṇītāni paññapetīti adhippāyo.Khiyyantīti ‘‘chandāya dabbo mallaputto’’tiādīni vadantā pakāsenti.
103. In the third training rule: Monks disparage (ujjhāpentī) Dabba Mallaputta (dabbaṃ mallaputtaṃ bhikkhū ujjhāpentī) means those monks cause the venerable one to be disrespected, look down upon with contempt, or cause them to think poorly of him, by saying things like "Dabba Mallaputta does things out of favoritism (chandāya dabbo mallaputto)". The characteristics here should be understood according to the rules of grammar (saddasatthānusārena). Ojjhāpentī is also a reading. This is the meaning. Out of favoritism (chandāyā) means out of favoritism, partiality; the intention is that they arrange fine things for their own friends and acquaintances (attano attano sandiṭṭhasambhattānaṃ paṇītāni paññāpetīti adhippāyo). They publicize (khiyyantī) means they proclaim, saying "Dabba Mallaputta does things out of favoritism (chandāya dabbo mallaputto)" etc.
105.Ujjhāpanake khiyyanake pācittiyanti ettha yena vacanena ujjhāpenti, taṃ ujjhāpanakaṃ. Yena ca khiyyanti taṃ khiyyanakaṃ. Tasmiṃ ujjhāpanake khiyyanake.Pācittiyanti vatthudvaye pācittiyadvayaṃ vuttaṃ.
105. Pācittiya for disparaging (ujjhāpanake) and publicizing (khiyyanake): Here, the speech by which they disparage is disparaging (ujjhāpanakaṃ). And that by which they publicize is publicizing (khiyyanakaṃ). In that disparaging and publicizing (ujjhāpanake khiyyanake). Pācittiya (pācittiya) means a double pācittiya is stated for the two offenses.
106.Ujjhāpanakaṃ nāma upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammataṃ senāsanapaññāpakaṃ vā…pe… appamattakavissajjanakaṃ vāti etesaṃ padānaṃ‘‘maṅkukattukāmo’’ti iminā sambandho.Avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo ayasaṃ kattukāmoti imesaṃ pana vasenaupasampannantiādīsu ‘‘upasampannassā’’ti evaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmo kātabbo.Ujjhāpeti vā khiyyati vā āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha pana yasmā ‘‘khiyyanakaṃ nāmā’’ti evaṃ mātikāpadaṃ uddharitvāpi ‘‘ujjhāpanakaṃ nāmā’’ti imassa padassa vuttavibhaṅgoyeva vattabbo hoti, aññavādakasikkhāpade viya añño viseso natthi, tasmā taṃ visuṃ anuddharitvā avibhajitvā nigamanameva ekato katanti veditabbaṃ.Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññītiādīsu yaṃ tassa upasampannassa sammutikammaṃ kataṃ tañce dhammakammaṃ hoti, so ca bhikkhu tasmiṃ dhammakammasaññī ujjhāpanakañca khiyyanakañca karoti, athassa tasmiṃ ujjhāpanake ca khiyyanake ca āpatti pācittiyassāti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
106. Disparaging (Ujjhāpanakaṃ) means an ordained monk, agreed upon by the Sangha, one who arranges lodgings (senāsanapaññāpakaṃ) ...pe... one who distributes sparingly (appamattakavissajjanakaṃ): The connection of these terms is with "intending to cause trouble (maṅkukattukāmo)". However, on the basis of "intending to make him unworthy (avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo), intending to make him lose his reputation (ayasaṃ kattukāmo)," the case endings should be changed to "of an ordained monk (upasampannassā)" etc. among "ordained monk (upasampanna)" etc. Here, in "he disparages (ujjhāpeti) or publicizes (khiyyati), there is a pācittiya offense," since having extracted the matrix term "publicizing is (khiyyanakaṃ nāmā)", the exposition already given of the term "disparaging is (ujjhāpanakaṃ nāmā)" should be repeated, and since there is no other distinction like in the training rule on equivocation, it should be understood that the conclusion alone is made together without separately extracting and distinguishing. In "In a lawful act (dhammakamme), aware it is a lawful act," if that act of making an ordained monk with agreement is a lawful act, and if that monk is aware that it is a lawful act, and he makes (karoti) disparaging and publicizing, then he incurs a pācittiya offense for that disparaging and publicizing; the meaning should be understood in this way.
Anupasampannaṃujjhāpeti vā khiyyati vāti ettha upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammataṃ aññaṃ anupasampannaṃ ujjhāpeti avajānāpeti, tassa vā taṃ santike khiyyatīti attho.Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammatanti kammavācāya asammataṃ kevalaṃ ‘‘taveso bhāro’’ti saṅghena āropitabhāraṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vā phāsuvihāratthāya sayameva taṃ bhāraṃ vahantaṃ, yatra vā dve tayo bhikkhū viharanti, tatra vā tādisaṃ kammaṃ karontanti adhippāyo.Anupasampannaṃ saṅghena sammataṃ vā asammataṃ vāti ettha pana kiñcāpi anupasampannassa terasa sammutiyo dātuṃ na vaṭṭanti. Atha kho upasampannakāle laddhasammutiko pacchā anupasampannabhāve ṭhito, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘saṅghena sammataṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yassa pana byattassa sāmaṇerassa kevalaṃ saṅghena vā sammatena vā bhikkhunā ‘‘tvaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ karohī’’ti bhāro kato, tādisaṃ sandhāya ‘‘asammataṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
He disparages (ujjhāpeti) or publicizes (khiyyati) an unordained monk (anupasampannaṃ): Here, it means he disparages (ujjhāpeti avajānāpeti) another unordained monk, one who is ordained and agreed upon by the Sangha, or he publicizes (khiyyatīti) that offense in his presence. An ordained monk (Upasampannaṃ) not agreed upon by the Sangha (saṅghena asammataṃ) means one not agreed upon by a formal act, but merely one upon whom the Sangha has placed a burden with the words "this is your responsibility," or one who voluntarily bears that burden for the comfortable dwelling of the monks, or one who does such a task where two or three monks reside. Here, in "An unordained monk (Anupasampannaṃ), whether agreed upon or not agreed upon by the Sangha (saṅghena sammataṃ vā asammataṃ vā)," although it is not appropriate to give thirteen agreements to an unordained monk, still, referring to one who had an agreement given at the time of ordination but later remained in the state of being unordained, it is said, "agreed upon by the Sangha (saṅghena sammataṃ vā)". However, referring to a knowledgeable novice (byattassa sāmaṇerassa) upon whom a burden has been placed by the Sangha or by a monk agreed upon, saying, "You should do this task (tvaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ karohī)," it is said, "not agreed upon (asammataṃ vā)". The rest here is self-explanatory.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Triple arising: Arises from body and mind, speech and mind, and body, speech, and mind. It is an active offense (kiriyaṃ), subject to removal by confession (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional, an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome mind, a painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Ujjhāpanakasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Third Training Rule on Disparagement
4. Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the First Training Rule on Lodgings
108.Catutthasikkhāpade –hemantike kāleti hemantakāle himapātasamaye.Kāyaṃ otāpentāti mañcapīṭhādīsu nisinnā bālātapena kāyaṃ otāpentā.Kāle ārociteti yāgubhattādīsu yassa kassaci kāle ārocite.Ovaṭṭhaṃ hotīti himavassena ovaṭṭhaṃ tintaṃ hoti.
108. In the fourth training rule: In the winter season (hemantike kāle) means in the winter time, the time of snowfall. Warming their bodies (Kāyaṃ otāpentā) means sitting on benches and chairs, warming their bodies in the sunlight. When the time is announced (Kāle ārocite) means when any time for rice-gruel or meals is announced. It is covered (Ovaṭṭhaṃ hotī) means it is covered and wet with snowfall.
110.Avassikasaṅketeti vassikavassānamāsāti evaṃ apaññatte cattāro hemantike cattāro ca gimhike aṭṭha māseti attho.Maṇḍape vāti sākhāmaṇḍape vā padaramaṇḍape vā.Rukkhamūle vāti yassa kassaci rukkhassa heṭṭhā.Yattha kākā vā kulalā vā na ūhadantīti yattha dhuvanivāsena kulāvake katvā vasamānā ete kākakulalā vā aññe vā sakuntā taṃ senāsanaṃ na ūhadanti, tādise rukkhamūle nikkhipituṃ anujānāmīti. Tasmā yattha gocarappasutā sakuntā vissamitvā gacchanti, tassa rukkhassa mūle nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭati. Yasmiṃ pana dhuvanivāsena kulāvake katvā vasanti, tassa rukkhassa mūle na nikkhipitabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṭṭha māse’’ti vacanato yesu janapadesu vassakāle na vassati, tesupi cattāro māse nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. ‘‘Avassikasaṅkete’’ti vacanato yattha hemante devo vassati, tattha hemantepi ajjhokāse nikkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati. Gimhe pana sabbattha vigatavalāhakaṃ visuddhaṃ nabhaṃ hoti, evarūpe kāle kenacideva karaṇīyena ajjhokāse mañcapīṭhaṃ nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭati.
110.Avassikasaṅketeti: "vassika" means the months of the rains, thus, if it is not designated in this way, then four months in the cold season and four in the hot season, meaning eight months.Maṇḍape vāti: either in a pavilion made of branches or a pavilion made of leaves.Rukkhamūle vāti: under any tree.Yattha kākā vā kulalā vā na ūhadantīti: These crows and kulala birds, or other birds, that live making nests as a permanent dwelling, do not abandon that lodging, I allow (leaving it) at the foot of such a tree. Therefore, it is suitable to leave (it) at the foot of a tree where birds go to rest after foraging. But it should not be left at the foot of a tree in which they live making nests as a permanent dwelling. From the statement "eight months," even in those regions where it does not rain during the rainy season, it is not suitable to leave (it) for four months. From the statement "Avassikasaṅkete," in places where it rains in the cold season, it is not suitable to leave (it) in the open even in the cold season. But in the hot season, everywhere the sky is clear with no clouds, in such a time it is suitable to leave a bed or chair in the open for some reason.
Abbhokāsikenāpi vattaṃ jānitabbaṃ, tassa hi sace puggalikamañcako atthi, tattheva sayitabbaṃ. Saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantena vettena vā vākena vā vītamañcako gahetabbo. Tasmiṃ asati purāṇamañcako gahetabbo. Tasmimpi asati navavāyimo vā onaddhako vā gahetabbo. Gahetvā ca pana ‘‘ahaṃ ukkaṭṭharukkhamūliko ukkaṭṭhaabbhokāsiko’’ti cīvarakuṭimpi akatvā asamaye ajjhokāse rukkhamūle vā paññapetvā nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana catugguṇenapi cīvarena katakuṭi atementaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkoti, sattāhavaddalikādīni bhavanti, bhikkhuno kāyānugatikattā vaṭṭati.
Even an abbhokāsika (one who dwells in the open) should know the practice. If he has a personal cot, he should sleep on that. When taking a Saṅghika (community property) one, a cot without cane or wicker should be taken. If that is not available, an old cot should be taken. If even that is not available, a newly woven one or one with supports should be taken. But having taken one, he should not, thinking "I am one who dwells at the foot of a grand tree, one who dwells in a grand open space," set it up in the open air or at the foot of a tree at an unseemly time without even making a robe-hut. But if even a robe-hut made with a four-folded robe cannot protect (him) completely, and there are sattāhavaddalika etc., it is suitable because it conforms to the bhikkhu's body.</line
Araññe paṇṇakuṭīsu vasantānaṃ sīlasampadāya pasannacittā manussā navaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ denti ‘‘saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjathā’’ti vasitvā gacchantehi sāmantavihāre sabhāgabhikkhūnaṃ pesetvā gantabbaṃ, sabhāgānaṃ abhāve anovassake nikkhipitvā gantabbaṃ, anovassake asati rukkhe laggetvā gantabbaṃ. Cetiyaṅgaṇe sammajjaniṃ gahetvā bhojanasālaṅgaṇaṃ vā uposathāgāraṅgaṇaṃ vā pariveṇadivāṭṭhānaaggisālādīsu vā aññataraṃ sammajjitvā dhovitvā puna sammajjanīmāḷakeyeva ṭhapetabbā. Uposathāgārādīsu aññatarasmiṃ gahetvā avasesāni sammajjantassāpi eseva nayo.
People, with minds pleased by the virtuous conduct of those who dwell in leaf huts in the forest, give new beds and chairs, (saying) "Use (this) with communal use." When departing after dwelling there, (they) should send (them) to a neighboring monastery to bhikkhus who share (their) possessions; if there are no sharers, (they) should leave (them) in a rainless place; if there is no rainless place, (they) should hang (them) on a tree and depart. In the courtyard of a Cetiya, having taken a broom, either the courtyard of the dining hall or the uposatha hall, or having swept and washed one of the enclosure, day-quarters, fire hall, etc., again the broom should be put back in its place. The same method (applies) even to one sweeping the rest after taking (the broom) from one of the uposatha hall etc.
Yo pana bhikkhācāramaggaṃ sammajjantova gantukāmo hoti, tena sammajjitvā sace antarāmagge sālā atthi, tattha ṭhapetabbā. Sace natthi, valāhakānaṃ anuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘yāvāhaṃ gāmato nikkhamāmi, tāva na vassissatī’’ti jānantena yattha katthaci nikkhipitvā puna paccāgacchantena pākatikaṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbā. Sace vassissatīti jānanto ajjhokāse ṭhapeti, dukkaṭanti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Sace pana tatra tatreva sammajjanatthāya sammajjanī nikkhittā hoti, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā tatra tatreva nikkhipituṃ vaṭṭati. Āsanasālaṃ sammajjantena vattaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tatridaṃ vattaṃ – majjhato paṭṭhāya pādaṭṭhānābhimukhā vālikā haritabbā. Kacavaraṃ hatthehi gahetvā bahi chaḍḍetabbaṃ.
If a bhikkhu intends to go sweeping the alms-round path, having swept, if there is a hall on the path, it should be left there. If there is not, having considered that clouds have not formed, if he knows that "as long as I leave the village, it will not rain," he should leave (it) anywhere and, returning again, should put (it) in its usual place. If, knowing that it will rain, he leaves (it) in the open, it is a duukkaṭa, as stated in the Mahāpaccariya. But if brooms are placed in various places for sweeping, it is suitable to sweep each place and leave (them) there. One sweeping the assembly hall should know the practice. Here is the practice: sand should be removed starting from the middle towards the footrests. Rubbish should be taken in the hands and thrown outside.
111.Masārakoti mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭaniyo pavesetvā kato.Bundikābaddhoti aṭanīhi mañcapāde ḍaṃsāpetvā pallaṅkasaṅkhepena kato.Kuḷīrapādakoti assameṇḍakādīnaṃ pādasadisehi pādehi kato. Yo vā pana koci vaṅkapādako, ayaṃ vuccati kuḷīrapādako.Āhaccapādakoti ayaṃ pana ‘‘āhaccapādako nāma mañco aṅge vijjhitvā kato hotī’’ti evaṃ parato pāḷiyaṃyeva vutto, tasmā aṭaniyo vijjhitvā tattha pādasikhaṃ pavesetvā upari āṇiṃ datvā katamañco ‘‘āhaccapādako’’ti veditabbo. Pīṭhepi eseva nayo.Anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hotīti heṭṭhā ca upari ca vitthataṃ majjhe saṅkhittaṃ paṇavasaṇṭhānaṃ katvā baddhaṃ hoti, taṃ kira majjhe sīhabyagghacammaparikkhittampi karonti. Akappiyacammaṃ nāmettha natthi. Senāsanañhi sovaṇṇamayampi vaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ mahagghaṃ hoti.Anupasampannaṃ santharāpeti tassa palibodhoti yena santharāpitaṃ, tassa palibodho.Leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamantassa āpatti pācittiyassāti thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamantassa pācittiyaṃ.
111.Masārakoti: made by drilling into the legs of the bed and inserting pegs.Bundikābaddhoti: made in the manner of a couch by clamping the bed legs with pegs.Kuḷīrapādakoti: made with legs similar to those of a crab or scorpion. Or any bed with crooked legs is called kuḷīrapādako.Āhaccapādakoti: But this, "the bed called āhaccapādako is made by drilling into the limbs," thus it is stated in the Pali itself later, therefore the bed made by drilling pegs, inserting the tip of the leg into them, and putting a pin on top should be understood as "āhaccapādako." The same method (applies) to a chair. Anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hotīti: it is bound having made a shape wide at the bottom and top, narrow in the middle, like a drum; it seems that they even cover it with lion or tiger skin in the middle. There is no unallowable skin here. For a lodging is suitable even if it is made of gold, therefore that is very valuable. Anupasampannaṃ santharāpeti tassa palibodhoti: he who has it spread out, has an encumbrance.Leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamantassa āpatti pācittiyassāti: for one exceeding a stone's throw of a man of medium strength, there is a pācittiya.
Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – thero bhojanasālāyaṃ bhattakiccaṃ katvā daharaṃ āṇāpeti ‘‘gaccha divāṭṭhāne mañcapīṭhaṃ paññapehī’’ti. So tathā katvā nisinno. Thero yathāruciṃ vicaritvā tattha gantvā thavikaṃ vā uttarāsaṅgaṃ vā ṭhapeti, tato paṭṭhāya therassa palibodho. Nisīditvā sayaṃ gacchanto neva uddharati, na uddharāpeti, leḍḍupātātikkame pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana thero tattha thavikaṃ vā uttarāsaṅgaṃ vā aṭṭhapetvā caṅkamantova daharaṃ ‘‘gaccha tva’’nti bhaṇati, tena ‘‘idaṃ bhante mañcapīṭha’’nti ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace thero vattaṃ jānāti ‘‘tvaṃ gaccha, ahaṃ pākatikaṃ karissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace bālo hoti anuggahitavatto ‘‘gaccha, mā idha tiṭṭha, neva nisīdituṃ na nipajjituṃ demī’’ti daharaṃ tajjetiyeva. Daharena ‘‘bhante sukhaṃ sayathā’’ti kappaṃ labhitvā vanditvā gantabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ gate therasseva palibodho. Purimanayeneva cassa āpatti veditabbā.
Here is a determination in this case: an elder, having finished his meal in the dining hall, orders a young one, "Go, spread out the bed or chair in the day-quarters." He does so and sits down. The elder, wandering as he pleases, goes there and places his bag or upper robe, from then on there is an encumbrance for the elder. If, sitting down and going himself, he neither removes (it) nor has (it) removed, there is a pācittiya for exceeding a stone's throw. But if the elder, without placing his bag or upper robe there, while pacing, says to the young one, "Go away," he should be told, "This is the bed, venerable sir." If the elder knows the practice, he should say, "You go, I will put it in its usual place." If he is foolish, one who does not follow the proper conduct, he threatens the young one, "Go away, do not stand here, I will not allow (you) either to sit or lie down." The young one, having received permission (to leave) with the words "May you lie down comfortably, venerable sir," should pay respects and leave. When he has gone, the encumbrance is with the elder himself. The offense for him should be understood in the same way as before.
Atha pana āṇattikkhaṇeyeva daharo ‘‘mayhaṃ bhante bhaṇḍakadhovanādi kiñci karaṇīyaṃ atthī’’ti vadati, thero ca naṃ ‘‘tvaṃ paññapetvā gacchāhī’’ti vatvā bhojanasālato nikkhamitvā aññattha gacchati, pāduddhārena kāretabbo. Sace tattheva gantvā nisīdati purimanayeneva cassa leḍḍupātātikkame āpatti. Sace pana thero sāmaṇeraṃ āṇāpeti, sāmaṇere tattha mañcapīṭhaṃ paññapetvā nisinnepi bhojanasālato aññattha gacchanto pāduddhārena kāretabbo. Gantvā nisinno puna gamanakāle leḍḍupātātikkame āpattiyā kāretabbo. Sace pana āṇāpento mañcapīṭhaṃ paññapetvā tattheva nisīdāti āṇāpeti, yatricchati tatra gantvā āgantuṃ labhati. Sayaṃ pana pākatikaṃ akatvā gacchantassa leḍḍupātātikkame pācittiyaṃ. Antarasannipāte mañcapīṭhāni paññapetvā nisinnehi gamanakāle ārāmikānaṃ imaṃ paṭisāmethāti vattabbaṃ, avatvā gacchantānaṃ leḍḍupātātikkame āpatti.
Now, if at the moment of the order, the young one says, "Venerable sir, I have some business to do, such as washing my bowl etc.," and the elder, having said to him, "You spread (it) out and go," goes out of the dining hall and goes elsewhere, it should be made (removed) by moving the feet. If he goes there and sits down, the offense is incurred in the same way as before for exceeding a stone's throw. But if the elder orders a novice, even if the novice, having spread out the bed or chair there and sat down, while going elsewhere from the dining hall, it should be made (removed) by moving the feet. If, having gone and sat down, at the time of going again, it should be made (removed) with an offense for exceeding a stone's throw. But if, while ordering, he orders (him) having spread out the bed or chair there and sat down, he may go and come as he wishes. But for one going without putting (it) in its usual place himself, there is a pācittiya for exceeding a stone's throw. Having spread out beds and chairs in an assembly in between, when leaving, it should be said to the ārāmikas "Return this." For those leaving without saying (so), there is an offense for exceeding a stone's throw.
Mahādhammasavanaṃ nāma hoti tattha uposathāgāratopi bhojanasālatopi āharitvā mañcapīṭhāni paññapenti. Āvāsikānaṃyeva palibodho. Sace āgantukā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ upajjhāyassa idaṃ ācariyassā’’ti gaṇhanti, tato paṭṭhāya tesaṃyeva palibodho. Gamanakāle pākatikaṃ akatvā leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamantānaṃ āpatti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ puna vuttaṃ – ‘‘yāva aññe na nisīdanti, tāva yehi paññattaṃ, tesaṃ bhāro. Aññesu āgantvā nisinnesu nisinnakānaṃ bhāro. Sace te anuddharitvā vā anuddharāpetvā vā gacchanti, dukkaṭaṃ. Kasmā? Anāṇattiyā paññapitattā’’ti. Dhammāsane paññatte yāva ussārako vā dhammakathiko vā nāgacchati, tāva paññāpakānaṃ palibodho, tasmiṃ āgantvā nisinne tassa palibodho. Sakalaṃ ahorattaṃ dhammasavanaṃ hoti, añño ussārako vā dhammakathiko vā uṭṭhahati, añño nisīdati, yo yo āgantvā nisīdati, tassa tassa bhāro. Uṭṭhahantena pana ‘‘idamāsanaṃ tumhākaṃ bhāro’’ti vatvā gantabbaṃ. Sacepi itarasmiṃ anāgateyeva paṭhamaṃ nisinno uṭṭhāya gacchati, tasmiñca antoupacāraṭṭheyeva itaro āgantvā nisīdati, uṭṭhāya gato āpattiyā na kāretabbo. Sace pana itarasmiṃ anāgateyeva paṭhamaṃ nisinno uṭṭhāyāsanā leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamati, āpattiyā kāretabbo. Sabbattha ca ‘‘leḍḍupātātikkame paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye pācittiya’’nti ayaṃ nayo mahāpaccariyaṃ vutto.
There is (an event) called the Great Dhamma Sermon; there they spread out beds and chairs having brought (them) from the uposatha hall and from the dining hall. The residents alone have the encumbrance. If the visitors take (them, saying) "This is for our preceptor, this is for (our) teacher," from then on the encumbrance is with them alone. At the time of leaving, for those exceeding a stone's throw without putting (them) in their usual place, there is an offense. Again, it is stated in the Mahāpaccariya – "As long as others do not sit down, the burden is on those by whom (it) was spread out. When others have come and sat down, the burden is on those who have sat down. If they leave without removing (it) or having (it) removed, it is a duukkaṭa. Why? Because it was spread out without being ordered." When (a seat) is spread out on the Dhamma seat, as long as the inviter or the Dhamma speaker does not come, the encumbrance is on those who spread (it) out, when he has come and sat down, the encumbrance is on him. The Dhamma sermon lasts a whole day and night, one inviter or Dhamma speaker gets up, another sits down, whoever comes and sits down, the burden is on him. But the one getting up should leave after saying "This seat is your burden." Even if, while the other has not yet come, the one who sat down first gets up and goes, and while he is still within reach, the other comes and sits down, the one who got up and went should not be made (liable) for an offense. But if, while the other has not yet come, the one who sat down first gets up and exceeds a stone's throw from the seat, he should be made (liable) for an offense. And everywhere, "for exceeding a stone's throw, a duukkaṭa on the first step, a pācittiya on the second" – this is the method stated in the Mahāpaccariya.
112.Cimilikaṃ vātiādīsucimilikānāma sudhādiparikammakatāya bhūmiyā vaṇṇānurakkhaṇatthaṃ katā hoti, taṃ heṭṭhā pattharitvā upari kaṭasārakaṃ pattharanti.Uttarattharaṇaṃnāma mañcapīṭhānaṃ upari attharitabbakaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ.Bhūmattharaṇaṃnāma bhūmiyaṃ attharitabbā kaṭasārakādivikati.Taṭṭikaṃnāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā.Cammakhaṇḍonāma sīhabyagghadīpitaracchacammādīsupi yaṃkiñci cammaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu hi senāsanaparibhoge paṭikkhittacammaṃ nāma na dissati, tasmā sīhacammādīnaṃ pariharaṇeyeva paṭikkhepo veditabbo.Pādapuñchanīnāma rajjukehi vā pilotikāhi vā pādapuñchanatthaṃ katā.Phalakapīṭhaṃnāma phalakamayaṃ pīṭhaṃ. Atha vā phalakañceva dārumayapīṭhañca; etena sabbampi dārubhaṇḍādi saṅgahitaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vitthāreneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘ādhārakaṃ pattapidhānaṃ pādakathalikaṃ tālavaṇṭaṃ bījanīpattakaṃ yaṃkiñci dārubhaṇḍaṃ antamaso pānīyauḷuṅkaṃ pānīyasaṅkhaṃ ajjhokāse nikkhipitvā gacchantassa dukkaṭa’’nti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana esa nayo dutiyasikkhāpade dassito. Ajjhokāse rajanaṃ pacitvā rajanabhājanaṃ rajanauḷuṅko rajanadoṇikāti sabbaṃ aggisālāya paṭisāmetabbaṃ. Sace aggisālā natthi, anovassake pabbhāre nikkhipitabbaṃ. Tasmimpi asati yattha olokentā bhikkhū passanti, tādise ṭhāne ṭhapetvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭati.
112.Cimilikaṃ vātiādīsu:cimilikā means (a layer) made to protect the color of the ground prepared with plaster etc., spreading that underneath, they spread a rush mat on top.Uttarattharaṇaṃnāma: means a top-spread, a covering to be spread on top of beds and chairs.Bhūmattharaṇaṃnāma: means a product made of rush mat etc. to be spread on the ground.Taṭṭikaṃnāma: a mat made of palm leaves or wicker.Cammakhaṇḍonāma: any skin, even of lions, tigers, leopards, bears etc. For in the commentaries, no skin prohibited for use as a lodging is seen, therefore the prohibition should be understood as avoiding lion skin etc. Pādapuñchanīnāma: made of ropes or rags for wiping the feet.Phalakapīṭhaṃnāma: a chair made of planks. Or even planks and chairs made of wood; by this all wooden goods etc. are included. But it is stated in detail in the Mahāpaccariya – "for one leaving in the open a stand, a bowl cover, a foot stool, a palm fan, a leaf fan, any wooden goods, even a water scoop and a water conch, there is a duukkaṭa." But this method is shown in the second training rule in the Great Commentary. Having cooked dye in the open, all the dye vessel, dye scoop, dye trough should be returned to the fire hall. If there is no fire hall, it should be left in a rainless cave. If even that is not available, it is suitable to go having placed (it) in such a place where bhikkhus can see while looking around.
Aññassapuggaliketi yasmiṃ vissāsaggāho na ruhati, tassa santake dukkaṭaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana vissāso ruhati, tassa santakaṃ attano puggalikamiva hotīti mahāpaccariyādīsu vuttaṃ.
Aññassa puggaliketi: in the property of one in whom trust does not arise, there is a duukkaṭa. But in the property of one in whom trust arises, it is like one's own personal property, as stated in the Mahāpaccariya etc.
113.Āpucchaṃ gacchatīti yo bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā ārāmiko vā lajjī hoti, attano palibodhaṃ viya maññati, yo tathārūpaṃ āpucchitvā gacchati, tassa anāpatti.Otāpento gacchatīti ātape otāpento āgantvā uddharissāmīti gacchati; evaṃ gacchato anāpatti.Kenaci palibuddhaṃ hotīti senāsanaṃ kenaci upaddutaṃ hotīti attho. Sacepi hi vuḍḍhataro bhikkhu uṭṭhāpetvā gaṇhāti, sacepi yakkho vā peto vā āgantvā nisīdati, koci vā issaro āgantvā gaṇhāti, senāsanaṃ palibuddhaṃ hoti, sīhabyagghādīsu vā pana taṃ padesaṃ āgantvā ṭhitesupi senāsanaṃ palibuddhaṃ hotiyeva. Evaṃ kenaci palibuddhe anuddharitvāpi gacchato anāpatti.Āpadāsūti jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyesu. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
113.Āpucchaṃ gacchatīti: whichever bhikkhu or novice or ārāmika is modest, he regards (it) as his own encumbrance; for him who goes having asked such a one, there is no offense.Otāpento gacchatīti: he goes warming (it) in the sun, (thinking) "I will come and remove (it)"; for one going like that, there is no offense.Kenaci palibuddhaṃ hotīti: the lodging is disturbed by someone, this is the meaning. Even if an elder bhikkhu makes (it) get up and takes (it), even if a yaksha or a ghost comes and sits down, or some lord comes and takes (it), the lodging is disturbed. Even if lions, tigers etc. come and stand in that place, the lodging is indeed disturbed. Thus, for one going without removing (it) when it is disturbed by someone, there is no offense.Āpadāsūti: in dangers to life and the holy life. The rest is clear indeed.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathina-origination: it originates from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; it is active and inactive, neither perception nor cessation, unintentional, an offense by designation, a bodily action, a verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Paṭhamasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The fourth, First Lodging Training Rule.
5. Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Second Lodging Training Rule
116.Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpade –bhisīti mañcakabhisi vā pīṭhakabhisi vā. Cimilikādīnipi purimasikkhāpade vuttappakārāniyeva.Nisīdananti sadasaṃ veditabbaṃ.Paccattharaṇanti pāvāro kojavoti ettakameva vuttaṃ.Tiṇasanthāroti yesaṃ kesañci tiṇānaṃ santhāro. Esa nayo paṇṇasanthāre.Parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassāti ettha paṭhamapādaṃ atikkāmentassa dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyātikkame pācittiyaṃ. Aparikkhittassa upacāro nāma senāsanato dve leḍḍupātā.
116.In the Second Lodging Training Rule – bhisīti: either a bed cushion or a chair cushion. The cimilika etc. are the same as the kinds stated in the previous training rule.Nisīdananti: should be understood as having a border.Paccattharaṇanti: only so much is stated as pāvāro kojavo.Tiṇasanthāroti: a spread of any kind of grass. The same method (applies) to a spread of leaves.Parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassāti: here, for one exceeding the first step, there is a duukkaṭa, on exceeding the second, a pācittiya. For that which is not delimited, the surrounding area is two stone's throws from the lodging.
Anāpucchaṃvā gaccheyyāti ettha bhikkhumhi sati bhikkhu āpucchitabbo. Tasmiṃ asati sāmaṇero, tasmiṃ asati ārāmiko, tasmimpi asati yena vihāro kārito so vihārasāmiko, tassa vā kule yo koci āpucchitabbo. Tasmimpi asati catūsu pāsāṇesu mañcaṃ ṭhapetvā mañce avasesamañcapīṭhāni āropetvā upari bhisiādikaṃ dasavidhampi seyyaṃ rāsiṃ karitvā dārubhaṇḍaṃ mattikābhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā dvāravātapānāni pidahitvā gamiyavattaṃ pūretvā gantabbaṃ. Sace pana senāsanaṃ ovassati, chadanatthañca tiṇaṃ vā iṭṭhakā vā ānītā honti, sace ussahati, chādetabbaṃ. No ce sakkoti, yo okāso anovassako, tattha mañcapīṭhādīni nikkhipitvā gantabbaṃ. Sace sabbampi ovassati, ussahantena antogāme upāsakānaṃ ghare ṭhapetabbaṃ. Sace tepi ‘‘saṅghikaṃ nāma bhante bhāriyaṃ, aggidāhādīnaṃ bhāyāmā’’ti na sampaṭicchanti, ajjhokāsepi pāsāṇānaṃ upari mañcaṃ ṭhapetvā sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva nikkhipitvā tiṇehi ca paṇṇehi ca paṭicchādetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Yañhi tattha aṅgamattampi avasissati, taṃ aññesaṃ tattha āgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upakāraṃ bhavissatīti.
117.Vihārassa upacāretiādīsu vihārassūpacāro nāma pariveṇaṃ.Upaṭṭhānasālāti pariveṇabhojanasālā.Maṇḍapoti pariveṇamaṇḍapo.Rukkhamūlanti pariveṇarukkhamūlaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva nayo kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto. Kiñcāpi vutto, atha kho vihāroti antogabbho vā aññaṃ vā sabbaparicchannaṃ guttasenāsanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Vihārassa upacāreti tassa bahi āsanne okāse.Upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ vāti bhojanasālāyaṃ vā.Maṇḍape vāti aparicchanne paricchanne vāpi bahūnaṃ sannipātamaṇḍape. Rukkhamūle vattabbaṃ natthi.Āpatti dukkaṭassāti vuttappakārañhi dasavidhaṃ seyyaṃ antogabbhādimhi guttaṭṭhāne paññapetvā gacchantassa yasmā seyyāpi senāsanampi upacikāhi palujjati, vammikarāsiyeva hoti, tasmā pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Bahi pana upaṭṭhānasālādīsu paññapetvā gacchantassa seyyāmattameva nasseyya, ṭhānassa aguttatāya na senāsanaṃ, tasmā ettha dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.Mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vāti ettha yasmā na sakkā mañcapīṭhaṃ sahasā upacikāhi khāyituṃ, tasmā taṃ vihārepi santharitvā gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Vihārūpacāre pana taṃ vihāracārikaṃ āhiṇḍantāpi disvā paṭisāmessanti.
118.Uddharitvāgacchatīti ettha uddharitvā gacchantena mañcapīṭhakavāṭaṃ sabbaṃ apanetvā saṃharitvā cīvaravaṃse laggetvā gantabbaṃ. Pacchā āgantvā vasanakabhikkhunāpi puna mañcapīṭhaṃ vā paññapetvā sayitvā gacchantena tatheva kātabbaṃ. Antokuṭṭato seyyaṃ bahikuṭṭe paññapetvā vasantena gamanakāle gahitaṭṭhāneyeva paṭisāmetabbaṃ. Uparipāsādato oropetvā heṭṭhāpāsāde vasantassapi eseva nayo. Rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu mañcapīṭhaṃ paññapetvāpi gamanakāle puna gahitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapetabbaṃ.
Āpucchaṃ gacchatīti etthāyaṃ āpucchitabbānāpucchitabbavinicchayo – yā tāva bhūmiyaṃ dīghasālā vā paṇṇasālā vā hoti, yaṃ vā rukkhatthambhesu, katagehaṃ upacikānaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tato pakkamantena tāva āpucchitvāva pakkamitabbaṃ. Tasmiñhi katipayāni divasāni ajaggiyamāne vammikāva santiṭṭhanti. Yaṃ pana pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā pāsāṇatthambhesu vā katasenāsanaṃ siluccayaleṇaṃ vā sudhālittasenāsanaṃ vā yattha upacikāsaṅkā natthi, tato pakkamantassa āpucchitvāpi anāpucchitvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭati, āpucchanaṃ pana vattaṃ. Sace tādisepi senāsane ekena passena upacikā ārohanti, āpucchitvāva gantabbaṃ. Yo pana āgantuko bhikkhu saṅghikaṃ senāsanaṃ gahetvā vasantaṃ bhikkhuṃ anuvattanto attano senāsanaṃ aggahetvā vasati, yāva so na gaṇhāti, tāva taṃ senāsanaṃ purimabhikkhusseva palibodho. Yadā pana so senāsanaṃ gahetvā attano issariyena vasati, tato paṭṭhāya āgantukasseva palibodho. Sace ubhopi vibhajitvā gaṇhanti, ubhinnampi palibodho. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘sace dve tayo ekato hutvā paññapenti, gamanakāle sabbehipi āpucchitabbaṃ. Tesu ce paṭhamaṃ gacchanto ‘pacchimo jaggissatī’ti ābhogaṃ katvā gacchati vaṭṭati. Pacchimassa ābhogena mutti natthi. Bahū ekaṃ pesetvā santharāpenti, gamanakāle sabbehi vā āpucchitabbaṃ, ekaṃ vā pesetvā āpucchitabbaṃ. Aññato mañcapīṭhādīni ānetvā aññatra vasitvāpi gamanakāle tattheva netabbāni. Sace aññāvāsato ānetvā vasamānassa añño vuḍḍhataro āgacchati, na paṭibāhitabbo, ‘mayā bhante aññāvāsato ānītaṃ, pākatikaṃ kareyyāthā’ti vattabbaṃ. Tena ‘evaṃ karissāmī’ti sampaṭicchite itarassa gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Evamaññattha haritvāpi saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjantassa naṭṭhaṃ vā jiṇṇaṃ vā corehi vā haṭaṃ gīvā na hoti, puggalikaparibhogena paribhuñjantassa pana gīvā hoti. Aññassa mañcapīṭhaṃ pana saṅghikaparibhogena vā puggalikaparibhogena vā paribhuñjantassa naṭṭhaṃ gīvāyeva’’.
Kenaci palibuddhaṃ hotīti vuḍḍhatarabhikkhūissariyayakkhasīhavāḷamigakaṇhasappādīsu yena kenaci senāsanaṃ palibuddhaṃ hoti.Sāpekkho gantvā tattha ṭhito āpucchati, kenaci palibuddho hotīti ajjeva āgantvā paṭijaggissāmīti evaṃ sāpekkho nadīpāraṃ vā gāmantaraṃ vā gantvā yatthassa gamanacittaṃ uppannaṃ, tattheva ṭhito kañci pesetvā āpucchati, nadīpūrarājacorādīsu vā kenaci palibuddho hoti upadduto, na sakkoti paccāgantuṃ, evaṃbhūtassapi anāpatti. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayameva saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
Dutiyasenāsanasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
6. Anupakhajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
119.Chaṭṭhasikkhāpade –palibundhentīti paṭhamataraṃ gantvā pattacīvaraṃ atiharitvā rumbhitvā tiṭṭhanti.Therā bhikkhū vuṭṭhāpentīti ‘‘amhākaṃ āvuso pāpuṇātī’’ti vassaggena gahetvā vuṭṭhāpenti.Anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappentīti ‘‘tumhākaṃ bhante mañcaṭṭhānaṃyeva pāpuṇāti, na sabbo vihāro. Amhākaṃ dāni idaṃ ṭhānaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti anupavisitvā mañcapīṭhaṃ paññapetvā nisīdantipi nipajjantipi sajjhāyampi karonti.
120.Jānanti ‘‘anuṭṭhāpanīyo aya’’nti jānanto; tenevassa vibhaṅge ‘‘vuḍḍhoti jānātī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuḍḍho hi attano vuḍḍhatāya anuṭṭhāpanīyo, gilāno gilānatāya, saṅgho pana bhaṇḍāgārikassa vā dhammakathikavinayadharādīnaṃ vā gaṇavācakaācariyassa vā bahūpakārataṃ guṇavisiṭṭhatañca sallakkhento dhuvavāsatthāya vihāraṃ sammannitvā deti, tasmā yassa saṅghena dinno, sopi anuṭṭhāpanīyo. Kāmañcettha gilānassāpi saṅghoyeva anucchavikaṃ senāsanaṃ deti, gilāno pana ‘‘apaloketvā saṅghena adinnasenāsanopi na pīḷetabbo anukampitabbo’’ti dassetuṃ visuṃ vutto.
121.Upacāreti ettha mañcapīṭhānaṃ tāva mahallake vihāre samantā diyaḍḍho hattho upacāro, khuddake yato pahoti tato diyaḍḍho hattho, pāde dhovitvā pavisantassa passāvatthāya nikkhamantassa ca yāva dvāre nikkhittapādadhovanapāsāṇato passāvaṭṭhānato ca mañcapīṭhaṃ, tāva diyaḍḍhahatthavitthāro maggo upacāro nāma. Tasmiṃ mañcassa vā pīṭhassa vā upacāre ṭhitassa vā bhikkhuno pavisantassa vā nikkhamantassa vā upacāre yo anupakhajja seyyaṃ kappetukāmo seyyaṃ santharati vā santharāpeti vā, āpatti dukkaṭassa.
Abhinisīdativā abhinipajjati vāti ettha abhinisīdanamattena abhinipajjanamatteneva vā pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana dvepi karoti, dve pācittiyāni. Uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya nisīdato vā nipajjato vā payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ.
122.Upacāraṃ ṭhapetvā seyyaṃ santharati vā santharāpeti vāti imasmiṃ ito pare ca ‘‘vihārassa upacāre’’tiādike dukkaṭavārepi yathā idha abhinisīdanamatte abhinipajjanamatte ubhayakaraṇe payogabhede ca pācittiyappabhedo vutto, evaṃ dukkaṭappabhedo veditabbo. Evarūpena hi visabhāgapuggalena ekavihāre vā ekapariveṇe vā vasantena attho natthi, tasmā sabbatthevassa nivāso vārito.Aññassa puggaliketi idhāpi vissāsikassa puggalikaṃ attano puggalikasadisameva, tattha anāpatti.
123.Āpadāsūti sace bahi vasantassa jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyo hoti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu yo pavisati, tassāpi anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Anupakhajjasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
7. Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
126.Sattamasikkhāpade –ekena payogena bahukepi dvāre atikkāmetīti ye catubhūmakapañcabhūmakā pāsādā chasattakoṭṭhakāni vā catussālāni, tādisesu senāsanesu hatthesu vā gīvāya vā gahetvā antarā aṭṭhapento ekena payogena atikkāmeti, ekameva pācittiyaṃ. Ṭhapetvā ṭhapetvā nānāpayogehi atikkāmentassa dvāragaṇanāya pācittiyāni. Hatthena anāmasitvā ‘‘nikkhamā’’ti vatvā vācāya nikkaḍḍhantassāpi eseva nayo.
Aññaṃ āṇāpetīti ettha ‘‘imaṃ nikkaḍḍhā’’ti āṇattimatte dukkaṭaṃ. Sace so sakiṃ āṇatto bahukepi dvāre atikkāmeti, ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘ettakāni dvārāni nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti vā ‘‘yāva mahādvāraṃ tāva nikkaḍḍhāhī’’ti vā evaṃ niyāmetvā āṇatto hoti, dvāragaṇanāya pācittiyāni.
Tassaparikkhāranti yaṃkiñci tassa santakaṃ pattacīvaraparissāvanadhamakaraṇamañcapīṭhabhisibimbohanādibhedaṃ, antamaso rajanachallimpi; yo nikkaḍḍhati vā nikkaḍḍhāpeti vā; tassa vatthugaṇanāya dukkaṭāni. Gāḷhaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapitesu pana ekāva āpattīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.
127.Aññassa puggaliketi idhāpi vissāsikapuggalikaṃ attano puggalikasadisameva. Yathā ca idha; evaṃ sabbattha. Yatra pana viseso bhavissati, tatra vakkhāma.
128.Alajjiṃ nikkaḍḍhati vātiādīsu bhaṇḍanakārakakalahakārakameva sakalasaṅghārāmato nikkaḍḍhituṃ labhati, so hi pakkhaṃ labhitvā saṅghampi bhindeyya. Alajjīādayo pana attano vasanaṭṭhānatoyeva nikkaḍḍhitabbā, sakalasaṅghārāmato nikkaḍḍhituṃ na vaṭṭati.Ummattakassāti sayaṃ ummattakassa anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Nikkaḍḍhanasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
8. Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
129.Aṭṭhamasikkhāpade –uparivehāsakuṭiyāti upari acchannatalāya dvibhūmikakuṭiyā vā tibhūmikādikuṭiyā vā.Mañcaṃ sahasā abhinisīdīti mañcaṃ sahasā abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā nisīdi. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ; mañce nisīdīti attho.Abhīti idaṃ pana padasobhanatthaṃ upasaggamattameva.Nippatitvāti nipatitvā nikkhamitvā vā. Tassa hi upari āṇīpi na dinnā, tasmā nikkhanto.Vissaramakāsīti virūpaṃ āturassaramakāsi.
129.In the eighth training rule – uparivehāsakuṭiyā means a two-storied dwelling with a covered upper level, or a three-storied or more dwelling. Mañcaṃ sahasā abhinisīdī means he sat on the couch, suddenly overwhelming and covering it. Or, this is a locative usage in the sense of location; it means he sat on the couch. Abhī is merely a prefix for the sake of embellishing the word. Nippatitvā means having fallen or gone out. Because no pegs were put on it, it came out. Vissaramakāsī means he made a discordant sound, the sound of a sick person.
131.Vehāsakuṭi nāma majjhimassa purisassa asīsaghaṭṭāti yā pamāṇamajjhimassa purisassa sabbaheṭṭhimāhi tulāhi sīsaṃ na ghaṭṭeti, etena idha adhippetā vehāsakuṭi dassitā hoti, na vehāsakuṭilakkhaṇaṃ. Yā hi kāci upari acchinnatalā dvibhūmikā kuṭi tibhūmikādikuṭi vā ‘‘vehāsakuṭī’’ti vuccati. Idha pana asīsaghaṭṭā adhippetā. Abhinisīdanādīsu pubbe vuttanayeneva payogavasena āpattibhedo veditabbo.
131.Vehāsakuṭi means not hitting the head of a man of medium height means a dwelling where the head of a man of average height does not hit the lowest rafters; this shows what kind of vehāsakuṭi is intended here, not the definition of vehāsakuṭi. For any two-storied dwelling with a covered upper level or a three-storied dwelling is called a "vehāsakuṭi." But here, one that does not hit the head is intended. Regarding sitting down suddenly, etc., the difference in offenses should be understood according to the mode of application in the manner already stated.
133.Avehāsakuṭiyāti bhūmiyaṃ katapaṇṇasālādīsu anāpatti. Na hi sakkā tattha parassa pīḷā kātuṃ.Sīsaghaṭṭāyāti yāyaṃ sīsaghaṭṭā hoti, tatthāpi anāpatti. Na hi sakkā tattha heṭṭhāpāsāde anoṇatena vicarituṃ, tasmā asañcaraṇaṭṭhānattā parapīḷā na bhavissati.Heṭṭhā aparibhogaṃ hotīti yassā heṭṭhā dabbasambhārādīnaṃ nikkhittattā aparibhogaṃ hoti, tatthāpi anāpatti.Padarasañcitaṃ hotīti yassā uparimatalaṃ dāruphalakehi vā ghanasanthataṃ hoti, sudhādiparikammakataṃ vā tatthāpi anāpatti.Paṭāṇi dinnā hotīti mañcapīṭhānaṃ pādasikhāsu āṇī dinnā hoti, yattha nisīdantepi na nippatanti, tādise mañcapīṭhe nisīdatopi anāpatti.Tasmiṃ ṭhitoti āhaccapādake mañce vā pīṭhe vā ṭhito upari nāgadantakādīsu laggitakaṃ cīvaraṃ vā kiñci vā gaṇhāti vā, aññaṃ vā laggeti, tassāpi anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato ca kāyacittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
133.Avehāsakuṭiyā means no offense in a leaf hut or similar structure built on the ground. It is not possible to cause harm to another there. Sīsaghaṭṭāyā means even in a dwelling where the head hits, there is no offense. It is not possible to walk there below the upper story without stooping; therefore, since it is a place where one cannot move freely, harm to another will not occur. Heṭṭhā aparibhogaṃ hotī means even where the space below is not used because materials, goods, etc., are stored there, there is no offense. Padarasañcitaṃ hotī means even if the upper level is densely covered with wooden planks or has been plastered with stucco etc., there is no offense. Paṭāṇi dinnā hotī means even if pegs have been put at the bottom of the legs of the couch or chair, so that they do not fall down even when one sits on them, there is no offense in sitting on such a couch or chair. Tasmiṃ ṭhito means even if he stands on a couch or chair with firmly fixed legs and takes down or hangs up a robe or anything else that is hanging on a nāgadantaka or similar projection above, there is no offense for him. The rest is straightforward. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – it arises from body and from mind connected with the body, it is an act, it is without perception of release, it is unintentional, it is an offense by designation, it is a bodily action, it is tri-citta, it is tri-vedana.
Vehāsakuṭisikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Vehāsakuṭi training rule, the eighth.
9. Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Description of the Mahallakavihāra Training Rule
135.Navamasikkhāpade –yāva dvārakosāti ettha dvārakoso nāma piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa samantā kavāṭavitthārappamāṇo okāso. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘dvārabāhato paṭṭhāya diyaḍḍho hattho’’ti vuttaṃ. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘dvārassa ubhosu passesu kavāṭappamāṇa’’nti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kavāṭaṃ nāma diyaḍḍhahatthampi hoti dvihatthampi aḍḍhateyyahatthampī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ suvuttaṃ. Tadeva hi sandhāya bhagavatāpi ‘‘piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa samantā hatthapāsā’’ti ayaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddeso kato.Aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyāti sakavāṭakadvārabandhaṭṭhapanāya; sakavāṭakassa dvārabandhassa niccalabhāvatthāyāti attho. Dvāraṭṭhapanāyāti idampi hi padabhājanaṃ imamevatthaṃ sandhāya bhāsitaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – kavāṭañhi lahuparivaṭṭakaṃ vivaraṇakāle bhittiṃ āhanati, pidahanakāle dvārabandhaṃ. Tena āhananena bhitti kampati, tato mattikā calati, calitvā sithilā vā hoti patati vā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā’’ti. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘idaṃ nāma kattabba’’nti neva mātikāyaṃ na padabhājane vuttaṃ, aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ pana ‘‘punappunaṃ chādāpesi punappunaṃ lepāpesī’’ti adhikārato yāva dvārakosā aggaḷaṭṭhapanāya punappunaṃ limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
135.In the ninth training rule – yāva dvārakosā means here dvārakoso is the space around the piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa, as far as the kavāṭavitthāra. But in the Mahāpaccari, it is said "from the dvārabāha onward, one and a half hatthas." But in the Kurundi, it says "the size of the door leaves on both sides of the door." In the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, it is said "a door leaf can be one and a half hatthas, or two hatthas, or one and a half hatthas," which is well said. Indeed, with that in mind, the Blessed One also made this excellent specification, "a hand's reach around the piṭṭhasaṅghāṭa." Aggaḷaṭṭhapanāyā means for the placing of the door bolt, along with its leaves; it means for the stable condition of the door frame along with its leaves. Dvāraṭṭhapanāyā this word division is also spoken with this meaning in mind. Here the meaning is this: the door leaf, being light and easily turned, strikes the wall when opening, and the door frame when closing. By that striking, the wall shakes, and from that the plaster moves, and having moved, it either becomes loose or falls off. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "up to the door space, for the placement of the bolt." Although it is not stated in the mātikā or the word division "this should be done," in the aṭṭhuppatti, it is seen from the context of "he repeatedly had it covered, he repeatedly had it plastered," that it should be plastered or have plaster applied repeatedly up to the door space for the placement of the bolt.
Ālokasandhiparikammāyāti etthaālokasandhīti vātapānakavāṭakā vuccanti, tepi vivaraṇakāle vidatthimattampi atirekampi bhittippadesaṃ paharanti. Upacāro panettha sabbadisāsu labbhati, tasmā sabbadisāsu kavāṭavitthārappamāṇo okāso ālokasandhiparikammatthāya limpitabbo vā lepāpetabbo vāti ayamettha adhippāyo.
Ālokasandhiparikammāyā means here ālokasandhī means windows are called vātapānakavāṭakā; these too, when opened, strike the wall area even as much as a vidatthi or more. Here the treatment is obtained in all directions; therefore, the meaning here is that in all directions, a space the size of the kavāṭavitthāra should be plastered or have plaster applied for the sake of repairing the āloksandhi.
Setavaṇṇantiādikaṃ na mātikāya padabhājanaṃ. Iminā hi vihārassa bhārikattaṃ nāma natthīti padabhājaneyeva anuññātaṃ, tasmā sabbametaṃ yathāsukhaṃ kattabbaṃ.
Setavaṇṇanti etc. is not in the mātikā or the word division. By this, it is permitted in the word division itself that there is no heaviness of the dwelling, therefore all this should be done as one pleases.
‘‘dvatticchadanassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthadvatticchadanassa pariyāyanti chadanassa dvattipariyāyaṃ; pariyāyo vuccati parikkhepo, parikkhepadvayaṃ vā parikkhepattayaṃ vā adhiṭṭhātabbanti attho.Appaharite ṭhitenāti aharite ṭhitena.Haritanti cettha sattadhaññabhedaṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ muggamāsatilakulatthaalābukumbhaṇḍādibhedañca aparaṇṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘haritaṃ nāma pubbaṇṇaṃ aparaṇṇa’’nti.
‘‘dvatticchadanassā’’tiādi is said. There, dvatticchadanassa pariyāya means two or three courses of roofing; pariyāya means boundary, the meaning is that two boundaries or three boundaries should be determined. Appaharite ṭhitenā means by one standing in a non-green area. Harita here means both pubbaṇṇa, kinds of seven grains, and aparaṇṇa, kinds of mugga beans, māsa beans, sesame, kulattha beans, bottle gourds, ash gourds, etc. Therefore, he said – "harita means pubbaṇṇa and aparaṇṇa."
Sace harite ṭhitoadhiṭṭhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha pana yasmimpi khette vuttaṃ bījaṃ na tāva sampajjati, vasse vā pana patite sampajjissati, tampi haritasaṅkhyameva gacchati. Tasmā evarūpe khettepi ṭhitena na adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, ahariteyeva ṭhitena adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tatrāpi ayaṃ paricchedo, piṭṭhivaṃsassa vā kūṭāgārakaṇṇikāya vā upari thupikāya vā passe nisinno chadanamukhavaṭṭiantena olokento yasmiṃ bhūmibhāge ṭhitaṃ passati, yasmiñca bhūmibhāge ṭhito, taṃ upari nisinnakaṃ passati, tasmiṃ ṭhāne adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tassa anto aharitepi ṭhatvā adhiṭṭhātuṃ na labbhati. Kasmā? Vihārassa hi patantassa ayaṃ patanokāsoti.
Sace harite ṭhito adhiṭṭhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassā here, even if a seed sown in a field has not yet matured, but will mature when rain falls, that too goes under the designation "green." Therefore, one standing in such a field should not determine; one should determine only when standing in a non-green area. Even there, this is the limit: sitting on the side of the roof ridge, the gable end, or the finial, looking down at the edge of the roofing, one sees the part of the ground where one is standing, and the part of the ground where one is standing, sees the one sitting above; determination should be done in that place. One is not allowed to stand inside that and determine, even if it is non-green. Why? Because this is the falling space for the dwelling if it were to fall.
136.Maggena chādentassāti ettha maggena chādanaṃ nāma aparikkhipitvā ujukameva chādanaṃ; taṃ iṭṭhakasilāsudhāhi labbhati.Dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvāti dve maggā sace ducchannā honti, apanetvāpi punappunaṃ chādetuṃ labbhati, tasmā yathā icchati; tathā dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṃmaggaṃ ‘‘idāni evaṃ chādehī’’ti āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbaṃ.Pariyāyenāti parikkhepena. Evaṃchadanaṃ pana tiṇapaṇṇehi labbhati. Tasmā idhāpi yathā icchati tathā dve pariyāye adhiṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṃ pariyāyaṃ ‘‘idāni evaṃ chādehī’’ti āṇāpetvā pakkamitabbaṃ. Sace na pakkamati, tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ. Sabbampi cetaṃ chadanaṃ chadanūpari veditabbaṃ. Uparūparicchanno hi vihāro ciraṃ anovassako hotīti maññamānā evaṃ chādenti.Tato ce uttarinti tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vā pariyāyānaṃ vā upari catutthe magge vā pariyāye vā.
136.Maggena chādentassā means here, maggena chādanaṃ means roofing straight without surrounding; this is obtained with bricks, stones, and plaster. Dve magge adhiṭṭhahitvā means if two pathways are poorly roofed, it is allowable to remove them and roof them again and again; therefore, as one wishes; one should determine two pathways and depart after ordering about the third pathway, "now roof it like this." Pariyāyenā means with a surrounding. Such roofing, however, is obtained with grass and leaves. Therefore here too, as one wishes, one should determine two surroundings and depart after ordering about the third surrounding, "now roof it like this." If one does not depart, one should stand silently. All this roofing should be understood as being on top of roofing. Indeed, thinking that a dwelling covered with layers upon layers will not leak for a long time, they roof it in this way. Tato ce uttari means above the three pathways or surroundings, in the fourth pathway or surrounding.
137.Karaḷe karaḷeti tiṇamuṭṭhiyaṃ tiṇamuṭṭhiyaṃ. Sesamettha uttānamevāti. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
137.Karaḷe karaḷe means in a handful of grass, in a handful of grass. The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origin: it arises from action, without perception of release, it is unintentional, it is an offense by designation, it is bodily action, it is verbal action, it is tri-citta, it is tri-vedana.
Mahallakavihārasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The Mahallakavihāra Training Rule, the ninth.
10. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. The Sappāṇaka Training Rule
140.Dasamasikkhāpade –jānaṃ sappāṇakanti sappāṇakaṃ etanti yathā tathā vā jānanto.Siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vāti tena udakena sayaṃ vā siñceyya, aññaṃ vā āṇāpetvā siñcāpeyya. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘siñceyyāti sayaṃ siñcatī’’ti īdisānaṃ vacanānaṃ attho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
140.In the tenth training rule – jānaṃ sappāṇaka means knowing that it is sappāṇaka in whatever way it is. Siñceyya vā siñcāpeyya vā means either he himself waters with that water, or he orders another and has them water. In the Pāḷi, however, the meaning of such statements as "siñceyya means he himself waters" should be understood in the manner previously stated.
Tattha dhāraṃ avicchinditvā siñcantassa ekasmiṃ udakaghaṭe ekāva āpatti. Esa nayo sabbabhājanesu. Dhāraṃ vicchindantassa pana payoge payoge āpatti. Mātikaṃ sammukhaṃ karoti, divasampi sandatu, ekāva āpatti. Sace tattha tattha bandhitvā aññato aññato neti, payoge payoge āpatti. Sakaṭabhāramattañcepi tiṇaṃ ekapayogena udake pakkhipati, ekāva āpatti. Ekekaṃ tiṇaṃ vā paṇṇaṃ vā pakkhipantassa payoge payoge āpatti. Mattikāyapi aññesupi kaṭṭhagomayādīsu eseva nayo. Idaṃ pana mahāudakaṃ sandhāya na vuttaṃ, yaṃ tiṇe vā mattikāya vā pakkhittāya pariyādānaṃ gacchati, āvilaṃ vā hoti, yattha pāṇakā maranti, tādisaṃ udakaṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
There, for one who waters without interrupting the stream, there is one offense for one water pot. This method applies to all divisions. But for one who interrupts the stream, there is an offense for each effort. He directly faces the mātikā, even if it flows for a day, there is only one offense. If he ties it there and leads it from one place to another, there is an offense for each effort. Even if he throws a cartload of grass into the water with one effort, there is only one offense. But for one who throws in each blade of grass or leaf, there is an offense for each effort. The same method applies to plaster and other materials such as wood or cow dung. This, however, is not said with reference to great water, but it should be understood as said with reference to such water as, when thrown on grass or plaster, is used up or becomes turbid, or where living beings die.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ tivedananti.
Threefold origin: it arises from mind connected with the body, from mind connected with speech, and from mind connected with body and speech, it is an act, with perception of release, it is intentional, it is an offense by designation, it is bodily action, it is verbal action, it is tri-citta, it is tri-vedana.
Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The Sappāṇaka Training Rule, the tenth.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena senāsanavaggo dutiyo.
The second Senāsana Section is complete according to the order of description.
3. Ovādavaggo
3. The Ovāda Section
1. Ovādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the Ovāda Training Rule
141-144.Bhikkhunivaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –lābhino hontīti ettha na tesaṃ bhikkhuniyo denti, na dāpenti, mahākulehi pabbajitā pana kuladhītaro attano santikaṃ āgatānaṃ ñātimanussānaṃ ‘‘kuto ayye ovādaṃ uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ labhathā’’ti pucchantānaṃ ‘‘asuko ca asuko ca thero ovadatī’’ti asītimahāsāvake uddisitvā kathānusārena tesaṃ sīlasutācārajātigottādibhedaṃ vijjamānaguṇaṃ kathayanti. Evarūpā hi vijjamānaguṇā kathetuṃ vaṭṭanti. Tato pasannacittā manussā therānaṃ cīvarādibhedaṃ mahantaṃ lābhasakkāraṃ abhihariṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘lābhino honti cīvara…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti.
141-144.In the first training rule of the Bhikkhunī Section – lābhino hontī means here, the bhikkhunīs do not give to them, nor do they have given, but the daughters of good families, who have gone forth from great families, say to relatives who have come to them asking, "From whom do the venerable ones receive advice, instruction, and questioning?", naming the eighty great disciples, and according to the conversation, they describe their virtues, such as their qualities of sīla, learning, conduct, birth, and lineage. Such existing virtues are indeed fit to be spoken about. Then, with pleased minds, the people offered great gains and honor to the elders in the form of robes, etc. Therefore, it is said – "they gain robes…pe… requisites."
Bhikkhuniyoupasaṅkamitvāti tesaṃ kira santike tāsu ekā bhikkhunīpi na āgacchati, lābhataṇhāya pana ākaḍḍhiyamānahadayā tāsaṃ upassayaṃ agamaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhikkhuniyo upasaṅkamitvā’’ti. Tāpi bhikkhuniyo calacittatāya tesaṃ vacanaṃ akaṃsuyeva. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho tā bhikkhuniyo…pe… nisīdiṃsū’’ti.Tiracchānakathanti saggamaggagamanepi tiracchānabhūtaṃ rājakathādimanekavidhaṃ niratthakakathaṃ.Iddhoti samiddho, sahitattho gambhīro bahuraso lakkhaṇapaṭivedhasaṃyuttoti adhippāyo.
Bhikkhuniyo upasaṅkamitvā means it seems that not even one bhikkhunī comes to them, but with their hearts drawn by craving for gain, they went to their residence. With that in mind, it is said – "the bhikkhunīs, having approached." Those bhikkhunīs, too, due to their unsteady minds, did as they said. Therefore, it is said – "then those bhikkhunīs…pe… sat down." Tiracchānakatha means pointless talk of various kinds, such as talk about kings, which is mundane even for those going to the path of heaven. Iddho means prosperous, rich in meaning, profound, full of flavor, and connected with the penetration of characteristics.
145-147.Anujānāmi bhikkhaveti ettha yasmā te bhikkhū ‘‘mā tumhe bhikkhave bhikkhuniyo ovaditthā’’ti vuccamānā adiṭṭhasaccattā tathāgate āghātaṃ bandhitvā apāyupagā bhaveyyuṃ, tasmā nesaṃ taṃ apāyupagataṃ pariharanto bhagavā aññeneva upāyena te bhikkhunovādato paribāhire kattukāmo imaṃ bhikkhunovādakasammutiṃ anujānīti veditabbo. Evaṃ idha paribāhire kattukāmatāya anujānitvā parato karontova‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgata’’ntiādimāha. Imāni hi aṭṭhaṅgāni chabbaggiyānaṃ supinantenapi na bhūtapubbānīti.
145-147.Anujānāmi bhikkhave here, because those bhikkhus, being told "do not advise the bhikkhunīs, bhikkhus," might develop resentment towards the Tathāgata, not having seen the truth, and go to a woeful destination, therefore, the Blessed One, avoiding their going to that woeful destination, should be understood as approving this appointment of a bhikkhu-advisor by another means, wishing to exclude those bhikkhus from giving advice. Having thus approved it, wishing to exclude them, he says later, while doing so, ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgata’’ etc. These eight qualities have never existed even in the dreams of the Group of Six.
sīlavā. Idāni yañca taṃ sīlaṃ, yathā ca taṃ tassa atthi nāma hoti, taṃ dassento‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādimāha. Tattha pātimokkhova saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Pātimokkhasaṃvarena saṃvuto samannāgatotipātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto.
sīlavā. Now, showing what that sīla is, and how he truly has it, he says ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ etc. There, pātimokkha itself is the restraint, pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto means endowed with and possessed of pātimokkhasaṃvara.
Viharatīti vattati. Vuttañhetaṃ vibhaṅge –
Viharatī means conducts himself. This was said in the Vibhaṅga –
‘‘Pātimokkhanti sīlaṃ patiṭṭhā ādi caraṇaṃ saṃyamo saṃvaro mokkhaṃ pamokkhaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā; saṃvaroti kāyiko avītikkamo vācasiko avītikkamo kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Saṃvutoti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upagato samupagato upapanno samupapanno sampanno samannāgato, tena vuccati ‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’ti. Viharatīti iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati, tena vuccati ‘viharatī’’’ti (vibha. 511-512).
‘‘Pātimokkhaṃ means morality, foundation, beginning, conduct, restraint, protection, release, foremost, for the attainment of wholesome things; saṃvaro means bodily non-transgression, verbal non-transgression, bodily and verbal non-transgression. Saṃvuto means he is equipped with, fully equipped with, reached, fully reached, possessed of, fully possessed of, endowed with, fully endowed with this pātimokkhasaṃvara, therefore it is called ‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto.’ Viharatī means moves, conducts himself, protects, cherishes, maintains, walks, lives, therefore it is called ‘viharatī’’’ (vibha. 511-512).
Ācāragocarasampannoti micchājīvapaṭisedhakena na veḷudānādinā ācārena, vesiyādiagocaraṃ pahāya saddhāsampannakulādinā ca gocarena sampanno.Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti appamattakesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, tāni vajjāni bhayato dassanasīloti vuttaṃ hoti.Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti adhisīlasikkhādibhāvena tidhā ṭhitesu sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādāya sammā ādāya sādhukaṃ gahetvā avijahanto sikkhatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana yo icchati, tena visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
Ācāragocarasampanno means possessing conduct (ācāra) that refrains from wrong livelihood such as bamboo donations, and possessing a suitable alms resort (gocara) by abandoning resorts frequented by courtesans and visiting families endowed with faith. Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī means seeing danger in the slightest faults, meaning one is in the habit of seeing those faults as dangerous. Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti means, taking up each and every precept (sikkhāpada) among the precepts that are established in three ways in the form of higher morality etc., properly taking it up, well grasping it, not abandoning it, one trains; this is the meaning. This is a summary here; however, one who desires the detailed explanation should take it from the Visuddhimagga.
bahussuto. Sutaṃ dhāretītisutadharo;yadassa taṃ bahu sutaṃ nāma, taṃ na sutamattameva; atha kho naṃ dhāretīti attho. Mañjūsāyaṃ viya ratanaṃ sutaṃ sannicitamasmintisutasannicayo. Etena yaṃ so sutaṃ dhāreti, tassa mañjūsāya gopetvā sannicitaratanasseva cirakālenāpi avināsanaṃ dasseti. Idāni taṃ sutaṃ sarūpato dassento‘‘ye te dhammā’’tiādimāha, taṃ verañjakaṇḍe vuttanayameva. Idaṃ panettha nigamanaṃ – tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti, tasmā bahussuto. Dhātā, tasmā sutadharo. Vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā; tasmā sutasannicayo. Tatthavacasā paricitāti vācāya paguṇā katā.Manasānupekkhitāti manasā anupekkhitā, āvajjantassa dīpasahassena obhāsitā viya honti.Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti atthato ca kāraṇato ca paññāya suṭṭhu paṭividdhā supaccakkhakatā honti.
Bahussuto. Sutaṃ dhāretīti sutadharo; that which is much heard by him is called much learning (bahu suta), and it is not merely heard; but he retains it. Sutasannicayo means one in whom learning is accumulated like jewels in a casket. By this, he shows that the learning he retains does not perish even after a long time, just like jewels carefully stored in a casket. Now, showing that learning in its true form, he said, ‘‘ye te dhammā’’ etc.; that is in the same manner as stated in the Verañjakaṇḍa. Here is the conclusion in this regard: such teachings are much heard by him, therefore he is much learned. He retains it, therefore he is a Sutadhara. They are familiar by speech and unneglected by mind, thoroughly penetrated by understanding; therefore, he is a Sutasannicaya. Among these, vacasā paricitā means made fluent by speech. Manasānupekkhitā means unneglected by mind, they are like being illuminated by a thousand lamps when one turns one's attention to them. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā means thoroughly penetrated by wisdom (paññā) in terms of meaning and cause, they are very well realized.
nissayamuccanakenaupasampadāya pañcavassena sabbantimena paricchedena dve mātikā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbā pakkhadivasesu dhammasāvanatthāya suttantato cattāro bhāṇavārā, sampattānaṃ parikathanatthāya andhakavindamahārāhulovādaambaṭṭhasadiso eko kathāmaggo, saṅghabhattamaṅgalāmaṅgalesu anumodanatthāya tisso anumodanā, uposathapavāraṇādijānanatthaṃ kammākammavinicchayo, samaṇadhammakaraṇatthaṃ samādhivasena vā vipassanāvasena vā arahattapariyosānamekaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Ettāvatā hi ayaṃ bahussuto hoti cātuddiso, yattha katthaci attano issariyena vasituṃ labhati.
nissayamuccanakena means that with the final limit of five years from the full ordination, two mātikās must be made fluent and recited, four bhāṇavāras from the Suttanta for the purpose of hearing the Dhamma on the pakkhadivasas, one kathāmagga like the Andhakavinda, Mahārāhulovāda, or Ambaṭṭha for the purpose of discussing what has been attained, three anumodanās for rejoicing at saṅghabhattas and auspicious occasions, the distinction between permissible and impermissible actions (kammākammavinicchaya) for the purpose of knowing the uposatha and pavāraṇā etc., and one meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna) ending in Arahantship by way of samādhi or vipassanā for performing the duties of a samaṇa, so much must be learned. By this much, he is much learned and is all-directional, and he is able to dwell at his own pleasure wherever he wishes.
Parisupaṭṭhāpakenaupasampadāya dasavassena sabbantimena paricchedena parisaṃ abhivinaye vinetuṃ dve vibhaṅgā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbā, asakkontena tīhi janehi saddhiṃ parivattanakkhamā kātabbā, kammākammañca khandhakavattañca uggahetabbaṃ. Parisāya pana abhidhamme vinayanatthaṃ sace majjhimabhāṇako hoti mūlapaṇṇāsako uggahetabbo, dīghabhāṇakena mahāvaggo, saṃyuttabhāṇakena heṭṭhimā vā tayo vaggā mahāvaggo vā, aṅguttarabhāṇakena heṭṭhā vā upari vā upaḍḍhanikāyo uggahetabbo, asakkontena tikanipātato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā uggahetumpi vaṭṭati. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘ekaṃ uggaṇhantena catukkanipātaṃ vā pañcakanipātaṃ vā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jātakabhāṇakena sāṭṭhakathaṃ jātakaṃ uggahetabbaṃ, tato oraṃ na vaṭṭati. Dhammapadampi saha vatthunā uggahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tato tato samuccayaṃ katvā mūlapaṇṇāsakamattaṃ vaṭṭati, na vaṭṭatīti? ‘‘Na vaṭṭatī’’ti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, itarāsu vicāraṇāyeva natthi. Abhidhamme kiñci uggahetabbanti na vuttaṃ. Yassa pana sāṭṭhakathampi vinayapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakañca paguṇaṃ, suttante ca vuttappakāro gantho natthi, parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ na labhati. Yena pana suttantato vinayato ca vuttappamāṇo gantho uggahito, ayaṃ parisupaṭṭhāpako bahussuto hoti disāpāmokkho yenakāmaṅgamo, parisaṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ labhati.
Parisupaṭṭhāpakena means that with the final limit of ten years from the full ordination, two Vibhaṅgas must be made fluent and recited in order to discipline the assembly in the Abhivinaya; if he is unable, he must be capable of reciting with three people, and the permissible and impermissible actions (kammākamma) and the Khandhaka-vatta must be learned. If he is a Majjhima-reciter for the purpose of guiding the assembly in the Abhidhamma, the Mūlapaṇṇāsaka should be learned, the Dīgha-reciter should learn the Mahāvagga, the Saṃyutta-reciter should learn the lower three vaggas or the Mahāvagga, and the Aṅguttara-reciter should learn the lower or upper half of the Nikāya; if he is unable, it is proper to learn from the Tikanipāta downwards. However, in the Mahāpaccari, it is said that "it is proper for one learning one to take the Catukkanipāta or Pañcakanipāta." The Jātaka-reciter should learn the Jātaka with its commentary; less than that is not proper. It is also stated in the Mahāpaccari that it is proper to learn the Dhammapada together with its stories. Is it proper to make a collection from here and there up to the Mūlapaṇṇāsaka or not? It is rejected in the Kurunda commentary that "it is not proper," and there is no consideration in the other commentaries. It is not stated that anything should be learned in the Abhidhamma. But one who has mastered the Vinayapiṭaka and the Abhidhammapiṭaka along with their commentaries, and there is no text of the type stated in the Suttanta, he is not able to guide the assembly. But one by whom the text of the stated extent has been learned from the Suttanta and the Vinaya, this assembly-attendant is much learned, is a chief in all directions, goes as he pleases, and is able to guide the assembly.
Bhikkhunovādakenapana sāṭṭhakathāni tīṇi piṭakāni uggahetabbāni, asakkontena catūsu nikāyesu ekassa aṭṭhakathā paguṇā kātabbā, ekanikāyena hi sesanikāyesupi pañhaṃ kathetuṃ sakkhissati. Sattasu pakaraṇesu catuppakaraṇassa aṭṭhakathā paguṇā kātabbā, tattha laddhanayena hi sesapakaraṇesu pañhaṃ kathetuṃ sakkhissati. Vinayapiṭakaṃ pana nānatthaṃ nānākāraṇaṃ, tasmā taṃ saddhiṃ aṭṭhakathāya paguṇaṃ kātabbameva. Ettāvatā hi bhikkhunovādako bahussuto nāma hotīti.
Bhikkhunovādakena however, the three Piṭakas together with their commentaries should be learned; if he is unable, the commentary of one of the four Nikāyas should be mastered, for with one Nikāya he will be able to answer questions even in the remaining Nikāyas. The commentary of a four-treatise in the seven treatises should be mastered, for with the method obtained there, he will be able to answer questions in the remaining treatises. But the Vinayapiṭaka is of various meanings and various causes, therefore it must be mastered together with its commentary. By this much, he is called a Bhikkhunovādaka who is much learned.
Ubhayānikho panassātiādi pana yasmā aññasmiṃ sakale navaṅgepi bāhussacce sati sāṭṭhakathaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ vinā na vaṭṭatiyeva, tasmā visuṃ vuttaṃ. Tatthavitthārenāti ubhatovibhaṅgena saddhiṃ.Svāgatānīti suṭṭhu āgatāni. Yathā āgatāni pana svāgatāni honti, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘suvibhattānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasuvibhattānīti suṭṭhu vibhattāni padapaccābhaṭṭhasaṅkaradosavirahitāni.Suppavattīnīti paguṇāni vācuggatāni.Suvinicchitāni suttasoti khandhakaparivārato āharitabbasuttavasena suṭṭhu vinicchitāni.Anubyañjanasoti akkharapadapāripūriyā ca suvinicchitāni akhaṇḍāni aviparītakkharāni. Etena aṭṭhakathā dīpitā, aṭṭhakathāto hi esa vinicchayo hotīti.
Ubhayāni kho panassātiādi, however, since it is absolutely not proper without the Vinayapiṭaka along with its commentary even if there is much learning in the other entire ninefold teachings, therefore it is stated separately. Among these, vitthārena means together with both Vibhaṅgas. Svāgatānī means well-received. To show how they are well-received as they have come, ‘‘suvibhattānī’’ etc. is stated. Among these, suvibhattānī means well-divided, free from the faults of confusion of words and syllables. Suppavattīnī means fluent, recited. Suvinicchitāni suttaso means well-decided in terms of the suttas to be brought from the Khandhaka and Parivāra. Anubyañjanaso means well-decided even in terms of the completeness of letters and words, unbroken, with undistorted letters. By this, the commentary is indicated, for this decision comes from the commentary.
Kalyāṇavācoti sithiladhanitādīnaṃ yathāvidhānavacanena parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāya poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagaḷāya atthassa viññāpaniyā.Kalyāṇavākkaraṇoti madhurassaro, mātugāmo hi sarasampattirato, tasmā parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanampi vacanaṃ sarasampattirahitaṃ hīḷeti.Yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpoti sabbāsaṃ piyo nāma dullabho, bahutarānaṃ pana paṇḍitānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ sīlācārasampattiyā piyo hoti manavaḍḍhanako.Paṭibalo hoti bhikkhuniyo ovaditunti suttañca kāraṇañca dassento vaṭṭabhayena tajjetvā bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ tādisaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho hoti.Kāsāyavatthavasanāyāti kāsāyavatthanivatthāya.Garudhammanti gihikāle bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsaggaṃ vā sikkhamānāsāmaṇerīsu methunadhammaṃ vā anajjhāpannapubbo hoti. Mātugāmo hi pubbe katamanussaranto saṃvare ṭhitassāpi dhammadesanāya gāravaṃ na karoti. Atha vā tasmiyeva asaddhamme cittaṃ uppādeti.Vīsativasso vāti upasampadāya vīsativasso tato atirekavasso vā. Evarūpo hi visabhāgehi vatthūhi punappunaṃ samāgacchantopi daharo viya sahasā sīlavināsaṃ na pāpuṇāti, attano vayaṃ paccavekkhitvā ayuttaṭṭhāne chandarāgaṃ vinetuṃ paṭibalo hoti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vīsativasso vā hoti atirekavīsativasso vā’’ti.
Kalyāṇavāco means endowed with a beautiful voice, which is distinct and without throatiness, capable of making the meaning known, with complete words and phrases, by means of the proper method of speaking, without looseness or harshness. Kalyāṇavākkaraṇo means having a sweet voice, for the woman is delighted in the abundance of sound; therefore, she despises even speech with complete words and phrases that is devoid of the abundance of sound. Yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo means it is rare to be loved by all, but he is loved by most of the wise nuns with the accomplishment of virtue and conduct, and he is pleasing to the mind. Paṭibalo hoti bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ means being able to admonish the nuns by showing the sutta and the reason, and by threatening them with fear of offenses, he is capable of teaching such Dhamma. Kāsāyavatthavasanāyā means wearing robes of brown color. Garudhammaṃ means that in his householder life, he has not previously engaged in bodily contact with a nun or in sexual activity with a female novice who is training. For the woman, remembering what was done before, does not respect the teaching of the Dhamma even if he is established in restraint. Or else, she produces her mind in that same immoral thing. Vīsativasso vā means twenty years old or more in ordination. For one of such a kind, even when repeatedly coming together with dissimilar things, does not suddenly attain the destruction of virtue like a young person, being able to dispel desire and lust in an improper place after considering his own age, therefore it is said - "twenty years old or more than twenty years old."
Ettha ca ‘‘sīlavā’’tiādi ekamaṅgaṃ, ‘‘bahussuto hotī’’tiādi dutiyaṃ, ‘‘ubhayāni kho panassā’’tiādi tatiyaṃ, ‘‘kalyāṇavāco hoti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo’’ti catutthaṃ, ‘‘yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo’’ti pañcamaṃ, ‘‘paṭibalo hoti bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’nti chaṭṭhaṃ, ‘‘na kho paneta’’ntiādi sattamaṃ, ‘‘vīsativasso’’tiādi aṭṭhamanti veditabbaṃ.
Here, "sīlavā" etc. should be understood as one factor, "bahussuto hotī" etc. as the second, "ubhayāni kho panassā" etc. as the third, "kalyāṇavāco hoti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo" as the fourth, "yebhuyyena bhikkhunīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo" as the fifth, "paṭibalo hoti bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ" as the sixth, "na kho paneta" etc. as the seventh, and "vīsativasso" etc. as the eighth.
148.Ñatticatutthenāti pubbe vatthusmiṃ vutteneva.Garudhammehīti garukehi dhammehi, te hi gāravaṃ katvā bhikkhunīhi sampaṭicchitabbattā garudhammāti vuccanti.Ekatoupasampannāyāti ettha bhikkhunīnaṃ santike ekatoupasampannāya, yo garudhammena ovadati, tassa dukkaṭaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya pana yathāvatthukameva.
148.Ñatticatutthenāti, as said previously in the vatthu.Garudhammehīti by the heavy rules (garudhamma), for these are called heavy rules because they should be respectfully accepted by the nuns. Ekatoupasampannāyāti here, there is a dukkaṭa to the one who admonishes by the garudhamma to one who is fully ordained in the presence of the nuns. But to one who is fully ordained in the presence of the monks, it is according to the vatthu.
149.Pariveṇaṃ sammajjitvāti sace pāto asammaṭṭhaṃ sammaṭṭhampi vā puna tiṇapaṇṇādīhi uklāpaṃ pādappahārehi ca vikiṇṇavālikaṃ jātaṃ, sammajjitabbaṃ. Asammaṭṭhañhi taṃ disvā ‘‘ayyo attano nissitake daharabhikkhūpi vattapaṭipattiyaṃ na yojeti, dhammaṃyeva kathetī’’ti tā bhikkhuniyo asotukāmā viya bhaveyyuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pariveṇaṃ sammajjitvā’’ti. Antogāmato pana bhikkhuniyo āgacchantiyo pipāsitā ca kilantā ca honti, tā pānīyañca hatthapādamukhasītalakaraṇañca paccāsīsanti, tasmiñca asati purimanayeneva agāravaṃ janetvā asotukāmāpi honti. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti.
149.Pariveṇaṃ sammajjitvāti if the enclosure has not been swept in the morning, or even if it has been swept, it has become littered again with grass and leaves, and the sand is scattered by the impact of feet, it should be swept. For seeing that unswept, those nuns might become unwilling to listen, thinking, "The venerable one does not even instruct the young monks who are dependent on him in the practice of duties, he only talks about the Dhamma." Therefore, it is said - "after sweeping the enclosure." But the nuns coming from inside the village are thirsty and tired, they expect drinking water and water for washing their hands, feet, and faces, and if that is not available, they will generate disrespect in the same way as before and become unwilling to listen. Therefore, it is said - ‘‘pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti.
Āsananti nīcapīṭhakaphalakataṭṭikakaṭasārakādibhedaṃ antamaso sākhābhaṅgampi ‘‘idaṃ tāsaṃ āsanaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ āsanaṃ paññapetvā. Dhammadesanāpattimocanatthaṃ pana dutiyo icchitabbo. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘dutiyaṃ gahetvā nisīditabba’’nti.Nisīditabbanti na vihārapaccante, atha kho vihāramajjhe uposathāgārassa vā bhojanasālāya vā dvāre sabbesaṃ osaraṇaṭṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ.Samaggātthāti sabbā āgatatthāti attho.Vattantīti āgacchanti; paguṇā vācuggatāti attho.Niyyādetabboti appetabbo.Osāretabboti pāḷi vattabbā.Vassasatūpasampannāyātiādi vattabbapāḷidassanaṃ.
Āsanaṃ means preparing a seat such as a low stool, a plank, a mat, a rug, or a Sāraka mat, or even a broken branch, thinking, "this will be their seat." For the sake of releasing the offense of teaching the Dhamma, a second person should be desired. Therefore, it is said - ‘‘dutiyaṃ gahetvā nisīditabba’’nti.Nisīditabbaṃ means one should sit not at the edge of the monastery, but in the middle of the monastery, at the door of the uposatha hall or the refectory, in a place of access for all. Samaggātthāti means all have come.Vattantīti means they are coming; fluent, recited is the meaning.Niyyādetabboti means to be given out.Osāretabboti means the pāḷi should be spoken.Vassasatūpasampannāyātiādi is a showing of the pāḷi that should be spoken.
sāmīcikammanti maggasampadānabījanapānīyāpucchanādikaṃ anucchavikavattaṃ. Ettha ca bhikkhuniyā bhikkhussa abhivādanaṃ nāma antogāme vā bahigāme vā antovihāre vā bahivihāre vā antaraghare vā rathikāya vā antamaso rājussāraṇāyapi vattamānāya deve vassamāne sakaddamāya bhūmiyā chattapattahatthāyapi hatthiassādīhi anubaddhāyapi kātabbameva. Ekābaddhāya pāḷiyā bhikkhācāraṃ pavisante disvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ‘‘vandāmi ayyā’’ti vandituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace antarantarā dvādasahatthe muñcitvā gacchanti, visuṃ visuṃ vanditabbā. Mahāsannipāte nisinne ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne vandituṃ vaṭṭati. Esa nayo añjalikammepi. Yattha katthaci nisinnāya pana paccuṭṭhānaṃ kātabbaṃ, tassa tassa sāmīcikammassa anurūpe padese ca kāle ca taṃ taṃ kātabbaṃ.
sāmīcikammaṃ means appropriate duties such as giving the seed of the path, drinking water, and asking questions. Here, the nun's salutation to the monk must be done without fail, whether inside or outside the village, inside or outside the monastery, inside the house or on the road, even at the king's gate, even when it is raining and the ground is muddy, even with an umbrella or parasol in hand, even when followed by elephants and horses. Seeing the one entering for alms in a single row, it is proper to salute, saying "vandāmi ayyā" in one place. If they go leaving a distance of twelve cubits in between, they should be saluted separately. In a great assembly, it is proper to salute in one place where they are seated. This is the same method for the añjalikamma. But standing up should be done wherever she is sitting, and that particular duty should be done in a place and time appropriate to that particular duty.
Sakkatvāti yathā kato sukato hoti, evaṃ katvā.Garuṃkatvāti tattha gāravaṃ janetvā.Mānetvāti manena piyaṃ katvā.Pūjetvāti imesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ kiccānaṃ karaṇena pūjetvā.Anatikkamanīyoti na atikkamitabbo.
Sakkatvāti having done it in such a way that it is well done.Garuṃkatvāti having generated respect there.Mānetvāti having made it dear with the mind.Pūjetvāti having worshiped by doing these three duties.Anatikkamanīyoti should not be transgressed.
Abhikkhuke āvāseti ettha sace bhikkhunupassayato aḍḍhayojanabbhantare ovādadāyakā bhikkhū na vasanti, ayaṃ abhikkhuko āvāso nāma. Ettha vassaṃ na vasitabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘abhikkhuko nāma āvāso na sakkā hoti ovādāya vā saṃvāsāya vā gantu’’nti (pāci. 1048). Na ca sakkā tato paraṃ pacchābhattaṃ gantvā dhammaṃ sutvā āgantuṃ. Sace tattha vassaṃ vasituṃ anicchamānā bhikkhuniyo ñātakā vā upaṭṭhākā vā evaṃvadanti – ‘‘vasatha, ayye, mayaṃ bhikkhū ānessāmā’’ti vaṭṭati. Sace pana vuttappamāṇe padese vassaṃ upagantukāmā bhikkhū āgantvā sākhāmaṇḍapepi ekarattaṃ vutthā honti; na nimantitā hutvā gantukāmā. Ettāvatāpi sabhikkhuko āvāso hoti, ettha vassaṃ upagantuṃ vaṭṭati. Upagacchantīhi ca pakkhassa terasiyaṃyeva bhikkhū yācitabbā – ‘‘mayaṃ ayyā tumhākaṃ ovādena vasissāmā’’ti. Yato pana ujunā maggena aḍḍhayojane bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, tena pana maggena gacchantīnaṃ jīvitantarāyo vā brahmacariyantarāyo vā hoti, aññena maggena gacchantīnaṃ atirekaḍḍhayojanaṃ hoti, ayaṃ abhikkhukāvāsaṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhati. Sace pana tato gāvutamatte añño bhikkhunupassayo khemaṭṭhāne hoti, tāhi bhikkhunīhi tā bhikkhuniyo yācitvā puna gantvā bhikkhū yācitabbā ‘‘ayyā amhākaṃ ujumagge antarāyo atthi, aññena maggena atirekaḍḍhayojanaṃ hoti. Antarāmagge pana amhākaṃ upassayato gāvutamatte añño bhikkhunupassayo atthi, ayyānaṃ santikā tattha āgataovādena vasissāmā’’ti. Tehi bhikkhūhi sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Tato tāhi bhikkhunīhi taṃ bhikkhunupassayaṃ āgantvā uposatho kātabbo, tā vā bhikkhuniyo disvā attano upassayameva gantvā kātumpi vaṭṭati.
Abhikkhuke āvāseti here, if monks who give advice do not dwell within half a yojana of the nun's residence, this is called a monkless residence. One should not dwell there during the rains. It has been said that "a monkless dwelling is one to which it is not possible to go for advice or association" (pāci. 1048). And it is not possible to go there after the meal, listen to the Dhamma, and come back. If the nuns who do not want to dwell there during the rains, or relatives or supporters say this - "dwell here, venerable ones, we will bring monks," it is proper. If monks who wish to enter the rains in the stated area come and stay even for one night in a branch pavilion; even though they are not invited and do not wish to go, by just this much it is a monastery with monks, it is proper to enter the rains here. And those who are entering should request the monks on the thirteenth of the pakkhassa - "venerable sirs, we will dwell with your advice." But where there is a dwelling place of monks at half a yojana by the straight path, but there is danger to life or danger to celibacy for those going by that path, and it is more than half a yojana for those going by another path, this remains in the state of a monkless dwelling. If, however, there is another nun's residence about a gāvuta away in a safe place, those nuns should request those nuns and then go and request the monks, saying, "venerable sirs, there is danger for us on the straight path, and it is more than half a yojana by another path. But in between the paths, there is another nun's residence about a gāvuta away from our residence, we will dwell with the advice coming from the venerable ones." Those monks should accept it. Then those nuns should come to that nun's residence and perform the uposatha, or those nuns, seeing them, may even go to their own residence and perform it.
Sace pana vassaṃ upagantukāmā bhikkhū cātuddase vihāraṃ āgacchanti, bhikkhunīhi ca ‘‘idha ayyā vassaṃ vasissathā’’ti pucchitā ‘‘āmā’’ti vatvā puna tāhi ‘‘tenahi ayyā mayampi tumhākaṃ ovādaṃ anujīvantiyo vasissāmā’’ti vuttā dutiyadivase gāme bhikkhācārasampadaṃ apassantā ‘‘na sakkā idha vasitu’’nti pakkamanti. Atha tā bhikkhuniyo uposathadivase vihāraṃ gantvā bhikkhū na passanti, ettha kiṃ kātabbanti? Yattha bhikkhū vasanti, tattha gantvā pacchimikāya vassaṃ upagantabbaṃ. ‘‘Pacchimikāya vassaṃ upagantuṃ āgamissantī’’ti vā ābhogaṃ katvā āgatānaṃ santike ovādena vasitabbaṃ. Sace pana pacchimikāyapi na keci āgacchanti, antarāmagge ca rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā dubbhikkhaṃ vā hoti, abhikkhukāvāse vasantiyā āpatti, vassacchedaṃ katvā gacchantiyāpi āpatti, sā rakkhitabbā. Āpadāsu hi abhikkhuke āvāse vasantiyā anāpatti vuttā. Sace āgantvā vassaṃ upagatā bhikkhū puna kenaci kāraṇena pakkamanti, vasitabbameva. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘anāpatti vassūpagatā bhikkhū pakkantā vā honti vibbhantā vā kālaṅkatā vā pakkhasaṅkantā vā āpadāsu ummattikāya ādikammikāyā’’ti. Pavārentiyā pana yattha bhikkhū atthi, tattha gantvā pavāretabbaṃ.
If, however, bhikkhus intending to enter the rains-residence (vassa) come to the monastery on the fourteenth, and the bhikkhunīs, having asked, "Venerables, will you dwell here for the rains?", and having said "Yes," then after they say, "Then, Venerables, we also, living in dependence on your instruction (ovāda), will dwell here," but on the second day, not seeing the accomplishment of alms-gathering in the village, depart saying, "It is not possible to dwell here." Then those bhikkhunīs, going to the monastery on the Uposatha day, do not see the bhikkhus, what should be done in this case? One should go to where the bhikkhus dwell and undertake the rains-residence on the later date (pacchimikāya vassaṃ upagantabbaṃ). Or, having made an arrangement (ābhogaṃ katvā) that "they will come to undertake the rains-residence on the later date," one should dwell with the instruction when they have come. But if no one comes even on the later date, and there is fear of robbers or fear of famine on the way, there is an offense for her dwelling in a non-bhikkhu residence; there is also an offense for her going away having broken the rains-residence; she should be protected. For it is stated that there is no offense for her dwelling in a non-bhikkhu residence in times of danger. If bhikkhus, having come and undertaken the rains-residence, then depart for some reason, one must dwell there. For it was said: "There is no offense if bhikkhus who have undertaken the rains-residence depart, or become deranged, or die, or move to another place, or in times of danger, or due to insanity, or for the initial training (ādikammikāya)." However, when inviting (pavārentiyā), one should go to where the bhikkhus are and invite them.
Anvaddhamāsanti addhamāse addhamāse.Dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbāti dve dhammā icchitabbā.Uposathapucchakanti uposathapucchanaṃ, tattha pannarasike uposathe pakkhassa cātuddasiyaṃ cātuddasike terasiyaṃ gantvā uposatho pucchitabbo. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘pakkhassa terasiyaṃyeva gantvā ‘ayaṃ uposatho cātuddasiko pannarasiko’ti pucchitabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Uposathadivase ovādatthāya upasaṅkamitabbaṃ. Pāṭipadadivasato pana paṭṭhāya dhammasavanatthāya gantabbaṃ. Iti bhagavā aññassa kammassa okāsaṃ adatvā nirantaraṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santike gamanameva paññapesi. Kasmā? Mandapaññattā mātugāmassa. Mandapañño hi mātugāmo, tasmā niccaṃ dhammasavanaṃ bahūpakāraṃ. Evañca sati ‘‘yaṃ mayaṃ jānāma, tameva ayyā jānantī’’ti mānaṃ akatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ payirūpāsamānā sātthikaṃ pabbajjaṃ karissanti, tasmā bhagavā evamakāsi. Bhikkhuniyopi ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjissāmā’’ti sabbāyeva nirantaraṃ vihāraṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Anvaddhamāsaṃ: every half-month. Dve dhammā paccāsīsitabbā: two things should be desired. Uposathapucchakaṃ: asking about the Uposatha; there, on the fifteenth Uposatha, having gone on the fourteenth of the fortnight, on the fourteenth, on the thirteenth, the Uposatha should be asked about. However, in the Mahāpaccariya, it is stated, "Having gone on the thirteenth of the fortnight, one should ask, 'Is this Uposatha the fourteenth or the fifteenth?'" On the Uposatha day, one should approach for the sake of instruction (ovādatthāya). However, from the day after the new moon (pāṭipadadivasato), one should go for the purpose of hearing the Dhamma. Thus, the Blessed One, not giving an opportunity for any other activity, continuously prescribed going to the bhikkhus for the bhikkhunīs. Why? Because of the weak wisdom (mandapaññattā) of women. For women are of weak wisdom, therefore constant hearing of the Dhamma is very helpful. And when this is so, without making the conceit that "what we know, the Venerables also know," constantly attending upon the Bhikkhu Sangha, they will make the going forth worthwhile, therefore the Blessed One did so. The bhikkhunīs also, thinking, "We will practice as instructed," all continuously approached the monastery. For it was said:
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena sabbo bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādaṃ gacchati. Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti ‘jāyāyo imā imesaṃ, jāriyo imā imesaṃ, idānime imāhi saddhiṃ abhiramissantī’ti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ – ‘na, bhikkhave, sabbena bhikkhunisaṅghena ovādo gantabbo, gaccheyya ce, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi bhikkhave catūhi pañcahi bhikkhunīhi ovādaṃ gantu’nti. Punapi tatheva ujjhāyiṃsu. Puna bhagavā ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve tisso bhikkhuniyo ovādaṃ gantu’’’nti āha.
"Then, at that time, the entire Bhikkhunī Sangha went for instruction. People criticized, grumbled, and complained, 'These are their wives, these are their mistresses, now they will enjoy themselves with these women.' They reported this matter to the Blessed One. 'No, bhikkhus, the entire Bhikkhunī Sangha should not go for instruction; if they should go, there is an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭassa). I allow, bhikkhus, four or five bhikkhunīs to go for instruction.' Again they criticized in the same way. Again the Blessed One said, 'I allow, bhikkhus, two or three bhikkhunīs to go for instruction.'"
Tasmā bhikkhunisaṅghena dve tisso bhikkhuniyo yācitvā pesetabbā – ‘‘ethayye, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ovādūpasaṅkamanaṃ yācatha, bhikkhunisaṅgho ayyā…pe… ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti (cūḷava. 413). Tāhi bhikkhunīhi ārāmaṃ gantabbaṃ. Tato ovādapaṭiggāhakaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā so bhikkhu ekāya bhikkhuniyā evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, ayya, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira ayya bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Tena bhikkhunā pātimokkhuddesako bhikkhu upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho bhante bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira bhante bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbo ‘‘atthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato’’ti. Sace hoti koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbo ‘‘itthannāmo bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho upasaṅkamatū’’ti.
Therefore, two or three bhikkhunīs should be requested by the Bhikkhunī Sangha to be sent: "Come, Venerables, ask the Bhikkhu Sangha for the approach for instruction, the Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerables…pe… the approach for instruction" (cūḷava. 413). Those bhikkhunīs should go to the monastery. Then, having approached the bhikkhu who receives the instruction, having paid homage, that bhikkhu should say this to one bhikkhunī: "The Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerable, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and asks for the approach for instruction, may the Bhikkhu Sangha grant the approach for instruction to the Venerable Bhikkhunī Sangha." That bhikkhu should approach the bhikkhu who recites the Pātimokkha and say this to him: "The Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerable, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and asks for the approach for instruction, may the Bhikkhu Sangha grant the approach for instruction to the Venerable Bhikkhunī Sangha." The Pātimokkha reciter should say, "Is there any bhikkhu who is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs?" If there is any bhikkhu who is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs, the Pātimokkha reciter should say, "The bhikkhu named so-and-so is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs, let the Bhikkhunī Sangha approach him."
Sace na hoti koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbo – ‘‘ko āyasmā ussahati bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’nti. Sace koci bhikkhu ussahati bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ, so ca hoti aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato, sammannitvā vattabbo – ‘‘itthannāmo bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho upasaṅkamatū’’ti.
If there is no bhikkhu who is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs, the Pātimokkha reciter should say: "Who here is capable of instructing the bhikkhunīs?" If any bhikkhu is capable of instructing the bhikkhunīs, and he is endowed with eight qualities, having appointed (sammannitvā), it should be said: "The bhikkhu named so-and-so is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs, let the Bhikkhunī Sangha approach him."
Sace pana koci na ussahati bhikkhuniyo ovadituṃ, pātimokkhuddesakena vattabbo – ‘‘natthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū’’ti. Ettāvatā hi sakalaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanamārocitaṃ hoti. Tena bhikkhunā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā pāṭipade bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Bhikkhunisaṅghenapi tā bhikkhuniyo pesetabbā ‘‘gacchathayye, pucchatha ‘kiṃ ayya labhati bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’’nti. Tāhi ‘‘sādhu ayye’’ti sampaṭicchitvā ārāmaṃ gantvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vattabbaṃ – ‘‘kiṃ ayya labhati bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. Tena vattabbaṃ – ‘‘natthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū’’ti. Tāhi ‘‘sādhu ayyā’’ti sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Ekato āgatānaṃ vasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, tāsu pana ekāya bhikkhuniyā vattabbañca sampaṭicchitabbañca, itarā tassā sahāyikā.
If no one is capable of instructing the bhikkhunīs, the Pātimokkha reciter should say: "There is no bhikkhu who is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs; let the Bhikkhu Sangha inspire confidence (pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū)." For by this, the entire teaching that includes the three trainings (sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanaṃ) is announced. That bhikkhu, having accepted with "Good," should announce to the bhikkhunīs on the day after the new moon (pāṭipade). The Bhikkhunī Sangha also should send those bhikkhunīs, saying, "Go, Venerables, ask, 'Does the Bhikkhu Sangha grant the approach for instruction to the Venerable Bhikkhunī Sangha?'" They, having accepted with "Good, Venerables," having gone to the monastery, having approached that bhikkhu, should say thus: "Does the Bhikkhu Sangha grant the approach for instruction to the Venerable Bhikkhunī Sangha?" He should say: "There is no bhikkhu who is considered an instructor of bhikkhunīs; let the Bhikkhu Sangha inspire confidence." They should accept with "Good, Venerables." This was said in terms of those who have come together, but for one bhikkhunī among them, both the saying and the acceptance should be done, the others are her companions.
Sace pana bhikkhunisaṅgho vā bhikkhusaṅgho vā na pūrati, ubhayatopi vā gaṇamattameva puggalamattaṃ vā hoti, ekā bhikkhunī vā bahūhi bhikkhunupassayehi ovādatthāya pesitā hoti, tatrāyaṃ vacanakkamo – ‘‘bhikkhuniyo ayya bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira ayya bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Ahaṃ ayya bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandāmi; ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācāmi, labhāmahaṃ ayya ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
If the Bhikkhunī Sangha or the Bhikkhu Sangha is not complete, or if there are only enough individuals to constitute a group (gaṇamattameva) or just individuals (puggalamattaṃ), or if one bhikkhunī is sent from many bhikkhunī residences (bhikkhunupassayehi) for the sake of instruction, here is the manner of speaking: "The Bhikkhunīs, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and ask for the approach for instruction, may the Venerable Bhikkhunīs obtain the approach for instruction." "I, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha; and I ask for the approach for instruction, may I obtain, Venerable, the approach for instruction."
‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ayya ayyānaṃ pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira ayya bhikkhunīsaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo ayya ayyānaṃ pāde vandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira ayya bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Ahaṃ ayya ayyānaṃ pāde vandāmi, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācāmi, labhāmahaṃ ayya ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
"The Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerable, pays homage at the feet of the Venerables, and asks for the approach for instruction, may the Bhikkhunī Sangha obtain, Venerable, the approach for instruction." "The Bhikkhunīs, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Venerables, and ask for the approach for instruction, may the Venerable Bhikkhunīs obtain the approach for instruction." "I, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Venerables, and I ask for the approach for instruction, may I obtain, Venerable, the approach for instruction."
‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ayya ayyassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira ayya bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhuniyo ayya ayyassa pāde vandanti; ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira ayya bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Ahaṃ ayya ayyassa pāde vandāmi, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācāmi, labhāmahaṃ ayya ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
"The Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerable, pays homage at the feet of the Venerable, and asks for the approach for instruction, may the Bhikkhunī Sangha obtain, Venerable, the approach for instruction." "The Bhikkhunīs, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Venerable; and ask for the approach for instruction, may the Venerable Bhikkhunīs obtain the approach for instruction." "I, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Venerable, and I ask for the approach for instruction, may I obtain, Venerable, the approach for instruction."
‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ca ayya bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī ca bhikkhusaṅghassa ayyānaṃ ayyassa pāde vandati vandanti vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati yācanti yācati, labhatu kira labhantu kira labhatu kira ayya bhikkhunisaṅgho ca bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī ca ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
"The Bhikkhunī Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī, Venerable, pay homage, pay homage, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, the Venerables, the Venerable, and ask, ask, ask for the approach for instruction, may the Bhikkhunī Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī obtain, may the Venerable Bhikkhunī Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī obtain the approach for instruction."
Tenapi bhikkhunā uposathakāle evaṃ vattabbaṃ – ‘‘bhikkhuniyo bhante bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandanti, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācanti, labhantu kira bhante bhikkhuniyo ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti. ‘‘Bhikkhunī bhante bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira bhante bhikkhunī ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
That bhikkhu also should say thus at the time of the Uposatha: "The Bhikkhunīs, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and ask for the approach for instruction, may the Venerable Bhikkhunīs obtain the approach for instruction." "The Bhikkhunī, Venerable, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and asks for the approach for instruction, may the Venerable Bhikkhunī obtain the approach for instruction."
‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho bhante, bhikkhuniyo bhante, bhikkhunī bhante āyasmantānaṃ pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira bhante bhikkhunī ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
"The Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerable, the Bhikkhunīs, Venerable, the Bhikkhunī, Venerable, pay homage at the feet of the Venerables, and ask for the approach for instruction, may the Venerable Bhikkhunī obtain the approach for instruction."
‘‘Bhikkhunisaṅgho ca bhante, bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī ca bhikkhusaṅghassa āyasmantānaṃ pāde vandati vandanti vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati yācanti yācati, labhatu kira labhantu kira labhatu kira bhante bhikkhunisaṅgho ca bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī ca ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti.
"The Bhikkhunī Sangha, Venerable, and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī, Venerable, pay homage, pay homage, pay homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, the Venerables, and ask, ask, ask for the approach for instruction, may the Bhikkhunī Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī obtain, may the Venerable Bhikkhunī Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī obtain the approach for instruction."
Pātimokkhuddesakenāpi sace sammato bhikkhu atthi, purimanayeneva taṃ bhikkhuniyo, taṃ bhikkhunī, taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho ca bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī ca upasaṅkamantu upasaṅkamatu upasaṅkamatūti vattabbaṃ. Sace natthi, pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho ca bhikkhuniyo ca bhikkhunī ca sampādetu sampādentu sampādetūti vattabbaṃ.
The Pātimokkha reciter also, if there is an appointed bhikkhu, in the same way as before, should say that the Bhikkhunīs, that the Bhikkhunī, that the Bhikkhunī Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī should approach, should approach, should approach him. If there is not, he should say that a bhikkhu, inspiring confidence, should inspire confidence, should inspire confidence in the Bhikkhu Sangha and the Bhikkhunīs and the Bhikkhunī.
Ovādapaṭiggāhakena pāṭipade paccāharitvā tatheva vattabbaṃ. Ovādaṃ pana bālagilānagamike ṭhapetvā añño sacepi āraññako hoti, appaṭiggahetuṃ na labhati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
The one who receives the instruction, having brought it back on the day after the new moon, should say it in the same way. However, having set aside the immature, the sick, and the travelers, even if another is a forest-dweller (āraññako), he is not allowed to not accept it. For this was said by the Blessed One:
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ṭhapetvā bālaṃ ṭhapetvā gilānaṃ ṭhapetvā gamikaṃ avasesehi ovādaṃ gahetu’’nti (cūḷava. 414).
"I allow, bhikkhus, having set aside the immature, having set aside the sick, having set aside the traveler, for the rest to take the instruction" (cūḷava. 414).
Tattha yo cātuddasikapannarasikesu vā uposathesu pāṭipade vā gantukāmo, so gamiko dutiyapakkhadivase gacchantopi aggahetuṃ na labhati, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ovādo na gahetabbo, yo na gaṇheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 414) vuttaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjatiyeva. Ovādaṃ gahetvā ca uposathagge anārocetuṃ vā pāṭipade bhikkhunīnaṃ apaccāharituṃ vā na vaṭṭati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
There, he who intends to go on the fourteenth or fifteenth Uposatha days or on the day after the new moon, that traveler, even going on the second day of the fortnight, is not allowed to not accept it, since it was said, "No, bhikkhus, the instruction should not be rejected; whoever should not accept it, incurs an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭassā)" (cūḷava. 414), he indeed incurs the offense. Having taken the instruction, it is not proper to not announce it at the Uposatha gathering or to not bring it back to the bhikkhunīs on the day after the new moon. For it was said –
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, ovādo na ārocetabbo. Yo na āroceyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 415).
"No, bhikkhus, the instruction should not be announced. Whoever should not announce it, incurs an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭassā)" (cūḷava. 415).
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
Again it was said –
‘‘Na, bhikkhave, ovādo na paccāharitabbo. Yo na paccāhareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 415).
"No, bhikkhus, the instruction should not be brought back. Whoever should not bring it back, incurs an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭassā)" (cūḷava. 415).
Tattha āraññakena paccāharaṇatthaṃ saṅketo kātabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āraññakena bhikkhunā ovādaṃ gahetuṃ, saṅketañca kātuṃ, atra paṭiharissāmī’’ti. Tasmā āraññako bhikkhu sace bhikkhunīnaṃ vasanagāme bhikkhaṃ labhati, tattheva caritvā bhikkhuniyo disvā ārocetvā gantabbaṃ. No cassa tattha bhikkhā sulabhā hoti, sāmantagāme caritvā bhikkhunīnaṃ gāmaṃ āgamma tatheva kātabbaṃ. Sace dūraṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, saṅketo kātabbo – ‘‘ahaṃ amukaṃ nāma tumhākaṃ gāmadvāre sabhaṃ vā maṇḍapaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā upasaṅkamissāmi, tattha āgaccheyyāthā’’ti. Bhikkhunīhi tattha gantabbaṃ, agantuṃ na labbhati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bhikkhuniyā saṅketaṃ na gantabbaṃ. Yā na gaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 415).
There, an arrangement (saṅketo) should be made by the forest-dweller for the purpose of bringing it back. For it was said: "I allow, bhikkhus, for a forest-dwelling bhikkhu to take the instruction and to make an arrangement, 'I will bring it back here.'" Therefore, if a forest-dwelling bhikkhu obtains alms in the village where the bhikkhunīs reside, having walked there, having seen the bhikkhunīs, having announced it, he should go. But if alms are not easily available there, having walked in a bordering village, having come to the village of the bhikkhunīs, he should do likewise. If one has to go far, an arrangement should be made: "I, named so-and-so, will approach the meeting hall or pavilion or the foot of a tree at your village gate, you should come there." The bhikkhunīs should go there, they are not allowed not to go. For it was said: "No, bhikkhus, a bhikkhunī should not not go to the appointed place. Whoever should not go, incurs an offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭassā)" (cūḷava. 415).
Ubhatosaṅghe tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretabbanti ettha bhikkhunīhi cātuddase attanā pavāretvā uposathe bhikkhusaṅghe pavāretabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Ubhatosaṅghe tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretabbaṃ: here, the bhikkhunīs, having invited (pavāretvā) by themselves on the fourteenth, should invite the Bhikkhu Sangha on the Uposatha. For it was said –
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ajjatanāya pavāretvā aparajju bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretu’’nti (cūḷava. 427).
"I allow, bhikkhus, having invited today, to invite the Bhikkhu Sangha tomorrow" (cūḷava. 427).
Bhikkhunikhandhake vuttanayeneva cettha vinicchayo veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Here, the decision should be understood in the same way as stated in the Bhikkhunī Khandhaka. For it was said –
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena sabbo bhikkhunisaṅgho pavārento kolāhalamakāsi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ekaṃ bhikkhuniṃ byattaṃ paṭibalaṃ sammannituṃ bhikkhunisaṅghassa atthāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretuṃ. Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbā. Paṭhamaṃ bhikkhunī yācitabbā, yācitvā byattāya bhikkhuniyā paṭibalāya saṅgho ñāpetabbo –
"Then, at that time, the entire Bhikkhunī Sangha, while inviting (pavārento), made a commotion. They reported this matter to the Blessed One. I allow, bhikkhus, for one bhikkhunī, competent and capable, to be appointed to invite the Bhikkhu Sangha for the sake of the Bhikkhunī Sangha. And thus, bhikkhus, should she be appointed. First, the bhikkhunī should be requested, having requested, the Sangha should be informed to the competent and capable bhikkhunī –
‘‘Suṇātu me, ayye saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuniṃ sammanneyya bhikkhunisaṅghassa atthāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretuṃ. Esā ñatti.
Let the Sangha hear me, Venerables, if it is convenient for the Sangha, the Sangha should appoint the bhikkhunī named so-and-so to invite the Bhikkhu Sangha for the sake of the Bhikkhunī Sangha. This is the motion.
‘‘Suṇātu me, ayye saṅgho, saṅgho itthannāmaṃ bhikkhuniṃ sammanneyya bhikkhunisaṅghassa atthāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretuṃ. Yassā ayyāya khamati itthannāmāya bhikkhuniyā sammuti bhikkhunisaṅghassa atthāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretuṃ, sā tuṇhassa; yassā nakkhamati, sā bhāseyya.
Let the Sangha hear me, Venerables, the Sangha should appoint the bhikkhunī named so-and-so to invite the Bhikkhu Sangha for the sake of the Bhikkhunī Sangha. To whichever Venerable it is agreeable that the appointment of the bhikkhunī named so-and-so should be for the sake of the Bhikkhunī Sangha to invite the Bhikkhu Sangha, let her be silent; to whichever it is not agreeable, let her speak.
‘‘Sammatā saṅghena itthannāmā bhikkhunī bhikkhunisaṅghassa atthāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāretuṃ. Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 427).
The bhikkhunī named so-and-so is appointed by the Sangha to invite the Bhikkhu Sangha for the sake of the Bhikkhunī Sangha. It is agreeable to the Sangha, therefore it is silent; thus I hold it" (cūḷava. 427).
Tāya sammatāya bhikkhuniyā bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ ādāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo – ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho ayya, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāreti – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā. Vadatayya bhikkhusaṅgho bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissati. Dutiyampi ayya, tatiyampi ayya, bhikkhunisaṅgho…pe… paṭikarissatī’’ti.
That recognized bhikkhuni, taking the bhikkhuni Sangha, having approached the bhikkhu Sangha, having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder, having extended the joined palms, should say thus: "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhuni Sangha invites the bhikkhu Sangha, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable bhikkhu Sangha, out of compassion, instruct the bhikkhuni Sangha, correcting what is seen. For the second time, venerable sirs, for the third time, venerable sirs, the bhikkhuni Sangha...pe...will correct."
Sace bhikkhunisaṅgho na pūrati, ‘‘bhikkhuniyo ayya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavārenti – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatayya bhikkhusaṅgho bhikkhuniyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantiyo paṭikarissantī’’ti ca, ‘‘ahaṃ ayya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavāremi – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ ayya bhikkhusaṅgho anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti ca evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ.
If the bhikkhuni Sangha is not complete, (she should say,) "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhunis invite the bhikkhu Sangha, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable bhikkhu Sangha, out of compassion, instruct the bhikkhunis, correcting what is seen," and, "Venerable sir, I invite the bhikkhu Sangha, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable bhikkhu Sangha, out of compassion, instruct me, correcting what is seen." Thus, it should be said three times.
Sace bhikkhusaṅgho na pūrati, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho ayyā ayye pavāreti – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantayyā bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissatī’’ti ca, ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho ayya ayyaṃ pavāreti – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatayyo bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissatī’’ti ca evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ.
If the bhikkhu Sangha is not complete, (she should say,) "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhuni Sangha invites the venerable ones, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable ones, out of compassion, instruct the bhikkhuni Sangha, correcting what is seen," and, "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhuni Sangha invites the venerable ones, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable ones, out of compassion, instruct the bhikkhuni Sangha, correcting what is seen." Thus, it should be said three times.
Ubhinnaṃ apāripūriyā ‘‘bhikkhuniyo ayyā ayye pavārenti – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantayyā bhikkhuniyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantiyo paṭikarissantī’’ti ca, ‘‘bhikkhuniyo ayya ayyaṃ pavārenti – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatayyo bhikkhuniyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantiyo paṭikarissantī’’ti ca, ‘‘ahaṃ ayyā ayye pavāremi – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ ayyā anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti ca, ‘‘ahaṃ ayya ayyaṃ pavāremi – diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ ayyo anukampaṃ upādāya, passantī paṭikarissāmī’’ti ca evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ.
If neither is complete, (she should say,) "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhunis invite the venerable ones, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable ones, out of compassion, instruct the bhikkhunis, correcting what is seen," and, "Venerable sirs, the bhikkhunis invite the venerable ones, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable ones, out of compassion, instruct the bhikkhunis, correcting what is seen," and, "Venerable sirs, I invite the venerable ones, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable ones, out of compassion, instruct me, correcting what is seen," and, "Venerable sir, I invite the venerable ones, by what is seen, or by what is heard, or by what is suspected. May the venerable one, out of compassion, instruct me, correcting what is seen." Thus, it should be said three times.
Mānattacaraṇañca upasampadāpariyesanā ca yathāṭhāneyeva āvi bhavissati.
The performance of mānatta and the seeking of ordination will become apparent in their respective places.
Nabhikkhuniyā kenaci pariyāyenāti dasahi vā akkosavatthūhi aññena vā kenaci pariyāyena bhikkhu neva akkositabbo, na paribhāsitabbo, na bhayena tajjetabbo.Ovaṭoti pihito vārito paṭikkhitto. Vacanayevavacanapatho. Anovaṭoti apihito avārito appaṭikkhitto. Tasmā bhikkhuniyā ādhipaccaṭṭhāne jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā ‘‘evaṃ abhikkama, evaṃ paṭikkama, evaṃ nivāsehi, evaṃ pārupāhī’’ti kenaci pariyāyena neva bhikkhu ovaditabbo, na anusāsitabbo. Dosaṃ pana disvā ‘‘pubbe mahātherā na evaṃ abhikkamanti, na paṭikkamanti, na nivāsenti, na pārupanti, īdisaṃ kāsāvampi na dhārenti, na evaṃ akkhīni añjentī’’tiādinā nayena vijjamānadosaṃ dassetuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūhi pana ‘‘ayaṃ vuḍḍhasamaṇī evaṃ nivāseti, evaṃ pārupati, mā evaṃ nivāsehi, mā evaṃ pārupāhi, mā tilakammapaṇṇakammādīni karohī’’ti yathāsukhaṃ bhikkhuniṃ ovadituṃ anusāsituṃ vaṭṭati.
A bhikkhuni should not by any means, that is, with the ten grounds for accusation or by any other means, a bhikkhu should never be abused, nor insulted, nor threatened with fear. Ovaṭo means covered, prevented, warded off. Vacanameva means the path of speech. Anovaṭo means not covered, not prevented, not warded off. Therefore, a bhikkhuni, standing in a position of authority, in a senior position, should not in any way advise or instruct a bhikkhu, saying, "Approach in this way, retreat in this way, wear it in this way, put it on in this way." But having seen a fault, it is proper to show the existing fault in such a way as, "In the past, the elder monks did not approach in this way, did not retreat in this way, did not wear it in this way, did not put it on in this way, did not even wear such a robe, did not anoint their eyes in this way," etc. But bhikkhus may advise and instruct a bhikkhuni as they please, saying, "This old sāmaṇeri wears it in this way, puts it on in this way, do not wear it in this way, do not put it on in this way, do not do tilakamma or paṇṇakamma," etc.
Samaggamhayyāti bhaṇantanti ‘‘samaggā amha ayya’’ iti bhaṇantaṃ bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ.Aññaṃ dhammaṃ bhaṇatīti aññaṃ suttantaṃ vā abhidhammaṃ vā. Samaggamhayyāti vacanena hi ovādaṃ paccāsīsanti, tasmā ṭhapetvā ovādaṃ aññaṃ dhammaṃ bhaṇantassa dukkaṭaṃ.Ovādaṃ aniyyādetvāti eso bhaginiyo ovādoti avatvā.
Saying 'We are in concord, venerable sir': the bhikkhuni Sangha saying, "We are in concord, venerable sir." Speaks on another subject: another suttanta or abhidhamma. For with the words "We are in concord, venerable sir," they expect instruction; therefore, having set aside the instruction, there is a dukkaṭa for speaking on another subject. Without assigning the instruction: without saying, "This is the instruction for the sisters."
150.Adhammakammetiādīsu bhikkhunovādakasammutikammaṃ kammanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha adhammakamme dvinnaṃ navakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhārasa pācittiyāni. Dhammakamme dutiyassa navakassa avasānapade anāpatti, sesesu sattarasa dukkaṭāni.
150.In an unlawful act, etc.: the act of giving consent for a bhikkhu to instruct should be understood as an act (kamma). Therein, in an unlawful act, there are eighteen pācittiyas by way of two nines. In a lawful act, there is no offense in the final clause of the second nine, in the remaining seventeen there are dukkaṭas.
152.Uddesaṃ dentoti aṭṭhannaṃ garudhammānaṃ pāḷiṃ uddisanto.Paripucchaṃ dentoti tassāyeva paguṇāya garudhammapāḷiyā aṭṭhakathaṃ kathentoti attho.Osārehi ayyāti vuccamāno osāretīti evaṃ vuccamāno aṭṭhagarudhammapāḷiṃ osāretīti attho. Evaṃ uddesaṃ dento, paripucchaṃ dento, yo ca osārehīti vuccamāno aṭṭha garudhamme bhaṇati, tassa pācittiyena anāpatti. Aññaṃ dhammaṃ bhaṇantassa dukkaṭena anāpatti.Pañhaṃ pucchati, pañhaṃ puṭṭho kathetīti bhikkhunī garudhammanissitaṃ vā khandhādinissitaṃ vā pañhaṃ pucchati, taṃ yo bhikkhu katheti, tassāpi anāpatti.Aññassatthāya bhaṇantanti catuparisatiṃ dhammaṃ desentaṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhuniyo suṇanti, tatrāpi bhikkhussa anāpatti.Sikkhamānāya sāmaṇeriyāti etāsaṃ desentassāpi anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
152.Giving the recitation: reciting the Pali of the eight Garudhamma. Giving the inquiry: explaining the commentary of that same well-learned Garudhamma Pali, is the meaning. When being told, 'Recite, venerable sir,' he recites: when being told thus, he recites the eight Garudhamma Pali, is the meaning. Thus, for one giving the recitation, one giving the inquiry, and one who, being told to recite, speaks on the eight Garudhamma, there is no offense by pācittiya. For speaking on another subject, there is no offense by dukkaṭa. Asks a question, having been asked a question, he speaks: a bhikkhuni asks a question related to the Garudhamma or related to the khandhas and so on, and that bhikkhu speaks, there is also no offense for him. Speaking for the sake of another: bhikkhunis approach a bhikkhu teaching the Dhamma to the four assemblies and listen, there is also no offense for the bhikkhu in that. To a sikkhamānā or a sāmaṇeri: there is also no offense for one teaching to these. The rest is of obvious meaning.
Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ – vācato ca vācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ tivedananti.
The origination of the word-by-word Dhamma arises from speech, and from mind-accompanied speech; it is an action (kiriya), without perception of release (nosaññāvimokkha), unintentional, an offense by designation (paṇṇattivajja), a verbal act (vacīkamma), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Ovādasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The Ovāda Training Rule, the first.
2. Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Description of the Training Rule on Setting (of the Sun)
153.Dutiyasikkhāpade –pariyāyenāti vārena, paṭipāṭiyāti attho.Adhicetasoti adhicittavato, sabbacittānaṃ adhikena arahattaphalacittena samannāgatassāti attho.Appamajjatoti nappamajjato, appamādena kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sātaccakiriyāya samannāgatassāti vuttaṃ hoti.Muninoti ‘‘yo munāti ubho loke, muni tena pavuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 269) evaṃ ubhayalokamunanena vā, monaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, tena ñāṇena samannāgatattā vā khīṇāsavo muni nāma vuccati, tassa munino.Monapathesu sikkhatoti arahattañāṇasaṅkhātassa monassa pathesu sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammesu tīsu vā sikkhāsu sikkhato. Idañca pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, tasmā evaṃ pubbabhāge sikkhato imāya sikkhāya munibhāvaṃ pattassa muninoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Sokā na bhavanti tādinoti tādisassa khīṇāsavamunino abbhantare iṭṭhaviyogādivatthukā sokā na santi. Atha vātādinoti tādilakkhaṇasamannāgatassa evarūpassa munino sokā na bhavantīti ayamettha attho.Upasantassāti rāgādīnaṃ upasamena upasantassa.Sadā satīmatoti sativepullappattattā niccakālaṃ satiyā avirahitassa.Ākāse antalikkheti antalikkhasaṅkhāte ākāse, na kasiṇugghāṭime, na pana rūpaparicchede.Caṅkamatipi tiṭṭhatipīti tāsaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘imā bhikkhuniyo maṃ ‘ettakameva ayaṃ jānātī’ti avamaññanti, handa dāni etāsaṃ attano ānubhāvaṃ dassemī’’ti dhammabahumānaṃ uppādetvā abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya evarūpaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ dassesi – ‘‘ākāse antalikkhe caṅkamatipi…pe… antaradhāyatipī’’ti. Tatthaantaradhāyatipīti antaradhāyatipi adassanampi gacchatīti attho.Tañceva udānaṃ bhaṇati aññañca bahuṃ buddhavacananti thero kira attano bhātutherassa santike –
153.In the second training rule—pariyāyenā: by turn, in order, is the meaning. Adhicetaso: of superior mind, meaning possessing a mind superior to all minds, endowed with the fruition consciousness of Arahatship. Appamajjato: of one not negligent, it has been said to mean endowed with constant action in regard to skillful qualities by means of non-negligence. Munino: "He who understands both worlds is therefore called a muni," (Dhp. 269) thus, by one who understands both worlds, or mona means knowledge (ñāṇa), because of being endowed with that knowledge, a khīṇāsava is called muni, of that muni. Monapathesu sikkhato: training in the paths of mona, which is synonymous with the knowledge of Arahatship, in the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment or in the three trainings. And this is said taking up the preliminary practice; therefore, the meaning here should be understood thus: of the muni who, having trained in this way in the preliminary stage, has attained muni-hood by this training, is a muni. Sokā na bhavanti tādino: sorrows relating to the loss of loved objects, etc., do not exist within that tādi khīṇāsava muni. Or, alternatively, tādino: sorrows do not occur to such a muni endowed with such characteristics, this is the meaning here. Upasantassā: of one calmed by the calming of the rāga etc. Sadā satīmato: of one who is constantly not separated from mindfulness due to having attained abundance of mindfulness. Ākāse antalikkhe: in the sky referred to as the intermediate space (antalikkha), not in the kasiṇa-ugghāṭima, nor in the delimitation of form. Caṅkamatipi tiṭṭhatipī: having heard their talk, "These bhikkhunis despise me, thinking, 'This one knows only this much,' come now, I will show these my power," having generated great respect for the Dhamma, having attained the fourth jhāna, which is the basis for supernormal powers, having arisen, he showed such a supernormal feat—"He walks in the sky, in the intermediate space...pe...he disappears." Therein, antaradhāyatipī: he also disappears, goes to invisibility, is the meaning. Tañceva udānaṃ bhaṇati aññañca bahuṃ buddhavacanaṃ: it seems that the Elder, in the presence of his brother Elder—
‘‘Padumaṃ yathā kokanudaṃ sugandhaṃ,
“Just as a red lotus, sweet-scented,
Would bloom in the morning, its scent not yet faded,
Behold Aṅgīrasa, shining forth,
Like the sun blazing in the sky.” (SN 1.123);
Imaṃ gāthaṃ uddisāpetvā cattāro māse sajjhāyi. Na ca paguṇaṃ kattumasakkhi. Tato naṃ thero ‘‘abhabbo tvaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane’’ti vihārā nikkaḍḍhāpesi, so rodamāno dvārakoṭṭhake aṭṭhāsi. Atha bhagavā buddhacakkhunā veneyyasatte olokento taṃ disvā vihāracārikaṃ caramāno viya tassa santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘cūḷapanthaka, kasmā rodasī’’ti āha. So tamatthaṃ ārocesi. Athassa bhagavā suddhaṃ pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ datvā ‘‘idaṃ ‘rajoharaṇaṃ rajoharaṇa’nti parimajjāhī’’ti āha. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā attano nivāsaṭṭhāne nisīditvā tassa ekamantaṃ parimajji, parimajjitaṭṭhānaṃ kāḷakamahosi. So ‘‘evaṃ parisuddhampi nāma vatthaṃ imaṃ attabhāvaṃ nissāya kāḷakaṃ jāta’’nti saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhi. Athassa bhagavā āraddhavīriyabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘adhicetaso’’ti imaṃ obhāsagāthaṃ abhāsi. Thero gāthāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tasmā thero pakatiyāva imaṃ gāthaṃ mamāyati, so taṃ imissā gāthāya mamāyanabhāvaṃ jānāpetuṃ taṃyeva bhaṇati. Aññañca antarantarā āharitvā bahuṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tañceva udānaṃ bhaṇati, aññañca bahuṃ buddhavacana’’nti.
Having made (him) learn this verse, he recited (it) for four months. But he was unable to make (it) fluent. Then the Elder drove him out of the monastery, (saying,) "You are incapable in this Dispensation." He stood weeping at the gatehouse. Then the Blessed One, looking at beings amenable to guidance with the Buddha-eye, having seen him, as if wandering on monastery rounds, went to his presence and said, "Cūḷapanthaka, why do you weep?" He explained the matter to him. Then the Blessed One gave him a clean piece of cloth and said, "Wipe this, saying, 'Removal of dust, removal of dust.'" He agreed, saying, "Good," and sitting down in his dwelling, he wiped one edge of it, the wiped area became black. He regained saṃvega, (thinking,) "Even such a pure cloth becomes black because of relying on this existence," and began insight (meditation). Then the Blessed One, knowing his state of aroused energy, spoke this verse of illumination, "adhicetaso." At the end of the verse, the Elder attained Arahatship. Therefore, the Elder naturally considers this verse as his own, and to make known his feeling of ownership of this verse to her, he speaks that very one. And from time to time, having brought forward much Buddha-word. Therefore, it was said—"He speaks that very exclamation, and much other Buddha-word."
156.Ekato upasampannāyāti bhikkhunisaṅghe upasampannāya, bhikkhusaṅghe pana upasampannaṃ ovadantassa pācittiyaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Idampi ca padasodhammasamuṭṭhānameva.
156.Ekato upasampannāyā: ordained in the bhikkhuni Sangha; however, there is a pācittiya for one ordained in the bhikkhu Sangha for instructing. The rest here is obvious. And this too is the same origination of word-by-word Dhamma.
Atthaṅgatasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Training Rule on Setting (of the Sun), the second.
3. Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Description of the Training Rule on the Bhikkhuni Residence
162.Tatiyasikkhāpade –aññatra samayā ovadati āpatti pācittiyassātiādīsu aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadantasseva pācittiyaṃ, aññena dhammena dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ.Ekatoupasampannāyāti bhikkhunisaṅghe upasampannāya, bhikkhusaṅghe upasampannāya pana ovadato pācittiyameva. Ito parampi yattha yattha ‘‘ekatoupasampannā’’ti vuccati, sabbattha ayameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
162.In the third training rule—aññatra samayā ovadati āpatti pācittiyassā, etc.: there is a pācittiya only for one instructing with the eight Garudhamma, it should be understood that there is a dukkaṭa with another Dhamma. Ekatoupasampannāyā: ordained in the bhikkhuni Sangha; however, there is only a pācittiya for one ordained in the bhikkhu Sangha for instructing. From here on, wherever "ekatoupasampannā" is said, this same meaning should be understood everywhere. The rest is obvious.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato, kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
The origination is by means of kathina—it arises from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; it is an action (kiriya), without perception of release (nosaññāvimokkha), unintentional, an offense by designation (paṇṇattivajja), a bodily act (kāyakamma), a verbal act (vacīkamma), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Bhikkhunupassayasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Training Rule on the Bhikkhuni Residence, the third.
Idaṃ panettha mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ – asammato ce bhikkhu atthaṅgate sūriye bhikkhunupassayaṃ upasaṅkamitvā aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati, tīṇi pācittiyāni. Aññena dhammena ovadato dve dukkaṭāni, ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Kathaṃ? Asammatamūlakaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, upassayaṃ gantvā aññena dhammena ovadanamūlakaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, atthaṅgate sūriye ovadanamūlakaṃ pācittiyanti. Sammatassa atthaṅgate sūriye tattha gantvā aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadantassa ekā anāpatti, dve pācittiyāni. Kathaṃ? Sammatattā anāpatti, atthaṅgate sūriye ovadanamūlakaṃ ekaṃ, gantvā garudhammehi ovadanamūlakaṃ ekanti dve pācittiyāni. Tasseva aññena dhammena ovadato ekā anāpatti, ekaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Kathaṃ? Sammatattā anāpatti, gantvā aññena dhammena ovadanamūlakaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, atthaṅgate sūriye ovadanamūlakaṃ pācittiyanti. Divā pana gantvā ovadato sammatassa ca asammatassa ca rattiṃ ovadanamūlakaṃ ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ apanetvā avasesā āpattānāpattiyo veditabbāti.
Here, in this regard, the following miscellaneous (points) were stated in the Mahāpaccariya: If an unappointed bhikkhu, after sunset, approaches a bhikkhuni residence and instructs with the eight Garudhamma, there are three pācittiyas. For one instructing with another Dhamma, there are two dukkaṭas, one pācittiya. How? A dukkaṭa rooted in being unappointed, a dukkaṭa rooted in going to the residence and instructing with another Dhamma, a pācittiya rooted in instructing after sunset. For an appointed (bhikkhu) who, after sunset, having gone there, instructs with the eight Garudhamma, there is one no offense, two pācittiyas. How? No offense because of being appointed, one rooted in instructing after sunset, one rooted in going and instructing with the Garudhamma, thus two pācittiyas. For that same one who instructs with another Dhamma, there is one no offense, one dukkaṭa, one pācittiya. How? No offense because of being appointed, a dukkaṭa rooted in going and instructing with another Dhamma, a pācittiya rooted in instructing after sunset. But having gone during the day and instructing, having removed one pācittiya rooted in instructing at night for both the appointed and the unappointed, the remaining offenses and non-offenses should be understood.
Pakiṇṇakakathā niṭṭhitā.
The miscellaneous talk is finished.
4. Āmisasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Description of the Training Rule on Gifts
164.Catutthasikkhāpade –na bahukatāti na katabahumānā, na dhamme bahumānaṃ katvā ovadantīti adhippāyo.‘‘Bhikkhunovādakaṃ avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo’’tiādīnaṃ ujjhāpanake vuttanayenevattho veditabbo.
164.In the fourth training rule—na bahukatā: not making much of, the meaning is not instructing having made much of the Dhamma. ‘‘Bhikkhunovādakaṃ avaṇṇaṃ kattukāmo’’: The meaning of these, as stated in the incitement, should be understood in the same way.
Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammatanti ettha asammato nāma sammatena vā saṅghena vā bhāraṃ katvā ṭhapito veditabbo.Anupasampannaṃ sammataṃ vā asammataṃ vāti ettha pana bhikkhukāle sammutiṃ labhitvā sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhito sammato, sammatena vā saṅghena vā ṭhapito bahussuto sāmaṇero asammatoti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā uttānameva.
Upasampannaṃ saṅghena asammataṃ: Here, an unappointed (bhikkhu) should be understood as one laid aside having placed the burden on (him) by an appointed (bhikkhu) or by the Sangha. Anupasampannaṃ sammataṃ vā asammataṃ vā: Here, however, one who, having obtained consent during the time of being a bhikkhu, stands in the ground of a sāmaṇera is appointed, a sāmaṇera who is learned and laid aside by an appointed (bhikkhu) or by the Sangha is understood to be unappointed. The rest is obvious because of the mode having been stated.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – arises from body and mind, or from speech and mind, or from body, speech, and mind; it is an action (kiriya), without intention of release (saññāvimokkha), unintentional (acittaka), a fault against the rule (lokavajja), a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome state of mind, and a painful feeling.
Āmisasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The Fourth Āmisa Training Rule.
5. Cīvaradānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Giving Robes
169.Pañcamasikkhāpade –visikhāyāti rathikāya.Piṇḍāya caratīti nibaddhacāravasena abhiṇhaṃ carati.Sandiṭṭhāti sandiṭṭhamittā ahesuṃ. Sesamettha padato uttānatthaṃ, vinicchayato cīvarapaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhi. Tatra hi bhikkhu paṭiggāhako, idha bhikkhunī, ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
169.In the Fifth Training Rule: visikhāya means on the road (rathikāya). Piṇḍāya caratī means she frequently wanders for alms by means of a continuous round. Sandiṭṭhā means they were well-acquainted friends. The rest is straightforward in meaning from the words, and in terms of judgement, it should be understood in the same way as stated in the Training Rule on receiving robes, along with the arising (samuṭṭhāna) etc. In that case, the bhikkhu is the receiver, here the bhikkhunī, this is the difference. The rest is just the same.
Cīvaradānasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth Cīvaradāna Training Rule.
6. Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Sewing Robes
175.Chaṭṭhasikkhāpade –udāyīti lāḷudāyī.Paṭṭhoti paṭibalo, nipuṇo ceva samattho cāti vuttaṃ hoti.Aññatarā bhikkhunīti tasseva purāṇadutiyikā.Paṭibhānacittanti attano paṭibhānena katacittaṃ, so kira cīvaraṃ rajitvā tassa majjhe nānāvaṇṇehi vippakatamethunaṃ itthipurisarūpamakāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘majjhe paṭibhānacittaṃ vuṭṭhāpetvā’’ti.Yathāsaṃhaṭanti yathāsaṃharitameva.
175.In the Sixth Training Rule: udāyī means Lāḷudāyī. Paṭṭho means capable, clever and competent, it is said. Aññatarā bhikkhunī means his former second wife. Paṭibhānacittanti means a design made by her ingenuity; it seems she dyed the robe and then made a drawing of a couple engaging in sexual intercourse in the middle using various colors. Therefore, it is said: "having depicted an ingenious design in the middle." Yathāsaṃhaṭanti means just as it was collected.
176.Cīvaranti yaṃ nivāsituṃ vā pārupituṃ vā sakkā hoti, evañhi mahāpaccariyādīsu vuttaṃ.Sayaṃ sibbatīti ettha sibbissāmīti vicārentassāpi chindantassāpi dukkaṭaṃ, sibbantassa pana pācittiyaṃ.Ārāpathe ārāpatheti sūciṃ pavesetvā pavesetvā nīharaṇe. Sace pana sakalasūciṃ anīharanto dīghasuttappavesanatthaṃ satakkhattumpi vijjhitvā nīharati, ekameva pācittiyaṃ.Sakiṃ āṇattoti sakiṃ ‘‘cīvaraṃ sibbā’’ti vutto.Bahukampi sibbatīti sacepi sabbaṃ sūcikammaṃ pariyosāpetvā cīvaraṃ niṭṭhāpeti, ekameva pācittiyaṃ. Atha pana ‘‘imasmiṃ cīvare kattabbakammaṃ tava bhāro’’ti vutto karoti, āṇattassa ārāpathe ārāpathe ekamekaṃ pācittiyaṃ, āṇāpakassa ekavācāya sambahulānipi. Punappunaṃ āṇattiyaṃ pana vattabbameva natthi.
176.Cīvara means that which can be worn or used as an outer robe, as it is stated in the Mahāpaccari and others. Sayaṃ sibbatī means that even while considering 'I will sew' or while cutting, there is a dukkaṭa, but when sewing, there is a pācittiya. Ārāpathe ārāpathe means inserting and removing the needle. But if, without removing the entire needle, she pierces it even a hundred times to insert a long thread, there is only one pācittiya. Sakiṃ āṇatto means having been told once, "sew the robe." Bahukampi sibbatī means even if he completes all the needlework and finishes the robe, there is only one pācittiya. But if he is told, "the work to be done on this robe is your responsibility," each insertion of the needle by the one instructed incurs a pācittiya, and many for the one who instructs, in one utterance. There is certainly nothing to be said about repeated instructions.
Yepi sace ācariyupajjhāyesu attano ñātikānaṃ cīvaraṃ sibbantesu tesaṃ nissitakā ‘‘ācariyupajjhāyavattaṃ vā kathinavattaṃ vā karomā’’ti sibbanti, tesampi ārāpathagaṇanāya āpattiyo. Ācariyupajjhāyā attano ñātikānaṃ cīvaraṃ antevāsikehi sibbāpenti, ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, antevāsikānaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Antevāsikā attano ñātikānaṃ ācariyupajjhāyehi sibbāpenti, tatrāpi eseva nayo. Antevāsikānampi ācariyupajjhāyānampi ñātikāya cīvaraṃ hoti, ācariyupajjhāyā pana antevāsike vañcetvā sibbāpenti, ubhinnampi dukkaṭaṃ. Kasmā? Antevāsikānaṃ aññātikasaññāya sibbitattā, itaresaṃ akappiye niyojitattā. Tasmā ‘‘idaṃ te mātu cīvaraṃ, idaṃ bhaginiyā’’ti ācikkhitvā sibbāpetabbaṃ.
Even if, when teachers or preceptors are sewing robes for their own relatives, their pupils think, "let us do the duties for teachers or preceptors, or the Kathina duties," and sew, they also incur offenses according to the count of needle insertions. Teachers and preceptors have their pupils sew robes for their own relatives, for the teachers and preceptors it is a dukkaṭa, for the pupils a pācittiya. Pupils have their teachers and preceptors sew robes for their own relatives; the same rule applies there as well. If the robe belongs to relatives of both the pupils and the teachers and preceptors, but the teachers and preceptors deceive the pupils and have them sew it, both incur a dukkaṭa. Why? Because the pupils sew thinking it is for a non-relative, and the others instruct them in what is improper. Therefore, it should be pointed out, "this is your mother's robe, this is your sister's," and then have them sew it.
179.Aññaṃparikkhāranti yaṃkiñci upāhanatthavikādiṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
179.Aññaṃ parikkhāranti means any equipment whatsoever, such as shoes or a bag. The rest is straightforward. Sixfold arising – arises from action, without intention of release, unintentional, a fault against the rule, bodily action, verbal action, three types of mind, three types of feeling.
Cīvarasibbanasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth Cīvarasibbana Training Rule.
7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Saṃvidhāna Training Rule
181.Sattamasikkhāpade –pacchā gacchantīnaṃ corā acchindiṃsūti pacchā gacchantīnaṃ pattacīvaraṃ corā hariṃsu.Dūsesunti tā bhikkhuniyo corā dūsayiṃsu, sīlavināsaṃ pāpayiṃsūti attho.
181.In the Seventh Training Rule: pacchā gacchantīnaṃ corā acchindiṃsū means thieves stole the bowls and robes of those who were going behind. Dūsesunti means those nuns were violated by thieves; that is, they were made to lose their virtue.
182-3.Saṃvidhāyāti saṃvidahitvā, gamanakāle saṅketaṃ katvāti attho.Kukkuṭasampādeti ettha yasmā gāmā nikkhamitvā kukkuṭo padasāva aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchati, ayaṃ kukkuṭasampādoti vuccati. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – sampadanti etthātisampādo. Ke sampadanti? Kukkuṭā. Kukkuṭānaṃ sampādokukkuṭasampādo. Atha vā sampādoti gamanaṃ, kukkuṭānaṃ sampādo ettha atthītipi kukkuṭasampādo. Kukkuṭasampāte itipi pāṭho, tattha yassa gāmassa gehacchadanapiṭṭhito kukkuṭo uppatitvā aññassa gehacchadanapiṭṭhiyaṃ patati, ayaṃ kukkuṭasampātoti vuccati. Vacanattho panettha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Dvidhā vuttappakāropi cesa gāmo accāsanno hoti, upacāro na labbhati. Yasmiṃ pana gāme paccūse vassantassa kukkuṭassa saddo anantare gāme suyyati, tādisehi gāmehi sampuṇṇaraṭṭhe gāmantare gāmantare pācittiyanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi vuttaṃ, ‘‘gāmantare gāmantare āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti vacanato pana sacepi ratanamattantaro gāmo hoti, yo tassa manussehi ṭhapitaupacāro, taṃ okkamantassa āpattiyeva.
182-3.Saṃvidhāyāti means having arranged, that is, having made an agreement at the time of departure. Kukkuṭasampādeti, here, since a chicken, having come out of one village, goes to another village within the distance of its steps, this is called a 'chicken's passage' (kukkuṭasampāda). Here is the meaning of the word: sampādo means that in which they come together. Who comes together? Chickens. Kukkuṭasampādo means the coming together of chickens. Or alternatively, sampāda means going; kukkuṭasampādo also means where there is the going of chickens. Kukkuṭasampāte is also a reading; there, that which is called kukkuṭasampāta is where a chicken flies from the roof of one house in a village and lands on the roof of another house. The meaning of the word should be understood in the manner stated here. Even if a village is very close in the way described in two ways, an upacāra is not obtained. In whatever village the sound of a rooster crowing early in the morning is heard in the immediately adjacent village, in a state full of such villages there is a pācittiya between villages, it is said in the commentary. Although it is said, "there is an offense of pācittiya between each village," however, even if a village is only a ratana's measure away, if one enters the upacāra established by the people of that village, there is indeed an offense.
Tatrāyaṃ āpattivinicchayo – saṃvidhānakāle hi sace ubhopi bhikkhunupassaye vā antarārāme vā āsanasālāya vā titthiyaseyyāya vā ṭhatvā saṃvidahanti, anāpatti kappiyabhūmi kirāyaṃ. Tasmā ettha saṃvidahanapaccayā dukkaṭāpattiṃ na vadanti, gacchantassa yathāvatthukameva. Sace pana antogāme bhikkhunupassayadvāre rathikāya aññesu vā catukkasiṅghāṭakahatthisālādīsu saṃvidahanti, bhikkhuno āpatti dukkaṭassa. Evaṃ saṃvidahitvā gāmato nikkhamanti, nikkhamane anāpatti, anantaragāmassa upacārokkamane pana bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ. Tatrāpi ‘‘paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiya’’nti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Gāmato nikkhamitvā pana yāva anantaragāmassa upacāraṃ na okkamanti, etthantare saṃvidahitepi bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ, anantaragāmassa upacārokkamane purimanayeneva āpatti. Sace dūraṃ gantukāmā honti, gāmūpacāragaṇanāya okkamane okkamane āpatti, tassa tassa pana gāmassa atikkamane anāpatti. Sace pana bhikkhunī ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gamissāmī’’ti upassayato nikkhamati, bhikkhupi tameva gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gamissāmī’’ti vihārato nikkhamati. Atha dvepi gāmadvāre samāgantvā ‘‘tumhe kuhiṃ gacchatha, asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ tumhe kuhinti, mayampi tatthevā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ehi dāni, gacchāmā’’ti saṃvidhāya gacchanti, anāpatti. Kasmā? Pubbameva gamissāmāti nikkhantattāti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ neva pāḷiyā na sesaaṭṭhakathāya sameti.
Here is the determination of the offense: if at the time of arranging, both are standing in a nun's residence or an intermediate monastery or in a rest house or a heretical dwelling and arrange, there is no offense, it is an allowable place for this activity. Therefore, here they do not say there is an offense of dukkaṭa due to the condition of arranging, but only what is appropriate for the one going. But if they arrange inside a village at the entrance to a nun's residence, on a road, or at other crossroads, market halls, etc., the bhikkhu incurs an offense of dukkaṭa. Having arranged thus, they leave the village; there is no offense in leaving, but when the bhikkhu enters the upacāra of the next village, there is a pācittiya. There too, "duukkaṭa in the first step, pācittiya in the second step," it is said in the Mahāpaccari. But having left the village, as long as they do not enter the upacāra of the next village, even if they arrange in between, the bhikkhu incurs a dukkaṭa; upon entering the upacāra of the next village, the offense is as before. If they intend to go far, there is an offense for each entry when calculating the village upacāra, but there is no offense in passing beyond each of those villages. If a bhikkhunī leaves the residence thinking "I will go to such and such village," and a bhikkhu, thinking of the same village, leaves the monastery thinking, "I will go to such and such village." Then, if both meet at the village gate and say, "Where are you going? To such and such village. Where are you going?" "We too are going there," and then say, "Come now, let's go," and go having arranged, there is no offense. Why? Because they had already left intending to go, it is said in the Mahāpaccari. That does not agree with either the Pali or the rest of the commentary.
Addhayojane addhayojaneti ekamekaṃ addhayojanaṃ atikkamantassa idāni atikkamissatīti paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiyaṃ. Imasmiñhi naye atikkamane āpatti, okkamane anāpatti.
Addhayojane addhayojaneti means for each half-yojana that is passed, there is a dukkaṭa for the first step in anticipation of crossing, and a pācittiya for the second step. In this method, there is an offense upon crossing, but no offense upon entering.
184.Bhikkhu saṃvidahatīti nagaradvāre vā rathikāya vā bhikkhuniṃ disvā ‘‘asukaṃ gāmaṃ nāma gatapubbatthā’’ti vadati, ‘‘nāmhi ayya gatapubbā’’ti ‘‘ehi gacchāmā’’ti vā ‘‘sve ahaṃ gamissāmi, tvampi āgaccheyyāsī’’ti vā vadati.Bhikkhunī saṃvidahatīti gāmantare cetiyavandanatthaṃ gāmato nikkhamantaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā ‘‘ayya kuhiṃ gacchathā’’ti vadati. ‘‘Asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ cetiyavandanattha’’nti. ‘‘Ahampi ayya āgacchāmī’’ti evaṃ bhikkhunīyeva saṃvidahati, na bhikkhu.
184.Bhikkhu saṃvidahatīti means seeing a bhikkhunī at the city gate or on the road, he says, "Have you ever gone to such and such village?" "No, venerable, I have never gone." Then he says, "Come, let's go," or "I will go tomorrow, you should come too." Bhikkhunī saṃvidahatīti means seeing a bhikkhu leaving a village to venerate a cetiya in another village, she says, "Where are you going, venerable?" "To such and such village to venerate a cetiya." "I too am coming, venerable." Thus, the bhikkhunī alone arranges, not the bhikkhu.
185.Visaṅketenāti ettha ‘‘purebhattaṃ gacchissāmā’’ti vatvā pacchābhattaṃ gacchanti, ‘‘ajja vā gamissāmā’’ti vatvā sve gacchanti. Evaṃ kālavisaṅketeyeva anāpatti, dvāravisaṅkete pana maggavisaṅkete vā satipi āpattiyeva.Āpadāsūti raṭṭhabhede cakkasamāruḷhā janapadā pariyāyanti evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
185.Visaṅketenāti here, there is no offense only with regard to a discrepancy in time, for example, saying "we will go before the meal" and going after the meal, or saying "we will go today" and going tomorrow. There is certainly an offense even with a discrepancy in the gate or a discrepancy in the path. Āpadāsūti means in such dangers as when countries are ravaged by plagues, and districts are in turmoil, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato kāyavācato kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Fourfold arising – arises from body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; it is an action, without intention of release, unintentional, a fault against the rule, bodily action, verbal action, three types of mind, three types of feeling.
Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The Seventh Saṃvidhāna Training Rule.
8. Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Embarking on a Boat
188.Aṭṭhamasikkhāpade –saṃvidhāyāti lokassādamittasanthavavasena kīḷāpurekkhārā saṃvidahitvā.Uddhaṃgāmininti uddhaṃ nadiyā paṭisotaṃ gacchantiṃ. Yasmā pana yo uddhaṃ javanato ujjavanikāya nāvāya kīḷati, so ‘‘uddhaṃgāminiṃ abhiruhatī’’ti vuccati. Tenassa padabhājane atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘ujjavanikāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.Adhogāmininti adho anusotaṃ gacchantiṃ. Yasmā pana yo adho javanato ojavanikāya nāvāya kīḷati, so ‘‘adhogāminiṃ abhiruhatī’’ti vuccati. Tenassāpi padabhājane atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘ojavanikāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ titthasampaṭipādanatthaṃ uddhaṃ vā adho vā haranti, ettha anāpatti.Tiriyaṃ taraṇāyāti upayogatthe nissakkavacanaṃ.
188.In the Eighth Training Rule: saṃvidhāyāti means having arranged through delighting in the world, friendship, and intimacy, with playfulness as the preliminary. Uddhaṃgāmininti means going upstream against the current of the river. Since one who plays upstream in a fast-flowing boat is called "one who embarks on an upstream-going boat," therefore "ujjavanikāya" is said in the analysis of the words to show just the meaning. Adhogāmininti means going downstream with the current. Since one who plays downstream in a fast-flowing boat is called "one who embarks on a downstream-going boat," therefore "ojavanikāya" is said in the analysis of the words to show just the meaning for that as well. There is no offense where they carry (something) upstream or downstream for the purpose of completing a landing place. Tiriyaṃ taraṇāyāti is a non-attributive word in the sense of use.
189.Gāmantare gāmantareti ettha yassā nadiyā ekaṃ tīraṃ kukkuṭasampādagāmehi nirantaraṃ, ekaṃ agāmakaṃ araññaṃ, tassā sagāmakatīrapassena gamanakāle gāmantaragaṇanāya pācittiyāni, agāmakatīrapassena gamanakāle addhayojanagaṇanāya. Yā pana yojanavitthatā hoti, tassā majjhena gamanepi addhayojanagaṇanāya pācittiyāni veditabbāni.Anāpatti tiriyaṃ taraṇāyāti ettha na kevalaṃ nadiyā, yopi mahātitthapaṭṭanato tāmalittiṃ vā suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ vā gacchati, tassāpi anāpatti. Sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu hi nadiyaṃyeva āpatti vicāritā, na samudde.
189.Gāmantare gāmantareti here, if one bank of a river is continuously lined with chicken-passage villages and the other is an uninhabited forest, there are pācittiyas for each village passed when traveling along the village-lined bank, and offenses according to the calculation of half-yojanas when traveling along the uninhabited bank. It should be understood that even when traveling in the middle of a river that is a yojana wide, there are pācittiyas according to the calculation of half-yojanas. Anāpatti tiriyaṃ taraṇāyāti here, not only for a river, but also for one who goes from a great port to Tāmalitti or Suvaṇṇabhūmi, there is no offense. In all the commentaries, the offense has been considered only in a river, not in the ocean.
191.Visaṅketenāti idhāpi kālavisaṅketeneva anāpatti, titthavisaṅketena pana nāvāvisaṅketena vā gacchantassa āpattiyeva. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpadasadisameva saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
191.Visaṅketenāti here too, there is no offense only with a discrepancy in time, but there is indeed an offense for one who goes with a discrepancy in the landing place or a discrepancy in the boat. The rest is similar to the first training rule, along with the arising etc.
Nāvābhiruhanasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Eighth Nāvābhiruhana Training Rule.
9. Paripācitasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Paripācita Training Rule Explanation
192.Navamasikkhāpade –mahānāge tiṭṭhamāneti bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, mahānāgesu tiṭṭhamānesūti attho. Atha vā mahānāge tiṭṭhamāne ‘‘adisvā’’ti ayamettha pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Itarathā hi attho na yujjati.Antarākathāti avasānaṃ appatvā ārambhassa ca avasānassa ca vemajjhaṭṭhānaṃ pattakathā.Vippakatāti kayiramānā hoti.Saccaṃ mahānāgā kho tayā gahapatīti addhacchikena olokayamānā there pavisante disvā tehi sutabhāvaṃ ñatvā evamāha.
192.In the Ninth Training Rule: mahānāge tiṭṭhamāneti is a locative word in the sense of "on the ground," meaning when great elephants are standing. Or alternatively, the reading mahānāge tiṭṭhamāne ‘‘adisvā’’ti "without seeing," should be understood here as the remainder of the passage. Otherwise, the meaning does not fit. Antarākathāti means a talk that has reached a position intermediate between the beginning and the end without reaching the conclusion or the beginning. Vippakatāti means is being done. Saccaṃ mahānāgā kho tayā gahapatīti, seeing the Theras entering, looking with genuine wonder, and knowing that they had heard, she spoke thus.
194.Bhikkhuniparipācitanti bhikkhuniyā paripācitaṃ, guṇappakāsanena nipphāditaṃ; laddhabbaṃ katanti attho. Padabhājane panassa bhikkhuniñca tassā paripācanākārañca dassetuṃ ‘‘bhikkhunī nāma ubhatosaṅghe upasampannā, paripāceti nāma pubbe adātukāmāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Pubbe gihisamārambhāti etthapubbeti paṭhamaṃ.Samārambhoti samāraddhaṃ vuccati, paṭiyāditassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Gihīnaṃ samārambho gihisamārambho. Bhikkhuniyā paripācanato paṭhamameva yaṃ gihīnaṃ paṭiyāditaṃ bhattaṃ, tato aññatra taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ bhuñjantassa āpatti, taṃ pana bhuñjantassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padabhājane pana yasmā ñātakapavāritehi bhikkhussatthāya asamāraddhopi piṇḍapāto atthato samāraddhova hoti, yathāsukhaṃ āharāpetabbato, tasmā byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘gihisamārambho nāma ñātakā vā honti pavāritā vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
194.Bhikkhuniparipācitanti means prepared by a bhikkhunī, completed by proclaiming its qualities; that is, having made it obtainable. In the analysis of the words, "bhikkhunī means one ordained in both orders, paripāceti means for those who were previously unwilling to give," etc. is said to show the bhikkhunī and the manner of her preparation. Pubbe gihisamārambhāti, here pubbe means first. Samārambhoti means that which has been started, it is a designation for that which has been prepared. Gihisamārambho means the preparation by lay people. It is said that apart from the food prepared by lay people before the bhikkhunī's preparation, there is an offense for one who eats other alms food setting that aside, but there is no offense for one who eats that. In the analysis of the words, since alms food that has not been prepared for the sake of the bhikkhu by relatives or those who have invited is in fact already prepared, since it should be brought as desired, therefore, without paying attention to the literal meaning, "gihisamārambho means relatives or those who have invited" is said to show just the meaning.
195.Pakatipaṭiyattanti pakatiyā tasseva bhikkhuno atthāya paṭiyāditaṃ hoti ‘‘therassa dassāmā’’ti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘tassa aññassā’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ dassāmāti paṭiyattaṃ hotī’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ.
195.Pakatipaṭiyattanti means it is prepared by nature for that very bhikkhu, thinking "we will give to the Thera." In the Mahāpaccari, however, it is said without distinguishing, "it is prepared thinking 'we will give to the bhikkhus'," without saying "for that other one."
197.Pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha anāpattīti yāgukhajjakaphalāphale sabbattha bhikkhuniparipācitepi anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
197.Except for the five kinds of food, there is no offense anywhere means that there is no offense in all cases of yāgu (gruel), khajjaka (hard food), fruits, and non-fruits, even if they are prepared entirely by bhikkhunīs. The rest is self-explanatory. The origin of the first pārājika is from body and mind; it is an action (kiriya), involves release of perception (saññāvimokkha), is intentional (sacittaka), is an offense by rule (paṇṇattivajja), is a bodily action (kāyakamma), involves three mental states (ticitta), and three kinds of feeling (tivedana).
Paripācitasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The ninth, on fully prepared food.
10. Rahonisajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Seclusion
198.Dasamasikkhāpade – sabbo pāḷiattho ca vinicchayo ca dutiyaaniyate vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Idañhi sikkhāpadaṃ dutiyāniyatena ca upari upanandhassa catutthasikkhāpadena ca saddhiṃ ekaparicchedaṃ, aṭṭhuppattivasena pana visuṃ paññattanti.
198.In the tenth training rule, all the Pali meaning and the judgment should be understood in the same way as stated in the second aniyata. Indeed, this training rule, together with the second aniyata and the fourth training rule of Upananda above, forms one chapter (pariccheda), but it is established separately in terms of the eight occurrences (aṭṭhuppatti).
Rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The tenth, on seclusion.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena bhikkhunivaggo tatiyo.
The third Bhikkhunī Vagga is complete with the order of explanation.
4. Bhojanavaggo
4. The Food Vagga
1. Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on Alms from a Rest House
203.Bhojanavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –āvasathapiṇḍoti āvasathe piṇḍo. Samantā parikkhittaṃ addhikagilānagabbhinipabbajitānaṃ yathānurūpaṃ paññattamañcapīṭhaṃ anekagabbhapamukhaparicchedaṃ āvasathaṃ katvā tattha puññakāmatāya piṇḍo paññatto hoti, yāgubhattabhesajjādi sabbaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dānatthāya ṭhapitaṃ hotīti attho.Hiyyopīti svepi.Apasakkantīti apagacchanti.Manussā ujjhāyantīti titthiye apassantā ‘‘titthiyā kuhiṃ gatā’’‘‘ime passitvā pakkantā’’ti sutvā ujjhāyanti.Kukkuccāyantoti kukkuccaṃ karonto, akappiyasaññaṃ uppādentoti attho.
203.In the first training rule of the Food Vagga, āvasathapiṇḍo means alms in a rest house. Having made a rest house (āvasatha) completely enclosed, with appropriately arranged seats and couches for travelers, the sick, pregnant women, and renunciants, with various partitioned rooms, alms are provided there out of a desire for merit. This means that everything, such as yāgu, rice, and medicine, is kept there for the purpose of giving to those people. Even tomorrow means also for the next day. They go away means they depart. People complain means that those not seeing the sectarians, and hearing "Where have the sectarians gone?" "They saw these ones and left," they complain. Being scrupulous means acting scrupulously, giving rise to the perception of it being unlawful.
206.Sakkoti tamhā āvasathā pakkamitunti addhayojanaṃ vā yojanaṃ vā gantuṃ sakkoti.Na sakkotīti ettakameva na sakkoti.Anodissāti imesaṃyeva vā ettakānaṃyeva vāti ekaṃ pāsaṇḍaṃ anuddisitvā sabbesaṃ paññatto hoti.Yāvadatthoti bhojanampi ettakanti aparicchinditvā yāvadattho paññatto hoti.Sakiṃ bhuñjitabbanti ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ, dutiyadivasato paṭṭhāya paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ.
206.Is able to leave that rest house means is able to go half a yojana or a yojana. Is not able means is not able to go that far. Not specified means it is established for everyone without specifying a particular group or a certain number. As much as needed means it is established as much as is needed, without limiting the amount of food. Should be eaten once means it should be eaten one time per day; from the second day onwards, there is a dukkaṭa for receiving and a pācittiya for each swallow.
Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – ekakulena vā nānākulehi vā ekato hutvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vā nānāṭhānesu vā ‘‘ajja ekasmiṃ; sve ekasmi’’nti evaṃ aniyamitaṭṭhāne vā paññattaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitvā dutiyadivase tasmiṃ ṭhāne aññasmiṃ vā bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Nānākulehi pana nānāṭhānesu paññattaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitvā dutiyadivase aññattha bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Paṭipāṭiṃ pana khepetvā puna ādito paṭṭhāya bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekapūganānāpūgaekagāmanānāgāmesupi eseva nayo. Yopi ekakulassa vā nānākulānaṃ vā ekato paññatto taṇḍulādīnaṃ abhāvena antarantarā chijjati, sopi na bhuñjitabbo. Sace pana ‘‘na sakkoma dātu’’nti upacchinditvā puna kalyāṇacitte uppanne dātuṃ ārabhanti, etaṃ puna ekadivasaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.
Here is the judgment on this: Whether established by one family or by many families, gathered together in one place or in various places, saying, "today in one place; tomorrow in another," in such an unspecified place, having eaten in one place one day, it is not allowable to eat in that same place or another place on the second day. However, having eaten in one place one day where it is established by various families in various places, it is allowable to eat elsewhere on the second day. But it is said in the Mahāpaccariya that it is not allowable to exhaust the sequence and start eating again from the beginning. The same method applies to one group of families or various groups, one village or various villages. Moreover, even that which is established together by one family or various families, if it is interrupted in between due to a lack of rice, etc., that should not be eaten. But if, having stopped saying, "We are not able to give," they begin to give again when a good intention arises, it is allowable to eat this again for one day, as stated in the Mahāpaccariya.
208.Anāpatti gilānassāti gilānassa anuvasitvā bhuñjantassa anāpatti.Gacchanto vāti yo gacchanto antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ gataṭṭhāne ca ekadivasaṃ bhuñjati, tassāpi anāpatti. Āgacchantepi eseva nayo. Gantvā paccāgacchantopi antarāmagge ekadivasaṃ āgataṭṭhāne ca ekadivasaṃ bhuñjituṃ labhati. Gacchissāmīti bhuñjitvā nikkhantassa nadī vā pūrati corādibhayaṃ vā hoti, so nivattitvā khemabhāvaṃ ñatvā gacchanto puna ekadivasaṃ bhuñjituṃ labhatīti sabbamidaṃ mahāpaccariyādīsu vuttaṃ.Odissa paññatto hotīti bhikkhūnaṃyeva atthāya uddisitvā paññatto hoti.Na yāvadatthoti yāvadatthaṃ paññatto na hoti, thokaṃ thokaṃ labbhati, tādisaṃ niccampi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbatthāti yāgukhajjakaphalāphalādibhede sabbattha anāpatti. Yāguādīni hi niccampi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato ca kāyacittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
208.There is no offense for the sick person means there is no offense for the sick person who eats after residing there. Or one who is going means there is no offense for one who is traveling and eats one day on the way and one day at the place he has reached. The same method applies to one who is coming. For one who goes and returns, it is permissible to eat one day on the way and one day at the place he has reached. All of this is stated in the Mahāpaccariya, etc. It is specified means it is specified for the sake of the bhikkhus alone. Not as much as needed means it is not specified as much as is needed; if only a little is obtained, it is allowable to eat such regularly. Except for the five kinds of food, everywhere means there is no offense everywhere in the distinction of yāgu, khajjaka, fruits, and non-fruits, etc. Indeed, it is allowable to eat yāgu, etc., regularly. The rest is self-explanatory. The origin is from Eḷakaloma—it arises from the body and from body-mind, is an action (kiriya), involves no release of perception (nosaññāvimokkha), is unintentional (acittaka), is an offense by rule (paṇṇattivajja), is a bodily action (kāyakamma), involves three mental states (ticitta), and three kinds of feeling (tivedana).
Āvasathapiṇḍasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The first, on alms from a rest house.
2. Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Group Meals
209.Dutiyasikkhāpade –parihīnalābhasakkāroti so kira ajātasattunā rājānaṃ mārāpetvāpi abhimāre yojetvāpi ruhiruppādaṃ katvāpi guḷhapaṭicchanno ahosi. Yadā pana divāyeva dhanapālakaṃ payojesi, tadā pākaṭo jāto. ‘‘Kathaṃ devadatto hatthiṃ payojesī’’ti parikathāya uppannāya ‘‘na kevalaṃ hatthiṃ payojesi, rājānampi mārāpesi, abhimārepi pesesi, silampi pavijjhi, pāpo devadatto’’ti pākaṭo ahosi. ‘‘Kena saddhiṃ idaṃ kammamakāsī’’ti ca vutte ‘‘raññā ajātasattunā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato nāgarā ‘‘kathañhi nāma rājā evarūpaṃ coraṃ sāsanakaṇṭakaṃ gahetvā vicarissatī’’ti uṭṭhahiṃsu. Rājā nagarasaṅkhobhaṃ ñatvā devadattaṃ nīhari. Tato paṭṭhāya cassa pañcathālipākasatāni upacchindi, upaṭṭhānampissa na agamāsi, aññepissa manussā na kiñci dātabbaṃ vā kātabbaṃ vā maññiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parihīnalābhasakkāro’’ti.Kulesu viññāpetvā viññāpetvā bhuñjatīti ‘‘mā me gaṇo bhijjī’’ti parisaṃ posento ‘‘tvaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno bhattaṃ dehi, tvaṃ dvinna’’nti evaṃ viññāpetvā sapariso kulesu bhuñjati.
209.In the second training rule, lacking in gain and respect—it is said that Devadatta remained hidden even after having King Ajātasattu killed, and after having an attack arranged, and after causing a blood-letting. But when he employed Dhanapālaka in broad daylight, he became manifest. When the talk arose, "How did Devadatta employ the elephant?" he became obvious: "Not only did he employ the elephant, but he also had the king killed, he sent assassins, he split the rock; the wicked Devadatta!" And when it was said, "With whom did he do this deed?" they said, "With King Ajātasattu." Then the citizens rose up, "How can the king associate with such a thief, a thorn in the Sāsana?" Knowing the disturbance in the city, the king expelled Devadatta. From then on, hundreds of portions of food prepared for him were cut off, attendance on him did not occur, and other people did not think anything should be given or done for him. Therefore, it is said, "lacking in gain and respect." Having informed each family, he eats—maintaining his following lest his group be broken up, he eats with his retinue in the families, having informed them, "You give food to one bhikkhu; you to two."
211.Cīvaraṃ parittaṃ uppajjatīti bhattaṃ agaṇhantānaṃ cīvaraṃ na denti, tasmā parittaṃ uppajjati.
211.Robes arise sparingly—they do not give robes to those who do not accept food, therefore robes arise sparingly.
212.Cīvarakārakebhikkhū bhattena nimantentīti gāme piṇḍāya caritvā cirena cīvaraṃ niṭṭhāpente disvā ‘‘evaṃ lahuṃ niṭṭhāpetvā cīvaraṃ paribhuñjissantī’’ti puññakāmatāya nimantenti.
212.Bhikkhus making robes invite [others] with food—having seen them finishing the robes slowly after going for alms in the village, they invite them out of a desire for merit, thinking, "They will finish quickly and use the robes."
215.Nānāverajjaketi nānāvidhehi aññarajjehi āgate. ‘‘Nānāvirajjake’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.
215.Of various countries—having come from various other countries. There is also the reading "Nānāvirajjake," which has the same meaning.
217-8.Gaṇabhojaneti gaṇassa bhojane. Idha ca gaṇo nāma cattāro bhikkhū ādiṃ katvā tatuttariṃ bhikkhū adhippetā, teneva sabbantimaṃ paricchedaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yattha cattāro bhikkhū…pe… etaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti. Taṃ panetaṃ gaṇabhojanaṃ dvīhākārehi pasavati nimantanato vā viññattito vā. Kathaṃ nimantanato pasavati? Cattāro bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘tumhe, bhante, odanena nimantemi, odanaṃ me gaṇhatha ākaṅkhatha oloketha adhivāsetha paṭimānethā’’ti evaṃ yena kenaci vevacanena vā bhāsantarena vā pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā nimanteti. Evaṃ ekato nimantitā paricchinnakālavasena ajjatanāya vā svātanāya vā ekato gacchanti, ekato gaṇhanti, ekato bhuñjanti, gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti, sabbesaṃ āpatti. Ekato nimantitā ekato vā nānato vā gacchanti, ekato gaṇhanti, nānato bhuñjanti, āpattiyeva. Paṭiggahaṇameva hi ettha pamāṇaṃ. Ekato nimantitā ekato vā nānato vā gacchanti, nānato gaṇhanti, ekato vā nānato vā bhuñjanti, anāpatti. Cattāri pariveṇāni vā vihāre vā gantvā nānato nimantitā ekaṭṭhāne ṭhitesuyeva vā eko puttena eko pitarāti evampi nānato nimantitā ekato vā nānato vā gacchantu, ekato vā nānato vā bhuñjantu, sace ekato gaṇhanti, gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti, sabbesaṃ āpatti. Evaṃ tāva nimantanato pasavati.
217-8.Group meal—a meal of a group. Here, a group (gaṇa) means bhikkhus beginning with four bhikkhus and more; therefore, showing the final determination, he said, "Where there are four bhikkhus...pe...this is called a group meal." But that group meal occurs in two ways: from invitation or from request. How does it occur from invitation? Four bhikkhus approach and say, "I invite you, venerable sirs, with rice; accept the rice from me, desire it, look at it, consent to it, honor it," thus inviting them with some synonym or other language, taking the names of the five foods. Invited together in this way, they go together to the place for either today or tomorrow, accept together, and eat together; it is a group meal, and there is an offense for all. Invited together, they go together or separately, accept together, and eat separately; there is still an offense. For here the acceptance is the criterion. Invited together, they go together or separately, accept separately, and eat together or separately, there is no offense. Having gone to four enclosures or a monastery, invited separately, even when staying in one place, or invited separately even as one is a son and one is a father, whether they go together or separately, whether they eat together or separately, if they accept together, it is a group meal, and there is an offense for all. Thus, it occurs from invitation.
Kathaṃ viññattito? Cattāro bhikkhū ekato ṭhitā vā nisinnā vā upāsakaṃ disvā ‘‘amhākaṃ catunnampi bhattaṃ dehī’’ti vā viññāpeyyuṃ, pāṭekkaṃ vā passitvā ‘‘mayhaṃ dehi, mayhaṃ dehī’’ti evaṃ ekato vā nānato vā viññāpetvā ekato vā gacchantu nānato vā, bhattaṃ gahetvāpi ekato vā bhuñjantu nānato vā, sace ekato gaṇhanti, gaṇabhojanaṃ hoti, sabbesaṃ āpatti. Evaṃ viññattito pasavati.
How from request? Four bhikkhus, standing or sitting together, having seen a lay follower, might request, "Give food to the four of us," or having seen each individually, "Give to me, give to me," thus, whether they request together or separately, whether they go together or separately, even having taken the food, whether they eat together or separately, if they accept together, it is a group meal, and there is an offense for all. Thus, it occurs from request.
Pādāpiphalitāti yathā mahācammassa parato maṃsaṃ dissati; evaṃ phālitā, vālikāya vā sakkharāya vā pahaṭamatte dukkhaṃ uppādenti, na sakkā hoti antogāme piṇḍāya carituṃ. Īdise gelaññe gilānasamayoti bhuñjitabbaṃ, na lesakappiyaṃ kātabbaṃ.
Feet are cracked—just as flesh is seen on the outside of a large hide; thus, they are cracked and cause pain as soon as they are struck by sand or gravel, and it is not possible to go for alms in the village. In such sickness, it should be eaten during the time of illness, and a minor adaptation should not be done.
Cīvare kayiramāneti yadā sāṭakañca suttañca labhitvā cīvaraṃ karonti tadā; visuñhi cīvarakārasamayo nāma natthi. Tasmā yo tattha cīvare kattabbaṃ yaṃkiñci kammaṃ karoti, mahāpaccariyañhi ‘‘antamaso sūcivedhanako’’tipi vuttaṃ, tena cīvarakārasamayoti bhuñjitabbaṃ. Kurundiyaṃ pana vitthāreneva vuttaṃ. Yo cīvaraṃ vicāreti, chindati, moghasuttaṃ ṭhapeti, āgantukapaṭṭaṃ ṭhapeti, paccāgataṃ sibbati, āgantukapaṭṭaṃ bandhati, anuvātaṃ chindati ghaṭṭeti āropeti, tattha paccāgataṃ sibbati, suttaṃ karoti valeti, pipphalikaṃ niseti, parivattanaṃ karoti, sabbopi cīvaraṃ karotiyevāti vuccati. Yo pana samīpe nisinno jātakaṃ vā dhammapadaṃ vā katheti, ayaṃ na cīvarakārako. Etaṃ ṭhapetvā sesānaṃ gaṇabhojane anāpattīti.
When a robe is being made—when, having obtained cloth and thread, they make a robe; for there is no separate time called "robe-making time." Therefore, whatever work should be done on the robe there, whatever kind of work is done, for in the Mahāpaccariya it is said, "even at least threading a needle," therefore, it should be eaten at the time of robe-making. But in the Kurundī it is stated extensively. One who examines the robe, cuts it, keeps the old thread, keeps the new patch, sews the returned one, binds the new patch, cuts and rubs the seam, fastens it; there, one who sews the returned one, makes and twists the thread, sets the needle case, makes the turning, all these are said to be making the robe. But one who sits nearby and tells a Jātaka story or a Dhammapada, this is not a robe-maker. Except for this, there is no offense in group meals.
Addhayojananti ettakampi addhānaṃ gantukāmena. Yo pana dūraṃ gantukāmo, tattha vattabbameva natthi.Gacchantenāti addhānaṃ gacchantena, addhayojanabbhantare gāvutepi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Gatena bhuñjitabbanti gatena ekadivasaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ. Nāvābhiruhanepi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – abhiruḷhena icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvāpi yāva na orohati tāva bhuñjitabbanti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.Catutthe āgateti ayaṃ antimaparicchedo, catutthepi āgate yattha na yāpenti; so mahāsamayo. Yattha pana sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā sannipatanti, tattha vattabbameva natthi. Tasmā tādise kāle ‘‘mahāsamayo’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.Yo koci paribbājakasamāpannoti sahadhammikesu vā titthiyesu vā aññataro, etesañhi yena kenaci kate bhatte ‘‘samaṇabhattasamayo’’ti bhuñjitabbaṃ.
Half a yojana—for one intending to go even this much distance. But for one intending to go far, there is certainly no need to say anything. By one who is going—by one who is going on a journey, it is allowable to eat even within a gāvuta within half a yojana. Should be eaten by one who has gone—should be eaten one day by one who has gone. The same method applies to one embarking on a boat. But here is the distinction—having embarked, it is said in the Mahāpaccariya that it is allowable to eat until one disembarks, even after going to the desired place. When the fourth arrives—this is the final determination; even when the fourth arrives, where they do not delay; that is a great assembly. But where a hundred or a thousand gather, there is certainly no need to say anything. Therefore, in such a time, it should be eaten after resolving, "It is a great assembly." Any wanderer—one or another among those of the same Dhamma or sectarians; for when food is given by any of these, it should be eaten, thinking, "It is the time for a meal for ascetics (samaṇabhattasamayo)."
220.Anāpatti samayeti sattasu samayesu aññatarasmiṃ anāpatti.Dve tayo ekatoti yepi akappiyanimantanaṃ sādiyitvā dve vā tayo vā ekato gahetvā bhuñjanti, tesampi anāpatti.
220.There is no offense at the time—there is no offense at any of the seven times. Two or three together—there is no offense even for those who, having approved an improper invitation, accept and eat together, two or three.
Tattha animantitacatutthaṃ, piṇḍapātikacatutthaṃ, anupasampannacatutthaṃ, pattacatutthaṃ, gilānacatutthanti pañcannaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena vinicchayo veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco cattāro bhikkhū ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti nimanteti. Tesu tayo gatā, eko na gato. Upāsako ‘‘eko bhante thero kuhi’’nti pucchati. Nāgato upāsakāti. So aññaṃ taṅkhaṇappattaṃ kañci ‘‘ehi bhante’’ti pavesetvā catunnampi bhattaṃ deti, sabbesaṃ anāpatti. Kasmā? Gaṇapūrakassa animantitattā. Tayo eva hi tattha nimantitā gaṇhiṃsu, tehi gaṇo na pūrati, gaṇapūrako ca animantito, tena gaṇo bhijjatīti idaṃ animantitacatutthaṃ.
Here, the judgment should be understood in terms of five groups of four: the fourth uninvited, the fourth alms-seeker, the fourth not fully ordained, the fourth with a bowl, and the fourth sick person. How? Here, some four bhikkhus are invited, saying, "Accept food." Of those, three went, one did not go. The lay follower asks, "Where is the venerable elder?" He has not come, lay follower. So, having brought in another who arrived at that moment, saying, "Come, venerable sir," he gives food to all four; there is no offense for all. Why? Because the one who completes the group is uninvited. For there only three invited accepted there, the group is not completed by them, and the one who completes the group is uninvited, therefore the group is broken up. This is the fourth uninvited.
Piṇḍapātikacatutthe – nimantanakāle eko piṇḍapātiko hoti, so nādhivāseti. Gamanavelāya pana ‘‘ehi bhante’’ti vutte anadhivāsitattā anāgacchantampi ‘‘etha bhikkhaṃ lacchathā’’ti gahetvā gacchanti, so taṃ gaṇaṃ bhindati. Tasmā sabbesaṃ anāpatti.
In the fourth alms-seeker—at the time of the invitation, one is an alms-seeker, he does not consent. But at the time of going, when it is said, "Come, venerable sir," without having consented, even though he is not coming, they take him along, having taken [him along] saying, "Come, you will get alms," so he breaks up the group. Therefore, there is no offense for all.
Anupasampannacatutthe – sāmaṇerena saddhiṃ nimantitā honti, sopi gaṇaṃ bhindati.
In the fourth not fully ordained—they are invited together with a novice; he also breaks up the group.
Pattacatutthe – eko sayaṃ agantvā pattaṃ peseti; evampi gaṇo bhijjati. Tasmā sabbesaṃ anāpatti.
In the fourth with a bowl—one, not going himself, sends a bowl; in this way also, the group is broken up. Therefore, there is no offense for all.
Gilānacatutthe – gilānena saddhiṃ nimantitā honti, tattha gilānasseva anāpatti, itaresaṃ pana gaṇapūrako hoti. Na hi gilānena gaṇo bhijjati. Tasmā tesaṃ āpattiyeva. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana avisesena vuttaṃ.
In the fourth sick person—they are invited together with a sick person; there is no offense for the sick person alone, but the others complete the group. Indeed, the group is not broken up by the sick person. Therefore, there is an offense for them. However, in the Mahāpaccariya it is stated without distinction.
Samayaladdhako sayameva muccati, sesānaṃ gaṇapūrakattā āpattikaro hoti. Tasmā cīvaradānasamayaladdhakādīnampi vasena catukkāni veditabbāni. Sace pana adhivāsetvā gatesupi catūsu janesu eko paṇḍito bhikkhu ‘‘ahaṃ tumhākaṃ gaṇaṃ bhindissāmi, nimantanaṃ sādiyathā’’ti vatvā yāgukhajjakāvasāne bhattatthāya pattaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ adatvā ‘‘ime tāva bhikkhū bhojetvā vissajjetha, ahaṃ pacchā anumodanaṃ katvā gamissāmī’’ti nisinno. Tesu bhutvā gatesu ‘‘detha bhante patta’’nti upāsakena pattaṃ gahetvā bhatte dinne bhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā gacchati, sabbesaṃ anāpatti. Pañcannañhi bhojanānaṃyeva vasena gaṇabhojane visaṅketaṃ natthi. Odanena nimantitā kummāsaṃ gaṇhantāpi āpattiṃ āpajjanti. Tāni ca tehi ekato na gahitāni. Yāguādīsu pana visaṅketaṃ hoti, tāni tehi ekato gahitānīti. Evaṃ eko paṇḍito aññesampi anāpattiṃ karoti.
Samayaladdhaka by himself is freed (from offense), but the others incur offense because they fulfill the quorum. Therefore, the groups of four should be understood also in terms of those who obtain the opportunity at the time of the robe-offering, etc. But if, even after the four people who had accepted had departed, one learned bhikkhu said, "I will break up your group; accept the invitation," and, at the end of the rice-gruel and cakes, when they were taking their bowls for the meal, he, without giving to them, sat down, saying, "First feed and dismiss these bhikkhus; I will make the anumodana later and then leave." When they had eaten and left, if the lay follower took the bowl, saying, "Give me the bowl, Bhante," and gave rice, and he ate and made the anumodana and left, there is no offense for anyone. For in group meals, there is no doubt only with respect to the five foods. Those invited with rice incur an offense even if they take kummāsa. And those were not taken by them together. But in the case of rice-gruel, etc., there is doubt, as those were taken by them together. Thus, one learned person causes no offense for others as well.
Tasmā sace koci saṅghabhattaṃ kattukāmena nimantanatthāya pesito vihāraṃ āgamma ‘‘bhante, sve amhākaṃ ghare bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vā ‘‘saṅghabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vā ‘‘saṅgho bhattaṃ gaṇhātū’’ti vā vadati, bhattuddesakena paṇḍitena bhavitabbaṃ, nemantanikā gaṇabhojanato piṇḍapātikā ca dhutaṅgabhedato mocetabbā. Kathaṃ? Evaṃ tāva vattabbaṃ – ‘‘sve na sakkā upāsakā’’ti. ‘‘Punadivase, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Punadivasepi na sakkā’’ti. Evaṃ yāva addhamāsampi haritvā puna vattabbo – ‘‘tvaṃ kiṃ avacā’’ti? Sace punapi ‘‘saṅghabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, tato ‘‘imaṃ tāva upāsaka pupphaṃ kappiyaṃ karohi, imaṃ tiṇa’’nti evaṃ vikkhepaṃ katvā puna ‘‘kiṃ kathayitthā’’ti pucchitabbo. Sace punapi tatheva vadati, ‘‘āvuso, tvaṃ piṇḍapātike vā mahāthere vā na lacchasi, sāmaṇere lacchasī’’ti vattabbo. ‘‘Nanu, bhante asukasmiñca asukasmiñca gāme bhadante bhojesuṃ, ahaṃ kasmā na labhāmī’’ti ca vutte ‘‘te nimantetuṃ jānanti, tvaṃ na jānāsī’’ti. Te kathaṃ nimantesuṃ bhanteti? Te evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante, bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. Sace sopi tatheva vadati, vaṭṭati. Atha punapi ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, ‘‘na dāni tvaṃ, āvuso, bahū bhikkhū lacchasi, tayo eva lacchasī’’ti vattabbo. ‘‘Nanu, bhante, asukasmiñca asukasmiñca gāme sakalaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ bhojesuṃ, ahaṃ kasmā na labhāmī’’ti? ‘‘Tvaṃ nimantetuṃ na jānāsī’’ti. ‘‘Te kathaṃ nimantesu’’nti? Te ‘‘bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti āhaṃsūti. Sace sopi ‘‘bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati. Atha punapi ‘‘bhattamevā’’ti vadati, tato vattabbo – ‘‘gaccha tvaṃ, natthamhākaṃ tava bhattenattho, nibaddhagocaro esa amhākaṃ, mayamettha piṇḍāya carissāmā’’ti. Taṃ ‘‘caratha, bhante’’ti vatvā āgataṃ pucchanti – ‘‘kiṃ bho laddhā bhikkhū’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ etena bahu ettha vattabbaṃ, ‘therā sve piṇḍāya carissāmā’ti āhaṃsu. Mā dāni tumhe pamajjitthā’’ti. Dutiyadivase cetiyavattaṃ katvā ṭhitā bhikkhū saṅghattherena vattabbā – ‘‘āvuso, dhuragāme saṅghabhattaṃ apaṇḍitamanusso pana agamāsi, gacchāma dhuragāme piṇḍāya carissāmā’’ti. Bhikkhūhi therassa vacanaṃ kātabbaṃ, na dubbacehi bhavitabbaṃ, gāmadvāre aṭṭhatvāva piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ. Tesu pattāni gahetvā nisīdāpetvā bhojentesu bhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace āsanasālāya bhattaṃ ṭhapetvā rathikāsu āhiṇḍantā ārocenti – ‘‘āsanasālāya, bhante, bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti na vaṭṭati.
Therefore, if someone, wishing to arrange a saṅgha meal, comes to the monastery, sent for the purpose of inviting, and says, "Bhante, take alms at our house tomorrow," or says, "Take a meal," or "Take a saṅgha meal," or "Let the saṅgha take a meal," the one who designates the meal should be learned, so that those invited may be freed from group meals, from being a piṇḍapātika, and from the breach of the dhutaṅga. How? Thus, first, he should say: "It is not possible tomorrow, Upāsaka." "The day after tomorrow, Bhante?" "It is not possible the day after tomorrow either." Thus, after delaying even half a month, he should ask again: "What did you say?" If he again says, "Take a saṅgha meal," then, after causing a distraction by saying, "Upāsaka, make this flower kappiya, this grass," he should again be asked, "What did you say?" If he again says the same, he should be told, "Āvuso, you will not get a piṇḍapātika or a Mahāthera; you will get sāmaṇeras." If he says, "But Bhante, in such and such a village, they fed the Bhaddantes, why do I not get (them)?" (he should be told), "They know how to invite; you do not know." "How did they invite, Bhante?" They said thus: "Bhante, take alms at our place." If he too speaks thus, it is allowable. But if he again says, "Take a meal," then he should be told, "Āvuso, you will not get many bhikkhus now; you will get only three." "But Bhante, in such and such a village, they fed the entire Saṅgha; why do I not get (them)?" "You do not know how to invite." "How did they invite?" They said, "Take alms." If he too says, "Take alms," it is allowable. But if he again says only "a meal," then he should be told, "Go away, we have no need for your meal; this is our fixed range; we will wander for alms here." If he says, "Wander, Bhante," and goes away, they ask: "Have the bhikkhus been obtained, sir?" "Why should much be said about this? The Theras said, 'Tomorrow we will wander for alms.' Now, do not be negligent." On the second day, the bhikkhus, having performed the cetiyavatta and being ready, should be told by the Saṅghathera: "Āvuso, an unwise man went to invite for a saṅgha meal in Dhuragāma; let us go to Dhuragāma and wander for alms." The bhikkhus should heed the Thera's word; they should not be insubordinate; they should wander for alms without standing at the village gate. While those people are taking the bowls, making (the bhikkhus) sit, and feeding them, they should eat. If, after placing the meal in the refectory, they announce while wandering about in the streets, "Bhante, take the meal in the refectory," it is not allowable.
Atha pana bhattaṃ ādāya tattha tattha gantvā ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, paṭikacceva vā vihāraṃ abhiharitvā patirūpe ṭhāne ṭhapetvā āgatāgatānaṃ denti, ayaṃ abhihaṭabhikkhā nāma vaṭṭati. Sace pana bhattasālāya dānaṃ sajjetvā taṃ taṃ pariveṇaṃ pahiṇanti ‘‘bhattasālāya bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti, na vaṭṭati. Ye pana manussā piṇḍacārike bhikkhū disvā āsanasālaṃ sammajjitvā tattha nisīdāpetvā bhojenti, na te paṭikkhipitabbā. Ye pana gāme bhikkhaṃ alabhitvā gāmato nikkhamante bhikkhū disvā ‘‘bhante bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, te paṭikkhipitabbā, na vā nivattitabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘nivattatha, bhante, bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, ‘‘nivattathā’’ti vuttapade nivattituṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Nivattatha bhante, ghare bhattaṃ kataṃ, gāme bhattaṃ kata’’nti vadanti, gehe ca gāme ca bhattaṃ nāma yassa kassaci hotīti nivattituṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Nivattatha, bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti sambandhaṃ katvā vadanti, nivattituṃ na vaṭṭati. Āsanasālato piṇḍāya carituṃ nikkhamante disvā ‘‘nisīdatha bhante bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Niccabhattanti dhuvabhattaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Niccabhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, bahūnampi ekato gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Salākabhattādīsupi eseva nayo. Sesamettha uttānameva.
But if, taking the meal, they go here and there, saying, "Take the meal," or immediately carry it to the monastery and, placing it in a suitable place, give it to those who come, this, called abhihaṭabhikkhā, is allowable. But if, preparing the offering in the refectory, they send (it) to this and that pariveṇa, (saying) "Take the meal in the refectory," it is not allowable. However, those people who, seeing bhikkhus wandering for alms, sweep the refectory, seat (them) there, and feed (them), should not be rejected. Those bhikkhus who, not obtaining alms in the village, are seen by people as they leave the village, and are told, "Bhante, take a meal," should be rejected, nor should (the bhikkhus) turn back. If they say, "Turn back, Bhante, take a meal," it is allowable to turn back at the word "Turn back." If they say, "Turn back, Bhante, a meal has been prepared at the house; a meal has been prepared in the village," it is allowable to turn back, as a meal exists at someone's house or in the village. If they say, "Turn back, take a meal," connecting the words, it is not allowable to turn back. The same method applies when, seeing (bhikkhus) leaving the refectory to wander for alms, they say, "Sit down, Bhante, take a meal." Niccabhatta is called dhuvabhatta. If they say, "Take niccabhatta," it is allowable to take (it) together with many. The same method applies also for salākabhatta, etc. The rest here is self-explanatory.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ: action, without perception-release, non-volitional, offense by way of designation, bodily action, three- cittas, three feelings.
Gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Second Sikkhāpada on Group Meals.
3. Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Sikkhāpada on Successive Meals
221.Tatiyasikkhāpade –na kho idaṃ orakaṃ bhavissati, yathayime manussā sakkaccaṃ bhattaṃ karontīti, yena niyāmena ime manussā sakkaccaṃ bhattaṃ karonti, tena ñāyati – ‘‘idaṃ sāsanaṃ idaṃ vā buddhappamukhe saṅghe dānaṃ na kho orakaṃ bhavissati, parittaṃ lāmakaṃ neva bhavissatī’’ti.Kirapatikoti ettha‘‘kiro’’ti tassa kulaputtassa nāmaṃ; adhipaccaṭṭhena pana ‘‘kirapatiko’’ti vuccati. So kira issaro adhipati māsautusaṃvaccharaniyāmena vetanaṃ datvā kammakārake kammaṃ kāreti.Badarā paṭiyattāti upacāravasena vadati.Badaramissenāti badarasāḷavena.
221.In the third Sikkhāpada: na kho idaṃ orakaṃ bhavissati, yathayime manussā sakkaccaṃ bhattaṃ karontīti, it is understood by the manner in which these people respectfully prepare a meal that "this gift will not be inferior, meager, or base, either to the Teaching or to the Saṅgha with the Buddha at its head." Kirapatiko: here, "Kira" is the name of that clansman; however, he is called "Kirapatiko" in the sense of being a master. That Kira, indeed, as the lord and master, has work done by laborers, giving wages according to a fixed monthly, seasonal, or annual arrangement. Badarā paṭiyattā: he speaks in terms of courtesy. Badaramissenā: with badara relish.
222.Ussūre āhariyitthāti atidivā āhariyittha.
222.Ussūre āhariyitthā: he brought (it) at an improper time of day.
226.Mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ itthannāmassa dammīti ayaṃ bhattavikappanā nāma sammukhāpi parammukhāpi vaṭṭati. Sammukhā disvā ‘‘tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vatvā bhuñjitabbaṃ, adisvā pañcasu sahadhammikesu ‘‘itthannāmassa vikappemī’’ti vatvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana parammukhāvikappanāva vuttā. Sā cāyaṃ yasmā vinayakammena saṅgahitā, tasmā bhagavato vikappetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Bhagavati hi gandhakuṭiyaṃ nisinnepi saṅghamajjhe nisinnepi saṅghena gaṇappahonake bhikkhū gahetvā taṃ taṃ kammaṃ kataṃ sukatameva hoti, bhagavā neva kammaṃ kopeti; na sampādeti. Na kopeti dhammissarattā, na sampādeti agaṇapūrakattā.
226.Mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ itthannāmassa dammī: this, called the food-renunciation, is allowable both in his presence and in his absence. In his presence, having said, "I renounce (this) to you," it should be eaten; in his absence, having said to the five co-residents in the Dhamma, "I renounce (this) to so-and-so," it should be eaten. However, in the Mahāpaccariya, only renunciation in his absence is stated. And because that is included in the Vinaya act, it is not allowable to renounce to the Blessed One. For when the Blessed One is seated in the Gandhakuti or seated in the midst of the Saṅgha, if the Saṅgha, having taken bhikkhus fit to be appointed by the Chapter, performs that act, it is indeed well done; the Blessed One neither invalidates the act nor accomplishes (it). He does not invalidate (it) because of being the Lord of the Dhamma; he does not accomplish (it) because of not fulfilling the quorum.
229.Dve tayo nimantane ekato bhuñjatīti dve tīṇi nimantanāni ekapatte pakkhipitvā missetvā ekaṃ katvā bhuñjatīti attho. Dve tīṇi kulāni nimantetvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nisīdāpetvā ito cito ca āharitvā bhattaṃ ākiranti, sūpabyañjanaṃ ākiranti, ekamissakaṃ hoti, ettha anāpattīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Sace pana mūlanimantanaṃ heṭṭhā hoti, pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ upari, taṃ uparito paṭṭhāya bhuñjantassa āpatti. Hatthaṃ pana anto pavesetvā paṭhamanimantanato ekampi kabaḷaṃ uddharitvā bhuttakālato paṭṭhāya yathā tathā vā bhuñjantassa anāpatti. Sacepi tattha khīraṃ vā rasaṃ vā ākiranti, yena ajjhotthataṃ bhattaṃ ekarasaṃ hoti, koṭito paṭṭhāya bhuñjantassa anāpattīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘khīrabhattaṃ vā rasabhattaṃ vā labhitvā nisinnassa tattheva aññepi khīrabhattaṃ vā rasabhattaṃ vā ākiranti, khīraṃ vā rasaṃ vā pivato anāpatti. Bhuñjantena pana paṭhamaṃ laddhamaṃsakhaṇḍaṃ vā bhattapiṇḍaṃ vā mukhe pakkhipitvā koṭito paṭṭhāya bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sappipāyāsepi eseva nayo’’ti.
229.Dve tayo nimantane ekato bhuñjatī: (this means) he throws two or three invitations into one bowl, mixes (them), makes (them) one, and eats (them). Having invited two or three families, they seat (them) in one place, and, bringing (food) from here and there, they pour rice and pour curry, and it becomes one mixture; here, there is no offense, it is stated in the Mahāpaccariya. But if the original invitation is at the bottom, and the subsequent one(s) are on top, there is an offense for one who eats starting from the top. However, for one who inserts (his) hand and lifts out even one mouthful from the first invitation and eats (it) as he likes, starting from the time he has eaten, there is no offense. If they pour milk or juice there, so that the rice soaked (in it) becomes of one taste, there is no offense for one who eats starting from the edge, it is stated in the Mahāpaccariya. However, in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā it is stated: "When someone sitting (there) after obtaining milk-rice or juice-rice, if they pour other milk-rice or juice-rice there, there is no offense for one who drinks the milk or juice. But for one who is eating, it is allowable to put the first obtained piece of meat or lump of rice into (his) mouth and to eat starting from the edge. The same method applies also for ghee-pāyāsa."
Mahāupāsako bhikkhuṃ nimanteti, tassa kulaṃ upagatassa upāsakopi tassa puttadārabhātikabhaginiādayopi attano attano koṭṭhāsaṃ āharitvā patte pakkhipanti, upāsakena paṭhamaṃ dinnaṃ abhuñjitvā pacchā laddhaṃ bhuñjantassa ‘‘anāpattī’’ti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ ‘‘sace pāṭekkaṃ pacanti, attano attano pakkabhattato āharitvā denti, tattha pacchā āhaṭaṃ paṭhamaṃ bhuñjantassa pācittiyaṃ. Yadi pana sabbesaṃ ekova pāko hoti, paramparabhojanaṃ na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāupāsako nimantetvā nisīdāpeti, añño manusso pattaṃ gaṇhāti, na dātabbaṃ. Kiṃ bhante na dethāti? Nanu upāsaka tayā nimantitamhāti! Hotu bhante, laddhaṃ laddhaṃ bhuñjathāti vadati, bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Aññena āharitvā bhatte dinne āpucchitvāpi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
A Mahāupāsaka invites a bhikkhu; when (the bhikkhu) has approached his family, the upāsaka as well as his sons, wives, brothers, sisters, etc., bring their own portions and put (them) into (the bhikkhu's) bowl; for one who eats the later obtained (food) without eating what was given first by the upāsaka, there is "no offense," it is stated in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā. However, in the Kurundaṭṭhakathā, it is stated that it is allowable. In the Mahāpaccariya: "If they cook separately, and they bring (food) from their own cooked rice and give (it), for one who eats the later brought (food) first, there is a pācittiya. But if there is only one cooking for all, there is no successive meal." A Mahāupāsaka invites (a bhikkhu) and seats (him); another man takes the bowl; it should not be given. (The bhikkhu asks:) "Why do you not give (it), Bhante?" (The Mahāupāsaka replies:) "But Upāsaka, I have invited (you)!" (The other man says:) "Let it be, Bhante, eat whatever you obtain!" It is allowable to eat. It is stated in the Kurundī that it is allowable to eat (food) given with rice brought by another, after asking permission.
Anumodanaṃ katvā gacchantaṃ dhammaṃ sotukāmā ‘‘svepi bhante āgaccheyyāthā’’ti sabbe nimantenti, punadivase āgantvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Sabbehi nimantitattā. Eko bhikkhu piṇḍāya caranto bhattaṃ labhati, tamañño upāsako nimantetvā ghare nisīdāpeti, na ca tāva bhattaṃ sampajjati. Sace so bhikkhu piṇḍāya caritvā laddhabhattaṃ bhuñjati, āpatti. Abhutvā nisinne ‘‘kiṃ bhante na bhuñjasī’’ti vutte ‘‘tayā nimantitattā’’ti vatvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ bhuñjatha bhante’’ti vutto bhuñjati, vaṭṭati.
When (bhikkhus) are leaving after making the anumodana, if people, wishing to hear the Dhamma, all invite (them), (saying) "Bhante, may you come again tomorrow," it is allowable to come again the next day and eat whatever is obtained. Why? Because all have invited (them). A certain bhikkhu, while wandering for alms, obtains rice; another upāsaka invites that (bhikkhu) and seats (him) in (his) house, but the rice is not yet ready. If that bhikkhu eats the rice he obtained while wandering for alms, there is an offense. When he does not eat after sitting down, if he is asked, "Why do you not eat, Bhante?" and he says, "Because I have been invited by you," and is told, "Eat whatever you obtain, Bhante," and he eats, it is allowable.
Sakalena gāmenāti sakalena gāmena ekato hutvā nimantitasseva yattha katthaci bhuñjato anāpatti. Pūgepi eseva nayo.Nimantiyamāno bhikkhaṃ gahessāmīti bhaṇatīti ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhā’’ti nimantiyamāno ‘‘na mayhaṃ tava bhattenattho, bhikkhaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti vadati. Ettha pana mahāpadumatthero āha – ‘‘evaṃ vadanto imasmiṃ sikkhāpade animantanaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, bhuñjanatthāya pana okāso kato hotīti neva gaṇabhojanato na cārittato muccatī’’ti. Mahāsumatthero āha – ‘‘yadaggena animantanaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, tadaggena neva gaṇabhojanaṃ na cārittaṃ hotī’’ti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
Sakalena gāmenā: it is only for one who has been invited by the entire village together that there is no offense when he eats anywhere. The same method applies for a guild as well. Nimantiyamāno bhikkhaṃ gahessāmīti bhaṇatī: when he is being invited (saying), "Take a meal," he says, "I have no need for your meal; I will take alms." Here, Mahāpadumatthero says: "While saying thus, he can cancel the invitation in this sikkhāpada, but since an opportunity for eating has been made, he is freed neither from group meals nor from (the rule on) successive meals." Mahāsumatthero says: "By that very (act) by which he can cancel the invitation, there is neither a group meal nor (a rule on) successive meals." The rest is self-explanatory.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ ettha hi bhojanaṃ kiriyā, avikappanaṃ akiriyā, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ: arises from bodily and verbal (action) and from bodily, verbal, and mental (action); kiriyākiriyaṃ; here, eating is kiriya; not renouncing is akiriya; without perception-release, non-volitional, offense by way of designation, bodily action, verbal action, three-cittas, three feelings.
Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Third Sikkhāpada on Successive Meals.
4. Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Kāṇamātā Sikkhāpada
230.Catutthasikkhāpade –kāṇamātāti kāṇāya mātā. Sā kirassā dhītā abhirūpā ahosi, ye ye taṃ passanti, te te rāgena kāṇā honti, rāgandhā hontīti attho. Tasmā paresaṃ kāṇabhāvakaraṇato ‘‘kāṇā’’ti vissutā ahosi. Tassā vasena mātāpissā ‘‘kāṇamātā’’ti pākaṭā jātā.Āgatanti āgamanaṃ.Kismiṃ viyāti kīdisaṃ viya; lajjanakaṃ viya hotīti adhippāyo.Rittahatthaṃ gantunti rittā hatthā asmiṃ gamane tadidaṃ rittahatthaṃ, taṃ rittahatthaṃ gamanaṃ gantuṃ lajjanakaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.Parikkhayaṃ agamāsīti upāsikā ariyasāvikā bhikkhū disvā santaṃ adātuṃ na sakkoti, tasmā tāva dāpesi, yāva sabbaṃ parikkhayaṃ agamāsi.Dhammiyā kathāyāti ettha kāṇāpi mātu atthāya desiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantī desanāpariyosāne sotāpannā ahosi.Uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmīti āsanato uṭṭhahitvā gato. Sopi puriso ‘‘satthā kira kāṇamātāya nivesanaṃ agamāsī’’ti sutvā kāṇaṃ ānetvā pakatiṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapesi.
230.In the fourth Sikkhāpada: kāṇamātā: the mother of Kāṇā. It seems that her daughter was beautiful; whoever saw her, became blind with lust; (that is,) they became blinded by lust. Therefore, because she caused others to become blind, she became famous as "Kāṇā." Because of her, her mother also became known as "Kāṇamātā." Āgataṃ: the arrival. Kismiṃ viyā: like what? The idea (is that it) is like something shameful. Rittahatthaṃ gantuṃ: empty-handed in this going; that empty-handed (going), to go empty-handed seems like something shameful, it is said. Parikkhayaṃ agamāsī: the female lay follower, a noble disciple, could not not give to the bhikkhus when she saw (them), therefore she gave until everything came to an end. Dhammiyā kathāya: here, Kāṇā too, while listening to the Dhamma being taught for the sake of (her) mother, became a sotāpanna at the conclusion of the discourse. Uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmī: having risen from (his) seat, he left. That man too, having heard that "the Teacher went to Kāṇamātā's dwelling," brought Kāṇā and placed (her) in her original place.
231.Imasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ uppannamatte appaññatteyeva sikkhāpade pātheyyavatthu udapādi, tasmā anantarameva cetaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sopi ca upāsako ariyasāvakattā sabbameva dāpesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parikkhayaṃ agamāsī’’ti.
231. In this case, as soon as the matter arose, before the training rule was even formulated, the provision regarding travelling provisions (pātheyyavatthu) came into existence. Therefore, immediately after that, to show this, the passage beginning with "tena kho pana samayena" etc., was stated. And that lay follower, being a noble disciple (ariyasāvaka), gave everything. Therefore, it was said, "it came to an end."
233.Yaṃkiñci paheṇakatthāyāti paṇṇākāratthāya paṭiyattaṃ yaṃkiñci atirasakamodakasakkhalikādi sabbaṃ idha pūvotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.Yaṃkiñcipātheyyatthāyāti maggaṃ gacchantānaṃ antarāmaggatthāya paṭiyattaṃ yaṃkiñci baddhasattuabaddhasattutilataṇḍulādi sabbaṃ idha manthotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.Tato ce uttarinti sacepi tatiyaṃ pattaṃ thūpīkataṃ gaṇhāti, pūvagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ.
233. Yaṃkiñci paheṇakatthāyā means anything prepared for the purpose of a gift (paṇṇākāra), anything extra such as sweet cakes (modaka), sugar candy (sakkhalikā), etc., all of this here is counted as cake (pūva) only. Yaṃkiñci pātheyyatthāyā means anything prepared for those going on a journey for the sake of provisions along the way, anything such as hard roasted grains (baddhasattu), unroasted grains (abaddhasattu), sesame seeds (tilataṇḍula), etc., all of this here is counted as gruel (mantha) only. Tato ce uttari means even if one takes a third bowl piled up, it is a pācittiya offense in the category of cake.
Dvattipattapūre paṭiggahetvāti mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimalekhāya samapūre patte gahetvā.Amutra mayā dvattipattapūrāti ettha sace dve gahitā, ‘‘atra mayā dve pattapūrā paṭiggahitā, tvaṃ ekaṃ gaṇheyyāsī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tenāpi aññaṃ passitvā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ āgatena dve pattapūrā gahitā, mayā eko, mā tvaṃ gaṇhī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Yena paṭhamaṃ eko gahito, tassāpi paramparārocane eseva nayo. Yena pana sayameva tayo gahitā, tena aññaṃ disvā ‘‘mā kho ettha paṭiggaṇhi’’ cceva vattabbaṃ.Paṭikkamanaṃ nīharitvāti āsanasālaṃ haritvā, āsanasālaṃ gacchantena ca chaḍḍitasālā na gantabbā. Yattha mahā bhikkhusaṅgho nisīdati, tattha gantabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘yā laddhaṭṭhānato āsannā āsanasālā, tattha gantabbaṃ. Attano ‘sandiṭṭhānaṃ vā sambhattānaṃ vā ekanikāyikānaṃ vā dassāmī’ti aññattha gantuṃ na labbhati. Sace panassa nibaddhanisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, dūrampi gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.
:Dvattipattapūre paṭiggahetvā means having taken bowls filled to the level of the lower line of the mouth rim. Amutra mayā dvattipattapūrā means here, if two were taken, it should be said, "Here, two bowlfuls have been received by me; you should take one." Even by him, seeing another, it should be said, "Two bowlfuls have been taken by the one who came first, one by me; you should not take (any)." For the one by whom one was taken first, this same method (naya) applies in announcing it to the next. But by the one by whom three were taken by himself, seeing another, it should be said, "Do not receive (any) here." Paṭikkamanaṃ nīharitvā means having taken (the bowls) to the refectory (āsanasāla); and one going to the refectory should not go via the abandoned hall (chaḍḍitasālā). One should go to where the great Saṅgha of monks is sitting. But in the Mahāpaccari, it was said, "One should go to the refectory that is nearest to the place obtained. It is not allowed to go elsewhere, thinking, 'I will give (it) to my acquaintances, or to those who are companions, or to those of the same school.' But if there is a place for regularly sitting, it is allowable to go even far away."
Saṃvibhajitabbanti sace tayo pattapūrā gahitā, ekaṃ attano ṭhapetvā dve bhikkhusaṅghassa dātabbā. Sacce dve gahitā, ekaṃ attano ṭhapetvā eko saṅghassa dātabbo, yathāmittaṃ pana dātuṃ na labbhati. Yena eko gahito, na tena kiñci akāmā dātabbaṃ, yathāruci kātabbaṃ.
:Saṃvibhajitabbaṃ means if three bowlfuls have been taken, having kept one for oneself, two should be given to the Saṅgha of monks. If two have been taken, having kept one for oneself, one should be given to the Saṅgha; but it is not allowed to give (it) as a personal favor. By the one by whom one has been taken, nothing unwillingly should be given; it should be done as one pleases.
235.Gamane paṭippassaddheti antarāmagge upaddavaṃ vā disvā anatthikatāya vā ‘‘mayaṃ idāni na pesissāma, na gamissāmā’’ti evaṃ gamane paṭippassaddhe upacchinne.Ñātakānaṃ pavāritānanti etesaṃ bahumpi dentānaṃ paṭiggaṇhantassa anāpatti. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘tesampi pātheyyapaheṇakatthāya paṭiyattato pamāṇameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
235. Gamane paṭippassaddhe means, seeing a danger in the middle of the road, or due to lack of purpose, (thinking,) "Now, we will not send (it), we will not go," thus, when the going is given up, discontinued. Ñātakānaṃ pavāritānaṃ means there is no offense for one accepting much given to these relatives who have invited him. But in the commentaries, it was said, "Even for them, only the proper amount is allowable, as it is prepared for the purpose of travelling provisions (pātheyya) and gifts (paheṇaka)." The rest is self-explanatory.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
:Sixfold origination: it is an action (kiriya), accompanied by neither perception nor non-perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by designation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Kāṇamātāsikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
:The Kāṇamātā training rule is the fourth.
5. Paṭhamapavāraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
:##### 5. Explanation of the First Invitation Training Rule
236.Pañcamasikkhāpade –bhikkhū bhuttāvī pavāritāti brāhmaṇena ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, yāva icchathā’’ti evaṃ yāvadatthapavāraṇāya, sayañca ‘‘alaṃ, āvuso, thokaṃ thokaṃ dehī’’ti evaṃ paṭikkhepapavāraṇāya pavāritā.Paṭivissaketi sāmantagharavāsike.
236. In the fifth training rule: bhikkhū bhuttāvī pavāritā means monks who have eaten, having been invited (pavāritā) by a Brahmin, (saying,) "Take, venerable sirs, as much as you wish," thus, by an invitation to the extent of satisfaction, and by oneself, (saying,) "Enough, friend, give (it) little by little," thus, by an invitation involving refusal.Paṭivissake means those living in neighboring houses.
237.Kākoravasaddanti kākānaṃ oravasaddaṃ; sannipatitvā viravantānaṃ saddaṃ.Alametaṃ sabbanti ettha tikāraṃ avatvāva ‘‘alametaṃ sabbaṃ’’ ettakaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
237. Kākoravasaddaṃ means the croaking sound of crows (kākānaṃ oravasaddaṃ); the sound of those gathered together, crying out. Alametaṃ sabbaṃ means here, it is allowable to say just "alametaṃ sabbaṃ" without uttering the three times (tikāraṃ).
238-9.Bhuttāvīti bhuttavā. Tattha ca yasmā yena ekampi sitthaṃ saṅkhāditvā vā asaṅkhāditvā vā ajjhoharitaṃ hoti, so ‘‘bhuttāvī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tenassa padabhājane ‘‘bhuttāvī nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Pavāritoti katapavāraṇo, katapaṭikkhepo. Sopi ca yasmā na paṭikkhepamattena, atha kho pañcaṅgavasena, tenassa padabhājane ‘‘pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyatī’’ti iminā vippakatabhojano, ‘‘pavārito’’ti vutto. Yo ca vippakatabhojano, tena kiñci bhuttaṃ, kiñci abhuttaṃ, yañca bhuttaṃ; taṃ sandhāya ‘‘bhuttāvī’’tipi saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tasmā bhuttāvīvacanena visuṃ kañci atthasiddhiṃ na passāma. ‘‘Dirattatirattaṃ, chappañcavācāhī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 61-62) pana dirattādivacanaṃ viya pavāritapadassa parivārakabhāvena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
238-9. Bhuttāvī means one who has eaten (bhuttavā). And there, since by whomever even one grain has been eaten, whether chewed or unchewed, that one is counted as "bhuttāvī," therefore, in its analysis of terms, "bhuttāvī means of the five foods," etc., was said. Pavārito means one who has made an invitation (katapavāraṇo), one who has made a refusal (katapaṭikkhepo). And that too (is valid) since it is not by mere refusal, but rather by way of the five factors, therefore, in its analysis of terms, "pavārito means food is apparent," etc., was said. There, since by "food is apparent" (asanaṃ paññāyatī), food is broken up (vippakatabhojano), "pavārito" is said. And by the one whose food is broken up, some has been eaten, some not eaten, and what has been eaten; with reference to that, it is also counted as "bhuttāvī," therefore, we do not see any separate attainment of meaning by the word "bhuttāvī". But just as in "two or three days, five or six utterances," etc. (pāci. 61-62), the word "diratta" etc., similarly, it should be understood that this (word "pavārita") was said because of the enveloping nature and the elegance of expression.
Asanaṃ paññāyatītiādīsu vippakatabhojanaṃ dissati, bhuñjamāno ceso puggalo hotīti attho.Bhojanaṃ paññāyatīti pavāraṇappahonakabhojanaṃ dissati. Odanādīnaṃ ce aññataraṃ paṭikkhipitabbaṃ bhojanaṃ hotīti attho.Hatthapāse ṭhitoti pavāraṇappahonakaṃ bhojanaṃ gaṇhitvā dāyako aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇe okāse hotīti attho.Abhiharatīti so ce dāyako tassa taṃ bhattaṃ kāyena abhiharatīti attho.Paṭikkhepo paññāyatīti paṭikkhepo dissati; tañce abhihaṭaṃ so bhikkhu kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipatīti attho. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena pavārito nāma hotīti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
:Asanaṃ paññāyatītiādīsu means broken-up food is seen, and this person is one who is eating, this is the meaning. Bhojanaṃ paññāyatī means food suitable for invitation (pavāraṇappahonaka) is seen. Meaning that one of the rice etc., should be refused (paṭikkhipitabbaṃ). Hatthapāse ṭhito means the giver, having taken food suitable for invitation, is in a space measuring two and a half hands (aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇe). Abhiharatī means that giver presents that food to him with his body. Paṭikkhepo paññāyatī means refusal is apparent; meaning that the monk refuses that which has been presented, with his body or with his speech. Thus, by way of these five factors, he is called "pavārito". And this was said:
‘‘Pañcahi upāli ākārehi pavāraṇā paññāyati – asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito, abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyatī’’ti (pari. 428).
:"In five ways, Upāli, an invitation is apparent: food is apparent, a meal is apparent, standing within arm's reach, presenting, refusal is apparent" (pari. 428).
‘‘sālī’’ti antamaso nīvāraṃ upādāya sabbāpi sālijāti.‘‘Vīhī’’ti sabbāpi vīhijāti.‘‘Yavagodhumesu’’bhedo natthi.‘‘Kaṅgū’’ti setarattakāḷabhedā sabbāpi kaṅgujāti.‘‘Varako’’ti antamaso varakacorakaṃ upādāya sabbā setavaṇṇā varakajāti.‘‘Kudrūsako’’ti kāḷako dravo ceva sāmākādibhedā ca sabbāpi tiṇadhaññajāti.
:"Sālī" means all kinds of rice, including at least wild rice (nīvāra). "Vīhī" means all kinds of rice. There is no distinction in "yavagodhumesu" (barley and wheat). "Kaṅgū" means all kinds of millet, with white, red, and black varieties. "Varako" means all white varieties of varaka grains, including at least varakacorakaṃ. "Kudrūsako" means all kinds of wild grains, with black grains, liquid, and varieties such as sāmāka.
Nīvāravarakacorakā cettha ‘‘dhaññānulomā’’ti vadanti. Dhaññāni vā hontu dhaññānulomāni vā, etesaṃ vuttappabhedānaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ taṇḍule gahetvā ‘‘bhattaṃ pacissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘yāguṃ pacissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘ambilapāyāsādīsu aññataraṃ pacissāmā’’ti vā yaṃkiñci sandhāya pacantu, sace uṇhaṃ sītalaṃ vā bhuñjantānaṃ bhojanakāle gahitagahitaṭṭhāne odhi paññāyati, odanasaṅgahameva gacchati, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Sace odhi na paññāyati, yāgusaṅgahaṃ gacchati, pavāraṇaṃ na janeti.
:Here, they say that nīvāra, varakacorakā are "similar to grains" (dhaññānulomā). Whether they are grains or similar to grains, having taken the grains of these seven kinds mentioned above, if they cook (it), intending "we will cook rice," or "we will cook gruel," or "we will cook one of the sour rice porridge etc.," whatever they cook, if, when eating hot or cold, gruel is apparent (odhi paññāyati) in the place where it is taken during the mealtime, it goes into the category of rice (odanasaṅgahameva), it causes invitation (pavāraṇa). If gruel is not apparent, it goes into the category of gruel, it does not cause invitation.
Yopi pāyāso vā paṇṇaphalakaḷīramissakā ambilayāgu vā uddhanato otāritamattā abbhuṇhā hoti, āvajjitvā pivituṃ sakkā, hatthena gahitokāsepi odhiṃ na dasseti, pavāraṇaṃ na janeti. Sace pana usumāya vigatāya sītalībhūtā ghanabhāvaṃ gacchati, odhiṃ dasseti, puna pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Pubbe tanubhāvo na rakkhati. Sacepi dadhitakkādīni āropetvā bahupaṇṇaphalakaḷīre pakkhipitvā muṭṭhimattāpi taṇḍulā pakkhittā honti, bhojanakāle ce odhi paññāyati, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Ayāguke nimantane ‘‘yāguṃ dassāmā’’ti bhatte udakakañjikakhīrādīni ākiritvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti denti. Kiñcāpi tanukā honti, pavāraṇaṃ janetiyeva. Sace pana pakkuthitesu udakādīsu pakkhipitvā pacitvā denti, yāgusaṅgahameva gacchati. Yāgusaṅgahaṃ gatepi tasmiṃ vā aññasmiṃ vā yattha macchamaṃsaṃ pakkhipanti, sace sāsapamattampi macchamaṃsakhaṇḍaṃ vā nhāru vā paññāyati, pavāraṇaṃ janeti.
:Also, rice porridge (pāyāsa) or sour gruel mixed with leaves, fruits and shoots (kaḷīra), as soon as it is taken down from the hearth, is slightly warm, can be poured and drunk, does not show gruel even in the place grasped by the hand, it does not cause invitation. But if, when the heat has gone away, it becomes cold and thick, it shows gruel, then it causes invitation again. The thinness does not protect it earlier. Even if curds (dadhi) or buttermilk (takka) etc., are placed and many leaves, fruits, and shoots are put in, even a handful of rice grains are thrown in, if gruel is apparent at mealtime, it causes invitation. In a non-gruel invitation, they pour water gruel (udakakañjika), milk etc., into the rice and give (it), (saying,) "Take the gruel." Even though they are thin, they cause invitation. But if, having cooked (them) after throwing (them) into boiling water etc., they give (it), it goes into the category of gruel only. Even when it has gone into the category of gruel, in that or another (dish) where they put fish or meat, if even a mustard-seed sized piece of fish or meat or tendon is apparent, it causes invitation.
Suddharasako pana rasakayāgu vā na janeti. Ṭhapetvā vuttadhaññānaṃ taṇḍule aññehi veṇutaṇḍulādīhi vā kandamūlaphalehi vā yehi kehici kataṃ bhattampi pavāraṇaṃ na janeti, pageva ghanayāgu. Sace panettha macchamaṃsaṃ pakkhipanti, janeti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ ‘‘pupphaatthāya bhattampi pavāraṇaṃ janetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pupphiatthāya bhattaṃ nāma pupphikhajjakatthāya kuthitatūdake pakkhipitvā seditataṇḍulā vuccanti. Sace pana te taṇḍule sukkhāpetvā khādanti, vaṭṭati; neva sattusaṅkhyaṃ na bhattasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Puna tehi katabhattaṃ pavāretiyeva. Te taṇḍule sappitelādīsu vā pacanti, pūvaṃ vā karonti, na pavārenti. Puthukā vā tāhi katasattubhattādīni vā na pavārenti.
:But pure broth (suddharasako) or broth gruel does not cause (invitation). Except for rice grains mentioned (above), rice with other bamboo rice etc., or root vegetables or fruits, whatever rice is made, does not cause invitation, much less thick gruel. But if they put fish or meat in this, it causes (invitation). In the Mahāpaccari, it was said, "Rice for flowers also causes invitation." Rice for flowers (pupphiatthāya bhattaṃ) means rice grains cooked in boiling water for the purpose of flower-snacks (pupphikhajjaka). But if they dry those rice grains and eat (them), it is allowable; they go neither into the category of roasted grain flour (sattu) nor into the category of rice. Again, rice made with those causes invitation. Those rice grains, they cook in sesame oil etc., or make cakes, they do not cause invitation. Or flattened rice or roasted grain flour rice etc., made with those do not cause invitation.
Kummāso nāma yavehi katakummāso. Aññehi pana muggādīhi katakummāso pavāraṇaṃ na janeti. Sattu nāma sālivīhiyavehi katasattu. Kaṅguvarakakudrūsakasīsānipi bhajjitvā īsakaṃ koṭṭetvā thuse palāpetvā puna daḷhaṃ koṭṭetvā cuṇṇaṃ karonti. Sacepi taṃ allattā ekābaddhaṃ hoti, sattusaṅgahameva gacchati. Kharapākabhajjitānaṃ vīhīnaṃ taṇḍule koṭṭetvā denti, tampi cuṇṇaṃ sattusaṅgahameva gacchati. Samapākabhajjitānaṃ pana vīhīnaṃ vā vīhipalāpānaṃ vā taṇḍulā bhajjitataṇḍulā eva vā na pavārenti. Tesaṃ pana taṇḍulādīnaṃ cuṇṇaṃ pavāreti. Kharapākabhajjitānaṃ vīhīnaṃ kuṇḍakampi pavāreti. Samapākabhajjitānaṃ pana ātapasukkhānaṃ vā kuṇḍakaṃ na pavāreti. Lājā vā tehi katabhattasattuādīni vā na pavārenti. Bhajjitapiṭṭhaṃ vā yaṃkiñci suddhakhajjakaṃ vā na pavāreti. Macchamaṃsapūritakhajjakaṃ pana sattumodako vā pavāreti. Maccho maṃsañca pākaṭameva. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sacepi yāguṃ pivantassa yāgusitthamattāneva dve macchakhaṇḍāni vā maṃsakhaṇḍāni vā ekabhājane vā nānābhājane vā denti, tāni ce akhādanto aññaṃ yaṃkiñci pavāraṇappahonakaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Tato ekaṃ khāditaṃ, ekaṃ hatthe vā patte vā hoti, so ce aññaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Dvepi khāditāni honti, mukhe sāsapamattampi avasiṭṭhaṃ natthi, sacepi aññaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti.
:Kummāsa means kummāsa made with barley. But kummāsa made with other mung beans etc., does not cause invitation. Sattu (roasted grain flour) means sattu made with rice, paddy, or barley. They also fry millet, varaka, kudrūsaka, and sīsāni, lightly pound (them), remove the husks, and then pound (them) firmly, and make flour. Even if that is sticky and cohesive, it goes into the category of sattu only. Having pounded rice grains of hard-roasted paddy and give (it), that flour also goes into the category of sattu only. But rice grains of evenly-roasted paddy or paddy husks or fried rice grains do not cause invitation. Flour of those rice grains etc., causes invitation. The husk (kuṇḍaka) of hard-roasted paddy also causes invitation. But the husk of evenly-roasted or sun-dried (rice) does not cause invitation. Puffed rice or rice sattu etc., made with those do not cause invitation. Fried flour or whatever pure snack does not cause invitation. But snacks filled with fish or meat or sattu cakes cause invitation. Fish and meat are obvious. But this is the distinction: even if, while drinking gruel, just two pieces of fish or pieces of meat, sized like gruel grains, are given in one bowl or in different bowls, if he refuses (paṭikkhipati) some other pavāraṇappahonaka without eating those, he does not cause invitation. After that, one is eaten, one is in the hand or bowl, if he refuses another, he causes invitation. If both have been eaten, there is not even a mustard-seed sized (piece) left in the mouth, even if he refuses another, he does not cause invitation.
Kappiyamaṃsaṃ khādanto kappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Kappiyamaṃsaṃ khādanto akappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Kasmā? Avatthutāya. Yañhi bhikkhuno khādituṃ vaṭṭati, taṃyeva paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Idaṃ pana jānanto akappiyattā paṭikkhipati, ajānantopi paṭikkhipitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitameva paṭikkhipati nāma, tasmā na pavāreti. Sace pana akappiyamaṃsaṃ khādanto kappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Kasmā? Vatthutāya. Yañhi tena paṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ pavāraṇāya vatthu. Yaṃ pana khādati, taṃ kiñcāpi paṭikkhipitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitaṃ, khādiyamānaṃ pana maṃsabhāvaṃ na jahati, tasmā pavāreti. Akappiyamaṃsaṃ khādanto akappiyamaṃsaṃ paṭikkhipati, purimanayeneva na pavāreti. Kappiyamaṃsaṃ vā akappiyamaṃsaṃ vā khādanto pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ yaṃkiñci kappiyabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Kuladūsakavejjakammauttarimanussadhammārocanasāditarūpiyādīhi nibbattaṃ buddhapaṭikuṭṭhaṃ anesanāya uppannaṃ akappiyabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Kappiyabhojanaṃ vā akappiyabhojanaṃ vā bhuñjantopi kappiyabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Akappiyabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāretīti sabbattha vuttanayeneva kāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
:Eating allowable meat, one refuses allowable meat, he causes invitation. Eating allowable meat, one refuses unallowable meat, he does not cause invitation. Why? Because of the absence of basis (avatthutāya). Indeed, invitation occurs when one refuses only what a monk is allowed to eat. But knowing this, he refuses because it is unallowable; even without knowing, he refuses, standing in a place where (something) should be refused, therefore, he does not cause invitation. But if, eating unallowable meat, one refuses allowable meat, he causes invitation. Why? Because of the presence of basis. Indeed, what has been refused by him is the basis for invitation. But what he is eating, even though it is in a place where (something) should be refused, that being eaten does not give up the state of meat, therefore, he causes invitation. Eating unallowable meat, one refuses unallowable meat, he does not cause invitation, according to the previous method. Eating allowable meat or unallowable meat, one refuses whatever allowable food of the five foods, he causes invitation. Food arising from a corrupt family (kuladūsaka), medical practice (vejjakamma), revealing superior human states (uttarimanussadhamma), or trading in forms for gain (sāditarūpiya), censured by the Buddha, arising from an improper search (anesanāya), he refuses unallowable food, he does not cause invitation. Even while eating allowable food or unallowable food, one refuses allowable food, he causes invitation. He refuses unallowable food, he does not cause invitation; the reason should be understood everywhere according to the method stated.
Hatthapāse ṭhitoti ettha pana sace bhikkhu nisinno hoti, āsanassa pacchimantato paṭṭhāya, sace ṭhito, paṇhiantato paṭṭhāya, sace nipanno, yena passena nipanno, tassa pārimantato paṭṭhāya, dāyakassa nisinnassa vā ṭhitassa vā nipannassa vā ṭhapetvā pasāritahatthaṃ yaṃ āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa orimantena paricchinditvā aḍḍhateyyahattho ‘‘hatthapāso’’ti veditabbo. Tasmiṃ ṭhatvā abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipantasseva pavāraṇā hoti, na tato paraṃ.
:Here, in Hatthapāse ṭhito, if the monk is sitting, starting from the back edge of the seat, if standing, starting from the heel, if lying down, starting from the far edge of the side on which he is lying, for the giver, whether sitting, standing, or lying down, keeping the hand outstretched, whichever limb is nearest, having determined the inner limit of that, two and a half hands is to be understood as "arm's reach" (hatthapāso). Invitation occurs only for one refusing something presented while standing in that (space), not beyond that.
Abhiharatīti hatthapāsabbhantare ṭhito gahaṇatthaṃ upanāmeti. Sace pana anantaranisinnopi bhikkhu hatthe vā ūrūsu vā ādhārake vā ṭhitapattaṃ anabhiharitvāva ‘‘bhattaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vadati, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthi. Bhattapacchiṃ ānetvā purato bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘gaṇhāhī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Īsakaṃ pana uddharitvā vā apanāmetvā vā ‘‘gaṇhathā’’ti vutte paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Therāsane nisinno thero dūre nisinnassa daharabhikkhussa pattaṃ pesetvā ‘‘ito odanaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vadati, gaṇhitvā pana gato tuṇhī tiṭṭhati, daharo ‘‘alaṃ mayha’’nti paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Kasmā? Therassa dūrabhāvato dūtassa ca anabhiharaṇatoti. Sace pana gahetvā āgato bhikkhu ‘‘idaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vadati, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti.
Abhiharati means he brings it near to take, while standing within arm's reach. But if a bhikkhu, even sitting nearby, says "Take the food" without bringing near the bowl that is resting in his hands, or on his lap, or on a stand, there is no pavāraṇā for refusing it. The same principle applies even if he brings the food container and places it on the ground in front and says, "Take it." But if, after lifting or moving it slightly, he says, "Take it," there is pavāraṇā for refusing. If a senior monk, sitting in the senior's seat, sends a bowl to a junior monk sitting far away and says, "Take rice from here," and the junior monk takes it but remains silent, and the junior says, "Enough for me," and refuses, there is no pavāraṇā. Why? Because of the distance of the senior monk and because the messenger did not bring it near. But if a monk who has taken it and come says, "Take this food," there is pavāraṇā for refusing it.
Parivesanāya eko ekena hatthena odanapacchiṃ ekena kaṭacchuṃ gahetvā bhikkhū parivisati, tatra ce añño āgantvā ‘‘ahaṃ pacchiṃ dhāressāmi, tvaṃ odanaṃ dehī’’ti vatvā gahitamattakameva karoti, parivesako eva pana taṃ dhāreti, tasmā sā abhihaṭāva hoti. Tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hoti. Sace pana parivisakena phuṭṭhamattāva hoti, itarova naṃ dhāreti, tato dātukāmatāya gaṇhantaṃ paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā na hoti. Kaṭacchunā uddhaṭabhatte pana hoti. Kaṭacchuabhihāroyeva hi tassa abhihāro. Dvinnaṃ samabhārepi paṭikkhipanto pavāretiyevāti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Anantarassa bhikkhuno bhatte diyyamāne itaro pattaṃ hatthehi pidahati, pavāraṇā natthi. Kasmā? Aññassa abhihaṭe paṭikkhittattā.
For serving, one person takes a rice container in one hand and a ladle in the other and serves the bhikkhus; if another person comes and says, "I will hold the container, you give the rice," and only makes the gesture of taking it, but the server still holds it, then it is considered to have been brought near ( abhihaṭāva). Therefore, there is pavāraṇā for the one who refuses when he is about to take it with the intention of giving. If, however, it is only touched by the server, and the other person holds it, then there is no pavāraṇā for the one who refuses when he is about to take it with the intention of giving. But it applies to rice scooped with a ladle. The act of bringing it near is indeed the act of bringing near with the ladle. The Mahāpaccari says that even if the burden is equal for both, the one who refuses incurs pavāraṇā. If, when food is being given to a nearby bhikkhu, another covers his bowl with his hands, there is no pavāraṇā. Why? Because he refused what was brought near to another.
Paṭikkhepo paññāyatīti ettha vācāya abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthi. Kāyena abhihaṭaṃ pana kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipantassa pavāraṇā hotīti veditabbo.
Paṭikkhepo paññāyatīti: Here, there is no pavāraṇā for refusing verbally what has been brought near. But it should be understood that there is pavāraṇā for refusing physically what has been brought near, whether physically or verbally.
Tattha kāyena paṭikkhepo nāma aṅguliṃ vā hatthaṃ vā macchikabījaniṃ vā cīvarakaṇṇaṃ vā cāleti, bhamukāya vā ākāraṃ karoti, kuddho vā oloketi, vācāya paṭikkhepo nāma ‘‘ala’’nti vā, ‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘mā ākirā’’ti vā, ‘‘apagacchā’’ti vā vadati; evaṃ yena kenaci ākārena kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhitte pavāraṇā hoti.
Here, physical refusal means moving a finger, hand, fly whisk, or the edge of the robe, or making a face with the eyebrows, or looking angrily; verbal refusal means saying "Enough," or "I will not take it," or "Don't pour," or "Go away"; thus, pavāraṇā occurs when it is refused by body or speech in any way.
Eko abhihaṭe bhatte pavāraṇāya bhīto hattha apanetvā punappunaṃ patte odanaṃ ākirantaṃ ‘‘ākira ākira koṭṭetvā pūrehī’’ti vadati, ettha kathanti? Mahāsumatthero tāva ‘‘anākiraṇatthāya vuttattā pavāraṇā hotī’’ti āha. Mahāpadumatthero pana ‘‘‘ākira pūrehī’ti vadantassa nāma ‘kassaci pavāraṇā atthī’ti vatvā ‘na pavāretī’’’ti āha. Aparo bhattaṃ abhiharantaṃ bhikkhuṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘kiṃ āvuso itopi kiñci gaṇhissasi, dammi te kiñcī’’ti āha. Tatrāpi ‘‘‘evaṃ nāgamissatī’ti vuttattā ‘pavāraṇā hotī’’’ti mahāsumatthero āha. Mahāpadumatthero pana ‘‘‘gaṇhissasī’ti vadantassa nāma ‘kassaci pavāraṇā atthī’ti vatvā ‘na pavāretī’’’ti āha.
One, fearing pavāraṇā when food is brought near, withdraws his hand, and when they repeatedly pour rice into his bowl, he says, "Pour, pour, fill it to the brim!" What is the ruling here? Venerable Mahāsumata says, "Since it was said to prevent pouring, there is pavāraṇā." But Venerable Mahāpaduma says, "When someone says 'Pour and fill,' who would say 'there is pavāraṇā for someone'? He does not cause pavāraṇā." Another, noticing a bhikkhu bringing food near, asks, "Venerable, will you take some more from here? Shall I give you some?" There too, Venerable Mahāsumata says, "Since it was said, 'so that it will not come again,' there is pavāraṇā." But Venerable Mahāpaduma says, "When someone says 'Will you take some,' who would say 'there is pavāraṇā for someone'? He does not cause pavāraṇā."
Eko samaṃsakaṃ rasaṃ abhiharitvā ‘‘rasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, taṃ sutvā paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthi. ‘‘Maccharasaṃ maṃsarasa’’nti vutte paṭikkhipato hoti, ‘‘idaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttepi hotiyeva. Maṃsaṃ visuṃ katvā ‘‘maṃsarasaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, tattha ce sāsapamattampi maṃsakhaṇḍaṃ atthi, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Sace pana parissāvito hoti, ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti abhayatthero āha.
One brings near a curry with meat and says, "Take the curry," there is no pavāraṇā for refusing it upon hearing that. There is pavāraṇā for refusing if it is said, "Fish curry, meat curry," and there is pavāraṇā if it is said, "Take this." If the meat is separated and he says, "Take the meat curry," if there is even a mustard seed-sized piece of meat in it, there is pavāraṇā for refusing it. If, however, it has been strained, Venerable Abhaya says, "It is allowable."
Maṃsarasena āpucchantaṃ mahāthero ‘‘muhuttaṃ āgamehī’’ti vatvā ‘‘thālakaṃ āvuso āharā’’ti āha. Ettha kathanti? Mahāsumatthero tāva ‘‘abhihārakassa gamanaṃ paṭhamaṃ upacchinnaṃ, tasmā pavāretī’’ti āha. Mahāpadumatthero pana ‘‘ayaṃ kuhiṃ gacchati, kīdisaṃ etassa gamanaṃ, gaṇhantassāpi nāma pavāraṇā atthī’’ti vatvā ‘‘na pavāretī’’ti āha. Kaḷīrapanasādīhi missetvā maṃsaṃ pacanti, taṃ gahetvā ‘‘kaḷīrasūpaṃ gaṇhatha, panasabyañjanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, evampi na pavāreti. Kasmā? Apavāraṇārahassa nāmena vuttattā. Sace pana ‘‘macchasūpaṃ maṃsasūpa’’nti vā ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vā vadanti, pavāreti. Maṃsakarambako nāma hoti, taṃ dātukāmopi ‘‘karambakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati; na pavāreti. ‘‘Maṃsakarambaka’’nti vā ‘‘ida’’nti vā vutte pana pavāreti. Eseva nayo sabbesu macchamaṃsamissakesu.
When asked about meat curry, a senior monk says, "Wait a moment," and says, "Bring a plate, friend." What is the ruling here? Venerable Mahāsumata says, "The act of bringing near is interrupted first, therefore, it causes pavāraṇā." But Venerable Mahāpaduma says, "Where is this person going? What is the nature of his going? Would there be pavāraṇā even for the one who is taking it?" and says, "It does not cause pavāraṇā." They cook meat mixed with kaḷīra and breadfruit etc., and taking it, they say, "Take the kaḷīra soup, take the breadfruit curry." Even in this case, it does not cause pavāraṇā. Why? Because it is mentioned by the name of what is not subject to pavāraṇā. If they say, "Fish soup, meat soup," or "Take this," it causes pavāraṇā. There is something called maṃsakarambaka (meat mixed dish), even if he wants to give it, if he says, "Take the karambaka," it is allowable; it does not cause pavāraṇā. But if it is said "Meat karambaka," or "This," it causes pavāraṇā. The same principle applies to all mixtures of fish and meat.
Yo pana nimantane bhuñjamāno maṃsaṃ abhihaṭaṃ ‘‘uddissa kata’’nti maññamāno paṭikkhipati, pavāritova hotīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Missakakathā pana kurundiyaṃ suṭṭhu vuttā. Evañhi tattha vuttaṃ – piṇḍapātacāriko bhikkhu bhattamissakaṃ yāguṃ āharitvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, na pavāreti. ‘‘Bhattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vutte pavāreti. Kasmā? Yenāpucchito, tassa atthitāya. Ayamettha adhippāyo – ‘‘yāgumissakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, tatra ce yāgu bahutarā vā hoti samasamā vā, na pavāreti. Yāgu mandā, bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ, pavāreti. Idañca sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttattā na sakkā paṭikkhipituṃ, kāraṇaṃ panettha duddasaṃ. ‘‘Bhattamissakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, bhattaṃ bahukaṃ vā samaṃ vā appataraṃ vā hoti, pavāretiyeva. Bhattaṃ vā yāguṃ vā anāmasitvā ‘‘missakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, tatra ce bhattaṃ bahutaraṃ vā samakaṃ vā hoti, pavāreti. Appataraṃ na pavāreti. Idañca karambakena na samānetabbaṃ. Karambako hi maṃsamissakopi hoti amaṃsamissakopi, tasmā ‘‘karambaka’’nti vutte pavāraṇā natthi. Idaṃ pana bhattamissakameva. Ettha vuttanayeneva pavāraṇā hoti. Bahurase bhatte rasaṃ, bahukhīre khīraṃ bahusappimhi ca pāyāse sappiṃ gaṇhathāti visuṃ katvā deti, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā natthi.
But the Mahāpaccari says that if one, eating at an invitation, refuses meat that is brought near, thinking "it was done intentionally," he has incurred pavāraṇā. The discussion of mixtures, however, is well stated in the Kurundī. For example, it is stated there: A bhikkhu on alms round brings mixed rice gruel and says, "Take the gruel," it does not cause pavāraṇā. If he says, "Take the rice," it causes pavāraṇā. Why? Because of the existence of what he was asked about. The intention here is: If he says, "Take the gruel mixture," and if the gruel is more abundant or equal, it does not cause pavāraṇā. If the gruel is less and the rice is more abundant, it causes pavāraṇā. And since this is stated in all the commentaries, it cannot be rejected, although the reason here is difficult to see. If he says, "Take the rice mixture," whether the rice is abundant, equal, or less, it always causes pavāraṇā. If he says, "Take the mixture" without mentioning rice or gruel, if the rice is more abundant or equal, it causes pavāraṇā. If it is less, it does not cause pavāraṇā. And this should not be compared with karambaka. Karambaka can be a mixture with or without meat, therefore, there is no pavāraṇā when "karambaka" is said. This, however, is only a rice mixture. Pavāraṇā occurs according to the method stated here. In rice with abundant flavor, one separates the flavor, and in milk-rice with abundant milk, the milk, and in pāyāsa with abundant ghee, gives the ghee separately, there is no pavāraṇā for refusing it.
Yo pana gacchanto pavāreti, so gacchantova bhuñjituṃ labhati. Kaddamaṃ vā udakaṃ vā patvā ṭhitena atirittaṃ kāretabbaṃ. Sace antarā nadī pūrā hoti, nadītīre gumbaṃ anupariyāyantena bhuñjitabbaṃ. Atha nāvā vā setu vā atthi, taṃ abhiruhitvāpi caṅkamantenava bhuñjitabbaṃ, gamanaṃ na upacchinditabbaṃ. Yāne vā hatthiassapiṭṭhe vā candamaṇḍale vā sūriyamaṇḍale vā nisīditvā pavāritena yāva majjhanhikaṃ, tāva tesu gacchantesupi nisinneneva bhuñjitabbaṃ. Yo ṭhito pavāreti, ṭhiteneva, yo nisinno pavāreti, nisinneneva bhuñjitabbaṃ. Taṃ taṃ iriyāpathaṃ kopentena atirittaṃ kāretabbaṃ. Yo ukkuṭiko nisīditvā pavāreti, tena ukkuṭikeneva bhuñjitabbaṃ. Tassa pana heṭṭhā palālapīṭhaṃ vā kiñci vā nisīdanakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Pīṭhake nisīditvā pavāritena āsanaṃ acāletvāva catasso disā parivattantena bhuñjituṃ labbhati. Mañce nisīditvā pavāritena ito vā etto vā saṃsarituṃ na labbhati. Sace pana naṃ saha mañcena ukkhipitvā aññatra nenti, vaṭṭati. Nipajjitvā pavāritena nipanneneva bhuñjitabbaṃ. Parivattantena yena passena nipanno, tassa ṭhānaṃ nātikkametabbaṃ.
But one who incurs pavāraṇā while walking is allowed to eat while walking. If one encounters mud or water, the remainder should be done while standing. If there is a full river in between, it should be eaten while going around the bushes on the riverbank. If there is a boat or a bridge, it should be eaten while climbing on it and walking, the walking should not be interrupted. One who has incurred pavāraṇā while sitting on a vehicle or on the back of an elephant or on the lunar disc or solar disc, should eat while sitting as long as they are moving until noon. One who incurs pavāraṇā while standing should eat while standing, one who incurs pavāraṇā while sitting should eat while sitting. The remainder should be done by maintaining that posture. One who incurs pavāraṇā while squatting should eat while squatting. A mat of straw or some kind of seat should be given under him. One who has incurred pavāraṇā while sitting on a stool is allowed to eat by turning in four directions without moving the seat. One who has incurred pavāraṇā while sitting on a bed is not allowed to move from here to there. If, however, they lift him up with the bed and take him elsewhere, it is allowable. One who incurs pavāraṇā while lying down should eat while lying down. While turning around, the place of the side he is lying on should not be exceeded.
Anatirittanti na atirittaṃ; na adhikanti attho. Taṃ pana yasmā kappiyakatādīhi sattahi vinayakammākārehi akataṃ vā gilānassa anadhikaṃ vā hoti, tasmā padabhājane ‘‘akappiyakata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaakappiyakatanti yaṃ tattha phalaṃ vā kandamūlādi vā pañcahi samaṇakappehi kappiyaṃ akataṃ; yañca akappiyamaṃsaṃ vā akappiyabhojanaṃ vā, etaṃ akappiyaṃ nāma. Taṃ akappiyaṃ ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti evaṃ atirittaṃ katampi akappiyakatanti veditabbaṃ.Appaṭiggahitakatanti bhikkhunā appaṭiggahitaṃyeva purimanayeneva atirittaṃ kataṃ.Anuccāritakatanti kappiyaṃ kārāpetuṃ āgatena bhikkhunā īsakampi anukkhittaṃ vā anapanāmitaṃ vā kataṃ.Ahatthapāse katanti kappiyaṃ kārāpetuṃ āgatassa hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitena kataṃ.Abhuttāvinā katanti yo ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti atirittaṃ karoti, tena pavāraṇappahonakaṃ bhojanaṃ abhuttena kataṃ.Bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena katanti idaṃ uttānameva.Alametaṃ sabbanti avuttanti vacībhedaṃ katvā evaṃ avuttaṃ hoti. Iti imehi sattahi vinayakammākārehi yaṃ atirittaṃ kappiyaṃ akataṃ, yañca na gilānātirittaṃ, tadubhayampi anatirittanti veditabbaṃ.
Anatiritta means not remainder; it means not extra. Since that is either not done with the seven forms of vinayakamma such as making it allowable etc., or is not more for the sick person, therefore "not made allowable" etc., is said in the padabhājana. Here, akappiyakata means a fruit, root, tuber, etc., that has not been made allowable with the five samaṇakappas; and what is unallowable meat or unallowable food, this is called unallowable. Even if that unallowable is made remainder by saying "Enough, all this," it should be understood as "made unallowable." Appaṭiggahitakata means that which has not been accepted by the bhikkhu, made remainder in the same way as before. Anuccāritakata means that which has been brought by a bhikkhu who has come to have it made allowable, without even slightly lifting or moving it away. Ahatthapāse kata means that which has been done by someone standing outside the arm's reach of one who has come to have it made allowable. Abhuttāvinā kata means that the food sufficient for pavāraṇā has been made remainder without being eaten by the one who says, "Enough, all this." Bhuttāvinā pavāritena āsanā vuṭṭhitena kata this is self-explanatory. Alametaṃ sabbanti avutta means it is not said by making a verbal distinction. Thus, both that allowable remainder which is not made allowable with these seven forms of vinayakamma, and that which is not an excess for the sick person, should be understood as "not remainder."
bhuttāvinā kataṃ hotīti anantare nisinnassa sabhāgassa bhikkhuno pattato ekampi sitthaṃ vā maṃsahīraṃ vā khāditvā katampi bhuttāvināva kataṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.Āsanā avuṭṭhitenāti ettha pana asammohatthaṃ ayaṃ vinicchayo – dve bhikkhū pātova bhuñjamānā pavāritā honti – ekena tattheva nisīditabbaṃ, itarena niccabhattaṃ vā salākabhattaṃ vā ānetvā upaḍḍhaṃ tassa bhikkhuno patte ākiritvā hatthaṃ dhovitvā sesaṃ tena bhikkhunā kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yañhi tassa hatthe laggaṃ, taṃ akappiyaṃ hoti. Sace pana paṭhamaṃ nisinno bhikkhu sayameva tassa pattato hatthena gaṇhāti, hatthadhovanakiccaṃ natthi. Sace pana evaṃ kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā bhuñjantassa puna kiñci byañjanaṃ vā khādanīyaṃ vā patte ākiranti, yena paṭhamaṃ kappiyaṃ kataṃ, so puna kātuṃ na labhati. Yena akataṃ, tena kātabbaṃ. Yañca akataṃ, taṃ kātabbaṃ.‘‘Yena akata’’nti aññena bhikkhunā yena paṭhamaṃ na kataṃ, tena kātabbaṃ.‘‘Yañca akata’’nti yena paṭhamaṃ kappiyaṃ kataṃ, tenāpi yaṃ akataṃ taṃ kātabbaṃ. Paṭhamabhājane pana kātuṃ na labbhati. Tattha hi kariyamānaṃ paṭhamaṃ katena saddhiṃ kataṃ hoti, tasmā aññasmiṃ bhājane kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Evaṃ kataṃ pana tena bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ katena saddhiṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
bhuttāvinā kataṃ hotīti: It should be understood that even if a single grain of rice or meat essence is eaten from the bowl of a like-minded bhikkhu sitting nearby, it is considered to have been done by one who has eaten. Āsanā avuṭṭhitenāti: Here, for the purpose of non-confusion, this is the ruling – two bhikkhus are eating in the morning and have incurred pavāraṇā – one should remain sitting there, the other should bring regular food or ticket food, pour half into that bhikkhu's bowl, wash his hands, and have the remainder made allowable by that bhikkhu and eat it. Why? Because what is stuck to his hand is unallowable. If, however, the bhikkhu who is sitting first takes from that bowl himself with his hand, there is no need to wash hands. If, while eating in this way after having it made allowable, some more curry or edibles are poured into the bowl, the one who made it allowable first cannot do it again. It must be done by the one who did not do it. What has not been done, that must be done. ‘‘Yena akata’’nti: It must be done by another bhikkhu who did not do it first. ‘‘Yañca akata’’nti: Even what was not done by the one who first made it allowable, that must be done. It is not allowed to do it in the first bowl. For there, what is being done is done together with what was done first, therefore, the intention is that it is allowable to do it in another bowl. It is allowable for that bhikkhu to eat what has been done in this way together with what was done first.
Kappiyaṃ karontena ca na kevalaṃ patteyeva, kuṇḍepi pacchiyampi yattha katthaci purato ṭhapetvā onāmitabhājane kātabbaṃ. Taṃ sacepi bhikkhusataṃ pavāritaṃ hoti, sabbesaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, appavāritānampi vaṭṭati. Yena pana kappiyaṃ kataṃ, tassa na vaṭṭati. Sacepi pavāretvā piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuṃ pattaṃ gahetvā avassaṃ bhuñjanake maṅgalanimantane nisīdāpenti, atirittaṃ kāretvāva bhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace tattha añño bhikkhu natthi, āsanasālaṃ vā vihāraṃ vā pattaṃ pesetvā kāretabbaṃ. Kappiyaṃ karontena pana anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Sace āsanasālāyaṃ abyatto bhikkhu hoti, sayaṃ gantvā kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā ānetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.
When making allowable, it should be done not only in the bowl, but also in a pot or container, wherever it is, in a lowered container placed in front. Even if a hundred bhikkhus have incurred pavāraṇā, it is allowable for all to eat, and it is allowable for those who have not incurred pavāraṇā as well. It is not allowable for the one who made it allowable. Even if they lead a bhikkhu who has incurred pavāraṇā and entered for alms to sit at an auspicious invitation where eating is a must, it must be eaten only after having it made remainder. If there is no other bhikkhu there, it must be sent to the refectory or monastery to have it done. However, when making allowable, it should not be done while it is in the hands of one who is not fully ordained. If there is an incapable bhikkhu in the refectory, one should go himself, have it made allowable, bring it, and eat it.
Gilānātirittanti ettha na kevalaṃ yaṃ gilānassa bhuttāvasesaṃ hoti, taṃ gilānātirittaṃ; atha kho yaṃkiñci gilānaṃ uddissa ajja vā sve vā yadā vā icchati, tadā khādissatīti āhaṭaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘gilānātiritta’’nti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ yāmakālikādīsu ajjhohāre ajjhohāre dukkaṭaṃ, taṃ asaṃsaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. Sace pana āmisasaṃsaṭṭhāni honti, āhāratthāyapi anāhāratthāyapi paṭiggahetvā ajjhoharantassa pācittiyameva.
Gilānātirittanti: Here, not only what is left over after a sick person has eaten is "remainder for the sick"; but whatever is brought for the sake of the sick person, saying "today or tomorrow or whenever he wants, he will eat it," all that should be understood as "remainder for the sick." The dukkata that occurs with each consumption in yāmakālika etc., is said in terms of non-contact. If, however, they are in contact with āmisa, there is only a pācittiya for accepting and consuming it for the sake of food or not for the sake of food.
241.Sati paccayeti yāmakālikaṃ pipāsāya sati pipāsacchedanatthaṃ, sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikañca tena tena upasametabbake ābādhe sati tassa upasamanatthaṃ paribhuñjato anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
241. Sati paccayeti: If there is thirst for yāmakālika, for the purpose of cutting off thirst, and for sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika, if there is an illness that needs to be alleviated with that, there is no offense for using them for the purpose of alleviating it. The rest here is self-explanatory.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathina-arising: It arises from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; it is active and inactive, without perception and release, unintentional, an offense by enactment, a bodily action, a verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Paṭhamapavāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth Chapter on First Pavāraṇā is Concluded.
6. Dutiyapavāraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Second Pavāraṇā Training Rule
242.Chaṭṭhasikkhāpade –anācāraṃ ācaratīti paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karoti.Upanandhīti upanāhaṃ janento tasmiṃ puggale attano kodhaṃ bandhi; punappunaṃ āghātaṃ janesīti attho.Upanaddho bhikkhūti so janitaupanāho bhikkhu.
242. In the sixth training rule, "ācāraṃ ācarati" (behaves unacceptably) means he commits an offense against the enactment. "Upanandhī" means generating ill-will, binding his anger to that person; that is, repeatedly arousing hatred. "Upanaddho bhikkhū" means the bhikkhu who has generated ill-will.
243.Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyyāti abhiharitvā ‘‘handa bhikkhu khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti evaṃ pavāreyya. Padabhājane pana ‘‘handa bhikkhū’’tiādiṃ anuddharitvā sādhāraṇameva abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇāya atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ icchasi tāvatakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vuttaṃ.Jānanti pavāritabhāvaṃ jānanto. Taṃ panassa jānanaṃ yasmā tīhākārehi hoti, tasmā ‘‘jānāti nāma sāmaṃ vā jānātī’’tiādinā nayena padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ.Āsādanāpekkhoti āsādanaṃ codanaṃ maṅkukaraṇabhāvaṃ apekkhamāno.
243. "Abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreyyā" means inviting after bringing [food], saying, "Here, bhikkhu, eat or consume." However, in the word-by-word analysis, without extracting "handa bhikkhū" (here, bhikkhus), etc., only the general meaning is given to show the purpose of inviting by bringing [food], it is said, "Take as much as you like." "Jāna" means knowing that he has been invited. Since that knowing of his occurs in three ways, therefore, in the word-by-word analysis, the method is stated beginning with "jānāti nāma sāmaṃ vā jānātī" (he knows, either he knows himself), etc. "Āsādanāpekkho" means expecting offense, accusation, or disrespectful behavior.
Paṭiggaṇhātiāpatti dukkaṭassāti yassa abhihaṭaṃ tasmiṃ paṭiggaṇhante abhihārakassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ. Itarassa pana sabbo āpattibhedo paṭhamasikkhāpade vutto, imasmiṃ pana sikkhāpade sabbā āpattiyo abhihārakasseva veditabbā. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayattā pākaṭameva.
"Paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassā" (if he accepts, there is an offense of wrong-doing) means that when someone accepts what has been brought, the bhikkhu who brought it incurs a duukkaṭa offense. However, for the other bhikkhu, all the types of offenses have been stated in the first training rule; but in this training rule, all the offenses should be understood as applying only to the bhikkhu who brings the food. The rest is clear because the method has been stated in the first training rule.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
It arises from three sources: from body-mind, from speech-mind, and from body-speech-mind; it is an action (kiriya), accompanied by intention, with consciousness, a worldy offense (lokavajja), a bodily action (kāyakamma), a verbal action (vacīkamma), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacitta), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanā).
Dutiyapavāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Second Pavāraṇā Training Rule, the Sixth.
7. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Eating at the Wrong Time
247.Sattamasikkhāpade –giraggasamajjoti girimhi aggasamajjo, girissa vā aggadese samajjo. So kira sattame divase bhavissatīti nagare ghosanā kariyati, nagarassa bahiddhā same bhūmibhāge pabbatacchāyāya mahājanakāyo sannipatati, anekappakārāni naṭanāṭakāni pavattanti, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ mañcātimañce bandhanti. Sattarasavaggiyā apaññatte sikkhāpade daharāva upasampannā, te ‘‘nāṭakāni āvuso passissāmā’’ti tattha agamaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ ñātakā ‘‘amhākaṃ ayyā āgatā’’ti tuṭṭhacittā nhāpetvā vilimpetvā bhojetvā aññampi pūvakhādanīyādiṃ hatthe adaṃsu. Te sandhāya vuttaṃ –‘‘manussā sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū passitvā’’tiādi.
247. In the seventh training rule, "giraggasamajjo" means a gathering at the top of a mountain, or a gathering at the summit of a mountain. It is said that an announcement was made in the city that it would happen on the seventh day, and a large crowd gathered outside the city on a level ground in the shadow of the mountain, and various kinds of dances and plays took place, and stages were built upon stages for the purpose of seeing them. The group-of-seventeen, ordained as young men before the training rule was laid down, went there thinking, "Friends, we will watch the plays." Then their relatives, delighted, thinking, "Our venerable ones have come," bathed them, anointed them, fed them, and gave them other cakes and edibles in their hands. Referring to that, it is said – "manussā sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū passitvā" (people, seeing the group-of-seventeen bhikkhus), etc.
248-9.Vikāleti vigate kāle. Kāloti bhikkhūnaṃ bhojanakālo adhippeto, so ca sabbantimena paricchedena majjhanhiko, tasmiṃ vītivatteti adhippāyo. Tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘vikālo nāma majjhanhike vītivatte yāva aruṇuggamanā’’ti vuttaṃ, ṭhitamajjhanhikopi kālasaṅgahaṃ gacchati. Tato paṭṭhāya pana khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā na sakkā, sahasā pivituṃ sakkā bhaveyya, kukkuccakena pana na kattabbaṃ. Kālaparicchedajānanatthañca kālatthambho yojetabbo, kālantareva bhattakiccaṃ kātabbaṃ.
248-9. "Vikāle" means at the wrong time, after the time has passed. Here, 'time' is intended to mean the time for bhikkhus to eat, and that is, by the final limit, midday; the intention is that it has passed that. Therefore, in the word-by-word analysis, it is said, "vikālo nāma majjhanhike vītivatte yāva aruṇuggamanā" (wrong time is after midday has passed until the rising of the dawn), even the established midday is included in the term 'time.' But after that, it is not possible to eat or consume, it might be possible to drink quickly, but it should not be done with doubt (kukkucca). And to know the limit of time, a time marker (kālatthambho) should be set up, and the meal duty should be done at the correct time.
Avasesaṃkhādanīyaṃ nāmāti ettha yaṃ tāva sakkhalimodakādipubbaṇṇāparaṇṇamayaṃ, tattha vattabbameva natthi. Yampi vanamūlādippabhedaṃ āmisagatikaṃ hoti, seyyathidaṃ – mūlakhādanīyaṃ kandakhādanīyaṃ mūḷālakhādanīyaṃ matthakakhādanīyaṃ khandhakhādanīyaṃ tacakhādanīyaṃ pattakhādanīyaṃ pupphakhādanīyaṃ phalakhādanīyaṃ aṭṭhikhādanīyaṃ piṭṭhakhādanīyaṃ niyyāsakhādanīyanti, idampi khādanīyasaṅkhyameva gacchati.
"Avasesaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāmā" (the remainder is called "edible") – here, there is no need to speak about what is made of flour, such as sakkhalimodaka, etc. Even that which is of the nature of meat (āmisagatikaṃ) from forest roots, etc., that is, root edibles, stem edibles, sprout edibles, bud edibles, trunk edibles, bark edibles, leaf edibles, flower edibles, fruit edibles, kernel edibles, flour edibles, and sap edibles, this too goes into the category of "edible".
Tattha pana āmisagatikasallakkhaṇatthaṃ idaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ – mūlakhādanīye tāva mūlakamūlaṃ khārakamūlaṃ caccumūlaṃ tambakamūlaṃ taṇḍuleyyakamūlaṃ vatthuleyyakamūlaṃ vajakalimūlaṃ jajjharīmūlanti evamādīni sūpeyyapaṇṇamūlāni āmisagatikāni. Ettha ca vajakalimūle jaraṭṭhaṃ chinditvā chaḍḍenti, taṃ yāvajīvikaṃ hoti. Aññampi evarūpaṃ eteneva nayena veditabbaṃ. Mūlakakhārakajajjharīmūlānaṃ pana jaraṭṭhānipi āmisagatikānevāti vuttaṃ. Yāni pana pāḷiyaṃ –
Here, for understanding the characteristic of what is of the nature of meat, this brief example is given: among root edibles, mūlaka roots, khāraka roots, caccu roots, tambaka roots, taṇḍuleyyaka roots, vatthuleyyaka roots, vajakali roots, jajjharī roots, and so forth, roots that are suitable for soup and leaves, are of the nature of meat. And here, in the vajakali root, they cut off and discard the old part, that is permissible for life. Other things of this kind should be understood in the same way. It is said that even the old parts of mūlaka, khāraka, and jajjharī roots are of the nature of meat. But those that are in the Pāḷi –
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mūlāni bhesajjāni haliddiṃ siṅgiveraṃ vacaṃ vacattaṃ ativisaṃ kaṭukarohiṇiṃ usīraṃ bhaddamuttakaṃ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūlāni bhesajjāni neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṃ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharantī’’ti (mahāva. 263) –
"I allow, monks, roots as medicines: turmeric, ginger, vaca, vacatta, ativisa, kaṭukarohiṇī, usīra, bhaddamuttaka, or whatever other roots there are as medicines, which neither serve as edibles for the purpose of eating, nor serve as foods for the purpose of consuming" (Mahāva. 263) –
Vuttāni, tāni yāvajīvikāni. Tesaṃ cūḷapañcamūlaṃ mahāpañcamūlantiādinā nayena gaṇiyamānānaṃ gaṇanāya anto natthi. Khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇābhāvoyeva pana tesaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā yaṃkiñci mūlaṃ tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharati, taṃ yāvakālikaṃ; itaraṃ yāvajīvikanti veditabbaṃ. Tesu bahuṃ vatvāpi hi imasmiṃyeva lakkhaṇe ṭhātabbaṃ. Nāmasaññāsu pana vuccamānāsu taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ ajānantānaṃ sammohoyeva hoti, tasmā nāmasaññāya ādaraṃ akatvā lakkhaṇameva dassitaṃ.
are permissible for life. There is no end to the counting of those which are counted in the manner of the small five roots, the great five roots, etc. But the characteristic of these is precisely the lack of serving as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming. Therefore, whatever root in those various regions serves as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, that is permissible until the next day; the other is permissible for life, it should be understood. For even after saying much about them, one must remain within this characteristic itself. But in spoken common names, there is confusion for those who do not know those names, therefore, not giving importance to common names, only the characteristic has been shown.
Yathā ca mūle; evaṃ kandādīsupi yaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ, tasseva vasena vinicchayo veditabbo. Yañca taṃ pāḷiyaṃ haliddādi aṭṭhavidhaṃ vuttaṃ, tassa khandhatacapupphaphalampi sabbaṃ yāvajīvikanti vuttaṃ.
Just as with roots, so too with stems, etc., the decision should be made based on the characteristic that has been shown. And that which is stated in the Pāḷi as eight kinds beginning with turmeric, all of its trunk, bark, flower, and fruit are permissible for life, it is said.
Kandakhādanīye duvidho kando – dīgho ca rasso ca bhisakiṃsukakandādi vaṭṭo uppalakaserukakandādi, yaṃ ‘‘gaṇṭhī’’tipi vadanti. Tattha sabbesaṃ kandānaṃ jiṇṇajaraṭṭhānañca challi ca sukhumamūlāni ca yāvajīvikāni. Taruṇo pana sukhakhādanīyo, sālakalyāṇīpotakakando kiṃsukapotakakando ambāṭakakando ketakakando māluvakando bhisasaṅkhāto padumapuṇḍarīkakando piṇḍālumasāluādayo ca khīravallikando āluvakando siggukando tālakando nīluppalarattuppalakumudasogandhikānaṃ kandā kadalikando veḷukando kaserukakandoti evamādayo tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthañca bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakakandā yāvakālikā.
In stem edibles, there are two kinds of stems: long and short. Stems such as bhisakiṃsuka, etc., are round; stems such as uppalakaseruka, etc., are what they also call "knots." Of these, the old and aged parts of all stems, and the bark and fine roots are permissible for life. But the young, easily edible stems, such as the sālakalyāṇīpotaka stem, the kiṃsukapotaka stem, the ambāṭaka stem, the ketaka stem, the māluvaka stem, the stem known as bhisa (lotus), the padumapuṇḍarīka stem, and also piṇḍālumasāluādi stems, khīravallikando, āluvakando, siggukando, tālakando, the stems of blue lotus, red lotus, kumuda, and sogandhika, the banana stem, the bamboo stem, the kaseruka stem, and so forth, stems that serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food in those various regions, are permissible until the next day.
Khīravallikando adhoto yāvajīviko, dhoto yāvakāliko. Khīrakākolījīvikausabhakalasuṇādikandā pana yāvajīvikā. Te pāḷiyaṃ – ‘‘yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūlāni bhesajjānī’’ti evaṃ mūlabhesajjasaṅgaheneva saṅgahitā.
Khīravallikando that is unwashed is permissible for life, that which is washed is permissible until the next day. Khīrakākolījīvikausabhakalasuṇādi stems, however, are permissible for life. These, in the Pāḷi, are included by way of inclusion with roots as medicine, as in, "yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūlāni bhesajjāni" (whatever other roots there are as medicines).
Mūḷālakhādanīye pana padumamūḷālaṃ puṇḍarīkamuḷālasadisameva. Erakamūlaṃ kandulamūlanti evamādi tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthañca bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakamuḷālaṃ yāvakālikaṃ. Haliddisiṅgiveramakacicaturassavalliketakatālahintālakuntālanāḷikerapūgarukkhādimuḷālaṃ pana yāvajīvikaṃ, taṃ sabbampi pāḷiyaṃ – ‘‘yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūlāni bhesajjānī’’ti (mahāva. 263) evaṃ mūlabhesajjasaṅgaheneva saṅgahitaṃ.
In sprout edibles, the lotus sprout is just like the white lotus sprout. Sprouts such as erakamūla and kandulamūla, which in various regions serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as food for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, are permissible until the next day. But the sprouts of turmeric, ginger, amakaci, four-cornered creeper, ketaka, palmyra palm, hintāla, kuntāla, coconut, and areca palm are permissible for life, all of that is included in the Pāḷi by way of inclusion with roots as medicine, as in, "yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūlāni bhesajjāni" (Mahāva. 263).
Matthakakhādanīye tālahintālakuntālaketakanāḷikerapūgarukkhakhajjūrīvettaerakakadalīnaṃ kaḷīrasaṅkhātā matthakā veṇukaḷīro naḷakaḷīro ucchukaḷīro mūlakakaḷīro sāsapakaḷīro satāvarikaḷīro sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ kaḷīrāti evamādi tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇako rukkhavalliādīnaṃ matthako yāvakāliko. Haliddisiṅgiveravacamakacilasuṇānaṃkaḷīrā tālahintālakuntālanāḷikerakaḷīrānañca chinditvā pātito jaraṭṭhabundo yāvajīviko.
In bud edibles, the buds of palmyra palm, hintāla, kuntāla, ketaka, coconut, areca palm, date palm, rattan, eraka, banana, the buds known as kaḷīra, bamboo shoots, reed shoots, sugarcane shoots, radish shoots, mustard shoots, satāvari shoots, and the shoots of the seven grains, which in various regions serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, the buds of trees and creepers are permissible until the next day. The buds of turmeric, ginger, vaca, makaci, suna, and the old stump cut off from palmyra palm, hintāla, kuntāla, and coconut are permissible for life.
Khandhakhādanīye antopathavīgato sālakalyāṇīkhandho ucchukhandho nīluppalarattuppalakumudasogandhikānaṃ khandhakāti evamādi tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇako khandho yāvakāliko. Uppalajātīnaṃ paṇṇadaṇḍako padumajātīnaṃ sabbopi daṇḍako kāravindakadaṇḍādayo ca avasesasabbakhandhā yāvajīvikā.
In trunk edibles, the inner pith of the sālakalyāṇī trunk that is free from disease, sugarcane trunks, trunks of blue lotus, red lotus, kumuda, and sogandhika, which in various regions serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, the trunk is permissible until the next day. The leaf stalks of lotus species, all stalks of the lotus family, and kāravindakadaṇḍādi and all remaining trunks are permissible for life.
Tacakhādanīye ucchutacova eko yāvakāliko, sopi saraso. Seso sabbo yāvajīviko. Tesaṃ pana matthakakhandhatacānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pāḷiyaṃ kasāvabhesajjena saṅgaho veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
In bark edibles, only sugarcane bark is permissible until the next day, and that too if it is juicy. All the rest is permissible for life. Of these, the three – buds, trunks, and bark – should be understood as included with astringent medicine in the Pāḷi. For it was said:
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kasāvāni bhesajjāni nimbakasāvaṃ, kuṭajakasāvaṃ, paṭolakasāvaṃ, phaggavakasāvaṃ nattamālakasāvaṃ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi kasāvāni bhesajjāni neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṃ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharantī’’ti (mahāva. 263).
"I allow, monks, astringent medicines: nimba astringent, kuṭaja astringent, paṭola astringent, phaggava astringent, nattamālaka astringent, or whatever other astringent medicines there are which neither serve as edibles for the purpose of eating, nor serve as foods for the purpose of consuming" (Mahāva. 263).
Ettha hi etesampi saṅgaho sijjhati. Vuttakasāvāni ca sabbāni kappiyānīti veditabbāni.
Here, the inclusion of these too is accomplished. And all the astringents that have been stated should be understood as allowable.
Pattakhādanīye mūlakaṃ khārako caccu tambako taṇḍuleyyako papunnāgo vatthuleyyako vajakali jajjharī sellu siggu kāsamaddako ummā cīnamuggo māso rājamāso ṭhapetvā mahānipphāvaṃ avasesanipphāvo aggimantho sunisannako setavaraṇo nāḷikā bhūmiyaṃ jātaloṇīti etesaṃ pattāni aññāni ca evarūpāni tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakāni pattāni ekaṃsena yāvakālikāni. Yā panaññā mahānakhapiṭṭhimattā paṇṇaloṇi rukkhe ca gacche ca ārohati, tassā pattaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ. Brahmīpattañca yāvakālikanti dīpavāsino vadanti. Ambapallavaṃ yāvakālikaṃ, asokapallavaṃ pana yāvajīvikaṃ.
In leaf edibles, mūlaka, khāraka, caccu, tambaka, taṇḍuleyyaka, papunṇāga, vatthuleyyaka, vajakali, jajjharī, sellu, siggu, kāsamaddaka, ummā, Chinese gram, māsa, kidney bean, leaving out the great broad bean, the remaining broad beans, aggimantha, sunisannaka, white varaṇa, nāḷikā, bhūmiyaṃ jātaloṇī, the leaves of these, and other such leaves that in various regions serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, those leaves are certainly permissible until the next day. But that other paṇṇaloṇi, which is the size of a large fingernail or the back of the hand, climbs on trees and shrubs, its leaf is permissible for life. The islanders say that brahmī leaves are permissible until the next day. Mango leaves are permissible until the next day, but asoka leaves are permissible for life.
Yāni vā panaññāni pāḷiyaṃ –
Whatever other [leaves] are in the Pāḷi –
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paṇṇāni bhesajjāni nimbapaṇṇaṃ kuṭajapaṇṇaṃ paṭolapaṇṇaṃ sulasipaṇṇaṃ kappāsakapaṇṇaṃ yāni vā panaññānipi atthi paṇṇāni bhesajjāni neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṃ pharanti na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharantī’’ti (mahāva. 263) –
"I allow, monks, leaves as medicines: nimba leaves, kuṭaja leaves, paṭola leaves, sulasī leaves, cotton leaves, or whatever other leaves there are as medicines which neither serve as edibles for the purpose of eating, nor serve as foods for the purpose of consuming" (Mahāva. 263) –
Vuttāni, tāni yāvajīvikāni. Na kevalañca paṇṇāniyeva tesaṃ pupphaphalādīnipi yāvajīvikāni. Paṇṇānaṃ phaggavapaṇṇaṃ ajjukapaṇṇaṃ phaṇijjakapaṇṇaṃ paṭolapaṇṇaṃ tambūlapaṇṇaṃ paduminipaṇṇanti evaṃ gaṇanavasena anto natthi.
that have been stated, those are permissible for life. Not only the leaves, but also their flowers, fruits, etc., are permissible for life. There is no end to the counting of leaves in terms of phaggava leaves, ajjuka leaves, phaṇijjaka leaves, paṭola leaves, tambūla leaves, paduminī leaves, and so forth.
Pupphakhādanīye mūlakapupphaṃ khārakapupphaṃ caccupupphaṃ tambakapupphaṃ vajakalipupphaṃ jajjharīpupphaṃ cūḷanipphāvapupphaṃ mahānipphāvapupphaṃ kaserukapupphaṃ nāḷikeratālaketakānaṃ taruṇapupphāni setavaraṇapupphaṃ siggupupphaṃ uppalapadumajātikānaṃ pupphāni kaṇṇikamattaṃ agandhikapupphaṃ kaḷīrapupphaṃ jīvantīpupphanti evamādi tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakapupphaṃ yāvakālikaṃ. Asokabakulakuyyakapunnāgacampakajātikaṇavīrakaṇikārakundanavamālikamallikādīnaṃ pana pupphaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ tassa gaṇanāya anto natthi. Pāḷiyaṃ panassa kasāvabhesajjeneva saṅgaho veditabbo.
In flower edibles, mūlaka flowers, khāraka flowers, caccu flowers, tambaka flowers, vajakali flowers, jajjharī flowers, small broad bean flowers, large broad bean flowers, kaseruka flowers, the young flowers of coconut and palmyra palm, ketaka flowers, white varaṇa flowers, siggu flowers, the flowers of lotus species, fragrant flowers of the size of an earring, kaḷīra flowers, jīvantī flowers, which in various regions serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, those flowers are permissible until the next day. But the flowers of asoka, bakula, kuyyaka, punnāga, campaka, jasmine, oleander, kaṇikāra, kundana, newly opened jasmine, mallikā, etc., are permissible for life; there is no end to their counting. But in the Pāḷi, they should be understood as included with astringent medicine.
Phalakhādanīye panasalabujatālanāḷikeraambajambūambāṭakatintiṇikamātuluṅgakapitthalābukumbhaṇḍapussaphalatimbarūsakatipusavātiṅgaṇacocamocamadhukādīnaṃ phalāni yāni loke tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharanti, sabbāni tāni yāvakālikāni. Nāmagaṇanavasena nesaṃ na sakkā pariyantaṃ dassetuṃ. Yāni pana pāḷiyaṃ –
In fruit edibles, the fruits of jackfruit, breadfruit, palmyra palm, coconut, mango, jambū, ambāṭaka, tintiṇika, citron, wood apple, ash gourd, pussaphala, timbūsa, katipusa, eggplant, coca, moca, madhuka, etc., whatever fruits in the world in various regions serve as edibles for the purpose of eating and as foods for the purpose of consuming for people by nature as food, all those are permissible until the next day. It is not possible to show the end to them in terms of counting names. But those which are in the Pāḷi –
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, phalāni bhesajjāni – bilaṅgaṃ, pipphaliṃ, maricaṃ, harītakaṃ, vibhītakaṃ, āmalakaṃ, goṭṭhaphalaṃ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi phalāni bhesajjāni neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṃ pharanti na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharantī’’ti (mahāva. 263) –
"I allow, monks, fruits as medicines: bilaṅga, long pepper, black pepper, myrobalan, vibhītaka, emblic myrobalan, goṭṭhaphala, or whatever other fruits there are as medicines which neither serve as edibles for the purpose of eating, nor serve as foods for the purpose of consuming" (Mahāva. 263) –
Vuttāni, tāni yāvajīvikāni. Tesampi aparipakkāni acchiva bimbavaraṇaketakakāsmarīādīnaṃ phalāni jātiphalaṃ kaṭukaphalaṃ eḷā takkolanti evaṃ nāmavasena na sakkā pariyantaṃ dassetuṃ.
Those mentioned are life-long. Even among these, the unripe fruits such as acchiva, bimba, varaṇa, ketaka, kāśmarī, etc., and fruits like jātiphala, kaṭukaphala, eḷā, takkola, and so on, cannot be fully enumerated by name.
Aṭṭhikhādanīye labujaṭṭhi panasaṭṭhi ambāṭakaṭṭhi sālaṭṭhi khajjūrīketakatimbarūsakānaṃ taruṇaphalaṭṭhi tintiṇikaṭṭhi bimbaphalaṭṭhi uppala padumajātīnaṃ pokkharaṭṭhīti evamādīni tesu tesu janapadesu manussānaṃ pakatiāhāravasena khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakāni aṭṭhīni yāvakālikāni. Madhukaṭṭhi punnāgaṭṭhi harītakādīnaṃ aṭṭhīni siddhatthakaṭṭhi rājikaṭṭhīti evamādīni aṭṭhīni yāvajīvikāni. Tesaṃ pāḷiyaṃ phalabhesajjeneva saṅgaho veditabbo.
Among edible seeds, seeds of labuja, mango (panasa), ambāṭaka, sāla, dates (khajjūrī), ketaka, timbarūsa young seeds, tamarind seeds (tintiṇikaṭṭhi), bimba fruit seeds, lotus seed head (uppala, paduma types), and so on, which are naturally consumed by people in various regions for eating and nourishment, these seeds are for a limited time only (yāvakālika). Seeds of madhuka, punnāga, harītakī, mustard seeds (siddhatthakaṭṭhi), rājikaṭṭhi, and so on, are life-long (yāvajīvika). In the Pali texts, their inclusion should be understood with medicinal fruits.
Piṭṭhakhādanīye sattannaṃ tāva dhaññānaṃ dhaññānulomānaṃ aparaṇṇānañca piṭṭhaṃ panasapiṭṭhaṃ labujapiṭṭhaṃ ambāṭakapiṭṭhaṃ sālapiṭṭhaṃ dhotakatālapiṭṭhañca khīravallipiṭṭhañcāti evamādīni tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthaṃ bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakāni piṭṭhāni yāvakālikāni. Adhotakaṃ tālapiṭṭhaṃ khīravallipiṭṭhaṃ assagandhādipiṭṭhāni ca yāvajīvikāni. Tesaṃ pāḷiyaṃ kasāvehi ca mūlaphalehi ca saṅghaho veditabbo.
Among flour-based edibles, flour from the seven grains, similar grains, and other grains, as well as panasa flour, labuja flour, ambāṭaka flour, sāla flour, flour from unwashed palm (dhotakatāla), and khīravallī flour, etc., which are naturally consumed by people in various regions for eating and nourishment, these flours are for a limited time only (yāvakālika). Unwashed palm flour (adhotakaṃ tālapiṭṭhaṃ), khīravallī flour and assagandhādi flour are life-long (yāvajīvika). In the Pali texts, their inclusion should be understood with astringents, roots, and fruits.
Niyyāsakhādanīye eko ucchuniyyāsova sattāhakāliko. Sesā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, jatūni bhesajjāni – hiṅguṃ hiṅgujatuṃ hiṅgusipāṭikaṃ takaṃ takapattiṃ takapaṇṇiṃ sajjulasaṃ yāni vā panaññānipi atthi jatūni bhesajjānī’’ti (mahāva. 263) evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttaniyyāsā yāvajīvikā. Tattha yevāpanakavasena saṅgahitānaṃ ambaniyyāso kaṇikāraniyyāsoti evaṃ nāmavasena na sakkā pariyantaṃ dassetuṃ. Evaṃ imesu mūlakhādanīyādīsu yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ, sabbampi imasmiṃ atthe ‘‘avasesaṃ khādanīyaṃ nāmā’’ti saṅgahitaṃ.
Among resin-based edibles, only sugarcane molasses (ucchuniyyāsa) is allowable for seven days. The remaining resins mentioned in the Pali passage, "I allow, monks, medicinal resins – hiṅgu, hiṅgujatu, hiṅgusipāṭika, taka, takapatti, takapaṇṇi, sajjulasa, or any other medicinal resins that exist," (mahāva. 263) are life-long (yāvajīvika). The various types included based on the yevāpana method, such as mango resin and kaṇikāra resin, cannot be fully enumerated by name. Thus, anything among these root-based edibles and so on that is for a limited time is included in this meaning as "the remaining edibles."
Bhojanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanānītiādimhi yaṃ vattabbaṃ taṃ vuttameva.Khādissāmi bhuñjissāmīti, paṭiggaṇhātīti yo bhikkhu vikāle etaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyañca paṭiggaṇhāti, tassa paṭiggahaṇe tāva āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sesamettha uttānameva.
"Bhojanīyaṃ nāma pañca bhojanānī" (Bhojanīya means the five foods) – what needs to be said in that regard has already been said. "Khādissāmi bhuñjissāmīti, paṭiggaṇhāti" (Thinking "I will eat" or "I will consume", he accepts it) – if a bhikkhu accepts such edibles and foods at the wrong time (vikāla), upon accepting, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. The rest is as explained above.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato ca kāyacittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ (arising of elakaloma) – It arises from the body and from the mind-and-body, it is an inactive action (kiriyaṃ), not associated with perception or release (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), non-volitional (acittakaṃ), an offense by designation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), tri-citta (ticittaṃ), and tri-vedana (tivedanaṃ).
Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ. (The seventh precept on taking food at the wrong time.)
8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Precept Against Storing Up)
252.Aṭṭhamasikkhāpade –belaṭṭhasīsonāma jaṭilasahassabbhantaro mahāthero.Araññe viharatīti jetavanassa avidūre padhānaghare ekasmiṃ āvāse vasati.Sukkhakuranti asūpabyañjanaṃ odanaṃ. So kira antogāme bhuñjitvā pacchā piṇḍāya caritvā tādisaṃ odanaṃ āharati, tañca kho appicchatāya, na paccayagiddhatāya. Thero kira sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā vītināmetvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ udakena temetvā bhuñjati, tato puna sattāhaṃ samāpattiyā nisīdati. Evaṃ dvepi tīṇipi cattāripi sattāhāni vītināmetvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘cirena gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisatī’’ti.
252. In the eighth precept – Belaṭṭhasīso was a great elder among thousands of ascetics. Araññe viharatī (he was dwelling in a forest) means he was residing in a meditation chamber (padhānaghara) in a monastery not far from Jetavana. Sukkhakura (dry rice) means rice with curry. It is said that after eating in the village, he would go for alms and bring back such rice, and this was due to his lack of desire, not out of greed for provisions. It is said that the Elder would spend seven days in cessation (nirodhasamāpatti), and after arising from that attainment, he would moisten that alms food with water and eat it, and then sit again for seven days in attainment. In this way, he would spend two, three, or four weeks and then enter the village for alms. Therefore, it is said – ‘‘cirena gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisatī’’ (he enters the village for alms after a long time).
253.Kāro karaṇaṃ kiriyāti atthato ekaṃ, sannidhikāro assāti sannidhikāraṃ; sannidhikāramevasannidhikārakaṃ. Paṭiggahetvā ekarattaṃ vītināmitassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenevassa padabhājane vuttaṃ – ‘‘sannidhikārakaṃ nāma ajja paṭiggahitaṃ aparajjū’’ti.
253. Kāro (storing), karaṇaṃ (the act of storing), kiriyā (the action) are the same in meaning; sannidhikāro assāti sannidhikāraṃ (he has the act of storing, therefore he is one who stores); sannidhikāramevasannidhikārakaṃ** (the very act of storing is what constitutes a storer). This is a designation for one who has let a night pass after receiving something. Therefore, its explanation of terms states – "Sannidhikārakaṃ nāma ajja paṭiggahitaṃ aparajjū" (Storing means something received today is kept for tomorrow).
Paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ sannidhikataṃ yaṃkiñci yāvakālikaṃ vā yāmakālikaṃ vā ajjhoharitukāmatāya gaṇhantassa paṭiggahaṇe tāva āpatti dukkaṭassa. Ajjhoharato pana ekamekasmiṃ ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ. Sacepi patto duddhoto hoti, yaṃ aṅguliyā ghaṃsantassa lekhā paññāyati, gaṇṭhikapattassa vā gaṇṭhikantare sneho paviṭṭho hoti, so uṇhe otāpentassa paggharati, uṇhayāguyā vā gahitāya sandissati, tādise pattepi punadivase bhuñjantassa pācittiyaṃ. Tasmā pattaṃ dhovitvā puna tattha acchodakaṃ vā āsiñcitvā aṅguliyā vā ghaṃsitvā nisnehabhāvo jānitabbo. Sace hi udake vā snehabhāvo patte vā aṅgulilekhā paññāyati, duddhoto hoti. Telavaṇṇapatte pana aṅgulilekhā paññāyati, sā abbohārikā. Yaṃ bhikkhū nirapekkhā sāmaṇerānaṃ pariccajanti, tañce sāmaṇerā nidahitvā denti, sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Sayaṃ paṭiggahetvā apariccattameva hi dutiyadivase na vaṭṭati. Tato hi ekasitthampi ajjhoharato pācittiyameva.
Paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassā (In accepting, there is an offense of dukkaṭa) means that in accepting whatever has been stored, whether for a limited time or for a measured time, with the intention of consuming it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa upon accepting. But in consuming, there is a pācittiya for each mouthful. Even if the bowl is poorly washed (duddhoto hoti), such that a line is visible when rubbed with a finger, or if grease has entered between the segments of a segmented bowl, and it drips out when heated, or it is apparent when hot rice gruel is taken, there is a pācittiya for eating from such a bowl on the following day. Therefore, the bowl should be washed, and then clear water should be poured into it or rubbed with a finger to ensure that there is no oiliness. If oiliness is apparent in the water or a line is visible in the bowl when rubbed with a finger, it is poorly washed. But if a line is visible in a bowl stained with oil, it is not relevant. If bhikkhus give away something to sāmaṇeras without attachment, and the sāmaṇeras store it and give it back, it is all allowable. What is not allowable is receiving something oneself and not giving it away, and then consuming it on the second day. For from even one grain being consumed, it is a pācittiya.
Akappiyamaṃsesu manussamaṃse thullaccayena sadviṃ pācittiyaṃ, avasesesu dukkaṭena saddhiṃ. Yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye ajjhoharato pācittiyaṃ. Āhāratthāya ajjhoharato dukkaṭena saddhiṃ pācittiyaṃ. Sace pavārito hutvā anatirittakataṃ ajjhoharati, pakatiāmise dve pācittiyāni, manussamaṃse thullaccayena saddhiṃ dve, sesaakappiyamaṃse dukkaṭena saddhiṃ, yāmakālikaṃ sati paccaye sāmisena mukhena ajjhoharato dve, nirāmisena ekameva. Āhāratthāya ajjhoharato vikappadvayepi dukkaṭaṃ vaḍḍhati. Sace vikāle ajjhoharati, pakatibhojane sannidhipaccayā ca vikālabhojanapaccayā ca dve pācittiyāni, akappiyamaṃsesu thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca vaḍḍhati. Yāmakālikesu vikālapaccayā anāpatti, anatirittapaccayā pana vikāle sabbavikappesu anāpatti.
Among disallowed meats, eating human meat involves a pācittiya along with a gross offense (thullaccaya), and the remaining disallowed meats involve a dukkaṭa. Eating something allowable for a measured time (yāmakālikaṃ) when there is a valid reason involves a pācittiya. Eating for the purpose of nourishment involves a pācittiya along with a dukkaṭa. If, after being invited, one eats something not made allowable, for natural meat, there are two pācittiyas; for human meat, there are two along with a gross offense; for the remaining disallowed meats, there is a dukkaṭa; for something allowable for a measured time, if one eats it with a mouth tainted with meat, there are two, but if untainted, only one. Eating for the purpose of nourishment increases the dukkaṭa in both cases. If one eats at the wrong time (vikāla), for natural food, there are two pācittiyas due to the storing and due to eating at the wrong time; for disallowed meats, a gross offense and a dukkaṭa are increased. For things allowable for a measured time, there is no offense due to the wrong time, but due to not making allowable, there is no offense in all cases at the wrong time.
255.Sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāyāti āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhato paṭiggahaṇapaccayā tāva dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhoharato pana sace nirāmisaṃ hoti, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre dukkaṭaṃ. Atha āmisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitaṃ hoti, yathāvatthukaṃ pācittiyameva.
255. Sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāyā (Accepting something allowable for a week or for life for the purpose of nourishment) means that upon accepting for the purpose of nourishment, there is a dukkaṭa due to the act of accepting, and upon consuming, if it is untainted by meat, there is a dukkaṭa for each mouthful. But if what is accepted and kept is mixed with meat, there is a pācittiya as appropriate.
256.Anāpatti yāvakālikantiādimhi vikālabhojanasikkhāpade niddiṭṭhaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ yāva majjhantikasaṅkhāto kālo, tāva bhuñjitabbatoyāvakālikaṃ. Saddhiṃ anulomapānehi aṭṭhavidhaṃ pānaṃ yāva rattiyā pacchimayāmasaṅkhāto yāmo, tāva paribhuñjitabbato yāmo kālo assātiyāmakālikaṃ. Sappiādi pañcavidhaṃ bhesajjaṃ sattāhaṃ nidhetabbato sattāho kālo assātisattāhakālikaṃ. Ṭhapetvā udakaṃ avasesaṃ sabbampi yāvajīvaṃ pariharitvā sati paccaye paribhuñjitabbatoyāvajīvakanti vuccati.
256. Anāpatti yāvakālika (There is no offense for that which is allowable until the permitted time) means that the edibles and foods specified in the precept against eating at the wrong time are yāvakālikaṃ (allowable until the permitted time), as they are to be consumed until the time known as midday. The eight kinds of drinks, along with similar drinks, are yāmakālikaṃ (allowable for a measured time), as yāma (a period) is the time until the last watch of the night when they can be consumed. The five kinds of medicine, such as ghee, are sattāhakālikaṃ (allowable for a week), as seven days is the time they can be stored. Except for water, everything else that is kept and consumed when there is a valid reason is called yāvajīvaka (allowable for life).
Tattha aruṇodayeva paṭiggahitaṃ yāvakālikaṃ satakkhattumpi nidahitvā yāvakālo nātikkamati tāva, yāmakālikaṃ ekaṃ ahorattaṃ, sattāhakālikaṃ sattarattaṃ, itaraṃ sati paccaye, yāvajīvampi paribhuñjantassa anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana imasmiṃ ṭhāne pānakathā kappiyānulomakathā ‘‘kappati nu kho yāvakālikena yāmakālika’’ntiādikathā ca kappiyabhūmikathā ca vitthāritā, taṃ mayaṃ āgataṭṭhāneyeva kathayissāma.
In this regard, there is no offense in consuming something allowable until the permitted time that is received at dawn, even if stored a hundred times, as long as the permitted time is not exceeded, something allowable for a measured time within one day and night, something allowable for a week within seven nights, and the other, even for life, when there is a valid reason. The rest is as explained above. However, in the commentaries, in this section, the discussion on drinks, the discussion on allowable similar items, the question of "is something allowable until the permitted time allowable with something allowable for a measured time?" and the discussion on allowable ground are elaborated. We will discuss that in the appropriate place when it comes up.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato ca kāyacittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ (arising of elakaloma) – It arises from the body and from the mind-and-body, it is an inactive action (kiriyaṃ), not associated with perception or release (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), non-volitional (acittakaṃ), an offense by designation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), tri-citta (ticittaṃ), and tri-vedana (tivedanaṃ).
Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
Sannidhikārakasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ. (The eighth precept on storing up.)
9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Precept Against Soliciting and Eating Choice Food)
257.Navamasikkhāpade –paṇītabhojanānīti uttamabhojanāni.Kassa sampannaṃ na manāpanti sampattiyuttaṃ kassa na piyaṃ.Sādunti surasaṃ.
257. In the ninth precept – paṇītabhojanānī (choice foods) means excellent foods. Kassa sampannaṃ na manāpa (Whose abundance is not pleasing?) means whose is not beloved when endowed with prosperity. Sādu (delicious) means flavorful.
259.Yo pana bhikkhu evarūpāni paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjeyyāti ettha suddhāni sappiādīni viññāpetvā bhuñjanto pācittiyaṃ nāpajjati, sekhiyesu sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, odanasaṃsaṭṭhāni pana viññāpetvā bhuñjanto pācittiyaṃ āpajjatīti veditabbo, ayaṃ kirettha adhippāyo. Teneva ca ‘‘paṇītānī’’ti avatvā ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti sutte vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paṇītānī’’ti hi vutte sappiādīnaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ hoti, ‘‘paṇītabhojanānī’’ti vutte pana paṇītasaṃsaṭṭhāni sattadhaññanibbattāni bhojanāni paṇītabhojanānīti ayamattho paññāyati.
259. Yo pana bhikkhu evarūpāni paṇītabhojanāni agilāno attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjeyyā (Whatever bhikkhu, being not ill, should solicit such choice foods for his own sake and eat them) – here, it should be understood that in soliciting pure items such as ghee and eating them, one does not incur a pācittiya, but incurs a dukkaṭa for soliciting soup and rice according to the Sekhiya rules; however, in soliciting items mixed with rice and eating them, one incurs a pācittiya. This is the intended meaning here. Therefore, the Sutta uses the term "paṇītabhojanānī" (choice foods) instead of "paṇītānī" (choice items). For if "paṇītānī" were used, it would only include items such as ghee, but by using "paṇītabhojanānī," it is understood that foods made from the seven grains mixed with choice items are choice foods.
viññāpeti payoge dukkaṭantiādīsu ayaṃ vinicchayo – ‘‘sappinā bhattaṃ dehi, sappiṃ ākiritvā dehi, sappimissakaṃ katvā dehi, sahasappinā dehi, sappiñca bhattañca dehī’’ti viññāpentassa viññattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Sappibhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte pana yasmā sālibhattaṃ viya sappibhattaṃ nāma natthi; tasmā sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭameva veditabbaṃ.
viññāpeti payoge dukkaṭa (in the act of soliciting, there is an offense of dukkaṭa) – in these and other similar cases, this is the judgment: if one solicits by saying, "Give rice with ghee," "Give it sprinkling ghee," "Make it mixed with ghee," "Give it together with ghee," or "Give ghee and rice," there is a dukkaṭa for the solicitation, a dukkaṭa for the acceptance, and a pācittiya for the consumption. However, if one says, "Give ghee-rice," since there is no such thing as ghee-rice like sāli rice, only a dukkaṭa for soliciting soup and rice should be understood.
Sace pana ‘‘sappinā bhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte bhattaṃ datvā ‘‘sappiṃ katvā bhuñjā’’ti navanītaṃ vā khīraṃ vā dadhiṃ vā deti, mūlaṃ vā pana deti, ‘‘iminā sappiṃ gahetvā bhuñjā’’ti yathāvatthukameva. ‘‘Gosappinā bhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte pana gosappinā vā detu, gosappimhi asati, purimanayeneva gonavanītādīni vā gāviṃyeva vā detu ‘‘ito sappinā bhuñjā’’ti yathāvatthukameva. Sace pana gosappinā yācito ajiyā sappiādīhi deti, visaṅketaṃ. Evañhi sati aññaṃ yācitena aññaṃ dinnaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā anāpatti. Esa nayo ajiyā sappinā dehīti ādīsupi.
If, however, when asked, "Give rice with ghee," rice is given and then butter, milk, or yogurt is given, or the raw material is given, saying, "Take ghee with this and eat," it is all as appropriate. But if, when asked, "Give rice with cow's ghee," cow's ghee is given, or if cow's ghee is not available, cow's butter, etc., is given in the same way, or even a cow is given, saying, "Eat with ghee from this," it is all as appropriate. If, however, when asked for cow's ghee, ghee etc. from a goat is given, it is deceptive. In this case, something other than what was asked for has been given, so there is no offense. This principle applies to cases of asking for ghee from a goat, etc., as well.
‘‘Kappiyasappinā dehī’’ti vutte akappiyasappinā deti, visaṅketameva. ‘‘Akappiyasappināti vutte akappiyasappinā deti, paṭiggahaṇepi paribhogepi dukkaṭameva. Akappiyasappimhi asati purimanayeneva akappiyanavanītādīni deti ‘‘sappiṃ katvā bhuñjā’’ti akappiyasappināva dinnaṃ hoti. ‘‘Akappiyasappinā’’ti vutte kappiyena deti, visaṅketaṃ. ‘‘Sappinā’’ti vutte sesesu navanītādīsu aññatarena deti, visaṅketameva. Esa nayo navanītena dehītiādīsupi. Yena yena hi viññatti hoti, tasmiṃ vā tassa mūle vā laddhe, taṃ taṃ laddhameva hoti.
If, when asked, "Give allowable ghee," unallowable ghee is given, it is deceptive. If, when asked, "Give unallowable ghee," unallowable ghee is given, there is a dukkaṭa for both acceptance and consumption. If unallowable ghee is not available, unallowable butter, etc., is given in the same way, saying, "Make ghee with this and eat," it is considered as having given unallowable ghee. If, when asked, "Give unallowable ghee," allowable ghee is given, it is deceptive. If, when asked, "Give ghee," one of the others, such as butter, is given, it is also deceptive. This principle applies to cases of asking for butter, etc., as well. For whatever is asked for, whether that or its raw material is obtained, that itself is considered obtained.
Sace pana aññaṃ pāḷiyā āgataṃ vā anāgataṃ vā denti, visaṅketaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ āgatanavanītādīni ṭhapetvā aññehi navanītādīhi viññāpentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Yathā ca ‘‘sappibhattaṃ dehī’’ti vutte sālibhattassa viya sappibhattassa abhāvā sūpodanaviññattidukkaṭameva hotīti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ navanītabhattaṃ dehītiādīsupi. Paṭipāṭiyā ekamekaṃ vitthāretvā vuccamānepi hi ayamevattho vattabbo siyā, so ca saṅkhepenapi sakkā ñātuṃ, kiṃ tattha vitthārena? Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘esa nayo navanītena dehītiādīsupī’’ti.
If, however, something else, whether mentioned or not mentioned in the Pali texts, is given, it is deceptive. Soliciting with butter etc. other than those mentioned in the Pali texts involves a dukkaṭa. Just as it was said that when asked "give ghee-rice," because there is no such thing as ghee-rice like sāli rice, it is only a dukkaṭa for soliciting soup and rice, so too with asking for butter-rice etc. Even if each item were expanded and explained in order, the meaning would have to be stated in the same way, and that can be understood even in brief, so what is the point of elaborating? Therefore, it was said, "This principle applies to cases of asking for butter, etc., as well."
Sace pana sabbehipi sappiādīhi ekaṭṭhāne vā nānāṭṭhāne vā viññāpetvā paṭiladdhaṃ ekabhājane ākiritvā ekarasaṃ katvā tato kusaggenāpi jivhagge binduṃ ṭhapetvā ajjhoharati, nava pācittiyāni āpajjati. Vuttampi cetaṃ parivāre –
If, however, after soliciting with all the ghee etc., in one place or in different places, and receiving them, one pours them into one container, makes them into a single flavor, and then puts a drop on the tip of the tongue with a blade of grass and consumes it, one incurs nine pācittiyas. This was also said in the Parivara –
‘‘Kāyikāni na vācasikāni,
‘‘Kāyikāni na vācasikāni,
Sabbāni nānāvatthukāni;
Apubbaṃ acarimaṃ āpajjeyya ekato,
Pañhāmesā kusalehi cintitā’’ti. (pari. 481);
261.Agilānogilānasaññīti ettha sace gilānasaññīpi hutvā bhesajjatthāya pañca bhesajjāni viññāpeti, mahānāmasikkhāpadena kāretabbo. Nava paṇītabhojanāni viññāpento pana iminā sikkhāpadena kāretabbo. Bhikkhunīnaṃ pana etāni pāṭidesanīyavatthūni honti, sūpodanaviññattiyaṃ ubhayesampi sekhapaṇṇattidukkaṭameva. Sesamettha uttānameva.
261. Agilānogilānasaññī (Not ill, thinking he is ill) – here, if even thinking he is ill, one solicits the five medicines for medicinal purposes, he should be dealt with according to the Mahānāma precept. But if soliciting the nine choice foods, he should be dealt with according to this precept. For bhikkhunis, however, these are matters for confession (pāṭidesanīya), and for soliciting soup and rice, there is only a Sekhiya-stipulated dukkaṭa for both. The rest is as explained above.
Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato kāyavācato kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti,
Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – arises from body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind,
Kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇativajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Is Kiriya, is not a perception of release (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), is acittaka, is an offense by way of designation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), is a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), is a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), is a three-arisen mind (ticittaṃ), has three feelings (tivedananti).
Paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The ninth, concerning refined food.
10. Dantaponasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Description of the Training Rule on Tooth-Cleaning Sticks
263.Dasamasikkhāpade – catūsu paccayesu antamaso dantakaṭṭhampi sabbaṃ paṃsukūlameva assātisabbapaṃsukūliko. So kira susāne chaḍḍitabhājanameva pattaṃ katvā tattha chaḍḍitacoḷakeheva cīvaraṃ katvā tattha chaḍḍitamañcapīṭhakāniyeva gahetvā paribhuñjati.Ayyavosāṭitakānīti etthaayyāvuccanti kālaṅkatā pitipitāmahā.Vosāṭitakānivuccanti tesaṃ atthāya susānādīsu chaḍḍitakāni khādanīyabhojanīyāni; manussā kira kālaṅkate ñātake uddissa yaṃ tesaṃ sajīvakāle piyaṃ hoti, taṃ etesu susānādīsu piṇḍaṃ piṇḍaṃ katvā ‘‘ñātakā no paribhuñjantūti ṭhapenti. So bhikkhu taṃ gahetvā bhuñjati, aññaṃ paṇītampi diyyamānaṃ na icchati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘susānepi rukkhamūlepi ummārepi ayyavosāṭitakāni sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjatī’’ti.Theroti thiro ghanabaddho.Vaṭharoti thūlo; thūlo ca ghanasarīro cāyaṃ bhikkhūti vuttaṃ hoti.Manussamaṃsaṃ maññe khādatīti manussamaṃsaṃ khādatīti naṃ sallakkhema; manussamaṃsaṃ khādantā hi īdisā bhavantīti ayaṃ tesaṃ adhippāyo.
263.In the tenth training rule – sabbapaṃsukūliko, because, at the very least, even a tooth-cleaning stick is considered entirely refuse-rag-like among the four requisites. It is said that he would use as his bowl only a discarded vessel in a cemetery, make his robes only from discarded rags there, and use only discarded couches and chairs found there. Ayyavosāṭitakānīti – here, ayyā refers to deceased paternal ancestors. Vosāṭitakāni refers to edible and consumable items discarded in cemeteries and other places for their sake; it seems people, remembering a deceased relative, would make lumps of whatever was dear to them when alive, placing them in cemeteries and other places, thinking, "May our relatives partake of this." That bhikkhu would take and eat that, not wanting other, even excellent, offerings. Therefore, it was said, "He himself takes and consumes ayyavosāṭitaka items in cemeteries, at the foot of trees, and at crossroads." Thero means stable and firmly established. Vaṭharo means stout; it is said this bhikkhu is stout and has a solid body. Manussamaṃsaṃ maññe khādatīti – we would consider him to be eating human flesh; for those who eat human flesh are like this, that was their intention.
264.Udakadantapone kukkuccāyantīti ettha te bhikkhū ‘‘adinnaṃ mukhadvāraṃ āhāraṃ āhareyyā’’ti padassa sammā atthaṃ asallakkhetvā kukkuccāyisuṃ, bhagavā pana yathāuppannassa vatthussa vasena pitā viya dārake te bhikkhū saññāpento anupaññattiṃ ṭhapesi.
264.Udakadantapone kukkuccāyantīti – Here, those bhikkhus, not properly considering the meaning of the rule "he should not bring food into the mouth-door that has not been given," felt remorse. The Blessed One, however, like a father to his children, made those bhikkhus understand based on the object as it arose, and established a further rule.
265.Adinnanti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā gaṇhantassa kāyakāyapaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ aññataravasena na dinnaṃ. Etadeva hi sandhāya padabhājane ‘‘adinnaṃ nāma appaṭiggahitakaṃ vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dutiyapārājike pana ‘‘adinnaṃ nāma parapariggahitakaṃ vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ.Dinnanti idaṃ pana tasseva adinnassa paṭipakkhavasena lakkhaṇadassanatthaṃ uddhaṭaṃ. Niddese cassa‘‘kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā dente’’ti evaṃ aññasmiṃ dadamāne‘‘hatthapāse ṭhito kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātīti taṃ evaṃ diyyamānaṃ antamaso rathareṇumpi sace pubbe vuttalakkhaṇe hatthapāse ṭhito kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhāti, etaṃ evaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ dinnaṃ nāma vuccati. Na ‘‘idaṃ gaṇha, idaṃ tava hotū’’tiādivacanena nissaṭṭhaṃ.
265.Adinnaṃ means not given in one of the ways that results in nissaggiya for body or what is connected to the body. With this in mind, in the word analysis, it is said, "Adinnaṃ means what has not been received." In the second pārājika, however, it is said, "Adinnaṃ means what is possessed by another." Dinnaṃ – this, however, is cited to show the characteristic by way of the opposite of that very adinnaṃ. And in the Niddesa, ‘‘kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā dente’’ti thus, while another is giving, ‘‘hatthapāse ṭhito kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhātīti thus, even if a particle of dust from a chariot wheel is being given in that way, if one standing within arm's reach, as described earlier, receives it with the body or what is connected to the body, this, received in this way, is called given. It is not given merely by uttering words such as "Take this, may this be yours."
kāyenāti hatthādīsu yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena; antamaso pādaṅguliyāpi diyyamānaṃ kāyena dinnaṃ nāma hoti, paṭiggahaṇepi eseva nayo. Yena kenaci hi sarīrāvayavena gahitaṃ kāyena gahitameva hoti. Sacepi natthukaraṇiyā diyyamānaṃ nāsāpuṭena akallako vā mukhena paṭiggaṇhāti. Ābhogamattameva hi ettha pamāṇanti ayaṃ nayo mahāpaccariyaṃ vutto.Kāyapaṭibaddhenāti kaṭacchuādīsu yena kenaci upakaraṇena dinnaṃ kāyapaṭibaddhena dinnaṃ nāma hoti. Paṭiggahaṇepi eseva nayo. Yena kenaci sarīrapaṭibaddhena pattathālakādinā gahitaṃ kāyapaṭibaddhena gahitameva hoti.Nissaggiyenāti kāyato ca kāyapaṭibaddhato ca mocetvā hatthapāse ṭhitassa kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā pātiyamānampi nissaggiyena payogena dinnaṃ nāma hoti. Ayaṃ tāva pāḷivaṇṇanā.
kāyenāti – with any part of the body whatsoever, such as the hand; even if given with a toe, it is called given with the body; the same method applies to receiving. For whatever is taken with any part of the body whatsoever is indeed taken with the body. Even if, when something is being given to clean the nostrils, an unworthy one receives it with the nostril or the mouth, the mere act of inclining is the measure here, this method is stated in the Mahāpaccariya. Kāyapaṭibaddhenāti – whatever is given with any instrument whatsoever, such as a ladle, is called given with what is connected to the body. The same method applies to receiving. For whatever is taken with anything connected to the body, such as a bowl or plate, is indeed taken with what is connected to the body. Nissaggiyenāti – even if one releases it from the body and what is connected to the body, and one standing within arm’s reach receives it with the body or what is connected to the body, it is called given by way of nissaggiya means. This, for now, is the Pāḷi commentary.
pāḷimuttakavinicchayo– pañcaṅgehi paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhati – thāmamajjhimassa purisassa uccāraṇamattaṃ hoti, hatthapāso paññāyati, abhihāro paññāyati, devo vā manusso vā tiracchānagato vā kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā nissaggiyena vā deti, taṃ ce bhikkhu kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggaṇhāti. Evaṃ pañcahaṅgehi paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhati.
pāḷimuttakavinicchayo – Receiving is valid with five factors: it is only the height of a man of moderate stature; the arm's reach is evident; the presentation is evident; a deva or a human or a being gone to the animal realm gives with the body or with what is connected to the body or by way of nissaggiya; and that bhikkhu receives it with the body or with what is connected to the body. Thus, receiving is valid with these five factors.
Tattha ṭhitanisinnanipannānaṃ pavāraṇasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva hatthapāso veditabbo. Sace pana dāyakapaṭiggāhakesu eko ākāse hoti, eko bhūmiyaṃ, bhūmaṭṭhassa ca sīsena ākāsaṭṭhassa ca ṭhapetvā dātuṃ vā gahetuṃ vā pasāritahatthaṃ, yaṃ āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa orimantena hatthapāsappamāṇaṃ paricchinditabbaṃ. Sacepi eko kūpe hoti, eko kūpataṭe, eko vā pana rukkhe, eko pathaviyaṃ, vuttanayeneva hatthapāsappamāṇaṃ paricchinditabbaṃ. Evarūpe hatthapāse ṭhatvā sacepi pakkhī mukhatuṇḍakena vā hatthī vā soṇḍāya gahetvā pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā deti, paṭiggahaṇaṃ ruhati. Sace pana addhaṭṭhamaratanassāpi hatthino khandhe nisinno, tena soṇḍāya diyyamānaṃ gaṇhāti, vaṭṭatiyeva.
Here, the arm's reach for one standing, sitting, or lying down should be understood in the same way as stated in the Invitation Training Rule. But if one among the giver and receiver is in the sky and one is on the ground, and the one on the ground, having placed his head [against the one in the sky's] or the one in the sky, having stretched out a hand to give or receive, the measure of the arm's reach should be determined by defining the limit with the nearer limb. Even if one is in a well and one is on the edge of the well, or one is in a tree and one is on the earth, the measure of the arm's reach should be determined in the same way as stated. Standing within such an arm's reach, even if a bird gives a flower or fruit having taken it with its beak, or an elephant gives it with its trunk, the receiving is valid. Even if one is seated on the shoulder of an elephant that is half a league tall, it is indeed acceptable to receive something being given by its trunk.
Eko bahūni bhattabyañjanabhājanāni sīse katvā bhikkhussa santikaṃ āgantvā ṭhitakova gaṇhathāti vadati, na tāva abhihāro paññāyati, tasmā na gahetabbaṃ. Sace pana īsakampi onamati, bhikkhunā hatthaṃ pasāretvā heṭṭhimabhājanaṃ ekadesenāpi sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Ettāvatā sabbabhājanāni paṭiggahitāni honti, tato paṭṭhāya oropetvā vā ugghāṭetvā vā yaṃ icchati, taṃ gahetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sabhattapacchiādimhi pana ekabhājane vattabbameva natthi, kājena bhattaṃ harantopi sace kājaṃ onāmetvā deti, vaṭṭati. Tiṃsahattho veṇu hoti, ekasmiṃ ante guḷakumbho baddho, ekasmiṃ sappikumbho, tañce paṭiggaṇhāti, sabbaṃ paṭiggahitameva. Ucchuyantadoṇito paggharantameva rasaṃ gaṇhathāti vadati, abhihāro na paññāyatīti na gahetabbo. Sace pana kasaṭaṃ chaḍḍetvā hatthena ussiñcitvā ussiñcitvā deti, vaṭṭati.
One, having placed many bowls of rice and curry on his head, comes to a bhikkhu and, standing there, says, "Please take." Presentation is not evident in this case; therefore, it should not be taken. But if he bows down even a little, the bhikkhu should stretch out his hand and receive the bottom bowl with at least a part of it. To that extent, all the bowls are considered received; from then on, it is acceptable to take and eat whatever he wants, either having lowered them or uncovered them. But in the case of a whole basket of rice and so on, there is no need to speak of individual bowls; even if rice is carried in the hand, it is acceptable if one tilts the hand when giving. If there is a thirty-cubit-long bamboo pole, and a pot of molasses is tied to one end and a pot of ghee to the other, if one receives it, all of it is considered received. If one says, "Please take the juice that is flowing from the sugarcane press," it should not be taken, because the presentation is not evident. But if one discards the residue and gives it scooping it out with the hand, it is acceptable.
Bahū pattā mañce vā pīṭhe vā kaṭasārake vā doṇiyaṃ vā phalake vā ṭhapitā honti, yattha ṭhitassa dāyako hatthapāse hoti, tattha ṭhatvā paṭiggahaṇasaññāya mañcādīni aṅguliyāpi phusitvā ṭhitena vā nisinnena vā nipannena vā yaṃ tesu pattesu diyyati, taṃ sabbaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ hoti. Sacepi paṭiggahessāmīti mañcādīni āruhitvā nisīdati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Sace pana mañcādīni hatthena gahetvā mañce nisīdati, vattabbameva natthi.
Many bowls are placed on a couch or a chair or a mat frame or a trough or a plank; standing there, where the giver is within arm’s reach, having touched the couch and so on with a finger with the intention of receiving, whatever is given in those bowls while standing or sitting or lying down, is all considered received. Even if one climbs onto the couch and so on and sits down with the intention of receiving, it is indeed acceptable. But if one takes the couch and so on with one's hand and sits on the couch, there is no need to speak of it.
Pathaviyaṃ pana sacepi kucchiyā kucchiṃ āhacca ṭhitā honti, yaṃ yaṃ aṅguliyā vā sūciyā vā phusitvā nisinno hoti, tattha tattha diyyamānameva paṭiggahitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Yattha katthaci mahākaṭasārahatthattharaṇādīsu ṭhapitapatte paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruhatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ hatthapāsātikkamaṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Hatthapāse pana sati yattha katthaci vaṭṭati aññatra tatthajātakā.
If, however, [the bowls] are placed on the ground, touching belly to belly, then whatever is given there, where one is sitting having touched something with a finger or a needle, is considered received. It was said, "Receiving is not valid for bowls placed on a large mat frame or a hand-span mat and so on, wherever they are placed." That should be understood as having been said with reference to exceeding the arm's reach. But within arm's reach, it is acceptable wherever it is, except for what grows there.
Tatthajātake pana paduminipaṇṇe vā kiṃsukapaṇṇādimhi vā na vaṭṭati. Na hi taṃ kāyapaṭibaddhasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Yathā ca tatthajātake; evaṃ khāṇuke bandhitvā ṭhapitamañcādimhi asaṃhārime phalake vā pāsāṇe vā na ruhatiyeva, tepi hi tatthajātakasaṅkhepupagā honti. Bhūmiyaṃ atthatesu sukhumesu tintiṇikādipaṇṇesupi paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruhati, na hi tāni sandhāretuṃ samatthānīti. Mahantesu pana paduminipaṇṇādīsu ruhati. Sace hatthapāsaṃ atikkamma ṭhito dīghadaṇḍakena uḷuṅkena deti, āgantvā dehīti vattabbo. Vacanaṃ asutvā vā anādiyitvā vā patte ākiratiyeva, puna paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Dūre ṭhatvā bhattapiṇḍaṃ khipantepi eseva nayo.
But for what grows there, it is not acceptable on a lotus leaf or a butea frondosa leaf and so on. For that does not go to the reckoning of being connected to the body. And as with what grows there, so too it is never valid on a couch and so on tied to a stump, or on an unmovable plank or stone, for those too fall into the category of what grows there. Receiving is not valid even on very fine leaves such as tamarind leaves scattered on the ground, for they are not capable of supporting it. But it is valid on large lotus leaves and so on. If one standing beyond arm's reach gives with a long-handled ladle, he should be told, "Come and give it." If, without hearing the words or without paying attention, he simply pours it into the bowl, it should be received again. The same method applies even when throwing a lump of rice from a distance.
Sace pattatthavikato nīhariyamāne patte rajanacuṇṇāni honti, sati udake dhovitabbo, asati rajanacuṇṇaṃ pucchitvā paṭiggahetvā vā piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ. Sace piṇḍāya carantassa rajaṃ patati, paṭiggahetvā bhikkhā gaṇhitabbā. Appaṭiggahetvā gaṇhato vinayadukkaṭaṃ. Taṃ pana puna paṭiggahetvā bhuñjato anāpatti. Sace pana ‘‘paṭiggahetvā dethā’’ti vutte vacanaṃ asutvā vā anādiyitvā vā bhikkhaṃ dentiyeva, vinayadukkaṭaṃ natthi, puna paṭiggahetvā aññā bhikkhā gahetabbā.
If, when a bowl is being taken out from a bowl-bag, there is dye-powder in the bowl, it should be washed if there is water; if there is no water, having wiped off the dye-powder, one should go for alms. If dust falls while one is going for alms, having received it, alms should be collected. There is a vinaya dukkata for collecting it without receiving it. However, there is no offense for eating it after having received it again. If, however, when one says "Give it after receiving it," one gives alms without hearing the words or without paying attention, there is no vinaya dukkata; other alms should be collected after receiving it again.
Sace mahāvāto tato tato rajaṃ pāteti, na sakkā hoti bhikkhaṃ gahetuṃ, ‘‘anupasampannassa dassāmī’’ti suddhacittena ābhogaṃ katvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā vihāraṃ vā āsanasālaṃ vā gantvā taṃ anupasampannassa datvā puna tena dinnaṃ vā tassa vissāsena vā paṭiggahetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
If a great wind blows dust from here and there, and it is not possible to collect alms, it is acceptable to collect it with a pure intention, having made an inclination, thinking, "I will give it to one who is not fully ordained." Having thus gone for alms and gone to a monastery or an assembly hall, it is acceptable to give that to one who is not fully ordained and eat it having received it again from him or with his trust.
Sace bhikkhācāre sarajaṃ pattaṃ bhikkhussa deti, so vattabbo – ‘‘imaṃ paṭiggahetvā bhikkhaṃ vā gaṇheyyāsi, paribhuñjeyyāsi vā’’ti tena tathā kātabbaṃ. Sace rajaṃ upari uppilavati, kañjikaṃ pavāhetvā sesaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace anto paviṭṭhaṃ hoti, paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Anupasampanne asati hatthato amocentena, yattha anupasampanno atthi tattha netvā paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Sukkhabhatte patitarajaṃ apanetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace atisukhumaṃ hoti, uparibhattena saddhiṃ apanetabbaṃ, paṭiggahetvā vā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Yāguṃ vā sūpaṃ vā purato ṭhapetvā ālulentānaṃ bhājanato phusitāni uggantvā patte patanti, patto paṭiggahetabbo.
If one gives a dusty bowl to a bhikkhu on an alms round, he should be told – "Either receive this and collect alms, or consume it." He should do it in that way. If the dust floats on top, the rest should be consumed after pouring away the rice-gruel. If it has entered inside, it should be received. If there is no one who is not fully ordained, it should be taken to where there is one who is not fully ordained without releasing it from the hand, and it should be received there. It is acceptable to remove dust that has fallen on dry rice and consume it. If it is very fine, it should be removed together with the rice on top, or it should be eaten after receiving it. If one places rice-gruel or soup in front, and particles falling from the pots while they are being stirred fall into the bowl, the bowl should be received.
Uḷuṅkena āharitvā dentānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ uḷuṅkato thevā patte patanti, supatitā, abhihaṭattā doso natthi. Sacepi carukena bhatte ākiriyamāne carukato masi vā chārikā vā patati, abhihaṭattā nevatthi doso. Anantarassa bhikkhuno diyyamānaṃ pattato uppatitvā itarassa patte patati, supatitaṃ. Paṭiggahitameva hi taṃ hoti.
When people bring [food] scooping with a ladle, if the first bit of gravy falling from the ladle falls into the bowl, it has fallen well, and there is no offense because it has been brought near. Even if soot or ash falls from the pot while rice is being poured into it from a pot, there is no offense whatsoever because it has been brought near. If [rice] being given to an immediately next bhikkhu flies up from the bowl and falls into another’s bowl, it has fallen well. For that is indeed considered received.
Sace jajjharisākhādiṃ phāletvā ekassa bhikkhuno dentānaṃ sākhato phusitāni aññassa patte patanti, patto paṭiggahetabbo. Yassa pattassa upari phālenti, tassa patte patitesu dātukāmatāya abhihaṭattā doso natthi. Pāyāsassa pūretvā pattaṃ denti, uṇhattā heṭṭhā gahetuṃ na sakkoti, mukhavaṭṭiyāpi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace tathāpi na sakkoti, ādhārakena gaṇhitabbo.
If, when people are splitting open a palmyra branch or the like and giving it to one bhikkhu, particles falling from the branch fall into another’s bowl, the bowl should be received. There is no offense whatsoever for the one into whose bowl [the pieces] fall while they are splitting it above his bowl, because it has been brought near with the intention of giving. They give a bowl filled with pāyāsa, being unable to hold it from underneath due to the heat, it is acceptable to hold it with the mouth-rim. If he is still unable to do so, it should be taken with a stand.
Āsanasālāya pattaṃ gahetvā nisinno bhikkhu niddaṃ okkanto hoti, neva āhariyamānaṃ na diyyamānaṃ jānāti, appaṭiggahitaṃ hoti. Sace pana ābhogaṃ katvā nisinno hoti, vaṭṭati. Sacepi so hatthena ādhārakaṃ muñcitvā pādena pelletvā niddāyati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Pādena ādhārakaṃ akkamitvā paṭiggaṇhantassa pana jāgarantassapi anādarapaṭiggahaṇaṃ hoti, tasmā na kātabbaṃ. Keci evaṃ ādhārakena paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyapaṭibaddhapaṭibaddhena paṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Taṃ tesaṃ vacanamattameva. Atthato pana sabbampetaṃ kāyapaṭibaddhameva hoti. Kāyasaṃsaggepi cesa nayo dassitova. Yampi bhikkhussa diyyamānaṃ patati, tampi sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Tatridaṃ suttaṃ –
A bhikkhu who has taken his bowl and is sitting in the assembly hall falls asleep, he does not know what is being brought or what is being given; it is not considered received. But if he is sitting having made an inclination, it is acceptable. Even if he lets go of the stand with his hand and pushes it with his foot and falls asleep, it is indeed acceptable. But it is an irreverent receiving for one who steps on the stand with his foot and receives it even while awake; therefore, it should not be done. Some say that receiving with a stand in this way is called receiving with something connected to what is connected to the body; therefore, it is not acceptable. That is merely their opinion. In reality, however, all of this is indeed connected to the body. This method has indeed been shown even in the context of bodily contact. Even if something falls while being given to a bhikkhu, it is acceptable for him to take and consume it himself. There is this sutta concerning that –
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yaṃ diyyamānaṃ patati, taṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ pariccattaṃ taṃ, bhikkhave, dāyakehī’’ti (cūḷava. 273).
"Bhikkhus, I allow that which falls while being given to be taken and consumed by oneself; that, bhikkhus, is relinquished by the donors" (cūḷava. 273).
Idañca pana suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ. Tasmā evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo – yaṃ diyyamānaṃ dāyakassa hatthato parigaḷitvā suddhāya vā bhūmiyā paduminipaṇṇavatthakaṭasārakādīsu vā patati, taṃ sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana sarajāya bhūmiyā patati, taṃ rajaṃ puñchitvā vā dhovitvā vā paṭiggahetvā vā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Sace pana pavaṭṭantaṃ aññassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gacchati, tena āharāpetumpi vaṭṭati. Sace taṃ bhikkhuṃ vadati ‘‘tvaṃyeva khādā’’ti tassāpi khādituṃ vaṭṭati. Anāṇattena pana tena na gahetabbaṃ. Anāṇattenāpi ‘‘itarassa dassāmī’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kasmā panetaṃ itarassa bhikkhuno gahetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti? Bhagavatā ananuññātattā. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti vadantena yasseva taṃ diyyamānaṃ patati, tassa appaṭiggahitakampi taṃ gahetvā paribhogo anuññāto. ‘‘Pariccattaṃ taṃ bhikkhave dāyakehī’’ti vacanena panettha parasantakābhāvo dīpito. Tasmā aññassa sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati, tassa pana āṇattiyā vaṭṭatīti ayaṃ kirettha adhippāyo.
This sutta, however, is of interpretable meaning (neyyattha). Therefore, the intention here should be understood thus: whatever is being given falls from the giver’s hand onto clean ground, or onto a lotus leaf, a woven mat, a core of heartwood, etc., it is allowable to take and use that oneself. But whatever falls on dusty ground, that dust should be wiped off or washed off, or it should be received and then used. If it rolls away and goes to another bhikkhu, it is allowable to have it brought back as well. If that bhikkhu says, "You yourself eat it," it is allowable for him to eat it. But it should not be taken without being instructed. In the Kurundi it is said that it is allowable to take it even without being instructed, thinking, "I will give it to the other." Why is it not allowable for that other bhikkhu to take it? Because it is not permitted by the Blessed One. For by saying, "Take and use it yourself," the Blessed One has permitted the use of that which falls to whomever it falls to, even if it is unreceived. By the statement, "It is relinquished by the donors, bhikkhus," the absence of ownership by another is indicated here. Therefore, it is not allowable for another to take and use it himself, but it is allowable with his instruction. This, it is said, is the intention here.
Yasmā ca taṃ appaṭiggahitakattā anuññātaṃ, tasmā yathāṭhitaṃyeva anāmasitvā kenaci pidahitvā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivasepi paribhuñcituṃ vaṭṭati, sannidhipaccayā anāpatti. Paṭiggahetvā pana paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Taṃdivasaṃyeva hi tassa sāmaṃ gahetvā paribhogo anuññāto, na tato paranti ayampi kirettha adhippāyo.
And because it is allowed due to being unreceived, therefore it is allowable to use it even on the second day, just as it is, without touching it, having covered it with something, without offense due to storing up. But having received it, it should be used. For the use of it oneself is allowed only for that day, not beyond that. This, it is said, is also the intention here.
Idāni abbohārikanayo vuccati – bhuñjantānañhi dantā khiyyanti, nakhā khiyyanti, pattassa vaṇṇo khiyyati, sabbaṃ abbohārikaṃ. Yampi satthakena ucchuādīsu phālitesu malaṃ paññāyati, etaṃ navasamuṭṭhitaṃ nāma paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Satthakaṃ dhovitvā phālitesu malaṃ na paññāyati, lohagandhamattaṃ hoti, taṃ abbohārikaṃ. Yampi satthakaṃ gahetvā pariharanti, tena phālitepi eseva nayo. Na hi taṃ paribhogatthāya pariharantīti. Mūlabhesajjādīni pisantānaṃ vā koṭṭentānaṃ vā nisadanisadapotakaudukkhalamusalādīni khiyyanti, pariharaṇakavāsiṃ tāpetvā bhesajjatthāya takke vā khīre vā pakkhipanti, tattha nīlikā paññāyati. Satthake vuttasadisova vinicchayo. Āmakatakkādīsu pana sayaṃ na pakkhipitabbā. Pakkhipati ce, sāmapākato na muccati.
Now, the way of common usage (abbohārika) is stated: For those who are eating, teeth wear out, nails wear out, the color of the bowl wears out, all is common usage. Also, when filth is visible in sugarcane, etc., that has been cut with a knife, this is called newly arisen and should be received and used. If filth is not visible in that cut with a knife that has been washed, but only a metallic smell remains, that is common usage. And the same method applies even to that which is cut with a knife that is carried around. For it is not carried around for the purpose of consumption. When grinding or pounding root medicine, etc., the seat, sitting cloth, mortar, pestle, etc., wear out. Having heated a knife carried for cutting, they put it into whey or milk for medicinal purposes, and a blue color appears there. The decision is similar to that stated regarding the knife. But in raw whey, etc., it should not be put in oneself. If one puts it in, one is not freed from being self-cooked (sāmapākato).
Deve vassante piṇḍāya carantassa sarīrato vā cīvarato vā kiliṭṭhaudakaṃ patte patati, taṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Rukkhamūlādīsu bhuñjantassa patitepi eseva nayo. Sace pana sattāhaṃ vassante deve suddhaṃ udakaṃ hoti, abbhokāsato vā patati, vaṭṭati. Sāmaṇerassa odanaṃ dentena tassa pattagataṃ acchupanteneva dātabbo. Patto vāssa paṭiggahetabbo. Appaṭiggahite odanaṃ chupitvā puna attano patte odanaṃ gaṇhantassa uggahitako hoti.
When rain is falling from the sky on one who is wandering for alms, if soiled water from the body or robe falls into the bowl, that should be received. The same method applies even when it falls while eating at the foot of a tree, etc. But if pure water comes down when the gods are raining for a week, or it falls from the open air, it is allowable. When giving rice to a novice, it should be given only by pouring it into his bowl without interruption. Or his bowl should be received. If one pours rice into an unreceived bowl and then takes rice into one's own bowl, there is an offense of taking what has not been given (uggahitaka).
Sace pana dātukāmo hutvā ‘‘āhara sāmaṇera pattaṃ, odanaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vadati, itaro ca ‘‘alaṃ mayha’’nti paṭikkhipati, puna tavevetaṃ mayā pariccatta’’nti ca vuttepi ‘‘na mayhaṃ etenattho’’ti vadati. Satakkhattumpi pariccajatu, yāva attano hatthagataṃ paṭiggahitameva hoti.
If, however, desiring to give, one says, "Bring the bowl, novice, take the rice," and the other refuses, saying, "Enough for me," and even when it is said again, "This is relinquished by me to you," he says, "I have no need of it," even if one relinquishes it a hundred times, it is only received when it has come into one's own hand.
Sace pana ādhārake ṭhitaṃ nirapekkho ‘‘gaṇhā’’ti vadati, puna paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Sāpekkho ādhārake pattaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘etto pūvaṃ vā bhattaṃ vā gaṇhā’’ti sāmaṇeraṃ vadati, sāmaṇero hatthaṃ dhovitvā sacepi satakkhattuṃ gahetvā attano pattagataṃ aphusantova attano patte pakkhipati, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Yadi pana attano pattagataṃ phusitvā tato gaṇhāti, sāmaṇerasantakena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ hoti, puna paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sacepi gayhamānaṃ chijjitvā tattha patati, puna paṭiggahetabba’’nti vadanti. Taṃ ‘‘ekaṃ bhattapiṇḍaṃ gaṇha, ekaṃ pūvaṃ gaṇha, imassa guḷapiṇḍassa ettakaṃ padesaṃ gaṇhā’’ti evaṃ paricchinditvā vutte veditabbaṃ. Idha pana paricchedo natthi. Tasmā yaṃ sāmaṇerassa patte patati, tadeva paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Hatthagataṃ pana yāva sāmaṇero vā ‘‘ala’’nti na oramati, bhikkhu vā na vāreti, tāva bhikkhusseva santakaṃ, tasmā paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati.
If, however, one says "Take" being indifferent while it is placed on a stand (ādhāraka), it should be received again. If, being attached, one places the bowl on a stand and says to the novice, "Take cake or rice from here," even if the novice, having washed his hands, takes it a hundred times and puts it into his own bowl without touching what is in his own bowl, there is no need for further receiving. If, however, having touched what is in his own bowl, he takes from there, it is mixed with what belongs to the novice, and it should be received again. Some, however, say, "Even if it is broken off while being taken and falls there, it should be received again." That should be understood when it is said after specifying, "Take one ball of rice, take one cake, take so much of this lump of molasses." Here, however, there is no specification. Therefore, that which falls into the novice's bowl itself ceases to be received. However, as long as the novice does not desist saying "Enough," or the bhikkhu does not prevent it, that which is in the hand belongs to the bhikkhu himself, therefore the receiving does not cease.
Sace attano vā bhikkhūnaṃ vā yāgupacanakabhājane kesañci atthāya odanaṃ pakkhipati, ‘‘sāmaṇera, bhājanassa upari hatthaṃ karohī’’ti vatvā tassa hatthe pakkhipitabbaṃ, tassa hatthato bhājane patitañhi dutiyadivase bhājanassa akappiyabhāvaṃ na karoti, pariccattattā. Sace evaṃ akatvā pakkhipati, pattamiva bhājanaṃ nirāmisaṃ katvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Dāyakā yāgukuṭaṃ ṭhapetvā gatā, taṃ daharasāmaṇero paṭiggaṇhāpetuṃ na sakkoti, bhikkhu pattaṃ upanāmeti, sāmaṇero kuṭassa gīvaṃ pattassa mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ ṭhapetvā āvajjeti, pattagatā yāgu paṭiggahitāva hoti. Atha vā bhikkhu bhūmiyaṃ hatthaṃ ṭhapeti, sāmaṇero pavaṭṭetvā tattha āropeti, vaṭṭati. Pūvapacchibhattapacchiucchubhārādīsupi eseva nayo.
If one puts rice into a cooking pot for gruel for someone's sake, either for oneself or for the bhikkhus, one should say, "Novice, put your hand over the pot," and put it into his hand. For that which falls from his hand into the pot does not cause the pot to be unallowable on the second day, because it has been relinquished. If one puts it in without doing so, the pot should be made free from meat (nirāmisaṃ) like a bowl and used. Donors have placed a gruel pot and gone away, and a young novice is not able to have it received, the bhikkhu holds out the bowl, and the novice places the neck of the pot on the rim of the bowl and pours it out, the gruel in the bowl is already received. Or the bhikkhu places his hand on the ground, and the novice pours it out and places it there, it is allowable. The same method applies to baskets of cakes, baskets of rice, loads of sugarcane, etc.
Sace paṭiggahaṇūpagaṃ bhāraṃ dve tayo sāmaṇerā denti, ekena vā balavatā ukkhittaṃ dve tayo bhikkhū gaṇhanti, vaṭṭati. Mañcassa vā pīṭhassa vā pāde telaghaṭaṃ vā phāṇitaghaṭaṃ vā navanītaghaṭaṃ vā laggenti, bhikkhussa mañcepi pīṭhepi nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Uggahitakaṃ nāma na hoti.
If two or three novices give a load that is subject to being received, or if it is lifted up by one strong one and two or three bhikkhus take it, it is allowable. If they attach a pot of oil, or a pot of molasses, or a pot of butter to the foot of a couch or a chair, it is allowable for the bhikkhu to sit on the couch or chair. It is not called taking what has not been given (uggahitaka).
Nāgadantake vā aṅkusake vā dve telaghaṭā laggitā honti, upari paṭiggahitako heṭṭhā appaṭiggahitako, uparimaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Heṭṭhā paṭiggahitako upari appaṭiggahitako, uparimaṃ gahetvā itaraṃ gaṇhato uparimo uggahitako hoti. Heṭṭhāmañce appaṭiggahitakaṃ telathālakaṃ hoti, taṃ ce sammajjanto sammuñjaniyā ghaṭṭeti, uggahitakaṃ na hoti. Paṭiggahitakaṃ gaṇhissāmīti appaṭiggahitakaṃ gahetvā ñatvā puna ṭhapeti, uggahitakaṃ na hoti. Bahi nīharitvā sañjānāti, bahi aṭṭhapetvā haritvā tattheva ṭhapetabbaṃ, natthi doso. Sace pana pubbe vivaritvā ṭhapitaṃ na pidahitabbaṃ; yathā pubbe ṭhitaṃ tatheva ṭhapetabbaṃ. Sace bahi ṭhapeti, puna na chupitabbaṃ.
If two oil pots are hung on a coat-hook or a peg, the upper one is received and the lower one is unreceived, it is allowable to take the upper one. If the lower one is received and the upper one is unreceived, if one takes the upper one and then takes the other, the upper one is taken what has not been given. If there is an unreceived oil plate on the lower couch, if one touches it with a broom while sweeping, it is not taking what has not been given. Thinking, "I will take what has been received," if one takes what has not been received, knowing it, and puts it back, it is not taking what has not been given. If one knows it after taking it outside, one should take it outside without placing it and put it back in the same place, there is no fault. If, however, it has been opened and placed before, it should not be closed; it should be placed as it was before. If one puts it outside, it should not be touched again.
Heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ orohanto nisseṇimajjhe sañjānāti, anokāsattā uddhaṃ vā adho vā haritvā ṭhapetabbaṃ. Paṭiggahitake telādimhi kaṇṇakaṃ uṭṭheti, siṅgiverādimhi ghanacuṇṇaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānameva nāmetaṃ, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi.
While descending from the upper story of a building, one knows it in the middle of the ladder, because there is no space, it should be taken up or down and placed. In received oil, etc., one lifts up the spout; in ginger, etc., the solid powder, this is only the arising thereof, there is no need for further receiving.
Tālaṃ vā nāḷikeraṃ vā āruḷho yottena phalapiṇḍiṃ otāretvā upari ṭhitova gaṇhathāti vadati, na gahetabbaṃ. Sace añño bhūmiyaṃ ṭhito yottapāsake gahetvā ukkhipitvā deti, vaṭṭati. Saphalaṃ mahāsākhaṃ kappiyaṃ kāretvā paṭiggaṇhāti, phalāni paṭiggahitāneva honti, yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
If one who has climbed up a palmyra palm or coconut palm lowers a bunch of fruit with a rope and says, "Take it, staying up here," it should not be taken. If another, standing on the ground, takes hold of the rope loop, lifts it up and gives it, it is allowable. Having made a large branch with fruit allowable and received it, the fruits are already received, it is allowable to use them as one pleases.
Antovatiyaṃ ṭhatvā vatiṃ chinditvā ucchuṃ vā timbarūsakaṃ vā denti, hatthapāse sati vaṭṭati. Vatidaṇḍakesu appaharitvā niggataṃ gaṇhantassa vaṭṭati. Paharitvā niggate aṭṭhakathāsu doso na dassito. Mayaṃ pana yaṃ ṭhānaṃ pahaṭaṃ, tato sayaṃpatitameva hotīti takkayāma. Tasmimpi aṭṭhatvā gacchante yujjati, suṅkaghātato pavaṭṭetvā bahipatitabhaṇḍaṃ viya. Vatiṃ vā pākāraṃ vā laṅghāpetvā denti, sace pana na puthulo pākāro, antopākāre ca bahipākāre ca ṭhitassa hatthapāso pahoti, hatthasatampi uddhaṃ gantvā sampattaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Standing inside a fence, if they cut the fence and give sugarcane or ebony fruit, it is allowable if there is hand's reach. It is allowable for one who is taking that which has come out without striking the fence sticks. No fault is shown in the commentaries for that which comes out having been struck. However, we suppose that that place is spontaneously fallen from where it was struck. Therefore, it is proper to go away without stopping there, like goods that have fallen outside after being pushed past the customs barrier. If they give it after having crossed a fence or a wall, if the wall is not thick, and the hand's reach is sufficient for one standing inside the wall and outside the wall, it is allowable to take what has come up as much as a hundred hands above.
Bhikkhu gilānaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ khandhena vahati, so phalāphalaṃ disvā gahetvā khandhe nisinnova deti, vaṭṭati. Aparo bhikkhuṃ vahanto khandhe nisinnassa bhikkhuno deti, vaṭṭatiyeva.
A bhikkhu carries a sick novice on his shoulder, and he, seeing fruits and non-fruits, takes them and gives them while sitting on the shoulder, it is allowable. Another carries a bhikkhu and gives it to the bhikkhu sitting on the shoulder, it is indeed allowable.
Bhikkhu phaliniṃ sākhaṃ chāyatthāya gahetvā gacchati, phalāni khādituṃ citte uppanne paṭiggahāpetvā khādituṃ vaṭṭati. Macchikavāraṇatthaṃ kappiyaṃ kāretvā paṭiggaṇhāti, khāditukāmo ce hoti, mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭati, khādantassa natthi doso.
A bhikkhu takes a fruitful branch for the sake of shade, if the thought of eating the fruits arises, it is allowable to have them received and eat them. Having made it allowable for the sake of warding off flies and received it, if he desires to eat, the original receiving itself is sufficient, there is no fault in eating.
Bhikkhu paṭiggahaṇārahaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ manussānaṃ yāne ṭhapetvā maggaṃ gacchati, yānaṃ kaddame laggati, daharo cakkaṃ gahetvā ukkhipati, vaṭṭati, uggahitakaṃ nāma na hoti. Nāvāya ṭhapetvā nāvaṃ arittena vā pājeti, hatthena vā kaḍḍhati, vaṭṭati. Uḷumpepi eseva nayo. Cāṭiyaṃ kuṇḍake vā ṭhapetvāpi taṃ anupasampannena gāhāpetvā anupasampannaṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā tarituṃ vaṭṭati. Tasmimpi asati anupasampannaṃ gāhāpetvā taṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā tarituṃ vaṭṭati.
A bhikkhu places an article worthy of being received on a man's vehicle and goes along the road, the vehicle gets stuck in the mud, a young one takes the wheel and lifts it up, it is allowable, it is not called taking what has not been given (uggahitaka). Having placed it on a boat, one moves the boat with an oar, or pulls it with a hand, it is allowable. The same method applies to a raft. Having placed it in a pot or a water jar, it is allowable to have it taken by one who is not fully ordained and to cross the river taking the one who is not fully ordained in the arm. Even in the absence of that, it is allowable to have the one who is not fully ordained take it and to cross the river taking him in the arm.
Upāsakā gamikabhikkhūnaṃ pātheyyataṇḍule denti. Sāmaṇerā bhikkhūnaṃ taṇḍule gahetvā attano taṇḍule gahetuṃ na sakkonti, bhikkhū tesaṃ taṇḍule gaṇhanti. Sāmaṇerā attanā gahitataṇḍulesu khīṇesu itarehi taṇḍulehi yāguṃ pacitvā sabbesaṃ pattāni paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetvā yāguṃ ākiranti. Paṇḍito sāmaṇero attano pattaṃ gahetvā therassa deti, therassa pattaṃ anutherassāti evaṃ sabbāni parivatteti, sabbehi sāmaṇerassa santakaṃ bhuttaṃ hoti, vaṭṭati.
Lay followers give journey rice (patheyyataṇḍule) to travelling bhikkhus. Novices are not able to take the rice of the bhikkhus and take their own rice, the bhikkhus take their rice. When the rice taken by the novices is exhausted, they cook gruel with the other rice, and having placed all the bowls in order, they pour in the gruel. A wise novice takes his bowl and gives it to the elder, the elder's bowl to the sub-elder, thus he exchanges all the bowls, what belongs to the novice is eaten by all, it is allowable.
Sacepi sāmaṇero apaṇḍito hoti, attano patte yāguṃ sayameva pātuṃ ārabhati, ‘‘āvuso tuyhaṃ yāguṃ mayhaṃ dehī’’ti evaṃ therehi paṭipāṭiyā yācitvāpi pivituṃ vaṭṭati, sabbehi sāmaṇerassa santakameva bhuttaṃ hoti, neva uggahitapaccayā na sannidhipaccayā vajjaṃ phusanti. Ettha pana mātāpitūnaṃ telādīni chāyādīnaṃ atthāya sākhādīni ca harantānaṃ imesañca viseso na dissati. Tasmā kāraṇaṃ upaparikkhitabbaṃ.
Even if the novice is unwise, he begins to drink the gruel in his own bowl himself, it is allowable for the elders to ask and drink in order, saying, "Friend, give your gruel to me," what belongs to the novice is eaten by all, they do not touch fault due to taking what has not been given or due to storing up. Here, however, no difference is seen between those who bring oil, etc., for the sake of parents and branches, etc., for the sake of shade and these. Therefore, the reason should be examined.
Sāmaṇero bhattaṃ pacitukāmo taṇḍule dhovitvā niccāletuṃ na sakkoti. Bhikkhunā taṇḍule ca bhājanañca paṭiggahetvā taṇḍule dhovitvā niccāletvā bhājanaṃ uddhanaṃ āropetabbaṃ, aggi na kātabbo, pakkakāle vivaritvā pakkabhāvo jānitabbo. Sace duppakkaṃ hoti, pākatthāya pidahituṃ na vaṭṭati. Rajassa vā chārikāya vā apatanatthāya vaṭṭati, pakkakāle āropetumpi bhuñjitumpi vaṭṭati, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi.
A novice, desiring to cook rice, washes the rice and is not able to drain it. The bhikkhu should receive the rice and the vessel, and having washed the rice and drained it, the vessel should be placed on the hearth, fire should not be made, and when it is cooking, having opened it, the state of being cooked should be known. If it is undercooked, it is not allowable to cover it for the sake of cooking. It is allowable to prevent dust or ashes from falling, it is allowable to place it on the hearth and eat it when it is cooked, there is no need for further receiving.
Sāmaṇero paṭibalo pacituṃ, khaṇo panassa natthi, katthaci gantukāmo. Bhikkhunā sataṇḍulodakabhājanaṃ paṭiggahetvā uddhanaṃ āropetvā aggiṃ jāletvā gacchāhīti vattabbo. Tato paraṃ purimanayeneva sabbaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
The novice is capable of cooking, but he has no time, he wants to go somewhere. The bhikkhu should be told to receive the vessel with rice and water, place it on the hearth, light the fire and go. After that, it is allowable to do everything in the same way as before.
Bhikkhu yāguatthāya suddhaṃ bhājanaṃ āropetvā udakaṃ tāpeti, vaṭṭati. Tatte udake sāmaṇero taṇḍule pakkhipati, tato paṭṭhāya bhikkhunā aggi na kātabbo. Pakkayāguṃ paṭiggahetvā pātuṃ vaṭṭati.
A bhikkhu puts a clean vessel on the fire for the sake of gruel and heats water, it is allowable. The novice puts rice in the hot water, from then on, the bhikkhu should not make a fire. Having received the cooked gruel, it is allowable to drink it.
Sāmaṇero yāguṃ pacati, hatthakukkuccako bhikkhu kīḷanto bhājanaṃ āmasati, pidhānaṃ āmasati, uggataṃ pheṇaṃ chinditvā harati, tasseva pātuṃ na vaṭṭati, durupaciṇṇaṃ nāma hoti. Sace pana dabbiṃ vā uḷuṅkaṃ vā gahetvā anukkhipanto āluḷeti, sabbesaṃ na vaṭṭati, sāmapākañceva hoti durupaciṇṇañca. Sace ukkhipati, uggahitakampi hoti.
A novice is cooking gruel, a bhikkhu who is scrupulous about his hands, playing around, touches the vessel, touches the lid, cuts off and removes the rising foam, it is not allowable for him to drink it, it is called durupaciṇṇaṃ. If, however, he stirs it while not lifting it up with a ladle or a skimmer, it is not allowable for all, it is both self-cooked and durupaciṇṇaṃ. If he lifts it up, it is also taken what has not been given.
Bhikkhunā piṇḍāya caritvā ādhārake patto ṭhapito hoti, tatra ce añño lolabhikkhu kīḷanto pattaṃ āmasati, pattapidhānaṃ āmasati, tasseva tato laddhaṃ bhattaṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana pattaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhapeti, sabbesaṃ na vaṭṭati. Tatthajātakaphalāni sākhāya vā valliyā vā gahetvā cāleti, tasseva tato laddhaṃ phalaṃ na vaṭṭati, durupaciṇṇadukkaṭañca āpajjati. Phalarukkhaṃ pana apassayituṃ vā tattha kaṇḍake vā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati, durupaciṇṇaṃ na hotīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.
If a bhikkhu, after going for alms, has placed his bowl in a stand, and another greedy bhikkhu, playing around, touches the bowl or the bowl's lid, the food received from that bowl is not allowable for him. But if he lifts the bowl and sets it down, it is not allowable for anyone. If he takes fruits growing on a tree by their branch or vine and shakes them, the fruit received from that is not allowable for him, and he incurs a durupaciṇṇa-dukkaṭa. But it is allowable to lean against a fruit tree or tie a string to it; there is no durupaciṇṇa, so it is said in the Mahāpaccariya.
Araññe patitaṃ pana ambaphalādiṃ disvā sāmaṇerassa dassāmīti āharitvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sīhavighāsādiṃ disvāpi sāmaṇerassa dassāmīti paṭiggahetvā vā appaṭiggahetvā vā āharitvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana sakkoti vitakkaṃ sodhetuṃ, tato laddhaṃ khāditumpi vaṭṭati, neva āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇapaccayā na uggahitakapaccayā vajjaṃ phusati.
However, having seen mangoes and other fruits fallen in the forest, it is allowable to pick them up, intending to give them to a sāmaṇera. Having seen sīhavighāsa and such, it is allowable to receive it or not receive it, and bring it intending to give it to a sāmaṇera. But if he is able to purify his thought, it is allowable to eat what he has received from there; no fault touches him, either because of accepting raw meat or because of the condition of having been taken without permission.
Mātāpitūnaṃ atthāya telādīni gahetvā gacchato antarāmagge byādhi uppajjati, tato yaṃ icchati, taṃ paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana mūlepi paṭiggahitaṃ hoti, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Mātāpitūnaṃ taṇḍule āharitvā deti, te tatoyeva yāguādīni sampādetvā tassa denti, vaṭṭati sannidhipaccayā vā uggahitakapaccayā vā doso natthi.
While going along the road carrying oil and such for his parents, if illness arises, it is allowable to receive and use whatever he wishes. But if it was received at the source itself, there is no need for a further acceptance. He brings rice for his parents, and they prepare gruel and such from it right there and give it to him; it is allowable, there is no fault because of the condition of sannidhi or the condition of having been taken without permission.
Bhikkhu pidahitvā udakaṃ tāpeti, yāva parikkhayā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace panettha chārikā patati, paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Dīghasaṇḍāsena thālakaṃ gahetvā telaṃ pacantassa chārikā patati, hatthena amuñcanteneva pacitvā otāretvā paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Sace aṅgārāpi dārūni vā paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitāni, mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭati.
A bhikkhu heats water with a lid on, it is allowable to use it until it is used up. But if ashes fall into it, it must be accepted. If ashes fall while one is cooking oil, holding the pan with long tongs, it must be accepted after cooking and taking it off the heat without letting go with the hand. But if embers or firewood have been accepted and kept, the original acceptance is sufficient.
Bhikkhu ucchuṃ khādati, sāmaṇero ‘‘mayhampi dethā’’ti vadati. ‘‘Ito chinditvā gaṇhā’’ti vutto gaṇhāti, avasese puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Guḷapiṇḍakaṃ khādantassāpi eseva nayo. Vuttokāsato chinditvā gahitāvasesañhi ajahitapaṭiggahaṇameva hoti.
A bhikkhu is eating sugarcane, and a sāmaṇera says, "Give me some too." If told, "Cut it off from here and take it," he takes it, there is no need for further acceptance of what remains. The same method applies to eating a lump of molasses. For what remains after cutting off and taking from the stated place is truly unabandoned acceptance.
Bhikkhu guḷaṃ bhājento paṭiggahetvā koṭṭhāse karoti, bhikkhūpi sāmaṇerāpi āgantvā ekagahaṇeneva ekamekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gaṇhanti, gahitāvasesaṃ paṭiggahitameva hoti. Sace lolasāmaṇero gaṇhitvā gaṇhitvā puna ṭhapeti, tassa gahitāvasesaṃ appaṭiggahitakaṃ hoti.
A bhikkhu, when dividing molasses, accepts it and makes portions; bhikkhus and sāmaṇeras come and take one portion each with a single taking; what remains after taking is accepted. If a greedy sāmaṇera takes and takes, then puts it back, what remains after taking is unaccepted for him.
Bhikkhu dhūmavaṭṭiṃ paṭiggahetvā dhūmaṃ pivati, mukhañca kaṇṭho ca manosilāya litto viya hoti, yāvakālikaṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, yāvakālikena yāvajīvikasaṃsagge doso natthi.
A bhikkhu accepts a smoke-stick and smokes, and his mouth and throat are as if smeared with realgar, it is allowable to consume it for the yāvakālika; there is no fault in connection with yāvajīvika through the yāvakālika.
Pattaṃ vā rajanaṃ vā pacantassa kaṇṇanāsamukhacchiddehi dhūmo pavisati, byādhipaccayā pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā upasiṅghati, abbohārikattā vaṭṭati. Bhattuggāro tāluṃ āhacca antoyeva pavisati, avisayattā vaṭṭati. Mukhaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ pana ajjhoharato vikāle āpatti. Dantantare laggassa āmisassa raso pavisati, āpattiyeva. Sace sukhumaṃ āmisaṃ hoti, raso na paññāyati, abbohārikapakkhaṃ bhajati.
While cooking a bowl or dye, smoke enters through the holes of the ears, nose, and mouth; if one sniffs a flower or fruit because of illness, it is allowable because it is abbohārika. If food rises and enters inside, striking the palate, it is allowable because it is not an object of sense. But if what has entered the mouth is consumed at the wrong time, there is an offense. If the taste of meat stuck between the teeth enters, it is an offense indeed. If the meat is fine and the taste is not apparent, it follows the side of being abbohārika.
Upakaṭṭhe kāle nirudakaṭṭhāne bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā kakkhāretvā dve tayo kheḷapiṇḍe pātetvā udakaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletabbaṃ. Paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitasiṅgiverādīnaṃ aṅkurā nikkhamanti, puna paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Loṇe asati samuddodakena loṇakiccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitaṃ loṇodakaṃ loṇaṃ hoti, loṇaṃ vā udakaṃ hoti, raso vā phāṇitaṃ hoti, phāṇitaṃ vā raso hoti, mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭati. Himakarakā udakagatikā eva. Parihārikena katakaṭṭhinā udakaṃ pasādenti, taṃ abbohārikaṃ, āmisena saddhiṃ vaṭṭati. Āmisagatikehi kapitthaphalādīhi pasāditaṃ purebhattameva vaṭṭati.
Having eaten food in a waterless place near the time (for the meal), after scraping the mouth, two or three balls of saliva should be spat out, and one should go to a place with water and rinse the mouth. If sprouts come out of ginger and such that have been accepted and kept, there is no need for further acceptance. If there is no salt, it is allowable to use seawater to do the work of salt. Salt water that has been accepted and kept, whether it becomes salt, or the water becomes salt, or the syrup becomes taste, or the taste becomes syrup, the original acceptance is sufficient. Hailstones are of the nature of water. They purify water with katakaṭṭhina by the attendant, that is abbohārika, it is allowable with meat. What is purified with kapitthaphalādi that is of the nature of meat, is allowable before the meal only.
Pokkharaṇīādīsu udakaṃ bahalaṃ hoti, vaṭṭati. Sace pana mukhe ca hatthe ca laggati, na vaṭṭati, paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Khettesu kasitaṭṭhāne bahalaṃ udakaṃ hoti, paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Sace sanditvā kandarādīni pavisitvā nadiṃ pūreti, vaṭṭati. Kakudhasobbhādayo honti, rukkhato patitehi pupphehi sañchannodakā, sace puppharaso na paññāyati, paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Parittaṃ udakaṃ hoti, raso paññāyati, paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Pabbatakandarādīsu kāḷavaṇṇapaṇṇasañchannaudakepi eseva nayo.
In ponds and such, water is thick, it is allowable. But if it sticks to the mouth and hand, it is not allowable, it should be received and used. In fields, in tilled places, water is thick, it should be received. If, flowing, it enters caves and such and fills a river, it is allowable. There are kakudhasobbha and such, water covered with flowers fallen from trees, if the taste of the flowers is not apparent, there is no need for acceptance. There is little water, the taste is apparent, it should be accepted. The same method applies to water covered with black leaves in mountain caves and such.
Pānīyaghaṭe sareṇukāni vā savaṇṭakhīrāni vā pupphāni pakkhittāni honti, paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Pupphāni vā paṭiggahetvā pakkhipitabbāni. Pāṭalicampakamallikā pakkhittā honti, vāsamattaṃ tiṭṭhati taṃ abbohārikaṃ, dutiyadivasepi āmisena saddhiṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhunā ṭhapitapupphavāsitakapānīyato sāmaṇero pānīyaṃ gahetvā pītāvasesaṃ tattheva ākirati, paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Padumasarādīsu udakaṃ santharitvā ṭhitaṃ pupphareṇuṃ ghaṭena vikkhambhetvā udakaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ hoti, sace tassa rasaṃ pivitukāmo, mūlapaṭiggahaṇameva vaṭṭati. Appaṭiggahetvā ṭhapitaṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Ajānantassa rase paviṭṭhepi āpattiyeva. Acittakañhi idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ.
In a water pot, dust or sap or flowers have been put, it should be accepted. Or flowers should be accepted and put in. Pāṭali, campaka, mallikā flowers have been put in, the scent remains, that is abbohārika, it is allowable with meat even on the second day. From water perfumed with flowers kept by a bhikkhu, a sāmaṇera takes water and spills the remainder there, it should be accepted. In lotus ponds and such, it is allowable to take water by dispersing the pollen spread on the water's surface with a pot. A toothpick is made permissible and kept after accepting it, if he wants to drink its taste, the original acceptance is sufficient. If it is kept without accepting it, it should be accepted. Even if the taste enters without knowing, there is an offense. For this training rule is acittaka.
Mahābhūtesu kiṃ vaṭṭati, kiṃ na vaṭṭatīti? Khīraṃ tāva vaṭṭati, kappiyamaṃsakhīraṃ vā akappiyamaṃsakhīraṃ vā hotu, pivantassa anāpatti. Assu kheḷo siṅghāṇikā muttaṃ karīsaṃ semhaṃ dantamalaṃ akkhigūthako kaṇṇagūthako sarīre uṭṭhitaloṇanti idaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ panettha ṭhānato cavitvā patte vā hatthe vā patati, taṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Aṅgalaggaṃ paṭiggahitakameva. Uṇhaṃpāyāsaṃ bhuñjantassa sedo aṅgulianusārena ekābaddhova hutvā pāyāse santiṭṭhati, piṇḍāya vā carantassa hatthato pattassa mukhavaṭṭiṃto vā pattatalaṃ orohati, ettha paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Jhāmamahābhūtesu idaṃ nāma na vaṭṭatīti natthi, dujjhāpitaṃ pana na vaṭṭati. Sujjhāpitaṃ manussaṭṭhimpi cuṇṇaṃ katvā lehe upanetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Among the great elements, what is allowable and what is not? Milk, of course, is allowable, whether it is milk from permissible meat or milk from impermissible meat, there is no offense for one who drinks it. Tears, saliva, mucus, urine, excrement, phlegm, tooth dirt, eye discharge, ear discharge, salt that rises on the body, all this is allowable. What falls from its place and falls into a bowl or hand, that should be accepted. What is stuck on a finger is already accepted. If, while eating hot pāyāsa, sweat, following the line of the fingers, becomes united and stays on the pāyāsa, or while going for alms, it drips from the hand to the bowl's rim or the bowl's surface, there is no need for acceptance here. Among the inanimate great elements, there is nothing that is not allowable, but what is not burnt well is not allowable. Even human bone that is well burnt can be made into powder and taken as a lick.
Cattāri mahāvikaṭāni asati kappiyakārake sāmampi gahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Ettha ca dubbacopi asamatthopi kappiyakārako asantapakkheyeva tiṭṭhati. Chārikāya asati sukkhadāruṃ jhāpetvā chārikā gahetabbā. Sukkhadārumhi asati alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Idaṃ pana catubbidhampi mahāvikaṭaṃ kālodissaṃ nāma sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇeyeva vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
The four great corruptions can be used even raw in the absence of a permissible agent. And here, one who is difficult to speak to and one who is incapable remain in the category of being absent. In the absence of ashes, ashes should be taken by burning dry wood. In the absence of dry wood, it is allowable to cut fresh wood from a tree and make it. But this fourfold great corruption is named for a specific time; it is allowable only at the moment of a snake bite. The remainder is clear here.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato ca kāyacittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakaloma arises from the body and from the mind of the body, is an action, is without perception and release, is acittaka, is a regulation offense, is a bodily action, is three-fold consciousness, is three-fold feeling.
Dantaponasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The tenth training rule on tooth cleaning (dantapona) is complete.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena bhojanavaggo catuttho.
The fourth section, the Bhojanavagga, is complete in the order of exposition.
5. Acelakavaggo
5. The Acelakavagga
1. Acelakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Acelaka Training Rule
269.Acelakavaggassa 9 paṭhamasikkhāpade –parivesananti parivisanaṭṭhānaṃ.Paribbājakasamāpannoti pabbajjaṃ samāpanno.Deti āpatti pācittiyassāti samatittikaṃ yāgupattaṃ ekapayogena deti, ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Avacchinditvā avacchinditvā deti, payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Eseva nayo pūvabhattādīsu.Titthiye atitthiyasaññīti mātā vā pitā vā titthiyesu pabbajati, tesaṃ mātāpitusaññāya dentassāpi pācittiyameva hoti.Dāpetīti anupasampannena dāpeti.
269. In the first training rule of the Acelakavagga: Parivesana means the place of serving. Paribbājakasamāpanno means one who has undertaken the renunciate life. Deti āpatti pācittiyassa means if he gives a bowl of gruel enough to satisfy, in one act of giving, there is one pācittiya. If he gives cutting off and cutting off, there is a pācittiya for each act of giving. The same method applies to cakes, rice, etc. Titthiye atitthiyasaññī means even if a mother or father goes forth among the titthiyas, giving to them with the perception of mother or father, there is a pācittiya. Dāpeti means he causes to be given by one who is not fully ordained.
273.Upanikkhipitvā detīti tathārūpe bhājane ṭhapetvā taṃ bhājanaṃ tesaṃ santike bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipitvā deti, tesaṃ vā bhājanaṃ nikkhipāpetvā tattha deti, pattaṃ ādhārake vā bhūmiyaṃ vā ṭhapetvāpi ‘‘ito gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace titthiyo vadati ‘‘mayhaṃ nāma idaṃ santakaṃ, idha na ākirathā’’ti ākiritabbaṃ. Tassa santakattā sahatthā dānaṃ nāma na hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
273.Upanikkhipitvā detī means having placed it in such a container, he places that container on the ground near them, or having caused their container to be placed (there), he gives into it; it is allowable to place the bowl in a stand or on the ground and say, "Take it from here." If the titthiya says, "This belongs to me, don't throw it here," it should be thrown (elsewhere). Because it belongs to him, it is not called giving with one's own hand. The remainder is clear here.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakaloma arises as an action, is without perception and release, is acittaka, is a regulation offense, is a bodily action, is three-fold consciousness, is three-fold feeling.
Acelakasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The first training rule on the Acelakas is complete.
2. Uyyojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Uyyojana Training Rule
274.Dutiyasikkhāpade –paṭikkamanepīti āsanasālāyampi.Bhattavissagganti bhattakiccaṃ.Na sambhāvesīti na pāpuṇi.
274. In the second training rule: Paṭikkamanepi means even in the assembly hall. Bhattavissagga means the meal duty. Na sambhāvesi means he does not bring about.
276.Anācāranti vuttāvasesaṃ kāyavacīdvāravītikkamaṃ.Dassanūpacāraṃ vā savanūpacāraṃ vāvijahantassāti ettha yadi ṭhito vā nisinno vā uyyojeti; yo uyyojito, so vijahati, tassa ca āpatti nāma natthi. Tasmiṃ pana vijahantepi atthato itarena vijahitameva hoti. Tasmā yo uyyojeti, tassevāyaṃ āpatti. Tattha sace upacārabbhantare eko pādo hoti, dukkaṭaṃ. Sīmātikkame pācittiyaṃ. Ettha ca dassanūpacārassa abbhokāse dvādasahatthappamāṇaṃ, tathā savanūpacārassa. Sace pana antarā kuṭṭadvārapākārādayo honti, tehi antaritabhāvo dassanūpacārātikkamo, tassa vasena āpatti veditabbā.Na añño koci paccayo hotīti ṭhapetvā vuttappakāramanācāraṃ aññaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ na hoti.
276.Anācāra means the transgression of bodily and verbal doors that has been stated. Dassanūpacāraṃ vā savanūpacāraṃ vā vijahantassā here, if he urges while standing or sitting; whoever is urged, he abandons (the upacāra), and there is no offense for him. But even while he is abandoning, in reality, the other one has abandoned it. Therefore, this offense is for the one who urges. There, if one foot is within the upacāra, there is a dukkaṭa. At the boundary's transgression, there is a pācittiya. And here, the measure of the visible upacāra in the open air is twelve cubits, likewise for the audible upacāra. But if there are walls, doors, ramparts, etc., in between, being obstructed by them is a transgression of the visible upacāra, and the offense should be known according to that. Na añño koci paccayo hoti means there is no other reason except for the stated kind of improper conduct.
277.Kalisāsanaṃ āropetīti‘‘kalī’’ti kodho; tassa sāsanaṃ āropeti; kodhassa āṇaṃ āropeti; kodhavasena ṭhānanisajjādīsu dosaṃ dassetvā ‘‘passatha bho imassa ṭhānaṃ, nisajjaṃ ālokitaṃ vilokitaṃ khāṇuko viya tiṭṭhati, sunakho viya nisīdati, makkaṭo viya ito cito ca viloketī’’ti evaṃ amanāpavacanaṃ vadati ‘‘appeva nāma imināpi ubbāḷho pakkameyyā’’ti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
277. Kalisāsanaṃ āropetīti "kalī" means anger; he imposes its command; he imposes the command of anger; showing faults in standing, sitting, etc., due to anger, he says, "See, good sirs, his standing, sitting, looking around, he stands like a stump, sits like a dog, looks here and there like a monkey," thus he speaks unpleasant words, "Perhaps, even by this, overwhelmed, he might leave." The remainder is clear.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Three-fold arising: it arises from mind of the body, from mind of speech, and from mind of body and speech, is an action, is with perception and release, is sacittaka, is a worldly offense, is a bodily action, is a verbal action, is unwholesome consciousness, is three-fold feeling.
Uyyojanasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The second training rule on urging is complete.
3. Sabhojanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Sabhojana Training Rule
279.Tatiyasikkhāpade –sayanighareti sayaniyaghare.Yato ayyassa bhikkhā dinnāti yasmā bhikkhā dinnā, yaṃ āgatena laddhabbaṃ taṃ vo laddhaṃ; gacchathāti adhippāyo.Pariyuṭṭhitoti rāgapariyuṭṭhito; methunādhippāyoti attho.
279. In the third training rule: Sayanighare means in the dwelling for sleeping. Yato ayyassa bhikkhā dinnā means since alms have been given, what should be obtained by the one who has come, that has been obtained by you; the intention is, "Go." Pariyuṭṭhito means overwhelmed by lust; the meaning is, with the intention of sexual intercourse.
280.Saha ubhohi janehīti sabhojanaṃ; tasmiṃsabhojane. Atha vāsabhojaneti sabhoge. Rāgapariyuṭṭhitassa hi purisassa itthī bhogo itthiyā ca puriso. Tenevassa padabhājane – ‘‘itthī ceva hoti puriso cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Mahallake ghareti mahallake sayanighare.Piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvāti tassa sayanighare gabbhassa yo piṭṭhasaṅghāṭo, tassa hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā; antosayanassa āsanne ṭhāne nisīdatīti attho. Īdisañca sayanigharaṃ mahācatussālādīsu hoti.Piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvāti iminā majjhātikkamaṃ dasseti. Tasmā yathā vā tathā vā katassa khuddakassa sayanigharassa majjhātikkame āpatti veditabbā. Sesamettha uttānameva.
With both people, together, is sabhojana; in that sabhojana. Or, sabhojana means together in enjoyment. For a man overwhelmed by lust, a woman is enjoyment, and for a woman, a man. Therefore, in its explanation of terms, "There is a woman and there is a man," etc., has been said. Mahallake ghare means in a large dwelling for sleeping. Piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassa hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā means having abandoned the hand's reach of the bedstead of that dwelling's room; it means he sits in a place near the inner sleeping area. And such a dwelling for sleeping is in large catussālās and such. Piṭṭhivaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā means by this, he shows the transgression of the middle. Therefore, the offense should be known for the transgression of the middle of a small dwelling for sleeping, made in whatever way. The remainder is clear here.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.
Arising from the first pārājika: is an action, is with perception and release, is sacittaka, is a worldly offense, is a bodily action, is unwholesome consciousness, is two-fold feeling.
Sabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The third training rule on Sabhojana is complete.
284.Catutthapañcamasikkhāpadesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ aniyatadvaye vuttanayameva. Yathā ca sabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ, evametānipi paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānānevāti.
284.Whatever needs to be said regarding the fourth and fifth sikkhāpadas has already been explained in the same manner as the two aniyata cases. Just as the sabhojana-sikkhāpada, these also arise from the first pārājika.
Rahopaṭicchannasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ, rahonisajjasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The secluded covering sikkhāpada is the fourth, the secluded sitting sikkhāpada is the fifth.
6. Cārittasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Description of the Cāritta-sikkhāpada
294.Chaṭṭhasikkhāpade –dethāvuso bhattanti ettha taṃ kira bhattaṃ abhihaṭaṃ ahosi, tasmā evamāhaṃsu. Anabhihaṭe pana evaṃ vattuṃ na labbhati, payuttavācā hoti.
294.In the sixth sikkhāpada, regarding "dethāvuso bhatta" (give alms, friend), it seems that the food had been brought, therefore they spoke thus. But when it is not brought, it is not proper to speak thus; it becomes an uttered falsehood.
295.Tena hi bhikkhave paṭiggahetvā nikkhipathāti idaṃ pana bhagavā kulassa saddhānurakkhaṇatthāya āha. Yadi ‘‘bhājetvā khādathā’’ti vadeyya, manussānaṃ pasādaññathattaṃ siyā.Ussāriyitthāti paṭihariyittha; gharaṃyeva naṃ gahetvā agamaṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti.
295.Tena hi bhikkhave paṭiggahetvā nikkhipathāti (Then, monks, having received it, put it down)—this, however, the Blessed One spoke to protect the faith of the family. If he were to say, "Divide and eat," there would be a change in people's faith. Ussāriyitthāti (they put it aside)—they took it and went to their dwelling, is what is said.
298.Santaṃ bhikkhunti ettha kittāvatā santo hoti, kittāvatā asantoti? Antovihāre yattha ṭhitassa kulāni payirupāsanacittaṃ uppannaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ passe vā abhimukhe vā passati, yassa sakkā hoti pakativacanena ārocetuṃ, ayaṃ santo nāma. Ito cito ca pariyesitvā ārocanakiccaṃ nāma natthi. Yo hi evaṃ pariyesitabbo, so asantoyeva. Apica antoupacārasīmāya bhikkhuṃ disvā āpucchissāmīti gantvā tattha yaṃ passati, so āpucchitabbo. No ce passati, asantaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā paviṭṭho nāma hoti.
298.Santaṃ bhikkhunti (An available monk)—how much is "available," and how much is "unavailable"? When a family develops a desire to attend upon a monk staying inside the dwelling, from that point onward, whatever he sees in front of him, whomever he can inform with ordinary speech, this one is called "available." There is no need to search here and there to inform him. Indeed, he who must be searched for is "unavailable." Moreover, if someone goes to the boundary of the inner compound thinking, "I will ask the monk," whomever he sees there, that one should be asked. If he does not see anyone, he is considered to have entered without asking an unavailable monk.
302.Antarārāmanti antogāme vihāro hoti, taṃ gacchati.Bhattiyagharanti nimantitagharaṃ vā salākabhattādidāyakānaṃ vā gharaṃ.Āpadāsūti jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyesu sati gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
302.Antarārāmanti (Inside the monastery)—there is a monastery inside the village; he goes there. Bhattiyagharanti (A meal house)—either an invited house or a house that gives salākabhatta (ticket food) etc. Āpadāsūti (In times of distress)—in situations involving danger to life or the holy life, it is permissible to go. The rest here is straightforward.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākirayaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Originating from kathina—it originates from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; it is an inaction, without perception of release, non-deliberate, a rule-offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Cārittasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Cāritta-sikkhāpada is the sixth.
7. Mahānāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Description of the Mahānāma-sikkhāpada
303.Sattamasikkhāpade –mahānāmonāma bhagavato cūḷapituputto māsamattena mahallakataro dvīsu phalesu patiṭṭhito ariyasāvako.Bhesajjaṃ ussannaṃ hotīti vajato āharitvā ṭhapitasappi bahu hoti.
303.In the seventh sikkhāpada, mahānāmo (Mahānāma) is the son of the Blessed One's paternal uncle, about a month older, an ariya-sāvaka (noble disciple) established in two fruits (stages of enlightenment). Bhesajjaṃ ussannaṃ hotīti (Medicine is abundant)—the ghee that has been brought and stored from the time of making it is plentiful.
306.Sāditabbāti tasmiṃ samaye rogo natthīti na paṭikkhipitabbā; roge sati viññāpessāmīti adhivāsetabbā.Ettakehi bhesajjehi pavāremīti nāmavasena sappitelādīsu dvīhi tīhi vā parimāṇavasena patthena nāḷiyā āḷhakenāti vā.Aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ viññāpetīti sappinā pavārito telaṃ viññāpeti, āḷhakena pavārito doṇaṃ.Na bhesajjena karaṇīyenāti missakabhattenapi ce yāpetuṃ sakkoti, na bhesajjakaraṇīyaṃ nāma hoti.
306.Sāditabbāti (Should be accepted)—at that time, if there is no illness, it should not be refused; it should be accepted with the intention of informing him when an illness arises. Ettakehi bhesajjehi pavāremīti (I invite with so much medicine)—by name, two or three of ghee, oil, etc., or by measure, a pattha, nāḷi, or āḷhaka. Aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ viññāpetīti (He asks for another medicine)—having been invited with ghee, he asks for oil; having been invited with an āḷhaka, he asks for a doṇa. Na bhesajjena karaṇīyenāti (Not needing medicine)—even if he can subsist on mixed food, it is not considered needing medicine.
310.Pavāritānanti ye attano puggalikāya pavāraṇāya pavāritā; tesaṃ pavāritānurūpena viññattiyā anāpatti. Saṅghavasena pavāritesu pana pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetabbamevāti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
310.Pavāritānanti (Those who have been invited)—those who have been invited by their personal invitation; for them, there is no offense for a request in accordance with the invitation. However, in the case of those invited by the Saṅgha, the measure should be considered. The rest is straightforward.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Sixfold origin—inaction, without perception of release, non-deliberate, a rule-offense, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Mahānāmasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The Mahānāma-sikkhāpada is the seventh.
8. Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Description of the Uyyuttasena-sikkhāpada
311.Aṭṭhame –abbhuyyātoti abhiuyyāto; parasenaṃ abhimukho gamissāmīti nagarato niggatoti attho.Uyyuttanti katauyyogaṃ; gāmato nikkhantanti attho.
311.In the eighth, abbhuyyātoti (gone forth) means abhiuyyāto; the meaning is that he has gone out of the city intending to go against the enemy army. Uyyuttanti (equipped) means having made an effort; the meaning is that he has gone out of the village.
314.Dvādasapuriso hatthīti cattāro ārohakā ekekapādarakkhakā dve dveti evaṃ dvādasapuriso hoti.Tipuriso assoti eko ārohako dve pādarakkhakāti evaṃ tipuriso hoti.Catupuriso rathoti eko sārathi eko yodho dve āṇirakkhakāti evaṃ catupuriso hoti.Cattāro purisā sarahatthāti āvudhahatthā cattāro purisāti ayaṃ pacchimakoṭiyā caturaṅgasamannāgatā senā nāma. Īdisaṃ senaṃ dassanāya gacchato pade pade dukkaṭaṃ.Dassanūpacāraṃ vijahitvāti kenaci antaritā vā ninnaṃ oruḷhā vā na dissati; idha ṭhatvā na sakkā daṭṭhunti aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ gantvā passato payoge payoge pācittiyanti attho.
314.Dvādasapuriso hatthīti (An elephant with twelve men)—there are four riders, two guards for each foot, thus it is an elephant with twelve men. Tipuriso assoti (A horse with three men)—one rider and two foot guards, thus it is a horse with three men. Catupuriso rathoti (A chariot with four men)—one charioteer, one warrior, and two wheel guards, thus it is a chariot with four men. Cattāro purisā sarahatthāti (Four men with weapons in hand)—four men with weapons in hand; this is called an army complete with four divisions at the ultimate extent. For one who goes to see such an army, there is a dukkaṭa for each step. Dassanūpacāraṃ vijahitvāti (Having given up the occasion to see)—it is not visible because it is obstructed by something or has descended into a hollow; if he goes to another place thinking, "It cannot be seen from here," there is a pācittiya for each effort.
315.Ekamekanti hatthiādīsu catūsu aṅgesu ekamekaṃ; antamaso ekapurisāruḷhakahatthimpi ekampi sarahatthaṃ purisaṃ.Anuyyuttānāma rājā uyyānaṃ vā nadiṃ vā gacchati; evaṃ anuyyuttā hoti.
315.Ekamekanti (Each one)—one of each of the four divisions, elephants, etc.; even an elephant with one man riding it, even one man with a weapon in hand. Anuyyuttānāma (Following along) means the king goes to a park or a river; thus, he is following along.
316.Āpadāsūti jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyesu sati ettha gato muñcissāmīti gacchato anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
316.Āpadāsūti (In times of distress)—in situations involving danger to life or the holy life, there is no offense for one who goes thinking, "Having gone here, I will be freed." The rest here is straightforward. Originating from eḷakala—inaction, without perception of release, non-deliberate, a worldly offense, bodily action, unwholesome mind, tri-vedana.
Uyyuttasenāsikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Uyyuttasena-sikkhāpada is the eighth.
9. Senāvāsasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Description of the Senāvāsa-sikkhāpada
319.Navame –atthaṅgate sūriye senāya vasatīti tiṭṭhatu vā nisīdatu vā sayatu vā sacepi ākāse iddhiyā kañci iriyāpathaṃ kappeti, pācittiyameva.Senā vā paṭisenāya ruddhā hotīti yathā sañcāro chijjati; evaṃ ruddhā hoti.Palibuddhoti verikena vā issarena vā ruddho. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
319.In the ninth, atthaṅgate sūriye senāya vasatīti (dwelling with the army after the sun has set)—whether he stands, sits, or lies down, even if he assumes some posture in the sky by psychic power, it is only a pācittiya. Senā vā paṭisenāya ruddhā hotīti (The army is obstructed by another army)—it is obstructed in such a way that movement is cut off. Palibuddhoti (Obstructed) means obstructed by a barricade or an embankment. The rest is straightforward. Originating from eḷakala—inaction, without perception of release, non-deliberate, a rule-offense, bodily action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Senāvāsasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The Senāvāsa-sikkhāpada is the ninth.
10. Uyyodhikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Description of the Uyyodhika-sikkhāpada
322.Dasame – uggantvā uggantvā ettha yujjhantītiuyyodhikaṃ;sampahāraṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Balassa aggaṃ jānanti etthātibalaggaṃ;balagaṇanaṭṭhānanti attho. Senāya viyūhaṃsenābyūhaṃ;senānivesassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Tayo hatthī pacchimaṃ hatthānīkanti yo pubbe vutto dvādasapuriso hatthīti tena hatthinā tayo hatthī. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ uyyuttasenāsikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
322.In the tenth—uyyodhikaṃ (battle ground) is a term for the place of fighting, where they fight rising up and rising up. Balaggaṃ (battle array) is where they know the strength of the army; the meaning is the place for counting the strength. Senābyūhaṃ (military formation) is a term for the arrangement of the army. Tayo hatthī pacchimaṃ hatthānīkanti (Three elephants are the rear division of elephants)—three elephants in relation to that elephant with twelve men mentioned earlier. The same method applies to the rest as well. The rest should be understood in the same manner as explained in the Uyyuttasena-sikkhāpada, along with the origination, etc.
Uyyodhikasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The Uyyodhika-sikkhāpada is the tenth.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena acelakavaggo pañcamo.
The fifth Acelaka Vagga is completed according to the order of description.
6. Surāpānavaggo
6. Surāpāna Vagga
1. Surāpānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the Surāpāna-sikkhāpada
326.Surāpānavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –bhaddavatikāti eko gāmo, so bhaddikāya vatiyā samannāgatattā etaṃ nāma labhi.Pathāvinoti addhikā.Tejasā tejanti attano tejasā ānubhāvena nāgassa tejaṃ.Kāpotikāti kapotapādasamavaṇṇarattobhāsā.Pasannāti surāmaṇḍassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Ananucchaviyaṃ bhikkhave sāgatassāti pañcābhiññassa sato majjapānaṃ nāma na anucchaviyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
326.In the first sikkhāpada of the Surāpāna Vagga—bhaddavatikāti (Bhaddavatika) is the name of a village, so called because it is endowed with the bhaddika vati. Pathāvinoti (Travelers) means wayfarers. Tejasā tejanti (Power with power) means the power of the Nāga with his own influential power. Kāpotikāti (Kapota-colored) means having a red glow similar to the color of a pigeon's foot. Pasannāti (Clear) is a term for the essence of liquor. Ananucchaviyaṃ bhikkhave sāgatassāti (Unsuitable, monks, for one who has come well)—it is said that drinking intoxicants is unsuitable for one who possesses the five abhiññās (supernormal knowledges).
328.Pupphāsavonāma madhukapupphādīnaṃ rasena kato.Phalāsavonāma muddikaphalādīni madditvā tesaṃ rasena kato.Madhvāsavonāma muddikānaṃ jātirasena kato; makkhikamadhunāpi kariyatīti vadanti.Guḷāsavonāma ucchurasādīhi kariyati.Surānāma piṭṭhakiṇṇapakkhittā; nāḷikerādīnampi rasena katā surātveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati, tassāyeva kiṇṇapakkhittāya maṇḍe gahite merayotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti vadanti.Antamaso kusaggenapi pivatīti etaṃ suraṃ vā merayaṃ vā bījato paṭṭhāya kusaggena pivatopi pācittiyanti attho. Ekena pana payogena bahumpi pivantassa ekā āpatti. Vicchinditvā vicchinditvā pivato payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo.
328.Pupphāsavonāma (Flower liquor) is made from the juice of madhuka flowers, etc. Phalāsavonāma (Fruit liquor) is made by crushing muddika fruits, etc., and using their juice. Madhvāsavonāma (Honey liquor) is made from the natural juice of muddika fruits; some say it is also made with bee honey. Guḷāsavonāma (Molasses liquor) is made from sugarcane juice, etc. Surānāma (Liquor) is made by adding flour and yeast; liquor made from the juice of coconuts, etc., is also counted as liquor. It is said that when the sediment of that same yeast-added liquor is taken, it is counted as meraya. Antamaso kusaggenapi pivatīti (Even if he drinks with a blade of grass)—the meaning is that even if he drinks this liquor or meraya from the beginning using a blade of grass, there is a pācittiya. However, there is only one offense for drinking a lot with one effort. For one who drinks intermittently, there are offenses according to the number of efforts.
329.Amajjañca hoti majjavaṇṇaṃ majjagandhaṃ majjarasanti loṇasovīrakaṃ vā suttaṃ vā hoti.Sūpasampāketi vāsagāhāpanatthaṃ īsakaṃ majjaṃ pakkhipitvā sūpaṃ pacanti, tasmiṃ anāpatti.Maṃsasampākepi eseva nayo. Telaṃ pana vātabhesajjatthaṃ majjena saddhiṃ pacanti, tasmimpi anatikkhittamajjeyeva anāpatti, yaṃ pana atikkhittamajjaṃ hoti, ettha majjassa vaṇṇagandharasā paññāyanti, tasmiṃ āpattiyeva.Amajjaṃ ariṭṭhanti yo ariṭṭho majjaṃ na hoti, tasmiṃ anāpatti. Āmalakādīnaṃyeva kira rasena ariṭṭhaṃ karonti, so majjavaṇṇagandharasoyeva hoti, na ca majjaṃ; taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yo pana sambhārapakkhitto, so majjaṃ hoti, bījato paṭṭhāya na vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti. Vatthuajānanatāya cettha acittakatā veditabbā, akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatāti.
329.Amajjañca hoti majjavaṇṇaṃ majjagandhaṃ majjarasanti (And it is non-intoxicating but has the color, smell, and taste of intoxicants)—it is either loṇasovīraka (sour gruel with salt) or sutta (vinegar). Sūpasampāketi (In the preparation of soup)—they cook soup by adding a little intoxicant for the purpose of enhancing the flavor; there is no offense in that. The same method applies to the maṃsasampāke (preparation of meat) as well. However, oil is cooked with intoxicants for the purpose of treating wind disorders; in that case too, there is no offense as long as the intoxicant is not excessive. But when the intoxicant is excessive, where the color, smell, and taste of the intoxicant are evident, there is an offense. Amajjaṃ ariṭṭhanti (Non-intoxicating herbal drink)—there is no offense in an ariṭṭha that is not intoxicating. It seems that they make ariṭṭha with the juice of āmalaka etc., it has the color, smell, and taste of intoxicants, but it is not an intoxicant; this is said in reference to that. However, if it is mixed with ingredients that cause intoxication, it is an intoxicant, and it is not permissible from the beginning. The rest here is straightforward. Originating from eḷakala—inaction, without perception of release, non-deliberate, a worldly offense, bodily action, unwholesome mind, tri-vedana. Here, being non-deliberate is to be understood due to not knowing the basis (of the offense), and being a worldly offense is due to the act of drinking being unwholesome.
Surāpānasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The Surāpāna-sikkhāpada is the first.
2. Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Description of the Aṅgulipatodaka-sikkhāpada
330.Dutiye –aṅgulipatodakenāti aṅgulīhi upakacchakādighaṭṭanaṃ vuccati.Uttasantoti atihāsena kilamanto.Anassāsakoti upacchinnaassāsapassāsasañcāro hutvā.Anupasampannaṃ kāyena kāyanti ettha bhikkhunīpi anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitā, tampi khiḍḍādhippāyena phusantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
330.In the second—aṅgulipatodakenāti (With finger-snapping) refers to rubbing the armpits, etc., with the fingers. Uttasantoti (Panting) means becoming exhausted with excessive laughter. Anassāsakoti (Breathless) means having interrupted breathing. Anupasampannaṃ kāyena kāyanti (Touching a non-ordained person body to body)—here, even a bhikkhunī standing in a place for the non-ordained, there is a dukkaṭa for touching her with the intention of playing. The rest here is straightforward.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.
Originating from the first pārājika—inaction, perception of release, deliberate, a worldly offense, bodily action, unwholesome mind, dual-vedana.
Aṅgulipatodakasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Aṅgulipatodaka-sikkhāpada is the second.
3. Hasadhammasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Description of the Hasadhamma-sikkhāpada
335.Tatiye –appakataññunoti yaṃ bhagavatā pakataṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ na jānantīti attho.
335.In the third—appakataññunoti (Not knowing what has been done) means not knowing what has been done and prescribed by the Blessed One.
336.Udake hasadhammeti udakakīḷikā vuccati.Uparigopphaketi gopphakānaṃ uparibhāgappamāṇe.Hasādhippāyoti kīḷādhippāyo.Nimujjati vātiādīsu nimujjanatthāya orohantassa padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ. Nimujjanummujjanesu payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Nimujjitvā antoudakeyeva gacchantassa hatthavārapadavāresu sabbattha pācittiyaṃ.Palavatīti tarati. Hatthehi tarantassa hatthavāre hatthavāre pācittiyaṃ. Pādesupi eseva nayo. Yena yena aṅgena tarati, tassa tassa payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Tīrato vā rukkhato vā udake patati, pācittiyameva.Nāvāya kīḷatīti phiyārittādīhi nāvaṃ pājento vā tīre ussārento vā nāvāya kīḷati, dukkaṭaṃ.
336.Udake hasadhammeti (In water for play) refers to water games. Uparigopphaketi (Above the ankles) means to the extent above the ankles. Hasādhippāyoti (Intention to play) means intention to sport. Nimujjati vātiādīsu (Either diving) etc.—there is a dukkaṭa for each foot movement when descending for the purpose of diving. There is a pācittiya for each effort in diving and surfacing. For one who is diving and going only under water, there is a pācittiya everywhere for hand movements and foot movements. Palavatīti (Swimming) means floats. For one who swims with his hands, there is a pācittiya for each hand movement. The same method applies to the feet as well. With whichever part of the body he swims, there is a pācittiya for each effort. There is only a pācittiya for falling into the water from the shore or a tree. Nāvāya kīḷatīti (Playing with a boat) means playing with a boat by propelling the boat with oars, etc., or pulling it up on the shore; there is a dukkaṭa.
Hatthena vātiādīsupi payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Keci hatthena udake khittāya kathalāya patanuppatanavāresu dukkaṭaṃ vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Tattha hi ekapayogattā ekameva dukkaṭaṃ, apica uparigopphake vuttāni ummujjanādīni ṭhapetvā aññena yena kenaci ākārena udakaṃ otaritvā vā anotaritvā vā yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ antamaso binduṃ gahetvā khipanakīḷāyapi kīḷantassa dukkaṭameva, atthajotakaṃ pana akkharaṃ likhituṃ vaṭṭati, ayamettha vinicchayo. Sesamettha uttānameva.
561.Hatthena vātiādīsupi (Or with the hand) etc., there is a dukkaṭa for each effort. Some say that there is a dukkaṭa for each instance of throwing a potsherd into the water with the hand, for each descent and ascent, but that should not be taken (as correct). There, because it is one effort, there is only one dukkaṭa. Moreover, having set aside the immersions etc. mentioned in the part about "above the ankles", for anyone who enters the water by any other manner, whether or not one has entered the water, for water that is in any place whatsoever, there is a dukkaṭa even for playing the game of throwing even a drop of water; however, it is permissible to write a meaningful letter; this is the determination here. The rest here is straightforward.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Originating from the first pārājika—inaction, perception of release, deliberate, a worldly offense, bodily action, unwholesome mind, tri-vedana.
Hasadhammasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Hasadhamma-sikkhāpada is the third.
4. Anādariyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Description of the Anādariya-sikkhāpada
342.Catutthe –kathāyaṃ nasseyyāti kathaṃ ayaṃ dhammo tanti paveṇī nasseyya.Taṃ vā na sikkhitukāmoti yena paññattena vuccati, taṃ paññattaṃ na sikkhitukāmo.Apaññattenāti sutte vā abhidhamme vā āgatena.
342.In the fourth—kathāyaṃ nasseyyāti (Lest the talk should be lost) means how this Dhamma, this lineage, should not be lost. Taṃ vā na sikkhitukāmoti (Or not wishing to learn that) means not wishing to learn that which is called "prescribed." Apaññattenāti (By what is not prescribed) means by what comes in the Suttas or Abhidhamma.
344.Evaṃamhākaṃ ācariyānaṃ uggahoti ettha gārayho ācariyuggaho na gahetabbo; paveṇiyā āgato ācariyuggahova gahetabbo. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘lokavajje ācariyuggaho na vaṭṭati, paṇṇattivajje pana vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ ‘‘suttaṃ suttānulomañca uggahitakānaṃyeva ācariyānaṃ uggaho pamāṇaṃ, ajānantānaṃ kathā appamāṇanti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ paveṇiyā āgatesamodhānaṃ gacchati. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
344.Evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyānaṃ uggahoti, here, the ācariyuggaha which is blameworthy should not be taken; only the ācariyuggaha that has come by tradition should be taken. However, in the Kurundi, it is said, "The ācariyuggaha is not valid in the case of lokavajja, but it is valid in the case of paṇṇattivajja." In the Mahāpaccari, it is said, "The uggaha of the teachers who have grasped the Sutta and what accords with the Sutta is the standard; the talk of those who do not know is not the standard." All that goes to the combination that has come by tradition. The rest is clear.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Tri-arising: it arises from body and mind, from speech and mind, and from body, speech and mind; it is an action, without intention of release, with consciousness, a world offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome mind, and painful feeling.
Anādariyasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The fourth, the Disrespectful Training Rule.
5. Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Description of the Frightening Training Rule
345.Pañcame – rūpūpahārādayo manussaviggahe vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni anādariyasadisānevāti.
345.In the fifth, the offering of forms (rūpūpahārā) and so on should be understood in the same way as stated in the section on human beings. The rest is clear. The arising and so on are similar to the Disrespectful one.
Bhiṃsāpanasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The fifth, the Frightening Training Rule.
6. Jotisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Description of the Fire Training Rule
350.Chaṭṭhe –bhaggāti janapadassa nāmaṃ.Saṃsumāragiranti nagarassa.Bhesakaḷāvananti tannissitavanassa. Taṃ pana migānaṃ phāsuvihāratthāya dinnattāmigadāyoti vuccati.Samādahitvāti jāletvā.Paripātesīti anubandhi.
350.In the sixth, Bhaggā is the name of a country. Saṃsumāragira is the name of a city. Bhesakaḷāvana is the name of the forest dependent on it. However, because it was given for the comfortable dwelling of animals, it is called Migadāya. Samādahitvā means having kindled. Paripātesī means chased after.
352.Padīpepīti padīpujjalanepi.Jotikepīti pattapacanasedakammādīsu jotikaraṇe.Tathārūpapaccayāti padīpādipaccayā.
352.Padīpepī means even with the lighting of a lamp. Jotikepī means in making light in cooking pots, etc. Tathārūpapaccayā means because of a condition of such a kind, such as a lamp.
354-5.Sayaṃ samādahatīti ettha jotiṃ samādahitukāmatāya araṇisaṇṭhapanato paṭṭhāya yāva jālā na uṭṭhahati, tāva sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ.Paṭilātaṃ ukkhipatīti dayhamānaṃ alātaṃ patitaṃ ukkhipati, puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetīti attho. Evaṃ avijjhātaṃ ukkhipitvā pakkhipantasseva dukkaṭaṃ, vijjhātaṃ puna jālāpentassa pācittiyameva.
354-5.Sayaṃ samādahatīti, here, from the setting up of the fire-stick, wanting to kindle a flame, until the flame does not rise, there is a dukkaṭa for all efforts. Paṭilātaṃ ukkhipatīti, he lifts up a burning firebrand (alāta) that has fallen, that is, he puts it back in its original place. Thus, there is a dukkaṭa for lifting up and throwing away one that has not caught fire, but for one who kindles the flame again on one that has caught fire, it is a pācittiya.
356.Tathārūpapaccayāti ṭhapetvā padīpādīni aññenapi tathārūpena paccayena samādahantassa anāpatti.Āpadāsūti duṭṭhavāḷamigaamanussehi upaddavo hoti, tattha samādahantassāpi anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
356.Tathārūpapaccayāti, having set up lamps etc., there is no offense for one who kindles with another condition of such a kind. Āpadāsūti, if there is oppression by wicked wild animals or humans, there is no offense even for one who kindles there. The rest is clear. Six-fold arising: it is an action, without intention of release, without consciousness, a regulation offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, tri-arising mind, tri-arising feeling.
Jotisikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The sixth, the Fire Training Rule.
7. Nahānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Description of the Bathing Training Rule
364.Sattame –cuṇṇena vā mattikāya vāti ettha cuṇṇamattikānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇakālato paṭṭhāya sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ.
364.In the seventh, cuṇṇena vā mattikāya vāti, here, from the time of preparing the powder or clay, there is a dukkaṭa for all efforts.
366.Pāraṃ gacchanto nhāyatīti ettha sukkhāya nadiyā vālikaṃ ukkiritvā kataāvāṭakesupi nhāyituṃ vaṭṭati.Āpadāsūti bhamarādīhi anubaddhassa udake nimujjituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
366.Pāraṃ gacchanto nhāyatīti, here, it is valid to bathe even in small ponds made by scooping out sand in a dry river. Āpadāsūti, it is valid to dive into the water for one who is being pursued by bees and so on. The rest here is clear. Arising like a sheep's hair: it is an action, without intention of release, without consciousness, a regulation offense, a bodily action, tri-arising mind, tri-arising feeling.
Nahānasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The seventh, the Bathing Training Rule.
8. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Description of the Discoloration Training Rule
368-9.Aṭṭhame –navaṃ pana bhikkhunā cīvaralābhenāti ettha alabhīti labho; labhoyeva lābho. Kiṃ alabhi? Cīvaraṃ. Kīdisaṃ? Navaṃ. Iti ‘‘navacīvaralābhenā’’ti vattabbe anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā ‘‘navacīvaralābhenā’’ti vuttaṃ; paṭiladdhanavacīvarenāti attho. Majjhe ṭhitapadadvayepanāti nipāto.Bhikkhunāti yena laddhaṃ tassa nidassanaṃ. Padabhājane pana byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā yaṃ laddhaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cīvaraṃ nāma channaṃ cīvarāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Cīvaranti ettha yaṃ nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā sakkā hoti, tadeva veditabbaṃ. Teneva ‘‘vikappanupagapacchima’’nti na vuttaṃ.Kaṃsanīlanti cammakāranīlaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘ayomalaṃ lohamalaṃ etaṃ kaṃsanīlaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.Palāsanīlanti yo koci nīlavaṇṇo paṇṇaraso.Dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ ādātabbanti etaṃ kappabinduṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ; na nīlādīhi sakalacīvarassa dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ. Tañca pana kappaṃ ādiyantena cīvaraṃ rajitvā catūsu vā koṇesu tīsu vā dvīsu vā ekasmiṃ vā koṇe morassa akkhimaṇḍalamattaṃ vā maṅkulapiṭṭhimattaṃ vā ādātabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ ‘‘patte vā gaṇṭhiyaṃ vā na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pāḷikappakaṇṇikakappādayo pana sabbattha paṭisiddhā, tasmā ṭhapetvā ekaṃ vaṭṭabinduṃ aññena kenacipi vikārena kappo na kātabbo.
368-9.In the eighth, navaṃ pana bhikkhunā cīvaralābhenāti, here, alabhīti labho; gain is indeed gain. What was gained? A robe. What kind? New. Thus, instead of saying "navacīvaralābhena," it is said "navacīvaralābhena" without dropping the nasal consonant; the meaning is "with a newly acquired robe." In the two words in the middle, panāti is a particle. Bhikkhunāti is an indication of the one by whom it was obtained. However, in the word analysis, in order to show what was obtained without regard to the literal meaning, it is said, "cīvaraṃ nāma channaṃ cīvarāna," etc. Cīvaranti, here, whatever is able to be worn or wrapped should be understood. Therefore, "vikappanupagapacchima" is not said. Kaṃsanīlanti is tanner's blue. However, in the Mahāpaccari, it is said, "Iron rust, iron impurity, this is called kaṃsanīla." Palāsanīlanti is any blue-colored leaf juice. Dubbaṇṇakaraṇaṃ ādātabbanti, this is said with reference to the marking spot (kappa-bindu); not the discoloration of the entire robe with blue etc. And that mark should be taken by one who takes up the mark after dyeing the robe, in four, three, two, or one corner, the size of a peacock's eye or the back of a maṅkula. In the Mahāpaccari, it is said, "It is not valid on a bowl or knot." However, in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, it is said, "It is valid." However, Pāḷikappakaṇṇikakappādayo are prohibited everywhere, therefore, having set aside one round spot, a mark should not be made with any other alteration.
371.Aggaḷetiādīsu etāni aggaḷādīni kappakatacīvare pacchā āropetvā kappakaraṇakiccaṃ natthi. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ; kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
371.In Aggaḷeti and so on, there is no need to perform the act of making a mark after applying these bars etc. to a robe that has already had a mark made. The rest is clear. Arising like a sheep's hair: it is action-inaction, without intention of release, without consciousness, a regulation offense; a bodily action, tri-arising mind, tri-arising feeling.
Dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The eighth, the Discoloration Training Rule.
9. Vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Description of the Assigning Training Rule
374.Navame –tassa vā adinnanti cīvarasāmikassa ‘‘paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti evaṃ vatvā adinnaṃ.Tassa vā avissasantoti yena vinayakammaṃ kataṃ, tassa avissāsena vā. Tena pana dinnaṃ vā tassa vissāsena vā paribhuñjantassa anāpatti. Sesamettha tiṃsakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayattā uttānamevāti. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
374.In the ninth, tassa vā adinnanti, not given by the owner of the robe after saying, "Use it, dispose of it, or do as you please." Tassa vā avissasantoti, or by not trusting him by whom the vinaya act has been done. However, there is no offense for one who uses it by him having given it or by trusting him. The rest here is clear, as it was stated in the description of the thirtieth.
Vikappanasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
Kathina-arising: it arises from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; it is action-inaction, without intention of release, without consciousness, a regulation offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, tri-arising mind, tri-arising feeling.
10. Cīvarāpanidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
The ninth, the Assigning Training Rule.
377-81.Dasame –apanidhentīti apanetvā nidhenti.Hasāpekkhoti hasādhippāyo.Aññaṃ parikkhāranti pāḷiyā anāgataṃ pattatthavikādiṃ.Dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvāti ‘‘samaṇena nāma anihitaparikkhārena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti evaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathetvā dassāmīti nikkhipato anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
10. Description of the Hiding a Robe Training Rule
Cīvarāpanidhānasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
377-81.In the tenth, apanidhentīti, they hide it, having removed it. Hasāpekkhoti, intending to mock. Aññaṃ parikkhāranti, bowl, needle case etc. not mentioned in the Pāḷi. Dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvāti, there is no offense for one who puts it down, thinking, "It is not proper for a renunciate to be without hidden requisites," after making a Dhamma talk in this way. The rest here is clear. Tri-arising: it is an action, with intention of release, with consciousness, a world offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome mind, tri-arising feeling.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena surāpānavaggo chaṭṭho.
The sixth, the Alcohol Chapter, is complete according to the order of description.
7. Sappāṇakavaggo
7. The Living-Being Chapter
1. Sañciccapāṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the Intentional Killing of a Living Being Training Rule
382.Sappāṇakavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –issāso hotīti gihikāle dhanuggahācariyo hoti.Jīvitā voropitāti jīvitā viyojitā.
382.In the first training rule of the Living-Being Chapter, issāso hotīti, he was an archery teacher in his lay life. Jīvitā voropitāti, separated from life.
voropeyyāti viyojeyya. Yasmā pana vohāramattamevetaṃ; na hettha kiñci viyojite sīsālaṅkāre sīsaṃ viya jīvitā voropite pāṇepi jīvitaṃ nāma visuṃ tiṭṭhati, aññadatthu antaradhānameva gacchati, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ padabhājane ‘‘jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca sikkhāpade tiracchānagatoyeva ‘‘pāṇo’’ti veditabbo. Taṃ khuddakampi mahantampi mārentassa āpattinānākaraṇaṃ natthi. Mahante pana upakkamamahantattā akusalamahattaṃ hoti.Pāṇe pāṇasaññīti antamaso mañcapīṭhaṃ sodhento maṅgulabījakepi pāṇasaññī nikkāruṇikatāya taṃ bhindanto apaneti, pācittiyaṃ. Tasmā evarūpesu ṭhānesu kāruññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā appamattena vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sesaṃ manussaviggahe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
Voropeyyāti, should separate. However, since this is merely a matter of expression; there is nothing here like the head remaining separate when an ornament is removed from the head, or life remaining separate when a being is removed from life, but rather it simply disappears, therefore, in order to show that meaning, it is said in the word analysis, "he destroys the life faculty," etc. And in this training rule, only a being in the animal realm should be understood as "living being." There is no non-offense for killing even a small or large one. However, in the case of a large one, there is great unwholesomeness because of the greatness of the undertaking. Pāṇe pāṇasaññīti, even when cleaning a bed or chair, if he is conscious of life in a maṅgula seed and destroys it out of pitilessness, he commits a pācittiya. Therefore, in such places, compassion should be established and the duty should be done with care. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the section on human beings, together with the arising and so on.
Sañciccapāṇasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The first, the Intentional Killing of a Living Being Training Rule.
2. Sappāṇakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. The Living-Beings Training Rule
387.Dutiye –sappāṇakanti ye pāṇakā paribhogena maranti, tehi pāṇakehi sappāṇakaṃ, tādisañhi jānaṃ paribhuñjato payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Pattapūrampi avicchinditvā ekapayogena pivato ekā āpatti. Tādisena udakena sāmisaṃ pattaṃ āviñchitvā dhovatopi tādise udake uṇhayāgupattaṃ nibbāpayatopi taṃ udakaṃ hatthena vā uḷuṅkena vā gahetvā nhāyatopi payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Udakasoṇḍiṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā pavisitvā bahinikkhamanatthāya vīciṃ uṭṭhāpayatopi. Soṇḍiṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā sodhentehi tato gahitaudakaṃ udakeyeva āsiñcitabbaṃ. Samīpamhi udake asati kappiyaudakassa aṭṭha vā dasa vā ghaṭe udakasaṇṭhānakappadese āsiñcitvā tattha āsiñcitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pavaṭṭitvā udake patissatī’’ti uṇhapāsāṇe udakaṃ nāsiñcitabbaṃ. Kappiyaudakena pana pāsāṇaṃ nibbāpetvā āsiñcituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
387.In the second, sappāṇakanti, that which is with living beings (pāṇaka) that die from being used, sappāṇaka is with such living beings, indeed, there is a pācittiya for each effort of one who knowingly uses such. There is one offense for drinking a bowlful without interruption in one effort. There is a pācittiya for each effort for one who washes a bowl contaminated with meat with such water, or for one who cools a hot rice-gruel bowl in such water, or for one who bathes taking that water with his hand or a scoop. Also, for one who enters a pond or lake and raises a wave to come out. Those who are cleaning a pond or lake should pour the water taken from there back into the water itself. If there is no water nearby, eight or ten pots of permissible water should be poured into a place that looks like water and then poured there. "Having rained, it will fall back into the water," water should not be poured on a hot stone. However, it is valid to cool a stone with permissible water and then pour it. The rest here is clear.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ,
Tri-arising: it is an action, with intention of release, with consciousness, a regulation offense, a bodily action,
Vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti. Ettha ca paṭaṅgapāṇakānaṃ patanaṃ ñatvāpi suddhacittatāya dīpajālane viya sappāṇakabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi udakasaññāya paribhuñjitabbato paṇṇattivajjatā veditabbāti.
a verbal action, tri-arising mind, tri-arising feeling. And here, even knowing the falling of insect-beings, because it should be used with pure intention like lighting a lamp, even knowing the state of being with living beings, because it should be used with the perception of water, its nature of being a regulation offense should be understood.
Sappāṇakasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The second, the Living-Beings Training Rule.
3. Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. The Accusation Training Rule
392.Tatiyasikkhāpade –ukkoṭentīti tassa tassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘akataṃ kamma’’ntiādīni vadantā uccālenti; yathāpatiṭṭhitabhāvena patiṭṭhātuṃ na denti.
392.In the third training rule, ukkoṭentīti, going to the presence of this or that bhikkhu and saying "the deed has not been done" etc., they stir them up; they do not allow them to be established in their proper state.
393.Yathādhammanti yo yassa adhikaraṇassa vūpasamanāya dhammo vutto, teneva dhammenāti attho.Nihatādhikaraṇanti nihataṃ adhikaraṇaṃ; satthārā vuttadhammeneva vūpasamitaṃ adhikaraṇanti attho.
393.Yathādhammanti, by that same Dhamma by which the Dhamma was spoken for the calming of whose ever offense it was. Nihatādhikaraṇanti, the offense is destroyed; the meaning is that the offense is calmed by the Dhamma spoken by the Teacher.
395.Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññīti yena kammena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamitaṃ, tañce dhammakammaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ dhammakamme ayampi dhammakammasaññī hutvā yadi ukkoṭeti, pācittiyaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Etena nayena sesapadānipi veditabbāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana ‘‘imesaṃ catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ kati ukkoṭanā’’tiādinā nayena parivāre vutto. Aṭṭhakathāsu taṃ sabbaṃ āharitvā tassevattho vaṇṇito. Mayaṃ pana taṃ tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. Idha āharitvā vaṇṇiyamāne hi suṭṭhutaraṃ sammoho bhaveyyāti na vaṇṇayimha. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
395.Dhammakamme dhammakammasaññīti, if that offense was calmed by whatever action, if that is a Dhamma action, and even he, being conscious of a Dhamma action in that Dhamma action, accuses, he incurs a pācittiya. The meaning of the remaining words should be understood in this way. Here is the summary; the expansion, however, is stated in the Parivāra in the manner beginning "How many accusations are there of these four offenses?" In the commentaries, all that is brought forth and the meaning of that itself is described. However, we will describe that there itself. For if it were brought here and described, there might be even greater confusion, therefore we did not describe it. The rest here is clear. Tri-arising: it is an action, with intention of release, with consciousness, a world offense, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome mind, painful feeling.
Ukkoṭanasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The third, the Accusation Training Rule.
4. Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. The Harsh Speech Training Rule
399.Catutthe –duṭṭhullā nāma āpattīti ettha cattāri pārājikāni atthuddhāravasena dassitāni, saṅghādisesāpatti pana adhippetā, taṃ chādentassa pācittiyaṃ.Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatteti dhure nikkhittamatte. Sacepi dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā pacchā āroceti, na rakkhati; dhuraṃ nikkhittamatteyeva pācittiyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sace pana evaṃ dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā paṭicchādanatthameva aññassa āroceti, sopi aññassāti etenupāyena samaṇasatampi samaṇasahassampi āpattiṃ āpajjatiyeva tāva, yāva koṭi na chijjati. Kadā pana koṭi chijjatīti? Mahāsumatthero tāva vadati – ‘‘āpattiṃ āpanno ekassa āroceti, so paṭinivattitvā tasseva āroceti; evaṃ koṭi chijjatī’’ti. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘ayañhi vatthupuggaloyeva. Āpattiṃ āpanno pana ekassa bhikkhuno āroceti, ayaṃ aññassa āroceti, so paṭinivattitvā yenassa ārocitaṃ, tasseva āroceti; evaṃ tatiyena puggalena dutiyassa ārocite koṭi chinnā hotī’’ti.
399.In the fourth, "duṭṭhullā nāma āpattī" (an offense that is serious) here shows the four pārājikā offenses in terms of abstracting the meaning, but it refers to a saṅghādisesa offense. A pācittiya results for concealing that. Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte (as soon as the responsibility is relinquished) means as soon as the responsibility is relinquished. Even if he relinquishes the responsibility and then informs later, it does not protect him; it means a pācittiya occurs as soon as the responsibility is relinquished. But if, having relinquished the responsibility in this way, he informs another person only for the purpose of concealment, even that person incurs the offense, and in this way, even a hundred or a thousand monks incur the offense until the chain is broken. When is the chain broken? Mahāsumatthera says, "The monk who has committed an offense informs one person, and that person, having turned back, informs the same person; in this way, the chain is broken." But Mahāpadumatthera says, "This is a matter of the individual involved. However, the monk who has committed an offense informs one bhikkhu, and this one informs another, and that one, having turned back, informs the one by whom he was informed; in this way, the chain is broken when the third person informs the second."
400.Aduṭṭhullaṃ āpattinti avasese pañcāpattikkhandhe.Anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāranti ettha anupasampannassa sukkavissaṭṭhi ca kāyasaṃsaggo cāti ayaṃ duṭṭhullaajjhācāro nāma. Sesamettha uttānamevāti. Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
400.Aduṭṭhullaṃ āpatti (an offense that is not serious) means the remaining five groups of offenses. Anupasampannassa duṭṭhullaṃ vā aduṭṭhullaṃ vā ajjhācāra (transgression with a non-ordained person that is either serious or not serious) here means the discharge of semen and bodily contact with a non-ordained person, this is called a serious transgression (duṭṭhullaajjhācāra). The rest here is self-explanatory. The origin of relinquishing responsibility arises from body, speech, and mind; is non-action, release from perception, intentional, a worldy fault, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome thought, and painful feeling.
Duṭṭhullasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The fourth Duṭṭhulla training rule.
5. Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Under Twenty Years of Age
402.Pañcamasikkhāpade –aṅguliyo dukkhā bhavissantīti akkharāni likhantassa aṅguliyo dukkhā bhavissantīti cintesuṃ.Urassa dukkhoti gaṇanaṃ sikkhantena bahuṃ cintetabbaṃ hoti, tenassa uro dukkho bhavissatīti maññiṃsu.Akkhīni dukkhā bhavissantīti rūpasuttaṃ sikkhantena kahāpaṇā parivattetvā parivattetvā passitabbā honti, tenassa akkhīni dukkhāni bhavissantīti maññiṃsu. Ḍaṃsādīsuḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikāyo.Dukkhānanti dukkhamānaṃ.Tibbānanti bahalānaṃ.Kharānanti tikhiṇānaṃ.Kaṭukānanti pharusānaṃ; amanāpatāya vā kaṭukarasasadisānaṃ.Asātānanti amadhurānaṃ.Pāṇaharānanti jīvitaharānaṃ.
402.In the fifth training rule, "aṅguliyo dukkhā bhavissantī" (the fingers will be painful), they thought, when writing letters, "the fingers will be painful." "Urassa dukkho" (pain in the chest), by learning counting, one has to think a lot, so they thought "his chest will be painful." "Akkhīni dukkhā bhavissantī" (the eyes will be painful), by learning the rūpasutta, kahāpaṇas have to be turned over and over to look at, so they thought "his eyes will be painful." Among mosquitoes etc., "ḍaṃsā" means brown flies. "Dukkhānaṃ" means painful. "Tibbānaṃ" means intense. "Kharānaṃ" means sharp. "Kaṭukānaṃ" means harsh; or like a bitter taste due to unpleasantness. "Asātānaṃ" means unpleasant. "Pāṇaharānaṃ" means life-threatening.
404.Sīmaṃ sammannatīti navaṃ sīmaṃ bandhati. Kurundiyaṃ pana udakukkhepaparicchindanepi dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.Paripuṇṇavīsativassoti paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya paripuṇṇavīsativasso; gabbhavīsopi hi paripuṇṇavīsativassotveva saṅkhye gacchati. Yathāha –
404.Sīmaṃ sammannati (establishes a sīma) means establishes a new sīma. But in the Kurundī, a dukkaṭa is stated even for determining the boundary by throwing water. Paripuṇṇavīsativasso (fully twenty years old) means fully twenty years old starting from the moment of conception; even a "gabbhavīsa" is counted as fully twenty years old. As it was said:
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā kumārakassapo gabbhavīso upasampanno hoti. Atha kho āyasmato kumārakassapassa etadahosi – ‘bhagavatā paññattaṃ, na ūnavīsativasso puggalo upasampādetabboti. Ahañcamhi gabbhavīso upasampanno. Upasampanno nukhomhi, nanu kho upasampanno’ti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Yaṃ bhikkhave mātukucchimhi paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ, paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ tadupādāya sāvassa jāti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gabbhavīsaṃ upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 124).
"At that time, the Venerable Kumārakassapa was ordained at the age of twenty since conception. Then this occurred to the Venerable Kumārakassapa: 'The Blessed One has prescribed that a person under twenty years of age should not be ordained. But I am ordained at the age of twenty since conception. Am I ordained, or am I not ordained?' They reported this matter to the Blessed One. 'Bhikkhus, counting from the first thought that arises in the mother's womb, the first consciousness that appears, from that is his birth. I allow, bhikkhus, the ordination of one who is twenty years old since conception'" (mahāva. 124).
Tattha yo dvādasamāse mātukucchismiṃ vasitvā mahāpavāraṇāya jāto, so tato paṭṭhāya yāva ekūnavīsatime vasse mahāpavāraṇā, taṃ atikkamitvā pāṭipade upasampādetabbo. Etenupāyena hāyanavaḍḍhanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
There, one who lived in the mother's womb for twelve months and was born on the great pavāraṇā day, from then until the great pavāraṇā in the nineteenth year, having passed that, should be ordained on the first day of the waxing moon. In this way, the increase and decrease of years should be understood.
Porāṇakattherā pana ekūnavīsativassaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ nikkhamanīyapuṇṇamāsiṃ atikkamma pāṭipadadivase upasampādenti, taṃ kasmāti? Vuccate – ekasmiṃ vasse cha cātuddasikauposathā honti. Iti vīsatiyā vassesu cattāro māsā parihāyanti. Rājāno tatiye tatiye vasse vassaṃ ukkaḍḍhanti. Iti aṭṭhārasasu vassesu cha māsā vaḍḍhanti, tato uposathavasena parihīne cattāro māse apanetvā dve māsā avasesā honti, te dve māse gahetvā vīsativassāni paripuṇṇāni hontīti nikkaṅkhā hutvā nikkhamanīyapuṇṇamāsiṃ atikkamma pāṭipade upasampādenti. Ettha pana yo pavāretvā vīsativasso bhavissati, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekūnavīsativassa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tasmā yo mātukucchismiṃ dvādasamāse vasi, so ekavīsativasso hoti. Yo sattamāse vasi, so sattamāsādhikavīsativasso. Chamāsajāto pana na jīvati.
The ancient elders, however, ordain a sāmaṇera who is one day past the nikkhamanīya full moon day of his nineteenth year. Why is that? It is said: in one year there are six cātuddasika uposatha days. Thus, in twenty years, four months are lost. Kings add a month every third year. Thus, in eighteen years, six months are added; then, having removed the four months lost due to the uposatha days, two months remain, taking those two months, twenty years are completed. Therefore, being without doubt, they ordain on the first day of the waxing moon, having passed the nikkhamanīya full moon day. Here, "ekūnavīsativassa" (under twenty years of age) is said in reference to one who will be twenty years old after pavāraṇā. Therefore, one who lived in the mother's womb for twelve months is twenty-one years old. One who lived for seven months is twenty years and seven months old. But one born at six months does not live.
406.Anāpatti ūnavīsativassaṃ paripuṇṇavīsativassasaññīti ettha kiñcāpi upasampādentassa anāpatti, puggalo pana anupasampannova hoti. Sace pana so dasavassaccayena aññaṃ upasampādeti, tañce muñcitvā gaṇo pūrati, sūpasampanno. Sopi ca yāva na jānāti, tāvassa neva saggantarāyo na mokkhantarāyo, ñatvā pana puna upasampajjitabbaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
406.Anāpatti ūnavīsativassaṃ paripuṇṇavīsativassasaññī (no offense if one thinks a person under twenty is fully twenty), here, although there is no offense for the one who ordains, the person is still not ordained. But if he ordains another after ten years, and if the gaṇa is filled after releasing him, he is well-ordained. And as long as he does not know, there is neither an obstacle to heaven nor an obstacle to liberation for him, but having known, he should be ordained again. The rest is self-explanatory.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ,
Triple origin: action, release from perception, intentional, an offense against a rule, bodily action,
Vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
verbal action, triple consciousness, triple feeling.
Ūnavīsativassasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The fifth training rule on under twenty years of age.
6. Theyyasatthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Traveling with Stolen Goods
407.Chaṭṭhe –paṭiyālokanti sūriyālokassa paṭimukhaṃ; pacchimadisanti attho.Kammiyāti suṅkaṭṭhāne kammikā.
407.In the sixth, "paṭiyāloka" means facing the sunlight; it means the western direction. "Kammiyā" means officials at the customs station.
409.Rājānaṃ vā theyyaṃ gacchantīti rājānaṃ vā thenetvā vañcetvā rañño santakaṃ kiñci gahetvā idāni na tassa dassāmāti gacchanti.
409.Rājānaṃ vā theyyaṃ gacchantī (going while stealing from the king) means either deceiving the king by stealing, taking something belonging to the king, and now going without giving it to him.
411.Visaṅketenāti kālavisaṅketena divasavisaṅketena ca gacchato anāpatti. Maggavisaṅketena pana aṭavivisaṅketena vā āpattiyeva. Sesamettha bhikkhunivagge vuttanayattā uttānatthameva. Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
411.Visaṅketenā (without arrangement), there is no offense for one who goes without a prior arrangement of the time or the day. But there is an offense for going without an arrangement of the road or the forest. The rest here is self-explanatory, since the method has been stated in the Bhikkhunī section. The origin of traveling with stolen goods arises from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; is action, release from perception, intentional, an offense against a rule, bodily action, verbal action, triple consciousness, triple feeling.
Theyyasatthasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The sixth training rule on traveling with stolen goods.
7. Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Conspiracy
412.Sattame –padhūpento nisīdīti pajjhāyanto attānaṃyeva paribhāsanto nisīdi.Nāyyo so bhikkhu maṃ nippātesīti ayyo ayaṃ bhikkhu maṃ na nikkhāmesi; na maṃ gahetvā agamāsīti attho. Sesamettha bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhānasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
412.In the seventh, "padhūpento nisīdī" (sat meditating) means sat contemplating, scolding himself. "Nāyyo so bhikkhu maṃ nippātesī" (that venerable bhikkhu did not bring me out) means that venerable bhikkhu did not take me out; it means he did not take me and go. The rest here should be understood in the same way as stated in the training rule on conspiracy with a bhikkhunī, along with the origins etc.
Saṃvidhānasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The seventh training rule on conspiracy.
8. Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Ariṭṭha Training Rule
417.Aṭṭhame – gaddhe bādhayiṃsūti gaddhabādhino; gaddhabādhino pubbapurisā assātigaddhabādhipubbo,tassa gaddhabādhipubbassa gijjhaghātakakulappasutassāti attho.
417.In the eighth, "gaddhe bādhayiṃsū" means those who harm vultures; "gaddhabādhipubbo" means his ancestors were those who harmed vultures, it means descended from a family that killed vultures.
antarāyikā. Te kammakilesavipākaupavādaāṇāvītikkamavasena pañcavidhā. Tattha pañcānantariyakammā kammantarāyikā nāma. Tathā bhikkhunīdūsakakammaṃ, taṃ pana mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassa. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā kilesantarāyikā nāma. Paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakānaṃ paṭisandhidhammā vipākantarāyikā nāma. Ariyūpavādā upavādantarāyikā nāma, te pana yāva ariye na khamāpenti tāvadeva, na tato paraṃ. Sañcicca āpannā āpattiyo āṇāvītikkamantarāyikā nāma, tāpi yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ vā paṭijānāti, na vuṭṭhāti vā na deseti vā tāvadeva, na tato paraṃ.
antarāyikā (obstacles). These are fivefold: obstacles due to kamma, defilements, results, censure, and transgression of the rule. Among them, the five ānantarika kammas are obstacles due to kamma. Likewise, the kamma of violating a bhikkhunī, but that only creates an obstacle to liberation, not to heaven. Fixed wrong views are obstacles due to defilements. The rebirth conditions of hermaphrodites, animals, and those with both sets of organs are obstacles due to results. Censure of the noble ones are obstacles due to censure, but those exist only until they apologize to the noble ones, not after that. Offenses committed intentionally are obstacles due to transgression of the rule, and those too exist only as long as he acknowledges being a bhikkhu, or does not renounce, or does not confess, not after that.
Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu bahussuto dhammakathiko sesantarāyike jānāti, vinaye pana akovidattā paṇṇattivītikkamantarāyike na jānāti, tasmā rahogato evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘ime āgārikā pañca kāmaguṇe paribhuñjantā sotāpannāpi sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi honti, bhikkhūpi manāpikāni cakkhuviññeyyāni rūpāni passanti…pe… kāyaviññeyye phoṭṭhabbe phusanti, mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇādīni paribhuñjanti, etaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā itthirūpā…pe… itthiphoṭṭhabbā eva na vaṭṭanti, etepi vaṭṭantī’’ti. Evaṃ rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvā sacchandarāgaparibhogañca nicchandarāgaparibhogañca ekaṃ katvā thūlavākehi saddhiṃ atisukhumasuttaṃ ghaṭento viya sāsapena saddhiṃ sineruṃ upasaṃharanto viya pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppādetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhagavatā mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya mahatā ussāhena paṭhamapārājikaṃ paññattaṃ, natthi ettha doso’’ti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ paṭivirujjhanto bhabbapuggalānaṃ āsaṃ chindanto jinassa āṇācakke pahāramadāsi. Tenāha – ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādi.
Here, this bhikkhu is very learned, a speaker of the Dhamma, he knows the other obstacles, but being unskilled in the Vinaya, he does not know the obstacles due to transgression of the rule, therefore, being alone, he thought thus: "These householders, enjoying the five strands of sense pleasure, are stream-enterers, once-returners, and non-returners, and bhikkhus also see desirable forms cognizable by the eye...pe... touch tangible objects cognizable by the body, enjoy soft bedding, coverings, etc., all this is allowable. Why are female forms...pe... female tangibles not allowable, these too are allowable." Thus, mixing flavor with flavor, combining indulgence in desire with non-indulgence in desire, like fitting a very thin thread with thick reeds, like bringing Mount Sineru together with a mustard seed, producing a bad view, "why did the Blessed One prescribe the first pārājika offense with great effort, like building the great ocean, there is no fault in this," contradicting the knowledge of the All-Knowing One, severing the hope of worthy individuals, he struck a blow at the wheel of the command of the Conqueror. Therefore, he said, "tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī (Thus I understand the Dhamma taught by the Blessed One.)" etc.
Aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamātiādimhiaṭṭhikaṅkalūpamāappassādaṭṭhena.Maṃsapesūpamābahusādhāraṇaṭṭhena.Tiṇukkūpamāanudahanaṭṭhena.Aṅgārakāsūpamāmahābhitāpanaṭṭhena.Supinakūpamāittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena.Yācitakūpamātāvakālikaṭṭhena.Rukkhaphalūpamāsabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena.Asisūnūpamāadhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena.Sattisūlūpamāvinivijjhanaṭṭhena.Sappasirūpamāsāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhenāti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana papañcasūdaniyaṃ majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. 1.234 ādayo; 2.42 ādayo) gahetabbo.Evaṃ byākhoti evaṃ viya kho. Sesamettha pubbe vuttanayattā uttānameva.
In aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā (simile of a skeleton) etc., aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā in the sense of little satisfaction. Maṃsapesūpamā (simile of a lump of flesh) in the sense of being commonly shared. Tiṇukkūpamā (simile of a grass torch) in the sense of not burning away desire. Aṅgārakāsūpamā (simile of a pit of embers) in the sense of great burning. Supinakūpamā (simile of a dream) in the sense of fleeting presence. Yācitakūpamā (simile of a loan) in the sense of being temporary. Rukkhaphalūpamā (simile of tree fruit) in the sense of shaking down all parts and limbs. Asisūnūpamā (simile of a butcher) in the sense of excessive cutting. Sattisūlūpamā (simile of a spear) in the sense of piercing through. Sappasirūpamā (simile of a snake's head) in the sense of fearing a snake. This is the summary here. But the detailed explanation should be taken from the Papañcasūdanī commentary on the Majjhima Nikāya (ma. ni. 1.234 ff.; 2.42 ff.). Evaṃ byākho (thus explain) means just like that. The rest here is self-explanatory, since the method has been stated before.
Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin of giving consent arises from body, speech, and mind; is non-action, release from perception, intentional, a worldly fault, a bodily action, a verbal action, an unwholesome thought, and painful feeling.
Ariṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The eighth Ariṭṭha training rule.
9. Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Association with a Suspended Monk
424-5.Navame –akaṭānudhammenāti anudhammo vuccati āpattiyā adassane vā appaṭikamme vā pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge vā dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena ukkhittakassa anulomavattaṃ disvā katā osāraṇā; so osāraṇasaṅkhāto anudhammo yassa na kato, ayaṃ akaṭānudhammo nāma, tādisena saddhinti attho. Tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘akaṭānudhammo nāma ukkhitto anosārito’’ti vuttaṃ.
424-5.In the ninth, "akaṭānudhammenā" (without having carried out the due process), anudhammo means seeing conduct in accordance with the rule of one who has been suspended by the Dhamma, the Vinaya, the Teacher’s instruction, due to not seeing the offense, or not making amends, or not relinquishing the evil view; the reinstatement that is called osāraṇā; one who has not had that done is called akaṭānudhammo, meaning with such a one. Therefore, in its word analysis, it is said, "akaṭānudhammo nāma ukkhitto anosārito (akaṭānudhammo means suspended and not reinstated)."
Deti vā paṭiggaṇhāti vāti ekapayogena bahumpi dadato vā gaṇhato vā ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Vicchinditvā vicchinditvā dentassa ca gaṇhantassa ca payogagaṇanāya pācittiyāni. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Deti vā paṭiggaṇhāti vā (gives or receives), with one effort, whether giving or taking even a lot, there is one pācittiya. For one who gives or takes discontinuously, there are pācittiyas according to the number of efforts. The rest here is self-explanatory. Triple origin: action, release from perception, intentional, an offense against a rule, bodily action, verbal action, triple consciousness, triple feeling.
Ukkhittasambhogasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The ninth training rule on association with a suspended monk.
10. Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Kaṇṭaka Training Rule
428.Dasame –diṭṭhigataṃ uppannanti ariṭṭhassa viya etassāpi ayoniso ummujjantassa uppannaṃ.Nāsetūti ettha tividhā nāsanā – saṃvāsanāsanā, liṅganāsanā, daṇḍakammanāsanāti. Tattha āpattiyā adassanādīsu ukkhepanā saṃvāsanāsanā nāma. ‘‘Dūsako nāsetabbo (pārā. 66) mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsethā’’ti (pārā. 384) ayaṃ liṅganāsanā nāma. ‘‘Ajjatagge te āvuso samaṇuddesa na ceva so bhagavā satthā apadisitabbo’’ti ayaṃ daṇḍakammanāsanā nāma. Ayaṃ idha adhippetā. Tenāha – ‘‘evañca pana bhikkhave nāsetabbo…pe… vinassā’’ti. Tatthacarāti gaccha.Pireti para amāmaka.Vinassāti nassa; yattha te na passāma, tattha gacchāti.
428.In the tenth, "diṭṭhigataṃ uppannaṃ" (a wrong view arose) means, arising improperly for this one too, like for Ariṭṭha. "Nāsetū" (he should expel), here there are three kinds of expulsion: expulsion of association (saṃvāsanāsanā), expulsion of status (liṅganāsanā), expulsion by disciplinary action (daṇḍakammanāsanā). There, the suspension due to not seeing the offense etc., is called expulsion of association. "Dūsako nāsetabbo (a corrupter should be expelled)" (pārā. 66), "expel the bhikkhunī Mettiya" (pārā. 384), this is called expulsion of status. "From today, Āvuso, you should not call that Blessed One your teacher" this is called expulsion by disciplinary action. This is what is meant here. Therefore, he said, "evañca pana bhikkhave nāsetabbo…pe… vinassā (in this way, bhikkhus, he should be expelled…pe… disappear)". There, "carā" means go. "Pire" means other, not mine. "Vinassā" means perish; go where we do not see you.
429.Upalāpeyyāti saṅgaṇheyya.Upaṭṭhāpeyyāti tena attano upaṭṭhānaṃ kārāpeyya. Sesaṃ ariṭṭhasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
429.Upalāpeyyā (should converse with) means should associate with. Upaṭṭhāpeyyā (should have him attend to) means should have him perform attendance for himself. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the Ariṭṭha training rule, along with the origins etc.
Kaṇṭakasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule on Thorns.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena sappāṇakavaggo sattamo.
The seventh chapter, Sappāṇaka Vagga, is completed according to the order of exposition.
8. Sahadhammikavaggo
8. Sahadhammika Vagga
1. Sahadhammikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Sahadhammika Training Rule
434.Sahadhammikavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –etasmiṃ sikkhāpadeti etasmiṃ sikkhāpade yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na tāva sikkhissāmi.Āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha pana vācāya vācāya āpatti veditabbā.Sikkhamānena bhikkhave bhikkhunāti ovādaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sikkhitukāmeneva hutvā ājānitabbañceva pucchitabbañca upaparikkhitabbañca. Sesamettha dubbacasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva padatthato veditabbaṃ. Vinicchayato uttānameva.
434. In the first training rule of the Sahadhammika Vagga: etasmiṃ sikkhāpade means, "In this training rule," what has been said, "I will not train in that." Āpatti pācittiyassā means here, an offense for each utterance should be understood. Sikkhamānena bhikkhave bhikkhunā means, monks, it should be known, asked, and examined by a monk who, having respectfully received the advice, wishes to train. The rest here should be understood in terms of the meaning of the words in the same way as stated in the Dubbacasikkhāpada. In terms of judgment, it is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
It arises from three sources: it is an action, involves intention to give up, is self-caused, is a worldy offense, is a bodily action, is a verbal action, arises from unwholesome consciousness, and is felt as painful.
Sahadhammikasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The First Training Rule on Those in Accordance with the Dhamma.
2. Vilekhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Vilekhana Training Rule
438.Dutiye –vinayakathaṃ kathetīti vinayakathā nāma kappiyākappiyaāpattānāpattisaṃvarapahānapaṭisaṃyuttakathā, taṃ katheti.Vinayassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti vinayassa vaṇṇo nāma pañcannampi sattannampi āpattikkhandhānaṃ vasena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā padabhājanena vaṇṇanā, taṃ bhāsati.Vinayapariyattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇantānaṃ vinayapariyattimūlakaṃ vaṇṇaṃ guṇaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ bhāsati. Vinayadharo hi vinayapariyattimūlake pañcānisaṃse chānisaṃse sattānisaṃse aṭṭhānisaṃse navānisaṃse dasānisaṃse ekādasānisaṃse ca labhati te sabbe bhāsatīti attho. Katame pañcānisaṃse labhatīti? Attano sīlakkhandhasuguttiādike. Vuttañhetaṃ –
438. In the second: vinayakathaṃ kathetī means he tells a Vinaya story, which is a story connected with what is allowable and not allowable, offenses and non-offenses, restraint and abandonment. Vinayassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means he speaks of the praise of the Vinaya, which is the description by way of placing the matrix (mātikaṃ) according to the five or seven groups of offenses and dividing it into words (padabhājana). Vinayapariyattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means he speaks of the praise, the virtue, the benefit rooted in the Vinaya learning of those who learn the Vinaya. For a Vinaya-holder obtains five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, or eleven benefits rooted in Vinaya learning, and he speaks of all of them. What are the five benefits he obtains? Beginning with the good protection of one's own aggregate of virtue (sīlakkhandha). Thus it was said:
‘‘Pañcime, bhikkhave, ānisaṃsā vinayadhare puggale – attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito, kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti, visārado saṅghamajjhe voharati, paccatthike sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhāti, saddhammaṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotī’’ti (pari. 325).
"Monks, there are these five benefits in a person who is a Vinaya-holder: one’s own aggregate of virtue is well-guarded and well-protected, he is a refuge for those beset by scruples, he speaks confidently in the midst of the Sangha, he soundly refutes opponents with the Dhamma, and he is committed to the stability of the true Dhamma" (pari. 325).
attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito?Idhekacco bhikkhu āpattiṃ āpajjantochahākārehi āpajjati– alajjitā, aññāṇatā, kukkuccapakatatā, akappiye kappiyasaññitā, kappiye akappiyasaññitā, satisammosāti.
attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito? How is one's own aggregate of virtue well-guarded and well-protected? Here, a certain monk incurs an offense in six ways: through shamelessness, through ignorance, through being beset by scruples, through perceiving what is impermissible as permissible, through perceiving what is permissible as impermissible, and through loss of mindfulness.
alajjitāyaāpattiṃ āpajjati? Akappiyabhāvaṃ jānantoyeva madditvā vītikkamaṃ karoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
alajjitāya āpattiṃ āpajjati? How does one incur an offense through shamelessness? Knowing its impermissible nature, he disregards it and commits the transgression. Thus it was said:
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati;
‘‘He intentionally incurs an offense, he conceals an offense;
And he goes to wrong destinations, such a person is called shameless’’ (pari. 359);
aññāṇatāyaāpajjati? Aññāṇapuggalo hi mando momūho kattabbākattabbaṃ ajānanto akattabbaṃ karoti, kattabbaṃ virādheti; evaṃ aññāṇatāya āpajjati.
aññāṇatāya āpajjati? How does one incur an offense through ignorance? An ignorant person, being dull and confused, not knowing what should and should not be done, does what should not be done and neglects what should be done; thus, he incurs an offense through ignorance.
kukkuccapakatatāyaāpajjati? Kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vinayadharaṃ pucchitvā kappiyañce kattabbaṃ siyā, akappiyañce na kattabbaṃ, ayaṃ pana ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti madditvā vītikkamatiyeva; evaṃ kukkuccapakatatāya āpajjati.
kukkuccapakatatāya āpajjati? How does one incur an offense through being beset by scruples? When scruples arise concerning what is permissible and impermissible, having asked a Vinaya-holder, if it is permissible, it should be done; if it is impermissible, it should not be done. But this one, thinking "it is allowable," disregards it and commits the transgression; thus, he incurs an offense through being beset by scruples.
akappiye kappiyasaññitāyaāpajjati? Acchamaṃsaṃ sūkaramaṃsanti khādati, dīpimaṃsaṃ migamaṃsanti khādati, akappiyabhojanaṃ kappiyabhojananti bhuñjati, vikāle kālasaññāya bhuñjati, akappiyapānakaṃ kappiyapānakanti pivati; evaṃ akappiye kappiyasaññitāya āpajjati.
akappiye kappiyasaññitāya āpajjati? How does one incur an offense through perceiving what is impermissible as permissible? He eats raw meat thinking it is pork, he eats leopard meat thinking it is deer meat, he consumes impermissible food thinking it is permissible food, he eats at the wrong time with the perception of the right time, he drinks impermissible drinks thinking they are permissible drinks; thus, he incurs an offense through perceiving what is impermissible as permissible.
kappiye akappiyasaññitāyaāpajjati? Sūkaramaṃsaṃ acchamaṃsanti khādati, migamaṃsaṃ dīpimaṃsanti khādati, kappiyabhojanaṃ akappiyabhojananti bhuñjati, kāle vikālasaññāya bhuñjati, kappiyapānakaṃ akappiyapānakanti pivati; evaṃ kappiye akappiyasaññitāya āpajjati.
kappiye akappiyasaññitāya āpajjati? How does one incur an offense through perceiving what is permissible as impermissible? He eats pork thinking it is raw meat, he eats deer meat thinking it is leopard meat, he consumes permissible food thinking it is impermissible food, he eats at the right time with the perception of the wrong time, he drinks permissible drinks thinking they are impermissible drinks; thus, he incurs an offense through perceiving what is permissible as impermissible.
satisammosāyaāpajjati? Sahaseyyacīvaravippavāsabhesajjacīvarakālātikkamanapaccayā āpattiñca satisammosāya āpajjati; evamidhekacco bhikkhu imehichahākārehi āpattiṃāpajjati.
satisammosāya āpajjati? How does one incur an offense through loss of mindfulness? He incurs an offense through loss of mindfulness due to reasons such as sleeping together, separation from the robe, medicine, and the passing of the robe-time; thus, a certain monk here incurs an offense in these six ways.
chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati.Kathaṃlajjitāyanāpajjati? So hi ‘‘passatha bho, ayaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ jānantoyeva paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotī’’ti imaṃ parūpavādaṃ rakkhantopi nāpajjati; evaṃ lajjitāya nāpajjati. Sahasā āpannampi desanāgāminiṃ desetvā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhahitvā suddhante patiṭṭhāti. Tato –
chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati. How does one not incur an offense in six ways? How does one not incur it lajjitāya through shame? He does not incur it protecting himself from the reproach, "Look, this one knowingly transgresses the rule regarding what is permissible and impermissible"; thus, he does not incur an offense through shame. Even if he incurs an offense suddenly, having confessed it, which leads to desanā, and having arisen from it, which leads to vuṭṭhāna, he becomes established in purity. Therefore –
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ na āpajjati, āpattiṃ na parigūhati;
‘‘He does not intentionally incur an offense, he does not conceal an offense;
And he does not go to wrong destinations, such a person is called shameful’’ (pari. 359)
Imasmiṃ lajjibhāve patiṭṭhitova hoti.
He is established in this state of being ashamed.
ñāṇatāyanāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ jānāti, tasmā kappiyameva karoti, akappiyaṃ na karoti; evaṃ ñāṇatāya nāpajjati.
ñāṇatāya nāpajjati? How does one not incur it through knowledge? He knows what is permissible and impermissible; therefore, he does only what is permissible and does not do what is impermissible; thus, he does not incur an offense through knowledge.
akukkuccapakatatāyanāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vatthuṃ oloketvā mātikaṃ padabhājanaṃ antarāpattiṃ āpattiṃ anāpattiñca oloketvā kappiyañce hoti karoti, akappiyañce na karoti; evaṃ akukkuccapakatatāya nāpajjati.
akukkuccapakatatāya nāpajjati? How does one not incur it through not being beset by scruples? When scruples arise concerning what is permissible and impermissible, he examines the matter, considering the matrix, the word division, the included offense, the offense, and the non-offense, and if it is permissible, he does it; if it is impermissible, he does not do it; thus, he does not incur an offense through not being beset by scruples.
akappiyādisaññitāyanāpajjati? So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ jānāti, tasmā akappiye kappiyasaññī na hoti, kappiye akappiyasaññī na hoti; suppatiṭṭhitā cassa sati hoti, adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ adhiṭṭheti, vikappetabbaṃ vikappeti. Iti imehi chahākārehi āpattiṃ nāpajjati. Āpattiṃ anāpajjanto akhaṇḍasīlo hoti parisuddhasīlo; evamassa attano sīlakkhandho sugutto hoti surakkhito.
akappiyādisaññitāya nāpajjati? How does one not incur it through perception of the impermissible? He knows what is permissible and impermissible; therefore, he does not perceive what is impermissible as permissible, nor does he perceive what is permissible as impermissible; and his mindfulness is well-established, he determines what should be determined, and he analyzes what should be analyzed. Thus, he does not incur an offense in these six ways. Not incurring an offense, he is one of unbroken virtue and pure virtue; thus, his own aggregate of virtue is well-guarded and well-protected.
kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti?Tiroraṭṭhesu tirojanapadesu ca uppannakukkuccā bhikkhū ‘‘asukasmiṃ kira vihāre vinayadharo vasatī’’ti dūratopi tassa santikaṃ āgantvā kukkuccaṃ pucchanti, so tehi katassa kammassa vatthuṃ oloketvā āpattānāpattigarukalahukādibhedaṃ sallakkhetvā desanāgāminiṃ desāpetvā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vuṭṭhāpetvā suddhante patiṭṭhāpeti; evaṃ kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti.
kukkuccapakatānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti? How is he a refuge for those beset by scruples? Monks in outlying districts and border regions, thinking, "A Vinaya-holder lives in such and such a monastery," come from afar to his presence and ask about their scruples. He examines the matter of the action they have done, discerns the difference between offense and non-offense, serious and minor, and having made them confess what leads to desanā and having made them arise from what leads to vuṭṭhāna, he establishes them in purity; thus, he is a refuge for those beset by scruples.
Visārado saṅghamajjhe voharatīti avinayadharassa hi saṅghamajjhe kathentassa bhayaṃ sārajjaṃ okkamati, vinayadharassa taṃ na hoti. Kasmā? ‘‘Evaṃ kathentassa doso hoti; evaṃ na doso’’ti ñatvā kathanato.
Visārado saṅghamajjhe voharatīti How does he speak confidently in the midst of the Sangha? Fear and hesitation overcome one who is not a Vinaya-holder when speaking in the midst of the Sangha, but this does not happen to a Vinaya-holder. Why? Because he knows, "There is fault in speaking thus; there is no fault in speaking thus."
Paccatthike sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti ettha dvidhā paccatthikā nāma – attapaccatthikā ca sāsanapaccatthikā ca. Tattha mettiyabhummajakā ca bhikkhū vaḍḍho ca licchavī amūlakena antimavatthunā codesuṃ, ime attapaccatthikā nāma. Ye vā panaññepi dussīlā pāpadhammā, sabbe te attapaccatthikā. Viparītadassanā pana ariṭṭhabhikkhukaṇṭakasāmaṇeravesālikavajjiputtakā parūpahāraaññāṇakaṅkhāparavitaraṇādivādā mahāsaṅghikādayo ca abuddhasāsanaṃ ‘‘buddhasāsana’’nti vatvā katapaggahā sāsanapaccatthikā nāma. Te sabbepi sahadhammena sakāraṇena vacanena yathā taṃ asaddhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na sakkonti, evaṃ suniggahitaṃ katvā niggaṇhāti.
Paccatthike sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggaṇhātīti How does he soundly refute opponents with the Dhamma? Here, opponents are of two kinds: opponents of oneself (attapaccatthikā) and opponents of the Teaching (sāsanapaccatthikā). Among them, the monks Mettiya and Bhummajaka and Vaḍḍha the Licchavi accused [others] with a baseless charge concerning the last matter (antimavatthu); these are called opponents of oneself. Or any other immoral and wicked monks, all of them are opponents of oneself. But those of distorted views, such as Ariṭṭha the monk, Kaṇṭaka the novice, the Vesāli Vajjiputtakas, and those with doctrines such as wrong livelihood, ignorance, doubt, and dependence on others, and the Mahāsaṅghikas, who insist that what is not the Buddha's teaching is the "Buddha's teaching," are called opponents of the Teaching. He soundly refutes all of them, having refuted them with the Dhamma, with reasoned words, in such a way that they are not able to establish that false Dhamma.
Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāpaṭipanno hotīti ettha pana tividho saddhammo pariyattipaṭipattiadhigamavasena. Tattha tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃpariyattisaddhammonāma. Terasa dhutaṅgaguṇā cuddasa khandhakavattāni dveasīti mahāvattānīti ayaṃpaṭipattisaddhammonāma. Cattāro maggā ca phalāni cāti ayaṃadhigamasaddhammonāma.
Saddhammaṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotīti How is he committed to the stability of the true Dhamma? Here, the true Dhamma is of three kinds: the Dhamma of learning (pariyatti), the Dhamma of practice (paṭipatti), and the Dhamma of realization (adhigama). Among them, the word of the Buddha, the Tipiṭaka, is called the Dhamma of learning. The thirteen qualities of the dhutaṅgas, the fourteen duties of the khandhakas, and the eighty-two great duties (mahāvattāni) are called the Dhamma of practice. The four paths and fruits are called the Dhamma of realization.
‘‘sāsanassa pariyatti mūla’’nti vadanti. Keci therā ‘‘ime ca subhadda bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṃ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214) iminā suttena‘‘sāsanassa paṭipattimūla’’nti vatvā ‘‘yāva pañca bhikkhū sammā paṭipannā saṃvijjanti, tāva sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hotī’’ti āhaṃsu. Itare pana therā pariyattiyā antarahitāya suppaṭipannassapi dhammābhisamayo natthī’’ti āhaṃsu. Sace pañca bhikkhū cattāri pārājikāni rakkhaṇakā honti, te saddhe kulaputte pabbājetvā paccantime janapade upasampādetvā dasavaggaṃ gaṇaṃ pūretvā majjhime janapadepi upasampadaṃ karissanti, etenupāyena vīsativaggagaṇaṃ saṅghaṃ pūretvā attanopi abbhānakammaṃ katvā sāsanaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ gamayissanti. Evamayaṃ vinayadharo tividhassāpi saddhammassa ciraṭṭhitiyā paṭipanno hotīti evamayaṃ vinayadharo ime tāva pañcānisaṃse paṭilabhatīti veditabbo.
"Learning is the root of the Teaching," some say. Some elders, quoting the sutta, "If these monks, Subhadda, were to live rightly, the world would not be empty of arahants" (dī. ni. 2.214), said, "Practice is the root of the Teaching," and said, "As long as five monks live rightly, the Teaching will last." Other elders said, "Without learning, there is no realization of the Dhamma even for those who practice well." If five monks are guardians of the four pārājikas, they will ordain faithful sons of good families, get them ordained in a border region, complete a group of ten, and perform the upasampadā ordination even in the central region; in this way, by completing a Sangha of twenty, having performed the act of restoration for themselves, they will bring the Teaching to growth, increase, and abundance. Thus, this Vinaya-holder is committed to the long-lasting stability of all three kinds of true Dhamma; thus, this Vinaya-holder should be understood to obtain these five benefits.
Katame cha ānisaṃse labhatīti? Tassādheyyo uposatho, pavāraṇā, saṅghakammaṃ, pabbajjā, upasampadā, nissayaṃ deti sāmaṇeraṃ upaṭṭhāpeti.
What six benefits does he obtain? He is the authority for the uposatha, the pavāraṇā, the Saṅghakamma, the pabbajjā, the upasampadā, he gives dependence (nissaya), and he maintains the novice (sāmaṇeraṃ upaṭṭhāpeti).
Ye ime cātuddasiko, pannarasiko, sāmaggiuposatho, saṅghe uposatho, gaṇe puggale uposatho, suttuddeso, pārisuddhi, adhiṭṭhānauposathoti nava uposathā, sabbe te vinayadharāyattā.
All these nine uposathas, namely, the fourteenth, the fifteenth, the uposatha of agreement, the uposatha of the Sangha, the uposatha in a group, the uposatha in an individual, the recitation of the suttas, the purity, the adhiṭṭhāna uposatha, all are dependent on the Vinaya-holder.
Yāpi ca imā cātuddasikā pannarasikā, sāmaggipavāraṇā, saṅghe pavāraṇā gaṇe puggale pavāraṇā, tevācikā, dvevācikā, samānavassikā pavāraṇāti nava pavāraṇāyo, tāpi vinayadharāyattā eva, tassa santakā, so tāsaṃ sāmī.
And these nine pavāraṇās, namely, the fourteenth, the fifteenth, the pavāraṇā of agreement, the pavāraṇā of the Sangha, the pavāraṇā in a group, the pavāraṇā in an individual, the three-word pavāraṇā, the two-word pavāraṇā, and the pavāraṇā of those of equal seniority, are also dependent on the Vinaya-holder, they belong to him, he is their master.
Yānipi imāni apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakammanti cattāri saṅghakammāni, tāni vinayadharāyattāni.
And these four Saṅghakamma, namely, the apalokanakamma, the ñattikamma, the ñattidutiyakamma, and the ñatticatutthakamma, are dependent on the Vinaya-holder.
Yāpi cāyaṃ upajjhāyena hutvā kulaputtānaṃ pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca kātabbā, ayampi vinayadharāyattāva. Na hi añño dvipiṭakadharopi etaṃ kātuṃ labhati. So eva nissayaṃ deti, sāmaṇeraṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Añño neva nissayaṃ dātuṃ labhati, na sāmaṇeraṃ upaṭṭhāpetuṃ. Sāmaṇerūpaṭṭhānaṃ paccāsīsanto pana vinayadharassa santike upajjhaṃ gāhāpetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ sādituṃ labhati. Ettha ca nissayadānañceva sāmaṇerūpaṭṭhānañca ekamaṅgaṃ.
And this pabbajjā and upasampadā for sons of good families, which are to be done by being an preceptor, are also dependent on the Vinaya-holder. For another, even if he is a two-piṭaka-holder, is not able to do this. He alone gives dependence and maintains the novice. Another is neither able to give dependence nor to maintain the novice. But one who anticipates the maintenance of a novice can have a preceptor near the Vinaya-holder and accomplish the practice of duties. And here, giving dependence and maintaining the novice are one thing.
Iti imesu chasu ānisaṃsesu ekena saddhiṃ purimā pañca cha honti, dvīhi saddhiṃ satta, tīhi saddhiṃ aṭṭha, catūhi saddhiṃ nava, pañcahi saddhiṃ dasa, sabbehi petehi saddhiṃ ekādasāti evaṃ vinayadharo puggalo pañca cha satta aṭṭha nava dasa ekādasa ca ānisaṃse labhatīti veditabbo. Evaṃ bhagavā ime ānisaṃse dassento vinayapariyattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti veditabbo.
Thus, in these six benefits, the former five together with one make six, together with two make seven, together with three make eight, together with four make nine, together with five make ten, and together with all those make eleven; thus, the Vinaya-holder should be understood to obtain five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, and eleven benefits. Thus, the Blessed One, showing these benefits, should be understood to speak of the praise of Vinaya learning.
Ādissaādissāti punappunaṃ vavatthapetvā visuṃ visuṃ katvā.Āyasmato upālissa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti vinayapariyattiṃ nissāya upālittherassa guṇaṃ bhāsati thometi pasaṃsati. Kasmā? Appeva nāma mama vaṇṇanaṃ sutvāpi bhikkhū upālissa santike vinayaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ maññeyyuṃ, evamidaṃ sāsanaṃ addhaniyaṃ bhavissati, pañcavassasahassāni pavattissatīti.
Ādissa ādissa means repeatedly determining, making distinct, separately. Āyasmato upālissa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means, relying on Vinaya learning, he speaks of the virtues of the Elder Upāli, praises, and extols him. Why? So that monks, even having heard my praise, might think, "Vinaya should be learned and mastered near Upāli," thus this Teaching will be long-lasting and will continue for five thousand years.
Tedha bahū bhikkhūti te imaṃ bhagavato vaṇṇanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ime kirānisaṃse neva suttantikā na ābhidhammikā labhantī’’ti yathāparikittitānisaṃsādhigame ussāhajātā bahū bhikkhū therā ca navā ca majjhimā ca āyasmato upālissa santike vinayaṃ pariyāpuṇantīti ayamettha attho.Idhāti nipātamattameva.
Tedha bahū bhikkhū means, having heard this praise of the Blessed One, thinking, "Suttanta-holders and Abhidhamma-holders do not obtain these benefits," many monks, elders, new ones, and middle ones, becoming enthusiastic about attaining the benefits as described, master the Vinaya near the venerable Upāli; this is the meaning here. Idhā is merely an expletive.
439-40.Uddissamāneti ācariyena antevāsikassa uddissamāne, so pana yasmā ācariye attano ruciyā uddisante vā ācariyaṃ yācitvā antevāsikena uddisāpente vā yo naṃ dhāreti, tasmiṃ sajjhāyaṃ karonte vā uddissamāno nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘uddisante vā uddisāpente vā sajjhāyaṃ vā karonte’’ti padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ.Khuddānukhuddakehīti khuddakehi ca anukhuddakehi ca.Yāvadevāti tesaṃ saṃvattanamariyādaparicchedavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etāni hi ye uddisanti, uddisāpenti sajjhāyanti vā, tesaṃ tāva saṃvattanti yāva ‘‘kappati nu kho, na kappati nu kho’’ti kukkuccasaṅkhāto vippaṭisāro vihesā vicikicchāsaṅkhāto manovilekho ca uppajjatiyeva. Atha vāyāvadevāti atisayavavatthāpanaṃ; tassa saṃvattantīti iminā sambandho, kukkuccāya vihesāya vilekhāya ativiya saṃvattantiyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Upasampannassa vinayaṃ vivaṇṇetīti upasampannassa santike tassa tasmiṃ vimatiṃ uppādetukāmo vinayaṃ vivaṇṇeti nindati garahati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
439-40. Uddissamāne means when the preceptor is reciting (the Pāṭimokkha) to the pupil. However, because the pupil either has the preceptor recite it according to his own preference or, having requested the preceptor, has the preceptor recite it, he is called "reciting" when he keeps it in mind or when he is reciting the sajjhāya. Therefore, the word division states, "when reciting, or having it recited, or when reciting the sajjhāya." Khuddānukhuddakehī means by the minor and the insignificant. Yāvadevā is a term that indicates the limit of their tendency. This means that, indeed, for those who recite, have it recited, or recite the sajjhāya, these things tend toward the arising of remorse counted as kukkucca, "Is it allowable? Is it not allowable?", vexation, and mental agitation counted as doubt or vicikicchā. Alternatively, yāvadevā means a determination of excess; it is connected with "tend to," which means it tends exceedingly to kukkucca, vexation, and agitation. Upasampannassa vinayaṃ vivaṇṇetī means he disparages, reviles, and criticizes the Vinaya in the presence of a fully ordained monk, desiring to create doubt in him about it. The rest is straightforward here.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Its origin is threefold: action (kiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Vilekhanasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Second Training Rule on Agitation.
3. Mohanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Deception
444.Tatiye –anvaddhamāsanti anupaṭipāṭiyā addhamāse addhamāse; yasmā pana so uposathadivase uddisiyati, tasmā ‘‘anuposathika’’nti padabhājane vuttaṃ.Uddissamāneti uddisiyamāne. Yasmā pana so pātimokkhuddesake uddisante uddisiyamāno nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘uddisante’’ti padabhājane vuttaṃ.Yañca tattha āpattiṃ āpannoti tasmiṃ anācāre ciṇṇe yaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno.Yathādhammo kāretabboti aññāṇena āpannattā tassā āpattiyā mokkho natthi, yathā pana dhammo ca vinayo ca ṭhito, tathā kāretabbo. Desanāgāminiñce āpanno hoti, desāpetabbo, vuṭṭhānagāminiñce, vuṭṭhāpetabboti attho.Sādhukanti suṭṭhu.Aṭṭhiṃkatvāti atthikabhāvaṃ katvā; atthiko hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
444. In the third (training rule): anvaddhamāsa means every half-month in sequence; but because he recites it on the Uposatha day, it is stated in the word division as "non-Uposatha." Uddissamāne means when being recited. But because he is called "being recited" when the one reciting the Pātimokkha is reciting, therefore, it is stated in the word division as "when reciting." Yañca tattha āpattiṃ āpanno means whatever offense he incurs in that misconduct. Yathādhammo kāretabbo means because he incurred the offense through ignorance, there is no release from that offense; but it should be done as the Dhamma and Vinaya prescribe. If he has incurred an offense that leads to confession, he should be made to confess; and if it leads to rehabilitation, he should be rehabilitated. Sādhuka means well. Aṭṭhiṃkatvā means having made an attitude of need; it means having become one who needs it.
447.Dhammakammetiādīsu mohāropanakammaṃ adhippetaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
447. Among dhammakamme and the rest, an act of deception is intended. The rest is straightforward here. Its origin is threefold: action (kiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Mohanasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Third Training Rule on Deception.
4. Pahārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Striking
449.Catutthe –pahāraṃ dentīti ‘‘āvuso pīṭhakaṃ paññapetha, pādadhovanaṃ āharathā’’tiādīni vatvā tathā akarontānaṃ pahāraṃ denti.
449. In the fourth (training rule): pahāraṃ dentī means having said, "Venerable, set out a seat, bring foot-washing water," and striking those who do not do so.
451.Pahāraṃ deti āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha paharitukāmatāya pahāre dinne sacepi marati pācittiyameva. Pahārena hattho vā pādo vā bhijjati, sīsaṃ vā bhinnaṃ hoti, pācittiyameva. ‘‘Yathāyaṃ saṅghamajjhe na virocati, tathā naṃ karomī’’ti evaṃ virūpakaraṇādhippāyena kaṇṇaṃ vā nāsaṃ vā chindati, dukkaṭaṃ.
451. Pahāraṃ deti āpatti pācittiyassā means here, if a blow is given with the intention to strike, even if he dies, it is only a pācittiya. If a hand or foot is broken by the blow, or if the head is fractured, it is only a pācittiya. If he cuts off an ear or nose with the intention of disfiguring him, thinking, "I will make him so that he does not shine in the midst of the Saṅgha," it is a dukkaṭa.
452.Anupasampannassāti gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā itthiyā vā purisassa vā antamaso tiracchānagatassāpi pahāraṃ deti, dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana rattacitto itthiṃ paharati, saṅghādiseso.
452. Anupasampannassā means giving a blow to a householder or a renunciant, to a woman or a man, even to a non-human being, it is a dukkaṭa. But if, with lustful thoughts, he strikes a woman, it is a saṅghādisesa.
453.Kenaciviheṭhiyamānoti manussena vā tiracchānagatena vā viheṭhiyamāno.Mokkhādhippāyoti tato attano mokkhaṃ patthayamāno.Pahāraṃ detīti kāyakāyapaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ aññatarena pahāraṃ deti, anāpatti. Sacepi antarāmagge coraṃ vā paccatthikaṃ vā viheṭhetukāmaṃ disvā ‘‘upāsaka, ettheva tiṭṭha, mā āgamī’’ti vatvā vacanaṃ anādiyitvā āgacchantaṃ ‘‘gaccha re’’ti muggarena vā satthakena vā paharitvā yāti, so ce tena pahārena marati, anāpattiyeva. Vāḷamigesupi eseva nayo. Sesamettha uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni panassa paṭhamapārājikasadisāni, idaṃ pana dukkhavedananti.
453. Kenaci viheṭhiyamāno means being harassed by a human or a non-human being. Mokkhādhippāyo means desiring his own release from that. Pahāraṃ detī means he gives a blow with one of the forms of physical action relating to body, non-offense. Even if, on the road, having seen a thief or an enemy wanting to harass him, he says, "Lay follower, stay right there, do not come," and as he comes without heeding his words, striking him with a club or a weapon, he goes away, and if he dies from that blow, it is not an offense. The same method applies to wild animals. The rest is straightforward here. But its origin, etc., are similar to the first pārājika, but this one is painful feeling.
Pahārasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule on Striking.
5. Talasattikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Raising a Fist
454.Pañcame –talasattikaṃ uggirantīti pahāradānākāraṃ dassetvā kāyampi kāyapaṭibaddhampi uccārenti.Te pahārasamuccitā rodantīti te pahāraparicitā pubbepi laddhapahārattā idāni ca pahāraṃ dassantīti maññamānā rodantīti attho. ‘‘Pahārassa muccitā’’tipi sajjhāyanti, tattha ‘‘pahārassa bhītā’’ti attho.
454. In the fifth (training rule): talasattikaṃ uggirantī means having shown the manner of giving a blow, they utter threats against the body or against what pertains to the body. Te pahārasamuccitā rodantī means they, accustomed to blows, weeping because they have received blows in the past and now thinking that they will be shown a blow. "Pahārassa muccitā" is also recited; there, the meaning is "fearing a blow."
457.Uggirati āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha sace uggiritvā viraddho pahāraṃ deti, avassaṃ dhāretuṃ asakkontassa pahāro sahasā patati, na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭaṃ. Tena pahārena hatthādīsu yaṃkiñci bhijjati, dukkaṭameva.
457. Uggirati āpatti pācittiyassā means here, if, having raised a fist in anger, he gives a blow, because the blow falls suddenly when he is unable to restrain himself, and is not given with the intention of striking, it is a dukkaṭa. If anything is broken in the hand, etc., by that blow, it is only a dukkaṭa.
458.Mokkhādhippāyo talasattikaṃ uggiratīti ettha pubbe vuttesu vatthūsu purimanayeneva talasattikaṃ uggirantassa anāpatti. Sacepi virajjhitvā pahāraṃ deti, anāpattiyeva. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
458. Mokkhādhippāyo talasattikaṃ uggiratī means here, in the cases stated earlier, there is no offense for one who raises a fist in accordance with the earlier method. Even if, having lost control, he gives a blow, there is no offense. The rest is the same as before, along with its origin, etc.
Talasattikasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule on Raising a Fist.
6. Amūlakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Baseless Accusation
459.Chaṭṭhe –anuddhaṃsentīti te kira sayaṃ ākiṇṇadosattā ‘‘evaṃ bhikkhū amhe neva codessanti, na sāressantī’’ti attaparittāṇaṃ karontā paṭikacceva bhikkhū amūlakena saṅghādisesena codenti. Sesamettha terasakamhi amūlakasikkhāpade vuttanayattā uttānameva.
459. In the sixth (training rule): anuddhaṃsentī means because they themselves are full of defilements, making self-protection, thinking, "Monks will not accuse or remind us in this way," they accuse monks beforehand with a baseless Saṅghādisesa. The rest is straightforward here because the method is stated in the thirteenth Training Rule on Baseless Accusation.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Its origin is threefold: action (kiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule on Baseless Accusation.
7. Sañciccasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Intentionally Arousing Remorse
464.Sattame –upadahantīti uppādenti.Kukkuccaṃ upadahati āpatti pācittiyassāti vācāya vācāya āpatti.Anupasampannassāti sāmaṇerassa. Mātugāmena saddhiṃ raho maññe tayā nisinnaṃ nipannaṃ bhuttaṃ pītaṃ, saṅghamajjhe idañcidañca katantiādinā nayena kukkuccaṃ upadahati, vācāya vācāya dukkaṭaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīnipi amūlakasadisānevāti.
464. In the seventh (training rule): upadahantī means they cause to arise. Kukkuccaṃ upadahati āpatti pācittiyassā means offense by offense, a pācittiya. Anupasampannassā means to a novice. "I think you sat, lay down, ate, and drank in a secluded place with a woman, you did this and that in the midst of the Saṅgha," in this way, he causes remorse to arise, offense by offense, a dukkaṭa. The rest is straightforward here. Its origin, etc., are similar to the one on baseless accusation.
Sañciccasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule on Intentionally Arousing Remorse.
8. Upassutisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Eavesdropping
471.Aṭṭhame –adhikaraṇajātānanti etehi bhaṇḍanādīhi uppannavivādādhikaraṇānaṃ.Upassutinti sutisamīpaṃ; yattha ṭhatvā sakkā hoti tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ, tatthāti attho.Gacchati āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ.Mantentanti aññena saddhiṃ aññasmiṃ mantayamāne; ‘‘mantente’’ti vā pāṭho, ayamevattho.
471. In the eighth (training rule): adhikaraṇajātāna means of disputes that have arisen from these quarrels and the like. Upassuti means near to hearing; it means in a place where it is possible to hear their words. Gacchati āpatti dukkaṭassā means here, for each word occurrence, a dukkaṭa. Mantenta means when conferring with another about someone else; alternatively, there is the reading "mantente," the meaning is the same.
473.Vūpasamissāmīti upasamaṃ gamissāmi, kalahaṃ na karissāmi.Attānaṃ parimocessāmīti mama akārakabhāvaṃ kathetvā attānaṃ mocessāmi. Sesamettha uttānameva.
473. Vūpasamissāmī means I will go to quiescence, I will not quarrel. Attānaṃ parimocessāmī means I will free myself by speaking of my innocence. The rest is straightforward here.
Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, siyā kiriyaṃ sotukāmatāya gamanavasena, siyā akiriyaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā mantayamānānaṃ ajānāpanavasena, rūpiyaṃ aññavādakaṃ upassutīti imāni hi tīṇi sikkhāpadāni ekaparicchedāni, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Its origin with respect to the object (theyyasattha) is from body-mind and from body-speech-mind. It may arise as action because of going with the desire to hear, it may arise as non-action because of not informing those who are conferring when coming to a place where they are standing. Indeed, these three training rules—regarding rūpiyaṃ, speaking otherwise, and eavesdropping—are of one category. Release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Upassutisikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule on Eavesdropping.
9. Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Obstructing a Saṅgha Act
474.Navame –sace ca mayaṃ jāneyyāmāti sace mayaṃ jāneyyāma; cakāro pana nipātamattameva.Dhammikānanti dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena katattā dhammā etesu atthīti dhammikāni; tesaṃ dhammikānaṃ catunnaṃ saṅghakammānaṃ.Khiyyati āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
474. In the ninth (training rule): sace ca mayaṃ jāneyyāmā means if we should know; but the "ca" is merely an expletive. Dhammikāna means because they are done according to the Dhamma, the Vinaya, and the Teacher's teaching, they have Dhamma in them; of those lawful four Saṅgha acts. Khiyyati āpatti pācittiyassā means here, offense by offense, a pācittiya. The rest is straightforward. Its origin is threefold: action (kiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Kammapaṭibāhanasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule on Obstructing a Saṅgha Act.
10. Chandaṃadatvāgamanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Leaving Without Giving Consent
481.Dasame –vatthu vā ārocitanti codakena ca cuditakena ca attano kathā kathitā, anuvijjako sammato, ettāvatāpi vatthumeva ārocitaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
481. In the tenth (training rule): vatthu vā ārocita means the accuser and the accused have spoken their stories, the investigator is appointed, even by this much, the case is announced. The rest is straightforward here.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Its origin with respect to abandoning responsibility (dhuranikkhepa) is from body-speech-mind. Action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Chandaṃ adatvā gamanasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule on Leaving Without Giving Consent.
11. Dubbalasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Training Rule on Favoritism
484.Ekādasame –yathāmittatāti yathāmittatāya; yo yo mitto, tassa tassa detīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbapadesu. Sesaṃ ujjhāpanakādīsu vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.
484. In the eleventh (training rule): yathāmittatā means according to friendship; it means he gives to each one who is a friend. This method applies in all phrases. The rest is straightforward in meaning because the method is stated in the one on disparagement and the like.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Its origin is threefold: action (kiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ) unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Dubbalasikkhāpadaṃ ekādasamaṃ.
The Eleventh Training Rule on Favoritism.
12. Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Training Rule on Appropriation
489.Dvādasame – yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ tiṃsake pariṇāmanasikkhāpade vuttanayameva. Ayameva hi viseso – tattha attano pariṇāmitattā nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, idha puggalassa pariṇāmitattā suddhikapācittiyanti.
489. In the twelfth (training rule): whatever should be said, all that is in accordance with the method stated in the thirtieth training rule on appropriation. This itself is the distinction: there, because he himself appropriated it, it is a nissaggiya pācittiya, here, because it is appropriated by an individual, it is a suddhika pācittiya.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its origin is threefold: action (kiriyaṃ), release by perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentionality (sacittakaṃ), fault of the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome thought (akusalacittaṃ), and threefold feeling (tivedananti).
Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ dvādasamaṃ.
The Twelfth Training Rule on Appropriation.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena sahadhammikavaggo aṭṭhamo.
The eighth Sahadhammika Vagga is complete with the order of explanation.
9. Ratanavaggo
9. The Jewel Vagga
1. Antepurasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Training Rule on the Inner Quarters
494.Rājavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –orakoti parittako.Uparipāsādavaragatoti pāsādavarassa uparigato.Ayyānaṃ vāhasāti ayyānaṃ kāraṇā; tehi jānāpitattā jānāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
494. In the first training rule of the Royal Vagga: orako means small. Uparipāsādavaragato means gone to the upper part of an excellent palace. Ayyānaṃ vāhasā means because of the noble ones; it means he knows because it was made known by them.
497.Pitaraṃ patthetīti antaraṃ passitvā ghātetuṃ icchati.Rājantepuraṃ hatthisammaddantiādīsu hatthīhi sammaddo etthātihatthisammaddaṃ;hatthisambādhanti attho.Assarathasammaddapadepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Sammatta’’nti keci paṭhanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Rañño antepure hatthisammadda’’ntipi pāṭho, tattha hatthīnaṃ sammaddaṃ hatthisammaddanti attho, rañño antepure hatthisammaddo atthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sesapadesupi.Rajanīyānīti tasmiṃ antepure edisāni rūpādīni.
497. Pitaraṃ patthetī means he desires to kill him, seeing an opportunity. Among rājantepuraṃ hatthisammadda and the rest, hatthisammaddaṃ means a crush by elephants is there; it means a crowd of elephants. The same method applies in assarathasammaddapade. Some read "Sammatta," that should not be taken. There is also the reading "Rañño antepure hatthisammadda," there, hatthisammaddaṃ means a crush of elephants, it means there is a crush of elephants in the king's inner quarters. The same method applies in the remaining phrases. Rajanīyānī means such forms, etc., are desirable in that inner quarters.
498.Muddhāvasittassāti muddhani avasittassa. Anikkhanto rājā itoti anikkhantarājakaṃ, tasmiṃanikkhantarājake;sayanighareti attho. Ratanaṃ vuccati mahesī, niggatanti nikkhantaṃ, aniggataṃ ratanaṃ itoti aniggataratanakaṃ, tasmiṃaniggataratanake;sayanighareti attho. Sesamettha uttānameva.
498. Muddhāvasittassā means of one who has been consecrated on the head. Anikkhanto rājā itoti anikkhantarājakaṃ, in that anikkhantarājake means in the king's bedchamber. A jewel (ratanaṃ) is said to be the chief queen, niggataṃ means gone out, aniggataṃ ratanaṃ itoti aniggataratanakaṃ, in that aniggataratanake means in the bedchamber of the jewel who has not gone out. The rest is straightforward here.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its origin with respect to the base (kathina) is from body-speech, and from body-speech-mind. Action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), no release by perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), fault of designation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), triple consciousness (ticittaṃ), and threefold feeling (tivedananti).
Antepurasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The First Training Rule on the Inner Quarters.
2. Ratanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Training Rule on Jewels
502-3.Dutiye –vissaritvāti pamussitvā.Puṇṇapattaṃnāma satato pañca kahāpaṇā.Kyāhaṃ karissāmīti kiṃ ahaṃ karissāmi.Ābharaṇaṃ omuñcitvāti mahālataṃ nāma navakoṭiagghanakaṃ alaṅkāraṃ apanetvā.
502-3. In the second (training rule): vissaritvā means having forgotten. Puṇṇapattaṃ means constantly five kahāpaṇas. Kyāhaṃ karissāmī means what shall I do. Ābharaṇaṃ omuñcitvā means having removed an ornament called Mahālatā worth nine kotis.
504.Antevāsīti paricārako.
504. Antevāsī means attendant.
506.Aparikkhittassa upacāroti ettha upacāro nāma ārāmassa dve leḍḍupātā – ‘‘āvasathassa pana suppapāto vā musalapāto vā’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.Uggaṇhāti āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha jātarūparajataṃ attano atthāya uggaṇhantassa vā uggaṇhāpentassa vā nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, saṅghagaṇapuggalacetiyanavakammānaṃ atthāya dukkaṭaṃ, avasesaṃ muttādiratanaṃ attano vā saṅghādīnaṃ vā atthāya uggaṇhantassa vā uggaṇhāpentassa vā dukkaṭaṃ. Kappiyavatthu vā akappiyavatthu vā hotu, antamaso mātu kaṇṇapiḷandhanatāḷapaṇṇampi gihisantakaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena paṭisāmentassa pācittiyameva.
506. Aparikkhittassa upacāro here, upacāro means two leḍḍupātā from the boundary of the monastery. It is said in the Mahāpaccari that "for the dwelling, it is the distance of a draining point or a pestle drop." Uggaṇhāti āpatti pācittiyassā here, for receiving or having received gold and silver for one's own use, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya. For the sake of the Saṅgha, a group, an individual, a shrine, or new construction, there is a dukkaṭa. For receiving or having received remaining gems such as pearls, for oneself or for the sake of the Saṅgha, etc., there is a dukkaṭa. Whether it is allowable or unallowable material, even if it is a tāḷapaṇṇa used as ear ornament for a mother, if one returns property belonging to a householder with the attitude of being a treasurer, it is only a pācittiya.
Sace pana mātāpitūnaṃ santakaṃ avassaṃ paṭisāmetabbaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ hoti, attano atthāya gahetvā paṭisāmetabbaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ paṭisāmetvā dehī’’ti vutte pana ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘paṭisāmehī’’ti pātetvā gacchanti, palibodho nāma hoti, paṭisāmetuṃ vaṭṭati. Vihāre kammaṃ karontā vaḍḍhakīādayo vā rājavallabhā vā attano upakaraṇabhaṇḍaṃ vā sayanabhaṇḍaṃ vā ‘‘paṭisāmetvā dethā’’ti vadanti, chandenapi bhayenapi na kātabbameva, guttaṭṭhānaṃ pana dassetuṃ vaṭṭati. Balakkārena pātetvā gatesu ca paṭisāmetuṃ vaṭṭati.
But if it is allowable property belonging to one’s parents that must be returned, it should be taken for one’s own use and returned. But when told, "Return this and give it," it should be refused saying, "It is not proper." If they leave it after throwing it down and depart, it is called an encumbrance (palibodha), and it is proper to return it. When builders and others doing work in the monastery, or royal favorites, say, "Return and give" their equipment or bedding, it should not be done even out of desire or fear, but it is proper to show a safe place. And it is proper to return it if they have thrown it down forcibly and left.
Ajjhārāme vā ajjhāvasathe vāti ettha sace mahāvihārasadiso mahārāmo hoti, tattha pākāraparikkhitte pariveṇe yattha bhikkhūhi vā sāmaṇerehi vā gahitaṃ bhavissatīti saṅkā uppajjati, tādise eva ṭhāne uggaṇhitvā vā uggaṇhāpetvā vā ṭhapetabbaṃ. Mahābodhidvārakoṭṭhakaambaṅgaṇasadisesu pana mahājanasañcaraṇaṭṭhānesu na gahetabbaṃ, palibodho na hoti. Kurundiyaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘eko maggaṃ gacchanto nimanussaṭṭhāne kiñci bhaṇḍaṃ passati, ākiṇṇamanussepi jāte manussā tameva bhikkhuṃ āsaṅkanti, tasmā maggā okkamma nisīditabbaṃ. Sāmikesu āgatesu taṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace sāmike na passati patirūpaṃ karissatī’’ti.
Ajjhārāme vā ajjhāvasathe vā, here, if there is a large monastery like the Mahāvihāra, in a cloister surrounded by walls where there is a suspicion that it will be taken by monks or novices, it should be received or had received and placed in such a place. It should not be taken in places frequented by the public such as the Mahābodhi gate enclosure or mango grove, there is no encumbrance. But it is said in the Kurundi, "If a person going along the road sees some goods in a deserted place, even when people are swarming, people suspect that monk, therefore one should sit down off the road. When the owners come, it should be told to them. If one does not see the owners, one will do what is appropriate."
Rūpena vā nimittena vā saññāṇaṃ katvāti ettha rūpaṃ nāma antobhaṇḍikāya bhaṇḍaṃ; tasmā bhaṇḍikaṃ muñcitvā gaṇetvā ettakā kahāpaṇā vā jātarūparajataṃ vāti sallakkhetabbaṃ.Nimittanti lañchanādi; tasmā lañchitāya bhaṇḍikāya mattikālañchananti vā lākhālañchananti vā nīlapilotikāya bhaṇḍikā katāti vā setapilotikāya katāti vā evamādi sabbaṃ sallakkhetabbaṃ.
Rūpena vā nimittena vā saññāṇaṃ katvā, here, rūpaṃ means the goods inside the bundle; therefore, having opened the bundle and counted, one should note whether there are so many kahāpaṇas or gold and silver. Nimitta means a mark, etc.; therefore, one should note everything about the marked bundle, whether it is marked with clay or lac, or whether the bundle is tied with blue or white cloth.
Bhikkhū patirūpāti lajjino kukkuccakā. Lolajātikānañhi hatthe ṭhapetuṃ na labhati. Yo pana neva tamhā āvāsā pakkamati, na sāmike passati, tenāpi attano cīvarādimūlaṃ na kātabbaṃ; thāvaraṃ pana senāsanaṃ vā cetiyaṃ vā pokkharaṇī vā kāretabbā. Sace dīghassa addhuno accayena sāmiko āgacchati, ‘‘upāsaka tava santakena idaṃ nāma kataṃ, anumodāhī’’ti vattabbo. Sace anumodati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ; no ce anumodati, ‘‘mama dhanaṃ dethā’’ti codetiyeva, aññaṃ samādapetvā dātabbaṃ.
Bhikkhū patirūpā are those who are conscientious and scrupulous. For it is not permissible to place it in the hands of the fickle. But if one neither leaves that dwelling nor sees the owner, one should also not use it for the price of one’s robes, etc.; but a permanent dwelling or cetiya or pond should be built. If the owner comes after a long time, he should be told, "Layman, this was done with your property, please approve." If he approves, that is good; if he does not approve, he should be urged, "Give me my money," and it should be given after persuading another.
507.Ratanasammataṃvissāsaṃ gaṇhātītiādīsu āmāsameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anāmāsaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
507.Ratanasammataṃvissāsaṃ gaṇhātītiādīsu it is said referring only to what can be touched (āmāsa). What cannot be touched (anāmāsa) is certainly not proper. The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Ratanasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Second Rule on Gems.
3. Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Training Rule on Entering Villages at the Wrong Time
508.Tatiye –tiracchānakathanti ariyamaggassa tiracchānabhūtaṃ kathaṃ.Rājakathanti rājapaṭisaṃyutta kathaṃ.Corakathādīsupi eseva nayo.
508.In the third, tiracchānakathaṃ means talk that is base to the Noble Path. Rājakathaṃ means talk connected with kings. The same method applies to Corakathā, and so on.
512.Santaṃ bhikkhunti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ cārittasikkhāpade vuttameva. Sace sambahulā kenaci kammena gāmaṃ pavisanti, ‘‘vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti sabbehi aññamaññaṃ āpucchitabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ gāme taṃ kammaṃ na sampajjatīti aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchanti, gāmasatampi hotu, puna āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi. Sace pana ussāhaṃ paṭippassambhetvā vihāraṃ gacchantā antarā aññaṃ gāmaṃ pavisitukāmā honti, puna āpucchitabbameva.
512.Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ, what should be said here has already been said in the rule on proper conduct (cārittasikkhāpada). If many enter a village for some work, all should ask each other, "I ask permission for entering the village at the wrong time." If that work is not accomplished in that village and they go to another village, even if it is a hundred villages, there is no need to ask permission again. But if, having abandoned their effort, they go to the monastery and want to enter another village in between, they must ask permission again.
Kulaghare vā āsanasālāya vā bhattakiccaṃ katvā telabhikkhāya vā sappibhikkhāya vā caritukāmo hoti, sace passe bhikkhu atthi, āpucchitvā gantabbaṃ. Asante natthīti gantabbaṃ. Vīthiṃ otaritvā bhikkhuṃ passati, āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi, anāpucchitvāpi caritabbameva. Gāmamajjhena maggo hoti, tena gacchantassa telādibhikkhāya carissāmīti citte uppanne sace passe bhikkhu atthi, āpucchitvā caritabbaṃ. Maggā anokkamma bhikkhāya carantassa pana āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi, aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro adinnādāne vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
If one wants to go to a family's house or assembly hall, after having done the meal duty, to go for oil alms or ghee alms, if one sees there is a monk, one should go after asking permission. If there is not, one should go without asking. If one sees a monk after descending into the street, there is no need to ask permission, one should go even without asking. If there is a road through the middle of the village, if the thought arises in one's mind that one will go for alms of oil, etc., while going along it, if one sees there is a monk, one should go after asking permission. But for one who goes for alms without leaving the road, there is no need to ask permission, and the boundary (upacāro) of the unconfined village should be understood in the same way as stated in the case of not giving.
515.Antarārāmantiādīsu na kevalaṃ anāpucchā kāyabandhanaṃ abandhitvā saṅghāṭiṃ apārupitvā gacchantassapi anāpatti.Āpadāsūti sīho vā byaggho vā āgacchati, megho vā uṭṭheti, añño vā koci upaddavo uppajjati, anāpatti. Evarūpāsu āpadāsu bahigāmato antogāmaṃ pavisituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
515.Antarārāmaṃ and so on, not only is there no offense for going without asking permission, without tying the waistband, and without opening the outer robe. Āpadāsu means if a lion or tiger comes, or a cloud rises, or some other misfortune arises, there is no offense. In such misfortunes, it is proper to enter a village from outside the village. The rest here is straightforward.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathina origination – it originates from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Vikālagāmappavisanasikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Third Training Rule on Entering Villages at the Wrong Time.
4. Sūcigharasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Training Rule on Needle Cases
517-20.Catutthe – bhedanameva bhedanakaṃ; taṃ assa atthīti bhedanakameva.Araṇiketi araṇidhanuke.Vidheti vedhake. Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
517-20.In the fourth, bhedanameva bhedanakaṃ; having that is bhedanakameva.Araṇike means fire-stick bow. Vidhe means a piercer. The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Sūcigharasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule on Needle Cases.
5. Mañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Training Rule on Couches
522.Pañcame –chedanakaṃvuttanayameva.
522.In the fifth, chedanakaṃ is as previously stated.
525.Chinditvā paribhuñjatīti ettha sace na chinditukāmo hoti, bhūmiyaṃ nikhaṇitvā pamāṇaṃ upari dasseti, uttānaṃ vā katvā paribhuñjati, ukkhipitvā vā tulāsaṅghāṭe ṭhapetvā aṭṭaṃ katvā paribhuñjati, sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
525.Chinditvā paribhuñjatī here, if one does not want to cut it, but shows the measure above after burying it in the ground, or uses it after turning it face up, or picks it up and uses it after placing it on a balance beam and making a platform, it is all proper. The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination.
Mañcasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule on Couches.
6. Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Training Rule on Cotton-Filled (Bed)
526.Chaṭṭhe – tūlaṃ onaddhametthātitūlonaddhaṃ;tūlaṃ pakkhipitvā upari cimilikāya onaddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
526.In the sixth, tūlonaddhaṃ means cotton is stuffed in it; it is said to mean that cotton is put in and covered with cloth on top. The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination.
Tūlonaddhasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule on Cotton-Filled (Bed).
7. Nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Training Rule on Sitting Cloths
531-4.Sattame –nisīdanaṃ anuññātaṃ hotīti kattha anuññātaṃ? Cīvarakkhandhake paṇītabhojanavatthusmiṃ. Vuttañhi tattha – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kāyaguttiyā cīvaraguttiyā senāsanaguttiyā nisīdana’’nti (mahāva. 353).Seyyathāpi purāṇāsikoṭṭhoti yathā nāma purāṇacammakāroti attho. Yathā hi cammakāro cammaṃ vitthataṃ karissāmīti ito cito ca samañchati, kaḍḍhati; evaṃ sopi taṃ nisīdanaṃ. Tena taṃ bhagavā evamāha –‘‘nisīdanaṃ nāma sadasaṃ vuccatī’’ti santhatasadisaṃ santharitvā ekasmiṃ ante sugatavidatthiyā vidatthimatte padese dvīsu ṭhānesu phāletvā tisso dasā kariyanti, tāhi dasāhi sadasaṃ nāma vuccati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
531-4.In the seventh, nisīdanaṃ anuññātaṃ hotī where is the sitting cloth allowed? In the robe section, in the matter of excellent food. For it was said there – "I allow, monks, a sitting cloth for the protection of the body, the protection of the robe, and the protection of the lodging" (mahāva. 353).Seyyathāpi purāṇāsikoṭṭho means just as an old leather worker. Just as a leather worker stretches the leather from here and there, pulling it, thinking "I will expand the leather"; so too, is that sitting cloth. Therefore, the Buddha said this to him – ‘‘nisīdanaṃ nāma sadasaṃ vuccatī’’, a sitting cloth (nisīdana) is called with fringes (sadasaṃ): having spread it out like a mat, having split off two places in one end to the extent of a Sugata span (vidatthi), three fringes are made, with those fringes it is called with fringes (sadasaṃ). The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination.
Nisīdanasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule on Sitting Cloths.
8. Kaṇḍupaṭicchādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Training Rule on Bandages for Itch
537.Aṭṭhame –kaṇḍupaṭicchādi anuññātā hotīti kattha anuññātā? Cīvarakkhandhake belaṭṭhasīsavatthusmiṃ. Vuttañhi tattha – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yassa kaṇḍu vā piḷakā vā assāvo vā thullakacchu vā ābādho tassa kaṇḍupaṭicchādi’’nti (mahāva. 354).
537.In the eighth, kaṇḍupaṭicchādi anuññātā hotī where is the bandage for itch allowed? In the robe section, in the matter of belaṭṭhasīsā. For it was said there – "I allow, monks, a bandage for itch for one who has itch or boils or discharge or thick scabies or disease" (mahāva. 354).
539.Yassa adhonābhi ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalanti yassa bhikkhuno nābhiyā heṭṭhā jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ upari.Kaṇḍūti kacchu.Piḷakāti lohitatuṇḍikā sukhumapiḷakā.Assāvoti arisabhagandaramadhumehādīnaṃ vasena asucipaggharaṇakaṃ.Thullakacchu vā ābādhoti mahāpiḷakābādho vuccati. Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
539.Yassa adhonābhi ubbhajāṇumaṇḍala means for that monk, below the navel and above the kneecaps. Kaṇḍū means scabies. Piḷakā means blood boils, small boils. Assāvo means an impure discharge by way of hemorrhoids, gonorrhea, diabetes, etc. Thullakacchu vā ābādho means a disease of large boils. The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination.
Kaṇḍupaṭicchādisikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule on Bandages for Itch.
9. Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Training Rule on Rain Cloths
542.Navame –vassikasāṭikā anuññātā hotīti kattha anuññātā? Cīvarakkhandhake visākhāvatthusmiṃ. Vuttañhi tattha – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassikasāṭika’’nti (mahāva. 352). Sesamettha uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
542.In the ninth, vassikasāṭikā anuññātā hotī where is the rain cloth allowed? In the robe section, in the matter of Visākhā. For it was said there – "I allow, monks, a rain cloth" (mahāva. 352). The rest here is straightforward. Sixfold origination.
Vassikasāṭikasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule on Rain Cloths.
10. Nandattherasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Training Rule on Nanda Thera
547.Dasame –caturaṅgulomakoti catūhi aṅgulehi ūnakappamāṇo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
547.In the tenth, caturaṅgulomako means less than four fingers in length. The rest is straightforward. Sixfold origination.
Nandattherasikkhāpadaṃ dasamaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule on Nanda Thera.
Samatto vaṇṇanākkamena ratanavaggo navamo.
The Ninth Chapter on Gems is Complete According to the Order of Explanation.
Uddiṭṭhā khotiādi vuttanayamevāti.
Uddiṭṭhā kho and so on, is as previously stated.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya
The Minor Explanation in the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary, is Complete.
Khuddakavaṇṇanā samattā.
The Pācittiya Section is Finished.
Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
6. The Pāṭidesanīya Section
6. Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ
1. Explanation of the First Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule
1. Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
The Pāṭidesanīya rules, immediately after the minor ones;
Those that are established, now, there is an explanation of them.
Pāṭidesanīyādhammā, khuddakānaṃ anantarā;
552.In the first Pāṭidesanīya, first paṭikkamanakāle means at the time of returning after wandering for alms. Sabbeva aggahesī means he took all of it. Pavedhentī means trembling. Apehī means go away.
552.Paṭhamapāṭidesanīye tāvapaṭikkamanakāleti piṇḍāya caritvā paṭiāgamanakāle.Sabbeva aggahesīti sabbameva aggahesi.Pavedhentīti kampamānā.Apehīti apagaccha.
553-5.Gārayhaṃ āvuso and so on, is showing the manner of confessing. Rathikā means a street. Byūha means a street where those who have gone and returned stand without obstruction. Siṅghāṭaka means a place where roads meet in a square or triangle. Ghara means a family's house. For one standing in any of these places and receiving, there is a dukkaṭa for receiving, and a pāṭidesanīya for each mouthful. The same method applies to one receiving in elephant stables, etc. If a nun stands in the street and gives, even if the monk stands in between monasteries, etc., there is an offense. For it should be understood that the offense here is due to the nun standing and giving in the interior of the house, according to the statement "having entered the interior of the house," but the place where the monk stands is immeasurable. Therefore, even if a monk standing in the street, etc., receives from a nun standing and giving in between monasteries, etc., there is no offense.
553-5.Gārayhaṃ āvusotiādi paṭidesetabbākāradassanaṃ.Rathikāti racchā.Byūhanti anibbijjhitvā ṭhitā gatapaccāgataracchā.Siṅghāṭakanti catukkoṇaṃ vā tikoṇaṃ vā maggasamodhānaṭṭhānaṃ.Gharanti kulagharaṃ. Etesu yattha katthaci ṭhatvā gaṇhantassa gahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ, ajjhohāre ajjhohāragaṇanāya pāṭidesanīyaṃ. Hatthisālādīsu gaṇhantassāpi eseva nayo. Bhikkhunī rathikāya ṭhatvā deti, bhikkhu sacepi antarārāmādīsu ṭhatvā gaṇhāti, āpattiyeva. ‘‘Antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāyā’’ti hi vacanato bhikkhuniyā antaraghare ṭhatvā dadamānāya vasenettha āpatti veditabbā, bhikkhussa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ pana appamāṇaṃ. Tasmā sacepi vīthiādīsu ṭhito bhikkhu antarārāmādīsu ṭhatvā dadamānāya bhikkhuniyā gaṇhāti, anāpattiyeva.
Yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Ajjhohāre ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassa this is said referring to what is not mixed with food, but when mixed, in one taste, it is only pāṭidesanīya. Ekato upasampannāyā means one ordained in the presence of nuns. But for one ordained in the presence of monks, it is just as it is in reality.
Yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassa.Ajjhohāre ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassāti idaṃ āmisena asambhinnaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, sambhinne pana ekarase pāṭidesanīyameva.Ekato upasampannāyāti bhikkhunīnaṃ santike upasampannāya. Bhikkhūnaṃ santike upasampannāya pana yathāvatthukameva.
556.Dāpeti na detīti aññātikā aññena kenaci dāpeti taṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti.Upanikkhipitvā detīti bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘idaṃ ayya tumhākaṃ dammī’’ti deti, evaṃ dinnaṃ ‘‘sādhu bhaginī’’ti sampaṭicchitvā tāya eva vā bhikkhuniyā aññena vā kenaci paṭiggahāpetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Sikkhamānāyasāmaṇeriyāti etāsaṃ dadamānānaṃ gaṇhantassa anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
556. Dāpeti na detī: If she, being unrelated, causes someone else to give, there is no offense for the one receiving. Upanikkhipitvā detī: Having placed it on the ground, she gives, saying, "Ayya, I give this to you." Having accepted what is given in this way, saying, "Sādhu, sister," it is permissible to have it received for her to eat, either by that same bhikkhuni or by someone else. Sikkhamānāya, sāmaṇeriyā: There is no offense for the one receiving when giving to these. The rest is clear in itself.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Originating from eḷakaloma – it is an action, not volition-free, non-conscious, an offense by enactment, an act of the body, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Paṭhamapāṭidesanīyaṃ.
The First Pāṭidesanīya.
2. Dutiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule
558.Dutiye –apasakka tāva bhaginītiādi apasādetabbākāradassanaṃ.
558. In the second – apasakka tāva bhaginī etc., shows the way to send away.
561.Attano bhattaṃ dāpeti na detīti ettha sacepi attano bhattaṃ deti, iminā sikkhāpadena anāpattiyeva, purimasikkhāpadena āpatti.Aññesaṃ bhattaṃ deti na dāpetīti ettha sacepi dāpeyya, iminā sikkhāpadena āpatti bhaveyya. Dentiyā pana neva iminā na purimena āpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
561. Attano bhattaṃ dāpeti na detī: Here, even if she gives her own food, there is no offense by this training rule, but there is an offense by the previous training rule. Aññesaṃ bhattaṃ deti na dāpetī: Here, even if she causes to give, an offense would arise by this training rule. But for the one giving, there is no offense by either this or the previous one. The rest is clear in itself. Originating from kathina – it is action-non-action, not volition-free, non-conscious, an offense by enactment, an act of the body, an act of speech, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Dutiyapāṭidesanīyaṃ.
The Second Pāṭidesanīya.
3. Tatiyapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule
562.Tatiye –ubhatopasannanti dvīhi pasannaṃ upāsakenapi upāsikāyapi. Tasmiṃ kira kule ubhopi te sotāpannāyeva.Bhogena hāyatīti edisañhi kulaṃ sacepi asītikoṭidhanaṃ hoti, bhogehi hāyatiyeva. Kasmā? Yasmā tattha neva upāsikā na upāsako bhoge rakkhati.
562. In the third – ubhatopasanna: one who has approached both, by the male lay follower and by the female lay follower. It is said that in that family, both of them were stream-enterers. Bhogena hāyatī: Indeed, such a family, even if it has eighty crores of wealth, declines in wealth. Why? Because neither the female lay follower nor the male lay follower protects the wealth there.
569.Gharato nīharitvā dentīti āsanasālaṃ vā vihāraṃ vā ānetvā denti. Sacepi anāgate bhikkhumhi paṭhamaṃyeva nīharitvā dvāre ṭhapetvā pacchā sampattassa denti, vaṭṭati. Bhikkhuṃ pana disvā antogehato nīharitvā diyyamānaṃ na vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
569. Gharato nīharitvā dentī: They bring it out from the house or the hall or the monastery and give it. Even if, in the future, they first bring it out and place it at the door and then give it to the bhikkhu who arrives, it is permissible. But it is said in the Mahāpaccariya that it is not permissible to bring it out from inside the house and give it when the bhikkhu is seen. The rest is clear in itself. Originating from eḷakaloma – it is an action, not volition-free, non-conscious, an offense by enactment, an act of the body, an act of speech, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Tatiyapāṭidesanīyaṃ.
The Third Pāṭidesanīya.
4. Catutthapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Pāṭidesanīya Training Rule
570.Catutthe –avaruddhā hontīti paṭiviruddhā honti.
570. In the fourth – avaruddhā hontī: They are opposed.
573.Pañcannaṃ paṭisaṃviditanti pañcasu sahadhammikesu yaṃkiñci pesetvā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ āharissāmāti paṭisaṃviditaṃ katampi appaṭisaṃviditamevāti attho.Ārāmaṃ ārāmūpacāraṃ ṭhapetvāti āraññakasenāsanārāmañca tassa upacārañca ṭhapetvā; upacārato nikkhantaṃ antarāmagge bhikkhuṃ disvā vā gāmaṃ āgatassa vā paṭisaṃviditaṃ katampi appaṭisaṃviditameva hotīti veditabbaṃ.Sace sāsaṅkaṃ hoti sāsaṅkanti ācikkhitabbanti kasmā ācikkhitabbaṃ? Ārāme core vasante amhākaṃ nārocentīti vacanapaṭimocanatthaṃ.Corā vattabbā manussā idhūpacarantīti kasmā vattabbaṃ? Attano upaṭṭhākehi amhe gaṇhāpentīti vacanapaṭimocanatthaṃ.
573. Pañcannaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ: Having sent to any of the five co-religionists, even if it is arranged, saying, "I will bring something edible or something to eat," it is still unarranged, this is the meaning. Ārāmaṃ ārāmūpacāraṃ ṭhapetvā: Having set aside the monastery of forest dwelling and its vicinity; it should be understood that even if it is arranged, seeing a bhikkhu outside the vicinity on the road, or having come to the village, it is still unarranged. Sace sāsaṅkaṃ hoti sāsaṅkanti ācikkhitabbaṃ: Why should it be declared? In order to avoid the accusation that they do not inform us when thieves live in the monastery. Corā vattabbā manussā idhūpacarantī: Why should it be said? In order to avoid the accusation that our supporters are having us arrested.
Yāguyā paṭisaṃvidite tassā parivāro āhariyyatīti yāguyā paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā ‘‘kiṃ suddhayāguyā dinnāya pūvabhattādīnipi etissā yāguyā parivāraṃ katvā dassāmā’’ti evaṃ yaṃ kiñci āharanti, sabbaṃ paṭisaṃviditameva hoti.Bhattena paṭisaṃviditetiādīsupi eseva nayo. Asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā khādanīyādīni gahetvā gacchatīti sutvā aññānipi tena saddhiṃ attano deyyadhammaṃ āharanti, vaṭṭati. Yāguyā paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā pūvaṃ vā bhattaṃ vā āharanti, etampi vaṭṭatīti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
Yāguyā paṭisaṃvidite tassā parivāro āhariyyatī: Having arranged for rice gruel, whatever they bring, thinking, "Having given plain rice gruel, shall we give puddings, rice, etc., as an accompaniment to this rice gruel?" all of it is arranged. Bhattena paṭisaṃvidite etc., the same method applies. Having heard that such and such a family has arranged and is going to take edibles etc., other people also bring their own offerings with them, it is permissible. Having arranged for rice gruel, it is also permissible to bring cake or rice, this is said in the Kurundi.
575.Gilānassāti appaṭisaṃviditepi gilānassa anāpatti.Paṭisaṃvidite vā gilānassa vā sesakanti ekassatthāya paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā āhaṭaṃ, tassa sesakaṃ aññassāpi bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā paṭisaṃviditaṃ katvā bahuṃ āhaṭaṃ hoti, aññesampi dātuṃ icchanti, etampi paṭisaṃviditasesakameva, sabbesampi vaṭṭati. Atha adhikameva hoti, sannidhiṃ mocetvā ṭhapitaṃ dutiyadivasepi vaṭṭati. Gilānassa āhaṭāvasesepi eseva nayo. Yaṃ pana appaṭisaṃviditameva katvā ābhataṃ, taṃ bahiārāmaṃ pesetvā paṭisaṃviditaṃ kāretvā āharāpetabbaṃ, bhikkhūhi vā gantvā antarāmagge gahetabbaṃ. Yampi vihāramajjhena gacchantā vā vanacarakādayo vā vanato āharitvā denti, purimanayeneva paṭisaṃviditaṃ kāretabbaṃ.Tatthajātakanti ārāme jātakameva; mūlakhādanīyādiṃ aññena kappiyaṃ katvā dinnaṃ paribhuñjato anāpatti. Sace pana taṃ gāmaṃ haritvā pacitvā āharanti, na vaṭṭati. Paṭisaṃviditaṃ kāretabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
575. Gilānassā: Even if it is unarranged, there is no offense for a sick person. Paṭisaṃvidite vā gilānassa vā sesakaṃ: Having arranged for one person, the remainder of what is brought is permissible for another to eat. Having arranged for four or five people, much is brought; if they want to give it to others, this too is just the remainder of what was arranged, it is permissible for everyone. But if there is even more, it is permissible even on the second day, having released the stored up. The same method applies to the remainder brought for the sick person. But that which has been brought without arranging, that should be sent outside the monastery and arranged for, and then brought back, or the bhikkhus should go and take it on the road. Also, what the forest dwellers etc., bring from the forest and give while going through the middle of the monastery, should be arranged for in the same way as before. Tatthajātakaṃ: What is born in the monastery itself; there is no offense for using root-foods etc., having had it made allowable by someone else. But if they take it to the village, cook it, and bring it back, it is not permissible. It should be arranged for. The rest is clear in itself.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Originating from kathina – it is action-non-action, not volition-free, non-conscious, an offense by enactment, an act of the body, an act of speech, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Catutthapāṭidesanīyaṃ.
The Fourth Pāṭidesanīya.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya
In the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary,
Pāṭidesanīyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīyas is Finished.
Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Pāṭidesanīya Section is Finished.
7. Sekhiyakaṇḍaṃ
7. Sekhiya Section
1. Parimaṇḍalavaggavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Parimaṇḍala Vagga
sekhiyānīti tādinā;
sekhiyānīti tādinā;
Bhāsitāni ayaṃ dāni, tesampi vaṇṇanākkamo.
576.Tatthaparimaṇḍalanti samantato maṇḍalaṃ.Nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jāṇumaṇḍalanti uddhaṃ nābhimaṇḍalaṃ adho jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena jāṇumaṇḍalassa heṭṭhā jaṅghaṭṭhikato paṭṭhāya aṭṭhaṅgulamattaṃ nivāsanaṃ otāretvā nivāsetabbaṃ, tato paraṃ otārentassa dukkaṭanti vuttaṃ. Yathā nisinnassa jāṇumaṇḍalato heṭṭhā caturaṅgulamattaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hotīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ; evaṃ nivāsentassa pana nivāsanaṃ pamāṇikaṃ vaṭṭati. Tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ – dīghato muṭṭhipañcakaṃ, tiriyaṃ aḍḍhateyyahatthaṃ. Tādisassa pana alābhe tiriyaṃ dvihatthapamāṇampi vaṭṭati jāṇumaṇḍalapaṭicchādanatthaṃ, nābhimaṇḍalaṃ pana cīvarenāpi sakkā paṭicchādetunti. Tattha ekapaṭṭacīvaraṃ evaṃ nivatthampi nivatthaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati, dupaṭṭaṃ pana tiṭṭhati.
576. Therein, parimaṇḍalaṃ means a circle all around. Nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ: By covering the navel area above and the knee area below, the lower garment should be worn, letting it hang down about eight fingerbreadths from the shinbone below the knee area; it is said that there is a dukkaṭa offense for letting it hang down further than that. It is said in the Mahāpaccariya that it should be covered about four fingerbreadths below the knee area when sitting; but when wearing it like this, a lower garment of the right size is permissible. Here, the measure is this - five fists in length, and one and a half hatthas across. But if such a one is not available, a measure of two hatthas across is also permissible to cover the knee area; but the navel area can be covered even with the robe. There, a single-layered robe, even if worn in this way, does not stay in place where it is worn, but a double-layered one does stay in place.
Olambento nivāseti āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha na kevalaṃ purato ca pacchato ca olambetvā nivāsentasseva dukkaṭaṃ, ye panaññe ‘‘tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū gihinivatthaṃ nivāsenti hatthisoṇḍakaṃ macchavālakaṃ catukkaṇṇakaṃ tālavaṇṭakaṃ satavalikaṃ nivāsentī’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 280) nayena khandhake nivāsanadosā vuttā, tathā nivāsentassāpi dukkaṭameva. Te sabbe vuttanayena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsentassa na honti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana tattheva āvi bhavissati.
Olambento nivāseti āpatti dukkaṭassa: Here, not only is there a dukkaṭa offense for wearing it letting it hang down in front and back, but also for wearing it in the ways of wearing the lower garment that are stated in the Khandhaka in the manner of "tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū gihinivatthaṃ nivāsenti hatthisoṇḍakaṃ macchavālakaṃ catukkaṇṇakaṃ tālavaṇṭakaṃ satavalikaṃ nivāsentī" (cūḷava. 280), there is also a dukkaṭa offense for wearing it like that. All of those do not occur for one wearing it parimaṇḍalaṃ in the way stated. This is the summary here, but in detail it will become clear there.
Asañciccāti purato vā pacchato vā olambetvā nivāsessāmīti evaṃ asañcicca; atha kho parimaṇḍalaṃyeva nivāsessāmīti virajjhitvā aparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsentassa anāpatti.Assatiyāti aññavihitassāpi tathā nivāsentassa anāpatti.Ajānantassāti ettha nivāsanavattaṃ ajānantassa mokkho natthi. Nivāsanavattañhi sādhukaṃ uggahetabbaṃ, tassa anuggahaṇamevassa anādariyaṃ. Taṃ pana sañcicca anuggaṇhantassa yujjati, tasmā uggahitavattopi yo āruḷhabhāvaṃ vā oruḷhabhāvaṃ vā na jānāti, tassa anāpatti. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetuṃ ajānantassa anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo pana sukkhajaṅgho vā mahāpiṇḍikamaṃso vā hoti, tassa sāruppatthāya jāṇumaṇḍalato aṭṭhaṅgulādhikampi otāretvā nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Asañciccā: Without intending to wear it letting it hang down in front or back; but if he intends to wear it parimaṇḍalaṃ but is distracted and wears it aparimaṇḍalaṃ, there is no offense. Assatiyā: There is no offense for wearing it like that even if he is of another behavior. Ajānantassā: Here, there is no release for one who does not know the duty of wearing the lower garment. For the duty of wearing the lower garment should be well learned, not learning it is itself disrespect. But it is fitting for one who intends to learn it carefully, therefore there is no offense for one who has learned the duty but does not know what is too high or too low. But in the Kurundi it is said, "There is no offense for one who does not know how to wear it parimaṇḍalaṃ." For one who has thin shins or large calf muscles, it is permissible to wear it letting it hang down even more than eight fingerbreadths from the knee area for the sake of beauty.
Gilānassāti jaṅghāya vā pāde vā vaṇo hoti, ukkhipitvā vā otāretvā vā nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati.Āpadāsūti vāḷamigā vā corā vā anubandhanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
Gilānassā: If there is a wound on the shin or foot, it is permissible to wear it lifting it up or letting it down. Āpadāsu: If wild animals or thieves are chasing, there is no offense in such dangers. The rest is clear in itself.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti. Phussadevatthero ‘‘acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, tivedana’’nti āha. Upatissatthero pana ‘‘anādariyaṃ paṭiccā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘lokavajjaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedana’’nti āha.
Originating from the First Pārājika – it is an action, volition-bound, conscious, a worldly offense, an act of the body, unwholesome mind, painful feeling. The Elder Phussadeva said, "Non-conscious, an offense by enactment, tri-vedana." But the Elder Upatissa said, "Because it is said 'due to disrespect'," "a worldly offense, unwholesome mind, painful feeling."
577.Parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbanti ‘‘tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū gihipārutaṃ pārupantī’’ti (cūḷava. 280) evaṃ vuttaṃ anekappakāraṃ gihipārupanaṃ apārupitvā idha vuttanayeneva ubho kaṇṇe samaṃ katvā pārupanavattaṃ pūrentena parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbaṃ. Imāni ca dve sikkhāpadāni avisesena vuttāni. Tasmā vihārepi antaragharepi parimaṇḍalameva nivāsetabbañca pārupitabbañcāti. Samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbāni saddhiṃ theravādena.
577. Parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbaṃ: "tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū gihipārutaṃ pārupantī" (cūḷava. 280) Having not worn the various kinds of laymen's ways of wearing the robe that are stated in this way, one should wear it parimaṇḍalaṃ by fulfilling the duty of wearing the robe, making both edges even in the way stated here. And these two training rules are stated without distinction. Therefore, it should be worn and robed parimaṇḍalaṃ both in the monastery and inside the house. The origin etc., should be understood in the way stated in the first training rule, together with the Theravāda opinion.
578.Kāyaṃ vivaritvāti jattumpi urampi vivaritvā.Suppaṭicchannenāti na sasīsaṃ pārutena; atha kho gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā anuvātantena gīvaṃ paṭicchādetvā ubho kaṇṇe samaṃ katvā paṭisaṃharitvā yāva maṇibandhaṃ paṭicchādetvā antaraghare gantabbaṃ. Dutiyasikkhāpade – galavāṭakato paṭṭhāya sīsaṃ maṇibandhato paṭṭhāya hatthe piṇḍikamaṃsato ca paṭṭhāya pāde vivaritvā nisīditabbaṃ.
578. Kāyaṃ vivaritvā: Having exposed even the collarbone and the chest. Suppaṭicchannenā: Not with the head uncovered; but having untied the knot, having covered the neck with the under-wrap, having made both ears even, having gathered it together, and having covered up to the wrist, one should go inside the house. In the second training rule – from the throat onwards the head, from the wrist onwards the hands, and from the calf muscles onwards the feet should be exposed when sitting.
579.Vāsūpagatassāti vāsatthāya upagatassa rattibhāge vā divasabhāge vā kāyaṃ vivaritvāpi nisīdato anāpatti.
579. Vāsūpagatassā: There is no offense for one who has approached for lodging, whether in the night part or in the day part, even if he sits exposing the body.
580.Susaṃvutoti hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā akīḷāpento; suvinītoti attho.
580. Susaṃvuto: Not fidgeting with his hands or feet; meaning well-behaved.
582.Okkhittacakkhūti heṭṭhā khittacakkhu hutvā.Yugamattaṃ pekkhamānoti yugayuttako hi danto ājāneyyo yugamattaṃ pekkhati, purato catuhatthappamāṇaṃ bhūmibhāgaṃ; imināpi ettakaṃ pekkhantena gantabbaṃ.Yo anādariyaṃ paṭicca tahaṃ tahaṃ olokentoti yo taṃtaṃdisābhāgaṃ pāsādaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ vīthiṃ olokento gacchati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā hatthiassādiparissayābhāvaṃ oloketuṃ vaṭṭati. Nisīdantenāpi okkhittacakkhunāva nisīditabbaṃ.
582. Okkhittacakkhū: Having his eyes cast down. Yugamattaṃ pekkhamāno: For a well-trained horse yoked to a chariot looks at the length of the yoke, about four hatthas of the ground in front; one should go looking at this much. Yo anādariyaṃ paṭicca tahaṃ tahaṃ olokento: For one who goes looking this way and that way, at the palace, the peaked house, the street, there is a dukkaṭa offense. But it is permissible to stand in one place and look around to see if there is any danger from elephants, horses, etc. One who is sitting should also sit with his eyes cast down.
584.Ukkhittakāyāti ukkhepena; itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ ekato vā ubhato vā ukkhittacīvaro hutvāti attho. Antoindakhīlato paṭṭhāya na evaṃ gantabbaṃ. Nisinnakāle pana dhamakaraṇaṃ nīharantenāpi cīvaraṃ anukkhipitvāva nīharitabbanti.
584. Ukkhittakāyā: With an uplifted robe; the instrumental case is in the sense of characteristic, meaning having the robe lifted up on one side or both sides. One should not go like this from the inner door-pivot onwards. When one is sitting, even when one is taking out the needle case, one should take it out without lifting the robe.
Paṭhamo vaggo.
The First Vagga.
2. Ujjagghikavaggavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Ujjagghika Vagga
586.Ujjagghikāyāti mahāhasitaṃ hasanto. Vuttanayenevettha karaṇavacanaṃ.
586. Ujjagghikāyā: Laughing with a loud laugh. Here, the instrumental case is in the sense of the manner, as stated before.
588.Appasaddo antaraghareti ettha kittāvatā appasaddo hoti? Dvādasahatthe gehe ādimhi saṅghatthero, majjhe dutiyatthero, ante tatiyattheroti evaṃ nisinnesu saṅghatthero dutiyena saddhiṃ manteti, dutiyatthero tassa saddañceva suṇāti, kathañca vavatthapeti. Tatiyatthero pana saddameva suṇāti, kathaṃ na vavatthapeti. Ettāvatā appasaddo hoti. Sace pana tatiyatthero kathaṃ vavatthapeti, mahāsaddo nāma hoti.
588.Appasaddo antaraghareti, regarding "A soft voice inside the house," how quiet is considered "a soft voice"? If, in a twelve-cubit dwelling, the most senior monk of the Saṅgha sits at the front, the second senior in the middle, and the third senior at the end, and the most senior monk confers with the second, the second hears the voice and understands the meaning, while the third only hears the voice but does not understand the meaning, that is considered a soft voice. But if the third monk also understands the meaning, it is considered a loud voice.
590.Kāyaṃpaggahetvāti niccalaṃ katvā ujukena kāyena samena iriyāpathena gantabbañceva nisīditabbañca.
590.Kāyaṃ paggahetvāti, "having composed his body," means one should go and sit with the body motionless, upright, and in an even posture (iriyāpatha).
592.Bāhuṃ paggahetvāti niccalaṃ katvā.
592.Bāhuṃ paggahetvāti, "having composed his arm," means having made it motionless.
594.Sīsaṃ paggahetvāti niccalaṃ ujuṃ ṭhapayitvā.
594.Sīsaṃ paggahetvāti, "having composed his head," means having kept it motionless and upright.
Dutiyo vaggo.
Second Chapter.
3. Khambhakatavaggavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Khambhaka Varga
596-8.Khambhakatonāma kaṭiyaṃ hatthaṃ ṭhapetvā katakhambho.Oguṇṭhitoti sasīsaṃ pāruto.
596-8.Khambhakato nāma, "khambhakato" means one who, placing a hand on the hip, makes a pillar-like (khambha) shape.Oguṇṭhitoti, "Oguṇṭhito" means covered head and all.
600.Ukkuṭikāyāti ettha ukkuṭikā vuccati paṇhiyo ukkhipitvā aggapādehi vā, aggapāde vā ukkhipitvā paṇhīhiyeva vā bhūmiṃ phusantassa gamanaṃ. Karaṇavacanaṃ panettha vuttalakkhaṇameva.
600.Ukkuṭikāyāti, regarding "ukkuṭikāyā", ukkuṭikā refers to walking while raising the heels and touching the ground with the toes, or raising the toes and touching the ground only with the heels. Here, the instrumental case signifies the action described above.
601.Dussapallatthikāyāti ettha āyogapallatthikāpi dussapallatthikā eva.
601.Dussapallatthikāyāti, in "dussapallatthikāyā", āyogapallatthikā is also included as dussapallatthikā.
602.Sakkaccanti satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā.
602.Sakkaccanti, "Sakkacca" means with mindfulness established.
603.Ākirantepīti piṇḍapātaṃ dentepi.Pattasaññīti patte saññaṃ katvā.
603.Ākirantepīti, "Ākirantepī" means even while giving almsfood.Pattasaññīti, "Pattasaññī" means making a sign to the bowl.
604.Samasūpakonāma yattha bhattassa catutthabhāgappamāṇo sūpo hoti.Muggasūpo māsasūpoti ettha kulatthādīhi katasūpāpi saṅgahaṃ gacchantiyevāti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.Rasaraseti ettha ṭhapetvā dve sūpe avasesāni oloṇīsākasūpeyyamaccharasamaṃsarasādīni rasarasāti veditabbāni. Taṃ rasarasaṃ bahumpi gaṇhantassa anāpatti.
604.Samasūpako nāma, "Samasūpako" means where the soup is one-fourth the amount of the rice. Muggasūpo māsasūpoti, regarding "Muggasūpo māsasūpo," the Mahāpaccari states that soups made from kulattha beans etc., are also included. Rasaraseti, regarding "Rasarase," having set aside the two soups, the remaining oloṇīsāka soup, peyya soup, fish broth, meat broth, etc., should be understood as rasarasa. There is no offense in taking even a large amount of that rasarasa.
605.Samatittikanti samapuṇṇaṃ samabharitaṃ.Thūpīkataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha thūpīkato nāma pattassa antomukhavaṭṭilekhaṃ atikkamitvā kato; patte pakkhitto racito pūritoti attho. Evaṃ kataṃ agahetvā antomukhavaṭṭilekhāsamappamāṇo gahetabbo.
605.Samatittikanti, "Samatittika" means level and full, completely filled.Thūpīkataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti, regarding "He accepts almsfood piled high; there is an offense of wrong-doing," thūpīkataṃ means made exceeding the inward-curving rim of the bowl; it means packed, arranged, and filled in the bowl. Having not accepted it thus made, one should take it level with the inward-curving rim.
Tattha thūpīkataṃ nāma ‘‘pañcahi bhojanehi kata’’nti abhayatthero āha. Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero pana ‘‘piṇḍapāto nāma yāgupi bhattampi khādanīyampi cuṇṇapiṇḍopi dantakaṭṭhampi dasikasuttampī’’ti idaṃ suttaṃ vatvā dasikasuttampi thūpīkataṃ na vaṭṭatīti āha. Tesaṃ vādaṃ sutvā bhikkhū rohaṇaṃ gantvā cūḷasumanattheraṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘bhante thūpīkatapiṇḍapāto kena paricchinno’’ti? Tesañca therānaṃ vādaṃ ārocesuṃ. Thero sutvā āha – ‘‘aho, cūḷanāgo sāsanato bhaṭṭho, ahaṃ etassa sattakkhattuṃ vinayaṃ vācento na kadāci evaṃ avacaṃ, ayaṃ kuto labhitvā evaṃ vadasī’’ti. Bhikkhū theraṃ yāciṃsu – ‘‘kathetha dāni, bhante, kena paricchinno’’ti? ‘‘Yāvakālikenāvuso’’ti thero āha. Tasmā yaṃkiñci yāgubhattaṃ vā phalāphalaṃ vā āmisajātikaṃ samatittikameva gahetabbaṃ. Tañca kho adhiṭṭhānupagena pattena, itarena pana thūpīkatampi vaṭṭati. Yāmakālikasattāhakālikayāvajīvikāni pana adhiṭṭhānupagapattepi thūpīkatāni vaṭṭanti. Dvīsu pattesu bhattaṃ gahetvā ekasmiṃ pūretvā vihāraṃ pesetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttaṃ. Yaṃ patte pakkhipiyamānaṃ pūvaucchukhaṇḍaphalāphalādi heṭṭhā orohati, taṃ thūpīkataṃ nāma na hoti. Pūvavaṭaṃsakaṃ ṭhapetvā piṇḍapātaṃ denti, thūpīkatameva hoti. Pupphavaṭaṃsakatakkolakaṭukaphalādivaṭaṃsake pana ṭhapetvā dinnaṃ thūpīkataṃ na hoti. Bhattassa upari thālakaṃ vā pattaṃ vā ṭhapetvā pūretvā gaṇhāti, thūpīkataṃ nāma na hoti. Kurundiyampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘thālake vā paṇṇe vā pakkhipitvā taṃ pattamatthake ṭhapetvā denti, pāṭekkabhājanaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.
Therein, Abhayatthera said that "thūpīkataṃ means made with the five foods." But Tipiṭaka Cūḷanāgatthera, after reciting the sutta, "almsfood means gruel, rice, edibles, flour-lumps, tooth-sticks, and thread-measures," said that even a thread-measure, if piled high, is not allowable. Having heard their argument, the monks went to Rohaṇa and asked Cūḷasumanatthera, "Venerable sir, by what is piled-up almsfood defined?" And they reported the elders' argument. Having heard it, the Thera said, "Alas, Cūḷanāga has fallen away from the Teaching. Although I made him recite the Vinaya seven times, he never said such a thing. From where did he obtain this and say it?" The monks requested the Thera, "Speak now, venerable sir, by what is it defined?" The Thera said, "By whatever is allowable for a limited time, friend." Therefore, whatever gruel or rice, or fruit and non-fruit, or meaty food, should be taken only level and full. And that, too, with a bowl that has been determined for use; but with another bowl, even piled high is allowable. But yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika items are allowable even piled high in a bowl that has not been determined for use. It is stated in the Mahāpaccari that it is allowable to take rice in two bowls, fill one, and send it to the monastery. That which, when being put into the bowl, sinks down below—such as cakes, sugarcane pieces, or fruit and non-fruit—is not called piled high. If they give almsfood placing a cake-ring (pūvavaṭaṃsakaṃ) on top, it is still considered piled high. But if it is given placing a flower-ring (pupphavaṭaṃsakaṃ), takkola fruit, kaṭuka fruit, or other such rings, it is not piled high. If one places a plate or bowl on top of the rice and fills it and takes it, it is not called piled high. It is also stated in the Kurundi: "Having put it in a plate or leaf and placing that on top of the bowl, they give it; a separate container is allowable."
Idha anāpattiyaṃ gilāno na āgato, tasmā gilānassapi thūpīkataṃ na vaṭṭati. Sabbattha pana paṭiggahetumeva na vaṭṭati. Paṭiggahitaṃ pana supaṭiggahitameva hoti, paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti.
Here, in the case of no offense, the sick person has not come; therefore, even for a sick person, piled-high food is not allowable. But everywhere, only accepting is not allowable. However, that which has been accepted is well-accepted, and it is allowable to consume.
Tatiyo vaggo.
Third Chapter.
4. Sakkaccavaggavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Sakkacca Varga
606.Sakkaccanti etthāpi asakkaccaṃ paṭiggahaṇeyeva āpatti, paṭiggahitaṃ pana supaṭiggahitameva. Sakkaccanti ca pattasaññīti cāti ubhayaṃ vuttanayameva.
606.Sakkaccanti, here too, the offense is only in accepting without respect (asakkaccaṃ paṭiggahaṇeyeva), but that which has been accepted is indeed well accepted. Both "Sakkacca" and "pattasaññī" (making a sign to the bowl) have the same meaning as previously stated.
608.Sapadānanti tattha tattha odhiṃ akatvā anupaṭipāṭiyā.Samasūpakevattabbaṃ vuttameva.
608.Sapadānanti, "Sapadāna" means without making a limit (odhiṃ akatvā) here and there, in unbroken sequence.Samasūpake what should be said has already been said.
610.Thūpakatoti matthakato; vemajjhatoti attho.
610.Thūpakatoti, "Thūpakato" means made into a mound (matthakato); it means being in the middle (vemajjhato).
611.Paṭicchādetvādentīti māghātasamayādīsu paṭicchannaṃ byañjanaṃ katvā denti. Viññattiyaṃ vattabbaṃ natthi.
611.Paṭicchādetvā dentīti, "Paṭicchādetvā dentī" means they give it having made the relish covered during times such as the Māgha festival. There is nothing to be said about invitation (viññatti).
614.Ujjhānasaññīsikkhāpadepi gilāno na muccati.
614.Ujjhānasaññī even in the training rule about being mindful of grumbling, a sick person is not exempt.
615.Nātimahanto kabaḷoti mayūraṇḍaṃ atimahantaṃ, kukkuṭaṇḍaṃ atikhuddakaṃ, tesaṃ vemajjhappamāṇo.Khajjaketi ettha mūlakhādanīyādi sabbaṃ gahetabbaṃ.
615.Nātimahanto kabaḷoti, "Nātimahanto kabaḷo" means a mouthful that is not too large: a peacock's egg is too large, a chicken's egg is too small; the size in between these.Khajjaketi, in "Khajjake" all root-foods, etc., should be included.
Catuttho vaggo.
Fourth Chapter.
5. Kabaḷavaggavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Kabaḷa Varga
617.Anāhaṭeti anāharite; mukhadvāraṃ asampāpiteti attho.
617.Anāhaṭeti, "Anāhaṭe" means before bringing it; it means before it reaches the mouth.
618.Sabbaṃ hatthanti sakalahatthaṃ.
618.Sabbaṃ hatthanti, "Sabbaṃ hattha" means the whole hand.
619.Sakabaḷenāti ettha dhammaṃ kathento harītakaṃ vā laṭṭhimadhukaṃ vā mukhe pakkhipitvā katheti. Yattakena vacanaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ na hoti, tattake mukhamhi sante kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.
619.Sakabaḷenāti, regarding "Sakabaḷenā," when one is speaking Dhamma, one puts a myrobalan fruit or licorice in the mouth and speaks. As long as the speech is not incomplete, it is allowable to speak with that much in the mouth.
620.Piṇḍukkhepakanti piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā ukkhipitvā.
620.Piṇḍukkhepakanti, "Piṇḍukkhepaka" means throwing mouthfuls, throwing mouthfuls.
621.Kabaḷāvacchedakanti kabaḷaṃ avacchinditvā avacchinditvā.
621.Kabaḷāvacchedakanti, "Kabaḷāvacchedaka" means cutting off mouthfuls, cutting off mouthfuls.
622.Avagaṇḍakārakanti makkaṭo viya gaṇḍe katvā katvā.
622.Avagaṇḍakārakanti, "Avagaṇḍakāraka" means making pouches in the cheeks like a monkey, making them again and again.
623.Hatthaniddhunakanti hatthaṃ niddhunitvā niddhunitvā.
623.Hatthaniddhunakanti, "Hatthaniddhunaka" means shaking the hand, shaking the hand.
624.Sitthāvakārakanti sitthāni avakiritvā avakiritvā.
624.Sitthāvakārakanti, "Sitthāvakāraka" means scattering remnants, scattering remnants.
625.Jivhānicchārakanti jivhaṃ nicchāretvā nicchāretvā.
625.Jivhānicchārakanti, "Jivhānicchāraka" means protruding the tongue, protruding the tongue.
626.Capucapukārakanti capu capūti evaṃ saddaṃ katvā katvā.
626.Capucapukārakanti, "Capucapukāraka" means making the sound "capu capu," making that sound again and again.
Pañcamo vaggo.
Fifth Chapter.
6. Surusuruvaggavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Surusuru Varga
627.Surusurukārakanti surusurūti evaṃ saddaṃ katvā katvā.Davoti parihāsavacanaṃ; taṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ‘‘kiṃ buddho, silakabuddho, paṭibuddho; kiṃ dhammo, godhammo, ajadhammo; kiṃ saṅgho, migasaṅgho, pasusaṅgho’’tiādinā nayena tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha na kātabbanti attho.
627.Surusurukārakanti, "Surusurukāraka" means making the sound "surusuru," making that sound again and again.Davoti, "davo" means a term of ridicule; it means that one should not, by any means, make fun of the Three Jewels by saying things like, "Is he a Buddha? A stone Buddha? A fake Buddha? Is it the Dhamma? Cow Dhamma? Goat Dhamma? Is it the Saṅgha? A deer Saṅgha? A beast Saṅgha?"
628.Hatthanillehakanti hatthaṃ nillehitvā nillehitvā. Bhuñjantena hi aṅgulimattampi nillehituṃ na vaṭṭati. Ghanayāguphāṇitapāyāsādike pana aṅgulīhi gahetvā aṅguliyo mukhe pavesetvā bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Pattanillehakaoṭṭhanillehakesupi eseva nayo. Tasmā ekaṅguliyāpi patto na nillehitabbo, ekaoṭṭhopi jivhāya na nillehitabbo, oṭṭhamaṃsehi eva pana gahetvā anto pavesetuṃ vaṭṭati.
628.Hatthanillehakanti, "Hatthanillehaka" means licking the hand, licking the hand. One who is eating should not lick even the tip of a finger. However, it is allowable to take thick gruel, molasses, pāyāsa, etc., with the fingers and put the fingers into the mouth and eat. Pattanillehakaoṭṭhanillehakesupi eseva nayo, the same principle applies to licking the bowl and licking the lips. Therefore, not even one finger should be used to lick the bowl, and not even one lip should be licked with the tongue; however, it is allowable to grasp it with the lip-flesh and put it inside.
631.Kokanadeti evaṃnāmake.Kokanadanti padumaṃ vuccati, so ca pāsādo padumasaṇṭhāno, tenassa kokanadotveva nāmaṃ akaṃsu.Na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakanti etaṃ paṭikkūlavasena paṭikkhittaṃ, tasmā saṅghikampi puggalikampi gihisantakampi attano santakampi saṅkhampi sarāvampi thālakampi na gahetabbameva, gaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana hatthassa ekadeso āmisamakkhito na hoti, tena padesena gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
631.Kokanadeti, "Kokanade" is the name of that palace.Kokanadanti, kokanada is said to be a lotus, and that palace was lotus-shaped, therefore they named it Kokanada.Na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālakanti, "Na sāmisena hatthena pānīyathālaka" this is prohibited due to its repulsiveness; therefore, one should not take a Saṅgha's, an individual's, a layperson's, one's own, a conch shell, a potsherd, or a plate, doing so incurs a dukkaṭa. But if one part of the hand is not smeared with food, it is allowable to take it by that part.
632.Uddharitvā vāti sitthāni udakato uddharitvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne rāsiṃ katvā udakaṃ chaḍḍeti.Bhinditvā vāti sitthāni bhinditvā udakagatikāni katvā chaḍḍeti.Paṭiggahe vāti paṭiggahena paṭicchanto naṃ paṭiggahe chaḍḍeti.Nīharitvāti bahi nīharitvā chaḍḍeti; evaṃ chaḍḍentassa anāpatti.
632.Uddharitvā vāti, "Uddharitvā vā" means having lifted the remnants out of the water, piling them up in one place, and throwing away the water.Bhinditvā vāti, "Bhinditvā vā" means having broken up the remnants, making them flow with the water, and throwing them away.Paṭiggahe vāti, "Paṭiggahe vā" means covering it with a receiver and throwing it away in the receiver.Nīharitvāti, "Nīharitvā" means having taken it outside and throwing it away; there is no offense for one who throws it away in this manner.
634.Setacchattanti vatthapaliguṇṭhitaṃ paṇḍaracchattaṃ.Kilañjacchattanti vilīvacchattaṃ.Paṇṇacchattanti tālapaṇṇādīhi yehi kehici kataṃ.Maṇḍalabaddhaṃ salākabaddhanti idaṃ pana tiṇṇampi chattānaṃ pañjaradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tāni hi maṇḍalabaddhāni ceva honti salākabaddhāni ca. Yampi tatthajātakadaṇḍakena kataṃ ekapaṇṇacchattaṃ hoti, tampi chattameva. Etesu yaṃkiñci chattaṃ pāṇimhi assātichattapāṇi. So taṃ chattaṃ dhārayamāno vā aṃse vā katvā ūrumhi vā ṭhapetvā yāva hatthena na muccati, tāvassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ na vaṭṭati, desentassa vuttanayena dukkaṭaṃ. Sace panassa añño chattaṃ dhāreti, chattapādukāya vā ṭhitaṃ hoti, hatthato apagatamatte chattapāṇi nāma na hoti. Tassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dhammaparicchedo panettha padasodhamme vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
634.Setacchattanti, "Setacchatta" means a white umbrella wrapped in cloth.Kilañjacchattanti, "Kilañjacchatta" means a split-bamboo umbrella.Paṇṇacchattanti, "Paṇṇacchatta" means one made from palm leaves etc., whatever it is made from.Maṇḍalabaddhaṃ salākabaddhanti, "Maṇḍalabaddhaṃ salākabaddhaṃ" this, however, is stated to show the frame of all three types of umbrellas. For those are both round-framed and rib-framed. Even a single-leaf umbrella that is made with a locally grown stick is still an umbrella. While any of these umbrellas is in his hand (chattapāṇi), while he is holding that umbrella or has it on his shoulder or has placed it on his thigh, as long as he has not released it from his hand, it is not allowable for him to teach the Dhamma; if he teaches it, there is a dukkaṭa as previously stated. But if another person is holding the umbrella for him, or it is standing on an umbrella stand, as soon as it has left his hand, he is no longer called "chattapāṇi". It is allowable for him to teach the Dhamma. Here, the scope of the Dhamma (Dhammaparicchedo) should be understood according to the method stated in the Padasodhamme.
635.Daṇḍapāṇissāti ettha daṇḍo nāma majjhimassa purisassa catuhatthappamāṇo daṇḍapāṇibhāvo panassa chattapāṇimhi vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
635.Daṇḍapāṇissāti, here, daṇḍo nāma means a stick that is about four cubits in length for a man of average height; the state of being "daṇḍapāṇi" should be understood according to the method stated for "chattapāṇi".
636.Satthapāṇimhipi eseva nayo. Asiṃ sannahitvā ṭhitopi hi satthapāṇisaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati.
636.Satthapāṇimhipi eseva nayo, the same principle applies to "satthapāṇi" (having a weapon in hand). Even one standing with a sword strapped on is not counted as "satthapāṇi".
637.Āvudhapāṇissāti ettha kiñcāpi vuttaṃ – ‘‘āvudhaṃ nāma cāpo kodaṇḍo’’ti, atha kho sabbāpi dhanuvikati saddhiṃ saravikatiyā āvudhanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā saddhiṃ vā sarena dhanuṃ gahetvā suddhadhanuṃ vā suddhasaraṃ vā sajiyadhanuṃ vā nijjiyadhanuṃ vā gahetvā ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā dhammo desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace panassa dhanuṃ kaṇṭhepi paṭimukkaṃ hoti, yāva hatthena na gaṇhāti, tāva dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭatiyevāti.
637.Āvudhapāṇissāti, here, although it is said, "āvudhaṃ nāma cāpo kodaṇḍo—a weapon means a bow, a crossbow," still, all variations of bows, together with variations of arrows, should be understood as weapons. Therefore, it is not allowable for one who is holding a bow together with an arrow, or a bare bow, or a bare arrow, or a strung bow, or an unstrung bow, whether standing or sitting, to teach the Dhamma. But if the bow is slung around his neck, it is allowable for him to teach the Dhamma as long as he does not hold it with his hand.
Chaṭṭho vaggo.
Sixth Chapter.
7. Pādukavaggavaṇṇanā
7. Pāduka Varga Explanation
638.Akkantassāti chattadaṇḍake aṅgulantaraṃ appavesetvā kevalaṃ pādukaṃ akkamitvā ṭhitassa.Paṭimukkassāti paṭimuñcitvā ṭhitassa. Upāhanāyapi eseva nayo.Omukkoti panettha paṇhikabaddhaṃ omuñcitvā ṭhito vuccati.
638.Akkantassāti, regarding "Akkantassā", one standing having stepped only on the shoe, without inserting the toe into the space between the strap and the sole (chattadaṇḍake aṅgulantaraṃ appavesetvā kevalaṃ pādukaṃ akkamitvā ṭhitassa).Paṭimukkassāti, "Paṭimukkassā" means one standing having taken them off. The same principle applies to sandals (upāhanā).Omukkoti, "Omukko" here means one standing having untied the heel strap.
640.Yānagatassāti ettha sacepi dvīhi janehi hatthasaṅghāṭena gahito, sāṭake vā ṭhapetvā vaṃsena vayhati, ayutte vā vayhādike yāne, visaṅkharitvā vā ṭhapite cakkamattepi nisinno yānagatotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Sace pana dvepi ekayāne nisinnā honti, vaṭṭati. Visuṃ nisinnesupi ucce yāne nisinnena nīce nisinnassa desetuṃ vaṭṭati, samappamāṇepi vaṭṭati. Purime yāne nisinnena pacchime nisinnassa vaṭṭati. Pacchime pana uccatarepi nisinnena desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
640.Yānagatassāti, regarding "Yānagatassā", even if one is being carried by two people with a hand-supported seat, or is placed on a cloth and carried by a bamboo pole, or is sitting on a cart or other vehicle being pulled, or is sitting on a single wheel that has been disassembled and set up, he is still counted as being "in a vehicle". But if two people are sitting in the same vehicle, it is allowable. Even if they are sitting separately, it is allowable for one sitting in a higher vehicle to teach one sitting in a lower one; it is also allowable if they are at the same height. It is allowable for one sitting in the front vehicle to teach one sitting in the rear vehicle. But it is not allowable for one sitting in the rear vehicle, even if it is higher, to teach.
641.Sayanagatassāti antamaso kaṭasārakepi pakatibhūmiyampi nipannassa uccepi mañcapīṭhe vā bhūmipadese vā ṭhitena nisinnena vā desetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sayanagatena pana sayanagatassa uccatare vā samappamāṇe vā nipannena desetuṃ vaṭṭati. Nipannena ca ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā desetuṃ vaṭṭati, nisinnenāpi ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā vaṭṭati. Ṭhitena ṭhitasseva vaṭṭati.
641.Sayanagatassāti, regarding "Sayanagatassā", it is not allowable for one lying down, even on a rush mat or on the bare ground, for one standing or sitting on a high bed or bench or on the ground to teach him. But it is allowable for one lying down to teach another lying down who is at the same height or a higher level. It is allowable for one lying down to teach one who is standing or sitting; it is also allowable for one sitting to teach one who is standing or sitting. It is allowable for one standing to teach only one who is standing.
642.Pallatthikāyāti āyogapallatthikāya vā hatthapallatthikāya vā dussapallatthikāya vā yāya kāyaci pallatthikāya nisinnassa agilānassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
642.Pallatthikāyāti, "Pallatthikāyā" means it is not allowable to teach a non-sick person sitting with any kind of cross-legged posture, whether it is āyogapallatthikā, hatthapallatthikā, or dussapallatthikā.
643.Veṭhitasīsassāti dussaveṭhanena vā moḷiādīhi vā yathā kesanto na dissati; evaṃ veṭhitasīsassa.
643.Veṭhitasīsassāti, "Veṭhitasīsassā" means one whose head is wrapped with a cloth wrapping or with a turban etc., such that the hairline is not visible.
644.Oguṇṭhitasīsassāti sasīsaṃ pārutassa.
644.Oguṇṭhitasīsassāti with the head covered up.
645.Chamāyaṃ nisinnenāti bhūmiyaṃ nisinnena.Āsane nisinnassāti antamaso vatthampi tiṇānipi santharitvā nisinnassa.
645.Chamāyaṃ nisinnenāti by one sitting on the ground. Āsane nisinnassāti by one sitting on a seat, even if it is just a cloth or grass or leaves spread out.
647.Chapakassāti caṇḍālassa.Chapakīti caṇḍālī.Nilīnoti paṭicchanno hutvā.Yatra hi nāmāti yo hi nāma.Sabbamidaṃ carimaṃ katanti tattheva paripatīti ‘‘sabbo ayaṃ loko saṅkaraṃ gato nimmariyādo’’ti imaṃ vacanaṃ vatvā tattheva tesaṃ dvinnampi antarā rukkhato patito. Patitvā ca pana ubhinnampi purato ṭhatvā imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
647.Chapakassāti of an outcaste. Chapakīti an outcaste woman. Nilīnoti having been concealed. Yatra hi nāmāti where indeed. Sabbamidaṃ carimaṃ katanti tattheva paripatīti after saying the statement, "All this world has gone to ruin, without limit," he fell from the tree right there between the two of them. And after falling, standing in front of both of them, he spoke this verse—
‘‘Ubho atthaṃ na jānanti…pe… asmā kumbhamivābhidā’’ti.
‘‘Ubho atthaṃ na jānanti…pe… asmā kumbhamivābhidā’’ti.
ubho atthaṃ na jānantīti dvepi janā pāḷiyā atthaṃ na jānanti.Dhammaṃ na passareti pāḷiṃ na passanti. Katame te ubhoti?‘‘Yo cāyaṃ mantaṃvāceti, yo cādhammenadhīyatī’’ti. Evaṃ brāhmaṇañca rājānañca ubhopi adhammikabhāve ṭhapesi.
ubho atthaṃ na jānantīti both people do not know the meaning of the Pali. Dhammaṃ na passareti they do not see the Pali. Who are those two? ‘‘Yo cāyaṃ mantaṃ vāceti, yo cādhammenadhīyatī’’ti. Thus, he placed both the Brahmin and the king in an unrighteous state.
sālīnanti gāthamāha. Tassattho – jānāmahaṃ bho ‘‘ayaṃ adhammo’’ti; api ca kho mayā dīgharattaṃ saputtadāraparijanena rañño santako sālīnaṃ odano bhutto.Sucimaṃsūpasecanoti nānappakāravikatisampāditaṃ sucimaṃsūpasecanaṃ missīkaraṇamassātisucimaṃsūpasecano. Tasmā dhamme na vattāmīti yasmā evaṃ mayā rañño odano bhutto, aññe ca bahū lābhā laddhā, tasmā dhamme ahaṃ na vattāmi udare baddho hutvā, na dhammaṃ ajānanto. Ayañhi dhammo ariyehi vaṇṇito pasattho thomitoti jānāmi.
sālīnanti he spoke a verse. Its meaning is: I know, good sir, that "this is unrighteous"; however, for a long time, I have eaten the king's rice (sālīna) along with my children, wife, and family. Sucimaṃsūpasecanoti seasoned with delicious meat prepared in various ways; that to which delicious meat seasoning is mixed is sucimaṃsūpasecano. Tasmā dhamme na vattāmīti because I have eaten the king's rice and received many other gains, therefore I will not speak the Dhamma, being bound by my stomach, not because I do not know the Dhamma. For I know that this Dhamma is praised, lauded, and extolled by the Noble Ones.
‘‘dhiratthū’’tiādinā gāthādvayena ajjhabhāsi. Tassattho – yo tayā dhanalābho ca yasalābho ca laddho, dhiratthu taṃ dhanalābhaṃ yasalābhañca brāhmaṇa. Kasmā? Yasmā ayaṃ tayā laddho lābho āyatiṃ apāyesu vinipātanahetunā sampati ca adhammacaraṇena vutti nāma hoti. Evarūpā yā vutti āyatiṃ vinipātena idha adhammacaraṇena vā nippajjati, kiṃ tāya vuttiyā? Tena vuttaṃ –
He addressed them with two verses beginning with ‘‘dhiratthū’’ti. Their meaning is: the wealth and fame that you have obtained, shame on that wealth and fame, Brahmin. Why? Because the gain you have obtained leads to downfall in future lives and is presently called a livelihood based on unrighteous conduct. What is the use of such a livelihood that arises from downfall in the future or from unrighteous conduct in this life? Therefore it was said—
‘‘Dhiratthu taṃ dhanalābhaṃ, yasalābhañca brāhmaṇa;
‘‘Dhiratthu taṃ dhanalābhaṃ, yasalābhañca brāhmaṇa;
Yā vutti vinipātena, adhammacaraṇena vā’’ti.
Paribbaja mahābrahmeti mahābrāhmaṇa ito disā sīghaṃ palāyassu.Pacantaññepi pāṇinoti aññepi sattā pacanti ceva bhuñjanti ca; na kevalaṃ tvañceva rājā ca.Mā tvaṃ adhammo ācarito asmā kumbhamivābhidāti sace hi tvaṃ ito aparibbajitvā imaṃ adhammaṃ ācarissasi, tato tvaṃ so adhammo evaṃ ācarito yathā udakakumbhaṃ pāsāṇo bhindeyya; evaṃ bhecchati, tena mayaṃ taṃ vadāma –
Paribbaja mahābrahmeti great Brahmin, quickly flee from this place. Pacantaññepi pāṇinoti other beings also cook and eat; not only you and the king. Mā tvaṃ adhammo ācarito asmā kumbhamivābhidāti if you do not leave from here and continue to practice this unrighteousness, then that unrighteousness, practiced in this way, will break you like a stone breaks a water pot; therefore, we say to you—
‘‘Paribbaja mahābrahme, pacantaññepi pāṇino;
‘‘Paribbaja mahābrahme, pacantaññepi pāṇino;
Mā tvaṃ adhammo ācarito, asmā kumbhamivābhidā’’ti.
Ucce āsaneti antamaso bhūmippadesepi unnataṭṭhāne nisinnassa desetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
Ucce āsaneti it is not proper to teach while sitting on a high seat, even on a slightly elevated place on the ground.
648.Naṭhito nisinnassāti sacepi therupaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ṭhitaṃ daharabhikkhuṃ āsane nisinno mahāthero pañhaṃ pucchati, na kathetabbaṃ. Gāravena pana theraṃ uṭṭhahitvā pucchathāti vattuṃ na sakkā, passe ṭhitabhikkhussa kathemīti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.
648.Na ṭhito nisinnassāti even if a junior bhikkhu who is standing comes to attend on a senior and the senior bhikkhu sitting on a seat asks a question, it should not be answered. However, it is not possible to say to the senior bhikkhu with respect, "Get up and ask;" it is proper to say, "I will speak to the bhikkhu who is standing," and then speak.
649.Na pacchato gacchantenāti ettha sace purato gacchanto pacchato gacchantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati, na kathetabbaṃ. Pacchimassa bhikkhuno kathemīti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Saddhiṃ uggahitadhammaṃ pana sajjhāyituṃ vaṭṭati. Samadhurena gacchantassa kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.
649.Na pacchato gacchantenāti here, if someone going in front asks a question of someone going behind, it should not be answered. It is proper to say, "I will speak to the bhikkhu behind," and then speak. However, it is proper to recite the Dhamma together that has been learned together. It is proper to speak to someone going at the same pace.
650.Na uppathenāti etthāpi sace dvepi sakaṭapathe ekekacakkapathena vā uppathena vā samadhuraṃ gacchanti, vaṭṭati.
650.Na uppathenāti here too, if two people are going at the same pace on a cart path, on a single-wheel path, or on a side path, it is proper.
651.Asañciccāti paṭicchannaṭṭhānaṃ gacchantassa sahasā uccāro vā passāvo vā nikkhamati, asañcicca kato nāma anāpatti.
651.Asañciccāti if urine or feces come out suddenly while going to a concealed place, it is called unintentional, there is no offense.
652.Na hariteti ettha yampi jīvarukkhassa mūlaṃ pathaviyaṃ dissamānaṃ gacchati, sākhā vā bhūmilaggā gacchati, sabbaṃ haritasaṅkhātameva. Khandhe nisīditvā appaharitaṭṭhāne pātetuṃ vaṭṭati. Appaharitaṭṭhānaṃ olokentasseva sahasā nikkhamati, gilānaṭṭhāne ṭhito hoti, vaṭṭati.Appaharite katoti appaharitaṃ alabhantena tiṇaṇḍupakaṃ vā palālaṇḍupakaṃ vā ṭhapetvā katopi pacchā haritaṃ ottharati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Kheḷena cettha siṅghāṇikāpi saṅgahitāti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.
652.Na hariteti here, even the root of a living tree that is visible in the ground, or a branch touching the ground, is all considered green. It is proper to sit on the trunk and drop it in a non-green place. If it comes out suddenly while looking for a non-green place, or if one is standing in a sick person's area, it is proper. Appaharite katoti if one does not find a non-green place and places a small clump of grass or straw and then covers the green later, it is indeed proper. Here, phlegm is also included with nasal mucus, it is said in the Mahāpaccariya.
653.Na udaketi etaṃ paribhogaudakameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, vaccakuṭisamuddādiudakesu pana aparibhogesu anāpatti. Deve vassante samantato udakogho hoti, anudakaṭṭhānaṃ olokentasseva nikkhamati, vaṭṭati. Mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘etādise kāle anudakaṭṭhānaṃ alabhantena kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Sesaṃ sabbasikkhāpadesu uttānatthameva.
653.Na udaketi this is said referring only to water for consumption; however, there is no offense in non-consumable water such as toilet water or water from a sea. When the gods are raining, there is a flood of water everywhere; if it comes out while looking for a place without water, it is proper. It is said in the Mahāpaccariya: "In such a situation, it is proper to do it if one cannot find a place without water." The rest is straightforward in all the training rules.
Sattamo vaggo.
Seventh Chapter.
Samuṭṭhānādidīpanatthāya panettha idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ – ujjagghikauccāsaddapaṭisaṃyuttāni cattāri, sakabaḷena mukhena byāharaṇaṃ ekaṃ, chamānīcāsanaṭhānapacchatogamanauppathagamanapaṭisaṃyuttāni pañcāti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānāni kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhahanti, kiriyāni, saññāvimokkhāni, sacittakāni, lokavajjāni, kāyakammavacīkammāni, akusalacittāni, dukkhavedanānīti.
Herein, this is a miscellany for the purpose of showing the origination, etc.: the four connected with laughing and loud noises, one connected with speaking with a mouthful of food, the five connected with sitting on the ground, a low seat, standing, going behind, and going on a side path—these ten training rules are of simultaneous origination, originate from body, speech, and mind, are actions, are subject to release by acknowledgment, are intentional, are offenses against the world, are bodily and verbal actions, are unwholesome thoughts, and are feelings of suffering.
Sūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The training rule concerning requesting curry and rice originates from theft, originates from body and mind and from body, speech, and mind, is an action, is subject to release by acknowledgment, is intentional, is an offense against the world, is a bodily action, is a verbal action, is an unwholesome thought, and is a feeling of suffering.
Chattapāṇidaṇḍapāṇisatthapāṇiāvudhapāṇipādukaupāhanayānasayanapallatthikaveṭhitaoguṇṭhitanāmakāni ekādasa sikkhāpadāni dhammadesanasamuṭṭhānāni vācācittato samuṭṭhahanti, kiriyākiriyāni, saññāvimokkhāni, sacittakāni, lokavajjāni, vacīkammāni, akusalacittāni, dukkhavedanānīti.
The eleven training rules named umbrella in hand, stick in hand, knife in hand, weapon in hand, shoes, slippers, vehicle, bed, couch, wrapping, and covering originate from teaching the Dhamma, originate from speech and mind, are actions and non-actions, are subject to release by acknowledgment, are intentional, are offenses against the world, are verbal actions, are unwholesome thoughts, and are feelings of suffering.
Avasesāni tepaṇṇāsa sikkhāpadāni paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānānīti.
The remaining fifty-three training rules are of the same origination as the first pārājika.
Sabbasekhiyesu ābādhapaccayā anāpatti, thūpīkatapiṇḍapāte sūpabyañjanena paṭicchādane ujjhānasaññimhīti tīsu sikkhāpadesu gilāno natthīti.
Among all the sekhiya rules, there is no offense due to a condition of illness; in the three training rules concerning covering a lump of alms food with curry and having the perception of disgust, there is no sick person.
Sekhiyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Sekhiya Rules is Finished.
Sekhiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Sekhiya Section is Finished.
8. Sattādhikaraṇasamathā
8. The Seven Adhikaraṇasamathā
655.Adhikaraṇasamathesu –sattāti tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhyāparicchedo. Catubbidhaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ samenti vūpasamentītiadhikaraṇasamathā. Tesaṃ vitthāro khandhake ca parivāre ca vutto, tassatthaṃ tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
655.In the Adhikaraṇasamathas—sattāti is the numerical determination of those things. Adhikaraṇas are settled and appeased in four ways; therefore they are called adhikaraṇasamathā. Their expansion is stated in the Khandhaka and the Parivāra; we will describe their meaning there. The rest is straightforward everywhere.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya
The Commentary on the Bhikkhu Vibhanga
Bhikkhuvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
In the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary,
Anantarāyena yathā, niṭṭhitā vaṇṇanā ayaṃ;
Without obstruction, just as this commentary is finished;
Likewise, may beings attain peace without obstruction.
Ciraṃ tiṭṭhatu saddhammo, kāle vassaṃ ciraṃ pajaṃ;
May the Good Dhamma long endure, may it rain in season, may the people long endure;
May the deva satisfy them with Dhamma, may the king protect the land.
Mahāvibhaṅgo niṭṭhito.
The Mahāvibhaṅga is Finished.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga
1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)
1. Pārājika Section (Commentary on the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga)
Yo bhikkhūnaṃ vibhaṅgassa, saṅgahito anantaraṃ;
That which is immediately after the compilation of the Vibhanga for the bhikkhus;
Is the sequential commentary of that Vibhanga for the bhikkhunīs.
Patto yato tato tassa, apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ;
Having attained whatever is appropriate for it, the description of previously unsaid words;
To do on the pārājikas first, this is the commentary.
1. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the First Pārājika Training Rule
656.Tena samayena buddho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati…pe… sāḷho migāranattāti etthasāḷhoti tassa nāmaṃ; migāramātuyā pana nattā hoti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘migāranattā’’ti.Navakammikanti navakammādhiṭṭhāyikaṃ.Paṇḍitāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā.Byattāti veyyattikena samannāgatā.Medhāvinīti pāḷiggahaṇe satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthaggahaṇe paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā samannāgatā.Dakkhāti chekā; avirajjhitvā sīghaṃ kattabbakārinīti attho.Analasāti ālasiyavirahitā.Tatrupāyāyāti tesu tesu kammesu upāyabhūtāya.Vīmaṃsāyāti kattabbakammupaparikkhāya.Samannāgatāti sampayuttā.Alaṃ kātunti samatthā taṃ taṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ.Alaṃ saṃvidhātunti evañca evañca idaṃ hotūti evaṃ saṃvidahitumpi samatthā.Katākataṃ jānitunti katañca akatañca jānituṃ.Teti te ubho; sā ca sundarīnandā so ca sāḷhoti attho.Bhattaggeti parivesanaṭṭhāne.Nikūṭeti koṇasadisaṃ katvā dassite gambhīre.Vissaro me bhavissatīti virūpo me saro bhavissati; vippakārasaddo bhavissatīti attho.Patimānentīti apekkhamānā.Kyāhanti kiṃ ahaṃ.Jarādubbalāti jarāya dubbalā.Caraṇagilānāti pādarogena samannāgatā.
656.Tena samayena buddho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati…pe… sāḷho migāranattāti here, sāḷhoti is his name; however, he was the grandson of Migāra's mother, therefore it is said, "migāranattā". Navakammikanti in charge of new works. Paṇḍitāti endowed with wisdom. Byattāti endowed with intelligence. Medhāvinīti endowed with mindfulness preceded by wisdom in grasping the Pali and with mindfulness preceded by wisdom in grasping the meaning. Dakkhāti skilled; meaning quickly accomplishing what needs to be done without error. Analasāti without laziness. Tatrupāyāyāti with the means appropriate for those various tasks. Vīmaṃsāyāti with investigation of what needs to be done. Samannāgatāti endowed. Alaṃ kātunti capable of doing that particular task. Alaṃ saṃvidhātunti capable of arranging things in this way and that way, so that it happens in this way. Katākataṃ jānitunti capable of knowing what has been done and what has not been done. Teti those two; that is, that Sundarī Nandā and that Sāḷha. Bhattaggeti in the place for distributing food. Nikūṭeti in a deep place shown as having been made like a corner. Vissaro me bhavissatīti my voice will be distorted; meaning there will be a changed sound. Patimānentīti expecting. Kyāhanti what am I. Jarādubbalāti weakened by old age. Caraṇagilānāti afflicted with a foot disease.
657-8.Avassutāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā; tintā kilinnāti attho. Padabhājane panassa tameva rāgaṃ gahetvā ‘‘sārattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasārattāti vatthaṃ viya raṅgajātena kāyasaṃsaggarāgena suṭṭhu rattā.Apekkhavatīti tasseva rāgassa vasena tasmiṃ purise pavattāya apekkhāya samannāgatā.Paṭibaddhacittāti tena rāgena tasmiṃ purise bandhitvā ṭhapitacittā viya. Esa nayo dutiyapadavibhaṅgepi.Purisapuggalassāti purisasaṅkhātassa puggalassa.Adhakkhakanti akkhakānaṃ adho.Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalanti jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ upari. Padabhājane pana padapaṭipāṭiyā eva ‘‘heṭṭhakkhakaṃ uparijāṇumaṇḍala’’nti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ubbhakapparampi ubbhajāṇumaṇḍaleneva saṅgahitaṃ. Sesaṃ mahāvibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.Purimāyo upādāyāti sādhāraṇapārājikehi pārājikāyo catasso upādāyāti attho.Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikāti idaṃ pana imissā pārājikāya nāmamattaṃ, tasmā padabhājane na vicāritaṃ.
657-8.Avassutāti oozing with lust for physical contact; meaning drenched and wet. However, in the word analysis, taking that same lust, "sārattā," etc., is said. There, sārattāti is very reddened with lust for physical contact, like a cloth dyed with dye. Apekkhavatīti endowed with expectation that arises in that man due to that same lust. Paṭibaddhacittāti as if the mind is bound and fixed on that man by that lust. This is the method in the second word analysis as well. Purisapuggalassāti of a person reckoned as a man. Adhakkhakanti below the collarbone. Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalanti above the kneecap. However, in the word analysis, "heṭṭhakkhakaṃ uparijāṇumaṇḍala" is said according to the order of the words. And here, even above the armpit is included in above the kneecap. The rest should be understood according to the method stated in the Mahāvibhaṅga. Purimāyo upādāyāti taking up the four pārājikas beginning with the shared pārājikas. Ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikāti however, this is merely the name of this pārājika, therefore it is not analyzed in the word analysis.
659.Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni avassutādibhedena āpattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ubhatoavassute’’tiādimāha.Tattha ubhatoavassuteti ubhatoavassave; bhikkhuniyā ceva purisassa ca kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutabhāve satīti attho.Kāyena kāyaṃ āmasatīti bhikkhunī yathāparicchinnena kāyena purisassa yaṃkiñci kāyaṃ puriso vā yena kenaci kāyena bhikkhuniyā yathāparicchinnaṃ kāyaṃ āmasati, ubhayathāpi bhikkhuniyā pārājikaṃ.Kāyena kāyapaṭibaddhanti vuttappakāreneva attano kāyena purisassa kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ.Āmasatīti ettha sayaṃ vā āmasatu, tassa vā āmasanaṃ sādiyatu, thullaccayameva.Kāyapaṭibaddhena kāyanti attano vuttappakārakāyapaṭibaddhena purisassa kāyaṃ.Āmasatīti idhāpi sayaṃ vā āmasatu, tassa vā āmasanaṃ sādiyatu, thullaccayameva. Avasesapadesupi imināva nayena vinicchayo veditabbo.
659.Having analyzed the stated training rule in terms of the sequence of words, now, to show the distinction of offenses in terms of oozing, etc., he says ‘‘ubhatoavassute’’ti, etc. Tattha ubhatoavassuteti with oozing on both sides; meaning when there is a state of oozing with lust for physical contact in both the bhikkhunī and the man. Kāyena kāyaṃ āmasatīti when the bhikkhunī touches any part of the man's body with her defined body, or when the man touches the bhikkhunī's defined body with any part of his body, in either case, it is a pārājika for the bhikkhunī. Kāyena kāyapaṭibaddhanti with her body connected to the man's body in the manner described. Āmasatīti here, whether she touches it herself or approves of his touching it, it is only a thullaccaya. Kāyapaṭibaddhena kāyanti with her body connected in the manner described, the man's body. Āmasatīti here too, whether she touches it herself or approves of his touching it, it is only a thullaccaya. In the remaining words as well, the decision should be understood by this method.
Sace pana bhikkhu ceva bhikkhunī ca hoti, tatra ce bhikkhunī āmasati, bhikkhu niccalo hutvā cittena sādiyati, bhikkhu āpattiyā na kāretabbo. Sace bhikkhu āmasati, bhikkhunī niccalā hutvā citteneva adhivāseti, kāyaṅgaṃ acopayamānāpi pārājikakkhette pārājikena, thullaccayakkhette thullaccayena, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭena kāretabbā. Kasmā? ‘‘Kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyeyyā’’ti vuttattā. Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu vinicchayo. Evaṃ pana sati kiriyāsamuṭṭhānatā na dissati, tasmā tabbahulanayena sā vuttāti veditabbā.
If there is both a bhikkhu and a bhikkhunī, and if the bhikkhunī touches and the bhikkhu remains still and approves with his mind, the bhikkhu should not be charged with an offense. If the bhikkhu touches and the bhikkhunī remains still and merely endures it with her mind, not moving her body, she should be charged with a pārājika by a pārājika in the pārājika territory, with a thullaccaya in the thullaccaya territory, and with a dukkaṭa in the dukkaṭa territory. Why? Because it is said, "She might approve of physical contact." This is the decision in the commentaries. However, when this is the case, it is not seen to originate from action, therefore it should be understood that it is said according to that prevalence.
660.Ubbhakkhakanti akkhakānaṃ upari.Adhojāṇumaṇḍalanti jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ heṭṭhā. Ettha ca adhokapparampi adhojāṇumaṇḍaleneva saṅgahitaṃ.
660. Ubbhakkhaka means above the collarbones (akkhaka). Adhojāṇumaṇḍala means below the kneecaps. Here, adhokappara is included in adhojāṇumaṇḍala.
662.Ekatoavassuteti ettha kiñcāpi ekatoti avisesena vuttaṃ, tathāpi bhikkhuniyā eva avassute sati ayaṃ āpattibhedo vuttoti veditabbo.
662. Ekatoavassute: Although it is stated non-specifically as "from one side," it should be understood that this category of offense is stated only when there is emission from a bhikkhuni.
Tatrāyaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya vinicchayo – bhikkhunī kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā, purisopi tatheva. Adhakkhake ubbhajāṇumaṇḍale kāyappadese kāyasaṃsaggasādiyane sati bhikkhuniyā pārājikaṃ. Bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, purisassa methunarāgo vā gehassitapemaṃ vā suddhacittaṃ vā hotu, thullaccayameva. Bhikkhuniyā methunarāgo, purisassa kāyasaṃsaggarāgo vā methunarāgo vā gahessitapemaṃ vā suddhacittaṃ vā hotu, dukkaṭaṃ. Bhikkhuniyā gehassitapemaṃ, purisassa vuttesu catūsu yaṃ vā taṃ vā hotu, dukkaṭameva. Bhikkhuniyā suddhacittaṃ, purisassa vuttesu catūsu yaṃ vā taṃ vā hotu, anāpatti.
Here is the analysis from the beginning: A bhikkhuni emits due to sensual lust through bodily contact, and so does a man. If, upon enjoying bodily contact in the bodily areas above the collarbones and below the kneecaps, a bhikkhuni emits, it is a pārājika. If the bhikkhuni has sensual lust through bodily contact, and the man has either sexual desire, household affection, or pure intention, it is a thullaccaya for the bhikkhuni. If the bhikkhuni has sexual desire, and the man has either sensual lust through bodily contact, sexual desire, household affection, or pure intention, it is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhuni. If the bhikkhuni has household affection, and the man has any of the four mentioned, it is a dukkaṭa. If the bhikkhuni has pure intention, and the man has any of the four mentioned, there is no offense.
Sace pana bhikkhu ceva hoti bhikkhunī ca ubhinnaṃ kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, bhikkhussa saṅghādiseso, bhikkhuniyā pārājikaṃ. Bhikkhuniyā kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, bhikkhussa methunarāgo vā gehassitapemaṃ vā, bhikkhuniyā thullaccayaṃ, bhikkhussa dukkaṭaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ methunarāgo vā gehassitapemaṃ vā, ubhinnampi dukkaṭameva. Yassa yattha suddhacittaṃ, tassa tattha anāpatti. Ubhinnampi suddhacittaṃ, ubhinnampi anāpatti.
But if there is a bhikkhu and a bhikkhuni, and both have sensual lust through bodily contact, it is a saṅghādisesa for the bhikkhu and a pārājika for the bhikkhuni. If the bhikkhuni has sensual lust through bodily contact and the bhikkhu has either sexual desire or household affection, it is a thullaccaya for the bhikkhuni and a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhu. If both have sexual desire or household affection, it is a dukkaṭa for both. If someone has pure intention, there is no offense for that person. If both have pure intention, there is no offense for either.
663.Anāpattiasañciccātiādīsu virajjhitvā vā āmasantiyā aññavihitāya vā ‘‘ayaṃ puriso vā itthī vā’’ti ajānantiyā vā tena phuṭṭhāyapi taṃ phassaṃ asādiyantiyā vā āmasanepi sati anāpatti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
663. Anāpatti asañciccā and so on: There is no offense even if she is touched by someone without lusting, or while touching (another) in a different way, or without knowing "this is a man or a woman," or even when touched by him, she does not enjoy that touch. The rest is straightforward everywhere.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.
The origin (samuṭṭhāna) of the first pārājika: it arises from action (kiriyaṃ), through loss of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), is intentional (sacittakaṃ), a wrong-doing against the world (lokavajjaṃ), is a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), arises from unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), and is of two kinds (dvivedananti).
Paṭhamapārājikaṃ.
The First Pārājika.
2. Dutiyapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Pārājika Training Rule
664.Dutiye pārājike –kacci no sāti kacci nu sā.Avaṇṇoti aguṇo.Akittīti nindā.Ayasoti parivāravipatti; parammukhagarahā vā.
664. In the second pārājika: kacci no sā means kacci nu sā. Avaṇṇo means without good qualities. Akittī means blame. Ayaso means loss of retinue or criticism behind one's back.
665.Vajjapaṭicchādikāti idampi imissā pārājikāya nāmamattameva, tasmā padabhājane na vicāritaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
665. Vajjapaṭicchādikā: This is merely a name for this pārājika, therefore it is not discussed in the analysis of the terms. The rest here is straightforward.
666.Sā vā ārocetīti yā pārājikaṃ āpannā, sā sayaṃ āroceti.Aṭṭhannaṃ pārājikānaṃ aññataranti bhikkhūhi sādhāraṇānaṃ catunnaṃ asādhāraṇānañca catunnameva aññataraṃ. Idañca pārājikaṃ pacchā paññattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘aṭṭhanna’’nti vibhaṅge vuttaṃ. Purimena pana saddhiṃ yugaḷattā imasmiṃ okāse ṭhapitanti veditabbaṃ.Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatteti dhure nikkhittamatte. Vitthārakathā panettha sappāṇakavaggamhi duṭṭhullasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Tatra hi pācittiyaṃ, idha pārājikanti ayameva viseso. Sesaṃ tādisameva.Vajjapaṭicchādikāti idampiimissā pārājikāya nāmamatthāmeva, tasmā padabhājane na vicāritaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
666. Sā vā ārocetī: She who has incurred a pārājika, she herself informs. Aṭṭhannaṃ pārājikānaṃ aññataraṃ: One of the eight pārājikas, namely the four common to bhikkhus and the four uncommon ones. This pārājika was established later; therefore, it is said "eight" in the Vibhaṅga. However, it should be understood that it is placed in this context because it is a pair with the previous one. Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte: Just when the burden is laid down. The detailed explanation here should be understood in the same way as stated in the duṭṭhulla-sikkhāpada in the sappāṇaka-vagga. There, it is a pācittiya, here it is a pārājika; this is the only difference. The rest is the same. Vajjapaṭicchādikā: This too is merely a name for this pārājika; therefore, it is not discussed in the analysis of the terms. The rest here is straightforward.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin of laying down the burden (dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ): it arises from body, speech and mind, is non-action (akiriyaṃ), through loss of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), is intentional (sacittakaṃ), a wrong-doing against the world (lokavajjaṃ), is a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), arises from unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), and is a painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Dutiyapārājikaṃ.
The Second Pārājika.
3. Tatiyapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Pārājika Training Rule
669.Tatiye– dhammenāti bhūtena vatthunā.Vinayenāti codetvā sāretvā. Padabhājanaṃ panassa ‘‘yena dhammena yena vinayena ukkhitto suukkhitto hotī’’ti imaṃ*adhippāyamattaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ.*Satthusāsanenāti ñattisampadāya ceva anusāvanasampadāya ca. Padabhājane panassa ‘‘jinasāsanena buddhasāsanenā’’ti vevacanamattameva vuttaṃ.Saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vātiādīsu yena saṅghena kammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ saṅghaṃ vā tattha sambahulapuggalasaṅkhātaṃ gaṇaṃ vā, ekapuggalaṃ vā taṃ kammaṃ vā na ādiyati, na anuvattati, na tattha ādaraṃ janetīti attho.Samānasaṃvāsakā bhikkhū vuccanti sahāyā, so tehi saddhiṃ natthīti ettha ‘‘ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatā’’ti ayaṃ tāva saṃvāso; samāno saṃvāso etesantisamānasaṃvāsakā.Evarūpā bhikkhū bhikkhussa tasmiṃ saṃvāse saha ayanabhāvenasahāyāti vuccanti. Idāni yena saṃvāsena te samānasaṃvāsakāti vuttā, so saṃvāso tassa ukkhittakassa tehi saddhiṃ natthi. Yehi ca saddhiṃ tassa so saṃvāso natthi, na tena te bhikkhū attano sahāyā katā honti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakā bhikkhū vuccanti sahāyā, so tehi saddhiṃ natthi, tena vuccati akatasahāyo’’ti. Sesaṃ saṅghabhedasikkhāpadādīsu vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.
669. In the third pārājika: Dhammenā means with a factual matter (bhūtena vatthunā). Vinayenā means having admonished and reminded. The analysis of the terms, however, is stated to show only the intended meaning (adhippāyamattaṃ), that "by whatever Dhamma, by whatever Vinaya, it has been expelled, it is well-expelled." Satthusāsanenā means with both the accomplishment of the motion (ñatti) and the accomplishment of the announcement (anusāvana). In the analysis of the terms, only a synonym is given: "Jinasāsanena Buddhasāsanena." In Saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā and so on, it means that he does not accept, does not follow, does not generate respect for that Sangha by which the act was done, or that group (gaṇa) consisting of many individuals, or that single individual, or that act. Samānasaṃvāsakā bhikkhū vuccanti sahāyā, so tehi saddhiṃ natthi: Here, "having the same action, the same recitation, the same training" is called association (saṃvāsa); those who have the same association are samānasaṃvāsakā. Bhikkhus of this kind are called sahāyā because of their state of being together in that association of the bhikkhu. Now, that association by which they are called samānasaṃvāsaka, that association does not exist for the expelled one together with them. And those with whom that association does not exist, those bhikkhus are not made friends by him. Therefore, it is said, "Samānasaṃvāsakā bhikkhū vuccanti sahāyā, so tehi saddhiṃ natthi, tena vuccati akatasahāyo." The rest is straightforward in meaning because it is stated in the same way as in the saṅghabheda-sikkhāpada and others.
Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin of repeated admonition (samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ): it arises from body, speech and mind, is non-action (akiriyaṃ), through loss of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), is intentional (sacittakaṃ), a wrong-doing against the world (lokavajjaṃ), is a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), arises from unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), and is a painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Tatiyapārājikaṃ.
The Third Pārājika.
4. Catutthapārājikasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Pārājika Training Rule
675.Catutthe –avassutāti lokassādamittasanthavavasena kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vātiādīsu pana yaṃ purisapuggalena hatthe gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, taṃ purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇanti vuttaṃ. Eseva nayosaṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇepi. Hatthaggahaṇanti ettha ca hatthaggahaṇañca aññampi apārājikakkhette gahaṇañca ekajjhaṃ katvā hatthaggahaṇanti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyyāti hattho nāma kapparaṃ upādāya yāva agganakhā, etassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ gahaṇaṃ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha caasaddhammoti kāyasaṃsaggo veditabbo, na methunadhammo. Na hi methunassa sāmantā thullaccayaṃ hoti. ‘‘Viññū paṭibalo kāyasaṃsaggaṃ samāpajjitunti vacanampi cettha sādhakaṃ.
675. In the fourth pārājika: Avassutā means emitted due to sensual lust through bodily contact because of worldly intimacy and familiarity. The same method (naya) applies to the second instance of the word. In Purisapuggalassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā and so on, whatever grasping has been done with the hand by a male individual, that is called grasping the hand of a male individual. The same method applies to grasping the edge of the outer robe. Hatthaggahaṇa: Here, it should be understood that both grasping the hand and also grasping in another area that is not a pārājika offense are combined and called hatthaggahaṇa. Therefore, in its analysis of terms, it is said, "Hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyyāti hattho nāma kapparaṃ upādāya yāva agganakhā, etassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya ubbhakkhakaṃ adhojāṇumaṇḍalaṃ gahaṇaṃ sādiyati, āpatti thullaccayassā"—"Hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyeyya: 'Hattho' is from the elbow joint (kapparaṃ) up to the tips of the nails. If she enjoys grasping above the collarbone or below the kneecap for the purpose of indulging in this asaddhamma, there is an offense of thullaccaya." Here, asaddhammo should be understood as bodily contact, not sexual intercourse (methunadhammo). For there is no thullaccaya in the vicinity of sexual intercourse. The statement, "A knowledgeable and capable woman engages in bodily contact" is also evidence here.
‘‘Tissitthiyo methunaṃ taṃ na seve,
"Three women do not engage in sexual intercourse with them,
Three men, and three non-Aryan hermaphrodites;
She should not engage in sexual intercourse in the genitals,
She would be cut off because of sexual intercourse;
These questions are thought about by the skilled ones." (pari. 481);
chejjā siyā methunadhammapaccayāti ettha iminā pariyāyena attho veditabbo. Etenupāyena sabbapadesu vinicchayo veditabbo. Apica ‘‘saṅketaṃ vā gaccheyyā’’ti etassa padabhājane‘‘itthannāmaṃ āgacchā’’ti. Evaṃnāmakaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgacchāti attho.
chejjā siyā methunadhammapaccayā: Here, the meaning should be understood by this method. By this method, the analysis should be understood in all places. Moreover, in the analysis of the terms of "saṅketaṃ vā gaccheyyā," ‘‘itthannāmaṃ āgacchā’’ means "come to a place with such and such a name."
676.Aṭṭhamaṃ vatthuṃ paripūrentī assamaṇī hotīti anulomato vā paṭilomato vā ekantarikāya vā yena tena nayena aṭṭhamaṃ vatthuṃ paripūrentīyeva assamaṇī hoti. Yā pana ekaṃ vā vatthuṃ satta vā vatthūni satakkhattumpi pūreti, neva assamaṇī hoti. Āpannā āpattiyo desetvā muccati. Apicettha gaṇanūpikā āpatti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘atthāpatti desitā gaṇanūpikā, atthāpatti desitā na gaṇanūpikā’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – idāni nāpajjissāmīti dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā desitā gaṇanūpikā desitagaṇanaṃ upeti pārājikassa aṅgaṃ na hoti. Tasmā yā ekaṃ āpannā dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā desetvā puna kilesavasena āpajjati, puna deseti, evaṃ aṭṭha vatthūni pūrentīpi pārājikā na hoti. Yā pana āpajjitvā punapi aññaṃ vatthuṃ āpajjissāmīti saussāhāva deseti, tassā sā āpatti nagaṇanūpikā, desitāpi adesitā hoti, desitagaṇanaṃ na gacchati, pārājikasseva aṅgaṃ hoti. Aṭṭhame vatthumhi paripuṇṇamatte pārājikā hoti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
676. Aṭṭhamaṃ vatthuṃ paripūrentī assamaṇī hotī: Only by completing the eighth basis (vatthu) in a forward or reverse order, or with one in between, or in any way, does she become no longer a samaṇī (assamaṇī). But she who completes one basis or seven bases even a hundred times, does not become no longer a samaṇī. Having declared the offenses, she is released. Moreover, here, an offense that is subject to counting (gaṇanūpikā) should be understood. For it was said, "There is an offense that is declared and is subject to counting; there is an offense that is declared and is not subject to counting." Here, the analysis is this: If, having laid down the burden, declaring "I will not incur (the offense) now," it is subject to counting; it enters into the count of declared offenses and is not a part of the pārājika. Therefore, she who, having incurred one offense, lays down the burden and declares it, and then incurs an offense again due to defilements and declares it again, even if she completes eight bases in this way, she does not incur a pārājika. But she who, having incurred an offense, declares it with the intention of incurring another basis again, that offense of hers is not subject to counting; even if declared, it is undeclared; it does not enter into the count of declared offenses; it is a part of the pārājika itself. She incurs a pārājika as soon as the eighth basis is completed. The rest is straightforward.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.
The origin of laying down the burden: it arises from body, speech and mind, is action (kiriyaṃ), through loss of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), is intentional (sacittakaṃ), a wrong-doing against the world (lokavajjaṃ), is a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), arises from unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), and is of two kinds (dvivedananti).
Catutthapārājikaṃ.
The Fourth Pārājika.
Uddiṭṭhākho ayyāyo aṭṭha pārājikā dhammāti bhikkhū ārabbha paññattā sādhāraṇā cattāro ime ca cattāroti evaṃ pātimokkhuddesamaggena uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo aṭṭha pārājikā dhammāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ mahāvibhaṅge vuttanayamevāti.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo aṭṭha pārājikā dhammā: Addressed to the bhikkhus, the four common ones and these four—thus, through the method of reciting the Pātimokkha, these eight pārājika Dhammas have been recited, O Venerable Ones. Thus, the meaning should be understood here. The rest is in the same way as stated in the Mahāvibhaṅga.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya bhikkhunīvibhaṅge
In the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary, in the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga,
Pārājikakaṇḍavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Pārājika Section is Finished.
Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Pārājika Section is Finished.
2. Saṅghādisesakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)
2. The Saṅghādisesa Section (Explanation of the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga)
1. Paṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
Pārājikānantarassa, ayaṃ dāni bhavissati;
After the pārājikas, this will now be;
An explanation of the Saṅghādisesa Section, with meanings that are not straightforward.
678.Udositanti bhaṇḍasālā.Māyyo evaṃ avacāti ayyo mā evaṃ avaca.Apināyyāti apinu ayyā.Accāvadathāti atikkamitvā vadatha; akkosathāti vuttaṃ hoti.
678. Udosita means a storehouse for goods (bhaṇḍasālā). Māyyo evaṃ avacā means "The venerable one should not say this." Apināyyā means "Isn't it, venerable one?" Accāvadathā means "You speak excessively"; it means you revile.
679.Ussayavādikāti mānussayavasena kodhussayavasena vivadamānā. Yasmā pana sā atthato aṭṭakārikā hoti, tasmā ‘‘ussayavādikā nāma aḍḍakārikā vuccatī’’ti padabhājane vuttaṃ. Ettha caaḍḍoti vohārikavinicchayo vuccati, yaṃ pabbajitā ‘‘adhikaraṇa’’ntipi vadanti.Dutiyaṃ vā pariyesatīti sakkhiṃ vā sahāyaṃ vā pariyesati, dukkaṭaṃ.Gacchati vāti upassayo vā hotu bhikkhācāramaggo vā, yattha ṭhitāya ‘‘aḍḍaṃ karissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, tato vohārikānaṃ santikaṃ gacchantiyā padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ.Ekassa ārocetīti dvīsu janesu yassa kassaci ekassa kathaṃ yo koci vohārikānaṃ āroceti.Dutiyassa ārocetīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
679. Ussayavādikā means disputing due to the arrogance of passion. Since she is, in fact, a litigant, therefore it is said in the analysis of the terms, "Ussayavādikā means a litigant." Here, aḍḍo means a worldly judgment, which renunciates also call "adikkaraṇa." Dutiyaṃ vā pariyesatī means she seeks a witness or a companion; (this is a) dukkaṭa. Gacchati vā whether it is a nunnery or a alms-round, from wherever, standing there the thought "I will litigate" arises, for her going to the presence of the laity, at each step, there is dukkaṭa. Ekassa ārocetī means whoever of the two people informs one person of the matter. Dutiyassa ārocetī means the same method applies here too.
Ayaṃ panettha asammohatthāya vitthārakathā – yattha katthaci antamaso bhikkhunupassayaṃ āgatepi vohārike disvā bhikkhunī attano kathaṃ āroceti, bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ. Upāsako attano kathaṃ āroceti, bhikkhuniyā thullaccayaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ upāsako attano kathaṃ āroceti, bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ. Atha sā attano kathaṃ āroceti, thullaccayaṃ. Bhikkhunī upāsakaṃ vadati – ‘‘mama ca tava ca kathaṃ tvaṃyeva ārocehī’’ti, so attano vā kathaṃ paṭhamaṃ ārocetu bhikkhuniyā vā, paṭhamārocane dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyārocane thullaccayaṃ. Upāsako bhikkhuniṃ vadati – ‘‘mama ca tava ca kathaṃ tvaṃyeva ārocehī’’ti, etthāpi eseva nayo.
Here, this is a detailed explanation for the purpose of non-confusion: Wherever a lay person is seen, even if they come to a bhikkhuni's residence, and the bhikkhuni informs them of her matter, there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhuni. If a lay devotee informs them of their matter, there is a thullaccaya for the bhikkhuni. First, the lay devotee informs them of their matter, there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhuni. Then she informs them of her matter, there is a thullaccaya. The bhikkhuni says to the lay devotee, "You yourself inform them of both my matter and your matter," whether he first informs them of his own matter or of the bhikkhuni's, there is a dukkaṭa for the first informing, and a thullaccaya for the second informing. The lay devotee says to the bhikkhuni, "You yourself inform them of both my matter and your matter," the same method applies here too.
Bhikkhunī kappiyakārakena kathāpeti, tattha kappiyakārako vā bhikkhuniyā kathaṃ paṭhamaṃ ārocetu, itaro vā attano kathaṃ, kappiyakārako vā ubhinnampi kathaṃ, itaro vā ubhinnampi kathaṃ ārocetu, yathā vā tathā vā ārociyamāne paṭhame ārocane bhikkhuniyā dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye thullaccayaṃ. Yathā vā tathā vā ārocitaṃ pana ubhinnampi kathaṃ sutvā vohārikehi vinicchaye kate aḍḍapariyosānaṃ nāma hoti, tasmiṃ aḍḍapariyosāne bhikkhuniyā jayepi parājayepi saṅghādiseso. Sace pana gatigataṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti, sutapubbaṃ vohārikehi. Atha te bhikkhuniñca aḍḍakārakañca disvāva ‘‘tumhākaṃ kathanakiccaṃ natthi, jānāma mayaṃ ettha pavatti’’nti sayameva vinicchinitvā denti, evarūpe aḍḍapariyosānepi bhikkhuniyā anāpatti.
The bhikkhuni has a kappiyakāraka tell the story; there, whether the kappiyakāraka first tells the bhikkhuni's story, or the other one tells their own story, or the kappiyakāraka tells both of their stories, or the other one tells both of their stories, however it may be told, there is a dukkaṭa for the bhikkhuni at the first informing and a thullaccaya at the second informing. However, having heard both of their stories, when the laity make a judgment, it is called the conclusion of the dispute (aḍḍapariyosānaṃ); at that conclusion of the dispute, there is a saṅghādisesa for the bhikkhuni whether she wins or loses. But if the matter has already been decided (gatigataṃ adhikaraṇaṃ hoti), having been heard before by the laity, then seeing both the bhikkhuni and the litigant, they say, "There is no need for you to tell the story; we know what is happening here," and decide the matter themselves. In such a conclusion of the dispute, there is no offense for the bhikkhuni.
paṭhamāpattikaṃ. Padabhājane pana adhippāyamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saha vatthujjhācārā āpajjati asamanubhāsanāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – saha vatthujjhācārā yaṃ bhikkhunī āpajjati, na tatiyāya samanubhāsanāya, ayaṃ paṭhamameva saha vatthujjhācārena āpajjitabbattā paṭhamāpattikoti. Bhikkhunisaṅghato nissāretīti nissāraṇīyo; taṃnissāraṇīyaṃ. Padabhājane pana adhippāyamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅghamhā nissārīyatīti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ āpannā bhikkhunī saṅghato nissārīyati, so nissāraṇīyoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Na hi so eva dhammo saṅghamhā kenaci nissārīyati. Tena pana dhammena bhikkhunī nissārīyati, tasmā so nissāretīti nissāraṇīyo.
paṭhamāpattikaṃ. However, in the word analysis, to show only the intention, it was said, "together with the offense and transgression, one incurs the penalty for not seeking permission." Here, the meaning is: the bhikkhunī who incurs an offense together with the cause and transgression, without seeking the third permission, is subject to the first offense because she is to be penalized with the first offense along with the cause and transgression. Bhikkhunī saṅgha excludes, thus nissāraṇīyaṃ; that is nissāraṇīyaṃ. However, in the word analysis, to show only the intention, it was said, "one who is expelled from the saṅgha." There, the bhikkhunī who, having committed an offense, is expelled from the saṅgha, she is to be seen as nissāraṇīya. Indeed, that dhamma itself is not expelled from the saṅgha by anyone. But by that dhamma, the bhikkhunī is expelled, therefore it is said to be nissāraṇīya because it expels.
Ākaḍḍhiyamānā gacchatīti aḍḍakārakamanussehi sayaṃ vā āgantvā dūtaṃ vā pesetvā ehīti vuccamānā vohārikānaṃ santikaṃ gacchati, tato aḍḍakārako attano vā kathaṃ paṭhamaṃ ārocetu bhikkhuniyā vā, neva paṭhamārocane dukkaṭaṃ, na dutiyārocane thullaccayaṃ. Amaccehi vinicchinitvā kate aḍḍapariyosānepi anāpattiyeva. Sacepi aḍḍakārako bhikkhuniṃ vadati ‘‘mama ca tava ca kathaṃ tvameva kathehī’’ti; kathentiyāpi kathaṃ sutvā kate aḍḍapariyosānepi anāpattiyeva.
Ākaḍḍhiyamānā gacchatīti being told "come" by bribe-taking men, either coming themselves or sending a messenger, she goes to the presence of the lawyers; then, even if the bribe-taker first announces his own case to her or to the bhikkhunī, there is no duukkaṭa in the first announcement, nor a thullaccaya in the second announcement. Even at the conclusion of the bribe negotiation decided by the ministers, there is no offense. Even if the bribe-taker says to the bhikkhunī, "You yourself should state my case and yours"; even if the conclusion of the bribe negotiation is made after hearing the case being stated, there is no offense.
Rakkhaṃyācatīti dhammikaṃ rakkhaṃ yācati, anāpatti. Idāni yathāyācitā rakkhā dhammikā hoti, taṃ dassetuṃanodissa ācikkhatīti āha. Tattha atītaṃ ārabbha atthi odissaācikkhanā, atthi anodissaācikkhanā, anāgataṃ ārabbhāpi atthi odissaācikkhanā, atthi anodissaācikkhanā.
Rakkhaṃ yācatīti she asks for lawful protection; there is no offense. Now, to show how the protection asked for is lawful, he says anodissa ācikkhatīti. There, regarding the past, there is pointing out with specification, there is pointing out without specification; regarding the future also, there is pointing out with specification, there is pointing out without specification.
Kathaṃ atītaṃ ārabbha odissaācikkhanā hoti? Bhikkhunupassaye gāmadārakā dhuttādayo vā ye keci anācāraṃ vā ācaranti, rukkhaṃ vā chindanti, phalāphalaṃ vā haranti, parikkhāre vā acchindanti. Bhikkhunī vohārike upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ upassaye idaṃ nāma kata’’nti vadati. ‘‘Kenā’’ti vutte ‘‘asukena ca asukena cā’’ti ācikkhati. Evaṃ atītaṃ ārabbha odissaācikkhanā hoti, sā na vaṭṭati. Tañce sutvā te vohārikā tesaṃ daṇḍaṃ karonti, sabbaṃ bhikkhuniyā gīvā hoti. Daṇḍaṃ gaṇhissantīti adhippāyepi sati gīvāyeva hoti. Sace pana tassa daṇḍaṃ gaṇhathāti vadati, pañcamāsakamatte gahite pārājikaṃ hoti.
How does pointing out with specification occur regarding the past? In a bhikkhunī’s residence, village boys, gamblers, or whoever else, engage in improper conduct, or cut down trees, or take fruits and non-fruits, or steal requisites. The bhikkhunī approaches the lawyers and says, "Such and such was done in our residence." When asked, "By whom?", she points out, "By so-and-so and so-and-so." Thus, pointing out with specification occurs regarding the past, and that is not allowable. If those lawyers, having heard that, inflict punishment on them, all of it falls on the bhikkhunī’s neck. Even with the intention that they will inflict punishment, it falls on her neck. But if she says, "Inflict punishment on them," a pārājika results if about five māsakas are taken.
‘‘Kenā’’ti vutte pana ‘‘asukenāti vattuṃ amhākaṃ na vaṭṭati, tumheyeva jānissatha. Kevalañhi mayaṃ rakkhaṃ yācāma, taṃ no detha, avahaṭabhaṇḍañca āharāpethā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ anodissa ācikkhanā hoti, sā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ vutte sacepi te vohārikā kārake gavesitvā tesaṃ daṇḍaṃ karonti, sabbaṃ sāpateyyampi gahitaṃ bhikkhuniyā, neva gīvā na āpatti.
However, when asked, "By whom?", it is not allowable for us to say, "By so-and-so; you yourselves should find out. We only ask for protection; give us that, and have the stolen goods brought back." Thus, pointing out without specification occurs, and that is allowable. Even if those lawyers, having spoken thus, search for the perpetrators and inflict punishment on them, even if all the property is taken, it belongs to the bhikkhunī; it does not fall on her neck, and there is no offense.
Parikkhāraṃ harante disvā tesaṃ anatthakāmatāya coro coroti vattumpi na vaṭṭati. Evaṃ vuttepi hi yaṃ tesaṃ daṇḍaṃ karonti, sabbampi bhikkhuniyā gīvā hoti. Attano vacanakaraṃ pana ‘‘iminā me parikkhāro gahito, taṃ āharāpehi, mā cassa daṇḍaṃ karohī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Dāsadāsīvāpiādīnaṃ atthāya aḍḍaṃ karonti, ayaṃ akappiyaaḍḍo nāma, na vaṭṭati.
Even seeing them stealing requisites, it is not allowable to say "thief, thief" out of a desire for their harm. For even if they inflict punishment on them, all of it falls on the bhikkhunī’s neck. However, it is allowable to say to someone who carries out one's word, "My requisite was taken by this person; have it brought back, but do not punish him." Making a bribe negotiation for the sake of male and female slaves, etc., this is called an unlawful bribe negotiation, and it is not allowable.
Kathaṃ anāgataṃ ārabbha odissaācikkhanā hoti? Vuttanayeneva parehi anācārādīsu katesu bhikkhunī vohārike evaṃ vadati ‘‘amhākaṃ upassaye idañcidañca karonti, rakkhaṃ no detha āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāyā’’ti. ‘‘Kena evaṃ kata’’nti vutte ca ‘‘asukena asukena cā’’ti ācikkhati. Evaṃ anāgataṃ ārabbha odissaācikkhanā hoti, sāpi na vaṭṭati. Tesañhi daṇḍe kate purimanayeneva sabbaṃ bhikkhuniyā gīvā. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
How does pointing out with specification occur regarding the future? In the same manner as stated, when improper conduct, etc., has been done by others, the bhikkhunī says thus to the lawyers, "They are doing such and such in our residence; give us protection so that they will not do it in the future." And when asked, "By whom was this done?", she points out, "By so-and-so and so-and-so." Thus, pointing out with specification occurs regarding the future, and that too is not allowable. For if punishment is inflicted on them, in the same manner as before, all of it falls on the bhikkhunī’s neck. The rest is just like before.
Sace pana vohārikā ‘‘bhikkhunupassaye evarūpaṃ anācāraṃ karontānaṃ imaṃ nāma daṇḍaṃ karomā’’ti bheriṃ carāpetvā āṇāya atiṭṭhamāne pariyesitvā daṇḍaṃ karonti, bhikkhuniyā neva gīvā na āpatti.
But if the lawyers, having proclaimed by drumbeat, "We will inflict such-and-such a punishment on those who engage in such conduct in the bhikkhunī’s residence," and, not standing by their decree, search for them and inflict punishment, it does not fall on the bhikkhunī’s neck, and there is no offense.
Yo cāyaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vutto, bhikkhūnampi eseva nayo. Bhikkhunopi hi odissaācikkhanā na vaṭṭati. Yaṃ tathā ācikkhite daṇḍaṃ karonti, sabbaṃ gīvā hoti. Vuttanayeneva daṇḍaṃ gaṇhāpentassa pārājikaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘daṇḍaṃ karissantī’’ti jānantopi anodissa katheti, te ca pariyesitvā daṇḍaṃ karontiyeva, na doso. Vihārasīmāya rukkhādīni chindantānaṃ vāsipharasuādīni gahetvā pāsāṇehi koṭṭenti, na vaṭṭati. Sace dhārā bhijjati, kārāpetvā dātabbā. Upadhāvitvā tesaṃ parikkhāre gaṇhanti, tampi na kātabbaṃ, lahuparivattañhi cittaṃ, theyyacetanāya uppannāya mūlacchejjampi gaccheyya. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
And this is the same method that was stated for the bhikkhunīs is also for the bhikkhus. For pointing out with specification is not allowable for the bhikkhus either. Whatever punishment they inflict on one who has been pointed out in that way, all of it falls on his neck. In the same manner as stated, a pārājika results for one who causes punishment to be inflicted. However, if one, even knowing that "they will inflict punishment," speaks without specification, and they search for them and inflict punishment, there is no fault. When they are cutting down trees, etc., within the boundary of the monastery, it is not allowable to take axes, hatchets, etc., and strike them with stones. If the blade is broken, it should be made and given back. It is not allowable to run up and seize their requisites either, for the mind is easily turned around; if the intention to steal arises, it could go as far as a root-severing offense. The rest is obvious in meaning.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathina-arising: It arises from action, is not associated with perception of release, is unintentional, is a preceptual offense, is an act of body, is an act of speech, is tri-citta, is tri-vedana.
Sattarasake paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The first training rule in the Seventeenth (Chapter).
2. Dutiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Description of the Second Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
682.Dutiye –varabhaṇḍanti muttāmaṇiveḷuriyādi mahagghabhaṇḍaṃ.
682.In the second: varabhaṇḍanti costly goods such as pearls, gems, veḷuriya, etc.
683.Anapaloketvāti anāpucchitvā.Gaṇaṃ vāti mallagaṇabhaṭiputtagaṇādikaṃ.Pūganti dhammagaṇaṃ.Seṇinti gandhikaseṇidussikaseṇiādikaṃ. Yattha yattha hi rājāno gaṇādīnaṃ gāmanigame niyyātenti ‘‘tumheva ettha anusāsathā’’ti, tattha tattha te eva issarā honti. Tasmā te sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca rājānaṃ vā gaṇādike vā āpucchitvāpi bhikkhunisaṅgho āpucchitabbova.Ṭhapetvā kappanti titthiyesu vā aññabhikkhunīsu vā pabbajitapubbaṃ kappagatikaṃ ṭhapetvāti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
683.Anapaloketvāti without asking permission. Gaṇaṃ vāti such as the Malla assembly, the Bhaṭiputta assembly, etc. Pūganti a group for the Dhamma. Seṇinti such as a perfumer's guild, a clothier's guild, etc. For wherever kings grant villages or towns to assemblies, etc., saying, "You yourselves should govern here," there they themselves are the lords. Therefore, this was said with them in mind. And here, even having asked permission of the king or the assemblies, etc., the bhikkhunī saṅgha must still be asked permission. Ṭhapetvā kappanti except for one who has previously gone forth among the sectarians or other bhikkhunīs whose time for rehabilitation has passed. The rest is obvious in meaning.
Corīvuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kenaci karaṇīyena pakkantāsu bhikkhunīsu agantvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ yathānisinnaṭṭhāneyeva attano nissitakaparisāya saddhiṃ vuṭṭhāpentiyā vācācittato samuṭṭhāti, khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā nadiṃ vā gantvā vuṭṭhāpentiyā kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, anāpucchā vuṭṭhāpanavasena kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Corīvuṭṭhāna-arising: When the bhikkhunīs have departed due to some business, without going to the boundary marker, while she is raising (a candidate) together with her dependent following right in the place where they are sitting, it arises from speech and mind; when she goes to a broken boundary or a river and raises (a candidate), it arises from body, speech, and mind; due to the raising (of a candidate) without asking permission, it is both action and non-action, is associated with perception of release, is intentional, is a preceptual offense, is an act of body, is an act of speech, is tri-citta, is tri-vedana.
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Description of the Third Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
692.Tatiye –parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyāti ettha ekaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmentiyā thullaccayaṃ, dutiyena atikkantamatte saṅghādiseso.Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāranti ettha parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ ekena pādena atikkamati thullaccayaṃ, dutiyena atikkantamatte saṅghādiseso. Apicettha sakagāmato nikkhamantiyā gāmantarapaccayā anāpatti, nikkhamitvā pana gāmantaraṃ gacchantiyā padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ, ekena pādena itarassa gāmassa parikkhepe vā upacāre vā atikkantamatte thullaccayaṃ, dutiyena atikkantamatte saṅghādiseso. Tato nikkhamitvā puna sakagāmaṃ pavisantiyāpi eseva nayo. Sace pana khaṇḍapākārena vā vatichiddena vā bhikkhunivihārabhūmiyeva sakkā hoti pavisituṃ, evaṃ pavisamānāya kappiyabhūmiṃ nāma paviṭṭhā hoti, tasmā vaṭṭati. Sacepi hatthipiṭṭhiādīhi vā iddhiyā vā pavisati, vaṭṭatiyeva. Padasā gamanameva hi idhādhippetaṃ. Teneva ‘‘paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmentiyā’’tiādimāha.
692.In the third: parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyāti here, a thullaccaya results when one foot goes beyond the boundary; when both feet have gone beyond, it is a saṅghādisesa. Aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāranti here, a thullaccaya results when she steps beyond the place suitable for a boundary with one foot; when both feet have gone beyond, it is a saṅghādisesa. Moreover, here, there is no offense when going out from one's own village for the sake of another village; but when she goes to another village after going out, there is a duukkaṭa at each step; a thullaccaya results when she steps beyond the boundary or vicinity of the other village with one foot; when both feet have gone beyond, it is a saṅghādisesa. The same method should be understood for one who, having gone out from there, enters her own village again. But if it is possible to enter the bhikkhunī’s monastery grounds itself through a broken wall or a breach in the fence, then she has entered what is called allowable ground, therefore it is allowable. Even if she enters on the back of an elephant, etc., or by psychic power, it is allowable. For here, going on foot is what is intended. Therefore, he said, "When one foot goes beyond," etc.
Dve gāmā bhikkhunivihārena sambaddhavatikā honti, yasmiṃ gāme bhikkhunivihāro, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā puna vihāraṃ pavisitvā sace vihāramajjhena itarassa gāmassa maggo atthi, gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Tato pana gāmato teneva maggena paccāgantabbaṃ. Sace gāmadvārena nikkhamitvā āgacchati, purimanayeneva āpattibhedo veditabbo. Sakagāmato kenaci karaṇīyena bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ nikkhantāya puna pavisanakāle hatthi vā muccati, ussāraṇā vā hoti, itarā bhikkhuniyo sahasā gāmaṃ pavisanti, yāva aññā bhikkhunī āgacchati, tāva bahigāmadvāre ṭhātabbaṃ. Sace na āgacchati, dutiyikā bhikkhunī pakkantā nāma hoti, pavisituṃ vaṭṭati.
Two villages have fences connected to the bhikkhunī’s monastery; if there is a path through the middle of the monastery to the other village after she has gone for alms in the village where the bhikkhunī’s monastery is and then re-entered the monastery, it is allowable to go. But from that village, she should return by that same path. If she goes out through the village gate and comes back, the distinction of offenses should be understood in the same manner as before. When one has gone out from her own village together with the bhikkhunīs due to some business, when she is re-entering, an elephant is released or there is an obstacle, and the other bhikkhunīs quickly enter the village, one should stand outside the village gate until another bhikkhunī comes. If she does not come, the second bhikkhunī is considered to have departed, and it is allowable to enter.
Pubbe mahāgāmo hoti, majjhe bhikkhunivihāro. Pacchā taṃ gāmaṃ cattāro janā labhitvā visuṃ visuṃ vatiparikkhepaṃ katvā vibhajitvā bhuñjanti, vihārato ekaṃ gāmaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Tato aparaṃ gāmaṃ dvārena vā vatichiddena vā pavisituṃ na vaṭṭati. Puna vihārameva paccāgantuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Vihārassa catugāmasādhāraṇattā.
Formerly, there was a large village, with the bhikkhunī’s monastery in the middle. Later, four people obtained that village, and having made fences separately and divided it, they enjoy it; it is allowable to go from the monastery to one village. But it is not allowable to enter another village through the gate or a breach in the fence. It is allowable to return to the monastery itself again. Why? Because the monastery is shared by the four villages.
Antaravāsako temiyatīti yattha yathā timaṇḍalapaṭicchādanaṃ hoti; evaṃ nivatthāya bhikkhuniyā vassakāle titthena vā atitthena vā otaritvā yattha katthaci uttarantiyā ekadvaṅgulamattampi antaravāsako temiyati. Sesaṃ nadīlakkhaṇaṃ nadīnimittakathāya āvi bhavissati. Evarūpaṃ nadiṃ titthena vā atitthena vā otaritvā uttaraṇakāle paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ uddharitvā tīre ṭhapentiyā thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre saṅghādiseso. Setunā gacchati, anāpatti. Padasā otaritvā uttaraṇakāle setuṃ ārohitvā uttarantiyāpi anāpatti. Setunā pana gantvā uttaraṇakāle padasā gacchantiyā āpattiyeva. Yānanāvāākāsagamanādīsupi eseva nayo. Orimatīrato pana paratīrameva akkamantiyā anāpatti. Rajanakammatthaṃ gantvā dārusaṅkaḍḍhanādikiccena dve tisso ubhayatīresu vicaranti, vaṭṭati. Sace panettha kāci kalahaṃ katvā itaraṃ tīraṃ gacchati, āpatti. Dve ekato uttaranti, ekā majjhe nadiyā kalahaṃ katvā nivattitvā orimatīrameva āgacchati, āpatti. Itarissā pana ayaṃ pakkantaṭṭhāne ṭhitā hoti, tasmā paratīraṃ gacchantiyāpi anāpatti. Nhāyituṃ vā pātuṃ vā otiṇṇā tameva tīraṃ paccuttarati, anāpatti.
Antaravāsako temiyatīti the antaravāsaka of a bhikkhunī who is wearing (robes) in such a way that there is a three-layered covering, becomes wet even by one or two fingerbreadths wherever she is crossing during the rainy season after stepping into a ford or a non-ford. The rest, the characteristics of a river will become clear in the account of the sign of a river. When crossing such a river at a ford or a non-ford, a thullaccaya results when she lifts up her first foot and places it on the bank; when the second foot is lifted up, it is a saṅghādisesa. There is no offense when going by a bridge. There is no offense even when going on foot, stepping into the water, and climbing onto a bridge when crossing. However, when going by a bridge and going on foot when crossing, there is an offense. The same method applies to going by vehicle, boat, through the air, etc. However, there is no offense when stepping only from this bank to the far bank. It is allowable to go for the purpose of dyeing or to wander on both banks for the purpose of dragging wood, etc. However, if someone makes a quarrel here and goes to the other bank, there is an offense. Two cross together; one, having made a quarrel in the middle of the river, turns back and comes to this bank, there is an offense. However, for the other one, this one is standing in the place from which she departed, therefore there is no offense even when going to the far bank. There is no offense when she has gone down to bathe or drink and climbs back up to that same bank.
Saha aruṇuggamanāti ettha sace sajjhāyaṃ vā padhānaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci kammaṃ kurumānā purearuṇeyeva dutiyikāya santikaṃ gamissāmīti ābhogaṃ karoti, ajānantiyā eva cassā aruṇo uggacchati, anāpatti. Atha pana ‘‘yāva aruṇuggamanā idheva bhavissāmī’’ti vā anābhogena vā vihārassa ekadese acchati, dutiyikāya hatthapāsaṃ na otarati, aruṇuggamane saṅghādiseso. Hatthapāsoyeva hi idha pamāṇaṃ, hatthapāsātikkame ekagabbhopi na rakkhati.
Saha aruṇuggamanāti here, if, while doing recitation or exertion or some other task, she makes the intention, "I will go to the second one before dawn," and dawn rises on her without her knowing, there is no offense. But if she remains in one part of the monastery either with the thought, "I will stay here until dawn," or without any intention, and she does not go beyond the range of the second one's arm, it is a saṅghādisesa at dawn. For here, the range of the arm is the standard; even within one dwelling, it does not protect if one is beyond the range of the arm.
Agāmakearaññeti ettha ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇameva araññaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ kevalaṃ gāmābhāvena ‘‘agāmaka’’nti vuttaṃ, na viñjhāṭavisadisatāya. Tādise araññe okkante dassanūpacāre vijahite sacepi savanūpacāro atthi, āpatti. Teneva vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace bhikkhunīsu mahābodhiaṅgaṇaṃ pavisantīsu ekā bahi tiṭṭhati, tassāpi āpatti. Lohapāsādaṃ pavisantīsupi pariveṇaṃ pavisantīsupi eseva nayo. Mahācetiyaṃ vandamānāsu ekā uttaradvārena nikkhamitvā gacchati, tassāpi āpatti. Thūpārāmaṃ pavisantīsu ekā bahi tiṭṭhati, tassāpi āpattī’’ti. Ettha ca dassanūpacāro nāma yattha ṭhitaṃ dutiyikā passati. Sace pana sāṇipākārantarikāpi hoti, dassanūpacāraṃ vijahati nāma. Savanūpacāro nāma yattha ṭhitā maggamūḷhasaddena viya dhammasavanārocanasaddena viya ca ‘‘ayye’’ti saddāyantiyā saddaṃ suṇāti. Ajjhokāse dūrepi dassanūpacāro nāma hoti. So evarūpe savanūpacāre vijahite na rakkhati, vijahitamatteva āpatti saṅghādisesassa.
Agāmake araññeti here, the wilderness is just as defined by saying, "Having gone outside the boundary pillar, all of this is wilderness." However, that is called "without a village" only due to the absence of a village, not due to being similar to the Viñjhāṭavī. If, when one has entered such a wilderness, the sight-range is abandoned, there is an offense even if the sound-range exists. Therefore, it was said in the commentary, "If, when the bhikkhunīs are entering the Great Bodhi enclosure, one stands outside, there is an offense for her too. The same method applies when entering the Lohapāsāda, when entering the enclosure. When they are worshipping the Great Cetiya, if one goes out through the north gate and goes away, there is an offense for her too. If, when they are entering the Thūpārāma, one stands outside, there is an offense for her too." And here, the sight-range is where the second one sees her standing. But if there is even an interval of a screen, she abandons the sight-range. The sound-range is where, when she is standing, she hears the sound of someone calling "Ayye" like the sound of someone lost on the road or like the sound of announcing the hearing of the Dhamma. In the open air, even at a distance, there is what is called a sight-range. When the sound-range is abandoned in such a situation, it does not protect; as soon as it is abandoned, there is an offense of saṅghādisesa.
Ekā maggaṃ gacchantī ohīyati. Saussāhā ce hutvā idāni pāpuṇissāmīti anubandhati, anāpatti. Sace purimāyo aññena maggena gacchanti, pakkantā nāma honti, anāpattiyeva. Dvinnaṃ gacchantīnaṃ ekā anubandhituṃ asakkontī ‘‘gacchatu aya’’nti ohīyati, itarāpi ‘‘ohīyatu aya’’nti, gacchati, dvinnampi āpatti. Sace pana gacchantīsu purimāpi aññaṃ maggaṃ gaṇhāti, pacchimāpi aññaṃ, ekā ekissā pakkantaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, dvinnampi anāpatti.
One going on the path lags behind. If, being energetic, she pursues thinking, "Now I will reach," there is no offense. If the former ones go by another path, they are considered to have departed, there is no offense at all. Of two going, if one, unable to keep up, lags behind, saying, "Let this one go," and the other also says, "Let this one lag behind," and goes, there is an offense for both. But if, while they are going, the former one takes another path, and the latter one also another, and each one stands in the place where the other departed, there is no offense for either.
693.Pakkhasaṅkantā vāti titthāyatanaṃ saṅkantā, sesaṃ uttānameva. Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
693.Pakkhasaṅkantā vā means having transgressed the boundary of a sect; the rest is straightforward. The origin of the first pārājika is from action (kiriya), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkha), intentional (sacittaka), an offense by regulation (paṇṇattivajja), bodily action (kāyakamma), three minds (ticitta), three feelings (tivedana).
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Fourth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
694-8.Catutthe –pādapīṭhaṃnāma dhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ.Pādakaṭhalikānāma adhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ.Anaññāya gaṇassa chandanti tasseva kārakagaṇassa chandaṃ ajānitvā.Vatte vattantinti tecattālīsappabhede netthāravatte vattamānaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
694-8.In the fourth: pādapīṭhaṃ means a footstool for placing washed feet. Pādakaṭhalikā means a footstool for placing unwashed feet. Anaññāya gaṇassa chandaṃ means without knowing the consent of that very group of doers. Vatte vattanti means behaving in the forty-three kinds of behavior of leading. The rest is straightforward.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin from the laying down of responsibility is from body, speech, and mind; both action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Fifth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
701.Pañcame –ekato avassuteti ettha ‘‘bhikkhuniyā avassutabhāvo daṭṭhabbo’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panetaṃ na vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā sameti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
701.In the fifth: ekato avassuteti here, "the state of a nun being discharged must be seen," is said in the Mahāpaccari. However, this is not said in the Great Commentary (Mahāaṭṭhakathā); it agrees with the Pali. The rest is straightforward.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.
The origin of the first pārājika is from action (kiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), two feelings (dvivedanaṃ).
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Sixth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
705-6.Chaṭṭhe –yato tvanti yasmā tvaṃ.Uyyojeti āpatti dukkaṭassātiādikā saṅghādisesapariyosānā āpattiyo kassā hontīti? Uyyojikāya. Vuttañcetaṃ parivārepi –
705-6.In the sixth: yato tvanti since you. Uyyojeti āpatti dukkaṭassātiādikā saṅghādisesapariyosānā āpattiyo kassā hontīti? To whom do the offenses beginning with the offense of wrong-doing (dukkaṭa) and ending with saṅghādisesa apply? Uyyojikāya. It was also said in the Parivāra:
‘‘Na deti na paṭiggaṇhāti, paṭiggaho tena na vijjati;
“She does not give, she does not receive; acceptance is not found by her;
She incurs a grave offense, not a light one, and that is because of the articles of use;
These are questions thought over by the skilled.” (pari. 481);
Ayañhi gāthā imaṃ uyyojikaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Itarissā pana āpattibhedo paṭhamasikkhāpade vibhattoti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
This verse, indeed, was spoken regarding this instigator. But the distinction of offenses for the other one has been distinguished in the first training rule. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Triple origin – action (kiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Seventh Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
709.Sattame –yāvatatiyakapadattho mahāvibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
709.In the seventh: The meaning of yāvatatiyaka should be understood in the same way as stated in the Mahāvibhaṅga. The rest is straightforward.
Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin from formal accusation is from action (kiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Eighth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
715.Aṭṭhame –kismiñcideva adhikaraṇeti catunnaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Padabhājane pana kevalaṃ adhikaraṇavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘adhikaraṇaṃ nāma cattāri adhikaraṇānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
715.In the eighth: kismiñcideva adhikaraṇeti in one of the four. In the word analysis, however, to show only the division of disputes, it was said, "a dispute (adhikaraṇaṃ) is these four disputes (adhikaraṇānī)," etc. The rest is straightforward, along with the origin etc.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Ninth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
723.Navame –saṃsaṭṭhāti missībhūtā.Ananulomikenāti pabbajitānaṃ ananulomena kāyikavācasikena.Saṃsaṭṭhāti gihīnaṃ koṭṭanapacanagandhapisanamālāganthanādinā kāyikena sāsanapaṭisāsanāharaṇasañcarittādinā vācasikena ca saṃsaṭṭhā. Pāpo kittisaddo etāsantipāpasaddā. Pāpo ājīvasaṅkhāto siloko etāsantipāpasilokā. Sesaṃ uttānameva saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
723.In the ninth: saṃsaṭṭhā means mixed together. Ananulomikenā means bodily and verbally inappropriate for renunciants. Saṃsaṭṭhā means mixed with laypeople by bodily actions such as pounding, cooking, grinding, stringing garlands, or by verbal actions such as carrying messages for the dispensation and counter-messages. Pāpo kittisaddo etāsanti means those whose reputation is bad. Pāpo ājīvasaṅkhāto siloko etāsanti means those whose fame associated with wrong livelihood is bad. The rest is straightforward, along with the origin etc.
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasaṅghādisesasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Tenth Saṅghādisesa Training Rule
727.Dasame –evācārāti evaṃācārā. Yādiso tumhākaṃ ācāro, tādisā ācārāti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha.Uññāyāti avaññāya nīcaṃ katvā jānanāya.Paribhavenāti kiṃ imā karissantīti evaṃ paribhavitvā jānanena.Akkhantiyāti asahanatāya; kodhenāti attho.Vebhassiyāti balavabhassabhāvena; attano balappakāsanena samutrāsanenāti attho.Dubbalyāti tumhākaṃ dubbalabhāvena. Sabbattha uññāya ca paribhavena cāti evaṃ samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo.Viviccathāti vinā hotha. Sesaṃ uttānameva saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
727.In the tenth: evācārā means having such conduct. The meaning is: your conduct is like such conduct. This method is everywhere. Uññāyā means by knowing with contempt, having made low. Paribhavenā means by knowing with disdain, thinking, "What will these do?" Akkhantiyā means through intolerance; the meaning is, through anger. Vebhassiyā means by powerful bullying; the meaning is, by frightening through the manifestation of one’s own strength. Dubbalyā means through your weakness. Everywhere, the meaning of the compound should be seen as "both with contempt and with disdain." Viviccathā means be separated. The rest is straightforward, along with the origin etc.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesāti ettha channaṃ paṭhamāpattikānaṃ anantarā sañcarittaṃ, dve duṭṭhadosāti imāni tīṇi sikkhāpadāni mahāvibhaṅgato pakkhipitvānava paṭhamāpattikā,catunnaṃ yāvatatiyakānaṃ anantarā mahāvibhaṅgatopi cattāro yāvatatiyake pakkhipitvāaṭṭha yāvatatiyakāveditabbā. Evaṃ sabbepi pātimokkhuddesamaggena uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesā dhammāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ uttānameva aññatra pakkhamānattā. Taṃ pana khandhake vitthārena vaṇṇayissāmāti.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo sattarasa saṅghādisesāti here, immediately after the six for which the initial offense applies, adding these three training rules – associating, two with corrupt intentions – from the Mahāvibhaṅga, it should be known that there are nine for which the initial offense applies, and immediately after the four for which the offense applies up to the third time, adding also the four offenses that apply up to the third time from the Mahāvibhaṅga, there are eight for which the offense applies up to the third time. Thus, by the method of the Pātimokkha recitation, the meaning here should be understood as: "Indeed, venerable ones, these seventeen Saṅghādisesa Dhammas have been recited." The rest is straightforward, except for the departure. But that I will describe in detail in the Khandhakas.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya bhikkhunīvibhaṅge
In the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga of the Samantapāsādikā Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanā,
Sattarasakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Seventeenth Commentary is Finished.
Saṅghādisesakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Saṅghādisesa Section is Finished.
3. Nissaggiyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)
3. Nissaggiya Section (Commentary on the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga)
Paṭhamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the First Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
Tiṃsa nissaggiyā dhammā, bhikkhunīnaṃ pakāsitā;
Thirty nissaggiya rules, were declared for the bhikkhunīs;
Now, there will be an explanation of these rules in sequence.
733.Āmattikāpaṇanti amattāni vuccanti bhājanāni; tāni ye vikkiṇanti, te vuccanti āmattikā; tesaṃ āpaṇoāmattikāpaṇo;taṃ vā pasāressantīti attho.
733.Āmattikāpaṇanti amattāni means vessels; those who sell those are called āmattikā; the shop of those is āmattikāpaṇa; that or they will spread out, is the meaning.
734.Pattasannicayaṃ kareyyāti pattasannidhiṃ kareyya; ekāhaṃ anadhiṭṭhahitvā vā avikappetvā vā pattaṃ ṭhapeyyāti attho. Sesaṃ mahāvibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayameva hi viseso – tattha dasāhaṃ parihāro, idha ekāhampi natthi. Sesaṃ tādisameva.
734.Pattasannicayaṃ kareyyā means she should accumulate bowls; the meaning is she should keep a bowl without determining or without allocating it for even one day. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the Mahāvibhaṅga. This indeed is the difference – there, there is a disuse of ten days, here there is not even one day. The rest is just the same.
Idampi kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, akiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
This origin is also from the kathina – it arises from body and speech, and from body, speech and mind; it is non-action (akiriyaṃ), not a release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by regulation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), three minds (ticittaṃ), three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
Dutiyanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Second Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
738.Dutiye –duccoḷāti virūpacoḷā; jiṇṇacoḷāti attho.Apayyāhīti api ayyāhi.
738.In the second: duccoḷā means a disfigured robe; the meaning is an old robe. Apayyāhī means even venerable ones.
740.Ādissadinnanti sampattā bhājentūti vatvāpi idaṃ gaṇassa idaṃ tumhākaṃ dammīti vatvā vā dātukamyatāya pādamūle ṭhapetvā vā dinnampi ādissa dinnaṃ nāma hoti. Etaṃ sabbampi akālacīvaraṃ.Ayyāya dammīti evaṃ paṭiladdhaṃ pana yathādāneyeva upanetabbaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
740.Ādissa dinnaṃ means even if, having said "May they divide when it is ready," or having said "I will give this to the Order, I will give this to you," or having placed it at the base of the feet with the intention of giving, it is given, it is called having been given with reference to. All this is unseasonal cloth. Ayyāya dammī means that which is obtained in this way should be brought back in the same way as it was given. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Triple origin – action (kiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
Tatiyanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Third Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
743-5.Tatiye –handāti gaṇha.Sayaṃ acchindatīti ekaṃ datvā ekaṃ acchindantiyā ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ, bahūsu bahūni. Sace saṃharitvā ṭhapitāni ekato acchindati, vatthugaṇanāya āpattiyo. Bandhitvā ṭhapitesu pana ekāva āpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
743-5.In the third: handā means take. Sayaṃ acchindatī means for one who gives one and takes back one, one nissaggiya applies; for many, many apply. If, having gathered and kept them, she takes back all at once, the offenses apply according to the number of items. But if they are tied up and kept, only one offense applies. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Triple origin – action (kiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
Catutthanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Fourth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
748.Catutthe –kayenāti mūlena.Na me āvuso sappinā attho; telena me atthoti idaṃ kira sā āhaṭasappiṃ datvā telampi āharissatīti maññamānā āha.Viññāpetvāti jānāpetvā; idaṃ nāma āharāti yācitvā vā.
748.In the fourth: kayenā means with the root (mūlena). Na me āvuso sappinā attho; telena me atthoti it seems that she spoke thinking that if she gives this ghee that was brought, she will also bring oil from her family's home. Viññāpetvā means making known; or asking, "Bring this."
752.Taññeva viññāpetīti yaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññattaṃ taṃ thokaṃ nappahoti, tasmā puna taññeva viññāpetīti attho.Aññañca viññāpetīti sace paṭhamaṃ sappiviññattaṃ, yamakaṃ pacitabbanti ca vejjena vuttattā telena attho hoti, tato telenāpi me atthoti evaṃ aññañca viññāpeti.Ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvāti sace kahāpaṇassa sappi ābhataṃ hoti, iminā mūlena diguṇaṃ telaṃ labbhati, tenāpi ca idaṃ kiccaṃ nipphajjati, tasmā telaṃ āharāti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā viññāpetīti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
752.Taññeva viññāpetīti the meaning is that because that which was first requested is a little and not enough, therefore she requests that very thing again. Aññañca viññāpetīti if ghee was requested first, and because it was said by the doctor that twin cakes should be cooked, there is a need for oil, then she requests something else, saying, "There is also a need for oil for me." Ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvāti if ghee worth a kahāpaṇa has been brought, and oil twice as much as this root can be obtained, and with that this task will be accomplished, therefore, having shown the benefit, she requests, "Bring oil." The rest is straightforward.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Sixfold origin – action (kiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by regulation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), three minds (ticittaṃ), three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
Pañcamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Fifth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
753.Pañcame –na me sikkhamāneti idaṃ kira sā kuladhītā ‘‘ayaṃ addhā evaṃ vuttā idaṃ telaṃ ṭhapetvā sappimpi me attano kulagharā āharissatī’’ti maññamānā āha.Cetāpetvāti jānāpetvā icceva attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha catutthasadisamevāti.
753.In the fifth: na me sikkhamāneti it seems that the daughter of a good family spoke thinking, "This one, having been told thus, will surely keep this oil and bring ghee also from my own family's home." Cetāpetvā has the meaning of "making known." The rest is all similar to the fourth.
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
Chaṭṭhanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Sixth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
758.Chaṭṭhe –chandakanti ‘‘idaṃ nāma dhammakiccaṃ karissāma, yaṃ sakkotha; taṃ dethā’’ti evaṃ paresaṃ chandañca ruciñca uppādetvā gahitaparikkhārassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Aññadatthikenāti aññassatthāya dinnena.Aññuddisikenāti aññaṃ uddisitvā dinnena.Saṅghikenāti saṅghassa pariccattena.
758.In the sixth: chandakanti this is a designation for the requisites that are obtained by creating desire and interest in others, saying, "We will do such and such a Dhamma task, give what you are able." Aññadatthikenā means with what is given for another purpose. Aññuddisikenā means with what is given intending another. Saṅghikenā means with what is given to the Order.
762.Sesakaṃ upanetīti yadatthāya dinno, taṃ cetāpetvā avasesaṃ aññassatthāya upaneti.Sāmike apaloketvāti ‘‘tumhehi cīvaratthāya dinno, amhākañca cīvaraṃ atthi, telādīhi pana attho’’ti evaṃ āpucchitvā upaneti.Āpadāsūti tathārūpesu upaddavesu; bhikkhuniyo vihāraṃ chaḍḍetvā pakkamanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu yaṃ vā taṃ vā cetāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
762.Sesakaṃ upanetī means she brings the remainder for another purpose after making known for what purpose it was given. Sāmike apaloketvā means having asked, "You gave it for robes, but we have robes, but there is a need for oil etc.," she brings it. Āpadāsū means in such dangers; bhikkhunīs abandon the monastery and depart; in such dangers, it is proper to obtain this or that. The rest is straightforward.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Sixfold origin – both action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), non-release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by regulation (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), three minds (ticittaṃ), three feelings (tivedanaṃ).
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
Sattamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Seventh Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
764.Sattame –saññācikenāti sayaṃ yācitakena. Etadevettha nānākaraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ chaṭṭhasadisamevāti.
764.In the seventh: saññācikenā means with what is requested by oneself. This alone is the differentiation here. The rest is similar to the sixth.
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
Aṭṭhamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Eighth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
769.Aṭṭhame –mahājanikenāti gaṇassa pariccattena. Etadevettha nānākaraṇaṃ.
769.In the eighth—mahājanikena means due to association with a group. This alone is the difference here.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The eighth training rule.
Navamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ninth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
774.Navamasikkhāpade –saññācikenāti idaṃ padaṃ ito adhikataraṃ.
774.In the ninth training rule—the phrase saññācikenā is additionally present here.
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The ninth training rule.
Dasamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Tenth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
778.Dasame –pariveṇaṃ undriyatīti pariveṇaṃ vinassati; paripatatīti attho. Idañca padaṃpuggalikena saññācikenāti idañca ettakameva nānākaraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ pubbasadisamevāti.
778.In the tenth—pariveṇaṃ undriyatī means the pariveṇa is ruined, that is, it collapses. This phrase, and puggalikena saññācikenā, are the only differences. The rest is the same as before.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The tenth training rule.
Ekādasamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Eleventh Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
784.Ekādasame –garupāvuraṇanti sītakāle pāvuraṇaṃ.Catukkaṃsaparamanti ettha kaṃso nāma catukkahāpaṇiko hoti; tasmā padabhājane ‘‘soḷasakahāpaṇagghanaka’’nti vuttaṃ.
784.In the eleventh—garupāvuraṇa means an outer cloak for the cold season. Catukkaṃsaparama—here, kaṃsa means four kahāpaṇas; therefore, in the padabhājana, it is said to be "worth sixteen kahāpaṇas."
Ekādasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The eleventh training rule.
Dvādasamanissaggiyapācittiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Twelfth Nissaggiya Pācittiya Training Rule
789.Dvādasame –lahupāvuraṇanti uṇhakāle pāvuraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ sikkhāpadadvayepi uttānameva.
789.In the twelfth—lahupāvuraṇa means an outer cloak for the hot season. The rest is straightforward in both training rules.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
It has six sources (samuṭṭhāna): It is a kiriya, nosaññāvimokkha, acittaka, offense by prescription (paṇṇattivajja), an act of body (kāyakamma), an act of speech (vacīkamma), ticitta, tivedana.
Dvādasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The twelfth training rule.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammāti ettha mahāvibhaṅge cīvaravaggato dhovanañca paṭiggahaṇañcāti dve sikkhāpadāni apanetvā akālacīvaraṃ kālacīvaranti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhājitasikkhāpadena ca parivattetvā acchinnacīvarena ca paṭhamavaggo pūretabbo. Puna eḷakalomavaggassa ādito satta sikkhāpadāni apanetvā satta aññadatthikāni pakkhipitvā dutiyavaggo pūretabbo. Tatiyavaggato paṭhamapattaṃ vassikasāṭikaṃ āraññakasikkhāpadanti imāni tīṇi apanetvā pattasannicayagarupāvuraṇalahupāvuraṇasikkhāpadehi tatiyavaggo pūretabbo. Iti bhikkhunīnaṃ dvādasa sikkhāpadāni ekatopaññattāni, aṭṭhārasa ubhatopaññattānīti evaṃ sabbepi pātimokkhuddesamaggena ‘‘uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo tiṃsa nissaggiyā pācittiyā dhammā—here, in the Mahāvibhaṅga, from the chapter on robes, the two training rules of washing and receiving are removed. After establishing that there are akālacīvara and kālacīvara, the first chapter should be completed by exchanging with the bhājitasikkhāpada and the acchinnacīvara. Then, removing the first seven training rules from the chapter on goat's wool, and inserting seven others that serve a different purpose, the second chapter should be completed. From the third chapter, removing the first bowl, the rain-bathing cloth, and the training rule for forest dwellers—these three—the third chapter should be completed with the training rules on accumulating bowls, the heavy outer cloak, and the light outer cloak. Thus, for the bhikkhunīs, twelve training rules are established together, and eighteen are established for both. Thus, it should be understood that the meaning here is "the thirty nissaggiya pācittiya dhammas have been recited, venerable ones," according to the method of the Pātimokkha recitation. The rest is as has been said.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya bhikkhunīvibhaṅge
In the Samantapāsādikā, Vinaya Commentary, in the Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga,
Tiṃsakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the thirty is finished.
Nissaggiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Nissaggiya Section is finished.
4. Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)
4. Pācittiya Section (Bhikkhunīvibhaṅga Commentary)
1. Lasuṇavaggo
1. The Garlic Chapter
1. Paṭhamalasuṇasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Garlic Training Rule
Tiṃsakānantaraṃ dhammā, chasaṭṭhisatasaṅgahā;
After the thirty rules, a collection of one hundred and sixty-six dhammas; the explanation of those that were chanted now follows.
793.Tattha lasuṇavaggassa tāva paṭhamasikkhāpade –dve tayo bhaṇḍiketi dve vā tayo vā poṭṭalike; sampuṇṇamiñjānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Na mattaṃ jānitvāti pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā khettapālassa vārentassa bahuṃ lasuṇaṃ harāpesi.
793.There, in the first training rule of the Garlic Chapter—dve tayo bhaṇḍike means two or three small baskets; this is a term for fully formed cloves. Na mattaṃ jānitvā means without knowing the measure, he had a lot of garlic carried away while the field guard was objecting.
Aññataraṃ haṃsayoninti suvaṇṇahaṃsayoniṃ.So tāsaṃ ekekanti so haṃso jātissaro ahosi, atha pubbasinehena āgantvā tāsaṃ ekekaṃ pattaṃ deti, taṃ tāpanatālanacchedanakkhamaṃ suvaṇṇameva hoti.
Aññataraṃ haṃsayoni means a species of golden goose. So tāsaṃ ekeka means that goose was aware of its previous life, and then, out of former affection, it gives each of them a leaf; that is gold, capable of being heated, hammered, and cut.
795.Māgadhakanti magadhesu jātaṃ. Magadharaṭṭhe jātalasuṇameva hi idha lasuṇanti adhippetaṃ, tampi bhaṇḍikalasuṇameva, na ekadvitimiñjakaṃ. Kurundiyaṃ pana jātadesaṃ avatvā ‘‘māgadhakaṃ nāma bhaṇḍikalasuṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.Ajjhohāre ajjhohāreti ettha sace dve tayo bhaṇḍike ekatoyeva saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharati, ekaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Bhinditvā ekekaṃ miñjaṃ khādantiyā pana payogagaṇanāya pācittiyānīti.
795.Māgadhaka means grown in Magadha. Indeed, only garlic grown in the kingdom of Magadha is intended here as garlic, and that too, only garlic with bulbs, not with one, two, or three cloves. In the Kurundī, however, without stating the place of origin, it is said, "Māgadhaka is the name of garlic with bulbs." Ajjhohāre ajjhohāre—here, if two or three bulbs are crushed together at once and eaten, there is one pācittiya. But if one breaks them apart and eats each clove, there are pācittiyas according to the number of intakes.
797.Palaṇḍukādīnaṃ vaṇṇena vā miñjāya vā nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ – vaṇṇena tāva palaṇḍuko paṇḍuvaṇṇo hoti. Bhañjanako lohitavaṇṇo. Haritako haritapaṇṇavaṇṇo. Miñjāya pana palaṇḍukassa ekā miñjā hoti, bhañjanakassa dve, haritakassa tisso. Cāpalasuṇo amiñjako, aṅkuramattameva hi tassa hoti. Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana ‘‘palaṇḍukassa tīṇi miñjāni, bhañjanakassa dve, haritakassa eka’’nti vuttaṃ. Ete palaṇḍukādayo sabhāveneva vaṭṭanti. Sūpasampākādīsu pana māgadhakampi vaṭṭati. Tañhi paccamānesu muggasūpādīsu vā macchamaṃsavikatiyā vā telādīsu vā badarasāḷavādīsu vā ambilasākādīsu vā uttaribhaṅgesu vā yattha katthaci antamaso yāgubhattepi pakkhipituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
797.The difference between palaṇḍuka and the others should be known by their color or by their cloves: In terms of color, palaṇḍuka is pale. Bhañjanaka is reddish. Haritaka is the color of green leaves. In terms of cloves, palaṇḍuka has one clove, bhañjanaka has two, haritaka has three. Cāpalasuṇo has no cloves; it only has the sprout. However, in the Mahāpaccari and others, it is said that "palaṇḍuka has three cloves, bhañjanaka has two, haritaka has one." These palaṇḍuka and others are suitable by nature. In soups and such, even māgadhaka is suitable. Indeed, when they are being cooked, it is suitable to put it into lentil soups or fish and meat dishes or oil and such, or tamarind juice and sāḷa juice, or sour greens, or extra sauces, or anywhere at all, even into rice gruel. The rest is straightforward here.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
The origin (samuṭṭhāna) is from the body; it is kiriya, nosaññāvimokkha, acittaka, an offense by prescription (paṇṇattivajja), an act of body (kāyakamma), ticitta, tivedana.
Lasuṇasikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The first training rule, on garlic.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
799.Dutiye –sambādheti paṭicchannokāse. Tassa vibhāgadassanatthaṃ pana ‘‘ubho upakacchakā muttakaraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.Ekampilomanti kattariyā vā saṇḍāsakena vā khurena vā yena kenaci ekapayogena vā nānāpayogena vā ekaṃ vā bahūni vā saṃharāpentiyā payogagaṇanāya pācittiyāni, na lomagaṇanāya.
799.In the second—sambādhe means in a covered space. However, to show its distinction, it is said, "both armpits and the urinary passage." Ekampi loma means that whether with scissors or tweezers or a razor or anything else, whether with one application or multiple applications, if she removes one or many hairs, there are pācittiyas according to the number of applications, not according to the number of hairs.
801.Ābādhapaccayāti kaṇḍukacchuādiābādhapaccayā saṃharāpentiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato kāyavācato kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
801.Ābādhapaccayā means there is no offense if she removes hair due to illness such as scabies. The rest is straightforward. It has four sources (samuṭṭhāna): it arises from the body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; it is kiriya, nosaññāvimokkha, acittaka, an offense by prescription (paṇṇattivajja), an act of body (kāyakamma), an act of speech (vacīkamma), ticitta, tivedana.
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The second training rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
803-4.Tatiye –talaghātaketi muttakaraṇatalaghātane.Antamaso uppalapattenāpīti ettha pattaṃ tāva mahantaṃ, kesarenāpi pahāraṃ dentiyā āpattiyeva.
803-4.In the third—talaghātake means striking the surface of the urinary passage. Antamaso uppalapattenāpī—here, the leaf is large; even if she strikes with the stamen, there is an offense.
805.Ābādhapaccayāti gaṇḍaṃ vā vaṇaṃ vā paharituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
805.Ābādhapaccayā means it is permissible to strike a boil or a wound. The rest is straightforward. The origin (samuṭṭhāna) is the same as the first pārājika: it is kiriya, saññāvimokkha, sacittaka, an offense against the world (lokavajja), an act of body (kāyakamma), an unwholesome mind (akusalacitta), tivedana.
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The third training rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
806.Catutthe –purāṇarājorodhāti purāṇe gihibhāve rañño orodhā.Cirāciraṃ gacchatīti cirena cirena gacchati.Dhārethāti sakkotha.Kassidaṃ kammanti vutte anārocitepi etā mayi āsaṅkaṃ karissantīti maññamānā evamāha – ‘‘mayhidaṃ kamma’’nti.
806.In the fourth—purāṇarājorodhā means formerly, in lay life, the king's harem. Cirāciraṃ gacchatī means she goes very slowly. Dhārethā means be able to bear. Kassidaṃ kamma—even without being asked, thinking, "They will suspect me," she says, "This is my work."
807.Jatumaṭṭhaketi jatunā kate maṭṭhadaṇḍake. Vatthuvasenevetaṃ vuttaṃ, yaṃkiñci pana daṇḍakaṃ pavesentiyā āpattiyeva. Tenāha – ‘‘antamaso uppalapattampi muttakaraṇaṃ pavesetī’’ti. Etampi ca atimahantaṃ, kesaramattampi pana pavesentiyā āpatti eva. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni talaghātake vuttasadisānevāti.
807.Jatumaṭṭhake means a smooth stick made of lacquer. This is said because of the object; however, if she inserts any kind of stick, there is an offense. Therefore, it is said, "even if she inserts a lotus petal into the urinary passage." And this is too large; however, even if she inserts as little as a stamen, there is an offense. The rest is straightforward. The origin (samuṭṭhāna) and so on are similar to what was said for striking the surface.
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The fourth training rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
810.Pañcame –atigambhīraṃ udakasuddhikaṃ ādiyantīti atianto pavesetvā udakena dhovanaṃ kurumānā.
810.In the fifth—atigambhīraṃ udakasuddhikaṃ ādiyantī means inserting it very deeply and cleaning with water.
812.Kesaggamattampi atikkāmetīti vitthārato tatiyaṃ vā catutthaṃ vā aṅgulaṃ gambhīrato dvinnaṃ pabbānaṃ upari kesaggamattampi pavesentiyā pācittiyanti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāpaccariyaṃ – ‘‘ekissā aṅguliyā tīṇi pabbāni ādātuṃ na labhati, tiṇṇaṃ vā catunnaṃ vā ekekampi pabbaṃ ādātuṃ na labhatī’’ti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīnipi talaghātake vuttasadisānevāti.
812.Kesaggamattampi atikkāmetī means in width, the third or fourth finger, in depth, even as little as a hair's breadth above two joints, there is a pācittiya. Indeed, this was said in the Mahāpaccari—"One may not take three joints of one finger, nor may one take even a single joint of three or four." The rest is straightforward. The origin (samuṭṭhāna) and so on are similar to what was said for striking the surface.
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The fifth training rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
815.Chaṭṭhe –bhattavissagganti bhattakiccaṃ.Pānīyena ca vidhūpanena ca upatiṭṭhitvāti ekena hatthena pānīyathālakaṃ ekena bījaniṃ gahetvā bījamānā samīpe ṭhatvāti attho.Accāvadatīti pubbepi tumhe evaṃ bhuñjatha, ahaṃ evaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ karomī’’ti pabbajitacārittaṃ atikkamitvā gehassitakathaṃ kathetīti attho.
815.In the sixth—bhattavissagga means the meal duty. Pānīyena ca vidhūpanena ca upatiṭṭhitvā means standing nearby, holding a water bowl in one hand and a fan in the other, and fanning. Accāvadatī means exceeding the conduct of a renunciant, she speaks talk related to household life, saying, "You used to eat like this before, I used to attend to you like this."
817.Yaṃkiñci pānīyanti suddhaudakaṃ vā hotu, takkadadhimatthurasakhīrādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ.Yā kāci bījanīti antamaso cīvarakaṇṇopi.Hatthapāse tiṭṭhati āpatti pācittiyassāti idha ṭhānapaccayāva pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Pahārapaccayā pana khandhake dukkaṭaṃ paññattaṃ.
817.Yaṃkiñci pānīya means whether it is pure water or something else like buttermilk, yogurt, whey, or milk. Yā kāci bījanī means even a piece of robe. Hatthapāse tiṭṭhati āpatti pācittiyassā—here, the pācittiya is stated to be due to the place. However, in the Khandhaka, a dukkata is prescribed for striking.
819.Deti dāpetīti pānīyaṃ vā sūpādiṃ vā imaṃ pivatha, iminā bhuñjathāti deti; tālavaṇṭaṃ iminā bījantā bhuñjathāti deti; aññena vā ubhayampi dāpeti, anāpatti.Anupasampannaṃ āṇāpetīti upatiṭṭhanatthaṃ sāmaṇeriṃ āṇāpeti, anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
819.Deti dāpetī means she gives, saying, "Drink this water or soup, eat with this"; she gives a palm leaf fan, saying, "Fan with this and eat"; or she has another give both, there is no offense. Anupasampannaṃ āṇāpetī means she orders a novice to attend, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
The origin (samuṭṭhāna) is from the body; it is kiriya, nosaññāvimokkha, acittaka, an offense by prescription (paṇṇattivajja), an act of body (kāyakamma), ticitta, tivedana.
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The sixth training rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
822.Sattame –bhuñjissāmīti paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassāti idaṃ payogadukkaṭaṃ nāma, tasmā na kevalaṃ paṭiggahaṇeyeva hoti, paṭiggaṇhitvā pana araññato āharaṇepi sukkhāpanepi vaddalidivase bhajjanatthāya uddhanasajjanepi kapallasajjanepi dabbisajjanepi dārūni ādāya aggikaraṇepi kapallamhi dhaññapakkhipanepi dabbiyā saṅghaṭṭanesupi koṭṭanatthaṃ udukkhalamusalādisajjanesupi koṭṭanapapphoṭanadhovanādīsupi yāva mukhe ṭhapetvā ajjhoharaṇatthaṃ dantehi saṅkhādati, tāva sabbapayogesu dukkaṭāni, ajjhoharaṇakāle pana ajjhoharaṇagaṇanāya pācittiyāni. Ettha ca viññatti ceva bhojanañca pamāṇaṃ. Tasmā sayaṃ viññāpetvā aññāya bhajjanakoṭṭanapacanāni kārāpetvā bhuñjantiyāpi āpatti. Aññāya viññāpetvā sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvā bhuñjantiyāpi āpatti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘idaṃ āmakadhaññaṃ nāma mātarampi viññāpetvā bhuñjantiyā pācittiyameva, aviññattiyā laddhaṃ sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvā vā kārāpetvā vā bhuñjantiyā dukkaṭaṃ. Aññāya viññattiyā laddhaṃ sayaṃ vā bhajjanādīni katvā tāya vā kārāpetvā aññāya vā kārāpetvā bhuñjantiyāpi dukkaṭamevā’’ti. Punapi vuttaṃ ‘‘aññāya viññattiyā laddhaṃ, sayaṃ bhajjanādīni katvā bhuñjantiyā pācittiyameva. Bhajjanādīni kārāpetvā bhuñjantiyā pana dukkaṭa’’nti. Taṃ pubbāparaviruddhaṃ hoti, na hi bhajjanādīnaṃ karaṇe vā kārāpane vā viseso atthi. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘aññāya viññattaṃ bhuñjantiyā dukkaṭa’’nti avisesena vuttaṃ.
822.In the seventh—bhuñjissāmīti paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassā—this is called the payogadukkaṭa, therefore, it is not only when receiving; but also, when bringing it from the forest, when drying it, when preparing to roast it on the day of Vaddali, when preparing the hearth, when preparing the potsherd, when preparing the ladle, when taking wood and making a fire, when putting grain in the potsherd, when stirring with the ladle, when preparing the mortar and pestle and so on for pounding, in the pounding, popping, washing and so on, until she puts it in her mouth and crushes it with her teeth to eat it, there are dukkaṭas for all these efforts. However, at the time of eating, there are pācittiyas according to the number of intakes. Here, both requesting and eating are the measure. Therefore, even if she herself requests and has another do the roasting, pounding, and cooking and then eats, there is an offense. Even if she has another request and she herself does the roasting and so on and then eats, there is an offense. However, in the Mahāpaccari, it is said, "If this raw grain, even if she requests from her mother and eats, there is only a pācittiya; if she obtains it without requesting, and she herself does the roasting and so on, or has it done, and then eats, there is a dukkata. If she obtains it by requesting from another, and she herself does the roasting and so on, or has it done by her, or has it done by another, and then eats, there is only a dukkata." Again, it is said, "If she obtains it by requesting from another, and she herself does the roasting and so on and then eats, there is only a pācittiya. However, if she has the roasting and so on done and then eats, there is a dukkata." That is contradictory in what comes before and after, for there is no difference in doing the roasting and so on herself or having it done. However, in the Mahāaṭṭhakathā, it is said without distinction, "There is a dukkata when eating what has been requested from another."
823.Ābādhapaccayāti sedakammādīnaṃ atthāya dhaññaviññattiyā anāpatti. ‘‘Aviññattiyā labbhamānaṃ pana navakammatthāya sampaṭicchituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ.Aparaṇṇaṃ viññāpetīti ṭhapetvā satta dhaññāni muggamāsādiṃ vā lābukumbhaṇḍādiṃ vā aññaṃ yaṃkiñci ñātakapavāritaṭṭhāne viññāpentiyā anāpatti. Āmakadhaññaṃ pana ñātakapavāritaṭṭhāne na vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
823. Ābādhapaccayā ti: "Due to illness," means no offense for requesting grains for the purpose of fomentation and so on. It is said in the Mahāpaccari that: "However, it is allowable to accept what is obtainable without requesting for the purpose of new construction." Aparaṇṇaṃ viññāpetī ti: "Requests other grains," means no offense for requesting, in a place approved by relatives, anything other than the seven grains, such as muggamāsa etc., or pumpkins, gourds, etc. However, raw grains are not allowable in a place approved by relatives. The rest is straightforward.
Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato kāyavācato kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Fourfold arising: It arises from the body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; it is an action; it is without perception of release; it is unintentional; it is an offense by regulation; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is tri-citta; it is tri-vedana.
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
824.Aṭṭhame – nibbiṭṭho rājabhaṭo rañño bhati keṇi etenātinibbiṭṭharājabhaṭo,ekaṃ ṭhānantaraṃ keṇiyā gahetvā tato laddhaudayoti attho.Taññeva bhaṭapathaṃ yācissāmīti rañño keṇiṃ datvā puna taṃyeva ṭhānantaraṃ yācissāmīti cintento.Paribhāsīti tā bhikkhuniyo ‘‘mā puna evaṃ karitthā’’ti santajjesi.
824. In the eighth, nibbiṭṭharājabhaṭo, "a royal servant who has finished his term," means one who receives a position after giving a bribe to the king; the meaning is that he gets income from that.Taññeva bhaṭapathaṃ yācissāmī ti, "I will ask for that very position of service," thinking, "I will give a bribe to the king and then ask for that very position." Paribhāsī ti, "reproached," means she scolded those bhikkhunis, saying "Do not do such a thing again."
826.Sayaṃ chaḍḍetīti cattāripi vatthūni ekapayogena chaḍḍentiyā ekāva āpatti, pāṭekkaṃ chaḍḍentiyā vatthugaṇanāya āpattiyo. Āṇattiyampi eseva nayo. Dantakaṭṭhachaḍḍanepi bhikkhuniyā pācittiyameva. Bhikkhussa sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
826.Sayaṃ chaḍḍetī ti, "Throws it away herself," if she throws away all four items with one effort, there is one offense; if she throws them away individually, there are offenses according to the number of items. The same method applies to ordering (someone else). In the case of throwing away a toothpick, there is only a pācittiya for the bhikkhuni. For the bhikkhu, it is always a dukkaṭa. The rest is straightforward.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Sixfold arising: It is both an action and a non-action; it is without perception of release; it is unintentional; it is an offense by regulation; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is tri-citta; it is tri-vedana.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
830-2.Navame –yaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ropimanti khettaṃ vā hotu nāḷikerādiārāmo vā, yattha katthaci ropimaharitaṭṭhāne etāni vatthūni chaḍḍentiyā purimanayeneva āpattibhedo veditabbo. Khette vā ārāme vā nisīditvā bhuñjamānā ucchuādīni vā khādantī; gacchamānā ucchiṭṭhodakacalakādīni haritaṭṭhāne chaḍḍeti, antamaso udakaṃ pivitvā matthakacchinnanāḷikerampi chaḍḍeti, pācittiyameva. Bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ. Kasitaṭṭhāne pana nikkhittabīje yāva aṅkuraṃ na uṭṭhahati, tāva sabbesaṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Anikkhittabījesu khettakoṇādīsu vā asañjātaropimesu khettamariyādādīsu vā chaḍḍetuṃ vaṭṭati. Manussānaṃ kacavarachaḍḍanaṭṭhānepi vaṭṭati.Chaḍḍitakhetteti manussesu sassaṃ uddharitvā gatesu chaḍḍitakhettaṃ nāma hoti, tattha vaṭṭati. Yattha pana lāyitampi pubbaṇṇādi puna uṭṭhahissatīti rakkhanti, tattha yathāvatthukameva. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ…pe… tivedananti.
830-2. In the ninth, yaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ropimaṃ, "things grown for people's use or consumption," whether it is a field or a garden of coconut trees, etc., one should understand the difference in offenses in the same way as before when throwing these things in any place where greenery is grown. While sitting and eating in a field or garden, or while eating sugarcane, etc., while going along, if she throws away leftover water, saliva, etc., in a green place, even if she throws away a coconut with the top cut off after drinking the water, it is only a pācittiya. For a bhikkhu, it is a dukkaṭa. However, in a cultivated place, as long as a sprout has not arisen from a seed that has been placed, there is a dukkaṭa for everyone. It is allowable to throw things in field corners or in places where crops have not yet grown, such as field boundaries. It is also allowable in places where people throw away rubbish. Chaḍḍitakhette ti, "in a discarded field," means after people have harvested the crop and left, it is called a discarded field; it is allowable there. However, where even sprouted grains, etc., are protected with the thought that they will grow again, it should be treated according to the item. The rest is straightforward. Sixfold arising: It is both action and non-action…pe… tri-vedana.
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
835.Dasame –yaṃkiñci naccanti naṭādayo vā naccantu soṇḍā vā, antamaso morasuvamakkaṭādayopi, sabbampetaṃ naccameva.Yaṃkiñci gītanti yaṃkiñci naṭādīnaṃ vā gītaṃ hotu, ariyānaṃ parinibbānakāle ratanattayaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ sādhukīḷitagītaṃ vā asaṃyatabhikkhūnaṃ dhammabhāṇakagītaṃ vā, sabbampetaṃ gītameva.Yaṃkiñci vāditanti tantibaddhādivādanīyabhaṇḍavāditaṃ vā hotu, kuṭabherivāditaṃ vā, antamaso udakabherivāditampi, sabbampetaṃ vāditameva.
835. In the tenth, yaṃkiñci naccaṃ, "any dancing," whether actors or soṇḍā are dancing, or even peacocks, parrots, monkeys, etc., all of that is dancing. Yaṃkiñci gītaṃ, "any singing," whether it is any singing by actors, etc., well-played singing imbued with the qualities of the Triple Gem at the time of the ariyas' passing away, or singing of the Dhamma by undisciplined bhikkhus, all of that is singing. Yaṃkiñci vāditaṃ, "any playing of instruments," whether it is the playing of instruments bound with strings, etc., or the playing of kettle drums, or even the playing of water drums, all of that is the playing of instruments.
836.Dassanāya gacchati āpatti dukkaṭassāti padavāragaṇanāya āpatti dukkaṭassa.Yattha ṭhitā passati vā suṇāti vāti ekapayogena olokentī passati, tesaṃyeva gītavāditaṃ suṇāti, ekameva pācittiyaṃ. Sace pana ekaṃ disaṃ oloketvā naccaṃ passati, puna aññato oloketvā gāyante passati aññato vādente, pāṭekkā āpattiyo. Bhikkhunī sayampi naccituṃ vā gāyituṃ vā vādituṃ vā na labhati, aññe ‘‘nacca, gāya, vādehī’’ti vattumpi na labhati. ‘‘Cetiyassa upahāraṃ detha, upāsakā’’ti vattumpi ‘‘tumhākaṃ cetiyassa upaṭṭhānaṃ karomā’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitumpi na labhati. Sabbattha pācittiyanti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ cetiyassa upaṭṭhānaṃ karomā’’ti vutte pana ‘‘upaṭṭhānakaraṇaṃ nāma sundara’’nti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
836.Dassanāya gacchati āpatti dukkaṭassā ti, "Going to see, there is an offense of dukkaṭa," means there is an offense of dukkaṭa for each step. Yattha ṭhitā passati vā suṇāti vā ti, "Where she stands, she sees or hears," if she looks around and sees with one effort, or hears that very singing and playing with one effort, there is only one pācittiya. But if she looks in one direction and sees dancing, then looks elsewhere and sees singing, and elsewhere playing, there are separate offenses. A bhikkhuni herself cannot dance, sing, or play instruments, nor can she say to others, "Dance, sing, play!" It is not even permissible to say, "Give an offering to the shrine, lay devotees," nor, when someone says, "We will take care of your shrine," is it permissible to accept with "Good." It is said in all the commentaries that in all these cases there is a pācittiya. For a bhikkhu, it is a dukkaṭa. However, when someone says, "We will take care of your shrine," it is permissible to say, "Taking care is beautiful."
837.Ārāme ṭhitāti ārāme ṭhatvā antarārāme vā bahiārāme vā naccādīni passati vā suṇāti vā, anāpatti.Sati karaṇīyeti salākabhattādīnaṃ vā atthāya aññena vā kenaci karaṇīyena gantvā gataṭṭhāne passati vā suṇāti vā, anāpatti.Āpadāsūti tādisena upaddavena upaddutā samajjaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati, evaṃ pavisitvā passantiyā vā suṇantiyā vā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
837.Ārāme ṭhitā ti, "Standing in the monastery," means if she stands in the monastery and sees or hears dancing, etc., inside or outside the monastery, there is no offense. Sati karaṇīye ti, "If there is a task," for the sake of ticket-food, etc., or if she goes for any other task and sees or hears at the place she has gone, there is no offense. Āpadāsū ti, "In dangers," being afflicted by such a disaster, she enters a festival ground; having entered in this way, if she sees or hears, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakaloma arising: It is an action; it is without perception of release; it is unintentional; it is an offense against the world; it is a bodily action; it is an unwholesome thought; it is tri-vedana.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Lasuṇavaggo paṭhamo.
The Lasuṇa Chapter is the first.
2. Andhakāravaggo
2. The Andhakāra Chapter
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
839.Andhakāravaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –appadīpeti padīpacandasūriyaaggīsu ekenāpi anobhāsite. Tenevassa padabhājane ‘‘anāloke’’ti vuttaṃ.Sallapeyya vāti gehassitakathaṃ katheyya.
839. In the first training rule of the Andhakāra Chapter, appadīpe ti, "without a lamp," means not illuminated by any of a lamp, the moon, the sun, or fire. Therefore, it is said in the analysis of the word, "in the absence of light." Sallapeyya vā ti, "or converses," means she may tell a story about household affairs.
841.Arahopekkhā aññavihitāti na rahoassādāpekkhā rahoassādato aññavihitāva hutvā ñātiṃ vā pucchati, dāne vā pūjāya vā manteti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dvivedananti.
841. Arahopekkhā aññavihitā ti, "The expectation of privacy is arranged otherwise," means not expecting the pleasure of privacy, but having arranged it otherwise from the pleasure of privacy, she asks a relative or deliberates about giving or honoring. The rest is straightforward. Theyyasattha arising: It arises from body and mind and from body, speech, and mind; it is an action; it is with perception of release; it is intentional; it is an offense against the world; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is an unwholesome thought; it is two-vedana.
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
842.Dutiye –paṭicchanne okāseti idameva nānaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
842. In the second, paṭicchanne okāse ti, "in a concealed place," only this is different. Everything else is similar to the previous one.
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
846.Tatiye –ajjhokāseti nānaṃ, sesaṃ sabbaṃ tādisamevāti.
846. In the third, ajjhokāse ti, "in an open space," is different, everything else is the same.
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
850-3.Catutthe –nikaṇṇikanti kaṇṇamūlaṃ vuccati; kaṇṇamūle jappeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Sati karaṇīyeti salākabhattādīnaṃ āharaṇatthāya vihāre vā dunnikkhittaṃ paṭisāmanatthāya. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni purimasadisānevāti.
850-3. In the fourth, nikaṇṇikanti, "near the ear," means it is called the base of the ear; it is said that she whispers near the base of the ear. Sati karaṇīye ti, "If there is a task," for the sake of bringing ticket-food, etc., or for putting away something that has not been properly put away in the monastery. The rest is straightforward. The arising, etc., are just like the previous one.
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
854.Pañcame –gharaṃ sodhentāti tesaṃ kira etadahosi – ‘‘theriyā koci kāyikavācasiko vītikkamo na dissati, gharampi tāva sodhemā’’ti, tato gharaṃ sodhentā naṃ addasaṃsu.
854. In the fifth, gharaṃ sodhentā ti, "while cleaning the house," it seems that they thought, "No physical or verbal transgression of the elder woman is seen, let's clean the house first," then, while cleaning the house, they saw her.
856.Anovassakaṃ atikkāmentiyāti paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmentiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyaṃ atikkāmentiyā pācittiyaṃ, upacārātikkame eseva nayo.
856.Anovassakaṃ atikkāmentiyā ti, "while crossing the rainless season," there is a dukkaṭa for crossing the first step, and a pācittiya for crossing the second; the same method applies to transgression of the boundary.
858.Gilānāyāti yā tādisena gelaññena āpucchituṃ na sakkoti.Āpadāsūti ghare aggi vā uṭṭhito hoti, corā vā; evarūpe upaddave anāpucchā pakkamati, anāpatti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
858.Gilānāyā ti, "to one who is ill," who is not able to ask permission due to such an illness. Āpadāsū ti, "In dangers," if a fire has broken out in the house, or there are thieves; in such a disaster, she leaves without asking permission, there is no offense. The rest here is straightforward.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathina arising: It arises from body and speech and from body, speech, and mind; it is both an action and a non-action; it is without perception of release; it is unintentional; it is an offense by regulation; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is tri-citta; it is tri-vedana.
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
860.Chaṭṭhe –abhinisīdeyyāti nisīdeyya. Nisīditvā gacchantiyā ekā āpatti, anisīditvā nipajjitvā gacchantiyā ekā, nisīditvā nipajjitvā gacchantiyā dve.
860. In the sixth, abhinisīdeyyā ti, "should sit down," means she should sit down. There is one offense for sitting down and going, one for not sitting down but lying down and going, and two for sitting down, lying down, and going.
863.Dhuvapaññatteti bhikkhunīnaṃ atthāya niccapaññatte. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ…pe… tivedananti.
863. Dhuvapaññatte ti, "on a permanently appointed (seat)," means permanently appointed for the sake of the bhikkhunis. The rest is straightforward. Kathina arising…pe… tri-vedana.
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
864.Sattamepi – sabbaṃ chaṭṭhe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
864. In the seventh also, everything should be understood in the same way as stated in the sixth.
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
869.Aṭṭhame – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
869. In the eighth, everything is straightforward. Threefold arising: It is an action; it is with perception of release; it is intentional; it is an offense against the world; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is an unwholesome thought; it is painful feeling.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
875.Navame –abhisapeyyāti sapathaṃ kareyya.Nirayena abhisapatināma ‘‘niraye nibbattāmi, avīcimhi nibbattāmi, niraye nibbattatu, avīcimhi nibbattatū’’ti evamādinā nayena akkosati.Brahmacariyena abhisapatināma ‘‘gihinī homi, odātavatthā homi, paribbājikā homi, itarā vā edisā hotū’’ti evamādinā nayena akkosati; vācāya vācāya pācittiyaṃ. Ṭhapetvā pana nirayañca brahmacariyañca ‘‘sunakhī sūkarī kāṇā kuṇī’’tiādinā nayena akkosantiyā vācāya vācāya dukkaṭaṃ.
875. In the ninth, abhisapeyyā ti, "should curse," means she should make an oath. Nirayena abhisapati "curses with hell," means she scolds with words like, "May I be reborn in hell, may I be reborn in Avīci, may she be reborn in hell, may she be reborn in Avīci." Brahmacariyena abhisapati "curses with the holy life," means she scolds with words like, "May I become a laywoman, may I wear white clothes, may I become a female ascetic, or may she become another such one"; there is a pācittiya for each utterance. However, setting aside hell and the holy life, if she scolds with words like "bitch, sow, blind, hunchback," there is a dukkaṭa for each utterance.
878.Atthapurekkhārāyāti aṭṭhakathaṃ kathentiyā.Dhammapurekkhārāyāti pāḷiṃ vācentiyā.Anusāsanipurekkhārāyāti ‘‘idānipi tvaṃ edisā, sādhu viramassu, no ce viramasi, addhā puna evarūpāni kammāni katvā niraye uppajjissasi, tiracchānayoniyā uppajjissasī’’ti evaṃ anusāsaniyaṃ ṭhatvā vadantiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
878. Atthapurekkhārāyā ti, "out of regard for the meaning," while telling a commentary. Dhammapurekkhārāyā ti, "out of regard for the Dhamma," while reciting the Pali. Anusāsanipurekkhārāyā ti, "out of regard for instruction," means while standing giving instruction, saying, "Even now you are like this; it is good to abstain, for if you do not abstain, certainly after doing such actions again, you will be born in hell, you will be born in the animal realm," there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Threefold arising: It is an action; it is with perception of release; it is intentional; it is an offense against the world; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is an unwholesome thought; it is painful feeling.
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
879.Dasame – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalakammaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
879. In the tenth, everything is straightforward. Dhuranikkhepa arising: It arises from body, speech, and mind; it is an action; it is with perception of release; it is intentional; it is an offense against the world; it is a bodily action; it is a verbal action; it is an unwholesome action; it is painful feeling.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Andhakāravaggo dutiyo.
The Andhakāra Chapter is the second.
3. Naggavaggo
3. The Nagga Chapter
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
883-6.Naggavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –brahmacariyaṃ ciṇṇenāti brahmacariyena ciṇṇena; atha vā brahmacariyassa caraṇenāti; evaṃ karaṇatthe vā sāmiatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Acchinnacīvarikāyāti idaṃ udakasāṭikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na aññaṃ cīvaraṃ. Tasmā udakasāṭikāya acchinnāya vā naṭṭhāya vā naggāya nhāyantiyā anāpatti. Sacepi udakasāṭikacīvaraṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, na sakkā nivāsetvā bahi gantuṃ, evampi naggāya nhāyituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānameva.
883-6. In the first training rule of the Nagga Chapter, brahmacariyaṃ ciṇṇena ti, "by one practicing the holy life," means by one who has practiced the holy life; or by the conduct of the holy life; thus, the word is to be understood as an instrumental case or a possessive case. Acchinnacīvarikāyā ti, "with robe not cut off," this is said referring to a bathing cloth, not another robe. Therefore, there is no offense for bathing naked if the bathing cloth is not cut off or is lost. Even if the bathing cloth-robe is very expensive and it is not possible to go outside wearing it, it is still allowable to bathe naked. The rest here is straightforward.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Eḷakaloma arising: It is an action; it is without perception of release; it is unintentional; it is an offense by regulation; it is a bodily action; it is tri-citta; it is tri-vedana.
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
887.Dutiye – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
887.In the second, everything is straightforward. Sixfold arising: It is an action (kiriyaṃ), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
893-4.Tatiye –anantarāyikinīti dasasu antarāyesu ekenapi antarāyena anantarāyā.Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatteti dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā sacepi pacchā sibbati, āpattiyevāti attho. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
893-4.In the third, anantarāyikinī means uninterrupted by even one of the ten interruptions (antarāyesu ekenapi antarāyena anantarāyā). Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatte means even if she sews it later after laying down the burden (dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā sacepi pacchā sibbati), it is still an offense (āpattiyeva) – this is the meaning. The rest is straightforward.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The arising of laying down the burden (Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is a non-action (akiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
898-9.Catutthe – pañca ahāni pañcāhaṃ, pañcāhamevapañcāhikaṃ. Saṅghāṭīnaṃ cārosaṅghāṭicāro;paribhogavasena vā otāpanavasena vā saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭīti laddhanāmānaṃ pañcannaṃ cīvarānaṃ parivattananti attho. Tasmāyeva padabhājane ‘‘pañcamaṃ divasaṃ pañca cīvarānī’’tiādimāha.Āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha ca ekasmiṃ cīvare ekā āpatti; pañcasu pañca.
898-9.In the fourth, five days are a five-day period, and the five-day period itself is pañcāhikaṃ. The going about with the Saṅghāṭī robes is saṅghāṭicāro; meaning the exchange of the five robes called Saṅghāṭī, named so because of being assembled (saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena), either by way of use or by way of airing. Therefore, in the word division (padabhājane), he said, "on the fifth day, the five robes," and so on (‘‘pañcamaṃ divasaṃ pañca cīvarānī’’tiādimāha). Āpatti pācittiyassā (an offense of expiation) here means one offense for each robe; five offenses for five robes.
900.Āpadāsūti mahagghaṃ cīvaraṃ, na sakkā hoti corabhayādīsu paribhuñjituṃ; evarūpe upaddave anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
900.Āpadāsū (in emergencies): a valuable robe that cannot be used due to fear of thieves, etc.; in such a predicament, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward. The arising of kathina (Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is a non-action (akiriyaṃ), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
903.Pañcame –cīvarasaṅkamanīyanti saṅkametabbaṃ cīvaraṃ; aññissā santakaṃ anāpucchā gahitaṃ puna paṭidātabbacīvaranti attho.
903.In the fifth, cīvarasaṅkamanīyanti (clothing to be transferred) means clothing that must be transferred; clothing belonging to another that was taken without asking and must be returned (aññissā santakaṃ anāpucchā gahitaṃ puna paṭidātabbacīvaranti attho).
906.Āpadāsūti sace apārutaṃ vā anivatthaṃ vā corā haranti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu dhārentiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
906.Āpadāsū (in emergencies): If thieves steal it while it is unwrapped or not worn, there is no offense for wearing it in such emergencies. The rest is straightforward. The arising of kathina (Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is both an action and a non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
909-10.Chaṭṭhe –aññaṃ parikkhāranti yaṃkiñci thālakādīnaṃ vā sappitelādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ.Ānisaṃsanti ‘‘kittakaṃ agghanakaṃ dātukāmatthā’’ti pucchati, ‘‘ettakaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti, ‘‘āgametha tāva, idāni vatthaṃ mahagghaṃ, katipāhena kappāse āgate samagghaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ vatvā nivārentiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
909-10.In the sixth, aññaṃ parikkhāranti (another requisite) means any other thing, such as a bowl or oil, etc. (yaṃkiñci thālakādīnaṃ vā sappitelādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ). Ānisaṃsanti (advantage): If she asks, "How much is the price?" (‘‘kittakaṃ agghanakaṃ dātukāmatthā’’ti pucchati), and they say, "It's so much" (‘‘ettakaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti), and she says, "Wait a while; now the cloth is expensive; in a few days, when cotton arrives, it will be cheaper" (‘‘āgametha tāva, idāni vatthaṃ mahagghaṃ, katipāhena kappāse āgate samagghaṃ bhavissatī’’ti), and prevents them in this way, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Threefold arising (Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
911.Sattame –pakkamiṃsūti aññāsampi āgamanaṃ āgamentī ‘‘addhā amhākampi āgamessatī’’ti tattha tattha agamaṃsu.Paṭibāheyyāti paṭisedheyya.
911.In the seventh, pakkamiṃsūti (they departed) means waiting for others to come, they went here and there thinking, "Surely, it will come to us too" (aññāsampi āgamanaṃ āgamentī ‘‘addhā amhākampi āgamessatī’’ti tattha tattha agamaṃsu). Paṭibāheyyāti (she should refuse) means she should reject (paṭisedheyya).
915.Ānisaṃsanti ‘‘ekissā ekaṃ sāṭakaṃ nappahoti, āgametha tāva, katipāhena uppajjissati, tato bhājessāmī’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā paṭibāhantiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
915.Ānisaṃsanti (advantage): If she shows the advantage, saying, "One sāṭaka is not enough for one, wait a while, it will arise in a few days, then we will distribute it" (‘‘ekissā ekaṃ sāṭakaṃ nappahoti, āgametha tāva, katipāhena uppajjissati, tato bhājessāmī’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā), and refuses, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Threefold arising (Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
916-8.Aṭṭhame –naṭānāma ye nāṭakaṃ nāṭenti.Naṭakānāma ye naccanti.Laṅghakānāma ye vaṃsavarattādīsu laṅghanakammaṃ karonti.Sokajjhāyikānāma māyākārā.Kumbhathūṇikānāma ghaṭakena kīḷanakā; bimbisakavādakātipi vadanti.Deti āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha cīvaragaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
916-8.In the eighth, naṭānāma (actors) are those who perform plays (ye nāṭakaṃ nāṭenti). Naṭakānāma (dancers) are those who dance (ye naccanti). Laṅghakānāma (acrobats) are those who perform acrobatic feats on bamboo poles and ropes, etc. (ye vaṃsavarattādīsu laṅghanakammaṃ karonti). Sokajjhāyikānāma (magicians) are those who create illusions (māyākārā). Kumbhathūṇikānāma (pot jugglers) are those who play with pots (ghaṭakena kīḷanakā); some also call them bimbisakavādakā (bimbisaka players). Deti āpatti pācittiyassā (giving, there is an offense of expiation) means here the offenses should be understood according to the number of robes. The rest is straightforward.
Chasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Sixfold arising: It is an action (kiriyaṃ), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
921-4.Navame –dubbalacīvarapaccāsāyātidubbalāya cīvarapaccāsāya.Ānisaṃsanti kiñcāpi ‘‘na mayaṃ ayye sakkomā’’ti vadanti, ‘‘idāni pana tesaṃ kappāso āgamissati, saddho pasanno puriso āgamissati, addhā dassatī’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā nivārentiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
921-4.In the ninth, dubbalacīvarapaccāsāyāti (expecting inferior robes) means expecting inferior robes (dubbalāya cīvarapaccāsāya). Ānisaṃsanti (advantage): Even though they say, "We are not able, Venerable" (kiñcāpi ‘‘na mayaṃ ayye sakkomā’’ti vadanti), if she shows the advantage, saying, "Now their cotton will arrive, a faithful and pleased man will arrive, surely he will give" (‘‘idāni pana tesaṃ kappāso āgamissati, saddho pasanno puriso āgamissati, addhā dassatī’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā), and prevents them, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Threefold arising (Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (tivedananti).
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
927.Dasame –kathinuddhāraṃ na dassantīti kīdiso kathinuddhāro dātabbo, kīdiso na dātabboti? Yassa atthāramūlako ānisaṃso mahā, ubbhāramūlako appo, evarūpo na dātabbo. Yassa pana atthāramūlako ānisaṃso appo, ubbhāramūlako mahā, evarūpo dātabbo. Samānisaṃsopi saddhāparipālanatthaṃ dātabbova.
927.In the tenth, kathinuddhāraṃ na dassantīti (they do not give the removal of the kathina) means what kind of removal of the kathina should be given, and what kind should not be given? That whose advantage based on the spreading is great and whose advantage based on the removal is small, that kind should not be given. But that whose advantage based on the spreading is small and whose advantage based on the removal is great, that kind should be given. Even if the advantages are equal, it should be given for the sake of maintaining faith.
931.Ānisaṃsanti bhikkhunisaṅgho jiṇṇacīvaro, kathinānisaṃsamūlako mahālābhoti evarūpaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā paṭibāhantiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
931.Ānisaṃsanti (advantage): If she shows such an advantage and refuses, saying, "The community of bhikkhunīs has worn-out robes; there is a great gain based on the advantage of the kathina" (bhikkhunisaṅgho jiṇṇacīvaro, kathinānisaṃsamūlako mahālābhoti evarūpaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā paṭibāhantiyā), there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Threefold arising (Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (tivedananti).
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Naggavaggo tatiyo.
The Third Naggavagga.
4. Tuvaṭṭavaggo
4. The Tuvaṭṭavagga
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
933.Tuvaṭṭavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –tuvaṭṭeyyunti nipajjeyyuṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
933.In the first training rule of the Tuvaṭṭavagga, tuvaṭṭeyyunti (they should lie down) means they should lie down (nipajjeyyuṃ). The rest is straightforward. The arising from elaka wool (Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
937.Dutiye – ekaṃ attharaṇañceva pāvuraṇañca etāsantiekattharaṇapāvuraṇā;saṃhārimānaṃ pāvārattharaṇakaṭasārakādīnaṃ ekaṃ antaṃ attharitvā ekaṃ pārupitvā tuvaṭṭentīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
937.In the second, ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā (having one spread and one covering) means those who have one spread and one covering; this is a designation for those who, having spread one end and covered themselves with one end of the traveling pāvāras, atthaṇas, kaṭasāras, etc. (saṃhārimānaṃ pāvārattharaṇakaṭasārakādīnaṃ ekaṃ antaṃ attharitvā ekaṃ pārupitvā tuvaṭṭentīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ).
940.Vavatthānaṃ dassetvāti majjhe kāsāvaṃ vā kattarayaṭṭhiṃ vā antamaso kāyabandhanampi ṭhapetvā nipajjantīnaṃ anāpattīti attho. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
940.Vavatthānaṃ dassetvāti (having shown a separation) means there is no offense for those who lie down having placed a yellow robe (kāsāvaṃ) or a knife (kattarayaṭṭhiṃ) or at least a waistband (kāyabandhanampi) in the middle. The rest is straightforward. The arising from elaka wool (Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), an offense by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), of three minds (ticittaṃ), of three feelings (tivedananti).
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
941.Tatiye –uḷārasambhāvitāti uḷārakulā pabbajitattā guṇehi ca uḷārattā uḷārāti sambhāvitā.Issāpakatāti issāya apakatā; abhibhūtāti attho. Saññatti bahulā etāsantisaññattibahulā;divasaṃ mahājanaṃ saññāpayamānāti attho. Viññatti bahulā etāsantiviññattibahulā.Viññattīti hetūdāharaṇādīhi vividhehi nayehi ñāpanā veditabbā, na yācanā.
941.In the third, uḷārasambhāvitāti (highly esteemed) means esteemed as excellent (uḷārāti sambhāvitā) because she went forth from an excellent family (uḷārakulā pabbajitattā) and because of her excellent qualities (guṇehi ca uḷārattā). Issāpakatāti (overcome by envy) means defeated by envy (issāya apakatā); meaning overcome (abhibhūtāti attho). Saññattibahulā (frequent in announcements) means those who frequently make announcements to the public during the day (divasaṃ mahājanaṃ saññāpayamānāti). Viññattibahulā (frequent in requests). Viññattīti (request) should be understood as making known in various ways by means of reason, example, etc. (hetūdāharaṇādīhi vividhehi nayehi ñāpanā), not begging (na yācanā).
943.Caṅkamane nivattanagaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā.Tiṭṭhati vātiādīsu payogagaṇanāya.Uddisati vātiādīsu padādigaṇanāya. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
943.On the promenade (Caṅkamane), the offenses should be understood according to the number of turnings (nivattanagaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā). In Tiṭṭhati vātiādīsu (or stands), etc., according to the number of efforts ( payogagaṇanāya). In Uddisati vātiādīsu (or points out), etc., according to the number of words, etc. (padādigaṇanāya). The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Threefold arising (Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is both an action and a non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
949.Catutthe –sati antarāyeti dasavidhe antarāye sati.Pariyesitvā na labhatīti aññaṃ upaṭṭhāyikaṃ na labhati.Gilānāyāti sayaṃ gilānāya.Āpadāsūti tathārūpe upaddave sati anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
949.In the fourth, sati antarāyeti (if there is an interruption) means if there is one of the ten kinds of interruptions (dasavidhe antarāye sati). Pariyesitvā na labhatīti (seeking, she does not obtain) means she does not obtain another attendant (aññaṃ upaṭṭhāyikaṃ na labhati). Gilānāyāti (for a sick woman) means for a woman who is sick herself (sayaṃ gilānāya). Āpadāsūti (in emergencies) means there is no offense if there is such a predicament. The rest is straightforward.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The arising of laying down the burden (Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is a non-action (akiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
952.Pañcame –aññaṃ āṇāpetīti ettha sace nikkaḍḍhāti āṇattā ekapayogena bahūnipi dvārāni atikkāmeti, ekā āpatti. Atha imañcimañca dvāraṃ atikkāmehīti evaṃ āṇattā atikkāmeti, dvāragaṇanāya āpattiyo. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
952.In the fifth, aññaṃ āṇāpetīti (she orders another) means here, if, when ordered to "pull it out," she crosses even many doors with one effort, there is one offense. But if she is ordered, "Cross this door and this door" (imañcimañca dvāraṃ atikkāmehīti evaṃ āṇattā), and she crosses them, the offenses are according to the number of doors. The rest is straightforward.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Threefold arising (Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is an action (kiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
955.Chaṭṭhe – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
955.In the sixth, everything is straightforward. The arising of Samanubhāsana (Samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is a non-action (akiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7-8-9. Sattamaaṭṭhamanavamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7-8-9. Explanation of the Seventh, Eighth, and Ninth Training Rules
961.Sattamaaṭṭhamanavamesu sabbaṃ uttānameva. Sabbāni eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānāni, kiriyāni, nosaññāvimokkhāni, acittakāni, paṇṇattivajjāni, kāyakammāni, ticittāni tivedanānīti.
961.In the seventh, eighth, and ninth, everything is straightforward. All are arising from elaka wool (eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānāni), are actions (kiriyāni), not accompanied by intention to avoid (nosaññāvimokkhāni), unintentional (acittakāni), offenses by way of enactment (paṇṇattivajjāni), bodily actions (kāyakammāni), of three minds (ticittāni) and of three feelings (tivedanānīti).
Sattamaaṭṭhamanavamasikkhāpadāni.
The Seventh, Eighth, and Ninth Training Rules.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
973.Dasame –āhundarikāti sambādhā.
973.In the tenth, āhundarikāti (crowded) means constricted (sambādhā).
975.Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatteti sacepi dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā pacchā pakkamati, āpattiyevāti attho. Pavāretvā pañca yojanāni gacchantiyāpi anāpatti. Chasu vattabbameva natthi. Sace pana tīṇi gantvā teneva maggena paccāgacchati, na vaṭṭati. Aññena maggena āgantuṃ vaṭṭati.
975.Dhuraṃ nikkhittamatteti (as soon as she lays down the burden) means even if she lays down the burden and leaves later, it is still an offense (āpattiyeva) – this is the meaning. There is no offense even for one who, having invited, goes five yojanas. There is certainly nothing to be said about six. But if she goes three and returns by the same path (maggena), it is not allowable (na vaṭṭati). It is allowable to come by another path (Aññena maggena āgantuṃ vaṭṭati).
976.Antarāyeti dasavidhe antarāye – paraṃ gacchissāmīti nikkhantā, nadīpūro pana āgato, corā vā magge honti, megho vā uṭṭhāti, nivattituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
976.Antarāyeti (in an interruption) means in one of the ten kinds of interruptions – having set out thinking, "I will go to the other side," but a flood has come in the river, or there are thieves on the road, or a cloud arises, it is allowable to turn back (nivattituṃ vaṭṭati). The rest is straightforward. The arising of the first Pārājika (Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ): It is a non-action (akiriyaṃ), accompanied by intention to avoid (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), an offense against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), of an unwholesome mind (akusalacittaṃ), of painful feeling (dukkhavedananti).
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Tuvaṭṭavaggo catuttho.
The Fourth Tuvaṭṭavagga.
5. Cittāgāravaggo
5. The Cittāgāravagga
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
978.Cittāgāravaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –rājāgāranti rañño kīḷanagharaṃ.Cittāgāranti kīḷanacittasālaṃ.Ārāmanti kīḷanaupavanaṃ.Uyyānanti kīḷanuyyānaṃ.Pokkharaṇīnti kīḷanapokkharaṇiṃ. Tasmāyeva padabhājane ‘‘yattha katthaci rañño kīḷitu’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Dassanāya gacchati āpatti dukkaṭassāti ettha padavāragaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ.Yattha ṭhitā passatīti ettha pana sace ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhitā padaṃ anuddharamānā pañcapi passati, ekameva pācittiyaṃ. Taṃ taṃ disābhāgaṃ oloketvā passantiyā pana pāṭekkā āpattiyo. Bhikkhussa pana sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ.
978.In the first training rule of the Cittāgāra Chapter – rājāgāra means the king’s pleasure house. Cittāgāra means a picture hall for amusement. Ārāma means a pleasure garden. Uyyāna means an amusement park. Pokkharaṇī means a pleasure pond. Therefore, in the word analysis, it is said, "Wherever the king amuses himself," etc. Goes for the sake of seeing, there is an offense of dukkaṭa – here, dukkaṭa is determined by counting the instances of going. Where she stands and sees – here, if standing in one place without moving her feet, she sees five (such places), there is only one pācittiya. But for her, looking in each direction and seeing, there is a separate offense for each. For a bhikkhu, however, it is dukkaṭa in all cases.
981.Ārāme ṭhitāti ajjhārāme rājāgārādīni karonti, tāni passantiyā anāpatti.Gacchantī vā āgacchantī vāti piṇḍapātādīnaṃ atthāya gacchantiyā maggo hoti, tāni passati, anāpatti.Sati karaṇīye gantvāti rañño santikaṃ kenaci karaṇīyena gantvā passati, anāpatti.Āpadāsūti kenaci upaddutā pavisitvā passati, anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
981.Standing in the ārāma – if they are building rājāgāra, etc., in the inner ārāma, there is no offense for her seeing them. Going or coming – if while going for the sake of alms-food etc., there is a path, and she sees them, there is no offense. Having gone when there is a need – having gone to the king for some business and sees, there is no offense. In dangers – having entered because being troubled by something and sees, there is no offense. The rest is self-explanatory.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its origin is like an eḷaka's hair – it is an action (kiriya), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
982.Dutiye – abhinisīdanābhinipajjanesu payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
982.In the second (training rule) – offenses should be understood as arising from counting each effort in sitting down and lying down. The rest is self-explanatory.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its origin is like an eḷaka's hair – it is an action (kiriya), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
988.Tatiye –ujjavujjaveti yattakaṃ hatthena añchitaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ takkamhi veṭhite ekā āpatti. Kantanato pana pubbe kappāsavicinanaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbapayogesu hatthavāragaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ.
988.In the third (training rule) – ujjavujjave means as much as is held with the hand; there is one offense for wrapping that much thread. But from the spinning, before that, beginning with picking cotton, there is dukkaṭa for each instance of moving the hands in all efforts.
989.Kantitasuttanti dasikasuttādiṃ saṅghāṭetvā kantati, dukkantitaṃ vā paṭikantati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
989.Spun thread means weaving together the woof threads, etc., spinning, badly spun, or re-spinning. The rest is self-explanatory. Its origin is like an eḷaka's hair – it is an action (kiriya), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
992.Catutthe –yāguṃ vātiādīsu taṇḍulakoṭṭanaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbesu pubbapayogesu payogagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ. Yāgubhattesu bhājanagaṇanāya, khādanīyādīsu rūpagaṇanāya pācittiyāni.
992.In the fourth (training rule) – in gruel or…, beginning with husking rice, there is dukkaṭa for each instance of effort in all preliminary actions. In the case of gruel and rice, pācittiyas arise from counting each bowl; in the case of edibles etc., from counting each piece.
993.Yāgupāneti manussehi saṅghassatthāya kariyamāne yāgupāne vā saṅghabhatte vā tesaṃ sahāyikabhāvena yaṃkiñci pacantiyā anāpatti. Cetiyapūjāya sahāyikā hutvā gandhādīni pūjeti, vaṭṭati.Attano veyyāvaccakarassāti sacepi mātāpitaro āgacchanti, yaṃkiñci bījaniṃ vā sammuñjanidaṇḍakaṃ vā kārāpetvā veyyāvaccakaraṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāva yaṃkiñci pacituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni tatiyasadisānevāti.
993.Gruel drink means there is no offense for her cooking anything as a helper for those people in making gruel drink or community meal that is being made by people for the sake of the saṅgha. It is allowable to worship with perfumes etc., having become a helper in cetiya worship. For one who does personal service – even if her parents come, it is allowable to cook anything only after having someone make a fan or a broom handle and placing it in the position of a personal attendant. The rest is self-explanatory. The origin etc. are just like the third.
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
996.Pañcame –asati antarāyeti dasavidhe antarāye asati.Dhuraṃ nikkhipitvāpacchā vinicchinantī āpattiṃ āpajjitvāva vinicchināti.
996.In the fifth (training rule) – without an obstruction, means without the ten kinds of obstructions. Having put down the burden, she deliberates afterwards, having incurred an offense, she deliberates.
998.Pariyesitvāna labhatīti sahāyikā bhikkhuniyo na labhati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ dukkhavedananti.
998.Having searched, she does not find means she does not find a fellow bhikkhunī. The rest is self-explanatory. The origin of putting down the burden – is non-action (akiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
999.Chaṭṭhe – sabbaṃ naggavagge āgārikasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso, taṃ chasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Idaṃ ‘‘sahatthā’’ti vuttattā eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
999.In the sixth (training rule) – everything should be understood in the same way as stated in the householder training rule in the Nudity Chapter. But this is the difference: that (there) is a sixfold origin. This, because it is stated "with her own hand," has an origin like an eḷaka's hair – it is an action (kiriya), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
1007.Sattame –puna pariyāyenāti punavāre.Āpadāsūti mahagghacīvaraṃ sarīrato mocetvā supaṭisāmitampi corā haranti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anissajjitvā nivāsentiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
1007.In the seventh (training rule) – again, in turn, means in the next turn. In dangers means even a very valuable robe that has been carefully folded after removing it from the body is stolen by thieves; in such dangers, there is no offense for wearing it without relinquishing it. The rest is self-explanatory.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its Kathina origin – arises from body and speech, from body, speech, and mind; it is action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
1008.Aṭṭhame –anissajjitvāti rakkhaṇatthāya adatvā; ‘‘imaṃ jaggeyyāsī’’ti evaṃ anāpucchitvāti attho.
1008.In the eighth (training rule) – without relinquishing means without giving it for protection; the meaning is without asking, "Please take care of this."
1012.Pariyesitvā na labhatīti paṭijaggikaṃ na labhati.Gilānāyāti vacībhedaṃ kātuṃ asamatthāya.Āpadāsūti raṭṭhe bhijjante āvāse chaḍḍetvā gacchanti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni anantarasikkhāpadasadisānevāti.
1012.Having searched, she does not find means she does not find a caretaker. For a sick one means for one unable to make a distinction with speech. In dangers means when the country is breaking up, they abandon the monastery and leave; in such dangers, there is no offense. The rest is self-explanatory. The origin etc. are just like the preceding training rule.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
1015-6.Navame –bāhirakaṃ anatthasaṃhitanti hatthiassarathadhanutharusippaāthabbaṇakhīlanavasīkaraṇasosāpanamantāgadappayogādibhedaṃ parūpaghātakaraṃ.Parittanti yakkhaparittanāgamaṇḍalādibhedaṃ sabbampi vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1015-6.In the ninth (training rule) – external, unconnected with the goal means harmful to others, differentiated as spells for elephants, horses, chariots, bows, swords, crafts, athabbaṇa, stakes, sprinkling, drying up, mantras, medicines, etc. Protective spells means all kinds, differentiated as spells for yakkhas, serpent mandalas, etc., are allowable. The rest is self-explanatory.
Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ – vācato vācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its origin is in accordance with the Dhamma – arises from speech, from speech and mind; it is an action (kiriyaṃ), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
1018.Dasamevāceyyāti padaṃ viseso, sesaṃ navame vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ saddhiṃ samuṭṭhānādīhīti.
1018.In the tenth (training rule), the word vāceyyā is the distinction; the rest should be understood in the same way as stated in the ninth, along with the origin etc.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Chapter, The Cittāgāra Chapter.
Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.
Cittāgāravaggo pañcamo.
6. Ārāmavaggo
6. The Ārāma Chapter
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
1025.Ārāmavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyā, upacāraṃ okkamantiyāti ettha paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāde pācittiyaṃ.
1025.In the first training rule of the Ārāma Chapter – for one who transgresses the boundary, for one who steps over the vicinity, in the first clause, there is dukkaṭa; in the second clause, pācittiya.
1027.Sīsānulokikāti paṭhamaṃ pavisantīnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ sīsaṃ anulokentī pavisati, anāpatti.Yattha bhikkhuniyoti yattha bhikkhuniyo paṭhamataraṃ pavisitvā sajjhāyacetiyavandanādīni karonti, tattha tāsaṃ santikaṃ gacchāmīti gantuṃ vaṭṭati.Āpadāsūti kenaci upaddutā hoti, evarūpāsu āpadāsu pavisituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1027.Sīsānulokikā means when the bhikkhunīs entering first enter, (if another) enters looking at their heads, there is no offense. Where the bhikkhunīs means where the bhikkhunīs have entered earlier and are doing recitation, cetiya worship, etc., it is allowable to go, (thinking,) "I will go to their presence." In dangers means if she is troubled by something, it is allowable to enter in such dangers. The rest is self-explanatory.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
The origin of putting down the burden – is action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
1028.Dutiye –āyasmā kappitakoti ayaṃ jaṭilasahassabbhantaro thero.Saṃharīti saṅkāmesi.Saṃhaṭoti saṅkāmito.Kāsāvaṭoti nhāpitā kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā kammaṃ karonti, taṃ sandhāyāhaṃsu. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1028.In the second (training rule) – Venerable Kappitaka means this was an elder among the thousand ascetics with matted hair. Saṃharī means caused to be moved. Saṃhaṭo means caused to be moved. Kāsāvaṭo means they were referring to barbers doing their work after dressing in a kāsāva robe. The rest is self-explanatory.
Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
Its threefold origin – it is an action (kiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
1036.Tatiye –anusāsanipurekkhārāyāti idānipi tvaṃ bālā abyattātiādinā nayena anusāsanipakkhe ṭhatvā vadantiyā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni anantarasikkhāpadasadisānevāti.
1036.In the third (training rule) – anusāsanipurekkhārāyā means there is no offense for speaking while standing on the side of instruction, in the manner of, "Even now, you are foolish and incompetent," etc. The rest is self-explanatory. The origin etc. are just like the preceding training rule.
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
1037.Catutthe – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato kāyavācato kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Nimantitāya anāpucchā bhuñjantiyā āpattisambhavato siyā kiriyākiriyaṃ, pavāritāya kappiyaṃ kāretvāpi akāretvāpi bhuñjantiyā āpattisambhavato siyā kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1037.In the fourth (training rule) – everything is self-explanatory. Its fourfold origin – arises from body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind. Since there is a possibility of an offense for eating without asking permission when invited, there may be action and non-action (kiriyākiriyaṃ); since there is a possibility of an offense for eating after having or not having something allowable done when invited, there may be action (kiriyaṃ), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
1043.Pañcame – kule maccharo kulamaccharo, kulamaccharo etissā atthītikulamaccharinīkulaṃ vā maccharāyatītikulamaccharinī.Kulassa avaṇṇanti taṃ kulaṃ assaddhaṃ appasannanti.Bhikkhunīnaṃ avaṇṇanti bhikkhuniyo dussīlā pāpadhammāti.
1043.In the fifth (training rule) – one who is miserly about a family is a family miser; one who has miserliness about a family is a kulamaccharinī; or she is miserly about a family is a kulamaccharinī. Disparaging the family means saying that family is faithless and unappeased. Disparaging the bhikkhunīs means saying the bhikkhunīs are immoral and have evil qualities.
1045.Santaṃyeva ādīnavanti kulassa vā bhikkhunīnaṃ vā santaṃ aguṇaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ dukkhavedananti.
1045.An existing fault means an existing bad quality of the family or the bhikkhunīs. The rest is self-explanatory. Its threefold origin – it is an action (kiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
1048.Chaṭṭhe –ovādāyāti garudhammatthāya.Saṃvāsāyāti uposathapavāraṇāpucchanatthāya. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana bhikkhunovādakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyeva.
1048.In the sixth (training rule) – for the sake of giving advice means for the sake of the grave matters (garudhamma). For the sake of association means for the sake of asking about the uposatha and pavāraṇā. This is the summary here. But the detailed explanation has already been stated in the explanation of the training rule for bhikkhus who give advice.
Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Its origin is like an eḷaka's hair – it is an action (kiriya), without the release of perception (nosaññāvimokkhaṃ), unintentional (acittakaṃ), a fault by decree (paṇṇattivajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a three kinds of consciousness (ticittaṃ), and is felt as three kinds of feeling (tivedanaṃ).
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
1053.Sattame –pariyesitvā na labhatīti bhikkhuniṃ na labhati. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Imassāpi vitthāro bhikkhunovādake vuttoyeva.
1053.In the seventh (training rule) – having searched, she does not find means she does not find a bhikkhunī. The rest is self-explanatory. Its detailed explanation has also been stated in the section on bhikkhus who give advice.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin of putting down the burden – is non-action (akiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
1056.Aṭṭhame –ekakammantiādīhi uposathapavāraṇāyeva vuttā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Imassāpi vitthāro bhikkhunovādake vuttoyeva.
1056.In the eighth (training rule) – ekakamma etc., refers to the uposatha and pavāraṇā that have already been mentioned. The rest is self-explanatory. Its detailed explanation has also been stated in the section on bhikkhus who give advice.
Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin of the first pārājika – is non-action (akiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
1058.Navame – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Imassāpi vitthāro bhikkhunovādake vuttoyeva.
1058.In the ninth (training rule) – everything is self-explanatory. Its detailed explanation has also been stated in the section on bhikkhus who give advice.
Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
The origin of putting down the burden – is non-action (akiriyaṃ), with the release of perception (saññāvimokkhaṃ), intentional (sacittakaṃ), a fault against the world (lokavajjaṃ), a bodily action (kāyakammaṃ), a verbal action (vacīkammaṃ), an unwholesome state of mind (akusalacittaṃ), and painful feeling (dukkhavedanaṃ).
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
1062.Dasame –pasākheti adhokāye. Adhokāyo hi yasmā tato rukkhassa sākhā viya ubho ūrū pabhijjitvā gatā, tasmā pasākhoti vuccati.
1062.In the tenth (training rule) – pasākhe means in the lower body. Because the lower body is where the two thighs diverge and go like branches of a tree, therefore it is called pasākha.
1065.Bhindātiādīsu sace ‘‘bhinda, phālehī’’ti sabbāni āṇāpeti, so ca tatheva karoti, cha āṇattidukkaṭāni cha ca pācittiyāni āpajjati. Athāpi evaṃ āṇāpeti – ‘‘upāsaka, yaṃkiñci ettha kātabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ karohī’’ti, so ca sabbānipi bhedanādīni karoti; ekavācāya cha dukkaṭāni cha pācittiyānīti dvādasa āpattiyo. Sace pana bhedanādīsupi ekaṃyeva vatvā ‘‘idaṃ karohī’’ti āṇāpeti, so ca sabbāni karoti, yaṃ āṇattaṃ, tasseva karaṇe pācittiyaṃ. Sesesu anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1065. In Bhindāti and the following, if he orders all, saying, "Break, split," and that person does accordingly, he incurs six āṇattidukkaṭa offenses and six pācittiya offenses. Alternatively, if he orders thus: "Lay follower, whatever should be done here, do all of that," and that person does all the breaking, etc.; with one utterance, there are six dukkaṭa offenses and six pācittiya offenses, totaling twelve offenses. But if, even among breaking, etc., he says only one thing and orders, "Do this," and that person does everything, there is a pācittiya offense for doing only what was ordered. For the rest, there is no offense. The rest is straightforward.
Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
Kathina arising: action and inaction, without perception and release, unintentional, offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Ārāmavaggo chaṭṭho.
The Sixth Chapter: Ārāma.
7. Gabbhinivaggo
7. The Pregnant Woman Chapter
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
1069.Gabbhinivaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –āpannasattāti kucchipaviṭṭhasattā.
1069. In the first training rule of the Pregnant Woman Chapter, āpannasattā means a being who has entered the womb.
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
1073-4.Dutiye –pāyantinti thaññaṃ pāyamānaṃ.Mātā vā hotīti yaṃ dārakaṃ pāyeti, tassa mātā vā hoti dhāti vā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Ubhayampi tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1073-4. In the second, pāyanti means one who is giving milk to drink. Mātā vā hotī means either the mother or a wet nurse who gives milk to the child. The rest is straightforward. Both are tri-arising: action, with perception and release, intentional, offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
1077.Tatiye –sikkhāsammutiṃ dātunti kasmā dāpesi? ‘‘Mātugāmo nāma lolo hoti dve vassāni chasu dhammesu asikkhitvā sīlāni pūrayamāno kilamati, sikkhitvā pana pacchā na kilamissati, nittharissatī’’ti dāpesi.
1077. In the third, sikkhāsammutiṃ dātuṃ, why does she make her take the training approval? She makes her take it because "a woman is fickle; without training in the six dhammas for two years, she struggles while fulfilling the precepts, but having trained, she will not struggle later and will be liberated."
1079.Pāṇātipātāveramaṇiṃ dve vassāni avītikkamma samādānaṃ samādiyāmīti yaṃ taṃ pāṇātipātā veramaṇīti paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ, taṃ pāṇātipātā veramaṇisikkhāpadaṃ dve vassāni avītikkamitabbasamādānaṃ katvā samādiyāmīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Imā cha sikkhāyo saṭṭhivassāyapi pabbajitāya dātabbāyeva, na etāsu asikkhitā upasampādetabbā.
1079. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiṃ dve vassāni avītikkamma samādānaṃ samādiyāmī means, "I undertake to observe for two years without transgressing the training rule that is prescribed as abstinence from taking life," that is, "I undertake the training rule of abstinence from taking life, having made a commitment not to transgress it for two years." This is the method everywhere. These six trainings should be given even to one who has gone forth at sixty years of age; one who has not trained in these should not be given upasampadā ordination.
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
1084.Catutthe – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Sace pana paṭhamaṃ vuṭṭhānasammuti na dinnā hoti, upasampadamāḷakepi dātabbāyeva. Imā dvepi mahāsikkhamānā nāma.
1084. In the fourth, everything is straightforward. But if the approval for leaving the probationary period has not been given first, it should be given even in the upasampadā ordination hall. These two are called mahāsikkhamānā.
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
1090.Pañcame – kiñcāpi ūnadvādasavassaṃ paripuṇṇasaññāya vuṭṭhāpentiyā anāpatti, sā pana anupasampannāva hoti. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1090. In the fifth, even though there is no offense for having a complete understanding when raising one who is less than twelve years old, she is still not fully ordained. The rest is straightforward.
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
1095.Chaṭṭhe – dasavassāya gihigatāya sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā paripuṇṇadvādasavassaṃ upasampādetuṃ vaṭṭati.
1095. In the sixth, it is proper to give the training approval to one who has been a laywoman for ten years and to give upasampadā ordination to one who is fully twelve years old.
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
1101.Sattame – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīnipi sabbesu dutiye vuttasadisāneva. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yattha sammuti atthi, tattha kiriyākiriyaṃ hotīti.
1101. In the seventh, everything is straightforward. The arising and so on are the same as stated in the second in all cases. But this is the distinction: where there is approval, there is action and inaction.
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
1108.Aṭṭhame –na anuggaṇhāpeyyāti ‘‘imissā ayye uddesādīni dehī’’ti evaṃ uddesādīhi na anuggaṇhāpeyya.
1108. In the eighth, na anuggaṇhāpeyyā means she should not have her favored with recitation, etc., by saying, "Give this one recitation, etc."
1110.Pariyesitvāti aññaṃ pariyesitvā na labhati, sayaṃ gilānā hoti, na sakkoti uddesādīni dātuṃ, tassā anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
1110. Pariyesitvā means having searched for another, she does not obtain it; she herself is sick and unable to give recitation, etc.; there is no offense for her. The rest is straightforward. Dhuranikkhepa arising: inaction, with perception and release, intentional, worldly offense, bodily action, verbal action, unwholesome mind, painful feeling.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
1113.Navame –na upaṭṭhaheyyāti cuṇṇena mattikāya dantakaṭṭhena mukhodakenāti evaṃ tena tena karaṇīyena na upaṭṭhaheyya. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
1113. In the ninth, na upaṭṭhaheyyā means she should not attend to her with powder, clay, a toothpick, or mouthwash, etc., with this and that which should be done. The rest is straightforward. First pārājika arising: inaction, with perception and release, intentional, worldly offense, bodily action, unwholesome mind, painful feeling.
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
1116.Dasame –neva vūpakāseyyāti na gahetvā gaccheyya.Na vūpakāsāpeyyāti ‘‘imaṃ ayye gahetvā gacchā’’ti aññaṃ na āṇāpeyya. Sesamettha uttānameva. Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – akiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
1116. In the tenth, neva vūpakāseyyā means she should not depart without taking it. Na vūpakāsāpeyyā means she should not order another, saying, "Take this and go." The rest here is straightforward. Dhuranikkhepa arising: inaction, with perception and release, intentional, worldly offense, bodily action, verbal action, unwholesome mind, painful feeling.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
Gabbhinivaggo sattamo.
The Seventh Chapter: Gabbhini (Pregnant Woman).
8. Kumāribhūtavaggo
8. The Kumāribhūtā (Young Woman) Chapter
1-2-3. Paṭhamadutiyatatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1-2-3. Explanation of the First, Second, and Third Training Rules
1119.Kumāribhūtavaggassa paṭhamadutiyatatiyasikkhāpadāni tīṇi tīhi gihigatasikkhāpadehi sadisāni. Yā pana tā sabbapaṭhamā dve mahāsikkhamānā, tā atikkantavīsativassāti veditabbā. Tā gihigatā vā hontu agihigatā vā, sikkhamānā icceva vattabbā, gihigatāti vā kumāribhūtāti vā na vattabbā. Gihigatāya dasavassakāle sikkhāsammutiṃ datvā dvādasavassakāle upasampadā kātabbā. Ekādasavassakāle datvā terasavassakāle kātabbā, dvādasaterasacuddasapannarasasoḷasasattarasaaṭṭhārasavassakāle sammutiṃ datvā vīsativassakāle upasampadā kātabbā. Aṭṭhārasavassakālato paṭṭhāya ca panāyaṃ gihigatātipi kumāribhūtātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati, kumāribhūtā pana gihigatāti na vattabbā, kumāribhūtā icceva vattabbā. Mahāsikkhamānā pana gihigatātipi vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, kumāribhūtātipi vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, sikkhāsammutidānavasena pana tissopi sikkhamānāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
1119. The first, second, and third training rules of the Kumāribhūtā Chapter are similar to the three training rules concerning laywomen. But those first two mahāsikkhamānā should be understood to be more than twenty years old. Whether they are laywomen or not, they should only be called sikkhamānā, and should not be called laywomen or kumāribhūtā. For a laywoman, the training approval should be given at the age of ten, and upasampadā ordination should be done at the age of twelve. Having given it at the age of eleven, it should be done at the age of thirteen; having given approval at the age of twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, or eighteen, upasampadā ordination should be done at the age of twenty. And from the age of eighteen onwards, it is proper to call her a laywoman or a kumāribhūtā, but a kumāribhūtā should not be called a laywoman; she should only be called a kumāribhūtā. But a mahāsikkhamānā should not be called a laywoman, nor should she be called a kumāribhūtā; however, by way of giving the training approval, one may call all three sikkhamānā.
Paṭhamadutiyatatiyāni.
The First, Second, and Third.
4-5-6. Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4-5-6. Explanation of the Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth Training Rules
1136.Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhesusabbaṃ uttānameva. Sabbāni tisamuṭṭhānāni catutthaṃ kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti. Pañcamaṃ kiriyākiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti. Yañcettha saṅghena paricchinditabbāti vuttaṃ, tassa upaparikkhitabbāti attho. Chaṭṭhaṃ kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ dukkhavedananti. Yaṃ panettha ‘‘paricchinditvā’’ti vuttaṃ, tassa upaparikkhitvāti attho.
1136. In the Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth, everything is straightforward. All three arisings: the fourth is action, with perception and release, intentional, offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana. The fifth is action and inaction, with perception and release, intentional, offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana. And what is stated here as "to be decided by the Sangha" means it should be investigated. The sixth is action, with perception and release, intentional, worldly offense, bodily action, verbal action, unwholesome mind, painful feeling. And what is stated here as "having decided" means it should be investigated.
Catutthapañcamachaṭṭhasikkhāpadāni
The Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth Training Rules
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
1150.Sattame – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedananti.
1150. In the seventh, everything is straightforward. Dhuranikkhepa arising: action, with perception and release, intentional, worldly offense, bodily action, verbal action, unwholesome mind, painful feeling.
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8. Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Eighth Training Rule
1154.Aṭṭhamepi – sabbaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīnipi anantarasadisānevāti.
1154. In the eighth, too, everything is straightforward. The arising and so on are similar to the immediately preceding one.
Aṭṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eighth Training Rule.
9. Navamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Ninth Training Rule
1158.Navame –sokāvāsanti saṅketaṃ katvā agacchamānā purisānaṃ anto sokaṃ pavesetīti sokāvāsā, taṃ sokāvāsaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘sokāvāsā nāma paresaṃ dukkhaṃ uppādetī’’ti. Atha vā gharaṃ viya gharasāmikā, ayampi purisasamāgamaṃ alabhamānā sokaṃ āvisati. Iti yaṃ āvisati, svāssā āvāso hotīti sokāvāsā. Tenāha – ‘‘sokaṃ āvisatī’’ti.Ajānantīti edisā ayanti ajānamānā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1158. In the ninth, sokāvāsa means, having made a signal, if she does not come, she causes sorrow to enter the men, therefore it is sokāvāsā, that sokāvāsa. Therefore, he said, " Sokāvāsā means she causes suffering to others." Or, like a house to the householders, this one, not obtaining association with men, enters into sorrow. Thus, that which she enters is her dwelling place, therefore it is sokāvāsā. Therefore, he said, "She enters into sorrow." Ajānantī means not knowing that such ones are coming. The rest is straightforward. Tri-arising: action, with perception and release, intentional, offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Navamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Ninth Training Rule.
10. Dasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Tenth Training Rule
1164.Dasame –anāpucchāti anāpucchitvā. Bhikkhunīhi dvikkhattuṃ āpucchitabbaṃ – pabbajjākāle ca upasampadākāle ca, bhikkhūnaṃ pana sakiṃ āpucchitepi vaṭṭati.
1164. In the tenth, anāpucchā means without asking. Bhikkhunis should ask twice—at the time of going forth and at the time of upasampadā ordination—but for bhikkhus, it is proper even if asked once.
1165.Ajānantīti mātādīnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ ajānantī. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Idaṃ apubbasamuṭṭhānasīsaṃ. Catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – vācato kāyavācato vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kathaṃ? Abbhānakammādīsu kenacideva karaṇīyena khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ nisinnā ‘‘pakkosatha sikkhamānaṃ, idheva naṃ upasampādessāmā’’ti upasampādeti; evaṃ vācato samuṭṭhāti. Upassayato paṭṭhāya upasampādessāmīti vatvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ gacchantiyā kāyavācato samuṭṭhāti. Dvīsupi ṭhānesu paṇṇattibhāvaṃ jānitvāva vītikkamaṃ karontiyā vācācittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Ananujānāpetvā upasampādanato kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1165. Ajānantī means not knowing of the existence of mother, etc. The rest is straightforward. This is the head of unprecedented arising. Quadruple arising: it arises from speech, from body and speech, from speech and mind, and from body, speech, and mind. How? Sitting in the boundary of a broken sima due to some duty such as abbhāna-kamma, she ordains, saying, "Call the sikkhamānā; we will give her upasampadā ordination right here"; thus, it arises from speech. While going to the boundary of a broken sima, saying, "I will give upasampadā ordination starting from the upassaya," it arises from body and speech. In both places, knowing the state of the rule and then transgressing, it arises from speech and mind and from body, speech, and mind. Because of giving upasampadā ordination without approval: action and inaction, without perception and release, unintentional, offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, tri-citta, tri-vedana.
Dasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Tenth Training Rule.
11. Ekādasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Eleventh Training Rule
1167-8.Ekādasame –pārivāsikachandadānenāti pārivāsiyena chandadānena. Tattha catubbidhaṃ pārivāsiyaṃ – parisapārivāsiyaṃ, rattipārivāsiyaṃ, chandapārivāsiyaṃ, ajjhāsayapārivāsiyanti. Tattha parisapārivāsiyaṃ nāma bhikkhū kenacideva karaṇīyena sannipatitā honti, atha megho vā uṭṭhāti, ussāraṇā vā kariyati, manussā vā ajjhottharantā āgacchanti, bhikkhū ‘‘anokāsā mayaṃ aññatra gacchāmā’’ti chandaṃ avissajjetvāva uṭṭhahanti. Idaṃ parisapārivāsiyaṃ. Kiñcāpi parisapārivāsiyaṃ, chandassa pana avissaṭṭhattā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
1167-8. In the eleventh, pārivāsikachandadānenāti means with the giving of consent by one undergoing parivāsa. There, parivāsa is of four kinds: parisa-pārivāsiyaṃ, ratti-pārivāsiyaṃ, chanda-pārivāsiyaṃ, and ajjhāsayapārivāsiyanti. There, parisa-pārivāsiyaṃ is when the bhikkhus have assembled for some duty, then either a cloud arises, or an announcement is made, or people come crowding in; the bhikkhus get up without sending off their consent, saying, "We have no space; we will go elsewhere." This is parisa-pārivāsiyaṃ. Although it is parisa-pārivāsiyaṃ, because the consent has not been sent off, it is proper to do the act.
Puna bhikkhū ‘‘uposathādīni karissāmā’’ti rattiṃ sannipatitvā ‘‘yāva sabbe sannipatanti, tāva dhammaṃ suṇissāmā’’ti ekaṃ ajjhesanti, tasmiṃ dhammakathaṃ kathenteyeva aruṇo uggacchati. Sace ‘‘cātuddasikaṃ uposathaṃ karissāmā’’ti nisinnā ‘‘pannaraso’’ti kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pannarasikaṃ kātuṃ nisinnā pāṭipade anuposathe uposathaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, aññaṃ pana saṅghakiccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Idaṃ rattipārivāsiyaṃ nāma.
Again, bhikkhus, having gathered at night, thinking, "We will perform the uposatha," say, "Until all have gathered, we will listen to the Dhamma," they request one. While he is speaking on the Dhamma, dawn breaks. If they sat down thinking, "We will do the cātuddasika uposatha," it is proper to do the pannarasa one. If they sat down thinking to do the pannarasika, it is not proper to do the uposatha on the pāṭipada non-uposatha, but it is proper to do another Sangha act. This is called ratti-pārivāsiyaṃ.
Puna bhikkhū ‘‘kiñcideva abbhānādisaṅghakammaṃ karissāmā’’ti nisinnā honti, tatreko nakkhattapāṭhako bhikkhu evaṃ vadati – ‘‘ajja nakkhattaṃ dāruṇaṃ, mā imaṃ kammaṃ karothā’’ti. Te tassa vacanena chandaṃ vissajjetvā tattheva nisinnā honti. Athañño āgantvā ‘‘nakkhattaṃ paṭimānentaṃ attho bālaṃ upaccagā’’ti (jā. 1.1.49) vatvā ‘‘kiṃ nakkhattena karothā’’ti vadati. Idaṃ chandapārivāsiyañceva ajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca. Etasmiṃ pārivāsiye puna chandapārisuddhiṃ anānetvā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati.
Again, bhikkhus sit down thinking, "We will do some abbhāna etc. Sangha act." There, one bhikkhu who recites the constellations says thus: "Today the constellation is inauspicious; do not do this act." Having sent off their consent by his word, they sit right there. Then another comes and says, "The meaning went beyond the fool who was honoring the constellation" (Ja. 1.1.49), and says, "What will you do with the constellation?" This is both chanda-pārivāsiyaṃ and ajjhāsayapārivāsiyaṃ. In this pārivāsiya, it is not proper to do the act without bringing in the purity of consent again.
Vuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti chandaṃ vissajjetvā kāyena vā vācāya vā chandavissajjanamatteneva vā uṭṭhitāya parisāya.
Vuṭṭhitāya parisāyā means, having dismissed the chanda, or merely by the dismissal of the chanda by body or speech, to the assembly that has risen.
1169.Anāpatti avuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti chandaṃ avissajjetvā avuṭṭhitāya anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1169.Anāpatti avuṭṭhitāya parisāyā means, to one who has not dismissed the chanda, there is no offense for the assembly that has not risen. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination is threefold: action, non-release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.
Ekādasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eleventh Training Rule.
12. Dvādasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Twelfth Training Rule
1170.Dvādasame –upassayo na sammatīti vasanokāso nappahoti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni anantarasadisānevāti.
1170.In the twelfth: upassayo na sammatī means the dwelling place is not sufficient. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination and so on are similar to the immediately preceding one.
Dvādasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Twelfth Training Rule.
13. Terasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13. Explanation of the Thirteenth Training Rule
1175.Terasame –ekaṃ vassaṃ dveti ekantarike ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare dve vuṭṭhāpeti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīnipi vuttasadisānevāti.
1175.In the thirteenth: ekaṃ vassaṃ dve means she causes two to be ordained in one year with an interval between them. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination and so on are similar to what has been said.
Terasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Thirteenth Training Rule.
Kumāribhūtavaggo aṭṭhamo.
The Eighth Chapter, on Those Formerly Virgins.
9. Chattupāhanavaggo
9. The Chapter on Umbrellas and Footwear
1. Paṭhamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the First Training Rule
1181.Chattavaggassa paṭhamasikkhāpade –sakimpi dhāreti āpatti pācittiyassāti maggagamane ekapayogeneva divasampi dhāreti, ekāva āpatti. Sace kaddamādīni patvā upāhanā omuñcitvā chattameva dhārentī gacchati, dukkaṭaṃ. Athāpi gacchādīni disvā chattaṃ apanāmetvā upāhanāruḷhāva gacchati, dukkaṭameva. Sace chattampi apanāmetvā upāhanāpi omuñcitvā puna dhāreti, puna pācittiyaṃ. Evaṃ payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1181.In the first training rule of the chapter on umbrellas: sakimpi dhāreti āpatti pācittiyassā means, if she holds it even for a day with a single effort in going on the road, there is only one offense. If, having encountered mud etc., she takes off her footwear and goes holding only the umbrella, there is a dukkaṭa. Furthermore, if, seeing a Gacchā tree, etc., she removes the umbrella and goes wearing the footwear, it is only a dukkaṭa. If she removes the umbrella and also takes off the footwear, and then holds them again, there is another pācittiya. Thus, the offenses should be understood according to the calculation of effort. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination from elakaloma is: action, non-release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, bodily action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.
Paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The First Training Rule.
2. Dutiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Second Training Rule
1184.Dutiye –yānena yāyantīti etthāpi orohitvā punappunaṃ abhiruhantiyā payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā. Sesaṃ paṭhame vuttanayamevāti.
1184.In the second: yānena yāyantī means here too, if she repeatedly gets down and mounts [the vehicle], the offenses should be understood according to the calculation of effort. The rest is in the same manner as stated in the first.
Dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Second Training Rule.
3. Tatiyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Third Training Rule
1190.Tatiye –vippakiriyiṃsūti maṇayo vippakiṇṇā. Idhāpi omuñcitvā dhārentiyā payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo. Samuṭṭhānādīni vuttanayāneva. Kevalaṃ idha akusalacittaṃ hotīti.
1190.In the third: vippakiriyiṃsū means the jewels are scattered. Here too, if she takes them off and holds them, the offenses [occur] according to the calculation of effort. The combination and so on are in the manner stated. Only here, there is unwholesome consciousness.
Tatiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Third Training Rule.
4. Catutthasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Fourth Training Rule
1194.Catutthe – sīsūpagādīsu yaṃ yaṃ dhāreti, tassa tassa vasena vatthugaṇanāya āpattiyo veditabbā. Sesaṃ tatiye vuttanayamevāti.
1194.In the fourth, whatever she holds among head-coverings, etc., the offenses should be understood according to the calculation of objects. The rest is in the same manner as stated in the third.
Catutthasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule.
5. Pañcamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Fifth Training Rule
1199.Pañcame –gandhavaṇṇakenāti gandhena ca vaṇṇakena ca. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni tatiyasadisānevāti.
1199.In the fifth: gandhavaṇṇakenā means with perfume and colorant. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination and so on are similar to the third.
Pañcamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule.
6. Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Sixth Training Rule
1202.Chaṭṭhe – sabbaṃ pañcame vuttasadisamevāti.
1202.In the sixth, everything is similar to what was stated in the fifth.
Chaṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Sixth Training Rule.
7. Sattamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Seventh Training Rule
1208-9.Sattame –ummaddāpeti āpatti pācittiyassāti ettha hatthaṃ amocetvā ummaddane ekāva āpatti, mocetvā mocetvā ummaddane payogagaṇanāya āpattiyo.Sambāhanepieseva nayo.Gilānāyāti antamaso maggagamanaparissamenāpi sābādhāya.Āpadāsūti corabhayādīhi sarīrakampanādīsu. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Samuṭṭhānādīni tatiyasadisānevāti.
1208-9.In the seventh: ummaddāpeti āpatti pācittiyassā means here, if she massages without releasing her hand, there is only one offense; if she massages releasing [her hand] again and again, the offenses [occur] according to the calculation of effort. Sambāhanepi the same method applies to massaging. Gilānāyā means to one who is ill, even from the fatigue of going on a journey. Āpadāsū means in dangers, such as fear of thieves, or bodily trembling, etc. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination and so on are similar to the third.
Sattamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Seventh Training Rule.
8-9-10. Aṭṭhamanavamadasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
8-9-10. Explanation of the Eighth, Ninth, and Tenth Training Rules
1210.Aṭṭhamādīsu tīsu sikkhamānāya sāmaṇeriyā, gihiniyāti idameva nānākaraṇaṃ, sesaṃ sattame vuttasadisamevāti.
1210.In the eighth and so on, in these three, the distinction is only that it applies to a sikkhamānā, a sāmaṇerī, or a laywoman; the rest is similar to what was stated in the seventh.
Aṭṭhamanavamadasamasikkhāpadāni.
The Eighth, Ninth, and Tenth Training Rules.
11. Ekādasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Eleventh Training Rule
1214.Ekādasame –bhikkhussa puratoti abhimukhamevāti attho. Idaṃ pana upacāraṃ sandhāya kathitanti veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyavācato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1214.In the eleventh: bhikkhussa purato means directly in front. However, this should be understood as having been said in reference to the vicinity. The rest is self-explanatory. The kathina combination is: it arises from body and speech, and from body, speech, and mind; action and non-action, non-release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.
Ekādasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Eleventh Training Rule.
12. Dvādasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Twelfth Training Rule
1219-23.Dvādasame –anokāsakatanti asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne pucchāmīti evaṃ akataokāsaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘anokāsakatanti anāpucchā’’ti.Anodissāti asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne pucchāmīti evaṃ aniyametvā kevalaṃ ‘‘pucchitabbaṃ atthi, pucchāmi ayyā’’ti evaṃ vatvā. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ – vācato vācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyākiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1219-23.In the twelfth: anokāsakata means without making an opportunity, [saying] "I will ask in such and such a place." Therefore, he said, "Anokāsakata means without asking permission." Anodissā means without specifying, "I will ask in such and such a place," but merely saying, "There is something to be asked, I ask, venerable one." The rest is self-explanatory. The padasodhamma combination is: it arises from speech and from speech and mind; action and non-action, non-release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, verbal action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.
Dvādasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Twelfth Training Rule.
13. Terasamasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
13. Explanation of the Thirteenth Training Rule
1226.Terasame –parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyāti ekena pādena atikkante dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyena pācittiyaṃ. Upacārepi eseva nayo.
1226.In the thirteenth: parikkhepaṃ atikkāmentiyā means, when one foot has crossed the boundary, there is a dukkaṭa; with the second foot, a pācittiya. The same method applies even in the vicinity.
1227.Acchinnacīvarikāyātiādīsu saṅkaccikacīvarameva cīvaranti veditabbaṃ.Āpadāsūti mahagghaṃ hoti saṅkaccikaṃ, pārupitvā gacchantiyāva upaddavo uppajjati, evarūpāsu āpadāsu anāpatti. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ – kiriyaṃ, nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1227.Among Acchinnacīvarikāyā etc., only the saṅkaccika robe should be understood as a robe. Āpadāsū means in such dangers where the saṅkaccika is very valuable, and trouble arises just by wearing it and going out, there is no offense in such dangers. The rest is self-explanatory. The combination from elakaloma is: action, non-release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, bodily action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.
Terasamasikkhāpadaṃ.
The Thirteenth Training Rule.
Chattupāhanavaggo navamo.
The Ninth Chapter, on Umbrellas and Footwear.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo chasaṭṭhisataṃ pācittiyā dhammāti ettha sabbāneva bhikkhunīnaṃ khuddakesu channavuti, bhikkhūnaṃ dvenavutīti aṭṭhāsītisataṃ sikkhāpadāni, tato sakalaṃ bhikkhunīvaggaṃ, paramparabhojanaṃ, anatirittabhojanaṃ, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇaṃ, paṇītabhojanaviññatti, acelakasikkhāpadaṃ, duṭṭhullapaṭicchādanaṃ, ūnavīsativassupasampādanaṃ, mātugāmena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya addhānagamanaṃ, rājantepurappavesanaṃ, santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchā vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ, nisīdanaṃ vassikasāṭikanti imāni dvāvīsati sikkhāpadāni apanetvā sesāni satañca chasaṭṭhi ca sikkhāpadāni pātimokkhuddesamaggena uddiṭṭhāni hontīti veditabbāni. Tenāha – ‘‘uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo chasaṭṭhisataṃ pācittiyā dhammā…pe… evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti.
Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo chasaṭṭhisataṃ pācittiyā dhammā here means, among all the training rules, ninety-six for the nuns in the Khuddaka section and ninety-two for the monks, totaling one hundred and eighty-eight training rules; after removing the entire nun's chapter, paramparabhojanaṃ, anatirittabhojanaṃ, anatirittena abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāraṇaṃ, paṇītabhojanaviññatti, the acelakasikkhāpadaṃ, duṭṭhullapaṭicchādanaṃ, ūnavīsativassupasampādanaṃ, going on a journey in agreement with a woman, entering the royal inner chambers, entering a village at the wrong time without asking leave of a bhikkhu who is present, the nisīdanaṃ, and the vassikasāṭika; these twenty-two training rules, the remaining one hundred and sixty-six training rules are to be understood as being recited by way of the recitation method of the Pātimokkha. Therefore, he said, "Uddiṭṭhā kho ayyāyo chasaṭṭhisataṃ pācittiyā dhammā…pe… evametaṃ dhārayāmī".
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepato samuṭṭhānavinicchayo – giraggasamajjaṃ, cittāgārasikkhāpadaṃ, saṅghāṇi, itthālaṅkāro, gandhavaṇṇako, vāsitakapiññāko, bhikkhunīādīhi ummaddanaparimaddanānīti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni acittakāni lokavajjāni. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni. Avasesāni acittakāni, paṇṇattivajjāneva. Corīvuṭṭhāpanaṃ, gāmantaraṃ, ārāmasikkhāpadaṃ gabbhinivagge ādito paṭṭhāya satta, kumāribhūtavagge ādito paṭṭhāya pañca, purisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ pārivāsiyachandadānaṃ, anuvassavuṭṭhāpanaṃ, ekantarikavuṭṭhāpananti imāni ekūnavīsati sikkhāpadāni sacittakāni paṇṇattivajjāni, avasesāni sacittakāni lokavajjānevāti.
Herein, this is the brief determination of combinations: giraggasamajjaṃ, the cittāgāra training rule, saṅghāṇi, adornment for women, gandhavaṇṇako, vāsitakapiññāko, and massaging and anointing by nuns, etc., these ten training rules are unintentional and offenses against the world. Herein, this is the meaning: they are unintentional because they can be committed even without intention, but because they must be committed with unwholesome intention when intention is present, they are offenses against the world. The remaining ones are unintentional and only offenses by rule. Corīvuṭṭhāpanaṃ, gāmantaraṃ, the ārāma training rule, seven from the beginning in the gabbhinivagga, five from the beginning in the kumāribhūtavagga, purisasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ, giving chanda to a parivāsi, anuvassavuṭṭhāpanaṃ, and ekantarikavuṭṭhāpanaṃ; these nineteen training rules are intentional and offenses by rule; the remaining ones are intentional and only offenses against the world.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya bhikkhunīvibhaṅge
In the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary, the Khuddaka Commentary on the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga
Khuddakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Khuddaka Commentary is finished.
Pācittiyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Pācittiya Section is finished.
5. Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ (bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)
5. The Pāṭidesanīya Section (Commentary on the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga)
Pāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya Training Rules
Pāṭidesanīyā nāma, khuddakānaṃ anantarā;
The Pāṭidesanīyas are those immediately after the Khuddakas;
The eight rules that are established, a collection in brief;
This explanation proceeds for them, a commentary in brief.
1228.Yāni hi ettha pāḷiyaṃ sappitelādīni niddiṭṭhāni, tāniyeva viññāpetvā bhuñjantiyā pāṭidesanīyā. Pāḷivinimuttakesu pana sabbesu dukkaṭaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Aṭṭhavidhampi panetaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ catusamuṭṭhānaṃ – kāyato kāyavācato kāyacittato kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti, kiriyaṃ nosaññāvimokkhaṃ, acittakaṃ, paṇṇattivajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, ticittaṃ, tivedananti.
1228.Indeed, here in the Pali, the ones that are specified, beginning with sappitela, only for those, if she partakes having requested them, it is a pāṭidesanīya. However, in all those outside the Pali, it is a dukkaṭa. The rest here is self-explanatory. However, this entire eightfold pāṭidesanīya has a fourfold combination: it arises from body, from body and speech, from body and mind, and from body, speech, and mind; action, non-release from perception, unintentional, an offense by rule, bodily action, verbal action, threefold consciousness, threefold feeling.
Pāṭidesanīyavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Pāṭidesanīya is finished.
Pāṭidesanīyakaṇḍaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The Pāṭidesanīya Section is finished.
Sekhiyā pana uddiṭṭhā, ye dhammā pañcasattati;
However, the Sekhiyas have been recited, the seventy-five rules;
Immediately after them, are the seven Adhikaraṇas.
Mahāvibhaṅge yo vutto, tesaṃ atthavinicchayo;
The determination of meaning for those that are stated in the Mahāvibhanga;
Know that it is the same in the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga, just like that.
Yasmā tasmā visuṃ tesaṃ, dhammānaṃ atthavaṇṇanā;
Therefore, a separate explanation of meaning for those rules;
Has not been stated, what was stated there, that is stated here.
Samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya
In the Samantapāsādikā, the Vinaya Commentary,
Bhikkhunīvibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Bhikkhunī Vibhanga is finished.
Sabbāsavapahaṃ esā, niṭṭhitā vaṇṇanā yathā;
May this explanation, which eradicates all āsavas, be finished as it should be;
Having attained the path that eradicates all āsavas, may they see Nibbāna.
Ubhatovibhaṅgaṭṭhakathā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Ubhato Vibhanga is finished.